Author: Webmaster

  • First Communion, There Was a Time, Summer Questions, and Stars of Desire

    Cory Brown

    Ithaca College
    cbrown@ithaca.edu

    First Communion

     

    Another guest has departed and we are left
    with the backdrop of another day,
    left to carry out the remains of July.
    One or two days strung out before the clouds
    clear and we can begin to see the sun again
    in a new light; cicadas’ buzzes imminent,
    not yet salient to the ear, but expected enough
    for me to hear them in the mind. I raise
    my screen to get a better view of the lake,
    cornflowers and day lilies in the hazy,
    muggy afternoon–as if an unimpeded view
    of the outdoors could offer me
    something I hadn’t seen or heard before.
    All for the purpose of giving me
    that little extra umpf of inspiration
    like a good cup of strong Vienna-roast.
    And here I’ve come again to see if I can
    make that seminal commentary, that communal
    graft which both describes and sets the stage
    for what is to be described later,
    when hummingbirds and helicopter leaves
    are just an image from the past and yet
    a vision of what is to come. Like seeing
    the still lake from far away, such as where I am,
    and recognizing its resemblance to itself
    in the midst of a fierce, mid-winter freeze.
    I suppose I’m still making stabs
    at attaining that transcendent experience,
    ever since my first holy communion,
    a wafer-taste emerging on my tongue
    as I write, mixed now with a straight-forward
    mocha flavor, no cream no sugar, unadulterated
    adulteration, pure as can be. But that’s
    how we always start everything it seems,
    waiting and waiting until we can’t
    see another way out, a few confessions
    and blandishments along the way and then
    it’s all over. The baby wakes up, the phone
    rings, and what with the diaper and all.
    And before you know it the buzzing
    of reality has stopped and your eyelids
    are closing ever so slowly. A black spider
    crawls up one side of the door and then
    the other before it reaches the top,
    where it continues steadily along its path,
    rightside up for now, and you breathe
    a long pleasant sigh of relief in your sleep.

     


     

    Summer Questions

     

    Can I imagine a life without them?
    It is the anger I would miss.
    How wind can come upon you as you
    picture yourself in the fall,
    standing in the middle of an apple orchard
    with your hand outstretched for the
    last time of the day, and suddenly
    the entire summer’s complexion has changed.
    They are the incompletions, lying awake
    at night and picturing the purity
    of an imaginary planet’s skies. They are
    the lies that make up the thin tissue
    we think of as skin and July’s grass
    and purple loosestrife. They are evenings
    in early August, the sun’s last light
    stretching itself pink and reluctant
    over the orchard’s high straggling limbs.
    Trying to make it appear so natural.

     


     

    There Was a Time

     

    1.
    There was a time when what I wanted to say
    came to me unhesitantly, the ease
    not so much in how it was to be phrased
    or what words to use, but in the faith
    I had in the foundation of sayings.
    Like in a dry spell as a boy when I could
    stand at the bottom of what was a small pond
    and look down at all the cracks that marked
    where patches of earth the size of large
    sea turtles had separated but could be
    reunited in a nice common rain. The slightest
    smell of it in the air and I could imagine
    again the catfish scanning the silt,
    my hook down there being dragged around,
    drawing attention to itself as a squirming,
    nourishing morsel. But even the patches
    of earth themselves were refreshing
    in their own way, the way you could leap
    from one shell to the next, large as continents,
    and then pause and look up just in time
    to see a player piano-shaped cloud drop its
    tune trippingly from the sky, the beginning
    of a long, large-dropped, shirt-soaking shower.
    And you could imagine the continents
    growing soggy and you worrying about it
    raining for forty days and forty nights
    and how you were going to fit them all
    two by two in what it was you had no way
    of knowing how to build, let alone
    find the words to tell the others.

     

    2.
    Now, it’s as if the dandelion seeds
    flying in the air, sometimes it seems as fast
    as birds, could be the words themselves.
    As if being here watching the swallows
    weave between powerlines is a way of weaving
    between the lines myself. And to take
    ourselves back to the time before we sat
    down to muse about going back, or to muse
    by going back, would be a way of disingenuously
    seeing ourselves here, of being here,
    as if just being here isn’t enough.
    What I want to say now is in the margins,
    that place where the dandelion seeds in the air
    come from and disappear to, and where
    the goldfinch hides when it’s not within
    the view of my window. And it wouldn’t
    help to get a larger window, for discovery
    is what’s outside the aperture, which dislocates
    and misplaces. And discovery is, after all,
    the only setting worth sitting at, the placemat
    of the greatest meal–even if we do suspect
    when we sit down that there may be an old
    forgotten hook somewhere in one of the dishes,
    the baked sole perhaps, the lightly battered haddock,
    or the deep-fried catfish with its myriad
    meandering bones you have to always be on the lookout
    for with that curious dexterity of tongue
    and roof of the mouth, so you can never
    just relax and taste the taste. Little bones
    like hooks themselves waiting for you
    to swallow hook line and sinker if you are
    so inclined. That is, gullible enough to want
    it all: the dips and subtle hesitations
    of swallows skimming the treetops, as well as
    the slow movements in the darkness of ponds.

     


     

    Stars of Desire

     

    I would like to have written
    about the falling stars for you.
    How one after another streamed
    like tears down the face
    of the night sky,
    the sky shrouded here and there
    by thin clouds appearing from the West.
    And how those clouds would turn
    the night’s face inscrutable
    for a few passing moments,
    as if it were longing,
    or lost in thought.
    But we didn’t see them as we
    would have liked: clear as
    notes in a piano sonata
    tripping down the scale in trill
    or tremolo, or in multitudinous
    burstings like slow, silent fireworks.
    I had known it all along,
    before we sat down outside
    in chairs with our heads back
    in a sort of obverse position
    of homage and prayer. Had known it
    as we hummed old songs
    for our daughter in your lap,
    each of us imagining
    how it might be to be back
    in our mother’s arms–
    listening to a voice as familiar
    as our own pulling us down
    into deep sleep like stars falling
    into earth. That night
    you came to me in the smooth
    skin of a half-dream
    and convinced me in whispers
    that we had seen the stars
    as we had wished. That those flames
    were the source of these
    momentary passions, were ours.

     

  • A Response to Twelve Blue by Michael Joyce

    Greg Ulmer

    Department of English
    University of Florida
    gulmer@english.ufl.edu

     

    Michael Joyce is well known as a theorist, teacher, and creator of hypertext fiction. His most recent composition, authored in StorySpace for presentation on the World Wide Web, may be found at http://www.eastgate.com/TwelveBlue. Twelve Blue thus demonstrates the strengths (but also some of the limitations) of StorySpace as an authoring environment for the Web. Its great evocative power also shows off the craft of Joyce as a creative writer.

     

    The epigraph makes explicit the intertextual relationship between Joyce’s hypertext and On Being Blue by William Gass, a tour de force of poetic prose. I have long admired Gass’s meditative essay, for which Twelve Blue provides a narrative counterpart. Gass’s text demonstrates what I now call writing with the choral word (derived from a strategy often used by Jacques Derrida)–the inventio and dispositio are governed by the principle of blue (every possible usage) rather than by a thesis statement or a story (although the text both argues and narrates). I anticipated then that Joyce would continue this experiment, testing its applicability as a way to design a hypertext (and I was not disappointed). The introduction explains that the hypertext includes 269 links in 96 spaces. The reader is offered a definition that turns out to be a phrase from the work: “12 Blue isn’t anything. Think of lilacs when they are gone.” It so happens that I have never stopped thinking of the lilacs that grew in the backyard of my childhood home, the very scarcity of flowering bushes in Montana making their brief but fragrant appearance all the more impressive. I am hooked.

     

    The layout includes two frames–a narrow column on the left displaying a field of colored threads or yarn, spread horizontally from the top to the bottom of the frame. We are given to understand that these threads, mostly of a dark color except for one line of yellow, represent the StorySpace network. Indeed, each thread is a link to a document in the web; running the cursor over the frame shows the range of URLs available. Clicking on these threads moves the reader through the web in digital jumps. Since the URLs are numbered in sequence the reader might be tempted to move through the hypertext in a linear fashion by entering the document addresses in consecutive order. This effort will not produce a linear path, however, for the work is nonlinear in both conception and execution. The large righthand frame displays the prose segments printed in light blue on a dark blue background. Each cell offers at least one link within the prose, motivated this time by formal or aesthetic motifs derived from the attributes or properties of objects, places, events, persons.

     

    The effect of spending a couple of hours browsing Twelve Blue is the literary equivalent of seeing an interlaced gif assemble itself, passing from an unintelligible array of diffuse shapes into a fully coherent representation. This experience of initial disorientation and confusion that modernist fiction labored so hard to produce is more or less inherent in the nonlinear linking of hypertext. Some of John Cage’s experiments anticipate the potential of a different mode altogether of reading and writing, such as those in which he attempted to produce in prose the effect of working the tuners of numerous radios to pass in and out between noise and speech. Part of the craft of authoring in hypertext masterfully manifested in Twelve Blue is this gradual passage in and out of focus of the diegesis or imaginary space and time of the narrative world. As the reader moves through the cells of prose in a random order of selection, a recognizable world emerges–even a world of verisimilitude reflecting qualities of realist fiction (psychologically deep characters with complex inner lives)–but assembles itself fully only in the reader’s imagination.

     

    The style of the prose is mostly indirect, with the actions, thoughts, and speeches of characters being reported for the most part rather than dramatized. We meet a group of characters entangled in melodramatic domestic stories of sex, fatal accidents, and murder. We are not expected to identify with these characters, as we might do if we encountered them in their original soap operatic genres. We learn who they are, what their relationship is to one another, but, as one of the women explains to her illegitimate daughter, their stories only have beginnings, but no middles or endings. A number of the lives do end, but the point concerns the form of the work more than its themes: its non-Aristotelian quality.

     

    Twelve Blue is a brilliant probe of the direction in which on-line writing must inevitably evolve. The counterparting with Gass calls attention to the qualities of the hybrid writing that takes fullest advantage of the hyperlink effect. On Being Blue and Twelve Blue converge on a lyrical order from the sides respectively of the essay and the story. In the era of print, as Scholes and Kellogg long ago argued, prose writing was divided into two functions associated with two styles: the plain style of the essay was assigned the representation of fact, and the narrative story was assigned the expression of fiction. The making of patterns by means of association fell to lyric poetry, and was subordinated culturally to the report and the novel. Science, meanwhile, abolished style altogether to rely solely on experimental proof. These conventions have been dissolving throughout the new age of media. Long anticipated in the experimental arts, the technology to support a new arrangement among functions and styles is finally reaching the general public in the form of desktop interactive authoring. What remains to be invented (as I keep saying) is the practice that fully exploits the features of the new apparatus (electracy).

     

    In electracy (the practices that are to multimedia computing what literacy is to print) essayistic exposition and narrative story still exist, but they are incorporated into and subordinated under poetic patterning. Twelve Blue is an excellent example of this inversion of the literate hierarchy among the basic modes and styles, in that all the features of the diegetic world are put in service of the figurative creation of an atmosphere, a mood, a feeling, in the manner of a poem. The events, characters, places, and objects have their own interest, of course: incomplete in themselves, they accumulate into an evocation of something beyond themselves–an image, a figure. The various scenes and anecdotes converge around the experience of drowning. The beautiful, athletic wife of a prominent scientist, skin-diving off Malibu, becomes entangled in weeds and drowns. Her daughter, obsessively compelled to reenact the event, is said to have become a strong swimmer out of grief. A deaf boy drowns in a creek. The repetitions signal unmistakably that something more and unstated is motivating these events.

     

    These drownings described as events return as metaphors and analogies for the experience of the characters. A daughter tells her father, who is learning to date again, that women prefer men with a story–stories of blues songs and lost loves, or of shipwreck and drowning. Javier, the scientist, is a man figuratively drowning for having fallen in love too late in life. The assembling pattern triggers in the reader the realization that an allegory is in the making, or at least, in modernist style, an allegorical effect in which the microcosm and macrocosm come into correspondence but without grounding in any particular metaphysical system. The diegetic plane of events evokes parallel worlds at the level of the fluids of the body–especially the secretions and processes of sexual functioning–and the fluids of nature (water within and without, mediated by the human organism). The philosopher Voltaire used the image of a shipwrecked man who realizes that the ocean in which he swims has no shores, to convey the feeling of utter hopelessness. A similar mood is evoked in Twelve Blue.

     

    Roland Barthes’s theory of narrative offers a frame within which to appreciate the implications of Joyce’s example:

     

    The logic to which the narrative refers is nothing other than a logic of the already-read: the stereotype (proceeding from a culture many centuries old) is the veritable ground of the narrative world, built altogether on the traces which experience (much more bookish than practical) has left in the reader's memory and which constitutes it. Hence we can say that the perfect sequence, the one which affords the reader the strongest logical certainty, is the most cultural sequence, in which are immediately recognized a whole summa of readings and conversations. (144)

     

    Twelve Blue shows how the stereotypes of melodrama may become an asset rather than a liability; Joyce relies on the predictability of all that he leaves unsaid in order to elaborate more fully the background details that conventional narrative confines to the function of furthering the action or expanding the character.

     

    The act of reading Twelve Blue then is organized less by the enigma of action or the revelations of character and more by the gradual formation of an image. The readers become their own “Henry James,” receiving from the hypertext the germ of a story, in the manner James described as his creative process in The Spoils of Poynton. Dining with some friends, James heard a fragment of an anecdote during the conversation, something to do with “a good lady in the north, always well looked on, who was at daggers drawn with her only son, ever hitherto exemplary, over the ownership of the valuable furniture of a fine old house just accruing to the young man by his father’s death” (121). The reader of Twelve Blue overhears a number of such germs or seeds; even a garden plot salted with them.

     

    These “germs” of stories James welcomed as “precious particles”:

     

    Such is the interesting truth about the stray suggestion, the wandering word, the vague echo, at touch of which the novelist's imagination winces as at the prick of some sharp point; its virtue is all in its needle-like quality, the power to penetrate as finely as possible. (119)

     

    The needle point might be reduced to one word: blue. James of course developed these germs into what for me now (having paid my dues in graduate school) are unreadable novels, as archaic from the point of view of electracy as Homer was from the point of view of literacy. Joyce, judging the nature of digital art, leaves the narrative seeds largely in their concentrated state. The image James used to convey the effect of hearing such partial situations extracted from reality (reported in the press or distilled from local gossip) may be recognized as the same one Barthes used to name the effect of “third meanings”–the punctum created by the details noticed in photographs that makes them unforgettable. The punctum is to electracy what the eidos is to literacy. If literate thinking organized itself around recognizable shapes or forms that evolved into conceptual classification systems, electrate thinking is coming into existence around felt moods or atmospheres.

     

    The reason for emphasizing this effect in Joyce’s prose may have more to do with my concerns than his, but it is why I consider his work to be exemplary. Reading Joyce in the context of contemporary theory and media, not to mention the context of the World Wide Web, calls attention to the challenge confronting those of us working on the invention of electracy (the practices of both specialized and quotidian reading and writing for a society becoming committed to interactive multimedia), among whom I count Michael Joyce. Information in an electrate civilization is organized fundamentally in the mode of the image: enigma and enthymeme both are now at the service of the figurative. Again it is Barthes who provides an account of how the image functions. In image culture predominance is given to the semic code, organizing the attributes associated with the props and setting that constitute the environment within which the characters perform their actions. The semes, properties, or indices accumulate to create a certain atmosphere or mood. “The signifiers of the object are of course material units, like all the signifiers of any system of signs, i.e., colors, shapes, attributes, accessories” (The Semiotic Challenge 185). In narrative and argument these semes are subordinated to the purposes of proof or story, but in image discourse made possible by photography (the way the conceptual discourse was made possible by the alphabetic recording of sound), they emerge to function autonomously. Patterns of similarity, contiguity, and other aesthetic matches organize the inference path, the logic of hypermedia.

     

    The cumulative effect created by the semes of Twelve Blue is this aesthetic experience of drowning, accompanied by the strong awareness that this image of drowning in its totality is the signifier for some unstated, abstract, perhaps inarticulable signification. Such is the effect a literate person expects from poetry or poetic prose. But what about in electracy? As W. J. T. Mitchell explains in Picture Theory, our moment has absorbed the linguistic turn of modern epistemology, to move now into a pictorial turn. The challenge he poses is that of learning how to think text and picture together, not only as image, a term ambiguous enough to include both pictures and words, but as a hybrid or syncretic practice in which the graphic dimension is liberated from domination by the textual. Barthes himself, one of the great theorists of the linguistic turn, assumed that language mediated the systematicity of every other code. But this assumption may have had more to do with the apparatus of literacy than with any limitation inherent in the pictorial. Indeed, late in his career, in his writings about photography and music, Barthes himself took the pictorial turn. The point is that an electrate practice will use the atmosphere of drowning (or any other atmosphere selected by a user) as a way to classify a great quantity of other kinds of information.

     

    The challenge to the disciplines of Arts and Letters is to invent or design the practice of this syncretic writing. Teachers at many universities and colleges are introducing general education students to writing now in environments that require as much attention to graphic tools as to textual ones. Unfortunately, the limitations of StorySpace (in the examples I have seen) as an authoring tool and Twelve Blue as a model are apparent in relation to this new situation. The basic reality of the pictorial turn is that the site of invention of the next stage in the evolution of writing is taking place within the institution of entertainment, in the form of advertising. The discourse emerging within advertising, whose operating structure has been analyzed and refined within the experimental arts, may be applied to the needs of the other institutions of society, especially including education. Unfortunately the media literacy movement still formulates this moment almost exclusively in terms of literacy, wanting to make citizens more critical of what they consume in the media. This approach could be compared to that of warning students learning a foreign language to be sure to translate it always back into their native language in order to avoid experiencing those mental states different from what is familiar. The movement instead should promote the making of imagetexts in the schools, including learning the basic skills of photography and punning. Mitchell’s point that schools exclude (or enslave) the visual or pictorial could be expanded to note that they also exclude a complete dimension of language that the theorists call the remainder. Schools need to add to their function the forming of electrate citizens.

     

    In short, I am not interested in hypertext fiction as such (no matter how much I might enjoy it) because I need models or relays that show me how to include pictures and nonfiction. O. B. Hardison’s description of an on-line version of The Tempest summarizes the sort of bricolage that comes naturally to hypermedia:

     

    There would certainly be discussion of the date of The Tempest, relating its theme to the beginning of English colonization of the New World. The texts of two narratives of the shipwreck of a boat called the Sea Adventure in 1609 in Bermuda and the letter by William Strachey describing the shipwreck should also be available because one or more of them was a source for the play. A map of the New World showing where the Sea Adventure was wrecked would be useful. Another source that should be included is the essay "Of Cannibals," by Michel de Montaigne, in the English translation published by John Florio in 1603....Magic is important in Tempest, and there is an elaborate masque featuring classical deities. Hypertext should include an explanation of the Renaissance idea of magic, including the distinction between white and black magic, and an explanation of what a masque is....If you imagine a reader using hypertext, you have to imagine a constant movement from text to glossary to grammatical comment to classical dictionary to Bermuda map to textual variants to drawing of Ariel to text to Sea Adventure narrative... (263)

     

    Hardison laments the effect on the experience of reading of the process he describes, and it may be the case that the representation of Shakespeare in hypertext does as much damage to the original experience of theater as the printing of The Iliad did to the singing of the epics. My concern is with the rhetoric, logic, and poetics needed to guide the composition of new works specific to electracy that such tools make possible. The present condition of hypermedia that Hardison, Coover, and others describe is indeed a state of chaos in which the complex organizing forms and practices created to manage the print apparatus have fallen apart into a mass of simple or basic forms–some oral, some literate, some specific to electronic technology. On the internet all these different parts are piled together in a blizzard of clickable items. The division into truth-exposition and fiction-narrative that emerged in literacy with the invention of the essay and the novel is not particularly helpful in this new environment that is perhaps best named by the theoretical term simulacrum. To try to sort out the true from the false prior to acting in a world in which superstructure is base (in which the distance intrinsic to representation has collapsed upon itself) is a luxury of the old rhetoric, a luxury denied to the rhetoric of electracy. Michael Joyce takes me some way toward understanding electracy, and for that I am grateful, beyond my admiration for what he has achieved in his own terms (rather than mine). The invention process we inherited from the creators of literacy must be taken up again in the apparatus of our time. There remains plenty of work to be done.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Barthes, Roland. The Semiotic Challenge. Trans. Richard Howard. New York: Hill and Wang, 1988.
    • Gass, William. On Being Blue: A Philosophical Inquiry. Boston: David Godine, 1976.
    • Hardison, O.B., Jr. Disappearing Through the Skylight. New York: Penguin, 1989.
    • James, Henry. The Art of the Novel. New York: C. Scribner’s Sons, 1962.
    • Joyce, Michael. Twelve Blue. http://www.eastgate.com/TwelveBlue.

     

  • Reality for Cybernauts

    Sergio Sismondo

    Department of Philosophy
    Queen’s University
    sismondo@post.queensu.ca

     

    Introduction: virtual reality as a metaphysical laboratory

     
    Virtual reality (VR) is a wonderfully successful misnomer. To the extent that VR is reality, there is little virtual about it.

     

    I should qualify those claims right away: virtual reality is virtual in the derivative sense in which “virtual” has come to be a synonym for computer-based, but that sense is a result rather than a precondition of VR’s cultural success. VR has provided a path from an old meaning of “virtual” to a new one. The old meaning, what we could call virtual(1), is: in effect, but not actual. The meaning that is new to the last decades of the 20th century is virtual(2): simulated on or mediated by a computer.

     

    Many cybernauts have realized that VR is not merely virtually(1) real–an oxymoron?–and therefore are arguing that it is virtual(2) reality, real but computer-based. In so doing they have not merely added a new meaning to the term “virtual,” but have revamped talk of reality. At a time when skeptical humanists and others are more and more cautious about reality, VR enthusiasts are giving new life to words like “real” and “reality,” using them constantly, and with a variety of meanings. The best VR is described as “really real” and is contrasted with “real reality,” yet neither phrase fully makes sense without at least some confusion about meanings of “real.” At the same time, some cyberphiles and cybercritics have been proclaiming the death of reality. If we could create environments that have the look and feel that we expect from everyday reality, what is left of the “real” thing? Why should we care about it?

     

    Michael Heim says that “with its virtual environments and simulated worlds, cyberspace is a metaphysical laboratory, a tool for examining our very sense of reality” (83). Heim may be right that cyberspace–or in my case VR–is a metaphysical laboratory, but his laboratory is largely unbuilt. Currently-available VR, for example, is more crude as a metaphysical laboratory than are our imaginations, literature, and thought experiments. For my purposes the limitations of existing VR are unimportant: my intention here is, following Heim, to use VR to examine “our very sense of reality,” but in that I want to look at our use of the term “reality” and the presuppositions of that use. Along the way I take issue with some of the wilder claims about VR’s effects on reality.

     

    Although there is no one consistent picture of reality implicit in talk about VR, there are at least some common images. Some of those images are exactly what are needed to revamp talk of reality, and some are misguided. Some VR talk, for example, reinforces an impoverished sense of reality in its dominating images of levels and degrees; my preferred images are more chaotic and multi-dimensional. In order to show why we should prefer some images of reality, in the second half of this essay I put forward a general account of reality talk. That account makes space for (though does not guarantee) the reality of VR, and much more besides.

     

    For my project here we do not have to be full-fledged cybernauts. That is a good thing, because this essay is written by yet another interloper into VR. I haven’t made the tours of labs where systems like RB2 (“Reality Built for Two”) or gadgets like the DataGlove have been developed. I spend little of my time browsing Mondo 2000, and have tested out only the most publicly available virtual environments, computer games like “Doom,” and high-tech video games like “Dactyl Nightmare.” Donning the latter’s 3-D video helmet and battling its schematic pterodactyls even put me off-balance and made me slightly nauseous. All of that should place me as a text-based critic whose access to VR and cyberculture is largely through the guidance of texts. Therefore my text displays many signs of my interloper status, in the form of references to the canonizers and the canonized agents of the history of VR.

     

    The virtualization of reality?

     

    Our point is thus a very elementary one: true, the computer-generated "virtual reality" is a semblance, it does foreclose the Real; but what we experience as the "true, hard, external reality" is based upon exactly the same exclusion. The ultimate lesson of "virtual reality" is the virtualization of the very "true" reality: by the mirage of "virtual reality," the "true" reality itself is posited as a semblance of itself, as a pure symbolic edifice. (Zizek 44)

     

    For some cybernauts (and their critics) VR promises (or threatens) to limit or even eliminate the claims of the material to its status as reality. At Britain’s first VR conference in 1991, as Benjamin Woolley describes it, speakers such as chair Tony Feldman repeatedly claimed that because of the power of technology to simulate and otherwise artificialize objects, “reality is no longer secure, no longer something we can simply assume to be there” (5).

     

    At their simplest, such arguments have been around since people first asked whether they could be dreaming reality. Descartes’ almost paranoid musings, reconstituted as Meditations, are probably the best known sustained questioning of our evidence for the reality of our everyday world. Descartes asked, could he be dreaming it all? Or, since we all know how to tell the difference between waking and dreaming, could a powerful Deceiver be systematically and consistently creating our experiences, convincing us of the reality of a completely fictional material world? We know the results of Descartes’ questions: although he made valiant efforts to prove the reality of the world around him, most of his readers have been unconvinced. His efforts to vanquish skepticism reinforced it by demonstrating its resilience. Of course while it has been resilient, universal skepticism has rarely had much force. This is not merely because of our naive ordinary faith in the material world: pragmatists have argued that doubts such as might lead to a Cartesian Deceiver themselves require some justification. It might simply be unreasonable to follow Descartes in doubting everything, even if only for a few minutes.

     

    For some of its enthusiasts, VR provides grounds for such a doubt. In the passage above, Slavoj Zizek appears to be taken by a new, or future, capacity to question the reality of non-virtual reality. VR will provide the skeptic’s reinstatement of the Cartesian Deceiver by creating sensations indistinguishable from ordinary, everyday sensations. What we call “real” will become simply one world to live in among many, and a relatively conservative and unimaginative one at that. Timothy Druckrey claims, reading these lines of Zizek, that “what is so fascinating about the issues of immersion and virtual reality is the way in which it substantiates the problem of representation itself” (8).

     

    It is hard to be too impressed by such sophomoric skepticism, even if it is widespread. It is little more than an advertisement for VR technologies and VR as a cultural icon, or, for those who are uncomfortable with the disappearance of a hard “reality,” an anti-advertisement: consider Mark Slouka’s recent War of the Worlds: Cyberspace and the High-Tech Assault on Reality. Certainly commentators like Druckrey and Zizek are not talking about available technologies–the simulators found in corners of the post-industrial world–because those are little more than poor 3-D video games, expensive but crude, and are less capable of sustaining one’s attention than most 2-D video games of a decade ago.

     

    I will return to the question of whether VR will ever be able to deceive its participants completely; however, my main point is not to express pessimism about technologies. Rather, I’m interested in examining our sense of reality. Any thought that VR will be the twenty-first century Deceiver, providing grounds for a universalized skepticism, appears to take reality as the object of possible sensory experiences. Most of the major problems that VR researchers are working on have to do with visual and tactile realism: they are working to create better video displays, faster calculations that will lead to faster responses to users’ actions, and improvements and extensions of the DataGlove that will allow users to feel more of their virtual environment. In this way VR is following in the footsteps of the Cartesian Deceiver–and begins to provide the grounds for a universalized skepticism–because what it aims to deceive us about is material reality, our paradigmatic reality.

     

    VR’s model reality

     

    True virtual reality may not be attainable with any technology we create. (Zeltzer, qtd. in Heim 123)

     

    David Zeltzer, of the MIT Media Lab, doesn’t like to use the term “virtual reality” to refer to his creations, preferring instead “virtual worlds” and “virtual environments.” This stems less from uneasiness with the term “reality” than from an uneasiness about his tools. “The Holodeck [a Star Trek VR system] may forever remain fiction. Nonetheless, virtual reality serves as the Holy Grail of the research” (Zeltzer, qtd. in Heim 123). We may never be able to re-create the full experience of working with and in the material world using computers, video, speakers, data suits, etc. Unlike some VR enthusiasts, Zeltzer recognizes the richness of ordinary sense experiences, and the difficulties with the technology in reproducing this richness.

     

    More importantly for my purposes, Zeltzer makes explicit the goals, even if unattainable, for VR: the technology is supposed to recreate the type of experiences we have of the material world. VR is therefore a virtual material reality, a computerized simulation of mountains, trees, buildings, bodies, and flies. VR aims to create human-centered spaces which users can explore, containing objects to manipulate. These spaces are wrapped around users and adjust to their efforts at motion, so that they always remain at centers or origins. VR is a simulation that takes as its starting point the everyday space that we experience ourselves moving in, and our everyday world of moderately small to moderately large material objects. This is probably so obvious a starting point that it is important to point out some alternatives, such very real things as institutions, ideas, and cultures, none of which is neatly bounded in 3-D space. Some of these things are being re-created in cyberspace more generally, but are not the focus of virtual reality. For the purposes of VR, reality is paradigmatically a spatial and material system.

     

    At this point I want to mark a difference between cyberspace and virtual reality. Cyberspace, as used in, for example, Michael Benedikt’s Cyberspace: First Steps, is the more inclusive category, a label for any computer-generated or computer-mediated environment that is accessible by multiple users, including environments that are in no way imitations of material realities. In fact, many of the contributors to Benedikt’s volume are explicitly attempting to describe novel architectures for such spaces. Some of their work is fascinating for its sophisticated interdisciplinarity, combining readings of science fiction, mathematics, psychology, data management, and architecture. For my purposes it is interesting that these authors generally avoid the term “virtual reality,” suggesting that they recognize constraints and limitations of “realities” that can be more easily evaded by “spaces.”

     

    Reality as a singular closed system

     

    Quadriplegics live, virtually, through the actions of others. Perhaps, life would be more fulfilling if they were also offered the opportunity to directly control their environment through telerobotic tools for independent living. Virtual telerobotic environments for the rest of us could bring reality to these individuals.


    (Leifer et al., qtd. in Rheingold 264)


    When VR becomes widely available, it will not be seen as a medium used within physical reality, but rather as an additional reality. VR opens up a new continent of ideas and possibilities.

     

    (VPL Research product brochure, qtd. in Pimentel & Teixeira 53)

     

    It is an apolitical fantasy of escape. Historical accounts of virtual reality tell us that one of the initial project's slogans was "Reality isn't enough anymore," but psychoanalytic accounts would more likely tell us that the slogan should be read in its inverse form--that is, "Reality is too much right now."

     

    (Sobchack 20)

     

    Whether reality is too much or not enough, most VR enthusiasts and their critics agree in taking the reality/irreality boundary to be a relatively sharp one–even while they are trying to blur it or are claiming that the technology will change that distinction fundamentally. And thus they agree in their image of reality as a closed system and neat package, much like the systems that are being built. The VR designing firm VPL Research is creating not parts of the world or new views of the world, but worlds themselves, alternatives to the world we know as real. Non-virtual reality is singular in the past and present; it is the three-dimensional space that we live in and will continue to live in until VR creates new spaces. The creation of new spaces, though, introduces questions about the geometry of reality.

     

    Consider, for example, the following statements, all taken from Howard Rheingold’s Virtual Reality: “The reality level is rising by the month” (214); “How much reality do you get for all that money?” (166); “Reality has always been too small for human imagination” (Laurel, qtd. in Rheingold 391); “a new plane of reality that will thrill everybody” (Lanier, qtd. in Rheingold 155); “A laser microscanner will paint realities directly on the retina” (Furness, qtd. in Rheingold 194). VR enthusiasts are united in believing that new technologies will increase the quantity of reality available, but they do not agree on how that increase will be measured. Will we be able to buy reality, as if by the kilo or the yard? Will we be enlarging it? Or adding new planes to it? Or creating new realities, plural? Their disagreement stems from the fact that we don’t know much about the current geometry of reality and realities, conceived of as objects, stuff, or measurable quantities. Perhaps “worlds” share the geometry of realities; importantly, we often use “world” in much the same way as we use “reality.” The idea that reality comes in planes, for example, may be descended from a medieval picture of layered worlds, from ours down to Hell and up to Heaven; each has its own rules, logic and inhabitants, though individuals also move or are moved among worlds depending upon their powers and virtues. If a reality is a world, this gives us both the sense of space and the sense of substance.

     

    Reality is an odd substance, though it shouldn’t be surprising that VR researchers can think of it as one. According to the self-image and hype of the VR community, researchers are not merely in the business of creating 3-D video games or creating simulations of environments, but are creating real worlds to work in, play in, and explore. VR researchers are trying to make reality or realities, and to make something is to make some thing. But even though the common perception has it that reality is a singular closed system, and the VR community treats reality as a substance to be manufactured, we don’t know whether it is best pictured in planes, as more amorphous stuff, or as an indivisible unit. A good account of reality should develop and make sense of as many of these metaphors as possible, to allow us to understand how reality is planar, or how the reality level of VR is rising.

     

    The body as foundation and target of VR

     

    With virtual realities upon us, we may find it increasingly difficult to distinguish between our "natural" selves and the electronic extensions.


    (de Kerckhove 177)
    I think one of the striking things about a virtual world system in which you have the pliancy, the ability to change the content of the world easily, is that the distinction between your own body and the rest of the world is slippery.


    (Lanier & Biocca, qtd. in de Kerckhove 203)

     

    VRs are ideally tactile environments, full of sensual experiences. More centrally, the technology makes use of body knowledge, our ability to respond physically to situations, to communicate using more than our vocal chords or the tips of our fingers. VR treats us as fully embodied creatures and then stimulates and trains our bodies in ways that are appropriate to the virtual environment. Until now the most convincing of virtual environments have been the US military’s flight simulators; they place the pilot-in-training in an artificial cockpit, complete with visual displays that respond with subtlety to physical commands. Other activities that involve high levels of risk, skill, and money–medicine is an obvious domain–will probably be similarly simulated over the coming decades. And one other prominent attempt to produce and use body knowledge is the simulation, using VR techniques, of the tinker-toy models chemists use to gain insight into the structure and properties of molecules. VR revalidates, in a high-tech setting, body knowledge, and thus takes us away from a logocentric mode, away from some of our modern ideals of rational control and communication.

     

    Yet cyberculture is the culmination of those same modern ideals in its recognition and attempted erasure of the limitations of bodies. Dominant metaphors make bodies soft and weak compared to silicon-based entities. William Gibson’s futuristic characters are exemplary in this, displaying cybernauts’ contempt for flesh, or “meat,” as it is often called. (I should clarify, however, that Gibson’s “Matrix” is not a VR, even though it has some cultural continuity with VR.) Gibson’s best bodies are largely artificial, enhanced through muscle implants and rigorous physical training; Molly, of Neuromancer and Mona Lisa Overdrive fame, is the favorite, a feminine cyborg for hire, complete with rewired nerves that speed up reaction times and razor-sharp retractable claws that slice through too-slow meat. Gibson’s other freaks abandon their bodies, sometimes for long trips on the net, and other times for good. Molly’s counterpart Case also has a tight, wired body, but because of the neglect that comes from too much drugs and too many hours exploring the Matrix. Lise of Gibson’s short story “The Winter Market” is a down-and-out mindscape artist held together and dragged through life by a polycarbon prosthetic. When she makes it big she can afford to abandon the prosthetic and what is left of her body in favor of a fully electronic simulation of herself. This is not a fascination peculiar to Gibson. In the 1992 film The Lawnmower Man the central character abandons his body for an electronic life. Among cyberspace residents he is an oddity, because he abandons an exemplary body, flawed only in its materiality. Abandoning the body, or at least the flawed bodies we are saddled with, is an ideal built into VR. Meat holds cybernauts back, limiting their informational excursions. The virtualization of the body, then, is a goal in part because the body represents an unfortunate link to a material reality that “isn’t enough anymore.” Virtualizing the body is a special case of the virtualization of reality as a whole.

     

    Margaret Morse’s fascinating paper “What do Cyborgs Eat?” points out that the construction of the cyborg body represents an accommodation of the human to the machine (see also Stone). This accommodation leaks from the pages of cyberpunk novels into everyday culture in the form of an anorexic ethic of not eating. For cyborgs the smart drug–“a kind of lubricant or ‘tune-up’ for wetware” (Morse 161)–or some other goal-specific nourishment replaces food, because human-machine interactions demand a machine-like performance from mind and body. Although Morse’s call for reversing this human-machine relationship suggests a nostalgia for human autonomy, it is rooted in a realization that meat-based systems are not infinitely flexible, that cyborgs need to eat. This is an important limitation of VRs: as long as they are realities designed for humans, they are limited by the needs of our soft bodies. Overcoming these limitations is central to cybernautic fantasies, but before VR can serve as a surrogate Deceiver it will have to deceive the body. Technicians will have to answer Morse’s question, “What do cyborgs eat?,” to allow users to live in VR and not just to visit it. Just as we know the difference between dreams and waking experiences, because we dip in and out of dreamworlds, we are likely to know the difference between VR and less artificial experiences until we no longer have to dip in and out of VR. Fooling the body is perhaps just the hardest case of a more general problem of robustness: it is unlikely that VR technologies in the foreseeable future will deceive us in their realism, and therefore David Zeltzer is almost certainly right that Zizek’s Virtual Deceiver is a Holy Grail, an unreachable goal.

     

    Simulations and artificial realities

     

    Zizek’s observation that VR virtualizes reality is more complicated than Druckrey or I (in paragraphs 7-10 above) gave him credit for. He carefully distinguishes between the “Real” and “reality”: whereas the “Real” is the hard kernel that we must posit as resisting metaphorization, “reality” refers to our experiences. And our experiences, following Lacan, are framed by our fantasies. Zizek is modifying and extending the idea that categories are prior to experiences, where the relevant categories are many, varied, and pliable. In particular, he takes sex as paradigmatic reality and “sex” as a paradigmatic category. Our experience of sex with a flesh-and-blood partner, he claims, is experienced as sex to the extent that it matches our fantasies, sex with imagined partners. Rather than being a poor copy of real sex, masturbation is the model of which sex is the copy. If we take sex as paradigmatic, then our experience of the “true, hard, external reality” can only be based on virtualizations of that reality. Zizek is not claiming, then, that VR will conform itself to experiences so closely as to provide a new Deceiver, but that VR will produce new types of experiences of non-virtual realities. In this respect VR will be like many other aggressive technologies and media, especially film, Zizek’s main focus.

     

    Of course sex is an odd choice for paradigmatic reality, being more obviously responsive to our fantasies than most other things we take to be real. But the argument does not depend in any important way on that choice: a more cautious version of Zizek’s argument could accept our standard paradigms, the material world and its objects. Experiences of some virtual reality might still tend to produce new types of experiences of the paradigm. After long sessions of playing a computer video game, my driving–in my true, hard, external car–changes, and in ways that are easy to detect. I am more inclined to pose challenges, to take advantage of openings in the road. This is one small way in which the artificial changes the boundaries of the real.

     

    Myron Krueger raises a similar point:

     

    But what of a world in which every action is rehearsed in simulation before it is taken, as was the case for pilots during the Gulf war? Will real action lose its immediacy when it is but a recapitulation of simulated activity? (Heim ix)

     

    Krueger’s concern about immediacy is a concern about those boundaries. If we try to make our experiences of “true reality” mimic our experiences of simulated reality, as the US military attempted in the Gulf War, then we may be giving up some of the immediacy of those experiences of “true reality.” In the case of the Gulf War, a lack of immediacy was exactly the object, helping to distance the participants from the objects of their attacks; this may be, as Paul Virilio would suggest, only the most recent and most successful use of representional technologies to mediate and contain experiences of battle (50). As experiences lose their immediacy, whatwe experience loses some of its status as reality–reality seems less real.

     

    Simulations and authenticity

     

    [S]imulation threatens the difference between the "true" and the "false," the "real" and the "imaginary." (Baudrillard, Simulacra 3)

     

    Virtual reality is a simulation of space and objects in space, but, as Jean Baudrillard has pointed out, simulations are odd entities. Whereas a representation, at least since the demise of the picture theory of language, need not resemble the objects or relations it represents: at its core a representation is a coded description, expression, or portrayal; a simulation, by contrast, re-creates some of the characteristics of that which it simulates, even while it is a copy or fake. For this reason simulation threatens the difference between the real and the irreal.

     

    Like Zizek, Baudrillard starts from an interesting and complex set of examples to make his point vivid: religious icons, Disneyland, ethnology protecting the isolation of a society, and illnesses, particularly mental illnesses. “Whoever fakes an illness can simply stay in bed and make everyone believe he is ill. Whoever simulates an illness produces in himself some of the symptoms” (Littré, qtd in Baudrillard, Simulacra 3). Simulations are fakes, but they are fakes made by appropriating qualities of the real. They are thus themselves real–though Baudrillard prefers to say that they are “hyperreal” because he conceives reality in terms of depth, stasis and authenticity. The reality of simulations is a second way in which VR enthusiasts are right in their claims that VR is changing the boundaries of the real. To the extent that VR has qualities of reality it can become a reality.

     

    Just before the beginning of the 1991 Gulf War, Baudrillard wrote a now almost infamous article insisting that the war in the Gulf would not occur (“La guerre du Golfe n’aura pas lieu,” published in the Manchester Guardian as “The Reality Gulf”). In part this insistence reflected his firm belief in deterrence, and in part it reflected his belief that coming out of the standoff there were only many-layered images of war, images which bore no resemblance to actual wars, though they did resemble some Hollywood films. For Baudrillard Saddam Hussein was, through his use of hostages, engaged in a simulation of war. As if to insist that his first article not be read as a simple mistake, during and after the war he wrote and published two more installments–the three were later published together under the title, “La guerre du Golfe n’a pas eu lieu.” Despite the soldiers, the bombs, the deaths, Baudrillard insists that what happened was not a war, but rather a simulation of a war, or a hyperreal war. Unlike past wars, fought primarily for territory or political control, the Gulf War was fought primarily for the sake of images. A war for the sake of images, Baudrillard claims, is not authentic, but a simulacrum.

     

    For Baudrillard, like many others, reality has to be in some way authentic or natural. It is arguable, though, that his concern with authenticity is dated, at least for those of us who have always lived in artificial surroundings. His concern that reality has disappeared depends upon a nostalgic view of reality as profound. Because much of our environment, from the Simpsons to supermarkets, has no pretension to naturalness or authenticity–and we recognize this in part because of the work of commentators like Baudrillard–these criteria can now be disengaged from reality. If we live among simulacra, images which do not pretend to refer, then so be it: reality has ceased to be necessarily authentic. All that is added in calling these simulacra “hyperreal” is attention to their artificiality, the deliberateness of their invention. A modern supermarket is a crafted environment that bears no resemblance to the markets which were its ancestors. A successful television show refers to itself, its counterparts, and its immediate ancestors, not to some external reality. External reality refers to it.

     

    A Platonic critic

     

    Reality is still there, though not in the material realm of the physical universe where the modern era assumed it to be. In my attempt to distinguish between simulation and imitation, the virtual and the artificial, I have tried to provide a glimpse of where that reality may be, in the formal, abstract domain revealed by mathematics and computation. [T]he computer has, through its simulative powers, provided what I regard as reassuring evidence that it is still there. (Woolley 254)

     

    Benjamin Woolley is unimpressed by VR and unimpressed by arguments for the disappearance of reality. In his Virtual Worlds he presents us with a litany of sexy new technologies, mathematical and scientific theories, and postmodernist arguments, though his message is consistently anti-euphoric: as the subtitle to the book advertises, his exploration is a Journey in Hype and Hyperreality. Whereas VR enthusiasts tend to see the technology as breaking new frontiers and re-arranging consciousness, Woolley prefers to draw attention to VR’s more mundane roots in flight simulators. He points to the failures of artificial intelligence research to live up to early promises; he wonders why we should care about chaos theory, why we should have cared about catastrophe theory during its heyday; he argues that the Internet is only the latest network; and he insists that Baudrillard’s Gulf War that did not take place most definitely took place, even if it was shaped by the demands of computers, other high-tech devices, and audiences expecting a Hollywood war.

     

    Woolley is still fascinated by these over-hyped postmodern cultural developments, even if he wants to expose the modernity at their cores. While he doesn’t accept Baudrillard’s conclusions, he is bothered by the same developments that Baudrillard celebrates, in part because the two critics share an image of reality. The material world is becoming increasingly artificial and inauthentic; it imitates–though rarely lives up to–our ideals. And these changes are disturbing not just because of the type of change they are, but because they highlight the instability of the material world. Artificiality and instability are both symptoms of irreality, because for Woolley that which is most real is natural and enduring, not artificial and fleeting.

     

    Umberto Eco, who was disappointed with the real Mississippi, claims that “Disneyland [with its riverboats] tells us that technology can give us more reality than nature can” (44). Woolley is similarly disappointed with his real Mississippis, but doesn’t find their improvement in technology, at least not directly. Rather he looks to mathematical physics and its kin for an authentic world, because mathematical physics is the most revered of sciences, and science is the attempt to uncover reality. The physicists’ world, a world of mathematized laws and snapshots, apparently satisfies Woolley’s requirements of reality, because it is objective, natural and enduring–Woolley would not be too happy with recent discussions in the field of Science & Technology studies (see Sismondo). The physicists’ world is objective both in the sense that it is (assumed to be) external to us, discovered rather than invented, and in the sense that science is our best example of objective knowledge. If the book of nature is written in the language of mathematics, then the physicists’ world is as natural as is possible. And it is enduring because even when laws describe change they are always structural, always identifying what remains the same through time, or through some other variable.

     

    For Woolley, computer simulations spread artificiality, but they also reinforce his position. Along with physics the simulation power of computers tells us that the book of nature is written in mathematics, because simulations are done mathematically: the more that can be simulated the more nature is shown to roughly instantiate a Platonic reality. Woolley’s reality is Platonic because it is an abstraction away from the world as we experience it, an ideal description of the forms and structures that lie behind or underneath our experience. He would be uncomfortable, though, with the Platonic notion that ours is only an imperfect copy of a more real world of forms, because he thinks that that ideal reality is found embedded in the natural world.

     

    This version of reality is quite austere, limited to the structures of the natural world that can be described mathematically. Austerity is a calculated impoverishment, though like most austerity programs Woolley’s follows some traditional paths. As I’ve claimed, the attention of VR enthusiasts and their critics is on the material world, rather than the social world: even though interaction is a goal of VR, the real world of institutions is usually forgotten, or even deliberately excluded. Partly because of that exclusion commentators such as Woolley and Baudrillard see reality as static–this is not to say that material reality is static, but it is often conceived in terms of what remains invariant.

     

    “Real” deflated

     

    I want to take a closer look at this little word "real." I propose, if you like, to discuss the Nature of Reality--a genuinely important topic, though in general I don't much like making this claim. (Austin 62)

     

    Talk of and around VR, then, provides us with a number of characteristics of reality. One option is to dismiss this mess as the product of overzealous enthusiasts and critics, and to retreat to a reductive and monovalent account of reality, such as a materialist account or Woolley’s physicalist one. I think that that is the wrong option to take. Even putting VR aside, reality is too multifaceted, or there are too many types of realities, to be shoehorned into a reductive account. Instead, in the rest of this essay I reorganize and unify characteristics of realities in a flexible deflationary account. I want to understand reality in terms that recognize the insights and temptations of different cybernauts’ images of reality, even those that I criticize, like Baudrillard’s authenticity criterion. My account is deflationary in the sense that it flatly denies an ultimate reality, though not so deflationary as to deny characteristics that realities might have.

     

    A currently fashionable, though not popular, account of what is real in philosophical circles stems from J.L. Austin’s simple and elegant analysis of our concept of “real” in his Sense and Sensibilia (1962). Writing before the language-expanding days of the 1960s, Austin could easily argue that “real” gets its meaning from its use as an adjective: it only makes grammatical sense if it modifies an explicit or implicit object. You might have a real Roy Liechtenstein painting or a fake one, or an imitation or print. You could have seen a real Peregrine Falcon, or have been mistaken, having seen a Pigeon Hawk from a distance. Or I, arriving in the middle of your story, might think that you are talking about a real Peregrine, while you are talking about a striking film of one, or a dreamt one. What is important here is that “real” draws a contrast to one or another form of unreality. A real X is nothing more than an X, though in saying that it is a real X we emphasize that it isn’t merely something that looks like or feels like an X, something that could be confused for or used as if it were an X. Thus Austin could claim that the negative of “real”–the different forms of being unreal–shapes the usage of the positive, not the other way around. What is real depends upon the illusions or artificialities that we want to distinguish, isolate, or avoid in some particular context. Real is therefore context-dependent.

     

    “Reality,” Austin presumes, marks the same or a closely derivative contrast. To my mind one advantage of such an account of reality is that multi-dimensionality jumps out of it immediately, eliminating any possibility of a singular, ultimate reality. Austin uses a number of different examples, but the one that he uses most to show multi-dimensionality is color. The real color of some object can be the color it appears to most observers in ordinary light. But the “real color of her hair” usually refers to its natural color, not the color it appears. The problems for real colors don’t stop there, as Austin asks about, among other things, the real color of the sun, of a chameleon, and of a pointilliste painting which creates a green effect through combinations of blue and yellow dots.

     

    The case of art makes multi-dimensionality particularly clear. One can see a real Liechtenstein painting (or a print of a Liechtenstein, materially real in itself) and still ask, is it real art? For that matter, is it a real frame of a comic strip, or a fake one? Or one could see a fake Liechtenstein that is nonetheless both a real painting and real art; perhaps it is a comment on Liechtenstein, or simply an interesting derivative. The planes of real Liechtensteins, real works of art, real paintings, real comics, and the like intersect, and may have considerable overlap, but they also go off in their own directions. There are multiple realities, and any particular thing both is and is not real, depending on the reality one is concerned about. Like real things, reality is context-sensitive. This casts serious doubt on whether we could ever arrive at a substantive account of reality beyond Austin’s.

     

    We shouldn’t assume, though, that Austin’s discussion of “real” translates unproblematically into an account of “reality”; in fact to assume so would run counter to the spirit of his analysis, in spite of his coy suggestion that he is discussing the “Nature of Reality.” Austin’s focus on uses of “real” rather than “reality” has the advantage that the former is used much more often and in a wider variety of circumstances than the latter. But “reality” is an abstraction from and nominalization of “real,” and as such affords some slightly different characteristics. Whereas Austin could correctly claim that “real” was “substantive-hungry” (primarily an adjective), “reality” is itself substantive. And “reality” is much less dependent upon its negative uses than “real,” though its opposition to such non-reality as fantasy, dreaming, and hallucinating is still quite important. The translation from adjectives (and adverbs, such as “really”) to nouns does not go perfectly smoothly. Talk around VR can help to map out some of the bumps and twists in that translation, through the distinctions that VR researchers are trying to make when they claim that VR is virtual(2) (computer-based) rather than virtual(1) (in effect) reality.

     

    Paradigms and property-clusters

     

    The main lesson of Austin’s analysis is that there is no one concept of the “real,” that the word takes on meaning in relation to context and the ways of being unreal in context. Thus if we want to look for meanings of “real” we should, among other things, look to those negatives of real. Austin’s partial list includes the adjectives artificial, fake, false, bogus, makeshift, dummy, synthetic, and toy, and the nouns dream, illusion, mirage, and hallucination (71). This list is not complete, and could grow longer with the growth of methods of simulation, representation, and reproduction. If we suppose that reality is a systematic set of real things, then reading his list should convince us to give up hope on an ultimate reality. At the same time such a list provides an interesting cluster of properties of the real and the unreal. To a large extent this cluster of properties also applies to reality and unreality.

     

    One way that property clusters hang together is seen in accounts of meaning in terms of paradigms or prototypes, and their extension. The set of paradigmatic games–Wittgenstein used this example to criticize an essentialist conception of meaning–might include a counter game, like backgammon, and a more active game, like tag. Other games have some of the characteristics of the paradigmatic ones: to classify a new activity as a game is to make a, supposedly principled, extension from the paradigm. Such a picture would allow us to make sense of the fact that solitaire and football are both games even though they have little in common. For a large and complicated class like games, paradigms and their extensions might have become quite complicated, as paradigms have shifted, and new extensions have suggested some quite unobvious other ones. If a paradigm story can be told about reality, it is probably simpler than the story one would tell about games, because we have had relatively little occasion to talk about realities. Nonetheless, it would be a story that leaves a flexibility, openness, and pluralism to reality. I have already indicated how my story about reality would go: our most obvious paradigm reality is the three-dimensional space we live in, along with the most natural of the material objects it contains. This is the reality that we most often refer to when we use the phrase, “In reality.”

     

    The phenomenological tradition has a similar understanding of paradigmatic reality. For example:

     

    The world of working as a whole stands out as paramount over against the many other sub-universes of reality. It is the world of physical things, including my body; it is the realm of my locomotions and bodily operations; it offers resistances which require effort to overcome; it places tasks before me, permits me to carry through my plans, and enables me to succeed or to fail in my attempt to obtain my purposes. By my working acts I gear into the outer world, I engage it. (Schutz 226-7)

     

    Phenomenologists such as Alfred Schutz and Edmund Husserl build philosophical systems on the basis of assumptions implicit in the way that we deal with perceptions. Husserl and Schutz pare their available philosophical resources down to the level of perception, and then attempt to rebuild some of the richness of our world, particularly some of our understanding of the objectivity of our world, out of their remaining resources. “Reality” poses a special problem for phenomenologists, because before it is possible to ground objectivity in subjectivity one has to be able to distinguish among perceived worlds, to distinguish between the everyday world that will become the locus for objectivity and a dreamt world. That it is a special problem does not make it a particularly difficult one, because phenomenologists are content to draw on, articulate, and refine the resources that are normally used to distinguish everyday reality and dreams. But their pared-down resources do not allow them to say in advance that dreamed worlds are anything less than fully real, and thus they are easily drawn to talk about multiple realities (Schutz 207-59).

     

    Paradigmatic reality, in combination with other uses of the term and the debate around the status of VR, gives rise to a cluster of properties that a reality might have. These properties give us some touchstones for determining whether something is or is not a reality, or conversely, define normal extensions of the paradigm into new situations. My incomplete list of such properties has it that reality might be material, three-dimensional, immediate, engaging, objective, enduring, robust, natural, manipulable, interactive, and systematic. As the term “reality” is being used today, realities should have some, but not necessarily all, of these properties. The sections that follow briefly describe these properties, and justify them as properties of realities.

     

    An aside on the social world: Considering how objective and important the social world is, it is perhaps surprising that it is not more central to our paradigm. It is objective because, although it can be affected, it is usually experienced as a given, fixed in place by the actions of innumerable other actors. At most times change comes slowly to institutions like the legal system, gender and class structures, your local bank, and holiday traditions, because they are held in check by people’s expectations and the sanctions that occur when expectations are violated. Their objectivity is a product of their externality, their location outside of particular individuals and their actions. But this is what makes them real, things that we can count on at least as much as we can count on bits of material reality. Less firm are such small institutions as close friendships and other interpersonal relations. We routinely distinguish between real friendships and surface ones, or ones that can’t be found outside of very limited contexts; our criteria have to do with robustness, or their liveliness under pressure.

     

    Material, three-dimensional

     

    I’ve already argued that VR researchers take materiality and three-dimensionality as the core of reality. Reality’s materiality is what makes VR virtual reality, and VR’s three-dimensionality is what makes it virtual reality. But interest in those properties of everyday reality is not restricted to VR researchers: materiality and three-dimensionality are important properties marking a good chunk of everyday reality. For my purposes here I am more interested in focusing attention on other properties of potential realities.

     

    Engaging, immediate

     

    By leaving the world more abstract, versus building in more realism, Mark could draw users deeper in. Abstraction isn't a reason to reject VR worlds as being unrealistic. (Pimentel & Teixeira 151)

     

    Realism can be unrealistic. This conundrum derives from a description of the efforts of Mark Bolas, President of Fake Space Labs, to create engaging spaces, spaces into which people can easily become immersed. Engaging spaces are ones in which people can lose a sense of their normal material and social environments, usually by forgetting or ignoring the mechanisms producing their experiences–something which some well-crafted literature, film, and theatre accomplishes (Laurel, Computers 15-16). Bolas, along with most VR researchers, initially tried to make his environments into copies of material environments; in his case they were copies of offices. But the detail intended to help his virtual offices mimic material ones didn’t help to make them engaging. This suggests that, at least at the level to which Bolas could accomplish it, mimicry was the wrong strategy. Instead Bolas found that people could immerse themselves more easily into environments that were quite different from their accustomed ones. Rather than using space-filling programs to create texture he left the pieces of his virtual offices as unadorned polygons. Mimicry calls material environments into play, while anti-mimicry allows users to leave behind their material settings. Mimicry suggests mediation, because it is a representation. Anti-mimicry can create immediacy, because it is a presentation.

     

    Immediacy and engagement are related goals of all VR inventors, who want to draw users into the worlds that they create; they are even goals for such an anti-euphoric commentator as Brenda Laurel, who wants to encourage computer interface designers to create spaces in which “the representation is all there is” (Laurel, Computers 17). Immediacy and engagement are also criteria for the reality of virtual environments, among the features that make some VR “really real.” Clearly our paradigms of reality meet these criteria. Our experiences of material reality are what define immediacy, and most of us are immersed in and engaged with paradigm realities most of the time. What is interesting about Bolas’s work is that he discovered that these goals are separable from faithful representation–what we normally call realism–and they are separable from the other features of paradigm realities; this separability is something film-makers have often recognized. To make immediate and engaging environments one may be better off making them quite different from ordinary material reality. Therefore Bolas’s research concretely suggests that the qualities of reality are decomposable.

     

    Objective, enduring, robust

     

    Dreaming, fantasizing, hallucinating, and simply being wrong are some of the common ways that people leave reality. Hallmarks of the unreality of these flights are, I would claim, their subjectivity, their lack of materiality, and their transience. Paradigmatic reality is objective because it is felt and seen by many people, or could be, while paradigmatic unrealities like dreams or hallucinations are by definition subjective, being internal to the dreamer or hallucinator. In part the objectivity of reality is caused by its materiality and endurance: reality is hard and lasting while unreality is soft and fleeting. To find out whether you are dreaming you pinch yourself, and test the hardness of the world you are in. Reality bites. Even the social world is hard when real.

     

    As I am using it, robustness is a close kin to endurance and objectivity. Robustness is the ability to persevere through a variety of contexts and circumstances. The distinction between experimental artifact and experimental reality is usually made in terms of robustness. It is also a criterion we might use to discover the reality of various parts of the social world. Peter Berger and Thomas Luckmann create a unitary definition of social reality around robustness when they say that what is real is what cannot be “wished away” (3); a related unitary definition is that what is real is “what resists all attempts to change it” (Taylor 353). Although I would reject all such unitary definitions, they can be put to use in the creation of a more multi-dimensional picture.

     

    Manipulable, interactive

     

    Both manipulability and interaction are characteristics that VR designers have attempted to build into their systems. All VR takes as a central goal the manipulation of the virtual environment, usually through direct bodily contact. In this it corresponds to phenomenologists’ descriptions of everyday reality. Schutz, for example, calls that reality “a world of working” because it is manipulable, even while it offers resistances. And part of working is working with other people, who are treated as actors in their own right. It is clear that VR should ultimately be multi-user: almost from its beginnings VR’s ideals have included the possibility of multiple users interacting–virtual sex, the safest of sex, is at the forefront of the public imagination of VR. The Reality Built for Two system attracted so much attention because it was a step toward multiple user VR, even while it was expensive (originally US$430,000) and limited. Of course, letting human interactions into one’s picture of reality complicates matters, because it simultaneously makes the reality that VR tries to simulate richer, and, following Vivian Sobchak, draws our attention to the escapism implicit in VR euphoria.

     

    Natural

     

    A somewhat more tricky criterion of reality is naturalness. Middle-sized natural objects such as rocks, trees, and flies are paradigmatically real things, and thus Samuel Johnson didn’t kick a wall in his attempt to pragmatically refute skepticism about material reality, but rather a rock. A real friendship is one that is natural, not forced. The real color of one’s hair is its natural color, before dyeing, tinting, and highlighting. When we contrast a real phenomenon with an experimental artifact we are aiming at naturalness, because although in the laboratory everything is artificial some things are taken as standing in for nature. And when Baudrillard and Woolley respectively celebrate and lament the passing of reality it is in part because of the increasing artificiality of our world, the increasing extent to which everything around us is human-made.

     

    Systematic

     

    We speak of different worlds having their own rules. Therefore I want to end my list of characteristics of reality with a Platonic insight, the insight that reality has qualities of coherence and interconnectedness, or systematicity. It is systematicity that allows us to talk of a reality or a world, for otherwise what would hold it together? This may seem odd, because we don’t necessarily experience our everyday reality as systematic. In the context of VR Brenda Laurel says, for example, that “the well-designed world is, in a sense, the antithesis of realism–the antithesis of the chaos of everyday life” (Pimentel and Teixeira 157). Yet despite this, design is precisely what Laurel recommends being incorporated into VR and more mundane computer interfaces, drawing from the lesson of theatre (Laurel, Computers 125-61).

     

    Our paradigms of reality, at least since Darwin, are not designed but rather accrue through the workings of chance and mechanistic laws. Nonetheless, chance and those mechanistic laws lend our paradigms a coherence, if only a postulated coherence. Our world can look unified by accepted understandings and explanations of its current state, plus the understandings that we assume could be available. It is partly for this reason that Woolley is attracted to mathematical physics as picking out and describing what is most real: physics claims to present a coherent picture, giving us a relatively small number of rules or laws under which our universe operates, and claiming that those rules are in some sense fundamental.

     

    Conclusions: So what about VR?

     

    VR promises to have many of these properties of paradigmatic realities. The effort to create three-dimensional worlds is at present what defines VR research. Researchers also hope to make these new environments immediate and engaging. At least some versions are already interactive and manipulable. Most VR will probably be quite systematic, stemming from relatively simple models, conceptions, and programs; the aesthetics of virtual environments also do not encourage contradictions. VR is objective in the sense that one virtual environment can be experienced by many people, though it is questionable that it is objective in the sense of existing in the absence of any perceivers. Yet VR is not natural or material–the point is to create an illusion of materiality–and lacks endurance in its dependence upon equipment which are external to the system. The reality of VR, then, depends upon our emphases, and upon how we are willing to project the notion of reality. For many contexts it will be perfectly reasonable to claim that VR researchers are in the business of making realities, but for some others we will want to deny exactly that.

     

    One of my points here is to take the focus off particular characteristics of reality, such as materiality, three-dimensionality, and authenticity. I want to distribute the burden of reality more evenly. For example, if we focus on immediacy and engagement, three-dimensionality appears as one tool to these ends, though perhaps not a particularly interesting one. A child with Nintendo demonstrates that three-dimensionality is hardly needed for total absorption or capture. Super Mario Brothers can capture you and take you to a fantastic world, with no more than a 2-D screen and a joystick. (As I write this, however, Nintendo is introducing “Virtual Boy,” which extends Mario’s environments to three dimensions. The player’s motions still have to be translated through a joystick and buttons, and therefore to enthusiasts the set would not qualify as a step towards VR; it merely adds a third dimension to a video game.) Quite often, film-makers capture audiences in their fictions, allowing viewers to forget the cameras, sets, and other scaffolding that hold up filmic worlds. But the point can be made without any such sophisticated equipment. A chess player explores a completely irreal, artificial environment–an idiosyncratic, spare, finite, geometric battlefield–and can become completely engrossed in the events. What is fascinating about 3-D in virtual reality is not 3-D itself, but rather the surprise of it; we are amazed by the technological prowess. In this respect it is not the realism of virtual reality that impresses, but its artificiality. Baudrillard makes a similar point, though for very different reasons: “why would the simulacrum with three dimensions be closer to the real than the one with two dimensions? It claims to be, but paradoxically, it has the opposite effect” (Simulacra 107).

     

    If my account is roughly right, then the geometry of reality is complex. If they are planes, for example, realities intersect at multiple points not always on straight lines, although some realities may intersect nowhere even while they are not neatly parallel. The planes are given coherence by some combination of characteristics, which may not be put together in exactly the same way as those of any other plane. We can extend the scope of these planes simply by manufacturing more of the stuff that makes them up, a new bit of culture, a new gadget, a new plot twist, and so on. But we are not confined to old realities, because we can make new ones by analogy–perhaps VR is one.

     

    VR does not in itself threaten more standard realities, contrary to claims made by Druckrey and others. There have always been multiple realms that could be realities, including social realities, mathematical realities, and other structures that are robust and systematic. Such realities can coexist. At the same time, they are not entirely separable, because work in one or another of these often will have substantial effects on others: our physical landscape, for example, is shaped by its being also a terrain of social interactions. Realities and the structures that make them up can leak into one another. Thus VR, and cyberspace more generally, may have concrete and profound effects on other realities, as Zizek claims. But it does so as a virtual(2) reality, not as a virtual(1) reality.

     

    I should now correct my opening claim. Right now virtual reality is a wonderfully successful misnomer. To the extent that VR is reality, there is little virtual(1) about it. Given enough time we might create environments that would be correctly called virtual(1) reality–environments that are in effect real but in some way unreal, environments that are deceiving simulations of pre-existing realities–but for the moment that seems both unlikely and relatively uninteresting. More fruitful, it seems, is to use computers and VR technologies to create new realities (virtual(2) realities), not to simulate old ones.

     


    *Thanks for commentary go to Laura Murray and three anonymous reviewers for this journal. Thanks for generous support goes to the Social Science and Humanities Research Council of Canada.


     

    Works Cited

     

    • Austin, J. L. Sense and Sensibilia, Ed. G. J. Warnock. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1962.
    • Baudrillard, Jean. La guerre du Golfe n’a pas eu lieu. Paris: Galilée, 1991.
    • —. Simulacra and Simulation. Trans. Sheila Faria Glaser. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1994.
    • Benedikt, Michael, ed. Cyberspace: First Steps. Cambridge: MIT Press, 1991.
    • Berger, Peter L. and Thomas Luckmann. The Social Construction of Reality: A Treatise in the Sociology of Knowledge. New York: Doubleday & Company, 1966.
    • De Kerckhove, Derrick. The Skin of Culture: Investigating the New Electronic Reality. Ed. Christopher Dewdney. Toronto: Somerville House Publishing, 1995.
    • Druckrey, Timothy. Introduction. Culture on the Brink: Ideologies of Technology. Eds. Gretchen Bender and Timothy Druckrey. Seattle: Bay Press, 1994. 1-12.
    • Eco, Umberto. Travels in Hyper Reality. London: Picador, 1987.
    • Furness, Thomas A., III. “Fantastic Voyage.” Popular Mechanics December 1986: 63-65.
    • Gibson, William. Neuromancer. New York: Ace Books, 1984.
    • —. “The Winter Market.” Burning Chrome. New York: Ace Books, 1986. 117-141.
    • Heim, Michael. The Metaphysics of Virtual Reality. New York: Oxford UP, 1993.
    • Lanier, Jaron, and Frank Biocca. “An Insider’s View of the Future of Virtual Reality.” Journal of Communication 42 (1992): 150-72.
    • Laurel, Brenda. Computers as Theatre. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1991.
    • —. “Toward the Design of a Computer-Based Interactive Fantasy System.” Diss. Ohio State University, 1986.
    • Leifer, Larry, Machiel Van der Loos, and Stefan Michalowski. “Telerobotics in Rehabilitation: Barriers to a Virtual Existence.” Presented at the Conference on Human-machine Interfaces for Teleoperators and Virtual Environments, Santa Barbara, CA, 1990.
    • Morse, Margaret. “What Do Cyborgs Eat? Oral Logic in an Information Society.” Culture on the Brink: Ideologies of Technology. Eds. Gretchen Bender and Timothy Druckery. Seattle: Bay Press, 1994. 157-89.
    • Pimentel, Ken, and Kevin Teixeira. Virtual Reality: Through the New Looking Glass. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1993.
    • Rheingold, Howard. Virtual Reality. New York: Summit Books, 1991.
    • Schutz, Alfred. The Problem of Social Reality. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1962. Vol. 1 of Collected Papers.
    • Sismondo, Sergio. Science without Myth: On Constructions, Reality, and Social Knowledge. Albany, NY: SUNY Press, 1996.
    • Slouka, Mark. War of the Worlds: Cyberspace and the High-Tech Assault on Reality. New York: Basic Books, 1995.
    • Sobchack, Vivian. “New Age Mutant Ninja Hackers: Reading Mondo 2000.” Flame Wars: The Discourse of Cyberculture. Ed. Mark Dery. Durham: Duke UP, 1994. 11-28.
    • Stone, Allucquere Rosanne. “Will the Real Body Please Stand Up?: Boundary Stories about Virtual Cultures.” Cyberspace: First Steps. Ed. Michael Benedikt. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1991. 81-118.
    • Taylor, Peter. “Co-construction and Process: A Response to Sismondo’s Classification of Constructivisms.” Social Studies of Science 25 (1995): 348-59.
    • Virilio, Paul. War and Cinema: The Logistics of Perception. Trans. Patrick Camiller. London: Verso, 1989.
    • Woolley, Benjamin. Virtual Worlds: A Journey in Hype and Hyperreality. Oxford: Blackwell, 1992.
    • Zizek, Slavoj. Tarrying with the Negative: Kant, Hegel, and the Critique of Ideology. Durham: Duke UP, 1993.

     

  • Cyberbeing and ~space

    Alec McHoul

    School of Humanities
    Murdoch University
    mchoul@central.murdoch.edu.au

     

    Shipwreck in Cyberspace © 1997 John Richardson & Peter Stuart, used by permission

     


     

    Does cyberculture–along with its new forms of equipment and, consequently, its new modes of relating to equipment–constitute a distinct and different way of being in the world from ordinary everydayness? In other words, is there a distinct mode of being peculiar to the “cyber”? Is there cyberbeing? This paper sets out to investigate this possibility, beginning with an outline of Heidegger’s concept of Dasein and moving on to look at the changes and modifications to his account that might need to be made in order to distinguish something like cyberbeing.

     

    For Heidegger (Being), what is fundamental to being-in-the-world is that we understand as. But this does not mean: objects exist primordially in themselves as pure presence and we, subsequent to that sheer presence, come along and, as it were, throw an understanding over them. Presence and understanding are not like this. What are they like?

     

    The first given of what-is is that it is part of, roughly, human socio-cultural being (or Dasein). What can be in this respect is, initially, of two kinds. The first is what is ready-to-hand (Zuhanden) as opposed to the second, what is present-at-hand (Vorhanden). What is ready to hand is part of the everyday world of practical activity and consists of equipment (hammers and promises, for example–but also the familiar means of using them). It consists of tools and methods. These come first. What is present-at-hand comes later and is only one particular way of using what is ready-to-hand: it is what comes to count as natural, objective and beyond the field of human concerted actions. In fact it is what the picture in the paragraph above mistakenly thinks of as coming first: natural, primordial, independent entities subject to such things as scientific inquiry.

     

    Two ways of being then: the ready-to-hand (cf. “culture”) and the present-at-hand (cf. “nature”). But prior to this, as we have seen, is another which Heidegger calls Dasein. Dasein is, loosely, human (as opposed to natural or equipmental) being. More precisely, it is “a being of the same ontological sort that we are” (Okrent 3). And it is ontologically prior to either Zuhandenheit or, naturally, Vorhandenheit. However, Dasein’s unique capacity is that it is the only kind of thing which is ontologically constituted such that it can work with what is ready-to-hand (in order to produce, for example, what counts as “natural” and apparently, therefore, primordial). The mistake in philosophy, or indeed in any kind of inquiry, is to begin with independent entities present-at-hand–with what might be called the merely “occurrent.” Adopting Dreyfus’s terms then, we can think of Dasein’s primordial concern with what is ready-to-hand as “availableness,” and its subsequent concern (on top of this primary layer) with what is present-at-hand as “occurrentness” (Dreyfus xi). According to this vocabulary, what is available (tools and methods) must always precede what is occurrent (apparently natural facts).

     

    These then are the main categories of being (cf. Brandom). But we have already said that the involvement of Dasein in availableness is understanding and that understanding is always understanding as. Obviously, if availableness precedes occurrentness (and can perhaps be said to produce it), then understanding, as the first involvement of Dasein in the world, cannot be something, as it were, “naturally given” to it. It cannot have to do with a mind or a consciousness, or with subjective mental states. It must have to do with Dasein’s dealings with availableness: equipment.

     

    To understand, then, is to have appropriate dealings with equipment, with tools and the methods of their use. These tools are part of the ordinary organized social fabric in which Dasein finds itself. Dasein always already finds itself amidst tools: communally sanctioned things for doing things, and ways of doing those things. When it uses equipment in the way that we all do and in the way that we all recognize as appropriate for the task in hand, and in a way which is competent for that task in hand, we say that Dasein understands.

     

    So in this account of being in the world, there is intention to be sure. But to be an intentional agent, as Dasein, is not to have a certain mental orientation towards the world and its ways. Rather it is to be a certain kind of ordinary and organized practice. Therefore Dasein does not have to do with any individual or independent actor and his internal mental states. That idea comes out of the wrong view of things that is sometimes called “representationalist” or “Cartesian.” On that wrong view there are, on the one hand, non-human objects in the world (“reality”) and, on the other, an ego or consciousness that has to apprehend them in some way: hence intention is the state of consciousness that one of these beings (the human/subjective) has towards the other (the natural/objective). On the Cartesian-representationalist view, intention bonds the subject-thinker to the object-existent.

     

    Against the Cartesian picture, we can say that understanding is a question of knowing how to do something or bring something about rather than a question of knowing that something exists or has such-and-such properties. Dasein can do this latter: it can make interpretations of what is occurrent–but it can only do so as a function of its operations with (its understanding of) what it has available. So understanding is, effectively, a kind of mastery. As Heidegger puts it: “In German we say that someone can vorstehen something–literally stand in front or ahead of it, that is, stand at its head, administer, manage, preside over it. This is equivalent to saying that he versteht sich darauf, understands in the sense of being skilled or expert at it, has the know how of it. The meaning of the term ‘understanding’…is intended to go back to this usage in ordinary language” (Basic Problems 276).

     

    Now implicit in all of this is that Dasein is always already social. It is in fact something more like “membership” than it is a “person” (who happens, after the fact of his personhood, to be included as a member). Dasein begins as membership and any particular Dasein-like thing is never not a member. In this sense Dasein cannot be separated from being-with (Mitdasein). Being-with is the social and there is no prior form of being that being-with is made up of. It begins (and may indeed end) that way. In this sense understanding is no more than how it is that any particular Dasein displays (or, for example, accounts for) its being-with.

     

    How does this practical understanding operate? In any practical activity, what is done is done for something. It is done for and goes forth or forward into some further practical activity. Hence I cut down a tree in order to get wood for the fire. The first activity produces the effect of the second. But the second activity (making the fire with the chopped wood), insofar as this is what my Mitdasein routinely does in order to warm itself, makes the first intelligible. In this sense, practices are articulated with one another and cannot be separated and inspected for their competent understandings as stand-alone affairs. I have shown one kind of competence when I select an axe for the chopping, another when I swing it in the right way so as to fell the tree, another when I cut the tree up appropriately for use in a domestic fire (which might involve leaving it to cure, for example), another when I use the wood for making a fire (rather than building a roof), another when I lay the fire properly so that the house is heated, and so on. There is a relational totality here which has nothing to do with my individual actions alone. This totality is a whole that precedes the sum of any actual empirical practices. It might be called the “plenum” or “gestalt” of practical competence. Insofar as I orient myself in the course of that plenum or, as Heidegger calls it, a “functionality contexture” (Bewandtniszusammenhang), I can be said to have understood. So understanding is always subject to a practical “as” structure, where the “as” marks an actual orientation to the ready-to-hand.

     

    In one sense, then, we might talk about the production and the recognition of social practices as constituting understanding–providing we don’t assume that either of these terms requires a primary capacity for mental acts on the part of anything that happens to be Dasein. Production means practical activities with equipment and their recognizably competent use. And this recognizing is, as it turns out, understanding as. The recognition can be done by any particular Dasein itself or by another or others. Recognition, in this sense, is the property of the Mitdasein. It doesn’t involve seeing somebody doing something and, then, after the fact, turning inwards to see that the “mind” has registered it as in accord with some axiomatic rules for so-doing. Rather it is more-than-immediate. It consists in the very production itself as having been, all along, “how we do it.” So one understands a practical activity as what is recognizably competent “for us all.” The social world (the being-with) makes sense because (a) its actions are part of the plenum of competent actions and, which is the same thing, because (b) the methods for the production and the methods for the recognition of practical actions are identical. And those methods too are shared equipment.

     

    In some fields of the study of everydayness, the identity between production and recognition methods is called “reflexivity” or “incarnateness” (Garfinkel 1). What it suggests is that this is the bottom line for anything and everything about which ontological claims (claims that they have being of some kind) can be made. We might refer to it as the “self-sustaining” property of Dasein in its direct and reciprocal relation to availableness. Brandom refers, instead, to the fact that “anthropological categories” are “self-adjudicating” (387); Rorty refers to the fact that “social practice is determinative of what is and is not up to social practice” (356). These phrases suggest that whatever else might be a candidate ground for “what is social” (things such as “nature,” “topography,” “cultural attitudes,” “psychological dispositions,” “the economy” and so on) will in fact be effects of this primordial ontological (and not “merely” or secondarily social) condition of being in the world.

     

    But what about one such obvious candidate: the occurrent, the “natural,” the realm of things apparently beyond and outside the control of “man”–what Brandom calls “the objective, person-independent, causally interacting subjects of natural scientific inquiry” (387)? As he goes on to show, even this “noumenal” domain arises out of Dasein. It does so, he claims, by virtue of a fairly special (“theoretical”) kind of practical orientation to equipment. As we saw above, the appropriate use (appropriation) of equipment constitutes a practical understanding. In taking something as something, we produce-recognize it as the particular thing it is for ourselves (for everyone in the being-with). But what happens if, instead of appropriating the tool or method, we appropriate the understanding of it? Surely this understanding is just another set of practical affairs–in fact we said as much above. But in another sense, to appropriate the understanding itself is another order of affairs. In the first instance, Heidegger calls this “deliberation,” as a particular variety of interpretation (rather than as “understanding” as such; though, as we have seen, it is ultimately no more than a variety of understanding-as-practice). As Brandom puts it, “Interpretation at the level of deliberation adds to [the] use and appropriation of equipment, the use and appropriation of equipmental understanding of particular involvements” (400). In this case, where interpretation emerges from practical understanding, we have a means of dealing with what is occurrent (“present-at-hand”).

     

    This secondary relation is a particular kind of worldly operation and involves assertion. With the equipment of assertions (and eventually inferences from assertions) we do not simply do something with what is available, we are also able to say or state things about the occurrent. This is the kind of position we take when, for example, we don’t cut down the tree for the fire but, again for example, consider the general category of trees and make taxonomies; or when we begin a biological investigation of trees; or when we count how many there are in order to study an eco-system. In fact this kind of interpretation arises whenever our interests in something are no longer practical in the direct sense. Nevertheless, since this particular “tension” of equipmental use (the use of assertions and inferences) has its root in quite ordinary practice (such that it could not exist if there were no prior ordinary understandings to take as its own particular equipment), it is still a matter grounded in the self-sustaining, reflexive, or self-adjudicating common ground of all being in the world. While there may be a “practical indifference” (Brandom 406) towards such “theoretic” matters, their ultimate grounding in practice does not, thereby, disappear. The occurrent is, as we have noted, ontologically dependent on the available. This is why, when we forget that dependence, we can be misled into the strange game of thinking that the occurrent is the first of all there is. This is the mistake of “the doctrine of pure presence-at-hand (or, sometimes, ‘Reality’),” according to Brandom, who goes on to quote Heidegger as follows:

     

    ['Reality'] in its traditional signification stands for Being in the sense of pure presence-at-hand of Things....[But] all the modes of Being of entities within-the-world are founded ontologically upon the worldhood of the world and accordingly the phenomenon of Being-in-the-world. From this arises the insight that among the modes of Being of entities within-the-world, Reality has no priority, and that Reality is a kind of Being which cannot even characterize anything like the world or Dasein in a way which is ontologically appropriate. (Being 211, qtd. in Brandom 406)

     

    Theoretical inquiry is a routine property of social existence, in this sense–but it becomes problematic when what it discovers (the occurrent) is thought to be prior to what, ultimately, allows it to be discovered, namely, ordinary practical understanding. Hence “Discovery of the present-at-hand [the occurrent] is an authentic possibility of Dasein’sBeing, instantiated by all communities ever discovered. Pure presence-at-hand [occurrence] is a philosophers’ misunderstanding of the significance of the category of presence-at-hand, and a Bad Idea” (Brandom 407).

     

    This is a unique way of handling the variety of what is. It prioritizes the social (as Dasein and availability) over the supposed primacy of the natural (the occurrent). But it does not, for all that–and even though it denies “reality” a prior ontological foothold–lapse into relativism. This is not the thesis of the “social construction of reality” by any means. But what it does begin with, and what sustains it throughout, is understanding (and later interpreting) as. The “purity” of pure occurrence is, as it were, always “contaminated” by the “as” of ordinary practice. So the question that lies before us is no more and no less than this: is there, now, today, the possibility of an alternative to that “as”? I don’t mean, naturally enough, a reassertion of, or an insistence on, pure presence (primordial reality)–for as we have learned, that would only be another effect of the game with assertions, ultimately returnable to the “as” itself. What I mean is an alternative to understanding as, as a way of being in the world–perhaps some technological supplementation of the “as” structure?

     

    Let me propose, as an initial approximation, that there is now a determinate, viable and practical way of being with equipment predicated on something akin to–but, importantly, not quite the same as–understanding “as if.” “As if” would indeed be appropriate were it not for the fact that this tension of the “as”-structure marks the space of the virtual (as opposed to the sheer “as”-structure of the actual). In this case, something between “as” and “as if” marks an indeterminate space of the possibility of being. This is the space of cyberbeing: cyberspace. But this is not necessarily a fourth category of being over and above Heidegger’s three (Dasein, availability and occurrentness). Instead, what I want to propose is that cyberbeing is a new possibility of relations between these categories–or, more strictly, between Dasein and availability, with the effect that the occurrent takes on a slightly different ontological configuration (different, that is, from its grounding in the practice of assertion).

     

    Cyberbeing, that is, would constitute a new relation between human being and equipment, to the point where the two cease to be distinct ontological categories in the strictest sense. Dasein does not use cyberequipment in the way that it uses fishing hooks and aeroplanes. Rather the two engage in a mutuality of using and being used. This can be seen from the first moment of cyberequipmental engagement. Power has to reach a computer’s motherboard and its CPU in millivolts. Standard power outlets, however, range between 100v and 260v. In order to reduce the voltage, the computer contains a power supply device. This consists of, among other things, a board with its own chips. What if this circuit is damaged in some way? Strictly, the full force of the standard voltage should hit the motherboard and the CPU and “fry” it. But there is a fail-safe device. On the power supply board is a self-checking chip. It can determine whether or not the supply is ready to receive high voltage and is capable of reducing it to the operating voltage. But how does this part of the circuit perform these tasks prior to the mains voltage reaching it? What powers this part of the circuit? In fact, it requires so little power that it is able to power on from the current generated by the change in quantum state caused by the operator’s finger turning the power switch. In this way, the user’s body provides the power for the computer’s power supply to anticipate the upcoming mains voltage. There is, from the start (perhaps even before it) a mutuality between person and computer. It is this mutuality that is cyberbeing, and it is encapsulated in this metaphor of mutual switching, turning, relaying or flick(er)ing.

     

    In Heidegger, standard availability, readiness-to-hand or the Zuhanden involves Dasein in an actual relation to equipment: the “as”-structure. The Zuhanden is actual equipment and Dasein establishes itself in community-appropriate modes of articulation with that equipment. This is coping. Coping is actual-equipmentality in its everydayness. Against this actual we might pose the virtual. Here, equipment becomes intangible and its characteristic manifestations would be in art, fiction, poetry, and all the technologies of the imaginary whose mode of understanding is understanding “as if.” And, parenthetically, this is perhaps why Heidegger’s thought undergoes significant alterations when he considers this field in “The Origin of the Work of Art.” But we must pause here. For the cyber is not identical with the virtual or the equipmentality of the imaginary–despite current usage in such terms as “virtual reality” (VR) and so on. Rather the cyber’s unique equipmentality flick(er)s or hovers between the actual and the virtual, between the “as” and the “as if.” When I use VR equipment such as a headset and an electronic “glove” to play golf, my actual arm moves as it would when addressing an actual golfball on an actual course. However, in this case, there is no actual ball or golf links. Rather the sense of their immediate existence is generated electronically, virtually. That is, I address the ball as a ball but it has its being “as if.” The ensemble or gestalt that is the game of “virtual” golf actually circulates at rapid speed between the actual and virtual. The two are brought into a single equipmental space that is cyberspace. So, the cyber is neither actual nor virtual alone; rather it resides in the ranges of space between–spaces that are neither here nor there, present nor absent, material nor immaterial, “as” nor “as if.” To understand cyberbeing “as” would be to over-normalize it; to understand it purely “as if” would be to over-virtualize it. Instead, because cyberbeings rapidly fluctuate between these actual and virtual understandings, they may be said to have the characteristics once ascribed to ghosts. And here we might be reminded that today’s dominant computer interface, the graphical user interface, is usually abbreviated to GUI, which is roughly the equivalent of the Chinese word for ghost (Koh). Cyberbeing is gui, ghostly, or, to use Derrida’s term, “spectral” (Specters).

     

    To summarize: Dasein’s everydayness addresses equipment as actual. This provides the very conditions of possibility for the imaginary/virtual that is the space of artistic play. Between the two is an unbounded space that can be called the gui or the spectral. This is cyberspace, where cyberbeing resides–and cyberbeing is defined as whatever resides in this space. Accordingly, it is composed of a family of “games” or practices in Wittgenstein’s sense. There is not just one cyberpractice but many, though each is held together by a loose kind of family resemblance–and that resemblance is the unbounded or fuzzy space between virtual and actual. Cyberbeing’s characteristic is, then, indeterminate. It has no determinate characteristic (just as, for Wittgenstein, a family is not defined by each member’s possession of a single feature–eyes, nose, gait, and so forth). Rather the resemblance of cyberpractices is identical with the inclusion of whatsoever practices in the space of cyberbeing, between the actual and the virtual. This “between” means that cyberspace is not a set, a category or a genre. Rather it is a disposition of spectral possibilities: neither actual-solid nor virtual-spirituous, but gui (gooey?). Some such practices would include:

     

    •      Cyber environments or spectral architectures where actual building materials combine with virtual surfaces to create possibilities of bodily and disembodied movements through a mutually doubled space.
    •      Cyber performances such as those of the artist Stelarc, who augments his body with invasive electronic prostheses–or, rather, augments electronic devices with the prosthesis he calls his “body”–and who occasionally connects those devices to the Internet so that remote users can make the body-machine move. {Go to Stelarc’s site}
    •      Dildonics: couplings of devices and human-body movements and reactions that might be said to “simulate” sexual activity, were it not for the fact that this is not so much a simple simulation with inert equipment (such as sex toys) as it is a relation between different bodies’ erotic capacities and the possibilities opened for them by the limitless space of the spectral.
    •      Electro-luminescent fibres (ELFs), which are used to cover the body somewhat like clothing. However, unlike the standard equipment of clothing, ELFs alter unpredictably on the basis of small charges given out by the body itself. The ELF then is more a SELF (spectro-electro-luminescent-fibre) than an inert addition to a body from which it is separate.
    •      Haptics: This includes devices such as the Phantom, invented by Massie and Salisbury at MIT. By rapidly generating and receiving up to 1000 messages per second in a feedback loop, the Phantom is able to simulate events beyond the two-dimensional visual range that is common to ordinary graphics. This allows its operators to effectively see in three dimensions and indeed to “touch” computer generated objects.
    •      Games: sometimes called “electronic” games or “computer” games, though the term is misleading and a hangover from pre-spectral thinking. Whether combined with VR technologies or not, games in cyberspace are more like interconnections and passages between humo-machinic “players.” They exist in and as these interconnections and passages rather than in the “liveware,” “hardware” and “software” that they bring together. And this is because their “rules” reside in these hovering interstices: rules that have the peculiar property of being able to alter according to the unpredictable course of play.
    •      Hyperlinks, hypertext, hypermedia: The “hyper” is only one, and perhaps a relatively unimportant, member of the family of cyberpractices. Although it was early on the scene, it maintained close links with pre-spectral forms of equipmental engagement (such as the book and, in particular, the dictionary and the encyclopedia). It was in fact a prosthetic look-up device which differed from pre-spectral look-up devices only by virtue of its ultimately digital makeup. It, in fact, provides a good demonstration of how the cyber is not coterminous with the silicon-digital (any more than Dasein is coterminous with the carbon-analogue).
    •      The Internet: here the merely hyper becomes potentially cyber since, with the indefinite nodal linking of hyper-media phenomena, truly spectral possibilities can arise. A hyper-link is merely digital. But a web of hyper-links is one constituent of the spectral–at least in potentia. That is, certain features of the Internet retain pre-spectral forms of equipmentality, e-mail being a case in point. With e-mail, we have all the familiar territory of senders and addressees, letters, mailboxes, forwarded copies, enclosures and attachments. E-mail, like ordinary mail, operates in a plane and merely substitutes, electronically, for movements that would occur on that plane anyway. As e-mail documents come to contain relative and absolute hyper-links, however, they move away from their position as a minor supplementation of the plane of written linguistic communication. They leave open, as do all webbed entities, the possibility of unforseeable coming-and-going, being-here-and-being-there, travelling without given destinations, virtual-actual transitions and the rest of the manifold ways of describing cyberbeing and ~space. What moves is no longer “information” along a “highway” (these terms are inadequate metaphors drawn from the forms of actual being which cyberbeing prosthetises). What moves on the web is the movement of the web itself. Its motion creates the sites that it is possible to move to. This deletes the distinction between space and matter that is so crucial to everyday thinking. On the web, space “informs” matter how to move and matter “informs” space how to shape itself.
    •      MUDs and MOOs–“Multiple User Dungeons/Dimensions” and “MUD: Object-Oriented”–are spectral environments where constructed identities can meet and interact. The features of the identities are not determined by those of the persons who are said to “interact” or “communicate” “via” MOOs. Rather they are doubly actual-virtual, so that these constructs can operate and cope as a community in spectral space to create further spectral spaces or objects. They might produce only possible conversations, but they might also produce possible works of art, softwares, parties, games, recipes, tools, music and so on.
    •      Norns or “virtual pets” have their origins in the quasi-spectral discipline of artificial life (A-Life) and begin as clusters of digital-genetic code (or “eggs”) that then “grow” according to less than predictable inter-effects between their code and that surrounding them in cyberspace. While their existence in A-life-based games relies on metaphors of “birth,” “development,” “nurture,” “death” and so on, the important characteristic of this member of the family of cyberpractices is that it actualizes cyber-variants of these aspects of biologically-based life, adding to it and taking away from it (in the way that Stelarc adds his body to the Internet so that it is the body that becomes parasitic rather than vice versa). Norns are less artificial life than they are prosthetic life (cf. Wills).
    •      VR equipment, as we have seen, is not strictly virtual. Rather it is virtual-actual. With it, the body supplements both electronic equipment and the imaginary spaces and possibilities it can generate; and at the same time, the equipment and its imaginary supplement the body. It is this mutual relay that, as we have seen, is the space (or spacing) of cyberbeing.

     

    This is only a brief list of possibilities, to be sure, and no doubt many other instances can be found. What we do need at this point, though, is a general understanding of the being of (these instances of) cyberbeing. One way of approaching this would be to see how the Heideggerian notion of equipmentality overlaps with (or is supplemented by) Derrida’s position on supplementation. From there, we can begin to see at least three aspects of cyberbeing itself: its relation to techno-moralities (positive and negative); its status as a highly unique meta-technology; and its particular way of generating or producing occurrence (which seems to be quite distinct from Dasein’s assertional-propositional mode).

     

    Equipmentality in Heidegger is taken up by Derrida (Grammatology 144-157) as the supplement, in the following sense. With Heidegger, Derrida holds that being cannot be simply present to itself. It does not have the characteristics of a “reality” as pure presence. Rather being’s equipmentality is the condition for the real, the present-at-hand, the occurrent. For both thinkers, then, there is no being pure and simple. Rather there is always and necessarily a “contamination”–something impure adding to and taking away from whatever precedes it as a form of being. And this adding and taking is never not in process: so we can only dream of a pure being without supplementation, without the prosthetic, without some form of equipmentality. Being has no “first” supplement, only chains of supplementation, always already in process; and so there is, strictly, no outside to the prosthetic or equipmental character of our being. At each point along these chains of prosthetization, it always only looks as if the prior technology were “more human,” “more authentic.” So, in the famous case, Plato derides the technology of writing for its negative effects on the natural human capacity for memorizing. In the nineteenth century, the streetlight was thought to corrupt the morality of the urban populace, to destroy its natural distinction between day and night, work and rest. Now computers are supposed to be destroying our natural capacities to read books, to be literate. This is one moral axis that appears to be given off as technologies come into historico-supplementational relations with one another. It sees the replace-ative aspect of the supplement and represses its cumulative aspect. At the same time though, another moral axis works in the opposite direction: writing increases the distances over which communication takes place; it opens the space of democracy and reduces the grip of the priesthood on access to knowledge. Streetlighting reduces crime and brings the leisure of the night out into the open, into a new community. Computers make instant connections to anywhere and reduce the home/workplace and work/leisure dichotomies altogether, freeing us in some sense from a long entrenched mode of production. Two moralities, then, at each point when one technology’s “set” and another’s meet in a mobile ellipse of confrontations and agreements, breakings-away and comings-together. No point then in engaging in these as far as the cyber is concerned. The cyber, as a techno-prosthetic, can perfectly well generate its own moralities as part of its being. There is no place for the analyst here. So, accordingly, delete any “approval” or “disapproval” for the cyber you may have read here already or will read below. For the point is not to praise or condemn but to begin to think the ontological status of cyberbeing.

     

    Another characteristic of the elliptical spaces where technological “sets” intersect to produce “lines” of technological flight is that they are affected (perhaps even effected) by adjacent lines. Hence the printing press is affected by the adjacent technologies of the wine press, metallurgy, cloth-making, mercantile practice and education, among others. Likewise, the computer hybridizes the adjacent lines of higher mathematics and the chemistry of silicon, again among others. As these effects pass “vertically” into the transitional technological space, they make possible new forms of equipmentality. But the “revolutionary” instances do more than this. For example, the printing press (in its supplementation of writing and its hybridizing of wine-making, metallurgy, and the rest) is not only a model for all the forms of mechanical reproduction it foreshadows, it is also a means of distributing information about such means. Since it can generate identical copies of technical manuals and schematics, for example, it can ensure that close-to-identical forms of production can exist in spatio-temporally distant locales. The importance of the cyber in this respect–and here the consequences must be enormous–is that it supplements or prosthetizes Dasein’s very capacity to supplement or prosthetize. Printing is a meta-technology in a limited sense. It permits the distribution of the capacity to supplement Dasein. The cyber, by contrast, does not simply permit or facilitate this, it also carries it out. In making the cyber possible, we have made possible an equipmental formation of equipmentality. We have, in effect, made the distinction between “ourselves” and what we have ready-to-hand utterly indistinct. One morality, of course, will see, as ever, only loss of control and authenticity. Another will only see the opening of indefinite and, eventually indispensable, possibilities of being human differently.

     

    It follows from all of the above that Heidegger’s third category of being, the occurrent, the present-at-hand (or that which is mistakenly thought by some philosophers to be pure or primordial reality) cannot, in cyberspace, be a mere effect of the equipment called linguistic assertion. That is: if the “science” that Dasein generates is propositional, then the science peculiar to cyberbeing (its interpretation of the “real”) is anything but. The assertional-propositional stems from Dasein’s localization with and within the space of the actual. The imaginary-virtual had, all along, never operated propositionally. It always interpreted the real aesthetically, via various kinds of feeling and intuition “as if.” Even in Kant, these modes of interpretation were never thought to be properly propositional. But, for the cyber, things are different again. Hyper-links, software code, silicon chips, HTML scripts, digitized images and so on: all of these are subject to a definite logic. They are fathomable and controllable by assertional-propositional techniques. But where links move and go to, cumulatively; how software codes sit alongside potentially multi-millions of others (especially as mini-apps., Java applets and so on); how chips are placed in relation to one another through networked hardwares to form inter- and intra-computers with unpredictable capabilities; what HTML scripts can do and where they can take “information” into new contexts and combinations with unforeseeable consequences; how digitized images are recycled and recombined, distorted and warped, clarified and magnified, combined, overlaid and condensed: all of these are elsewhere than the assertional-propositional. They are not, in the strict sense, virtual; they offer no aesthetic or “intuitive” opening (or production) of the occurrent. Rather they de-assertionalize the present-at-hand. They loosen it from its moorings in logic and logistics; they generate it as more than an effect of pragmata. And if they “assert” at all, they assert between the “as” and the “as if”–so that the supplementational “between” (the supplement of cyberbeing’s meta-supplementation of Dasein) marks the indefiniteness of possibility as opposed to both the definiteness of ordinary, actual assertion and the infinity of virtual “intuition.” What we now–as cyberbeing–make, care for, govern and hold to be “beyond” us (as “presence”) we still make, care for, govern and hold, to be sure. But we now always do this under the aspect of sheer possibility and potential. Presence is neither asserted nor imagined; it is possible presence, presence-to-come. And the space of that possibility and potential is the spectral, gui, cyberbeing and ~space, itself.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Brandom, Robert. “Heidegger’s Categories in Being and Time.” The Monist 66:3 (1983): 387-409.
    • Derrida, Jacques. Of Grammatology. Trans. Gayatri Chakravort Spivak. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins UP, 1976.
    • —. Specters of Marx : The State of the Debt, the Work of Mourning, and the New International. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Dreyfus, Hubert L. Being-in-the-World: A Commentary on Heidegger’s Being and Time, Division I. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press, 1991.
    • Garfinkel, Harold. Studies in Ethnomethodology. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1967.
    • Heidegger, Martin. The Basic Problems of Phenomenology. Trans. Albert Hofstadter. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1982.
    • —. Being and Time. Trans. John Macquarrie and Edward Robinson. Oxford: Blackwell, 1962.
    • —. “The Origin of the Work of Art.” Martin Heidegger: Basic Writings. Ed. David Farrell Krell. London: Routledge, 1993. 143-212.
    • Koh, J.F. Personal communication. March 1997.
    • Okrent, Mark. Heidegger’s Pragmatism: Understanding, Being, and the Critique of Metaphysics. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1988.
    • Rorty, Richard. “Wittgenstein, Heidegger and the Reification of Language.” The Cambridge Companion to Heidegger. Ed. Charles B. Guignon. New York: Cambridge UP, 1993. 337-357.
    • Wills, David. Prosthesis. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1995.
    • Wittgenstein, Ludwig. Philosophical Investigations. Trans. G.E.M. Anscombe. Oxford: Blackwell, 1953.

     

  • Notes on Mutopia

    Istvan Csicsery-Ronay

    Science Fiction Studies
    DePauw University
    icronay@depauw.edu

     

    Mutopia

     

    People move. We become refugees from violence, and exploitation, and poverty, and boredom. This has happened before. But before, we believed we would settle, or resettle, or die trying. Now we go around and around. We no longer believe there is settlement. Painful for the Enlightenment, for the point of the freedom of movement was to arrive at a destination: an ultimate home better than the birth-home. And the Enlightenment was to bring the ultimate home even to the provinces. It worked so well that now, even when folks live in one place for generations, the world migrates under them. The differences that once were ideologized into essences or principles are recognized to be mutable. High-speed computer and communications technologies have linked different peoples so closely that only “irrationally” protected cultural secrets can survive becoming currencies and stories in the information market. Fill in your own CNNtelepoliticsGoldCardtransnationalfrequentflyerhomeshoppingworldbeatprogrammedtrading HungarianhiphopcrackinBenares story. Bet on it: your parody is empirical, prime-time, your high-rez muezzins chant “in the name of Allah, The Compassionate, the Digital.”1 This is the Age of Absolute Oxymoron. Hang ten, this is a big one.

     

    Mutability is no longer about the physical body’s sad corruption, nor about the freshness of the New Thing. Enter Tao, exit Reason. To live in this flux, Zen demands mu, “unasking the question”–for the question invariably asks to preserve the unpreservable, in language of the reified present. What shall we call our culture of coping in this tide of historical samsara? Let us call it: mutopia.

     

    The Mountain of the Night

     

    When wanderings on the smooth spaces become intolerable, survivors seek magic mountains; spaces that become mountains by rising suddenly; or villages that disappear down a dead-end branch.

     

    The central plateau of southern Africa was ravaged for most of the 1820s by vast hordes of displaced peoples wandering from place to place, pillaging and devouring others to survive. The greatest of these groups, Mantatee’s Horde, numbered over 50,000. A small Sutu clan, led by their young leader, Msheshwe, was forced out of its area.

     

    Msheshwe was appalled at the destruction by which he was surrounded, and alone refused to join in the general pillaging. He gathered his clan, perhaps 2,000 people, and led them south, to the foothills of the Drakensberg (his grandfather Peete was eaten by cannibals on the way), and here he found a most unusual mountain. Thasa Bosiu--"The Mountain of the Night"--was a flat-topped hill in a deep, hidden valley with 150 acres of good pasture and a spring on the summit. The plateau was surrounded by a steep scarp with only three access trails. Msheshwe established his clan on top and supplied each trail with enormous mounds of boulders, which could be rolled down to break up attackers. Perched on this stronghold, he formed the only island of sanity in a sea of madness, and over the years was able to build his clan into the Basuto nation. He pieced it together from debris cast up in the general havoc, offering succor to the fragmented groups that eddied and swirled through the foothills. His security was greatly enhanced by a carefully planted rumor that the mountain grew to an immense height at night and subsided to its normal 300 feet during the day.2

    Solvitur ambulando

     

    The past is the natural place to look for the seeds of utopia. The future writes its record into the past. First, idealize pre-industrial agriculture–organicism, closeness to the earth, stewardship, co-operation. When it turns out that agriculture inspires oppressive customs to order settledness, the quest is for hunter-gatherness–even closer to the earth, which h-gs do not try to transform, living in happy communication with the animals, on the borders of faery. But h-gs are inclined to become herders, pastoralists, and the question of turf perpetually incites war over property and grazing privileges. Nay, the very war-machine. Where to next? Neanderthals, perhaps, long maligned, but possibly gentle giants wiped out by aggressive Cro-Magnons (i.e., us). Or even the earliest hominids in the Olduvai Eden.

     

    Bruce Chatwin, in The Songlines, reconstructs the epitome of this mobile paleo-utopia in his account of the songlines of Australian aboriginal peoples. According to Chatwin’s story, these peoples map the whole of the continent in songs that are to be sung while doing walkabouts, solitary treks that simultaneously restore the physical memory of the land to the human mind and insure that the society of spirits is kept alive and in touch with humanity. Each social group has its own songs, marking its territory–but there are peaceable overlaps: to cross another’s territory one must learn that people’s songs, languages. In essence, the aboriginal songlines both describe and contain the earth. They are a form of ambulatory Aleph, existing without cities, walls, farms or war-machines. Scarcity produces plenitude–Chatwin’s is the acme of the idealization of the desert, where each stone and creosote bush has an individuality that also helps the human mind orient itself, locate itself, and by doing so gives the world a definite location. Plums do not drop into our mouths, as in paleo-Sumer or the Abyssinian garden. In the desert, creation and art are not gifts, but work–work with gifts.

     

    My father’s castle

     

    My father’s native village, Zala, lies five kilometers from Tab, in the southwestern Hungarian county of Somogy. To reach it from Budapest, one takes a train to the resort town of Siófok on Lake Balaton, then climbs onto a county local, and passes a dozen villages until reaching the town of Tab. From there one either waits for one of the intermittent buses, takes one of the town’s half dozen taxicabs, or just walks, altogether about eight kilometers from the Tab station to the center of Zala.

     

    On a fine summer day, it is a sweet amble. The region, the valley of Little Koppány river, is a country of high, wooded hills rising out of rolling wheatfields. The road, which runs west out of Tab, is hedged with lombardy poplars. Poppies bloom in the roadside ditches. The sky is dramatic, in a homely way; Adriatic breezes mingle with the easterly winds of Europe. It’s a shady region. Even in hot summers cool, dark woods are never far away.

     

    The road to Zala is a spur off the main road, a long cul de sac ascending gradually up a gentle hill, through the tree-dense village, to the wheatfields at the northern perimeter. The three hundred or so villagers live from farming, hogs, and the vineyards; many commute to Tab for work and school. The quiet is dense, a pleasant pressure, like the cool damp when a hiker suddenly descends into a dale. The sounds don’t vary: yelping dogs, the muffled snarl of motorbikes and tractors on distant hills, the comically rhapsodic song of European robins. Enormous trees cool the air, which is heavy with the scent of boxwoods. There are no stores, no advertisements, few signs of any kind. A bus-stop, a couple traffic icons, an emblem of the national nature conservancy, and a plaque identifying the museum of the 19th Hungarian artist, Mihály Zichy, who was the proprietor of this and surrounding villages for most of the last century.

     

    The museum is Zala’s only worldly attraction. A dozen or so tourists come per week. The Zichy museum occupies about a third of the long, L-shaped, one-story manor house, which the villagers call “The Castle”; it houses Zichy’s studio, many of his paintings and drawings, his library, and objects he collected in his travels. The rest of the building was the family’s living quarters, before it was expropriated by the Communist regime in 1947. Then it was a village-council headquarters, then a cultural center, and finally, it was left alone to house the museum’s caretaker in a benignly neglected rustic hermitage. That caretaker was the artist’s granddaughter, my father’s mother, and so my grandmother. The Castle was my father’s house.

     

    In Turkestan

     

    For Chatwin, the fall is simply the decision to migrate toward the garden, the oasis, the apple orchard. If you do not go way back to the songlines, finding one’s location becomes the model of abstraction. Gurdjieff describes something like this in Meetings with Remarkable Men, in his account of a journey to a secret monastery in Turkestan.

     

    In Turkestan there are many of these monuments, which are very cleverly placed; without them, we travelers would have no possibility of orienting ourselves in this chaotic, roadless region. They are usually erected on some elevated spot so that, if one knows the general plan of their placement, they can be seen a long way off, sometimes even from a score of miles. They are nothing more than single high blocks of stone or simply long poles driven into the ground.Among the mountain folk there exist various beliefs concerning these monuments, such as the following: that at this spot some saint was either buried or taken up to heaven, that he killed the ‘seven-headed dragon’ there, or that something else extraordinary happened to him in that place. Usually the saint in whose name the monument was erected is considered the protector of the entire surrounding countryside, and when a traveler has successfully overcome any difficulty natural to the region–that is, escaped an attack by brigands or wild beasts, or has safely crossed a mountain or river, or surmounted any other danger–it is all attributed to the protection of this saint. And so any merchant, pilgrim or other traveler who has passed through these dangers brings to the monument some kind of offering in gratitude.

     

    It became an established custom to bring as an offering something which, as is believed there, would mechanically remind the saint of the prayers of the person who brought the offering. Accordingly, they bring gifts such as a piece of cloth, the tail of an animal or something else of the kind, so that, with one end tied or fastened to the monument, the other end can flutter freely in the wind.

     

    These things, moving in the wind, make the spot where the monument is placed visible to us travelers from a great distance. Whoever knows approximately the arrangement of these monuments can locate one of them from some elevated spot and make his way in its direction, and from it to the next, and so on. Without knowing the general pattern of their arrangement it is almost impossible to travel through these regions. There are no well-defined roads or footpaths and, if some paths do form themselves, then, owing to the sudden changes of weather and the ensuing snowstorms, they very quickly change or are totally effaced. So if these landmarks were not there, a traveller trying to find suitable paths would become so confused that even the most delicate compass would be of no help to him. It is possible to pass through these regions only by establishing the direction from monument to monument.3

     

    In this remarkable fusion of geography and allegory, Gurdjieff describes what Chatwin might have considered the origin of the fall–attributable less to human sin than to the restive demons of geology who created mountains, the first of the striated spaces; for in the mountains, the subtlety of the desert’s immanence and the precision of the walkabout becomes the drama of quest, transcendence and abstract monumentality. The markers are memorials to beings who have negotiated terrific ordeals and who can be mechanically induced to protect travelers who are essentially aliens wandering in the mountainous void. No singers, no songs, no step-for-step tracing and recreation of the path. Here the path is contingent, no compass can help, only the marker-monuments flapping in the wind on the promontories can guide the traveler. Gurdjieff’s own spiritual journey is congruent with his physical one. The monastery is the reward for an arduous and mysterious journey. The utopian home must be earned, by quest and ordeal.

     

    Home is homelessness

     

    Utopias may depict smiling toothpastes, sex with commodities (commodomy),4 the perfect organization of time and production, Carmelites discussing Powerbooks, radios of enlightenment, solar-powered metropoli–but they are not the same as the idyllic Land of Cocaigne. Utopias are images of home attained through rational agreement, worked-for, not merely found or granted. Post-dysfunctional. The relationship between the laws or customs of utopia and the utopians is an image of the human family, liberated from feudal violence, the Church, capitalism, collectivism, military occupation, Oedipal miseries, the recursive archetypes of mythology played out generation after generation in most families. Utopias are the image of alienation overcome. So said Ernst Bloch:

     

    Humankind still lives in prehistory everywhere, indeed everything awaits the creation of the world as a genuine one. The real genesis is not at the beginning, but at the end, and it only begins when society and existence become radical, that is, grasp themselves at the root. The root of history, however, is the human being, working, producing, reforming, and surpassing the givens around him or her. If human beings have grasped themselves and what is theirs, without depersonalization and alienation, founded in real democracy, then something comes into being in the world that shines into everyone's childhood and where no one has yet been--home.5

     

    This is the vision of bourgeois happiness, the spiritual joy of the rationalist, the terminal of history’s line. Unlike the idyll, where childhood pleasures absolve folks of adulthood, mortality, responsibility, work, self-consciousness, self-discipline, utopia is the home of enlightened division of labor, of happy abnegation of narcissism for the higher joy of collective harmony. It is life under the good father, or the good family council. Work is not only necessary, it is the highest joy of creating one’s own home constantly–redeemed production-lines replace songlines. Bloch inverts the Freudian slander that utopia is merely the sublimation of infantile erotic fantasies; for Bloch, those fantasies are merely inadequately understood messages from the telos of human existence. Nostalgia is but the anticipation of home when found.

     

    The idyll, even if it is the seed of utopia, is an enemy. For the idyll obviates all work but the work to create its conditions; after that, it’s all automatic–nature will nurture us. Even so, without an idyll, utopia is nothing: without a model of nature “redeemed” by care, second nature cannot be imagined.

     

    Jocoserious

     

    The dialectic of Utopia depends on a concrete ambiguity, a double introjection. On the one hand, there is social criticism, the negation of current bad social organization; on the other, an alternative model. The reader/player should feel that both are positive, concrete commentaries on social conditions and social ideals–and so they should be taken seriously, applied to conditions outside the text. On the other hand they are also parts of an aesthetic game, a playful demonstration of the limits of the conception of the real, by showing some limits inscribed in the utopian paradoxes and oxymorons.

     

    Two visions correspond to Utopia: on the one hand, a free play of imagination in its indefinite expansion measured only by the desire, itself infinite, of happiness in a space where the moving frontiers of its philosophical and political fictions would be traced; on the other hand, the exactly opposite closed totality rigorously coded with all the constraints and obligations of the law binding and closing a place with insuperable frontiers that would guarantee its harmonious functioning.6

     

    So social criticism cuts against the aesthetic game, each undermines and complements the other, neutralizing and fusing at rapid intervals. Each of these attitudes vibrates in and out of existence. No utopia appears without it, though their constructors might wish them to.

     

    Utopias allow the aesthetic and political attitudes, which are usually mutually exclusive universes of discourse, to play with each other, to spin around, and spin with each other. (Utopias are partial to circular motions. A new traveler is expected to make a circuit.) They question each other, without resolving things. They do not, even so, freeze into a reified dualism, which would merely trivialize both the aesthetic and the political by showing how pretentious they are as attitudes, each pretending to be complete without the other.

     

    A utopia is extremely serious play. It implies that there is no reduction beyond tension, beyond vibration–and that social-political action (the correction of wrongs in reality, etc.) and aesthetic constructions are both required, and the desirable reality is the one in which both will be possible and inseparable. Utopia, consequently, is only imaginable when social-historical moments converge with artistic-historical ones, when political action and art are considered equally vital.

     

    Utopia is always vanguard literature, but never avant-garde. Vanguard because it uses the most advanced contemporary concepts, aspirations, and vocabularies–cultural, social, scientific-technological, historical. Not avant-garde because is strives for clarity in its concepts; it is impermissible to fog up the intellectual game of carrying ideas to extremes with the anarchy of innovative expressions. It is the monument of times when imagination is thought compatible with political language.

     

    Changing Utopia?

     

    Can utopia change? May utopia change? In that renaissance of utopian discussions of the ’60s and early ’70s, these questions haunted attempts to articulate the goal of social revolution. Many of us would spend days and nights listening to philo-utopians talking about “utopian drive,” “utopian impulse,” “utopian energies.” The idea of a community of reason without force was displaced into the deep inner zone, the good psyche, the good unconscious, where it became a version of the life-principle. This was supposed to be a gain, moving the focus of utopia from mechanical world-historical forces or the social laws that Reason impels us to obey, to the zone of self and desire. Individual agency was restored, and utopias increasingly seemed to be about the fulfillment of the deepest personal longings. Rather than seeking to attain harmony through a rational, disciplined repression of personal desire for the higher social good–secularized caritas and agape–as was characteristic of classical utopias, good was to come of the recognition that one’s personal desires are one with others’. The logic of desire might be mystical, or psychoanalytic or Rousseauian–but from wherever the apparatus was derived, this logic pointed toward some supra-dialectical point where reason and desire meet, and the parallel lines, so long separated by the evil petty lords, would embrace and celebrate their union.

     

    Classical reason was stable, steady-state, immutable. Even if one could not inhabit its steadiness in one’s mutable body, the classical rationalist could be sure that it would not change, by definition. But desire–Dionysus and Eros–is changing and changeable. If Utopia is to be built by the contractors of desire, what is to keep desire from changing instantly to something new, dialectically “other,” unanticipated, leaving the city of accomplished love as dead as Chaco Canyon? What limits could be justified without a police force, and ultimately a police state. When will the contractors ever complete the job and just let us move in?

     

    The ’60s was a period of bona fide utopian energy–hundreds of thousands of people were actively trying to imagine an ideal society–thousands of theories, theologies, housing arrangements, mass movements for social change were created, reflecting the proliferating multiplicities of desire, and not only in advanced capitalist societies. In this milieu, utopian writing became more self-conscious and self-questioning than it had been since More. Utopian themes brought about a renaissance of science fiction (SF); the dystopian tradition that had dominated Western social fantasy for half a century now gave place to moral fantasies that engaged the dystopian critiques, and tried to create images of drastic social progress that were neither naive nor cynical.

     

    The ironic, or meta-utopias tried to imagine how the worst sins of human social life could be redeemed, while simultaneously allowing for the very faculty that inspired utopian longing in the first place: the will to change. Looking back, few of the works described as utopian from this period still strike one as utopian–the usual suspects: Le Guin’s The Dispossessed, Delany’s Triton, Russ’ The Female Man, Piercy’s Woman on the Edge of Time and the others. They seem more stories about the difficulty of conceiving an organized, self-administered ideal society than images of consummated societies. But did they ever claim to do the latter? Where would these writers–women, gays, non-Europeans–turn for such images? The utopian heyday in SF was in fact on the cusp of mutopia, when voices that had previously been excluded and utterly de-differentiated in the classical utopias undertook to write the story from the outside, to demonstrate its limits.

     

    An artist of exile

     

    My father is not an ironic man. He has had two main goals in life: to represent high liberal ideals for his nation, and to preserve his ancestral home. Despite forty years of exile in the United States, he has done well. Though he was the last heir of the ancestral lands, in the mid-40s, he participated in a major land reform, keeping only three villages, two of which, Zics and Zala, were the ancient family seats. After the end of World War II, he joined the government that defeated the Communists in open elections, and he was imprisoned with the leadership when that government was overthrown in 1947. With my mother and sister (I was not born yet) he escaped to Austria, and after wandering through postwar Europe, eventually found asylum in the US.

     

    My father was not an immigrant. For forty years he lived in the US anticipating the political changes that would allow him to return to his home. For most of my adult life, I knew him as an artist of exile. He never adopted US citizenship, preferring to be stateless. He never bought a house. He remained current in Hungarian political matters, and instructed my sister and me in Hungarian language and culture, so that when we returned we would be able to take our “rightful place” in the Hungarian elite without missing a step. He vowed not to set foot in the land until the Russian occupation troops had left. In 1989 he returned after free elections had been held.

     

    He immediately set about realizing his two goals. He became actively involved in rehabilitating the memory of the 1945-47 democratic government, and he set about recovering his house, Zala.

     

    The axis

     

    The first records of Zala’s existence, and the presence of my father’s family, date from the last years of the 13th century, but historians have projected them back at least to the Mongol invasions of 1241 and probably to the Magyar settlement of the Danube basin in 896. One can surmise that the family has owned and lived on the land in this region for about a thousand years, surviving the Mongol, Turkish, Hapsburg, and Russian occupations, and many periods of domestic chaos. The Hungarian historical ideal, which is basically the self-image of the progressive nobles who constructed its dominant narrative, is balanced between pride at outlasting historical catastrophes, and pride at constructing vibrant modernities. Putatively, Zala was a quiet and excellent model that a great artist built against historical catastrophe through his art and his stewardship.

     

    An American homesteader may be absolutely devoted to his land because it represents his personal labor and independence. But to the heir of a thousand-year old property the feeling has little to do with labor, the body, with personal will. The place is a shrine to continuity, to endurance, which with time takes on the character of necessity, even fate. The heir becomes merely a vessel of the experiment in immortality. To break the link is inconceivably shameful. The village, land and house are vertical spaces, they extend through historical time, but their axis is stronger than a backbone. The most striking thing about Zala is its population of towering chestnuts and oaks. But progressives, beyond merely preserving the past, are expected to improve it. Putatively more important than economic innovations in farming techniques was the improvement of the national mentality, and Zichy performed admirably in this respect, turning the family’s endurance into art and worldly fame. For family, nation, and class, Zala is not only a physical location, but a representative one.

     

    Tired of trees

     

    Alternatively, the thousand-year old past is a haunting. To accept it is to be elected among the ghosts.

     

    To be rhizomorphous is to produce stems and filaments that seem to be roots, or better yet connect with them by penetrating the trunk, but put them to strange new uses. We're tired of trees. We should stop believing in trees, roots, and radicles. They've made us suffer too much.7

    Big Flood, Little Flood

     

    This is a story of patrimony and patriarchy. I do have a mother, whom I love, but hers is another story, a very different one from the one I must tell you now. Yet this is less a story of maleness as opposed to femaleness, fathers as opposed to mothers, landlords versus villagers, or the nobility versus the misera contribuens plebs, than it is about the desire to establish and hold onto a place of one’s own on the banks of a world that flows like a great stream, and the suspicion that the banks are merely slower channels of the stream.

     

    But I will tell this much. My mother was born in one of the smooth spaces, the northeastern edge of the Hungarians lowlands, where a tangle of rivers feed into the Tisza. Her father died when she was very young, and she lived with her mother and six siblings in a plain village within sight of the Carpathians. As a girl, she watched the rivers overrun their banks in a great flood, submerging villages, vineyards, orchards and forests for a hundred miles around. These floods were matters of legend. Villages are named for them: Big Flood and Little Flood, for example. Ever since, floods inspire special terror and pity in her.

     

    Taidu

     

    Like nomadology, utopia is also the opposite of history. Let’s be clear, utopia is the nomads’ dream world. Here are excerpts of Polo’s description of the new capital built by Kublai Khan, Taidu, the present-day Beijing.

     

    Taidu is built in the form of a square with all its sides of equal length and a total circumference of twenty-four miles....I assure you that the streets are so broad and straight that from the top of the wall above one gate you can see along the whole length of the road to the gate opposite. The city is full of fine mansions, inns, and dwelling houses. All the way down the sides of every main street there are booths and shops of every sort. All the building sites throughout the city are square and measured by the rule; and on every site stand large and spacious mansions with ample courtyards and gardens....Every site or block is surrounded by good public roads; and in this way the whole interior of the city is laid out in squares like a chess-board with such masterly precision that no description can do justice to it.8

     

    Kublai Khan had Taidu built from scratch, across the river from the old city, from which he had much of the population transferred to the new one. The palace at the center of the imperial city shows similar symmetry. What would possess the Khan of Khans, heir of Genghis Khan and ruler of the vastest, flattest empire in the world, the Nomad chosen by God, to build a city so geometrical, regular, abstract? I have only hypotheses.

     

    We know that the Central Asian nomads organized their armies according to strict symmetries of unit number, and deployed armies in all four directions. The Huns are even said to have color-coded their armies, with whole armies riding horses of the color appropriate to the direction against which they were moving. Like Assyrian cities, Taidu was built in the image of the camp.9 Clearly this is an aspect of the war-machine. At the same time, nomads of the smooth spaces were free to build cities according to whatever design they pleased. Thus they–the Uighurs, the Mongols, others–could construct cities that were already abstractions, perfectly imagined, since very little in the steppes’ topography would force constraints. Unconstrained, the despot-nomads created utopian cities in reality. They lacked only utopian humans.

     

    World Upgrade (was: Cyborg Dreams)

     

    The cyborg is the solidest citizen of Mutopia.

     

    It has been ten years since Donna Haraway published one of the most influential essays on the postmodern condition, “Manifesto for Cyborgs.” Haraway was able, as no one else on the Left was at the time, to make radical feminists and their allies aware that the staid dualistic categories of humanist moral-political analysis were fast becoming completely obsolete. In a world hellbent on universal upgrades and recombinations, it was no longer credible to oppose the natural, the organic, and the female, on the one hand, to the artificial, the scientific-technological, and the male on the other. Politics would have to be rethought to work with machines, and with the demolition of categorical distinctions between genders, between animals and humans, between artifice and nature. Accompanying the utopianism of science into the ash-can of history would be all salvation mythologies, with their mystical plots: from innocent origin (idyll) to Fall (history) to apocalyptic salvation (Utopia or Bust).

     

    The cyborg is a perfect mythology for generations that witness not only the collapse of the corrupt cloudcastle ideologies of the Western tradition, but also all memory of the moral advantages it might once have afforded through its conceptions of equality and empirical judgment. Haraway’s Manifesto does a little bit of warning about the dangers of the cyborg-economy, and a lot of magical encouragement about the way the new technologies will liberate women from the phallogocentric God-story. Fathers and The Father play a major role in Haraway’s deeply psychoanalytic reduction of Western history. She is a forerunner, unable to enter the cyborg Canaan because she remembers her Fathers too well. The cyborg descendants (of all genders, not just female) begin with a blue screen–oppressive patriarchal super-egos are so clearly absurd that the very idea of a legitimate patrimony is farcical to cyborgs and cyperpunks. Haraway did not know how weak the walls of Utopia were. For now self-conscious cyborgs are elected to high office, and the contest for bases on which cyborgs might judge good from bad has begun. There is nothing in the cyborg that pre-programs its judgment–not families, not schools, not nations, not even the desire for survival.

     

    To be at home in Mutopia is to be a cyborg. Haraway is openly ambivalent about the cyborg-persona: it is the agent of the high-tech war-machine (a nomad persona, in Deleuze-Guattari’s terms), but it is also utopian. Its utopia bypasses the wish for the idyll, for Zala, for Taidu:

     

    The cyborg does not dream of community on the model of the organic family, this time without the oedipal project. The cyborg would not recognize the Garden of Eden; it is not made of mud and cannot dream of returning to dust. Perhaps that is why I want to see if cyborgs can subvert the apocalypse of returning to nuclear dust in the manic compulsion to name the Enemy. Cyborgs are not reverent; they do not re-member the cosmos. They are wary of holism, but needy for connection--they seem to have a natural feel for united front politics, but without the vanguard party.10

     

    The cyborg is thus a networker, able to pragmatically interface with whatever port is deemed desirable and practicable at the time. In the continuum of mutations, what god will guarantee that any good choices will be made? No guarantees. So let’s cut the smart and happy talk. Down with the Old Flesh! Long live the New Flesh!

     

    For the past ten years we have been living in an ecstatic celebration of Mutopia, an orgy of initiation. Communications media are naturally inclined to celebrate it, since they are ostensibly its prime beneficiary. Politics, science, art all feel the tidal sway. No matter what fundamentalist jihad makes itself known, in the context of mutations it can only be a test, a thrilling agon in the headlong proliferation of moiré programs, infinitely expanding hypermedia of mutually interpenetrating operational structures. Capitalism obviously thrives, since high-tech permits the doubling and redoubling of the world in the form of electronic, “informational” commodities. Far from the commodomy of adtopia, consumers now can fuse with objects as Milton said angels do with each other.

     

    Three strategies dominate: forgetting utopia, seeking constant upgrades in order to participate in the General Upgrade, and negating the negation. To forget utopia, eliminate parents, teachers, nations, children, mates, villages and mountains, romances, all desire to escape history. Eliminate retarding identity. Upgrade reality with VR; upgrade technology with AI; upgrade the body with prosthetics, vitalizing drugs, and genetic engineering; upgrade sensibilities with Simstim; upgrade choice with the materialization of the imaginary. Upgrade life with the demolition of death.

     

    I am not much of a cyborg, here between the two stools of the bourgeois imaginary and the enchanted village of patriarchy. I do not think I will be able to cross over into the digital glow of the New Flesh. But I do not think I will die out. As the inventors of the future–Freud, Nietzsche, Marx, Darwin–are systematically hyperrealized, I find myself back with Kant the cyborg–who set his life to the Königsberg clock–asking the basic questions: what do we know, what should we do and what can we hope for?

     

    The third strategy in the Age of Absolute Oxymoron: vanish from the hype.

     

    My City Was Gone11

     

    The classical and medieval city was protected from the wilderness by its walls. Outside the fortifications were the wild things: panthers, bandits, demons, weather, witches at the crossroads, Dogheaded Tartars. Inside the walls human beings set up their second nature, an environment made in the human image, a secure system of shelter for production and consumption. Civilization is city life. The Mongols were accustomed to burn down the cities of those settled people who refused to accept Mongol hegemony, usually by firing flaming arrows and projectiles into the wooden edifices. Their success was drastically limited by stone fortresses.

     

    City walls are important for Utopias. Since it is important for them to be articulated from wild cities like New York or William Gibson’s Sprawl, utopias–and dystopias, of course, which are collapsed utopias–require travelers to negotiate high mountain barriers like More’s Utopia, or true walls, like the Green Wall of Zamyatin’s We, or internal walls, as in The Dispossessed, walls of time in The Time Machine or bubble-domes, like Triton. The utopian wall is like the archaic city wall. Ur was said to have walls 40 meters thick, Babylon had walls 25 meters high.12

     

    But notice how feeble the Utopian walls are, to the point that recent utopias seem to be more about the weakness of walls than their power to shelter the great experiment. Someone is always breaking through, transgressing, making an adventure of it. Some wild thing will eventually chase us through. Triton’s walls are breached repeatedly by the dystopian Earth, which is bad news on an airless moon. Shevek exists to breach the walls.

     

    There is no protection against the sky. Hiroshima’s rad-hot desert is the starting point of the mutopian city. The new nomads, they are us, for we prefer the smoothest of all spaces for our war machine–the sky. The nomad’s milieu is the unarticulated sky. What shall we do? Build cities in the plain? Retreat into cyberspace, the Metaverse, and rebuild encryption-walls there? Or will we determine walls are useless, and forget utopia? The walls of Ur had nothing on the television sky.

     

    Work and Net

     

    An important moment in the recent development of the rational deconstruction of “humanism,” i.e., the critical rationality of the Enlightenment, came with the formulation of the difference between a work and a text.13 Work, of course, was characterized by labor and all its historical contingencies, with mythologies of individuality, authorial proprietorship, the authority of origins, the mystery of special knowledge in a particular place–a fictional, quasi-place: the pages and lines of a “work.” Text was the entire symbolic domain seen as if from the perspective of Martian anthropologists with a collective mind, unable to and uninterested in making petty proprietary distinctions. Might as well study the Earth by transcribing all the deeds in all the Halls of Record. Text is the weave of all symbolic aspects, the tapestry, the net. The Net.

     

    When we read works of art and of humanist thought in preference to hypertextual flea-hopping on the Net we act as if we are those toga-clad utopian peasants discussing the categorical imperative while digging sewers of gold. To read a work is to think as a utopian. The utopian ideal of the Enlightenment was that each book should represent the rational-aesthetic design of the universe in the mind, and that all books together would create an even greater model. The closet utopian is the one who believes if she or he can only read enough of the best works, he or she will know the truth, and understand it.

     

    The library of books is the Enlightened Empire. As a graduate student I would sometimes dream of surviving a nuclear war by living with my fellow students in the underground floors of the university’s library, raising blanket-tents in the aisles, eating from vending machines among the like-minded, and with all the time in the world to read the books in my tent.

     

    When the Enlightenment had nothing more to undermine, when church dogma and bigotry, aristocratic and chauvinistic violence, bourgeois exploitation and ideology had withered before its arguments, it turned, as it always did, against the powers-that-be. But bourgeois democratic powers justify themselves through critical reason. So the Enlightenment began to undermine reason; and so, naturally, itself. That’s the breaks. Thus begins the end of legitimacy. What matters now is not the straightness and purity of connection, but how many things something can be connected to. The library of books gives way to the Net.

     

    Textual islands rise up here and there, archipelagoes of quotations, aphorisms, fragments, and we sail from one to another, trying to connect the dots, to get something sweet to eat, to make love in the shade. That is what I am doing here and now: hopping from island to island, lily-pad to lily-pad, oasis to oasis, enclave to enclave. I am anachronistic, but what counts is: I am quick.

     

    In Mutopia it is sometimes hard to justify atavistic “humanism”–code for intellectual conservatism. The “human being,” so clearly now part of a network of mutually intersecting forces, a moiré of rhythms, cannot justifiably hold on to the notion of an integral self, just as it must jettison fantasies of utopian earthly bliss. What then am I doing here, quoting and invoking the dead?

     

    This is good advice:
    watch yourself writ terribly small,
    like beetles climbing in the mowed-through thatch.14

    Heartland Artillery

     

    My father once told me: the only good reason to leave one’s home is artillery.

     

    I am sitting in my yard in Indiana. It is late morning, early summer, unusually temperate. Clear sunlight shines on maples and green-ash trees that rise up like ygdrasails, and filters through the leaves to the grass. The treetops sway against the blue. My back yard is a half-acre, enclosed by hedges of trees and dense shrubs. I have let whatever wants to grow, I just mow it at regular intervals to keep the peace. Violets have taken over a corner–I have been advised to extirpate them; I’m told they’re weeds. But they shimmer like nothing else in nature. Where the soil is exposed to the sun, the grass is long and rich, grazing material studded with wildflowers. Where the shade is heavy, there’s variety: subtle clumping mosses, crewcut grasses, wild onions, intermittent milkweeds. I have left clusters of grasses and flowers around the bases of the trees for the fairies.

     

    The cats are lolling in the dappled light. Redpoll finches tear through space like happily demented bullets. My young son’s baseball glove lies in the grass, palm up. “Homeowners” are mowing their lawns. Children are playing in the park court–American kids, booming dub, loud, coarse, obscene, insecure and confident at the same time, dunking and flirting.

     

    I “own” this micro-Arcadia. I am the first member of my family to have actually bought a family house; my progenitors always inherited them. I am, superficially at least, an American success. I have attained a good portion of the American Dream, the realized utopia. In this tucked away fold of the midwest, in a town of 8000, my academic salary allows me, mirabile dictu, to own this plot. The town is peaceful, white, solidly Republican. It is unlikely to be surrounded by tanks, or shelled. It is unlikely that the militia will occupy the courthouse. Our street is not on the July 4th parade route. It is one-way.

     

    For the denizens of the fold it is a green black hole; the suffering of Sarajevo, Cabrini Green and Chiba City are beyond the event-horizon. For those outside, it is a fortress, an idyll, a utopia, the VR-scenario of materialized delusion. The walls of privilege and exploitation are invisible in the achieved utopia. But in mutopia, all walls are weak.

     

    Aleph in Wonderland

     

    Calvino holds that utopian textuality collapsed, losing its power as a normative organized alternative to reality, falling into SF.

     

    The vision of a universal future has been diverted from political thought, and confined to a minor kind of literature, science fiction, though here, too, it is a negative utopia that dominates, a journey into the infernal regions of the future. Thus this way of writing, which aimed to extend its arrangement of signs even to the arrangement of things, has been taken prisoner by another literary strategy, which is more immediately effective emotionally: a story of distant wanderings and adventure that is capable of giving us rapid glimpses of tomorrow but has no power to change our way of living here in this world. Did utopia ever have this power? Certainly for Campanella it did, and maybe also for the outlandish Saint-Simonians of Enfantin. Actually to see a possible different world that is already made and in operation is to be filled with indignation against a world that is unjust and to reject the idea that it is the only possible one.15

     

    Classical utopia is what Marin calls a game of space. In his Marxian-structuralist mapping of More’s book, Marin describes the way Utopia plays off a certain allegorical imaginary construction of space in the early Explorations period. Later Marin will argue with Certeau that the true modernity of utopia is in the narrative movement across spaces coded to represent an ultimate oxymoron: an infinite horizon of possibility and an abject focal point of control.16 From this perspective utopias are merely logical-mathematical fantasy machines in which infinity is contained in a point. Utopias are Alephs.

     

    No one understood this better than Borges, whose work contains the black box where utopia becomes SF, and vice versa. Katherine Hayles has described his characteristic technique like this:

     

    His strategy is seduction, for he progresses to [a revelation of the essential fictionality of the real] by several seemingly innocuous steps. The first step in his strategy is to transform a continuity into a succession of points, and to suggest that these points form a sequence; there follows the insinuation that the sequence progresses beyond the expected terminus to stretch into infinity; then the sequence is folded back on itself, so that closure becomes impossible because of the endless, paradoxical circling of a self-referential system. This complex strategy (which may not appear in its entirety in any given story) has the effect of dissolving the relation of the story to reality, so that the story becomes an autonomous object existing independently of any reality. The final step is to suggest that our world, like the fiction, is a self-contained entity whose connection with reality is problematic or nonexistent.17

     

    Thus the sequence of history is extrapolated toward infinity: this is the dynamic “future” of SF, which then folds back onto the present, enclosing but also deforming the point of origin. Stanislaw Lem offers a complementary interpretation:

     

    [Borges] never creates a new, freely invented paradigm structure. He confines himself strictly to the initial axioms supplied by the cultural history of mankind. He is a mocking heretic of culture because he never transgresses its syntax. He only extends those structural operations that are, from a logical point of view, "in order," i.e., they have never been seriously "tried out" because of extralogical reasons--but that is of course another matter altogether.18

     

    Thus for Lem Borges cannot be a true writer of SF, because the structures he works his algorithmic transformational strategy on are entirely those of received “cultural-mythical sources.” The Borgesian fantastic is an always already completed library. The SF writer should know, according to Lem, that these structures “are on the decline, dying off as far as their power to interpret and explain a world undergoing further changes is concerned.” Borges cannot offer more than play “with the sacral, the awe-inspiring, the sublime and the mysterious [received] from our grandfathers.”19Lem concludes:

     

    Even this great master of the logically immaculate paradox cannot "alloy" our world's fate with his own work. He has explicated to us paradises and hells that remain forever closed to man. For we are building newer, richer, and more terrible paradises and hells; but in his books Borges knows nothing of them.20

     

    In his cyberspace novels, William Gibson transforms Borges’s Aleph from a subversive imaginary to a diminished, simulated utopia on the threshold of Mutopia. We see in the invention of cyberspace and the cyborg an extreme development of the infinite productivity of “reality” that Baudrillard associated with the second stage of simulation, the one he associates with SF; the sampling, doubling and recombination of real bits continues apace toward the fusion of mechanical and neural reconstructions of the planes of experience. When the algorithms of simulation are part of the phenomena folks experience, when we see them in the noisy treetops or the tatoos of raccoons, then we will have phase 3 in full, reality as virtuality, in which only Buddhists and Taoists, for whom stability was always an illusion, will find their footing.

     

    In Gibson, and in most cyberpunk SF, cyberspace remains an alien world. No matter how thrilling the ride of Neuromancer, Gibson’s protagonists serve alien gods. The console-cowboy Case’s famous rejection of the “meat” is a boy-thing, and it does not last. (We hear in Mona Lisa Overdrive that he has married and has four kids.21) The other rejectors of the meat-world in Gibson’s fiction either come back to the body, recognizing the value of mortality and limits, or they are limbic freaks who offer us no hopes (Dixie Flatline, Finn, Lise of “The Winter Market”). In Count Zero, even the remainders of Neuromancer‘s Meta-AI seek connection with the meat through a “biosoft” that leads to direct interface between humans’ organic brains and the computer-cores of the data-matrix. By the time we reach Mona Lisa Overdrive, such a biosoft offers the possibility of a concretely existing pocket universe, an Aleph, in which the whole of the matrix is reproduced microcosmically in a utopian register. But this Aleph, unlike the utopian imaginary of More and Borges, is a mortal body, powered by a battery pac on the drain.

     

    In Gibson’s cyberspace trilogy we can read a full Deleuzian historical dialectic of SF and utopia, replayed in the matrix. Neuromancer’s smooth space: Case the would-be nomad. Count Zero‘s colonial space: no longer a smooth grid with cities on the plain, the matrix is chunky space, inhabited by nodes of consciousness in a web. Like cyberfarmers the cybervoodoo spirits intentionally manipulate knots of energy, and indeed appear to be beginning a process of colonizing human space, “growing” biosofts and having them “planted” in brains like Angela Mitchell’s. By a not unusual reversal, Gibson has made these diasporan spirits of former enslavement the colonial masters of the new New World.22 The empty grid is gone; in Count Zero, cyberspace is folded and inhabited. The AI empire can collapse and fade from its internal stresses, but it is no longer prey to nomads. By Mona Lisa Overdrive, cyberspace has become a sea in which pocket universes float, with mysterious neural wormholes connecting them. The Aleph that Bobby Newmark steals from 3Jane Tessier-Ashpool is an ideal world created and maintained by technological means, it is neither smooth nor chunky, but involuted and hyperreal. There can be no more nomads, hence no more utopias, since containment is total. So total there is nothing outside the Alephs. But what if the Alephs began to move, what would space be then? At the end of Mona Lisa Overdrive, the protagonists of the three novels (Finn from Neuromancer, Bobby and Angie from Count Zero, the Aleph itself from Mona Lisa Overdrive) inhabiting the Aleph climb into a limo to make an obscure rendez-vous with a like-being, another Aleph perhaps, in the constellation Alpha-Centauri.

     

    Tai-Chi Chuan

     

    It is said that the Chinese martial and meditational art, Tai-Chi Chuan, was founded by the monk Chang San-Feng, who lived during the late Yüan Dynasties and the early Ming. By applying the Taoist principles of yin and yang, Chang created an art that used softness, resiliency and balance to defeat aggression. In one legend,

     

    [t]he Mongolian royal family of the Yüan Dynasty were hunting in the Wu-Tang Mountain as Chang was picking herbs to be used as medicine. He was quite aware of the Mongolians being good archers, but he did not like their pompous attitude. While he stood there watching, the Mongols ordered him to walk away. This made Chang angry, but he spoke to the prince with a smile saying, "Your highness hunts with bow and arrow; I use my bare hands." Suddenly a pair of hawks flew across the woods, and Chang jumped some several feet high and caught them. He dropped to the ground like a falling leaf, without making any noise. The prince was shocked. Chang placed the birds on each of his palms. No matter how hard the birds tried to fly, they could not lift themselves. Chang then said, "I have mercy on living creatures; I do not want to hurt the birds." As soon as he withdrew his palms, the hawks flew into the sky. One of the prince's followers was angry and drew his bow to shoot an arrow at Chang. The master opened his mouth and caught the arrow with his teeth; then holding the arrow with his index and middle fingers, he threw it towards a tree. "I have no need of any violent weapons," said he. The arrow struck and was buried deep in the tree.23

    Autopia

     

    The US is utopia achieved. We should not judge their crisis as we would judge our own, the crisis of the old European countries. Ours is a crisis of historical ideals facing up to the impossibility of their realization. Theirs is the crisis of an achieved utopia, confronted with the problem of its duration and permanence. The Americans are not wrong in their idyllic conviction that they are at the center of their worlds, the supreme power, the absolute model for everyone. And this conviction is not so much founded on natural resources, technologies, and arms, as on the miraculous premise of a utopia made reality, of a society which, with a directness we might judge unbearable, is built on the idea that it is the realization of everything the others have dreamt of--justice, plenty, rule of law, wealth, freedom. It knows this, it believes in it, and in the end, the others have come to believe in it too. In the present crisis of values, everyone ends up turning towards the culture which dared to forge ahead and, by a theatrical masterstroke, turn those values into reality, towards that society which, thanks to the geographical and mental break effected by emigration, allowed itself to believe it could create an ideal world from nothing.24

    Losing and Losing

     

    In my late twenties I lived in New York City. To cope with my suburban anxiety in the big bad city, I studied Tai Chi Chuan with a student of the great Professor Cheng Man-ch’ing. My adulthood began on those days, when I first heard the Taoist notion that my teacher sometimes called “investing in loss” and sometimes “learning by losing and losing.” Lao Tze says: “Yield and overcome.” The rule for thriving in Mutopia: losing and losing.

     

    Nostalgia for the Imaginary

     

    There is no real and no imaginary except at a certain distance. What happens when this distance, even the one separating the real from the imaginary, begins to disappear and to be absorbed by the model alone?It is at its maximum in utopias, where a transcendent world, a radically different universe, is portrayed (in all cases, the separation from the real world is maximal; it is the utopian island in contrast to the continent of the real). It is diminished considerably in SF: SF only being, most often, an extravagant projection of, but qualitatively different from, the real world of production. Extrapolations of mechanics or energy, velocities or powers approaching infinity–SF’s fundamental patterns and scenarios are those of mechanics, of metallurgy, and so forth. Projective hypostasis of the robot. (In the limited universe of the pre-Industrial era, utopias counterposed an ideal alternative world. In the potentially limitless universe of the production era, SF adds by multiplying the world’s own possibilities.)

     

    It is totally reduced in the era of implosive models. Models no longer constitute an imaginary domain with reference to the real; they are, themselves, an apprehension of the real, and thus leave no room for any kind of transcendentalism.25

     

    Utopia is followed by SF, the realistic projection of real conditions; then SF is followed by…what? The realistic production of utopian conditions? But if the utopian imaginary is infinitely removed from reality, what is a realistic utopian imaginary? Surely it is Virtual Reality. For VR is the domain in which the model creates the experience of reality without necessarily referring to, or using, stimuli from the raw real. Utopia has been replaced by the habitable paraspace of quasi-utopian VR.

     

    Like the European Jews of the New Left, and like Calvino, (and myself), Baudrillard is nostalgic for the imaginary. Even this nose-thumber at European culture is shocked by the US, for the transgressions and atrocities Baudrillard allowed himself to imagine in the magic theater of his theoretical works appear all around him there, insistently solid and real. Either one abdicates theory by accepting the hegemony of Realization, or one resists by holding onto the virtue of irony and withdraws to the Carcassonne of the imagination and waits for the sic transit.

     

    We shall remain nostalgic utopians, agonizing over our ideals, but balking, ultimately, at their realization, professing that everything is possible, but never that everything has been achieved. Yet that is what America asserts. Our problem is that our old goals--revolution, progress, freedom--will have evaporated before they were achieved, before they became reality. Everything that has been heroically played out and destroyed in Europe in the name of Revolution and Terror has been realized in its simplest, most empirical form on the other side of the Atlantic (the utopia of wealth, rights, freedom, the social contract, and representation). Similarly, everything we have dreamed in the radical name of anti-culture, the subversion of meaning, the destruction of reason and the end of representation, that whole anti-utopia which unleashed so many theoretical and political, aesthetic and social convulsions in Europe, without ever actually becoming a reality (May '68 is one of the last examples) has all been achieved here in the simplest, most radical way. Utopia has been achieved here and anti-utopia is being achieved: the anti-utopia of unreason, of deterritorialization, of the indeterminacy of language and the subject, the neutralization of all values, of the death of culture. America is turning all this into reality, and it is going about it in an uncontrolled, empirical way. All we do is dream and, occasionally, try and act out our dreams. America, by contrast, draws the logical, pragmatic consequences from everything that can possibly be thought. It does not ironize upon the future or destiny: it gets on with turning things into material realities.26

     

    Once the real has been exhausted, you have to move on, and colonize the imagination. Just do it! Do it yourself! Autopia or Bust!

     

    Goodbye, Labor Theory

     

    I must be clear that I’m not speaking of Blois or the Hofburg, nor of Castle Dracula. The building itself is not a thousand years old, of course. Zichy renovated it in 1880 into its present form. “The castle” is in fact a small manor house built in consonance with the dominant style of peasant architecture. A single raised-story, whitewashed, roofed with red clay shingles, in the shape of an L. Inside are about ten large rooms. Indoor plumbing was introduced only about ten years ago, although power lines were brought in in the ’30s. The property attached to this modest edifice consists now only of two small parks, to the east and the west.

     

    I first saw this ancient place when I was nineteen, on my first visit to the country. For the most part, I perceived it as I have described it, as a child of emigrants might visit his father’s village in the old country, the old people, and sniff some of the ancient air. A very nice place. I have always felt some resistance to my father’s grand plan of returning to his homeland and picking up where he left off. I grew up in the States, came of age in the Sixties, became comfortable with the atmosphere of social movements, Black culture, rejection of class privilege. I used to see Zala from this perspective, allergic to any hereditary patriarchal role. In essence, I viewed my father’s project as quixotic, even if it were attainable in reality. The Restoration.

     

    It is irritating, at the end of the century of democracy and socialism, to have to imagine the archaic subject-position of the landed gentry as a positive thing. When I thought as a utopian, I knew this land and house should go “back to the people,” the ones who built and worked it. But at the end of the century of totalitarian democracy and socialism, the labor-theory of value no longer seems like the voice of God. The villagers themselves say they would like the old owner to return–suitably diminished. They too believe the place has its historical power, and in some situations class matters less than conservation. Those should own the land who care for it. And they don’t mind that someone else is saddled with the burden.

     

    My father writes that I have been named heir of this estate.

     

    In the night

     

    It is 3:30 a.m. The houses on my street have been dark since midnight, every one but ours. In the backyard, my wife is following a family of raccoons back to their tree from the porch where she had dinner ready for them, as she does every night. A ray of light from a flashlight bobs up and down in the darkness. Hoosiers despise coons, and delight in hunting them. But there are no coons in Europe, and my Hungarian wife is now a visitor to another planet, making contact with aliens.

     

    It is a mellow night. Fireflies, which are also unknown in Europe, have floated up to the treetops. It is wonderfully still. Etti (whose name is the female form of Attila) insists that the wild fauna recognize her as a friend. I, independent male, prefer to watch the beasts do their thing without interfering. I think I am an observer, but I am actually reveling. For Etti reveling would never be enough. She is intent on creating a peaceable kingdom in her yard, where the cat will lie down with the squirrel, and the possum with the raccoon.

     

    The raccoons sought us out. One night, the coon mother trundled in the back door and liberated a bag of dry catfood for her brood. Now they stay to be petted, they display distinct personalities, and they have lost their skittishness.

     

    This mild night on the edge of the woods is not much in political terms. It is not a new thing. I am sure many women, and even a few men, try to form peaceable kingdoms in the liminal zone between the wild and the house. We have come to know the raccoons’ tree-hollow and the nest of the stag beetles; sometimes we catch the new beetles, glowing like gems, emerging from the ground and radiating outward from the center.

     

    Until quite recently, Etti did not know precisely where she was born and to this day she has not seen the place. She knew the name of the town, but for a number of historically complex reasons she was not sure exactly where to look for it. She was born on the retreat, as her father’s Hungarian troops and their families were fleeing the advancing Russian artillery. Delivered while her father held the terrified Austrian obstetrician at gunpoint, she stayed no more than a couple of hours in that particular Krummau or Krumlov; in the wink of an eye she was traveling west on a military wagon, her parents driving themselves to meet up with, and surrender to, the American army.

     

    Etti’s birth town was in Bohemia, then Austria, then Czechoslovakia, then Nazi-occupied Austria, then again Czechoslovakia, and now Czechia. It did not move. Europe moved.

     

    Her migrations have brought her here, for the moment, to this night. Her child is sleeping upstairs in a cozy American house. Her flashlight beams up into the branches. The coon mother calls down.

     

    A utopia of fine dust

     

    Certainly, in recent times, my need to come up with some tangible representation of future society has declined. This is not because of some vitalistic assertion of the unforeseeable, or because I am resigned to the worst, or because I have realized that philosophical abstraction is a better indication of what may be hoped for, but maybe simply because the best that I can still look for is something else, which must be sought in the folds, in the shadowy places, in the countless involuntary effects that the most calculated system creates without being aware that perhaps the truth lies right there. The utopia I am looking for today is less solid than gaseous: it is a utopia of fine dust, corpuscular, and in suspension.27

     

    Mu.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Bruce Sterling, “The Compassionate, the Digital,” Globalhead (New York: Bantam, 1994) 65.

     

    2. Donald Morris, The Washing of the Spears: A History of the Rise of the Zulu Nation under Shakra and Its Fall in the Zulu War of 1879 (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1965) 50.

     

    3. G.I. Gurdjieff, Meetings with Remarkable Men (New York: E.P. Dutton, 1969) 151-52.

     

    4. “…commodomy” used by Richard Simon, “Advertising as Literature: The Utopian Fiction of the American Marketplace,” Texas Studies in Language and Literature, 22.2 (1980): 155-74.

     

    5. Ernst Bloch: from The Principle Hope, quoted in Tom Moylan, “The Locus of Hope: Utopia versus Ideology,” Science-Fiction Studies 27 (1982): 159.

     

    6. Louis Marin, “Frontiers of Utopia: Past and Present,” Critical Inquiry 19 (Winter 1993): 403-04; 410-11.

     

    7. Gilles Deleuze-Felix Guattari, A Thousand Plateuas: Capitalism and Schizophrenia (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987) 15.

     

    8. Marco Polo, The Travels of Marco Polo (New York: Abaris Books, 1982) 109.

     

    9. Horst De La Croix, Military Considerations in City Planning: Fortifications (New York: George Braziller, 1972) 16.

     

    10. Donna Haraway, “A Manifesto for Cyborgs,” Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Nature (New York: Routledge, 1991): 151.

     

    11. Chrissie Hynde, “My City Was Gone,” Learning to Crawl, Sire Records, 1983.

     

    12. De La Croix, 15.

     

    13. See Roland Barthes, “From Work to Text,” The Rustle of Language, Trans. Richard Howard (New York: Hill and Wang, 1986): 49-55.

     

    14. Istvan Csicsery-Ronay, “The Cool Blades.”

     

    15. Italo Calvino, The Uses of Literature, Trans. Patrick Creagh (San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1987) 247-48.

     

    16. Louis Marin, Utopiques. Jeux d’Espaces (Paris: Les Editions Minuit, 1973).

     

    17. Katherine Hayles, The Cosmic Web. Scientific Field Models and Literary Strategies in the 20th Century (Ithaca: Cornell, 1984) 143.

     

    18. Stanislaw Lem, Microworlds: Writings on Science Fiction and Fantasy (San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1984) 237.

     

    19. Lem, 241-42.

     

    20. Lem, 241-42.

     

    21. William Gibson, Mona Lisa Overdrive (New York: Vintage, 1988) 137.

     

    22. See Kathleen Biddick, “Humanist History and the Haunting of Virtual Worlds: Problems of Memory and Rememoration,” Genders 18 (Winter 1993): 47-66.

     

    23. Tsung Hwa, Jou The Tao of Tai Chi Chuan (New York: Charles E. Tuttle Co., 1980) 8.

     

    24. Jean Baudrillard, America (New York: Verso, 1989) 54-55.

     

    25. Jean Baudrillard, “Simulacra and Science Fiction,” Science-Fiction Studies 55 (1991): 309-10.

     

    26. Jean Baudrillard, America 77.

     

    27. Calvino, 254-55.

     

  • Charting the “Black Atlantic”

    Ian Baucom

    Department of English
    Duke University
    ibaucom@acpub.duke.edu

    The Sea is History

     

       Verandahs, where the pages of the sea
    are a book left open by an absent master
    in the middle of another life--
    I begin here again,
    begin until this ocean's
    a shut book....
    			--Derek Walcott

     

    Whatever else it is, this is an age of cartography. An age, perhaps, as Fredric Jameson has it, of cognitive mapping; cognitive because the territories we map (whether they are the territories of the nation, of capital, of hyperspace, or of transnational migration, to name only a few) insist on reshaping themselves, on continuously expanding or contracting, splitting and doubling, defying the abilities of their cartographers to keep pace, to commit to paper something that is not instantly belated. But “cognitive” also because, as the above list implies, the category of the mappable is itself increasingly unstable, because as our epistemologies of the local encounter the shifting ways in which local cultures, local knowledges and local narratives confront the globalizing imperatives of the nation, capital, hyperspace, and migrancy, our sense of what constitutes a cultural locale, of what can be spoken of as a discernible, perhaps even a distinct, space, is also continuously expanding and contracting. I do not presume, in this essay, to unlock the riddle of the local and the global; instead, in the spirit of the times, I want to examine one of our moment’s apparently global cultural locales. I want, that is, to ask whether it is possible to locate the postcolonial, to inquire whether it occupies or implies a discernible order of space, and to ask–if the postcolonial can indeed be located–how that space is inhabited and experienced. My suggestion is that it is both not possible to speak of the space of the postcolonial (for the fairly simple reason that India is not Nigeria which in its turn is not Jamaica which in its turn is not England) and that it is possible to do so (largely because these places are at once structurally distinct and structurally coupled); and that if we are to understand how this can be so we must turn our attention from these national spaces of belonging to the waters that separate and join them.

     

    “Where are your monuments, your battles, martyrs? / Where is your tribal memory?” an anonymous body of inquisitors demands the narrator of one of Derek Walcott’s poems. To which interrogation the poem responds: “Sirs, / in that grey vault. The sea. The sea / has locked them up. The sea is history…. / … / Sir it is locked in them sea-sands / out there past the reef’s moiling shelf, / where the men-o’-war floated down; / strop on these goggles, I’ll guide you there myself. / Its all subtle and submarine” (“The Sea is History” 1-4; 35-7). It is to that reply and that invitation that this essay responds.

     

    Suffering a Sea-change

     

    		       --all the deep
    Is restless change; the waves so swell'd and steep,
    Breaking and sinking, and the sunken swells,
    Nor one, one moment, in its station dwells.
    			 --George Crabbe

     

    Let me start with a photograph and two fragments of text. In the black and white print, a central image in Sutapa Biswas’ 1992 exhibition “Synapse,” an Indian woman and two children are standing in water, immersed to their hips, gazing directly at us.


    © 1997 Sutapa Biswas, used by permission.
    Figure 1.
    Click here to see the full image (20K).
     

    Their bodies are neither perfectly relaxed nor rigidly tense. Rather, they hold themselves as if photographed by surprise, uncertain whether to dip their dangling hands into the water, to delight in the cool shallows, or to formalize themselves, to adopt a pose, to substitute decorum for the forgettable postures of play. Photographed an instant too late and an instant too soon, caught in a moment between abandon and self-collection, the three figures also wade between genres. The image implies a camera operator who is at once anthropologist, artist, and loved one. Either a snapshot for a family album, a study for gallery display, or a document for an ethnographic treatise, the photograph encloses the bathers in a multitude of literal and epistemological frames. If the undeveloped sandy beach and the wooded coastline invoke the anthropological at its primitivizing worst, and the precise cropping of the image alludes to the primness of the gallery, then these innermost and outermost containing devices confront a third way of holding these figures, an intermediate, memorializing frame. For, as we scan the shadowy space between the landscape enclosing these untimely baigneurs and the mounted photograph’s edge, we note the enveloping presence of another female body. This fourth, barely visible figure, hands crossed at her waist, acts as a screen onto which the central image has been projected. Cradling this water scene, Mary to a Pieta in which three bathers replace the incarnation of the Trinity, this anonymous woman forces us to consider the figures broadcast on her unclad body as something more than pieces of fieldwork or aesthetic artifacts, to view them also as the spectral inhabitants of a guardedly intimate, intra-uterine space. Positioned in a multitude of framing spaces, the bathers, like the cultural locations they occupy, also inhabit a shifting series of moments. For if the gallery, the family-album, and the anthropological treatise all too frequently “make their objects” through acts of temporal displacement, through technologies of display which worship the pastness of the past, then the recollection of these three figures in the womb of the fourth discloses our bathers as subjects not only of a then and a now but of a yet-to-be.1 And it is as we attend to the serial temporality of these subjects that the two fragments of text I earlier promised begin to bear on this photograph’s charting of a distinct and uncanny region within the dispersed territories of the post-colonial.

     

    The first passage, from Joseph Conrad’s novel The Nigger of the Narcissus, parades the dispirited musings of the text’s narrator as he contemplates the unnerving presence of James Wait, a dying but not-yet-dead West Indian who has joined the crew of an English merchant ship returning to London from Bombay. “In the confused current of impotent thoughts that set unceasingly this way and that through bodies of men, Jimmy bobbed up upon the surface, compelling attention, like a black buoy chained to the bottom of a muddy stream” (102). Days before James Wait will, at last, have the good grace to die, days before his shipmates will tip his corpse into the Atlantic, Conrad’s narrator finds himself dwelling in a zone of temporal confusion. Mistaking anticipation for recollection, the postponed for the remembered, Conrad’s text here tropes the imperial uncanny not as the return of the repressed, but as the mocking and untimely resurfacing of that black subject which England has yet to submerge. If Conrad’s text, like Biswas’ photograph, casts the submarine as a space in which our senses of a “now,” a “then,” and a “not-yet” deliriously trade places with one another, then the second of those textual passages with which I wish to begin this reading of the postcolonial submarine returns to the dis-synchronicities of imperial water with a mixture of sorrow and delight.

     

    Responding to the suggestion that the Caribbean possesses a “submarine” unity, Edouard Glissant has offered the following observations:

     

    To my mind this expression can only evoke all those Africans weighed down with ball and chain and thrown overboard whenever a slave ship was pursued by enemy vessels and felt too weak to put up a fight. They sowed in the depths the seeds of an invisible presence. And so transversality, and not the universal transcendance of the sublime, has come to light. It took us a long time to learn this. We are the roots of a cross-cultural relationship.

     

    Submarine roots, that is floating free, not fixed in some primordial spot, but extending in all directions in our world through its network of branches.

     

    We thereby live, we have the good fortune of living, this shared process of cultural mutation, this convergence that frees us from uniformity. (66-67)

     

    As he negotiates a passage from the rhetoric of outrage to the dialect of celebration, Glissant models his shifting idiom on the metamorphic waters he navigates. Like Conrad, he confronts a cultural “current” setting “unceasingly this way and that,” but rather than discovering an unrepressable object of dread at the heart of this tidal wandering, he encounters a liberating principle of briny metamorphosis. Reaping the harvest of the Middle Passage’s violent seedings, he returns the time of drowning to our present time not as that which terrifies or outrages but as that which continuously transforms the contemporary. Memory here does not haunt, it translates, it fuses the time of remembrance with the time of the remembered, it joins a “now” to a “then” through the mutating wash of a sea-change which is also, always, a “yet-to-be.” Reclaiming the slave from the waters of this Black Atlantic, Glissant’s comment demands that we free ourselves from those acts of forgetting upon which the constitution of fixed identities so regularly depend, but asks that in joining ourselves to the no-longer forgotten we refuse to fetishize an alternate past and instead cultivate a vulnerability to the mutating ebb-tides of submarine memory.

     

    While this reading of the submarine again invokes a temporally dispersed subject, it equally implies a model of spatially-disseminated identity, a rhizomatic dislocation of the subject, a self which manifests itself not as an essence but as a meandering. But where the Deleuzian metaphors of the rhizome imply some rooting of the subject, Glissant’s comments can be seen to further “radicalize” our conception of the rooting of the self. For if the subject of this post-colonial submarine again manifests itself as a rootwork, and as a route-work, this subject finds itself wanderingly-grounded not “in some primordial spot” but in the uncertainties of imperial water. Where Deleuze enables us to think the self as a reticulated system, Glissant couples that heterotopic self to an equally fluid environment which, as Biswas’ photograph and Conrad’s text reveal, not only encompasses the subject but “passes through” it. Having begun with an image of three women wading between genres, temporalities, and framing spaces, we now discover these bathers standing at the edge of a submarine world in which serial locations merge with disseminated identities, sea-changing subjects occupy multiple moments, and our categories of cultural belonging, like the uncanny waters lapping over the edge of the Narcissus, shift “unceasingly, this way and that” (Conrad 102).

     

    Only Connect: Notes on an Imperial Nervous System

     

    Synapse is a metaphor.	Synapse is a place where
    two people meet.  Synapse is a place where two ideas
    meet.  Synapse is a gap across which two people's
    ideas meet. Synapse is a place.
    			       --Sutapa Biswas

     

    A photograph by a British photographer who was born in India. A snatch of text from a novel published by an author who once described himself as “a Polish gentleman soaked in British tar.”2 A second textual snippet drawn from the American translation of a Martiniquan intellectual’s book of essays. What, we might ask, do these fragments have to do with each other? On what authority can they be read through and against one another? How can they be said to plot a coincident region within the dispersed territories of the “postcolonial?” What, for that matter, is the postcolonial? Is Sutapa Biswas “postcolonial” by virtue of her birth? Are her photographs, regardless of their content, postcolonial artifacts because of their maker’s passport? Is Joseph Conrad, writing in 1897, equally or identically postcolonial, and when does his novel become such? At the moment of its writing? At the moment at which its narrator anticipates James Wait’s drowning? At the moment of our reading? Surely, as Anne McClintock has so cogently argued, we must at the very least speak not of the postcolonial but of postcolonialisms.3 Whatever the critical currency of the term, whatever the value of collecting discrete texts within an integrating theoretical framework, we must either begin to seriously address such questions or watch “postcolonialism” become a brand of critical sloganeering in which the constant injunctions to “celebrate diversity” amount to the dual fetishization and erasure of difference.

     

    If there is an apparently easy answer to such questions, if it seems obvious that we should simply abandon the collectivizing impulse and devote ourselves to the arduous business of reading for the particular, then, as with many obvious solutions, this is an answer which is deceptively simple. For one of the most valuable and most particular lessons that “postcolonialism’s” texts have communicated to us is, in Glissant’s terms, precisely the lesson of the “transversal.” The coral-become bodies of those slaves drowned in the Middle Passage do link the waters washing the coast of Martinique with an eighteenth and nineteenth century history of the Caribbean, with the past and present legacies of the triangular trade, with the Victorian and Edwardian underdevelopment of Africa, Rastafarian and Pan-Africanist narratives of return, the poetry of Aime Cesaire, Afrocentric curricula, and the commodification of Kente cloth. In Derek Walcott’s exploration of the waters of the Caribbean, the submarine further discloses itself as an expanse that is not only littered with “the bones of all [those] drowned in the crossing” (128), and with the “white memory” (129) of English sailors, but as a liquid territory parted by the keels of fishing pirogues, tourist liners, merchant vessels and slavers which, in cross-hatching the Caribbean, connect these watery deeps to the primitivizing economies of the American leisure industry, the Victorian houses of British capital, the English country mansions built off the slave trade, the imperial merchant marines chasing the Union Jack across the surface of the globe, and a Polish writer who began his career aboard one of those English merchant ships. To refuse to read these linkages is not to eschew indiscriminate acts of totalization, it is to refuse to read.

     

    If, following the lead of Fredric Jameson, we choose to conceive of our critical responsibilities not only in terms of reading but in terms of mapping, then it might be worth wondering what a cartography of such linkages might resemble, and upon what theories of knowledge and observation it might model itself. Sutapa Biswas’ photograph, the 1992 “Synapse” exhibition in which it appeared, and the surrounding body of her work with which this exhibit interacts, suggest some answers to these questions. The synaptic metaphor which gave the 1992 show its name is embodied in another of Biswas’ exhibitions from that year, “White Noise,” a multimedia installation in which the black and white image from “Synapse” reappears in a series of back-lit transparencies mounted in light-boxes whose ganglia of connecting cables the artist made no effort to hide.


    © 1997 Sutapa Biswas, used by permission.
    Figure 2
    Click here to see the full image (8K)
     

    If we wish to come to terms with Biswas’ work, while at the same time mapping the cross-currents of that cultural ecology which her exhibits explore, then we would be well served not only by lingering over this resurfacing image, but by considering its interplay with the synaptic metaphor, a metaphor that in the case of “White Noise” was embodied not in the show’s title but in that tangled circuit of video cables so visibly channeling the flow of visual information from one light box to another.

     

    Dictionaries inform us that a synapse is a “junction…between two neurons or nerve cells.” But the definition does scant justice to the marvels of the synapse, a neural complex more fully dissected in the writings of an increasingly influential cellular biologist. In a series of works which have rapidly entered the select canon of systems theory, the Brazilian biologist Humberto Maturana has outlined an “autopoetic” theory of cognition which depends, at crucial moments, on an exploration of the wandering geographies of the synapse.4 Maturana’s epistemological idiom is unabashedly structuralist and consequently, though somewhat less obviously, humanist. And though this is not the thrust of his work, nor the way in which it is generally read, Maturana’s writings can assist us in the task of sketching a map of those exchanges which collectively wire the branching networks of the postcolonial.

     

    Maturana’s darling is the cell; it is the engine of his system. In anatomizing this “second-order unity,” Maturana insists on two things. First, that the cell, or any other compound entity, exhibits a “structural determinism”–by which he means that all unities, including the human, are essentially solipsistic, assuming form not at the whim of their environment but by regulated, auto-referential, and sovereign acts of self-description. To this dictum, however, Maturana adds another which qualifies and almost contradicts the first. While the ontology of all unities depends on an internal structural determinism, each unity is simultaneously “structurally coupled” to its environment. To complicate matters still further, Maturana allows that unities and environments can exchange places as the vantage of their observers shift, i.e. that the human body can be seen as a unity autonomously within, but coupled to, a surrounding environment, or it may be understood as the environment enclosing a multitude of discrete organic unities. This “either/or, and both” epistemology recapitulates the paradox of complementarity that resides at the heart of quantum dynamics and, as Arkady Plotnitsky has recently suggested, much poststructural thinking.5 Without dwelling on the infinite delights of the uncertainty principle, it is this second founding hypothesis of Maturana’s work that I wish to examine. For in turning to those systems which regulate the coupling of unity and environment, the biologist sketches a map of our organic geographies which can help us begin our speculative charting of the synaptic wirings of the postcolonial.

     

    While at first glance Maturana’s map of the world is disconcertingly binary, the logic of the couple demands that to his cartography of the within and the without he must add a chart of the between. In most complex organisms this “between,” this interstice that at once separates and joins unity and environment, is the territory of the nervous system, with its sprawling network of neurons and synapses. If the neurons are the various headquarters of the nervous system, then the synapses are its telephone lines. Or, to adapt the metaphor to the primary concerns of this essay, if the neurons are the scattered islands in the archipelago of the nervous system, then the synapses are its shipping routes: a conceit which, if extended, allows us to identify the Atlantic as the nervous system of empire, and to describe the submarine currents tumbling Glissant’s drowned slaves as the synapses coupling the neural densities of metropole and colony. In this description the submarine emerges as neither European nor Caribbean, neither metropolitan nor colonial, neither within the “West” nor without it. Instead, the submarine locates the system of exchanges which at once acknowledges the distinct character of such “unities” and makes such distinctions meaningless. The submarine, then, is a place once again of the “either/or and both,” but a place, crucially, where such uncertainty principles manifest themselves in certain ways, where we confront not a generalized system of exchanges but a particular network of relays. Of course, as Maturana is at pains to point out, such synaptic networks are not fixed. While some patterns of connection exhibit enduring stability, others change. But they do not change at random. If the nervous system is relentlessly “performative” then its performances always occur with reference to the peculiar ontogenetic histories of the unities and environments it couples.6 Which is no more than another way of saying that ocean currents do not move at random, and that if the “Black Atlantic” houses the empire’s nervous system, then its submarine flows exhibit a synaptic intentionality.7

     

    It will be immediately apparent that there are some similarities between what, with Maturana’s help, I am calling the synaptic and what Deleuze labels the rhizomatic. Indeed, the sketches of synaptic configurations which Maturana provides in his text seem at first glance to be ideal maps of the rhizome’s geography. The illustrations of synaptic networks in his text The Tree of Knowledge depict a sprawling, branching system of lines, a reticulum that like the rhizome “stabilizes around a…parish…a capital…a bulb” (in this case, the neuron) (Deleuze 7). But while the nervous system and its synapses exhibit the topography of the rhizome, they are not rhizomatic in the Deleuzian sense. In Maturana’s description, the nervous system labors in the service of a discernible unity of which, as a border, it is a part–though, to be sure, that trafficked part which simultaneously regulates and disrupts the integrity of the unity.8 The rhizome, by contrast, occupies a purely areferential universe, “it ceases to have any relation to the One as subject or object, natural or spiritual reality…there is no unity to serve as a pivot” (Deleuze 8). While this is no negligible distinction, it is not one whose full implications I can explore here. Rather, I wish to address two additional features of the synaptic which are wholly alien to the Deleuzian coding of multiplicity. The rhizome has neither a history nor an environment. The synapse has both.

     

    On the question of time both Deleuze and Maturana are unequivocal. “The rhizome,” the French philosopher confidently asserts, “is an anti-genealogy” (Deleuze and Guattari 11). Synapses, alternately, configure themselves under the shadow of both a hereditary phylogenetic past and a continuous ontogenetic past; that is, they bear the traces of both a collective and an individual history. The consequences of this difference are immense. If we conceive of culture as a rhizomatic assemblage, then we must construct a philosophy of culture which has no use for memory. We must accomodate ourselves to inhabiting a pure present, to dwelling under the sole sovereignty of the synchronic. If, instead, our cartographies of culture are synaptic, then we must read our coupling routes not only as lines of connection but as the tracework of continuing and inherited histories. There has been much talk recently of spatializing time. The logic of the nervous system demands that we also learn to historicize space, even the performative spaces of the itinerary. But also–because the nervous system has an environment, because the synapse, unlike the rhizome, implies an encompassing territory–a synaptic map of culture depends on our willingness to read not only the sprawling topographies of the link but the coupled territories of the linked. Deleuze invites us to hypostasize the multiple, to adore the schizomorphic lines which wire nothing together, which exist nowhere, which are their own splendidly narcissistic excuse. Maturana’s writings raise the rather greater challenge of reading both a routework and the grounds which it roots, of examining both the circuity of culture and the assemblages which the circuit wires. To revert to Sutapa Biswas’ exhibition “White Noise,” where a Deleuzian analytic might devote itself solely to the electrical cables adorning the gallery’s walls, Maturana’s writings suggest that to comprehend this synaptic display we may also wish to glance at the light boxes. And if we do in fact study those boxes, we will find repeated there images of that imperial water whose currents link Biswas’ Indian bathers not only to the London Gallery in which their images were displayed but to Edouard Glissant’s charting of the transversal and to Conrad’s eternally resurfacing “black buoy.”

     

    In tracing the articulations of this nervous system which wires the colonial to the postcolonial, the Caribbean to Britain, the drowned slave to the modernist prose stylist, we must, however, do more than surrender ourselves to a metonymic order of reasoning or to an unearthing of the rich wisdoms contained in a pun on roots and routes. We must take care to prevent our critical cartographies from producing always the same map of cultural coupling. While the six-degrees-of-separation argument makes it impossible to say that not all points connect, we should nevertheless recall that those points that do join one another connect in specific and differing ways. Frantz Fanon, in a passing comment in Black Skin, White Masks, argues that “the body is surrounded by an atmosphere of certain uncertainty” (110-111). I can think of no better way of responding to those methodological questions I raised earlier than by suggesting that we incline to the insight of this aphoristic comment. Surrounded by an atmosphere of certain uncertainties, we can devote ourselves to the particular without abandoning the transversal if we will diligently map the synaptic currents which network the postcolonial submarine.

     

    Throughout this essay, I have privileged metaphors of liquidity, primarily because, with Edouard Glissant, I want to suggest that we can map the postcolonial by charting its submarine flows, and because, while the metaphors of the nervous system are certainly suggestive, the synapses I wish to trace are constituted less as a sequence of relays within the body than as a series of transatlantic lines. But I have also done so because the works I wish to discuss represent the postcolonial as a marine geography, as a geography of trans-oceanic and submarine passages. In doing so, these works serve not only to locate a postcolonial territoriality, but to generate a vocabulary particular to that global locale, a liquid vocabulary that identifies diaspora cultures and identities as flow dynamics, as processes whose formative and reformative logics can perhaps be understood by borrowing from the lexical sea-chests of oceanographic discourse a submarine metaphorics of “surges,” “meanders,” “slicks,” “spills,” “sprays,” “ripples,” and “currents.” To gaze on the waters of empire, to study the trans-oceanic routes of postcolonial migrancy, or, as Walcott has it, to “strop on” our sea-goggles, is thus not only to extend the reach of our critical cartographies but to expand our pool of key-words, to invigorate a critical discourse, which so frequently wearies its disciples by trotting out the same aging family of metaphors, through a fresh infusion of tropes.

     

    I say this with some whimsy, and much seriousness. For when reading becomes no more than an excuse for carting out the same reigning body of explanatory metaphors, we need not bother to read at all. In a world in which we inevitably discover that everything is “hybrid” we might as well close up shop, or reconcile ourselves to the fact that we really are Bouvard and Pecuchet. I am not, of course, saying that everything isn’t hybrid–I believe that everything is. But we must be able to describe how things are hybrid; imperial, postcolonial, and diaspora hybridities may perhaps best be understood–as Conrad’s, Walcott’s, Glissant’s, and Biswas’ work suggests–as a series of marine procedures. Which returns us to oceanographic discourse, and the more important point I want to make. Simply scanning a standard oceanographic treatise’s table of contents–in the text I consulted there were no fewer than seven sections, containing twenty-six sub-entries, and one hundred and fifty-two sub-subheadings–reminds us that even an object as apparently self-identical and unmappable as an ocean has its own counties, regions, and routes; that this is also a space of certain uncertainties; and that while it might require astonishingly hard work to map the waters, that this is work that can be done.9 So, without further ado, let me close by offering a map of one current within that cultural expanse I have been calling the postcolonial submarine.

     

    Modified in the Guts of the Living

     

    The whole picture dedicated to the most sublime of
    subjects and impressions (completing thus the perfect
    system of all truth we have shown to be formed in
    Turner's works)--the power, majesty, and deathfulness
    of the open, deep, illimitable sea.
    			 --John Ruskin (3: 573)

     

    In the opening chapter of The Black Atlantic, Paul Gilroy draws our attention to J.M.W. Turner’s 1840 painting Slavers Throwing Overboard the Dead and Dying. Actually, Gilroy is less interested in the canvas than in John Ruskin’s failure, in his deeply sympathetic reading of the painting in the first volume of Modern Painters, to discuss this depiction of black bodies thrown like so much surplus cargo into the sea. Gilroy sees this refusal as symptomatic of Victorian and post-Victorian failures to acknowledge that Englishness has “any external referents whatsoever” (14). Ruskin’s unwillingness to direct his reader’s attention to the drowned and drowning slaves is not matched by a disinterest in the watery medium enveloping their bodies. His discussion of the slave ship caps a long and painstaking disquisition on water and water painting which reveals that he has evidently studied rivers, lakes, torrents, waterfalls, and oceans with extraordinary care. Ruskin notices the differing movements of slow river currents, which magisterially overwhelm any source of interruption, and rushing torrents, which, in their haste, bend their shape to the impediments they encounter. He plots the disturbances caused by approaching and rebounding waves as they encounter buoys, rocks, shorelines, and recoiling currents of water. His greatest energies, however, are devoted to a discussion of liquid surfaces and reflections–a discussion which, though it precedes the reading of the slave ship by some thirty pages, helps to explain why Ruskin fails to see what is so evident on the surface of that canvas.

     

    Water surfaces, Ruskin discovers, deceive the eye. In gazing upon them we either see the surface itself, but not what it reflects, or we study the reflection, in which case the actual surface disappears. By no means, he insists, can we see both surface and reflection at once: each exists to annul the other. The task of the water painter is, then, to keep the eye of the observer constantly in play between these two mutually exclusive ways of seeing, to exploit the paradoxes of what Ruskin calls a “philosophy of reflection” (3: 545). In analyzing these two modes of seeing, Ruskin carefully excludes a third. Enjoined to devote ourselves alternately to the surface and the reflected “above,” our eyes are forbidden permission to peer beneath the water, or told that there is no beneath, that what is visible below the surface is merely an inverse image of that which floats above. Turner’s peculiar genius, Ruskin argues, derives from his brilliant exploitation of this optical ballet of surface and reflection, and from his refusal to allow us to delve beneath the water. “We are not,” Ruskin insists, “allowed to tumble into it, and gasp for breath as we go down, we are kept upon the surface” (3: 539). “We,” apparently, are not the jettisoned slaves, who have no choice but to tumble into the water, to gasp for breath as they go down beneath a surface on which a Victorian viewing public, freed from the obligation to wonder what lies beneath these waters, can see itself reflected.

     

    As the narrator of Conrad’s Nigger of the Narcissus discovers, however, the black bodies spilled into the empire’s waters refuse to remain submerged. Like James Wait they continue to bob up, disturbing a narcissistic inspection of those oceans which not only surround the island kingdom but define England as a liquid geography. In the opening pages of Heart of Darkness, Conrad again stages a scene in which his narrator peers into the waters which rim and define the boundaries of Englishness. Here, once more, an inspection of those waters which envelop and tongue the nation amounts to a complex act of remembrance.

     

    The old river in its broad reach rested unruffled at the decline of day, after ages of good service done to the race that peopled its banks, spread out in the tranquil dignity of a waterway leading to the utter ends of the earth. We looked at the venerable stream not in the vivid flush of a short day that comes and departs forevever, but in the august light of abiding memories. And indeed nothing is easier for a man who has, as the phrase goes, "followed the sea" with reverence and affection, than to evoke the great spirit of the past upon the lower reaches of the Thames. The tidal current runs to and fro in its unceasing service of men and ships it had borne to the rest of home or to the battles of sea. It had known and served all the men of whom the nation is proud, from Sir Francis Drake to Sir John Franklin.... (28-9)

     

    In a text so relentlessly and famously obsessed with the cartographic, Conrad here suggests that to map England is not to map its grounds but its waters, that Englishness, apprehended only as an object ever fully present in the past, assumes the form of a “tidal current” which leads “to the utter ends of the earth.” As England here becomes a waterway, or, to borrow Glissant’s term, a “transversality,” it also becomes a mortuary. The waters not only plot England’s liquid shape, they contain the beloved dead who collectively define the nation’s identity. Entombed within imperial waters, these great men specify what England must remember, and thus again be. In the catalogue of names which follows the passage I have cited, James Wait’s names does not, of course, appear. But if in reading England as a waterway this text opens the spaces of Englishness to cultural currents streaming from the uttermost ends of the world, in identifying England’s waters as a liquid cemetery it also reminds us that that mortuary is occupied not only by Sir Francis Drake and Sir John Franklin, but by the eternally resurfacing body of James Wait, and by the slaves drowning beneath the surface of Turner’s canvas and John Ruskin’s prose.

     

    In closing The Nigger of the Narcissus, Conrad completes the labor of forgetting James Wait by suggesting that England not remember the bodies pitched into the colonizing nation’s waters but recollect the ships which have plied the seas in the service of the flag. By the final pages of the text, England itself emerges as a vast floating vessel, “the great flagship of the race; stronger than the storms! and anchored in the open sea” (121). While England here finds itself mirrored in the image of the Narcissus, it also finds itself dying. For the Narcissus has completed her final voyage; docked, she awaits her demolition and the resale of her broken timbers. And the task of preserving English identity becomes, at last, the business of dredging the lost hull of this national allegory from the waters of the historical deep.

     

    In recent years this imaginary redemption of a submerged English ship of state has been literally reenacted. Patrick Wright has discussed the neo-nationalist celebrations which attended the rescue of Henry VIII’s ship the Mary Rose.10 And on July 8, 1995, the National Gallery in London opened an exhibition which once again imagined Englishness as a dredgework. The gallery supplemented its special exhibition of Turner’s 1838 painting The Fighting Temeraire, Tugged to Her Last Berth to be Broken Up with an array of materials designed to ensure that this canvas be viewed, in Thackeray’s words, as “a magnificent national ode.”11 The Temeraire had fought with Nelson at Trafalgar, but in 1838 it was demolished by a London ship-breaker, and its parts resold. And it is the Gallery’s interest in the fate of the vessel’s disseminated timbers, quite apart from its nostalgic reinvention of the painting as a fetish of national identity, that deserves some attention.

     

    The curators of the show reserved a room of the exhibition for a display entitled “The Temeraire Survives,” and filled that room with the collection of souvenirs the ship has become. In an age that identifies its postmodernity in those late capital economies which ensure that fragments of the downed Berlin wall are rapidly available for purchase at Macy’s, we may be tempted to view this dissemination of the ship as a thoroughly contemporary phenomenon. But such dispersals and recollections of a nation’s monuments are not exclusively recent occurences. John Ruskin concluded his lengthiest discussion of Turner’s canvas by predicting precisely such a fate for the Temeraire: imagining a “tired traveller” absently leaning against the “low gate” of “some country cottage,” Ruskin laments the wanderer’s ignorance that the gate has been cut from a beam of the glorious ship. As if in response to Ruskin’s fear that the shards of the scattered vessel might fail to invoke that absent England which the ship has come to symbolize, the National Gallery’s curators diligently gathered and displayed a vast array of the Temeraire’s enduring and identifiable fragments in the “survival” room. An altar table, an altar rail, two sanctuary chairs, and a stand for a bone ship model, all fashioned from the departed vessel’s oak timbers, accompany diverse medallions, and a portrait of a dog framed in Temeraire wood. The most prized relic, however, is a gong stand owned by King George V in which two brooding figures, carved from Temeraire beams, guard a Temeraire gong which hangs above a plaque extolling this “Souvenir of the wooden walls of Old England.” The compensatory message of this collection of knickknacks could not be more clear: acting to affirm Ernest Renan’s famous insistence that a nation is, above all else, a privileged body of collective memories and to dispel John Ruskin’s worries that England might not only forget but utterly fail to recognize that version of itself which the Temeraire had been, this assortment of splendid fragments assures the observer that the National Gallery will neither allow the Temeraire to be forgotten nor permit the wooden walls of this old England to sink, once more, beneath the tide of remembrance.

     

    If this exhibition publicly restages Conrad’s strategy for redeeming England by resurfacing the nation’s marine architectures, then a recent Birmingham exhibition has duplicated this tactic, but has done so in a way which disturbs the National Gallery’s placidly triumphalist narrative of national identity. On January 17, 1991, Keith Piper mounted a show at Birmingham’s Ikon Gallery which he entitled “A Ship Called Jesus.” The title of the exhibition alludes to the “Jesus of Lubeck,” a vessel which Queen Elizabeth gave John Hawkins in 1564 to enable him to embark on England’s first official slave-trading voyage. The irony of the slaver’s name provides the occasion for Piper’s mixed media exploration of four centuries of Black British culture. The exhibition comprises three parts: “The Ghosts of Christendom,” which examines the enslavement of West Africans and their transportation to the Caribbean; “The Rites of Passage,” which plots the post World War II migration of West Indians to Britain; and “The Fire Next Time,” which explores contemporary black urban culture. Piper addresses his Black British, and Black Atlantic, themes through a variety of media: video monitors display alternating images of cross-burnings, American civil rights activists, and immobile West-African statuary; a stained glass installation depicts Queen Elizabeth I flanked by female slaves; framed ethnographic portraits parade the bodies of naked but armed Africans; a photo montage, in the shape of a cross, reveals the outline of two black feet that have been pierced by nails; and a tombstone to the Jesus of Lubeck bears the following inscription: “In 1564 Queen Elizabeth I donated a ship to John Hawkins for the first official English slave trading voyage…the name of the ship was the Jesus of Lubeck…we’ve been sailing in her eversince [sic].”12

     

    © 1997 Keith Piper,
    used by permission.

    Figure 3
    Click here to see the full image
    (128K)
    © 1997 Keith Piper,
    used by permission.

    Figure 4
    Click here to see the full image
    (74K)

     

    Collectively, these objects and images re-create the interior of the gallery as a resonant miniature of the Black Atlantic diaspora.

     

    As it maps the configurations of this diasporic network, the exhibit also plots the transformation of those cultural entities coupled together by the perturbing currents of the slave trade. In particular, the show asks its audience to consider the ways in which black experiences of Christianity have transformed both African and Anglican identities. In his catalogue essay, Piper directs our attention to the African creolizations of Christian worship, mutations of Church experience which point “to the extent to which during this particular leg of its voyage, the slave ship called Jesus has experienced a mutiny of radical proportions. The same Africans for which the ship had been a mechanism of imprisonment had seized control of the helm and were steering the ship in a totally different direction.”13 The exhibition’s examination of this “hi-jacking” of this sacred vessel reminds us that the ship of Englishness has been similarly redirected. The National Gallery’s assured recollection of the nation amid the fragments of the Temeraire, should not, I believe, be read apart from those reconstitutions of British identity manifest in this show. Where John Ruskin instructs the viewing public not to see the black bodies tumbling into the waters of the Atlantic, and Joseph Conrad and the National Gallery substitute an image of the “great flagship of the race” for a sight of those Africans, West-Indians, and Black Britons who have been transported within, thrown from, and who have steered that repeating vessel, Piper’s work will not allow us to forget these black sailors and swimmers of British waters.

     

    Leaky Vessels

     

    I am rather attached to this piece [one of the
    works in "Synapse"], which when installed measures
    approximately forty feet in length.  It should be
    installed at an approximate eye level of five feet
    five inches to six feet, so that in viewing it the
    intention is for the viewer to experience,
    momentarily, a strange feeling of submergence.14
    
    --Sutapa Biswas

     

    At the heart of his exhibition, beneath the photo montage of a crucified, black body, Piper placed a rectangular, water-filled basin. At the bottom of this basin, under the water, he positioned a series of broken mirrors. The obvious allusion to Joyce should not prevent us from recognizing that this cracked looking-glass fragments one of the cannier aesthetic strategies for dismissing Britain’s black subjects from the national portrait gallery. For if we cast a glance at this pool of water we will realize that Piper’s submerged mirrors break the surface of Ruskin’s philosophy of reflection. Looking down into these waters, we see not simply a reflection of the agonized black body which hangs above, we see that bleeding figure as if from beneath, from below the surface of the water. Manipulating a trick of light to reverse our optic of inspection and to reposition our space of observation, Piper’s installation displaces the viewing subject, draws us beneath the water to gaze at the scene of violence played out above. The work forces us, if only for a moment, to occupy the submarine. Tumbled into this space, we see more than that submerged region of British history which Ruskin and his fellows forbid us to acknowledge, we now see from within this current of Britain’s postcoloniality.

     

    The formal achievement of Piper’s exhibit was complemented by an accidental accomplishment. Sometime during the run of the show the waterfilled basin began to leak.15 And though I hesitate to celebrate this spill of waters over the floors of an art gallery, I cannot avoid concluding by registering my delight with this act of liquid disobedience. Trickling out of the artist’s installation, meandering across the floors of the Birmingham gallery, wetting the feet of the exhibit’s visitors, spilling lazily out the door and extending its routework in all directions, this unpoliced current of the postcolonial submarine reminds us that we do indeed have the good fortune of living “a shared process of cultural mutation,” a “convergence that frees us from uniformity” (Glissant 67). To this note of celebration, I must however add a closing note of caution. If in some ways Piper’s exhibit represents not only a space within the postcolonial submarine but a postimperial version of that “fluctuating zone of instability” in which Frantz Fanon and, more recently, Homi Bhabha have begged their readers to immerse themselves, then it realizes these liquidities within a fragile and guarded moment.16 Departing the gallery we must wonder whether we can sustain this submersion. Can we, like Sutapa Biswas’ surprised subjects, wade the submarine? Or will we dry our feet as we wander back to our everyday identities?

     

    Notes

     

    1. See Johannes Fabian, Time and the Other: How Anthropology Makes its Object (New York: Columbia University Press, 1983).

     

    2. See Joseph Conrad, Congo Diary and Other Uncollected Pieces, ed. Z. Najder (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1978).

     

    3. See Anne McClintock, Imperial Leather (New York: Columbia University Press, 1995), especially 11-13.

     

    4. See Humberto Maturana and Francisco Varela, The Tree of Knowledge: The Biological Roots of Human Understanding (Boston: Shambhala Press, 1992).

     

    5. See Arkady Plotnitsky, Complementarity: Anti-Epistemology after Bohr and Derrida (Durham: Duke University Press, 1994).

     

    6. As we move from a cartography of culture to a map of the human, the tropologies of the synapse reveal the self as that which is also simultaneously structurally determinate and structurally coupled to its environment. And as those terms at once imply and eviscerate the concepts of the without and the within, the problems of reading the material constitutions of the human are replaced by the task of plotting the synaptic networks which wire subjects and environments. If the cross-hatched Atlantic functions as the nervous system of empire, then the subject is wrapped by an entirely similar liquid skin, or, to revert to Fanon, by an atmosphere of certain uncertainties. It is this networked space, where the human is manifest alternately as subject or environment, and, simultaneously, as both, that defines the territory of a postidentitarian humanism.

     

    7. In referring to the “Black Atlantic,” I am alluding to the cultural territory sketched in Paul Gilroy’s brilliant study The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1993). Gilroy is, of course, not the first scholar to investigate the cultural economy of this transnational territory. Robert Farris Thompson, Kobena Mercer, Peter Linnebaugh and Marcus Rediker have all made significant contributions to the study of a cultural expanse which did not vanish with the abolition of the “peculiar institution.” Gilory’s work is distinct, however, in the systematicity of his quasi-totalizing cartography. I discuss his work at some slightly greater length later in this essay.

     

    8. To the untrained eye of a reader whose education in the humanities revolved, too frequently, on a flight from the hard sciences, Maturana’s work seems weakest at this point. He tends to assume the self-evident character of the organic “unity” as an uncontestable starting point and fails adequately to address the tension which his readings of structural-coupling place on his doctrine of structural-determinism.

     

    9. The work in question is M.N. Hill’s The Sea: Ideas and Observations on Progress in the Study of the Seas (New York and London: John Wiley and Sons, 1962).

     

    10. See Patrick Wright, On Living in an Old Country: The National Past in Contemporary Britain (London: Verso, 1985).

     

    11. Cited in Judy Edgerton, Making and Meaning: Turner, The Fighting Temeraire (London: National Gallery Publications Limited, 1995), 10.

     

    12. These, and other images, together with Piper’s comments on the exhibition, are reproduced in Keith Piper, A Ship Called Jesus (Birmingham: Ikon Gallery, 1991).

     

    13. The catalogue is not paginated, but by my count this comment appears on page 21 of A Ship Called Jesus.

     

    14. “Frieze,” the work in question, comprises a series of some fifty rectangular panels mounted in an undulating line. The image on each of the panels is a cropped version of the photograph of bathing women I discuss above. Distributed across the walls of a gallery, and through the course of a visitor’s passage through that gallery, this image is thus encountered as an experience of repetition, with difference, across space and time, as, that is, an experience of the synaptic and the submarine.

     

    15. This information is derived from a personal conversation with the artist, July 31, 1996.

     

    16. Fanon calls his readers to this “fluctuating zone of instability” in his celebrated essay “On National Culture” in The Wretched of the Earth. Bhabha, who continues to disclose his debts to Fanon while proving himself one of Fanon’s most original interpreters, offers his reading of this moment in The Wretched of the Earth in his essay “DissemiNation: Time, Narrative and the Margins of the Modern Nation,” in The Location of Culture (London and New York: Routledge, 1994), 139-171.

    Works Cited

     

    • Appadurai, Arjun. “Disjuncture and Difference in the Global Cultural Economy,” Public Culture 2.2 (1990): 1-24.
    • Bhabha, Homi. The Location of Culture. London: Routledge, 1994.
    • Biswas, Sutapa. “Artist’s Statement.” Unpublished, August, 1996.
    • Conrad, Joseph. Congo Diary and Other Uncollected Pieces. Ed. Z. Najde. New York: Doubleday, 1978.
    • —. Heart of Darkness. London: Penguin Books, 1983.
    • —. The Nigger of the Narcissus. London: Penguin Books, 1989.
    • Deleuze, Giles and Felix Guattari. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Edgerton, Judy. Making and Meaning: Turner, The Fighting Temeraire. London: National Gallery Publications Limited, 1995.
    • Fabian, Johannes. Time and the Other: How Anthropology Makes Its Object. New York: Columbia UP, 1983.
    • Fanon, Frantz. Black Skins, White Masks. New York: Grove Press, 1967.
    • —. The Wretched of the Earth. New York: Grove Press, 1965.
    • Gilroy, Paul. The Black Atlantic: Modernity and Double Consciousness. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1993.
    • Glissant, Edouard. Caribbean Discourse: Selected Essays. Charlottesville: U of Virginia P, 1989.
    • Helland-Hansen, B., with John Murray, John Hjort, A. Appell, and H.H. Gran. The Depths of the Ocean: A General Account of the Modern Science of Oceanography. London: MacMillan and Co, 1912.
    • Hill, M.N. The Sea: Ideas and Observations on Progress in the Study of the Seas. New York and London: John Wiley and Sons, 1962.
    • Maturana, Umberto, and Francisco Varela. The Tree of Knowledge: The Biological Roots of Cognition. Boston and London: Shambhala, 1992.
    • McClintock, Anne. Imperial Leather: Race, Gender and Sexuality in the Colonial Contest. London and New York: Routledge, 1995.
    • Piper, Keith. A Ship Called Jesus. Birmingham: Ikon Gallery, 1991.
    • Plotnitsky, Arkady. Complementarity: Anti-Epistemology after Bohr and Derrida. Durham: Duke UP, 1994.
    • Ruskin, John. The Complete Works of John Ruskin. Eds. E.T. Cook and Alexander Wedderburn. London: George Allen, 1902-1912.
    • Suleri, Sara. The Rhetoric of English India. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1992.
    • Walcott, Derek. Collected Poems: 1948-1984. New York: Farrar, Strauss, Giroux, 1986.
    • —. Omeros. New York: Farrar, Strauss, Giroux, 1990.
    • Wright, Patrick. On Living in an Old Country: The National Past in Contemporary Britain. London: Verso, 1985.

     

  • Selected Letters from Readers

     

     

    The following responses were submitted by PMC readers using regular e-mail or the PMC Reader’s Report form. Not all letters received are published, and published letters may have been edited.

     


    Reader’s Report on Michael Joyce’s “Twelve Blue” (PMC 7.3):

     

    “Twelve Blue” reminded me of this excerpt from from Salman Rushdie’s Haroun and the Sea of Stories:

     

    ...the Water Genie told Haroun about the Ocean of the Streams of Story, and even though he was full of a sense of hopelessness and failure the magic of the Ocean began to have a magic effect on Haroun. He looked into the water and saw that it was made up of a thousand thousand thousand and one different currents, each of a different color, weaving in and out of one another like a liquid tapestry of breathtaking complexity; and the [Water Genie] explained that these were the Streams of Story, that each colored strand represented and contained a single tale. Different parts of the Ocean contained different sorts of stories, and as all the stories that had ever been told and many that were still in the process of being invented could be found here, the Ocean of the Streams of Story was in fact the biggest library in the universe. And because the stories were held here in fluid form, they retained the ability to change, to become new versions of themselves, to join up with other stories and so become other stories...

     

    These comments are from: Caroline Honig

     


     

    Michael Joyce replies:

     

    Dear Caroline Honig,

     

    PMC has passed along your reader’s report and I am grateful for your reminder of Rushdie’s strands and streams which, while not explicitly on my mind when I literally drew out the strands for “Twelve Blue,” cannot have been out of mind either.

     

    In his essay “In the Ocean of Streams of Story” (Millenium Film Journal No. 28 [Spring]: Interactivities, 15-30: http://www.sva.edu/MFJ/GWOCEAN.HTML), the interactive cinema artist Grahame Weinbren asks:

     

    Can we imagine the Ocean as a source primarily for readers rather than writers? Could there be a "story space"... like the Ocean, in which a reader might take a dip, encountering stories and story-segments as he or she flipped and dived? In these waters, turbulences created by the swimmer's own motion might cause an intermingling of the Streams of Story where the very attempt to examine a particular story-stream transforms it. What a goal to create such an Ocean! And how suitable an ideal for an interactive fiction!

     

    The hypertext novelist Carolyn Guyer, whose Mother Millennia project (http://mothermillennia.org) imagines its own sea of “2000 stories of mother by the year 2000” came to hypertext after imagining artist’s books where the connections among characters, themes, images, etc., would literally be threaded through the leaves of the book into cat’s-cradle-like webs of shifting forms.

     

    My own favorite memory of story strands is from a session at an educational conference where I asked people in the audience of the final luncheon to create a human hypertext (what else is there?). As they took part in the discussion I asked successive speakers to toss balls of colored yarn across the room to others in the audience with whose ideas they felt a connection. It did not take long before the audience was strewn with trails of brightly colored yarn marking the weave of shared ideas.

     

    Your note struck me as one such strand. Thank you.

     

    Michael Joyce

     


     

    Richard Crew and Arkady Plotnitsky, Exchange on Plotnitsky’s essay, “‘But It Is Above All Not True’” Derrida, Relativity and the ‘Science Wars,’” Postmodern Culture 7.2

     

  • An Exchange: Richard Crew and Arkady Plotnitsky

    Arkady Plotnitsky 

    Literature Program
    Duke University
    aplotnit@acpub.duke.edu

     

    and Richard Crew

    Department of Mathematics
    University of Florida
    crew@math.ufl.edu

     

    The following exchange between Richard Crew and Arkady Plotnitsky is in response to Plotnitsky’s essay, “‘But It Is Above All Not True’: Derrida, Relativity and the ‘Science Wars,’” which appeared in PMC (7.2) in January, 1997.

     


     

    A Response to Arkady Plotnitsky’s “‘But It Is Above All Not True’: Derrida, Relativity and the ‘Science Wars’” (PMC 7.3)

    Richard Crew
    crew@math.ufl.edu© 1998 Richard Crew
    All rights reserved.

     


     

    I read with great interest Arkady Plotnitsky’s article on the science wars and Derrida’s use of the phrase “Einsteinian constant.” I agree completely with the complaints he expresses on the superficiality with which this and other aspects of the Sokal controversy have been discussed. Nonetheless I have some misgivings about the reading he proposes for this phrase, and in the application of it he makes to that controversy.

     

    When he says, for example, that “As used by Hyppolite, the ‘constant’ here may not mean–and does not appear to mean–a numerical constant, as virtually all the physicists who commented on it appear to assume,” I cannot help feeling that his judgement is a little premature. In fact Plotnitsky characterizes his own reading as “tentative,” and admits (in paragraph 18 of his article) that “this alternative interpretation is not definitive, and no definitive interpretation may be possible, given the status of the text.” Actually, he proposes two related interpretations: the “Einsteinian constant,” in Hyppolite’s usage, should be understood as referring to either the Lorentz distance, or to space-time itself. He apparently views these alternatives as “conceptually equivalent,” since they are “correlative to the constancy of the speed of light c in a vacuum.” But if concepts that are “correlative” in this sense can be viewed as “conceptually equivalent,” then why can they not both be viewed as conceptually equivalent to the speed of light itself? Then the reading in which the “Einsteinian constant” is simply “the speed of light”–i.e., a physical constant–would be back in the game.

     

    I think Plotnitsky is right in thinking that there can be no “definitive interpretation” of Hyppolite’s “constant which is a combination of space-time” or of Derrida’s rejoinder that “the Einsteinian constant is not a constant, not a center”: there is simply too little physics here to say what might be at issue. But nonetheless the reading “space-time” seems to be excluded by Hyppolite’s choice of language; if all he meant was “space-time,” then why does he use the more complicated phrase “constant that is a combination of space-time”? Perhaps this is why Plotnitsky suggests that Hyppolite is thinking of the Lorentz distance, while Derrida has in mind space-time itself. It might be thought too finicky to point out that there is no explicit textual license to bring in either of the concepts “space-time” or “Lorentz interval” into the discussion (though raising this objection would be consistent with Plotnitsky’s dictum that the reader should construe the meaning of the term ‘constant’ “from the text itself” rather than from one’s general knowledge of physics, c.f. par 12). But whatever Hyppolite may have had in mind, Plotnitsky rightly points out that the sense of Derrida’s assertion, “the Einsteinian constant is not a constant, not a center,” has to be determined from the discussion of the term “center” in the lecture of Derrida that he and Hyppolite are discussing.

     

    Let’s now consider Plotnitsky’s reading of the “constant”:

     

    ...it appears to mean the Einsteinian (or Einsteinian-Minkowskian) concept of space-time itself, since Hyppolite speaks of "a constant which is a combination of space-time" (emphasis added), or the so-called spatio-temporal interval, invariant ("constant") under Lorentz transformations of special relativity. This interval is also both "a combination of space-time" and something that "does not belong to any of the experimenters who live the experience," and can be seen as "dominat[ing] the whole construct" (i.e. the conceptual framework of relativity in this Minkowskian formulation). (par. 17; the emphasis is Plotnitsky's)

     

    One could observe that the Lorentz distance, considered as a function on space-time, is invariant under the group of Lorentz transformations, but it is not constant in the usual sense this has for functions (i.e. that of assuming the same value everywhere). But really, this is just a quibble; slightly more serious is the question of the sense in which space-time (as opposed to the Lorentz distance) can be said to be constant. It can’t mean “not varying in time” because time is internal to space-time. It can’t mean “invariant under Lorentz transformations” since space-time doesn’t really undergo Lorentz transformations; these simply describe how certain reference frames in space-time are related to each other. But Plotnitsky’s main point is that space-time, or the invariant distance, somehow illustrates Derrida’s notions of “play” and “center”:

     

    The moment one accepts this interpretation, Derrida's statement begins to sound quite a bit less strange. It acquires an even greater congruence with relativity once one understands the term "play/game" as connoting, in this context (it is a more radical and richer concept overall), the impossibility within Einstein's framework of space-time of a uniquely privileged frame of reference--a center from which an observer could master the field (i.e. the whole of space-time). Even if my reading of "the Einsteinian constant" is tentative, the meaning I suggest for Derrida's term "play" [jeu] is easily supportable on the basis of his essay and related works. (par. 19)

     

    and later:

     

    One might, then, see Derrida's statement reflecting the fact that, in contrast to classical--Newtonian--physics, the space-time of special, and even more so of general, relativity disallows a Newtonian universal background with its (separate) absolute space and absolute time, or a uniquely privileged frame of reference for physical events. (par. 20)

     

    In fact, whether or not Derrida really had this in mind, it is an interesting idea that deserves to be examined on its own right.

     

    Let’s consider the last quotation first. One has to remark right away that the Newtonian “absolute space” and “absolute time” are not the same thing as a “uniquely privileged frame of reference.” This calls for some explanations. The sense in which space and time are “absolute” in Newtonian mechanics is the following: Newtonian mechanics assumes that it is absolutely meaningful to speak of two events as occurring at the same point of space, or at the same time. This does not imply a choice of a frame of reference. Neither do the laws of Newtonian mechanics single out a particular reference frame; this is all discussed quite clearly in the second chapter of Einstein’s Meaning of Relativity. There is no spatial “center of the universe” singled out by the laws of physics, or any intrinsic meaning to the words “up” or “down.” The laws of physics must be the same at all spatial locations and with respect to all spatial directions; Einstein calls this the “principle of relativity with respect to direction” (Meaning of Relativity 24). One next inquires if there is is a similar principle for observers that are in motion relative to each other. Here it is necessary to single out a particular class of reference frames, the “inertial frames,” and it is required that the laws of physics should be the same for any two observers moving in an inertial reference frame; this Einstein calls the “principle of special relativity” (Meaning of Relativity 25) and it is valid both in Newtonian mechanics and in the theory of relativity.

     

    The difference between classical mechanics and special relativity can be seen when we ask how different inertial frames are related to each other. In classical mechanics, as Einstein points out, this problem is solved with the aid of the unconscious assumption that phrases such as “simultaneous” and “in the same location” have an absolute meaning; this is the Newtonian “absolute” space and time. One can then write down formulas for the relation between different inertial frames; Einstein calls these “Galilean transformations” (Meaning of Relativity 26, eqn. 21). For two frames related by Galilean transformations, accelerations are the same, and since the laws of Newtonian physics are expressed as relations between forces and accelerations, they are invariant under Galilean transformations. Now the problem treated by Special Relativity arises when it is observed that Maxwell’s equations for the electromagnetic field are not invariant under Galilean transformations. It would then seem that one could detect experimentally “absolute velocities,” and not just absolute accelerations; in particular, it would make sense to assert that some object in the universe was “absolutely at rest.” And, far from being a fundamental condition of the theory, this was thought of as a surprising prediction, to be tested experimentally.

     

    The failure of such experiments led Einstein to abandon Galilean transformations, and to realize that the relations between different inertial frames must leave Maxwell’s equations invariant. By a well-known argument, he shows that the relations are given by transformations which leave invariant the Lorentz distance–the Lorentz transformations. One thus arrives at the concept of an absolute “space-time,” and of a class of inertial frames of reference “in” it, all related by Lorentz transformations. Einstein then showed that a suitable modification of Newtonian mechanics could be formulated in this setting, from which one could recover the usual mechanical laws when velocities were assumed to be small compared with the speed of light. This of course is the Special Theory of Relativity.

     

    One can summarize the situation as follows. There is a principle of relativity in both Newtonian mechanics and in Special Relativity theory; neither theory has a “privileged reference frame,” though both theories recognize a privileged class of reference frames, the inertial frames. The difference between the two lies in the relations between the inertial frames; for the Newtonian theory, these are given by the Galilean transformations, which allow an absolute distinction between space and time. In Special Relativity, absolute space and absolute time are replaced by the weaker hypothesis of an absolute space-time, in which different inertial frames are related by Lorentz transformations, and in which there is no longer an absolute distinction between space and time. In General Relativity, finally, the notion of inertial frame is abandoned, though the notion of a physically meaningful space-time is retained.

     

    We must now return to Plotnitsky’s assertion that Derrida’s remark refers to the circumstance that Relativity “disallows a Newtonian universal background… with a uniquely privileged frame of reference for physical events,” and that the concept of “play” that Derrida has worked out connotes “the impossibility within Einstein’s framework of space-time of a uniquely privileged frame of reference.” In fact neither classical nor relativistic mechanics singles out a uniquely privileged reference frame, though both of them single out a privileged class of reference frames. Now if, in the context of either theory, a “center” in Derrida’s sense is to be taken as a privileged frame of reference, and if (as Plotnitsky suggests) lack of such a frame is exactly the connotation of Derridean “play” in this setting, then classical mechanics would itself have to be described as a “decentered structure.” But Derrida’s essay makes it clear that a “classical” theory such as Newtonian mechanics has no business being a decentered structure. According to Derrida, decentered play only emerges subsequent to an event, the “rupture” that he evokes at the beginning of “Structure, Sign, and Play,” which he locates at a particular moment of European culture, roughly during decades surrounding the turn of the century, and he mentions the names of Nietzsche, Freud, and Heidegger; this is not the heyday of classical mechanics!

     

    At this point a qualification is in order. It is certainly true that many classical physicists, Newton included, assumed it was absolutely meaningful to assert that an object was “at rest” or “in motion.” Doubts about this, however, surface as early as the first decade of the 18th century (Leibniz, in the Leibniz-Clarke correspondence). But the historical record is not at issue here: the point is that theory itself does not require such an assumption. Newtonian mechanics functions in the same way, and makes the same predictions, with or without the assumption that “rest” has an absolute meaning. (In fact, one of the predictions is that it is impossible to determine experimentally if an object is “absolutely at rest”; this principle stated as early as Galileo’s Dialogues. In practice, classical physicists used whatever frame of reference seemed convenient for calculations–usually, though not always, the center of mass of whatever system of bodies was being considered. And they could do this, precisely because it was understood that the particular choice of frame didn’t matter. Now it may be that the persistence of the assumption that “rest” is absolutely meaningful, alongside of what is really the operative assumption of classical mechanics (that the laws of physics are the same for all inertial frames, and that no one is particularly privileged) is an example of the ambivalence between centered structure and decentered play that Derrida discusses in “Structure, Sign, and Play,” and illustrates his belief (c.f. Languages of Criticism 265) that there is no meaningful choice between the two. But again, if classical physics displays the same “obscure economy” in which the “absolutely irreconcilable” schemes of centered and decentered structure coexist, then it seems that we should have to put, alongside of Nietzsche, Freud, and Heidegger, the names of Galileo, Newton, and Leibnitz. Which was probably not Derrida’s intention.

     

    The problem, I think, is in the assumption that, at least in the context of physics, “center” must mean “privileged frame of reference,” and that “play” or “jeu” has to do with its absence. Plotnitsky does not really justify this assumption; he only says that it is “easily supportable on the basis of his essay and related works,” and gives no details; it is, however, the key point. In fact, if “center” could mean something else, then is it not possible after all that Relativity has a “center,” an “organizing principle of the structure” which “would limit what we might call the play of the structure”? One thinks, for example, of the representation theory of the Lorentz group, which classifies the various invariant and covariant quantities for the action of the group, and thus the mathematical constructions which are to be allowed as “physically meaningful.” It could therefore be seen as limiting the “play” of the structure, in the sense that it establishes what can be meaningful in the theory and what cannot. We have also seen the role played by the notion of “inertial system” in both classical and relativistic mechanics: could this be a “center,” something limiting the “play”? And if we consider, not Special, but General Relativity, then a host of concepts come in for consideration–the curvature tensor, the Ricci tensor, the scalar curvature, or perhaps the totality of Riemannian geometry–as a “ceenter,” something which limits the play of the structure by determining what is physically meaning, and physically possible.

     

    On the other hand, if relativistic mechanics is to be understood as a “decentered structure,” then this must be explained on the basis provided by Derrida in his lecture. I can’t say that I really see how to do this. Consider, for example, Derrida’s introduction of the latter concept:

     

    From then on [i.e. after the "rupture"] it was probably necessary to begin to think that there was no center, that the center could not be thought in the form of a being-present, that the center had no natural locus, that it was not a fixed locus but a function, a sort of non-locus in which an infinite number of sign-substitutions came into play. This moment was that in which language invaded the universal problematic; that in which, in the absence of a center or origin, everything became discourse--provided we can agree on this word--that is to say, when everything became a system where the central signified, the original or transcendental signified, is never absolutely present outside a system of differences. (Languages of Criticism 249)

     

    and later:

     

    This field is in fact that of freeplay, that is to say, a field of infinite substitutions in the closure of a finite ensemble. This field permits these infinite substitutions only because it is finite... (260)

     

    Is it really clear that the multiplicity of reference frames in Special Relativity constitutes “a sort of non-locus in which an infinite number of sign-substitutions come into play?” If so, why does this point of view not apply to a “classical” theory such as Newtonian mechanics? And what sense would it have to say that in the Theory of Relativity “everything is discourse”? These quoted passages call for some sort of commentary or explanation, to justify the particular application of these concepts to physics. Plotnitsky does not give any, though he criticizes Weinberg for a similar failure (par. 13).

     

    One might object that it is completely misguided to take Derrida’s text in such a literal way. But when Plotnitsky says that “these concepts, such as ‘play,’ are thought through in Derrida in the most rigorous way,” when he says that “interpretations of these statements [i.e. Derrida’s remark about the “Einsteinian constant”] are possible and may be necessary,” and when he appeals to “traditional norms of reading,” then I think that he too wants to take Derrida at his word. This would seem to be all the more necessary if he really wants to distance himself from the position that Derrida’s remarks to Hyppolite were merely “casual” and “offhand.” As far as the latter goes, I think it is perfectly consistent to view those comments as casual, or at best metaphorical, and yet hold that the conceptual scheme outlined by Derrida in “Structure, Sign, and Play” has some application to physics. But Plotnitsky has much more work to do if he wants to take on the latter task; one thing, in particular, is to clear up the meaning of “center”–a question already raised by Hyppolite in the discussion following “Structure, Sign, and Play,” and not, to my satisfaction at least, answered by Derrida.

     


     

    On Derrida and Relativity: A Reply to Richard Crew

    Arkady Plotnitsky
    aplotnit@acpub.duke.edu© 1998 Arkady Plotnitsky
    All rights reserved

     


     

    I am grateful to Richard Crew for his thoughtful commentary on my article “‘But It Is Above All Not True’: Derrida, Relativity and the ‘Science Wars.’” While critical of the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange on relativity, this commentary offers a welcome contrast to recent debates in the so-called “Science Wars.” No less significantly, Crew meaningfully uses the content of mathematics and science in his argument, rather than merely making them serve as a source of authority, as a number of mathematicians and scientists have done in the “Science Wars.” His discussion of both relativity and classical mechanics has much to offer in its own right and (perhaps contrary to his own view) illustrates the fertility of exploring the relationships between modern science and Derrida’s and related ideas. Crew argues on the basis of a substantive reading of the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange and Derrida’s work. This, too, offers a marked and welcome contrast to most recent “criticism” by members of the scientific community. I would, therefore, be glad to use this opportunity to further clarify key questions at stake in my essay, and I offer this response not in the spirit of confrontation but in the spirit of clarification. Hopefully, along with Crew’s remarks, my response will make a contribution to a broad and substantive discussion concerning the relationships between modern mathematics and science, and new philosophy, or contemporary culture as a whole. In following this approach, the best one can do may well be, as Nietzsche said, “to replace the improbable with the more probable, possibly one error with another” (On the Genealogy of Morals 18). This, however, is by far preferable to the “Science Wars.”

     

    In this spirit, let me begin by acknowledging that at several points the argument of my essay needs to be clarified and made more precise. Yet, it also appears to me that, however unintentionally, Crew has bypassed some qualifications I did make and that the essay already, in effect, responds to some of his questions. I also think that some of his comments are in fact consistent with my argument and even reinforce it, if against the grain of Crew’s overall argument. It is crucial to keep in mind what arguments and claims–and of what kind–I make in my article. It may therefore be useful to consider the nature of these arguments and claims before proceeding to Crew’s more specific comments. I shall do so in two parts, each reflecting two main aspects of my earlier argument–the ethical and the conceptual–even though these aspects cannot be seen as fully dissociable, which is a significant point in its own right. I shall designate these two parts of my response as “A” and “B.” In a final section, “C,” I will address Crew’s comments specifically.

     

    A. Ethics

     

    At the core of my argument in my article is the following point: If one wants to offer a meaningful argument concerning the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange this is how one should proceed: a) by taking into account the particular circumstances of the exchange; and b) by examining the exchange itself and, especially, Derrida’s “Structure, Sign, and Play in the Discourse of the Human Sciences” (see my par. 22, 24, 26, 27). I consider this point axiomatic–as concerns both a meaningful conceptual engagement with the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange and, especially, the ethics of academic and intellectual discussion. Indeed, this is how Crew proceeds. But, as he points out in his first paragraph above, this is decidedly not what we have seen in the discussions at issue in my essay. The latter is one of my central points. The article and all of its arguments are framed accordingly, as its subtitle, “Derrida, Relativity, and the ‘Science Wars,’” indicates. As I tried to make clear throughout, my article does not offer, and does not claim to offer, a full conceptually substantive argument supporting its readings of the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange and “Structure, Sign, and Play.” It only suggests that such readings are possible and offers some corroboration to support this suggestion. It pointedly allows for the possibility that these readings can be challenged, for example, in the way they are by Crew, within the proper protocol, as defined above. That is, my essay is more an argument about how an argument concerning the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange should be conducted than an argument concerning the meaning of any particular statement in this exchange. To a much greater extent it is an argument concerning the relationships between relativity and Derrida’s philosophy as such, on which I sahll comment in more detail presently. When I do argue about the meaning of Hyppolite or Derrida statements in their exchange, I do so tentatively and provisionally; and one must still consider what kind of arguments they are, which I shall do in part “B” of this response. As I say in my initial formulation: “I shall suggest a reading of Derrida’s statement on relativity that might help to develop more balanced and productive forms of interaction between science and the work of Derrida and other authors mentioned above” (par. 2; emphasis added). I also point out that one may be critical of the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange or Derrida’s ideas in general, or be skeptical concerning the value or the very possibility of this interaction (par. 13 and 26).

     

    I am not saying that I offered no conceptual views, arguments, or claims in my article, on which I shall comment below. My point is that these are framed in a particular way within the overall argument of the article, and that this framing must be taken into account in considering any claim made there, such as those concerning possible meanings of the phrase “the Einsteinian constant.” The reading I provided of that phrase may be plausible or possible, or “at least allowable” (par. 18), or implausible or even impossible and, hence, disallowed. This reading, however, must be considered according to the way its framed in my essay, rather than on its own. This is my only major reservation concerning Crew’s commentary. Even the conceptual, let alone ethical, argument of my article is not, as Crew appears to think, centered or anchored in, or even dependent on, any specific interpretation (there are several) of “the Einsteinian constant” suggested in my article, in particular as the Einsteinian relativistic space-time or the spatio-temporal interval invariant under Lorentz transformations. The argument of my essay would remain largely intact if one maintains other interpretations of this “constant,” including the speed of light c–although the spectrum of such interpretations is, I argue, not unlimited. Indeed, it would remain intact even if this phrase or related statements in the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange were in fact meaningless, or uninterpretable. I shall return to this point below. My point at the moment is that conceptual aspects of my argument, including its conjectural interpretations of certain passages from the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange and from Derrida’s “Structure, Sign, and Play,” are not dissociable from its ethical dimensions.

     

    I should add that it is not merely a question, as Crew says, of “the superficiality with which this and other aspects of the Sokal controversy has been discussed” (par.1; emphasis added). At stake are serious–and, once unsupported, scholarly and ethically unacceptable–accusations (far from restricted to Derrida), with considerable implications. Often it is a matter of the truth of such accusations (hence the title of my essay), such as those made by Paul Gross and Norman Levitt in Higher Superstition, on no basis whatsoever, of “Derrida’s eagerness to claim familiarity with deep scientific matters,” of which (this is clearly their point) he is in fact totally ignorant (par. 7; see also Higher Superstition, 79). Beyond being blatantly untrue, this is hardly an innocent and, if believed, inconsequential accusation, found in a book published by a major university press (n.12). Also, at stake is the work of key contemporary thinkers and its impact on the academic and intellectual life, and culture.

     

    Given the particular character, as just outlined, of my argument, the absence (which I acknowledge throughout) of a definitive argument concerning relativity and the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange or “Structure, Sign, and Play,” was, I thought, permissible, however desirable such an argument might be in general. Ethically, too, since I did not criticize, let alone attack Derrida or Hyppolite (and I do believe that there is an ethical asymmetry here), I could afford to be more tentative either concerning the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange itself or “Structure, Sign, and Play,”–provided that I made clear to the readers that my claims are tentative. This I think I did, for the most part. At the same time, I thought it important to show that there exists a view of the relationships between modern mathematics or science and new philosophy different from most positions on both sides of the “Science Wars.”

     

    B. Concepts

     

    I shall now explain what were the conceptual arguments and claims in my essay concerning both the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange and (a very different case) the relationships between Derrida’s work and relativity. From the standpoint of my article, and, I would argue, under the circumstances of the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange in general, the conceptual content and significance of this exchange lies in the degree to which it reflects the relationships between the philosophical content of modern mathematics and science, here in particular relativity, and Derrida’s ideas, such as that of decentered play [jeu]. That is, it is in relation to these relationships in Derrida’s work, in particular in “Structure, Sign, and Play,” rather than in the exchange itself, that the latter can be meaningfully considered. In short (this view governs my reading of the exchange), the meaning of the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange is the possibility of such relationships. It tells us that the philosophical content of Einstein’s relativity overlaps with and might have influenced, however indirectly, Derrida’s conceptuality of decentered play. As I stress throughout, it is only the philosophical content and implications of relativity, rather than physics itself, that is at issue here (see par.11, 14, 19, and 21-22).

     

    Accordingly, all that I claim with any definitiveness is the existence of such philosophical relationships between Derrida’s ideas and relativity–and that the possibility of these relationships is reflected in the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange. That Hyppolite’s remarks suggest the possibility of such connections is hardly in question, however little he offers to justify such a suggestion and however vague and chaotic his comments may be. Crew clearly shares my view that these factors and other circumstances of the exchange make nearly everything one has to say about his or Derrida’s comments there unavoidably hypothetical.

     

    It is in this sense that I argue that no definitive interpretation of their statements on “the Einsteinian constant” may be possible (par. 18). This need not mean that something more definitive was not on Hyppolite’s or Derrida’s mind, although their thinking was obviously far from crystallized. As will be seen, some indeterminacy of meaning at the time of the exchange, or, conversely, the fact that some meaning of certain statements determined at the time is lost now, does not mean that some statements of either type cannot be read (in the sense to be explained below). By contrast, it can be ascertained with a reasonable degree of certainty that Hyppolite suggests the possibility of some connections between Derrida’s ideas and relativity.

     

    How viable this possibility is may of course be questioned, as Crew appears to do in his comments. While (I hope) my essay offers more in this regard than Hyppolite’s comments, it does not offer the kind of reading of “Structure, Sign, and Play” and related works that would constitute a full argument in this respect. However, I also do not claim to offer such an argument in full measure but only suggest that it is possible to do so, which is significant for the ethical reasons explained briefly above and in paragraphs 24 and 26 of my essay.

     

    While I did not fully develop such an argument in my essay, this type of argument itself has a different status in my essay and entails a very different type of claims than that of claims advanced in my interpretations of passages from the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange. The latter interpretations are strictly hypothetical and the statements and concepts in question, such as “the Einsteinian constant,” may indeed have had a different meaning in the exchange (my article suggests several such possible meanings), or (which is not the same) might be given a different meaning in a reading, or might even be read as meaningless. I do not think that the latter is the case, even though, in part by virtue of their circumstances, some of Hyppolite’s and Derrida’s statements are vague and unrigorous. As a result the role of these remarks may well be restricted to indicating the possibility of some conceptual relationships between relativity and Derrida’s ideas. By contrast, my argument for the latter relationships is not hypothetical in the same sense. This difference is made explicit in my article (par. 21). This is also why, as I said above, even the conceptual argument of my essay is not primarily centered or dependent on any particular interpretation of “the Einsteinian constant.” It is certainly not primarily about this interpretation, as Crew appears to assume in his reading of my article. Such a reading is not preventable, but it runs against the spirit, if not the letter, of my article. By contrast, Derrida’s concept of (decentered) play is indispensable to my argument concerning the relationships between Derrida’s work, such as and especially “Structure, Sign, and Play,” and relativity. Of course, this argument, too, even if made as fully as possible, may be unpersuasive, can be argued against, or disproved, as my article makes clear (par. 26). Crew’s comments do not appear to offer (or aim to offer) a full counter-argument in this respect, however much they undermine (perhaps less than Crew claims) my suggested interpretation of “the Einsteinian constant” or other passages in the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange. Although I did not fully develop it there and will not be able to fully develop it here, this argument would in my view stand, regardless of the specific meaning of anything said by Hyppolite or Derrida during their exchange.

     

    From this perspective, whatever Derrida and Hyppolite say concerning relativity during their exchange, be it meaningful or meaningless, becomes more or less immaterial, if not irrelevant. Accordingly, questions Crew raises about their statements there are not really that germane to my argument. Crew’s more general (but similarly critical) claims concerning relativity and Derrida’s work itself are of course a different matter, and I shall consider them separately below.

     

    Derrida is in a rather enviable position here. On the one hand, he does not mention relativity in his essay (and to my knowledge anywhere in his work in any substantive way) and gives only a brief improvised response to a somewhat muddled question by Hyppolite. He might have had something in mind concerning relativity and his concept of play, quite possibly something vague and induced by Hyppolite’s question. What that was is not easily, if at all, recoverable after thirty years and is found in a text that is itself uncertain. In any event, while, as Crew observes, Derrida might indeed not have said enough or was too vague to be definitive or definitively right, or even meaningful, about relativity, he did not say enough to be (definitively provable) wrong about it either. Even if he were proved to be wrong, it would be unreasonable to make too much of it given the circumstances, as indeed nearly everyone, on both sides of the “Science Wars,” admits at this point, including Sokal, although not Gross and Levitt (Higher Superstition 93). In short, there is little ground for any meaningful criticism, certainly not for the kind of attack to which Derrida was subjected during the “Science Wars.” At most, if one is inclined to criticize, one can see Derrida’s remarks as irrelevant as far as relativity is concerned. Even in this case, however, from the ethical standpoint one has no choice but to acknowledge that in one degree or another the circumstances had contributed to the questionable character of his statement, especially given that Derrida is customarily cautious and circumspect in his statements concerning mathematics and science, and the relationships between them and his own work (par. 1; Derrida, “Sokal et Bricmont ne sont pas sérieux”). On the other hand, if one does want to suggest connections between Derrida’s work and relativity or establish them rigorously, one is free to do so. If, however, such an attempt is successful, at least some credit would belong to Derrida. In short, on the one hand, the ethics of scholarly and intellectual discussion does not leave one much space for Derrida’s critics here. On the other hand, his remark on “the Einsteinian constant” is what one can make of it by using “Structure, Sign, and Play” and Derrida’s ideas in general and their connections to relativity, which one has to establish on one’s own. One has to extract and indeed to construct a “Derridean” conceptual matrix for relativity out of materials such as the idea of decentered play and related conceptual formations of a more general philosophical nature (par. 19).

     

    As I explained above, my primary argument in the article is that there exists or, better, that one can establish–or, again, construct–significant connections between Derrida’s and related work and the philosophical problematics of relativity. My reading of the relevant passages in the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange and interpretation of “the Einsteinian constant” was “an exploration of certain possibilities and implications of these connections” (par. 21).

     

    The most likely and the most significant possibility for placing Derrida’s comment may well be suggested, perhaps more marginally than it should have been, in par. 24. Let me reproduce this elaboration here:

     

    There are further nuances concerning relativity as well, especially those relating to the difference between the centering of "the whole [theoretical] construct"--that is, as I read it, the overall conceptual framework of relativity--around the concept of space-time and the centering of the space-time of special or general relativity itself. Concentrating here on "the Einsteinian constant," Derrida does not appear to address the first question as such (or conceivably, and, again, under the circumstances understandably, conflates both questions). It may well be, however, that he intimates a negative answer here as well. For from the Derridean perspective it would be difficult, perhaps impossible, to claim any central or unique concept--the "constant"--defining the Einsteinian framework. It is, therefore, possible that Derrida has this point in mind. Invariance or stability of a conceptual center of a theoretical structure, such as relativity, is, of course, quite different from invariance of a physical constant. One might suggest, however, that in the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange a certain concept of decentering defining the space-time of relativity coincides with the idea of decentering the overall conceptual structure of the theory itself. No concept belonging to the latter, not even that of the decentered space-time, may be seen as an absolute center of relativity theory--a center invariant under all theoretical and historical transformations of this theory. That is, such conceptual centering may change from one version of relativity to another (this centering is relative in this sense), and some forms of relativity may be constructed as conceptually decentered in themselves. Indeed, there have been considerable debates among historians of science as to the relative centrality of key experimental facts and theoretical ideas of special relativity, either as originally introduced by Einstein or in its subsequent, such as Minkowskian, forms. (par. 24)

     

    I am now inclined to think about this situation in stronger terms than “[i]t may well be… that [Derrida] intimates a negative answer here as well” or “it is… possible that Derrida has this point in mind.” Given Derrida’s argument in “Structure, Sign, and Play” and the Derridean perspective on the structure of theoretical argument in general, this could have been (and would naturally have been) Derrida’s primary meaning of his statement. This meaning also allows for several meanings of “the Einsteinian constant” itself, including the speed of light c, which may indeed have been what at least Derrida, if not Hyppolite, had in mind after all, as both I and Crew suggest (see par. 17 and 20 of my essay; par. 2 of Crew’s response). As I say in paragraphs 24 and note 23, Hyppolite might have also thought of the center in the sense of conceptually centering the framework of relativity around a certain “constant” (however the latter itself is interpreted), when he spoke of the constant as “dominat[ing] the whole construct” (par.16). A certain conflation of both these levels of “(de)centering” is possible and, as the above elaboration indicates, these levels may mirror each other.

     

    Is the space-time itself of relativity decentered and decentered more radically than that of Newtonian physics (since there is a certain decentering there as well, via the so-called Galilean relativity)? Would relativity be a conceptually centered or decentered theory? To what degree the latter can be conceptualized via or metaphorized by the former? These are some among the questions posed, or at least provoked, by Hyppolite, in his reaction to Derrida’s concept of decentered play and related ideas in “Structure, Sign, and Play.” Even if not rigorously developed by Hyppolite (under the circumstances understandably), these are philosophically rigorous questions, in part made possible by Derrida’s ideas, although they are not specifically posed by Derrida either. However indirect, these connections are historically significant (par. 25). Questions of this type naturally arise in the philosophy of relativity, even though they may not be addressed by the institutional philosophers of science in the form that Derrida’s work might suggest. On occasion one does find formulations in their work that are close to those that would emerge were one to consider relativity from a Derridean perspective. Indeed, as I indicated above and as I shall further discuss below, even as he criticizes the exchange and “Structure, Sign, and Play,” Crew in effect demonstrates the potential significance of these questions for our understanding of both relativity and Derrida’s framework (see par. 5 – 11). These questions are independent of whatever was said or meant in the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange. This is why I said earlier that, in this larger scheme, whatever was said or meant in the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange itself, for example, by “the Einsteinian constant,” is nearly irrelevant.

     

    However, with these questions and Derrida’s ideas in mind, one can at least read (which, as I shall explain presently, is not the same as finding what Derrida meant or even what he might have meant by his statement at the time) his comment in the following way. Whatever is a constant–numerical, conceptual (an invariant, for example) or other–in Einstein’s relativity is likely to be a manifestation of a Derridean (or analogous) decentering, variability, play [jeu]. Such “constants” may be found either at the level of the structure of the Einsteinian space-time or at the level of the conceptual structure of Einstein’s theory itself. Both may be seen as mirroring each other in this respect, with the qualifications indicated above and keeping in mind the rigorous specificity of the mathematics and physics of relativity. In this reading the meaning of “the Einsteinian constant” itself is left open, although it cannot be seen as arbitrary (and the spectrum of possibilities is in fact not that large). “The Einsteinian constant” will refer to the relationships between many conceivable Einsteinian “constants”–numerical, conceptual, invariants, and so forth–and the irreducible decentering, variability, and play in Derrida’s sense. The former signals the latter: that is, the Einsteinian constants signal the Einsteinian variability as the Derridean or quasi-Derridean play.

     

    This is–or might have been–an intriguing insight or a lucky guess (or both) on Derrida’s part, if due primarily to his general ideas rather than his knowledge of relativity. That is, it might be that, provoked by Hyppolite’s remarks, Derrida guessed that something of that type–that is, that “constants” signal decentering, variability, play–must take place in relativity as well. If so, it was a brilliant guess. If not–that is, if this is not what he meant, or even could have possibly meant–this is still how this statement may be read. That is, one might see it as a kind of philosophical or poetico-philosophical (as opposed to strictly scientific) proposition assembled out of freely floating terms and ideas which may be read in the way just described. Even if the statement had a different meaning when produced, once produced, this statement or, more accurately, the field of interpretative possibilities thereby established allows one to interpret it in the way suggested here. This reading, however, is not arbitrary and, I would argue, philosophically rigorous–that is, the statement can be given a rigorous meaning on the basis of both Derrida’s text, specifically “Structure, Sign, and Play,” and relativity. As I said, it was likely only a lucky guess, although such guesses are, I would argue, never purely a matter of luck. At the very least, the history of Derrida’s ideas has some connections to relativity, as well as quantum physics, post-Gödelian mathematical logic, and certain areas of modern biology and genetics. As I suggest in my article, in all these theories one finds the philosophical conceptuality of the kind found in Derrida and thinkers, such as Bataille, Blanchot, and Levinas, who influenced him. Of course, one finds related philosophical problematics in the history of philosophy itself, extending at least from the Leibniz-Clarke debate, as I mention (par. 25) and as Crew suggests as well (par. 10). The Leibniz-Clarke debate must have been on Hyppolite’s mind.

     

    What I tried to do in my article, then, was to suggest such general connections, whether perceived or not by Derrida himself, between Derrida’s ideas and the philosophy of relativity. As I said, one must take the responsibility for this reading and claims, be they ultimately right and wrong, since Derrida makes none of them. I am perfectly happy to take this responsibility and a degree of credit, if any credit is due, for establishing these connections. Indeed, as I suggest in that essay and as I argue elsewhere (in particular, in Complementarity) more radical ideas than those found anywhere in contemporary philosophy (with a possible exception of Niels Bohr’s work) may ultimately be at stake in the problematics of modern physics (par. 22). As I said, if I am right, part of the credit will have to go to Derrida. If I am wrong, the fault, as the saying goes, is all mine.

     

    The above considerations are part of what I refer to in my article as “the problem of reading,” the problem that has many dimensions (par. 1). What I have specifically in mind here is a reading of Derrida’s comment (and via that comment, of a certain portion of “Structure, Sign, and Play” and a certain portion of the philosophical structure of relativity) as an engagement of shared and mutually enriching conceptualities between theories in different domains, more or less proximate, or more or less distant. It is out of a combination of Derrida’s conceptuality and that of (the philosophy of) relativity that the above propositions, such as “constants of Einstein’s relativity are manifestations of variability, decentering, and play (in Derrida sense),” are produced.

     

    Is the claim of that nature–that is, that Einstein’s relativity is a Derridean theory in this sense–supportable? I think so, even though I cannot further elaborate upon this here. At least this engagement of Derrida’s and other new philosophical ideas in the context of modern or indeed postmodern thought and culture appears to lead to important philosophical questions concerning both. At the very least this suggestion can be put on the table, and it would, I think, be difficult to criticize one for doing this.

     

    C. Counterpoints

     

    Both my article and this exchange are, in my view, best seen as invitations to a rigorous and sustained investigation of the problematics in question, whatever one’s view of Derrida’s and related ideas about modern science, and whatever the outcome of such an investigation may be as concerns the value and significance of these ideas. With this consideration and the preceding discussion in mind, I shall now comment on some of Crew’s specific points. The title of this section–“Counterpoints”–refers more to the sense in which this term is used in music than in an argument.

     

    Crew, par. 2-4

     

    I was, I admit, a bit too loose in using the terms “correlative” and “conceptual equivalent” so as to make them appear more interchangeable than they should be. What I meant and what I should have said in my article is that “two Einsteinian constants,” space-time itself and the Lorentz distance (both correlative to the constancy of the speed of light, and to each other), allow for two conceptually equivalent philosophical conceptualities of relativity. This qualification does not appear to me to undermine the substance of my argument. I do think that Hyppolite might have had space-time itself in mind, in spite of his, indeed somewhat odd expression, “a combination of space-time,” correctly questioned by Crew (par. 3). The special circumstances of both the exchange itself and of its translation, transcription, and so forth appear to me to have played a role here.

     

    I did indeed suggest that “the Einsteinian constant” may have been c, the speed of light, after all, in part for the reasons just indicated or those (more or less the same) indicated by Crew. This follows from my discussion, especially in paragraphs 19-21, although it may need to have been stated more explicitly there. My point was that conceptual (rather than numerical) interpretations that I suggest are “more plausible” (par. 17). I do not think that reading “the Einsteinian constant” as c undermines my argument in the article either. The particular interpretation of “the Einsteinian constant” as c is clearly more likely than those proposing other numerical constants that can be associated with Einstein’s name (par. 15). When I criticize those who used c in the “Science Wars,” I did not meant to suggest that this interpretation is impossible. I meant rather to emphasize, first, that other interpretations are also possible and perhaps more likely, which decision requires a more careful examination of the text. Secondly, I argue that the treatment of the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange by some who used this interpretation is unacceptable on ethical and intellectual grounds. I may overstress the primacy of the conceptual interpretation of “the Einsteinian constant,” and they should have been more nuanced in this respect. However, my overall interpretation of the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange on relativity allows for reading “the Einsteinian constant” as c, since it is primarily about relativity and/as a decentered play (par. 11), which concept easily tolerate this reading, as Crew observes (par. 4). So, if Crew is right that c makes more or even most sense for “the Einsteinian constant” (and this argument is not uncompelling), it would not change my main argument. As I have stressed from the outset, the key aspects of my conceptual, let alone ethical, argument do not fundamentally depend on two particular interpretations of the phrase “the Einsteinian constant,” as Crew appears to think. Crew’s reservations concerning the difference between the terms “constant” and “invariant” are justified, especially as concerns space-time. I have pondered this point myself while writing my article. I do think, however, that the space-time interval, invariant under the Lorentz transformations, could have been assimilated by Hyppolite into his “constant” as referring to something invariant in the sense of remaining constant. In addition, Hyppolite’s propositions in his statement concerning the nature of this “constant” (as the one that “does not belong to any experimenters who live the experience,” or “dominates the whole construct”) appear to me to support my reading.

     

    All of the above possibilities would satisfy my suggestion that “constants” of relativity signal its decentered play in Derrida’s sense, whether one considers it in relation to the relativistic space-time or in relation to the conceptual matrix of relativity. This does not mean that one is authorized to say anything about this phrase or other statement on relativity in the Hyppolite-Derrida exchange, for several reasons. Thus, while, as I say in par. 25, Hyppolite had extensive general knowledge of modern mathematics and science, some candidates for “the Einsteinian constant” or, similarly, some of Crew’s elegant suggestions concerning possible conceptual “centers” of relativity (especially once he moves to general relativity) are far too technical for Hyppolite to have had them in mind. Indeed, given the nature of Hyppolite’s and Derrida’s work and their audience (which were for me significant factors in interpreting “the Einsteinian constant”), two conceptual possibilities that I suggest and the speed of light just about exhaust all likely candidates. Even the spatio-temporal (Lorentz) interval may be a bit of a stretch, although it is virtually certain that Hyppolite was aware of the concept. I am less certain about Derrida, who is, however, certainly aware of the concept of space-time, and other general philosophical ideas of relativity, as I indicated (par. 19-20). Mathematically and conceptually appealing as they are, Crew’s suggestions clearly reflect his technical knowledge of relativity, which contributes to the effectiveness and elegance of his commentary, but would not likely be available to Hyppolite or Derrida. Of course, if one has this, more technical, knowledge, one can apply some Derridean ideas to relativity. This is what I had in mind in saying earlier that one can connect more rigorously the philosophy, if not physics, of relativity and a Derridean or related philosophy, although, as I said and as Crew argues (par.13), one needs to do much work in order to adjust both accordingly. Obviously, neither Hyppolite nor Derrida do–nor, importantly, claim to do–so.

     

    Crew, par. 4 – 13

     

    I find this discussion especially appealing. As I said, in some respects, perhaps contrary to Crew’s intentions, it is richly suggestive of the potential relationships between relativity and the Derridean or (the term one might prefer) quasi-Derridean problematics of decentered play. The original version of my essay contained a discussion of Galilean relativity, along the lines similar to Crew’s. The reference to the Leibniz-Clarke debate (par. 25) is a remnant of this discussion and indicates some of the topics that Crew discusses. I see this part of Crew’s commentary as for the most part consistent with and helping my main argument, as described in section “B” above, rather than undermining it. I have a few counterpoints which I hope will also explain why I think that the latter may be the case.

     

    It is clear from the my statement that Crew cites in par. 14 that the question of “a Newtonian universal background with its (separate) absolute space and absolute time” is at least as significant for my argument as that of “a uniquely privileged frame of reference for physical events” (par. 20). These two concepts are indeed different, as Crew says (par. 5). The significance of this qualification is that it indicates that my essay offers a broader field for “centerings” in classical physics than Crew attributes to it. My “or” in the above sentence does not mean equivalence of two configurations, but rather either “one” or “the other,” or possibly both. All three philosophical views are in principle possible interpretations of classical physics. As Crew indicates, although there is no spatial center of the universe even in the Newtonian space, this decentering takes place against the fixed flat background of space and is governed by absolute time. The Galilean relativity does not change the latter feature. In addition, as Crew points out (this is also Minkowski’s point) space and time are absolutely meaningful in the Newtonian picture, at least in the classical interpretation. There was, at least for a long time, no space-time picture for the Newtonian world, although one can recast the Newtonian gravity in this form as well, as Elie Cartan did, in the wake of Einstein’s general relativity. In any event, the Newtonian world cannot in my view–and this was my point–be seen as the world of the radical play in Derrida’s sense (par. 20).

     

    Accordingly, I do not think that “classical mechanics could itself be described as a ‘decentered structure,’” which Crew suggests as a possibility (par. 9), at least not in Derrida’s radical sense. This may not be possible even if one recasts classical mechanics along the lines Crew suggests, in more Leibnizian terms, although this recasting poses rather interesting and complicated questions. It may be argued that, once one tries to take this program to its proper limits, one will inevitably arrive at something like Einstein’s relativity, rather than Newtonian physics. As is often observed, one sometimes gets an impression in reading the Leibniz-Clarke correspondence that Leibniz “read” Einstein. These nuances are important, and I refer to the Leibniz-Clarke correspondence myself in this particular form: “Many discussions of the Leibniz-Clarke debate in philosophical literature, known to Hyppolite (or Derrida), consider Einstein’s relativity, both speci[al] [typo in the text] and general theory, as a culmination or at least a crucial point in the history open by this debate” (par. 25).

     

    From this perspective, Crew’s discussion may, again, be seen as supporting both my argument and Derrida’s historical point in “Structure, Sign, and Play.” While Derrida does indeed speak of and considers a certain “rupture” in “Structure, Sign, and Play” (par. 11), this “rupture” cannot be seen as absolute. The concept of absolute rupture is itself subject to Derrida’s critique, along with absolute origins, ends, and so forth. This is suggested even by the way in which the very term “rupture” is introduced in Derrida in conjunction with the “event” at issue in “the history of the concept of structure.” (“Event” is already used in quotation marks in Derrida’s opening paragraph.) Derrida writes: “What would this event be then? Its exterior form would be that of a rupture and redoubling?” (Writing and Difference, 278; emphasis added). This would hardly seem to suggest a simple or unequivocal rupture, at most something whose exterior form appears as and has an effect of a rupture, and this effect is important. Overall, however, a much more complex historical model, involving both continuities and rupture, is at stake. On this point I permit myself to refer to my book In the Shadow of Hegel (84-95, 380-88). A very long history of continuities and ruptures (around the idea of structure) is at stake, as the second paragraph of “Structure, Sign, and Play” suggests (Writing and Difference, 278). From this perspective, one should expect some intimations, anticipations, and so forth, of the “event” at issue, sometimes quite radical and striking, as to some degree, in Leibniz or indeed Galileo, and there are much earlier cases, for example, in Plato. “Derrida’s intention[s]” in “Structure, Sign, and Play” were likely of that nature, rather than those that Crew suggests (par. 10).

     

    And yet, at the same time, a kind of (“decentered”) understanding of even the Newtonian physics that Crew suggests does not come into the foreground in any significant measure before precisely the historical period suggested by Derrida, in particular around Nietzsche’s time. If there could be a unique designation of the moment of the emergence of the concept of radical play or “the central figure,” it would be the moment and the figure of Nietzsche (Writing and Difference, 292). Derrida’s key concept of “the play of the world,” considered in my essay (par. 20), Of Grammatology, 50) is equally associated with Nietzsche. Nietzsche, however, was a contemporary of Maxwell, and his thought belongs to the period of Maxwell’s physics and other developments which eventually culminated in relativity. True, “these were not the heyday of classical mechanics” (par. 9). The point is, however, that a decentered understanding of classical mechanics, to the degree that it is possible, is also–and decidedly–not what governs the heyday of classical mechanics. Crew seems to locate the decentering possibilities of interpreting classical mechanics, ahistorically, in classical mechanics itself (par. 10). (Let us assume for the moment that these possibilities are viable even if taken in Derrida’s radical sense.) There are reasons for doing so, since already with Galileo certain key features necessary here were in place. However, the history of classical mechanics in this respect is for the most part a history of physically and philosophically centered theory, prior to relativity or developments that led to it, from Maxwell on. So Derrida’s genealogy is on the mark and not at all in conflict with the decentering possibilities of in interpreting classical physics, to the degree such possibilities are available (par.10). Galileo and Leibniz are, to some degree, exceptions, but exceptions consistent with the overall picture just presented. Actually Leibniz did not have (mathematical) mechanics, unlike Newton, which was of course a crucial factor in the history at issue. I have to leave Galileo’s case aside, even though some of his philosophical ideas are in fact rather modern. Overall, then, as I said, Crew’s argument here appears to me in effect in agreement with and reinforces the argument of my essay and “Structure, Sign, and Play,” rather than constituting an argument against them, as Crew seems to see it (par. 9).

     

    Conversely, it is not inconceivable (and I do not claim in my article that it is) that relativity is a centered theory after all, in one respect or another, either at the level of the space-time itself or at the level of its theoretical structure. This is what Hyppolite in fact asks, and Crew’s ideas here are most suggestive (par. 12). I do, of course, suggest otherwise, especially in paragraph 24 which in fact addresses the kind of points that Crew raises here. It is true that I have not shown or indeed really justified the assumption, formulated by Crew, that “”center’ must mean ‘privileged frame of reference’” (par. 11). But I also never make this assumption. In fact I argue otherwise, especially again par. 24. In short, there are significant questions here as to what degree and how (scientific, philosophical, and so forth) the “play” of the structure of relativity as theory can be limited. In a way, one can see it as one of the interesting and significant areas of potential investigation arising from a Derridean or Nietzschean philosophical perspective, as is especially suggested by the conclusion of “Structure, Sign, and Play,” where different concepts of play–centered and decentered–and of their irreducible entanglement are considered. Thus, Crew’s elaborations, again, appear to suggest that Derrida’s ideas can be meaningfully applied to relativity.

     

    As I said, one can, if one so wishes, only extract/construct the Derridean philosophical matrix of relativity by combining Derrida’s ideas and (the philosophy of) relativity itself. It is true that neither my essay nor this response fully or convincingly proves that such a possibility is viable. Much further work is indeed necessary here, as Crew says (par. 13). But, once again, I never claimed otherwise. In this respect Crew’s comment on my comment on Weinberg (par. 12) does not appear to me justified, even leaving aside that, as I have discussed in “A,” ethically, our positions are very different, since, unlike Weinberg, I do not criticize Derrida. All I claim is that “those unfamiliar with Derrida’s ideas would need a more extensive reading of Derrida’s essay [“Structure, Sign, and Play”] and a more comprehensive explication of its terms, and more patience and caution may be necessary before one is ready to agree, with Weinberg’s conclusion. ‘It seemed to me Derrida in context is even worse than Derrida out of context’” (par. 13): This is all that I claim. I do not claim that my essay offers a sufficiently extensive reading of Derrida or a full explication of his terms. Crew, of course, is right that further explanation of some of my own assertions concerning the relationships between Derrida’s ideas and relativity are necessary to give a full argument, and indeed I say so myself (par. 26). The question of the viability of these connections indeed may remain open. However, as is suggested by Crew’s argument concerning the “centering” of the theoretical matrix of relativity in the representation of the Lorentz group and related elaborations (par. 12) or indeed his discussion of centering and decentering in classical physics and relativity as a whole, at least some possibilities appear to be viable and even promising. Crew is finally right: there is plenty of work to do.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Derrida, Jacques. Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978.
    • —. “Sokal et Bricmont ne sont pas sérieux.” Le Monde. 20 Novembre 1997
    • Gross, Paul R., and Norman Levitt. Higher Superstition: The Academic Left and its Quarrels with Science. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1998.
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. On the Genealogy of Morals and Ecce Homo. Trans. Walter Kaufmann. New York: Vintage, 1967.
    • Plotnitsky, Arkady. “‘But It Is Above All Not True’: Derrida, Relativity and the `Science Wars.’” Postmodern Culture. http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/pmc/v007/7.2plotnitsky.html
    • —. Complementarity: Anti-epistemology After Bohr and Derrida. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1994.
    • —. In the Shadow of Hegel: Complementarity, History and the Unconscious. Gainesville, Fl.: UP of Florida, 1993.

     

  • Peripheral Visions

    E. Ann Kaplan, Looking for the Other: Feminism, Film, and the Imperial Gaze.New York: Routledge, 1996.

     

     

     

    •      Looking for the Other responds to the charge that white feminist film theories, especially psychoanalytic ones, neglect issues of race. In this ambitious project, E. Ann Kaplan defends a psychoanalytic approach to the racialized subject through examinations of gender and race in mainstream and independent film. Targeted at liberal arts students, the text is a useful introduction to these issues within film, women’s studies, and postcolonial/cultural studies. Unfortunately, Kaplan sometimes sacrifices quality of critique for quantity, and subtlety of argument for scope, in an attempt to satisfy her audiences. The result is a text which ultimately surveys and summarizes more than it stakes out new ground in the ongoing debates about whiteness and feminist film theory.

       

       

    •      The book is divided into two main sections. Part I, “Theories of Nation, Psychoanalysis and the Imperial Gaze,” primarily explores the male and imperial gazes in Hollywood film. Part 2, “Travelling Postcolonialists and Women of Color,” examines the ways in which independent film offers the alternative of “inter- and intra-racial looking relations.” Throughout, Kaplan argues by analogy, risking oversimplification of a number of key concepts. For example, Chapter 1, “Travel, Travelling Identities and the Look” depends on the assumption that race, like gender, operates through internalized binary oppositions. She offers examples from Fanon, DuBois, hooks, and Appadurai which support theories of “a network of diasporic black peoples dislocated around the globe in the late twentieth century who share experiences of the alienating gaze” (10). Kaplan’s theory layers colonialism on top of discourses of the gaze initiated by Laura Mulvey. Thus situated non-dialectically, racial difference becomes little more than another instance of split subjectivity. Combined with the constant deferral of her explanation to later sections in the book plus numerous editing errors, such oversimplifications undermine her argument.[1]

       

       

    •      Chapter 2, “Theories of Nation and Hollywood in the Contexts of Gender and Race” surveys “male theories” of nations as modern, industrial concepts linked to the rise of literacy and popular culture (29). Kaplan continues her reliance on binary oppositions, countering these male ideas of nation with a feminine sphere of culture. Most significant for her later analysis of Hollywood film is the concept of nation as a fiction, and of America as a construct divided between European cultural allegiances and American national ones. Kaplan relies on Jane Flax to support a claim for a womanly perspective on global history, one in which “problems might not be framed as debates about First, Second or Third Worlds but rather in terms of ongoing struggles to connect or not connect with an Other,” to juggle public and private roles, to link local and global concerns, and “to make oneself a subject within national struggles” (46). These are important questions, and Kaplan offers a sampling of fascinating alternatives to the narrow conception of national identity at work in Hollywood film. However, we wonder why her discussion of these alternatives runs to three pages, in comparison with the eighteen or so pages of “male theory.” If it is because, as she states, “the problematic relation of ‘woman’ to ‘nation’… urgently needs more research” (46), we would add that the binary opposition of male nation to female culture also needs deconstructing.

       

       

    •      In Chapter 3, “Hollywood, Science and Cinema: The Imperial and the Male Gaze in Classic Film,” Kaplan tackles D.W. Griffith’s Birth of A Nation, notably its anxieties about the black man’s rape of the white woman, to illustrate interlocking structures of masculinity and whiteness in the imperial gaze. According to her reading, stereotypes of lascivious black men and pure white women “image forth” white supremacy and male supremacy respectively. Through these stereotypes, the film appeals to Southerners to see themselves as part of an American nation preparing for World War I (68). Similarly, masculinity and imperialism collude in a series of 1930s ape movies–King Kong, Tarzan the Ape Man, and Blonde Venus. Devices such as the map of the “dark” continent penetrated by the explorer/hunter, the sexual objectification of the white woman, and the feminization and oversexing of the black man illustrate Hollywood’s continuing attempts to manage America’s sexual and racial anxieties. Kaplan also notes that these films may be seen as attempts to come to grips with national guilt about slavery, or to console “a generation of white males without sufficient opportunities for heroism” (74).

       

       

    •      Kaplan also discusses interesting complications of the stereotypical view that the imperial gaze is solely male. In looking at Black Narcissus (1946) and Out of Africa (1985), she notes that “white women become the surrogates for men when there is a need to show male power waning” (81)–in this case British power in India. The white nuns in Black Narcissus are bearers of the imperial gaze on their mission into Nepal, but that gaze is destabilized by the orientalized sensuality of the place: the nuns’ repressed sensuality emerges at the same time that their strength and independence from men begins to crack; a heterosexual narrative asserts itself. Kaplan argues, following Laura Kipnis, that the construction of “colonialism as female megalomania” rationalizes colonialism’s failures (88). Here, Kaplan participates in ongoing critiques of white womanhood and its interlocking privileges as shown in the work of Jane Gaines, Mary Ann Doane, Rey Chow, Donna Haraway, and others.

       

       

    •      How disappointing then, to read that the main difference between the stereotypes in Black Narcissus and the less offensive depictions in Out of Africa seems to be a matter of characterization: Karen Blixen “cares about [Africans] as individuals” and her “main servant is individualized” and allowed to return her look (89). Kaplan’s assumption that this treatment remains a viable alternative to stereotyping troubles us in its allegiance to liberal humanism. She notes that “something else is going on in these films in regard to images of white women” and wonders “how can [white] feminists enjoy their empowerment” through these images “at the expense of women of other colors?” (92). One answer may be the rewards and pleasures of individualism which structure the major liberation movements of the West, including white liberal feminism. Nevertheless, Kaplan makes an important contribution in Chapter 3 with her understanding that these films forge American identity through European colonial narratives.

       

       

    •      Chapter 4, “Darkness Within: Or, The Dark Continent of Film Noir” further investigates the effect of psychoanalysis on American film when dealing with issues of “othering” that cross race and gender. The chapter starts by briefly describing the possibilities of psychoanalytic readings of film, especially the value of British transcultural psychiatry, and summarily explaining the racist, sexist, and homophobic origins of psychoanalysis. Kaplan then performs a close reading of Home of the Brave, Pressure Point, Candyman, and Cat People. Oddly, considering the chapter’s title, only the latter falls within the normal definition “film noir.” All four films use psychoanalysis within their plots; especially important to this reading is the claim that psychiatry is a “science,” the authority of which is either supported or destabilized by these films. Kaplan attempts to analyze the psychoanalytic readings both of and within these films, which all blur, or attempt to blur, characters’ race and gender. However, Kaplan’s readings rely heavily on plot and character description, possibly because, as Kaplan notes, these older films are likely not to have been seen by her readers.

       

       

    •      Black and white interaction in mainstream film sets up Kaplan’s ensuing discussion of independent films. Before Part II, “Travelling Postcolonialists and Women of Color,” she clarifies her use of psychoanalysis and reads its use in film to construct the white subject. Kaplan argues that “the formation of the white subject as white, as it depends upon difference from blackness, is one area for study” (129). Though not theoretically innovative, Kaplan’s readings of film related to this question and her working through the problematics of psychoanalysis facilitate entry into the second part of Looking for the Other.

       

       

    •      Kaplan asserts that Part II intends “to open a window on how women directors imagine and create fictional worlds about issues of sex, race and the media. And how, in so doing, they dramatically challenge Hollywood male and imperial gaze structures to begin the hard work of moving beyond oppressive objectification within the constraints of inevitable looking structures” (16). Kaplan selects Hu Mei, Claire Denis, Mira Nair, Pratibha Parmar, Alice Walker, Trinh T. Minh-ha, Julie Dash, and Yvonne Rainer for discussion in Part II because, though they all deal with sex, race, gender and class in “cinematic forms deliberately in opposition to classical commercial film” (16), they approach their projects differently.

       

       

    •      Yet Kaplan only partially delivers on her promises for Part II. In Chapter 5 she explores the relationship between white theorists/theories and China. Stressing that cross-cultural exchange is possible both from West to East and East to West, yet not ignoring the power differential, Kaplan uses Trinh T. Minh-ha’s concept of “approaching” to assert that there is a way if not to “know” the Other, at least to “speak nearby.” In her discussion of the relationships between Western and Asian critics and their views toward Western readings of Asian culture, she summarizes the debate between Fredric Jameson and Aijaz Ahmad regarding the possibility of the West “knowing Chinese or Indian culture and politics (17).” Jameson’s construction of three worlds in which First-World texts are related to the public/private split while in Third-World texts all libidinal desires are politicized, is critiqued by Ahmad who posits only one postcolonial world constructed of economic, political, and historical links. Kaplan rereads this debate to show that both Jameson, particularly in his comments regarding allegory’s inherence in Third-World texts, and Ahmad, in underlining Western critics’ arrogant assumption that they can understand an Other culture through partial knowledge, make valuable contributions to the discourses of “knowing the other.” She locates herself between her readings of Jameson and Ahmad, but directs her criticism more strongly toward Ahmad, whose position she calls an “overreaction.”

       

       

    •      From her assumed position of subject-in-between, Kaplan’s second focus in Chapter 5 addresses criticism of her 1989 article “Problematizing Cross-Cultural Analysis: The Case of Woman in the Recent Chinese Cinema.” She argues effectively that in this essay she attempted to position herself as an “outsider” whose readings might untangle one of many strands of meaning to be found in Chinese film texts. Included among Western critics censured for perpetuating cultural colonization, Kaplan reads Yoshimoto Mitsuhira’s criticisms as a reconstruction of Asia as feminine or victim. By turning to the complexities of subjectivity, as many feminists do, Kaplan stresses the possibility of showing “how resilient peoples are to such cultural and capitalist ‘invasions,’ and how they find strategies to divert their impacts” (152). Kaplan is constantly aware that histories of colonization and appropriation cannot be ignored. Her consistent attention to the complexities of the history, economics, and politics of intercultural “knowing” creates, at times, an apparently disjointed argument, but one worth teasing out by engaged readers.

       

       

    •      Kaplan’s selection of Denis’ Chocolat, Parmar and Walker’s Warrior Marks, and Nair’s Mississippi Masala to search for an answer to the question “Can One Know the Other?” is most appropriate. All three non-American films illustrate her desire to explore the possibilities of inter-racial looking and to challenge the dominance of the male and imperial gazes. These challenges contribute to a form of looking which exemplifies a desire to know rather than to dominate. Kaplan astutely explores the processes of looking that occur between spectator and film and between characters within films. In these “looking relations,” Kaplan indicates ways in which women directors alter the subject-object binary; when traditionally subjugated characters look back, stereotypes are challenged, and the gaze, with its inherent anxieties and domination, becomes a mutual process of looking.

       

       

    •      Kaplan states: “There has surely to be a way between the alternatives of an oppressive Western application of humanism to the Other and surrendering any kind of cross-cultural knowing” (195). She sees that for women travelling outside their cultures, the best way to accomplish cross-cultural knowing is “speaking nearby.” She explores Trinh’s Reassemblage and Shoot for the Contents with emphasis on ideas that inter-racial looking relations should be reconstructed as a meeting of multiple “I’s” with multiple “I’s” in the Other. For Kaplan, the women’s bodies that Trinh presents are not objectified but instead become sites for discussions of subjectivity, nationhood, and transnational feminism. She looks conscientiously at the work of Hu Mei, Denis, Parmar and Walker, Nair, and Trinh, all women “in postcolonialism travelling to foreign cultures” (216), revealing ways in which imperial and male gazes are and can be disrupted, finding new ways of knowing, of seeing, and of looking for the Other.

       

       

    •      Chapter 8, “‘Healing Imperialized Eyes’: Independent Women Filmmakers and the Look,” continues to explore how women filmmakers rework the “look” in an attempt to redefine colonial images. Kaplan reads two of Julie Dash’s films, Illusions and Daughters of the Dust, as attempts to redefine audience perceptions of blacks in film and films’ assumptions about audience. Kaplan then moves on to examine Mi Vida Loca, a film on Chicana “gang girls,” by white director Allison Anders. Finally, she argues that Yamazaki Hiroko’s Juxta uses themes of generation and immigration to complicate racialized images.

       

       

    •      Kaplan argues that these films do not confront the imperial and male gazes in an attempt to reverse or undo their effects, but instead involve themselves in an entirely different project: “Other films I call ‘healing’ because they seek to see from the perspective of the oppressed, the diasporan, without specifically confronting the oppressor’s strategies” (221). She suggests that these filmmakers occupy the position of the hybrid, furthering her argument for the subject-in-between. Caught between cultures, their films concern themselves in constructing “‘intra-racial’ looking relations rather than inter-racial ones” (222). Kaplan asserts that while white women suffer from “too much visibility” in Hollywood, black women remain largely invisible or consigned to a narrow range of stereotypes. Her inquiry into Dash’s Daughters exposes the construction of black images that step outside the Hollywood mainstream: Dash creates a strong intelligent matriarch to oppose the traditional “mammy” image. At stake in the idea of healing, therefore, is the possibility that seeing from the perspective of the oppressed produces new points of identification for film audiences.

       

       

    •      Kaplan also notes that formal devices can be used to challenge imperial and male gazes. From film speed, to narrative structures, to genre mixing, these films often reposition their audiences in order to step outside the hegemony of Hollywood film. Kaplan reads all four of these movies, sensitively drawing out how this feat is accomplished. She also notes that these films do not necessarily share the same tones: some are celebratory while others are melancholic. The importance of these films is that they do not reproduce the imperial gaze, but rather strive to find power in “healing” its alienating effects.

       

       

    •      In Chapter 9, “Body Politics: Menopause, Mastectomy and Cosmetic Surgery in Films by Rainer, Tom and Onwurah,” Kaplan detours from film criticism to medical discourse. Her review of plastic surgery texts reveals how parallel constructions of age or race become associated with disease and deformity. Relying on ideas of nation from Part I, she posits a norm of womanhood: young and white. Though we cannot argue against her notions of this norm, we do note that it relies on a collapse of Western thought into an exclusively American “look.” With this assumption, Kaplan reads Tom’s Two Lies and Rainer’s Privilege in terms of a conflict between an “authentic” immigrant body and the American body assimilated through surgical intervention. Her argument recognizes that the “casualties” of the American look need further attention.

       

       

    •      Another important contribution is Kaplan’s argument that aging white women either fall into Hollywood’s typecast characters or do not appear at all. Always careful to acknowledge that these women do not lose all their privileges in aging, Kaplan does however point out that aging further complicates women’s positioning by the male and imperial gaze. By drawing affinities between menopausal white women and women of color, Kaplan invites further discussion of generational differences and their implications for women’s studies.

       

       

    •      Kaplan’s research into plastic surgery and aging reveals intriguing concepts in relation to American film, but her sweeping statements often hinder her arguments. For example, she states, “It is in male interest to keep alive the myth that after menopause women have no particular interest and therefore can be passed over for younger women who still depend on men” (286). Like the “male theories” of Part I, the assumption of “male interest” once again collapses a complex argument into a traditional gender category. Throughout her book, Kaplan attempts not to essentialize various groups while arguing that dominant film does; occasionally she missteps and her statements reinscribe the generalizations which she seeks to critique.

       

       

    •      The risk of reinscription is addressed in the “Afterword” as Kaplan attempts to negotiate the tricky gaps between white and non-white positions on the emerging field of “whiteness studies.” Cautioning her readers not to conflate varieties of alienation, she insists that it is essential that “one recognizes that whites are not necessarily reinscribing whiteness but taking the lead from the peoples whites have oppressed” (294; original emphasis). Is Kaplan prescribing a point of view here, or offering an anti-colonialist strategy? The ambivalence continues in the statement, “Because of white supremacy, it seems to me that it is the responsibility of whites to start the process of recognition of the Other as an autonomous subject” (299). Does this imply that the process has not yet begun outside of “whiteness studies”? Does the notion of responsibility imply a conferring of subjectivity or authority? We are uncomfortable with the vagueness of such “responsibility” because it implies that if whites do not begin this process of recognition, it will not be done at all. In fact, Kaplan hazards misrecognizing the Other when she concludes her book by asserting a belief “that black women may have an incredibly important role to play at this historical moment…. Hopefully, this is a moment when white women can listen” (301). Having just warned readers not to conflate varieties of alienation she subsumes all non-white women under the term “black women.” In this ostensibly conciliatory gesture, Kaplan falls back on a black-white binary that grounds her global survey in America.

       

       

    •      Future discussions surrounding Kaplan’s new work will need to complicate its layered relations between race and gender by adding the undiscussed categories of class and sexuality. Her conception of the imperial gaze largely ignores the dynamics of capitalism within patriarchal and racist structures, and discussions of gay and lesbian contributions are cursory. Nevertheless, we applaud Kaplan’s commitment “to the idea… that the level of signification can impact on the imaginary and produce change in subjects reading or viewing texts” (xv). It is through this ability of texts to change subjectivity that Kaplan sees a possibility for prejudices based on race, ethnicity, color, age, sexual orientation, and gender to be deconstructed. For her, perhaps the best route to change is through the work of women directors of all colors (including white). The value of her text lies in the attention she pays to these women directors, their films, and their changing audiences.

      Department of English
      Universities of Calgary and Victoria
      lhowell@mtroyal.ab.ca
      rrickey@acs.ucalgary.ca
      klaverm@cadvision.co

      Postmodern Culture

      Copyright © 1998 NOTE: Readers may use portions of this work in accordance with the Fair Use provisions of U.S. copyright law. In addition, subscribers and members of subscribed institutions may use the entire work for any internal noncommercial purpose but, other than one copy sent by email, print, or fax to one person at another location for that individual’s personal use, distribution of this article outside of a subscribed institution without express written permission from either the author or the Johns Hopkins University Press is expressly forbidden.

      Notes

      1. The editing errors are frustrating. For instance, in Chapter 1 Kaplan claims she will discuss six directors, though seven are listed (15-16); likewise, she announces that Anders’ Mi Vida Loca will be discussed in Chapter 6, but it appears in Chapter 8.

     

  • Looking Forward to Godard

    Hassan Melehy

    Department of Romance Languages
    University of Vermont
    hmelehy@zoo.uvm.edu

     

    Wheeler Winston Dixon, The Films of Jean-Luc Godard. Albany: SUNY Press, 1997.

     

    At a time when Hollywood is as formulaic as ever, when the representatives of French cinema we receive in the U.S. seem to be attacking critical thought (Luc Besson’s The Fifth Element [1997] could by itself constitute a Ministry of Anti-Education), it is refreshing to read a book that considers with seriousness and a highly contemporary disposition the work of this enigmatic and brilliant director. Jean-Luc Godard took French and international cinema by surprise in the sixties, yet today may easily be relegated to the status of a quaint intellectual from a bygone era. Wheeler Winston Dixon opens his book with quiet applause for Godard’s relentless pursuit of the social and political implications of cinema aesthetics, convincing this reader that even Godard’s early work is far from exhausted and still poses major challenges to both criticism and cinematic practice. Paradoxically, Dixon also faces with full rigor the French director’s pronouncements, beginning with Le Week-end in 1967, of the death of cinema.

     

    This “death” is what makes the cinema impossible as a critical experience, and yet it is precisely such experience that Dixon demonstrates is at the heart of Godard’s filmmaking from first to last. The studios offer “blockbuster films” (1) that aim for the “lowest common denominator”; (2) while at the same time, visual entertainment is given over to the relentlessly expanding worlds of cybernetics, multimedia, and cable TV. Nothing that risks the disturbing, insistent involvement with the image that Godard has continually worked at may make an entrance for more than a moment or two. In this book that very adeptly combines biography, history, description and summary of films, theoretical analysis, and a vast knowledge of the film industry, Dixon situates Godard’s films as both objects and projects in the present situation, through the perspective of how this situation has taken shape over the last forty years. He offers an explanation of capital as it manifests itself in the film industry–a favorite target of Godardian critique–to show how it was in the fluctuations of capital itself that Godard was first able to present his images to the public.

     

    The exigencies of 1960s theatrical film distribution constituted a series of paradoxically liberating strictures; for a film to make a profit at all, it had to appear in a theater.... Thus distributors were forced to seek the widest possible theatrical release pattern for even the most marginal of films, and it is this way that Godard achieved and consolidated his initial reputation in the late 1950s and early 1960s. Such a project would be impossible today. (3)

     

    In the well-wrought historical narrative Dixon provides, it becomes apparent that Godard’s work, though perhaps more widely viewed, better funded, and more appreciated by critics in the sixties, is of greater importance today. This would be true of both Godard’s early work–which tends to be better known because of its place in film studies curricula–and his more recent efforts, which bear directly on the contemporary state of cinema and television. Dixon characterizes Godard as an electronic-age prophet who saw the destiny of cinema in a global culture where the visual image dominates, and who, along with his collaborators, “seek[s] to hasten its demise” (xvi)–precisely for the purpose of educating the public as to the role of the image in their culture and its manipulating force in consumer society. “Godard is a moralist–perhaps the last moralist that the medium of cinema will ever possess” (5).

     

    Dixon lays out the major themes he wishes to illuminate–the social, political, moral, aesthetic, and pedagogical aspects of Godard’s work–in the first chapter, “The Theory of Production.” The subsequent chapters, “The Exhaustion of Narrative,” “Jean-Pierre Gorin and the Dziga Vertov Group,” “Anne-Marie Miéville and the Sonimage Workshop,” and “Fin de Cinéma,” each elaborate these themes by addressing a period in Godard’s work in which they become prominent. Dixon submits in the first chapter that the challenge to today’s situation may be found even at the beginning of the filmmaker’s career. On A bout de souffle (Breathless, 1959), Dixon is downright ecstatic, saying that “an opportunity came knocking that would permanently alter the course of Godard’s life, and change the face of cinema forever” (13). One may wonder how the cinema could be changed forever if it is dying or dead, but Dixon’s presentation of the “shattering” effects the film had on cinematic tradition is so compelling that such hyperbole is justified. The following is an example of this presentation; it also illustrates Dixon’s capacity as a film analyst, conversant with theory but not dogmatic in his concepts or vocabulary.

     

    Godard called audience attention to the inherent reflexivity of his enterprise, and the manipulative and plastic nature of the cinema. A bout de souffle is everywhere a construct aware of its own constructedness. It is a film which follows the format of the traditional narrative only insofar as this adherence serves Godard's true critical project: the "reactivation" of the people and things he photographs within a glyphic framework of hyperreal jump-cuts, editorial elisions, sweeping tracking shots which call attention to their structural audaciousness, and characters whose entire existence lies in a series of gestures, motions, appearances, and escapes, all to disguise the essentially phantom nature of their ephemeral existence. (22-24)

     

    Even though Dixon wishes to demonstrate a thematic coherency running through Godard’s work over four decades, he is careful to mark the major changes in the director’s orientations, especially those concerning his approach to politics. In response to Godard’s 1994 affirmation that “I never read Marx,” Dixon states: “In view of Godard’s total immersion in the highly charged political events of the 1960s, this statement seems disingenuous in the extreme. Godard was, in fact, changing radically as a filmmaker, becoming colder and less romantic” (84-85). From the romances of the early days–notably A bout de souffle and Le Mépris (Contempt, 1963)–Godard turns toward a pronounced political orientation in the mid-sixties, with statements on consumer society, gender politics, class relations, the student movement, and imperialism making their way into the dialogue and images of movies such as Alphaville (1965), Une femme mariée (A Married Woman, 1964), and Masculin féminin (Masculine Feminine, 1966). But already with Le Mépris, there is an examination of politics: the politics of image production, of film financing, of the studios, and of the commodification of cinema through, among other things, the imposition of reassuring narrative.

     

    Dixon begins chapter 2, “The Exhaustion of Narrative,” with an excellent account of the making of Le Mépris: its status as an international hit with Brigitte Bardot, its funding, the day-to-day events of its production, and the relation between the film’s storyline and Godard’s own work situation. The movie, Dixon states, “is about compromise, the creation of art within the sphere of commercial enterprise, the struggle to hold on to one’s individual vision in an industry dedicated to pleasing an anonymous public” (45-46). One of Godard’s major compromises in this production, funded by French and Italian groups, involved the requirement that versions of the film circulated in Italy, Britain, and the United States be dubbed: so much of the story line has to do with the miscommunication occurring in an international production, when the producers’ interests are completely at odds with the director’s and screenwriter’s. Jack Palance plays Jeremy Prokosch, the American producer whose “monolingual arrogance” suggests the cultural imperialism of Hollywood. Fritz Lang plays Fritz Lang, the director of the film-within-a-film, an adaptation of the Odyssey; he is the “moral center of Le Mépris” (47), exercising an “omni-lingual authority” (45). Many conversations in the movie are in several languages, Lang alone able to converse without the aid of the interpreter Francesca Vanini (Giorgia Moll).

     

    The “end of cinema” is here figured as the death of the megalomaniacal Prokosch, along with that of Camille Javal, Bardot’s character, in a violent car crash. (It was to the criticism of similar bloodiness in Pierrot le fou [1965] that Godard responded by saying very suggestively, “Ce n’est pas du sang, c’est du rouge–it’s not blood, it’s red.” This is one of Godard’s interesting and aphoristic invitations to consider the complex relation between reality and representation.) Dixon remarks that Godard shows only the aftermath of the accident, not the crash itself, and so takes issue with accepted narrative conventions in cinema, to the astonishment of, among others, Lang. Dixon explains, “In many ways, as we have seen, Godard works against audience expectations, showing us not that which we wish or expect to see, but only those actions and results that he deems necessary to create the world as he sees it” (51). Subsequently, with movies such as Une femme mariée and Alphaville, Dixon demonstrates Godard’s increasing focus on politics and pedagogy, as the themes extend from reflection on the cinema itself to the images of consumer society. But Dixon sees limitations in Godard’s vision at the time, which result from the director’s own situation: “Moving in a world of white, middle-class patriarchal privilege, Godard echoes the values of the society he partakes of” (62). It is with Masculin féminin that Godard begins to extend his perspective.

     

    Dixon completes his account of this period in Godard’s work, during which the filmmaker realized that his cinematic pedagogy would be most effective only with the disruption and eventual abandonment of narrative, with mention of “the revolutionary narrative of Le Week-end” (88). The following chapter treats the most intensively political work in Godard’s career, the collaborative efforts he undertook with Jean-Pierre Gorin and the Dziga Vertov group. This is the work Dixon finds the most interesting, even if it is less well-known than Godard’s early projects; at the outset of the book he remarks, “Godard, it seems to me, has always functioned best within the context of a collaborative enterprise, and another critical project of this volume was the acknowledgment of the considerable input both Anne-Marie Miéville and Jean-Pierre Gorin have had in Godard’s works” (xv-xvi). In chapter 3 we find an excellent account of the making and the significance of Le Week-end, in which Godard criticizes consumer society, the role of the cinema in it, the commodification of women’s bodies, and imperialism. May 1968 moved Godard, along with many other French intellectuals, to a primarily political orientation, from which he represented the activity of students and workers during the upheavals of that month and presented them in a way that had very little commercial viability. Dixon twice notes with a certain admiration that this project, Un film comme les autres (A Film Like All the Others; 1968), almost incited a riot at its New York premiere (95, 104).

     

    In the next chapter, on Godard’s collaboration with Anne-Marie Miéville and the Sonimage Workshop, Dixon continues his account of a Godard doing what he wishes to do, with little regard for commercial success. Even so, Passion (1982), Prénom: Carmen (First Name: Carmen, 1983), and Je vous salue, Marie (Hail Mary, 1985), some of Godard’s better-known films, belong to this period. The most interesting turning point Dixon notes in this chapter involves Je vous salue, Marie, the notorious retelling of the story of the birth of Christ in a contemporary setting that was widely protested by Christian groups from a number of different sects. Dixon writes that the charge of blasphemy and obscenity (a “porny little flick,” said one bishop who refused to see the movie on that ground alone) “seems difficult to support when one sees the film itself” (154). Indeed, Dixon believes that “Godard, the hard-line Marxist of the late 1960s and 1970s, was now in the mid-1980s re-anchoring his faith in the divine” (154). He notes that Godard undertook this project with “absolute seriousness” and “intensity” (156). A professor lectures in the film, arguing for the notion of a “divine structure to all events on earth” (158); Dixon deems that Godard is speaking through the professor.

     

    This makes the furor of the religious right in this matter all the more unfathomable; in Je vous salue, Marie, Godard performs the astonishing feat of bringing religion into the classroom, something that fundamentalist Christians have been attempting to do in recent years with great insistence. Godard here has become their ally in this effort; it seems to me altogether remarkable that so few have noticed this. (158)

     

    Dixon is not equating Godard’s attitude with that of fundamentalists, the religious right, or any organized church group, but is rather attempting to examine the ways in which Godard experiments with new perspectives from which to address the problems that have always obsessed him: “it seems that in three decades Godard has worked through the personal and the political to come back to the divine” (162).

     

    In the fifth and last chapter, “Fin de Cinéma,” Dixon makes it quite evident that Godard remains politically committed, especially to the politics of image production in cultures that are increasingly bombarded with all manner of images. Movies are always a matter of money; and if Godard wants to continue his critique of the Hollywood juggernaut and the omnipresence of “video games and CD-ROM interactive programs” (195), he must be willing to risk complete marginalization in the film industry. Dixon presents an amusing anecdote of Godard’s response to the American filmmakers who usually give a small nod to his greatness: for that quality, Godard asks them to give him $10. The only American filmmaker ever to make the contribution was Mel Brooks (207). Dixon also mentions the way that Godard assures himself an income as long as he is working, by building his salary into the budget (206). Finally, “He has transformed the cinema from a bourgeois medium of popular entertainment into a zone of study, reflection, and renewal” (209). The current system of production is one in which large profit margins are required, most if not all movies are seen primarily on video, and interest in them is usually displaced by computerized imagery–in short, in which the cinema has died. Godard nonetheless continues a cinema that reflects on and analyzes this death, looks at the old images in order to bring them into the process of reflection, and so offers a kind of rebirth for the production of the image. Dixon concludes, “Godard thus belongs to both the old and the new, the living and the dead, the sign and the signifier, the domain of the creator and the realm of the museum guide” (210). Godard offers a long and as yet continuing sequence of images through which viewers may come to grips with the functioning of the image, with the death of the cinema.

     

    The Films of Jean-Luc Godard is eminently readable and highly engaging. It will be of great interest to those who wish to learn about Godard and much of the aesthetic of the French New Wave, as well as those who are already well versed in these areas. The filmography Dixon appends to the book, covering everything Godard did from 1954 to 1995 in great detail, will be invaluable to anyone wishing to watch or study Godard’s films. The book is illustrated with numerous photos, stills, and frames from Godard’s projects; one of these is the basis for a beautiful cover design using metallic grey and black ink that thus maximizes SUNY Press’s two-color limitation. For the most part the book is well written, but there are notable lapses in copyediting: twice the word “cinematographic” is rendered as “cinema to graphic,” and there are a few overly long and not quite grammatically correct sentences. These small problems are a reflection not so much on the author as on the requirement imposed on many university presses to run on decreased subventions and increased profit margins–a situation that one may reflect on in connection with the vast commodification of artistic and intellectual activity that both Jean-Luc Godard and Wheeler Winston Dixon address so very effectively.

     

  • (Global) Sense and (Local) Sensibility: Poetics/Politics of Reading Film as (Auto)Ethnography

    Benzi Zhang

    The Chinese University of Hong Kong
    bzhang@cuhk.edu.hk

     

    Rey Chow, Primitive Passions: Visuality, Sexuality, Ethnography, and Contemporary Chinese Cinema. New York: Columbia UP, 1995.

     

    It eludes no scholar’s observation that in recent years the interest in Chinese cinema has increased dramatically. Among recent attempts to offer a theoretical approach to contemporary Chinese films, Rey Chow’s study counts as one of the most extensive and insightful contributions. Wide-ranging in its scope, Chow’s award-winning book addresses itself to a variety of critical, cultural, and aesthetic concerns of contemporary Chinese cinema. Interdisciplinary in its approach, this closely argued and valuable study seeks to examine the significance of technologized visuality for China in relation to discourses of anthropology, cultural studies, post-colonial theory, and women’s studies. A literary scholar by training, Chow reads Chinese films as cultural texts, and in many places, relates the problematics of visuality to literary issues. One of the major topics that she brings up in Part 1, “Visuality, Modernity, and Primitive Passions,” is the relationship between “the discourse of technologized visuality” and modern Chinese literature (5). Beginning with the story of how Lu Xun, the father of modern Chinese literature, was motivated into a writing career by his encounter with a “visual spectacle” in the mid-1900s, Chow goes on to explain in detail how “the sign of literature” is related to the visuality of China’s modern anxiety. Lu Xun’s conversion to writing, according to Chow, results from his “intuitive apprehension of the fascistic power of the technologized spectacle” (35). Viewing film as “a new kind of discourse in the postcolonial ‘third world’” (5), Chow also examines “the relationship between visuality and power, a relationship that is critical in the postcolonial non-West” (6). Drawing upon Western philosophers such as Martin Heidegger and Walter Benjamin, on the one hand, and postcolonial theoreticians like Edward Said and Timothy Mitchell, on the other, Chow explicates the significance of the visual sign, which is different from yet related to the “older” literary sign, for China’s modernity, arguing that “the film’s careful visual structure signals the successful dismantling of the older sign” and therefore functions as a “revolutionary mode” whereby not only “the repressions and brutalities of society are consciously ethnographized,” but also, at the same time, the “practices of ‘primitive’ cultures” are fetishized against a background of “the harsh social realities of modernized metropolises” (26).

     

    The chapters that follow the story of Lu Xun are devoted to the issue of “primitive passions” in Chinese cinema and culture. Although theoretically dense, Chow’s well-documented study of the “multiple strands of primitive passions” is clear and thought-provoking. The “primitive” in Chow’s discussion stands for something “phantasmagoric,” “ex-otic,” “unthinkable,” or an “original something that has been lost” (22). Phantasmagoria of the primitive appears at the time of “cultural crisis” when the old sign system of writing is being “dislocated” by the discourse of technologized visuality. As a figure for the origin that “was there prior to our present existence,” the primitive, which expresses a kind of nostalgia that is inclined to view the encroachment of the modern on an ancient culture, has become the “fabrication of a pre that occurs in the time of the post” (22). Chow’s discussion of primitive passions, reinforced by her frequent references to postcolonial theory, provides a new perspective upon twentieth-century Chinese culture which, in Chow’s opinion, is “caught between the forces of ‘first world’ imperialism and ‘third world’ nationalism” (23), and which demands reconsideration of the paradoxical relation between China and the West. “If Chinese culture is ‘primitive’ in the pejorative sense of being ‘backward’ (being stuck in an earlier stage of ‘culture’ and thus closer to ‘nature’) when compared to the West,” Chow explains, “it is also ‘primitive’ in the meliorative sense of being an ancient culture (it was there first, before many Western nations)” (23). Chow’s perceptive observations on the primitive suggest interesting lines of investigation into the distinctive features of Chinese culture in relation to postcolonial politics. In an ironic sense, what we see in China’s anxiety for modernization is a paradoxical primitive passion on the part of China’s modern filmmakers and opinion-makers alike who perceive China as both “victim” and “empire.” And this paradox of primitivism, according to Chow, is characteristic of modern Chinese intellectuals’ “obsession with China” (23). Making excellent use of a range of Chinese films produced from the early 1930s to the late 1980s, Chow illustrates the historical development of obsessive primitivism in Chinese cinema. With modern film technology, as Chow demonstrates, contemporary Chinese cinema continues the “uncanny ethnographic attempt to narrate a ‘noble savagery’ that is believed to have preserved the older and more authentic treasures of the culture, in ways as yet uncorrupted by modernity” (74).

     

    Primitive passions are informed as well as complicated by the issue of gender–or rather engendered–representation. In her brief review of Goddess, a silent film made in 1934, Chow associates the primitive with the oppressed woman. One of the points that Chow attempts to make is that the primitive is not necessarily to be found only in backward, pre-modern regions, but is also to be located in industrialized metropolises such as Shanghai where the rapid development of industry and technologization can intensify “our awareness of how primitivism, as the imaginary foundation of industrialized modernity, is crucial to cultural production” (24). As a fascinating drama, Goddess, with the visual power that the new film technology provides, presents a subtle story about a young woman who prostitutes herself in order to support her son’s education. Against a backdrop of modern Shanghai in the early twentieth century, the film illustrates how the spectacularized body of woman “functions as a fetish for the sexuality”–the primitive–“that a ‘civilized’ society represses” (24). What Chow tries to show in her discussion of Goddess is the “affinity” rather than the contrariety between “innovativeness of film” and “primitive passions” (25). This film, which spectacularizes the primitive in the image of the oppressed woman, “articulates this epochal fascination with the primitive in ways that are possible only with the new technology of visuality” (25-26). The tradition of using women as symbols for the primitive, according to Chow, has been revived and developed by contemporary Chinese directors such as Chen Kaige and Zhang Yimou. Although sharing the same primitive passions, contemporary Chinese directors exhibit different notions of primitives/women and experiment with various visual representations. In Chen’s films, which tend to be symbolic, the primitive “is incorporeal–the real primitive is the ‘goddess’ who cannot be seen or represented and who has no place in this world” (47). What Chen’s films present is the “invisible” cultural tradition that has been buried deep in the past and disembodied as the “absence”; and audiences are encouraged to see through the visualized corporeality to grasp an incorporeal cultural experience. Zhang’s films, different from Chen’s, appeal to the immediacy of experience by drawing audiences’ attention to the image itself, rather than to what is hidden behind it. In Chow’s words, “Zhang’s primitive, also woman, is what can be exhibited. The woman’s body becomes the living ethnographic museum that, while putting ‘Chinese culture’ on display, is at the same time the witness to a different kind of origin” (47).

     

    In a sense, contemporary Chinese films are “phoenixes from the ashes” of the crisis of representation that existed in Chinese cinema after the Cultural Revolution. When China re-opened its door to the West in the 1980s, new modes of self-representation were desperately needed. Viewed from a broad perspective, contemporary Chinese cinema can be seen as embodying an autoethnographic attempt to present “China” anew before the West and, therefore, it provides an opportunity to re-examine China’s cultural identity in relation to Western pre-conceptions. As Chow asserts, a third-world nation’s cultural identity is often an overdetermined discourse that has been constructed from the Western perspective. In the case of Chinese cultural identity, Western sinologists and anthropologists have played an important role in setting up an Orientalist epistemological frame in which the intellectual locus of ideological control does not lie inside but outside China. For a long time, the third-world cultures come to be represented by virtue of the first world interpreters who have the privilege as well as the authority over their research subjects/objects. In her discussion of film as (auto)ethnography, Chow, regarding film studies as “an opportunity to rethink other modes of discourse in the twentieth century” (26), presents some important observations on the issue of representation and interpretation between cultures. Reading film as ethnography, as it were, demands an interdisciplinary approach that embraces not only the anthropological methodology and theory, but also a cross-cultural resistance “against the active imposition on the relations between West and non-West of an old epistemological hierarchy” (27). Historically, this “epistemological hierarchy” was established by Western anthropologists who, while studying the primitive cultures of third-world nations, imposed consciously or unconsciously a Western conceptual system upon their “primitive texts.” In terms of visuality, the West tends to see other cultures as “an endless exhibition” in which everything is arranged and interpreted from a Western point of view. What Chow attempts to achieve in her book is to take an anthropological approach to Chinese cinema without falling into the trap of a Western conceptual system. Chow opines that “film–especially film from and about a ‘third world’ culture–changes the traditional divide between observer and observed, analysis and phenomena, master discourse and native informant, and hence ‘first world’ and ‘third world’” (28). In the autoethnographic discourse of Chinese cinema, we find a new subversive and challenging “exhibition,” which is not set by the West, but by the Orient itself, which is conscious of the Western gaze and thus attempts to make use of this gaze for economic, political, or other purposes. “After demonstrating the bloodiness of the Western instruments of vision and visuality,” Chow questions, “how do we discuss what happens when the East uses these instruments to fantasize itself and the world?” (13). In Chow’s opinion, “since ‘the other’ has always already been classical anthropology’s mise-en-scène, this necessary dialogue between anthropology and film cannot simply be sought in the institutionally othered space of an oppositional stance toward ‘alternative’ or ‘third’ cinema,” but rather “in the shared, common visual spaces of our postcolonial, postmodern world” (28). In other words, “when the conventional epistemological division between ‘third world’ and ‘first world’ breaks down,” “the mediatized image of an ‘other’ becomes an index to primitive passions not only in the West but in China as well” (28).

     

    After laying down theoretical foundations concerning the complex issues of primitive passions and cross-cultural interpretation, Chow goes on to perform the difficult task of reading contemporary Chinese films in an interdisciplinary context of postcolonial, cross-cultural politics. In Part 2, “Some Contemporary Chinese Films,” Chow marshals a wide range of film texts to argue that “contemporary Chinese cinema is fascinating because it problematizes the facile notions of oppositional alterity that have for so long dominated our thinking about the ‘third world’” (57). As we know, since the mid-1980s, Chinese films have enjoyed a phenomenal success in the West, and their success has evoked heated discussions of “Oriental’s orientalism.” These Eastern-flavored films are both criticized for “pandering to the taste of foreign devils” and praised for their defiant spirit in unthinking Eurocentrism. The interpretative conflict, on the one hand, raises some interesting questions about cross-cultural politics of reception, and on the other, reveals a paradoxical correlation between the global and local discourses ironically inscribed and enacted within the technologized visuality of China’s primitive. For Chow, “Chinese films that manage to make their way to audiences in the West are usually characterized, first of all, by visual beauty” (57); this “visual beauty,” however, needs a wide array of unmakings. Chow seems to get most upset by what she views as the naive reading of third-world cinema as “national allegories,” arguing that such readings “cannot sufficiently account for the ‘breaks and heterogeneities’ and ‘multiple polysemia’ of ‘third world’ texts” (57). These “heterogeneities” or “impurity” beneath the surface of exotic alterity is what we must pay attention to today. One “way of defining this impurity,” Chow maintains, “is to say that the ‘ethnicity’ of contemporary Chinese cinema–‘Chineseness’–is already the sign of a cross-cultural commodity fetishism” (59). Chow’s discussion raises a series of interesting yet complicated questions: To what extent, do third-world nations have the opportunity to speak and gaze back not as the “Other”? How shall we construct a new global-local dialectic, as both the first world and the third world are rapidly fragmented and diluted? And as the self-conscious “ethnic” filmmakers start to question and negotiate with the imperial, colonial, and capitalist “master discourse,” who would assume the “authority” to produce appropriate discourse about “otherness” in today’s intellectual world market? Caught between two modes of ideological signification–the West and the Chinese–contemporary Chinese films are situated in an awkward in-between zone of global/local interaction where they are subject to the forces of two ideologies which more often than not conflict with each other. Almost all the films made by the so-called “Fifth Generation” directors (who are the focus of Chow’s study) are produced locally, and their subject matters are mainly based on local stories. However, different from the novelistic versions of the stories that are written solely for the domestic readership within China’s home market, the cinematic versions have been made addressing both Chinese and Western audiences; in some cases, the major intended markets are American-Western countries. Therefore, one of the most important features of these films is the “worldwide orientation,” which distinguishes them from the early local-oriented movies made in China. Chow’s illuminating observation highlights the “sharp distinction between the often grave subject matter and the sensuously pleasing ‘enunciation’ of contemporary Chinese film–a distinction we can describe in terms of a conjoined subalternization and commodification” (57-58). This distinction, ultimately, “points to the economics that enable the distribution and circulation of these films in the West” (58).

     

    Among China’s internationally acclaimed “Fifth Generation” directors, Chen Kaige and Zhang Yimou have managed to attract the West’s continuous attention. Different from the locally consumed Chinese movies, their films are much more graphic and photographic so that the power of visuality can provide the opportunity for non-Chinese audiences to naturalize the filmic discourse easily in a cross-cultural context. However, the filmic discourse is at the same time highly figurative, symbolic, and ambivalent; it emphasizes “surface” while suggesting profound and often mysterious depths of ‘Chinese’ culture. In such a hybrid discourse, Chen’s and Zhang’s films can translate and transform unique stories of local culture into globally consumable and marketable experiences. Contextualizing Chen’s and Zhang’s films in the “processes of cross-cultural production,” Chow argues that “the insistence on an original ‘Chinese’ culture is the insistence on a kind of value that is outside alienation, outside the process of value-making” (64). Chow associates “the process of value-making” with what she calls “the labor of social fantasy” that “the Chinese can have part of the West–technology–without changing its own social structure” (73). This “social fantasy” characterizes the “uncanny ethnographic attempt” to present the primitive through the modern film technology. Technology, in a sense, has enabled Chinese filmmakers to translate their local culture into visual products that can be consumed globally. In recent years, almost all Chinese films that have well been received in the West are ethnographic presentations of the remote landscape of China’s primitive. In such films as Yellow Earth and Judou, the audiences are taken to “backward villages in remote mountains” where the primitive–“the older and more authentic treasures of the culture”–is supposed to exist. In these films, as Chow observes, the modern film technology presents not only “visual beauty,” but also, more important, the “other-looking” image of China’s primitive. Chow notes that the primitive has a status of double otherness: It stands for “China’s status as other to the West and the status of the ‘other’ cultures of China’s past and unknown places to China’s ‘present self’” (75). Contemporary Chinese cinema, in Chow’s opinion, reveals a “structure of narcissistic value-writing” that “explains the current interest on the part of Chinese filmmakers to search for China’s ‘own’ others” (65). Films directed by Chen and Zhang, for example, often go back to the materiality of China’s primitive culture to explore the origins of modern China’s problems. Facing a complacent and narcissistic civilization that has produced Confucianism, Taoism and Maoism, one cannot but feel that there must be a historical yet mysterious “origin” inside Chinese culture. Contemporary Chinese films, in a sense, “partake of what we may call a poststructuralist fascination with the constructedness of one’s ‘self’–in this case, with China’s ‘self,’ with China’s origins, with China’s own alterity” (65). The paradox that Chow sees here is that “in the wish to go back to ‘China’ as origin–to revive ‘China’ as the source of original value–the ‘inward turn’ of the nationalist narrative precisely reveals ‘China’ as other-than-itself” (65).

     

    In films made by contemporary Chinese directors such as Chen and Zhang, we can find a practice of “self-gazing”–the attempt to see through the surface and to explore what is inscribed/enacted in the mise-en-scène. What these films present, apart from and beyond the exotic surface, is a self-gazing exploration into Chinese culture. This “self-gazing” indicates a modern anxiety to make sense of the obstinate sensibility of Chinese traditional culture by disengaging the symbolic order from the primitive relics and to search for a historical relationship between the Cultural Revolution and something buried deep in Chinese culture. Chen Kaige says, “I’ve always felt that what accounts for the Cultural Revolution is traditional culture itself….The Cultural Revolution repeats, continues, and develops this traditional culture” (qtd. in Chow 92). In this regard, contemporary Chinese cinema inscribes a self-reflexive and self-analytical perspective upon Chinese culture. These films, which present the remote cultural landscape of China, to a certain degree, have “defamiliarized” the primitive “China.” As Chow observes, quoting a native Chinese critic: “To the average urban Chinese, these landscapes are equally alien, remote and ‘other-looking,’ as they presumably appear to a Western gaze” (81). They demand we re-read the hieroglyphs of China’s cultural history and re-examine what kind of impact the misguided forces of an old cultural tradition can make upon modern life. In an age of postcolonial cultural diaspora, Chen’s and Zhang’s self-gazing exploration of Chinese culture is, unfortunately, mistaken for a Westernized gaze, and this superficial cognition generates numerous misunderstandings, which almost exclusively criticizes these directors for “betraying” Chinese culture. Actually, the self-gazing mode interrogates a complicated cultural system by means of a split discourse that both presents and questions what it presents simultaneously. This split discourse, in Scott Nygren’s words, “foregrounds the necessary distorting process of the Imaginary or Other as a means by which difference can be conceived” (182). The interaction between gazing and self-gazing enacts a double writing process in which Chinese traditional culture is both presented and questioned. In Chow’s words, these films have played a “self-anthropologizing” role in their attempt to re-write an auto-ethnographic account of China; and these filmmakers have “taken up the active task of ethnographizing their own culture” (180).

     

    When contemporary Chinese cinema started to stage itself in the global cultural market in recent years, conflicts and confrontations between different ideological interpretations seemed to be inevitable. Quoting E. Ann Kaplan, Chow points out that cross-cultural readings are “‘fraught with dangers.’ One of these dangers is our habit of reading the ‘third world’ in terms of what, from our point of view, it does not have but wants to have” (83). Moreover, there seems to be a “tension between the ‘raw material’ of the filmic text and the ineluctability of the Western analytic ‘technology’” (85). It is both natural and ineluctable that Western audiences–including Western scholars–always “gaze” at Chinese culture from a Western perspective, but the problem is that the “gazee” is not always passive. What Chow tries to show in Part 2 is that Chinese culture, which has been aggrandized by the powerful cinematic apparatus, does not merely appeal to the Western gaze, but more important, it also challenges, questions, and displaces the gaze. In a postcolonial age, when Western audiences go to cinemas to watch films made by the West-conscious Chinese directors with “a technology that is, theoretically speaking, non-Chinese” (87-88), the intercultural power relation between the gazer and the gazee has been changed. In other words, Chinese or third-world cinema may purposely offer what the first world “wants it to have” or wants to see. In such a situation, the relationship between the gazer (first world) and gazee (third world) should be re-examined. In Christian Metz’s psychoanalytical terms, when the whole system of knowledge is provided by the gazee-analysand, the gazee may also become the gazer-analyser, which can generate a counter-discourse to the intended spectatorship. “As in political struggles,” Metz writes, “our only weapons are those of the adversary, as in anthropology, our only source is the native, as in the analytical cure, our only knowledge is that of the analysand, who is also (current French usage tells us so) the analyser [analysant]” (5). In this regard, the films made by contemporary Chinese directors do not simply set up an “exhibition” of an exotic culture, but rather, they open up a new space in cinematic discourse in which different kinds of “gazing” and “gazing-back” are re-negotiated. In Chow’s words, by “showing a ‘China’ that is at once subalternized and exoticized by the West,” contemporary Chinese cinema “amounts to an exhibitionism that returns the gaze of orientalist surveillance” (170).

     

    The third and the last part, “Film as Ethnography; or Translation between Cultures in the Postmodern World,” offers a perceptive summary as well as a theoretical extension of what Chow has previously discussed, thus completing this triptych volume in a satisfactory way. One of the most fascinating aspects of this part is her discussion of Chinese filmmakers’ struggle with the politics of “translation” and their experience as cross-cultural translators. “In dazzling colors of their screen,” Chow describes, “the primitive…stands as the naive symbol, the brilliant arcade, through which ‘China’ travels across cultures to unfamiliar audiences. Meanwhile, the ‘original’ that is film, the canonically Western medium, becomes destabilized and permanently infected with the unforgettable ‘ethnic’ (and foreign) images imprinted on it by the Chinese translators” (202). Cultural translation, therefore, is not “a unidirectional, one-way process,” but a mutual delivering action–or to borrow Benjamin’s words, “a ‘liberation’ that is mutual and reciprocal between the ‘original’ and the ‘translation’” (188). The tension produced by the paradoxical relation of both conflict and convergence between globalization and localization is an important feature of postmodern cultural diaspora in which various cultural presences constantly translate themselves. In the last part of her book, Chow attempts to refigure some new models for cultural translation in terms of a global/local dialectic. The issue she raises is how the demand for self-translatable cultural products has increased as a consequence of global/local interaction. In Chow’s opinion, cultural translation suggests a kind of global consciousness that undermines the rigid compartmentalization of cultural consumption. In order to share and exchange in a global market, opinion-makers and filmmakers of different cultures must translate their cultural products into terms that are interculturally accountable. Cultural translation will not lead to dissolution of local cultural difference; on the contrary, it demands vigorous re-examination of the changing mechanism of the international flows of various national and local cultures. This re-examination, as Chow has demonstrated, can help us perceive how “the less powerful (cultures) negotiate the imposition of the agenda of the powerful” (201). By linking filmmaking with translation, Chow emphasizes that contemporary Chinese films are cultural translations, which provide a process that “we must go through in order to arrive–not at the new destination of the truth of an ‘other’ culture but at the weakened foundations of Western metaphysics as well as the disintegrated bases of Eastern tradition” (201). Cultural translation, therefore, informs a paradox of global/local interaction in the postcolonial, post-third-worldist critical moment. In order for Chinese local primitive to be understood and accepted, the Chinese filmmakers and opinion-makers alike must fight their battle over its global sense with the same paradigms/technology. What we can see in the battle is the emergence of a new global-conscious localism in film as well as in scholarship that correlates with the current international racing of cultural re-location, in which the ironic “self-anthropologizing” discourse starts to challenge what Arif Dirlik calls “EuroAmericans’ privilege of interpreting China’s past for the Chinese” (38). In this sense, far from being the art of exotic seduction, contemporary Chinese films are self-staged in the world market as a new form of cultural resistance against the Western hegemonic power in the age of cultural diaspora. The primitives that contemporary Chinese cinema presents, in Chow’s final analysis, are translated and translatable “‘fables’ that cast light on the ‘original’ that is our world’s violence, and they mark the passages that head not toward the ‘original’ that is the West or the East but toward survival in the postcolonial world” (201-02).

    Works Cited

     

    • Dirlik, Arif. “The Global in the Local.” Global/Local: Cultural Production and the Transnational Imaginary. Eds. Rob Wilson and Wimal Dissanayake. Durham: Duke UP, 1996. 21-45.
    • Metz, Christian. The Imaginary Signifier: Psychoanalysis and the Cinema. Trans. Celia Britton, Annwyl Williams, Ben Brewster and Alfred Guzzetti. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1982.
    • Nygren, Scott. “Doubleness and Idiosyncrasy in Cross-Cultural Analysis.” Otherness and the Media: The Ethnography of the Imagined and the Imaged. Eds. Namid Naficy and Teshome H. Gabriel. Langhorne, Pennsylvania: Harwood Academic Publishers, 1993. 173-187.

     

  • The Grim Fascination of an Uncomfortable Legacy

    Mark Welch

    Department of Nursing and Health Studies
    University of Western Sydney
    ma.welch@nepean.uws.edu.au

     

    Eric Rentschler, The Ministry of Illusion: Nazi Cinema and its Afterlife. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1996.

     
    The subtitle of Eric Rentschler’s latest book, The Ministry of Illusion (1996), gives a strong clue to its real purpose. He speaks of the Nazi Cinema and Its Afterlife, and as well-researched and referenced a work of film history as this book is, it is really about what the Nazi cinema means to us today, and why it has such an enduring allure.

     

    It is illuminating but unsurprising that he should open his preface with a confessional note. He would not be the first and will not be the last young student to be grimly fascinated by what was an epoch of major importance for the development of the cinema. What changed for Rentschler, and what can be gained from his book, is a realization that the films he saw as “so reviled and yet so resonant” were profoundly meaningful for our contemporary understandings of the cinema, both as an artistic and a socio-cultural medium. In particular, Rentschler’s work has much that is valuable to say about how cinema helps us to construct a sense of reality, and the role the Other plays in the legitimation of our identity.

     

    The figure of Goebbels is absolutely central to Rentschler’s argument and, in one of many extraordinarily detailed footnotes, he cites a report of a closing address given by Goebbels to the International Film Congress in 1933 (239). To a contemporary ear, many of the seven theses on which Goebbels expounded may sound very familiar. It is necessary, he said among other propositions, for film to recognize that it has a language of its own that is different from that of other art forms, and to develop it; while film must free itself from the “vulgar banality of a simple mass entertainment,” it must not lose its strong inner connection with people because mass taste can be educated and film has a crucial role in this; however, no art can exist without material support and the state should ensure this; film must reflect the spirit of the times if it is to speak to them; film gives expression to national identity, and in doing so creates understanding among nations; and film should develop its innermost natural essence and, if it does so, Goebbels suggests, it will conquer the world as a new artistic medium.

     

    1933 was a crucial year for German cinema. On March 11th, less than two weeks after the Reichstag fire, the Ministry for Popular Enlightenment and Propaganda (Reichsministerium für Volksaufklärung und Propaganda, RMVP), the eponymous Ministry of Illusion, was created. Two days later Goebbels was appointed as the Minister of Propaganda. Within two weeks of his appointment Goebbels had made important speeches, to both the heads of German radio stations and leading representatives of the German film industry, in which he called for radical reforms and productions with distinctive national contours. On 29 March 1933, Fritz Lang’s Testament of Dr. Mabuse was banned: it was not shown in Germany until 1951. During the next few months Goebbels made tax concessions available to approved sections of the film industry, offered attractive credit terms and began a level of engagement that by 1936 would see the Ministry involved in more than 70% of German feature films. He also instigated measures which restricted the right to work in the film industry to “true Germans,” and reorganized the professional bodies that represented the industry. In June 1933, after a blaze of activity, the seal was on the efforts of Goebbels to assume authority at every level for the RMVP. At the same time Hitler delivered a speech in which he said that the RMVP is to be responsible for

     

    all tasks related to the spiritual guidance of the nation, to the promotion of the state, culture and the economy, to the promulgation of information to domestic and foreign sources about the nation as well as the administration of all the agencies responsible for these endeavours.

     

    It was a realization of the totalitarian imagination for Goebbels, who had argued that the need for reform in the film industry was a spiritual one and must counteract the decadence of the Weimar years. With this foundation some of the most memorable, audacious, and controversial films ever made were produced in Germany over the next dozen years, films that were quite often regarded as such for the same reasons and at the same time. Rentschler notes that much of the supposed omnipotence of the RMVP has been exaggerated, and the situation may have been more confused and less simplistic than was once imagined; the RMVP was not as totalitarian nor as omnipresent as the myths which have grown around it. However, the legacy of the films’ artistic and creative innovations is still as apparent and as current as the analysis of the potential of cinema made by Goebbels.

     

    Rentschler acknowledges that the traditional image of the films of the Third Reich has been framed in the light of the political regime of the Nazis, and it was once almost taboo, or at least a guilty pleasure, to admire the aesthetic qualities in isolation from their context. Much of this can be attributed to the influence of landmark critics from the Frankfurt School such as Walter Benjamin and Siegfried Kracauer, who problematized the whole notion of a pure aesthetic. While Susan Sontag confessed, somewhat riskily, to finding Fascism fascinating, it may have been in the spirit, not so much of admiration, but, more likely, of admitting to the awful fascination of seeing what unchecked certainty and uncritical dreaming could achieve. The debt that the Hollywood spectacle has to the masterly control of image-making in Nazi cinema has either been rehabilitated or ignored. Yet, this lineage of imagery continues: as recently as this year, the opening shots from the airplane in Anthony Minghella’s Oscar-winning film, The English Patient, echo the shadow that Leni Riefenstahl showed flying across the landscape of Nuremburg in The Triumph of the Will.

     

    Rentschler, however, feels that to concentrate exclusively on themes, trends, and manifest content is to miss the significance of the films’ semiotic complexity. He suggests, not entirely fairly, that little has been previously said about the aesthetics of the Nazi films, those features that he feels make them so resonant and well regarded. He sees, and here his point should receive emphasis, a reciprocal link, at least aesthetically, between Hollywood and Berlin, and realizes that not every film produced in this era was crude propaganda.

     

    Rentschler lays out his thesis based on five premises (16-24). He suggests that

     

    • “the cinema of the Third Reich is to be seen in the context of the totalitarian state’s concerted attempt to create a culture industry in the service of mass deception.”
    • “entertainment played a crucial role in Nazi culture. The era’s many genre films maintained the appearance of escapist vehicles and innocent recreations while functioning within a larger programme.”
    • “Nazi film culture–and Nazi propaganda in general–must be understood in terms of what Goebbels called an ‘orchestra principle’” where not everyone was expected to play the same instrument.
    • “it is by now a truism that we cannot speak of National Socialism without speaking about aesthetics.” Rentschler adds that we must also speak about mass culture.
    • “when critics decry Nazi cinema as an abomination, they protest too much…. It is common to reduce all Nazi films to hate pamphlets, party hagiography, or mindless escapism, films with too much substance or none at all, either execrable or frivolous.”

     

    He argues these points with reference to a number of emblematic, significant, or representative films. He includes Das blaue Licht (The Blue Light) (Dir. Riefenstahl 1932), a mountaineering film which came from the tradition of nineteenth-century German Romanticism, which is technically pre-Nazi but gets into the frame not least because of its aesthetic, its themes, and Riefenstahl’s direction. He then considers the much more grandiose Münchausen (Dir. Von Blaky 1943) and others, wishing to show each chosen film as an exemplar in its own way. He also includes two of the most famous Nazi films, and two most often cited for their propaganda content, Hitlerjunge Quex (Hitler Youth Quex) (1933) and the quite notorious Jud Süss (Jew Süss) (Dir. Harlan 1940). Indeed, had he ignored the most well-known examples altogether he might well have been considered perverse.

     

    He defends his various theses with mixed success and sometimes it seems that his analysis is inconsistent and his method becomes a little fuzzy. While the contextual analysis of Nazi cinema is undoubtedly critical, he is still faced with the problem of the strident rhetoric of the RMVP and how the conditions of real life moderated action. He notes that many of the official statements emanating from the RMVP would appear to support his premise, yet, at the same time, he is also aware of degrees of subversion within the Ministry and the film industry itself which somehow conspire against any utopianism. Perhaps what we have come to learn of the chaos that lurks just below the surface of disintegrating totalitarian regimes in our own age can make us regard any protestations of unity and perfected order with a degree of skepticism. It seems to suggest that what can fall apart, will fall apart, and we should be regarding the hubris of those who think otherwise as simple folly. He warns against those who are dangerously sure of themselves.

     

    As other authors (Hull, Taylor, Friedlander, Schulte-Sasse) have argued, there was often a divergence of opinion about the nature and function of film between Goebbels and Hitler. Of the two, Goebbels seemed to have the more sophisticated appreciation of the ideological content of all art forms, and realized that the public’s appetite for or capacity to absorb blatant and less than subtle presentations may be limited. So Goebbels wanted to establish the film culture in the very fabric of the nation’s mind-set. He wanted a Hollywood star system; he recognized, as many in Hollywood and the world of advertising do today, that often the most powerful messages are the ones you don’t even realize are there.

     

    Apart from films, Goebbels saw the value of pageants and fetes, flags and uniforms. These all fostered a sense of identity; they signified what could be called “us,” and what was “them.” He was quick to spot any opportunity to emphasize the point, but whenever possible it was to be couched in terms of enjoyment and recreation. It is as though he believed that a content mind is an uncritical mind.

     

    The aesthetics of Fascism are said by Susan Sontag to glorify and glamorize death and the body, often together and often in a disconnected way. Rentschler takes some critics to task for adopting an attitude towards the popular culture of the Third Reich that is dismissive, almost patronizing. He wants to emphasize that popular culture was exactly that, popular. It was there in songs of the period, as Goebbels’ favorite band, Charlie and His Orchestra, sang amusing light ditties about bombing London. It was there in the ordinary household items in the shops; the pictures that appeared on tea-towels and trays were choices made within this entire context. Nevertheless, in part because of the indelible images of the great spectacles and Riefenstahl’s work in particular, the idea of Fascist art, when it is skillful, remains troublesome to the Western liberal conscience. Had he wished to, it is possible that Rentschler would have found direct descendants in the MTV videos of Michael Jackson and his uniformed chorus, or the disturbing depersonalized idealization of some of Robert Mapplethorpe’s photography. This is a topic that Rentschler does well to draw to our attention, and it is still full of unexplored possibilities.

     

    His final premise is that the critics are, in general, as totalizing in their condemnation as they think Nazi art is in its monologism. In what may be an uncomfortable equation for many, Rentschler argues that most Nazi films are as understandable in their conventions and readings as any familiar, traditional Hollywood film. The essentials of narrative and characterization are much the same and vary just as much in terms of skillful presentation or complexity.

     

    Rentschler makes an argument for a much more nuanced reading of the relationship between politics and entertainment in Nazi Germany. He is admirably careful about condemning too hastily or praising too easily. However, he does recognize that he is, as he puts it, entering a minefield of explosive issues. He notes the revisionism that has emerged since the collapse of the Eastern bloc in 1989 and the unification of Germany and, quite correctly, does not see himself as an apologist or driven revisionist. He admits that he is “mindful of the problematic postmodern relationship to the images and imaginary products of the Third Reich” (23). Nevertheless, he has made a major contribution to the literature. He has assembled a formidable collection of notes and appendices which run to over 200 pages, as much as the text itself. In a fascinating addition he includes a comparative historical listing of dates, films, biographies, and other important events and moments of the Nazi regime; one can almost feel the momentum of history, almost hear the clock ticking. Occasional errors notwithstanding, such as his quotation from the closing scenes of Fritz Lang’s M (1930) (although that could be taken from an unfamiliar source), his scholarship and the depth and breadth of his resources make the book fascinating and accessible to the interested beginner as well as the established scholar. It also makes an interesting conjunction with other well-publicized but less-than-orthodox histories of the Third Reich such as Daniel Goldhagen’s Hitler’s Willing Executioners or Linda Schulte-Sasse’s Entertaining the Third Reich, with which it shares many concerns.

     

    It seems he is justified in calling his final chapter, with a sense of irony and realism, “The Testament of Dr. Goebbels.” He starts out in the book by suggesting that “as time passes, the legacy of the Third Reich looms ever larger” (23). He ends, appropriately, by saying that “more than fifty years since the demise of National Socialism, the testament of Dr. Goebbels continues to haunt us” (223). This book enhances our ability to deal with that legacy.

    Works Cited

     

    • Friedlander, Saul, ed. Probing the Limits of Representation. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1992.
    • Goldhagen, Daniel. Hitler’s Willing Executioners: Ordinary Germans and the Holocaust. New York: Alfred A. Knopf & Company, 1996.
    • Hull, David S. Film in the Third Reich: A Study of the German Cinema, 1933-1945. Berkeley: U of California P, 1969.
    • Schulte-Sasse, Linda. Entertaining the Third Reich: Illustrations of Wholeness in Nazi Cinema. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996.
    • Taylor, Richard. Film Propaganda: Soviet Russia and Nazi Germany. London: Croom Helm, 1979.

     

  • The Art and Artifice of Peter Greenaway

    Anthony Enns

    Department of English
    University of Iowa

    anthony-enns@uiowa.edu

     

    Woods, Alan. Being Naked Playing Dead: The Art of Peter Greenaway.Manchester: Manchester UP, 1996.

     

    It is significant that the subtitle of Alan Woods’ new book, Being Naked Playing Dead, is not “The Films of…” or “The Cinema of…” but rather “The Art of Peter Greenaway.” “Artist” is certainly a more accurate description of Greenaway’s occupation than “filmmaker”; while he is widely known as one of today’s most brilliant and unique filmmakers, he has also worked in the mediums of painting, installations, experimental television, and opera. Woods’ subtitle not only indicates this fact, but also makes clear that Greenaway’s films must be considered in light of his wider body of work, and, more importantly, that his work must be considered within the context of contemporary art rather than contemporary cinema. As Woods points out: “Greenaway’s cinema requires a critical analysis which is not restricted to cinema, but draws its terms and concepts and examples both from the history of Western painting since the Renaissance… and from a base within the very different world of contemporary art practice” (87). Through his in-depth understanding of salient issues in contemporary art and his ability to decipher the wealth of influences and references at play within the works themselves, Woods distills the complexities of Greenaway’s art into a cohesive aesthetic theory, an outline for a “new cinematic language.” He constructs a fascinating portrait of Greenaway’s working method as well as illustrates a potentially new method of film criticism.

     

    Part of what makes Greenaway’s films unique is the way they address the medium of film itself. Greenaway is obsessed with the difficulties of representing reality on film, and this problem becomes focused on representations of the body. As Greenaway explains: “[there are] two phenomena I have never been able to suspend disbelief about in the cinema–copulation and death” (52). Copulation and death are the two subjects addressed by Woods’ title, and they are particularly significant to Greenaway because they mark the limit of representation, the limit of film’s ability to represent the physical world. According to Woods, naked bodies, which are ubiquitous in Greenaway’s films, are linked to mortality: “Our interest in the nude, he suggests, is more than sexual: it is also to do with our knowledge of our own mortality. Many of the bodies he shows us are dead, or at least… acting dead” (162). It is paradoxical that Greenaway’s method of addressing the artifice of film is actually a project of connecting viewers to something more genuine: the experience of their own bodies, their mortality, the human condition. Greenaway recognizes the inability of “dominant” cinema to convey this experience because of its strict adherence to narrative; narrative is unable to remind people that they are mortal, and this is why Greenaway advocates a new cinema, a “cinema of ideas, not plots.”

     

    Jorge Luis Borges once said that the short story did not necessarily require a plot, but rather a “situation,” and it is this word that appears in Woods’ text in place of plot: “the situation, however artificial, becomes difficult to bear because it must be thought about rather than consumed/resolved through narrative” (201). Narratives fail because they resolve tension, whereas Greenaway uses tension to evoke thought. Narrative relies on character identification, on the viewer’s empathy with the plight of the protagonist, but Greenaway rejects such a notion: “Empathy… prevents us from dealing with, facing up to, what is really real” (176). This repositioning of the viewer in relation to the work of art is almost Brechtian, except that Greenaway’s project does not encourage political awareness so much as an awareness of the operations of nature; according to Woods, Greenaway disrupts narrative from a “Darwinian standpoint.” However, it would be wrong to interpret Greenaway’s emphasis on nature as an attempt to evoke a spiritual or a transcendent experience. Woods describes Greenaway’s use of cinematic artifice as an attempt to combine Brechtian as well as Baroque theatricality (the Baroque aesthetic combines soul and body, the spiritual and the material): “It is not spirituality which is co-existent, doubled, with corporeality in Greenaway, but the presence of mind to imagine, to represent, as well as live out, physical existence” (200). This statement best explains the difference between Greenaway and Brecht: Greenaway demands that the viewer engage his films both intellectually and physically.

     

    Throughout his work, Greenaway connects the material to the intellectual, objects to ideas, as Woods points out: “[Objects] are at once matter and spectacle, idea and thing” (17). The distinction between symbols, words and things gradually becomes blurred. His use of naked bodies, therefore, is not simply the reduction of characters to objects, but rather the creation, through their objectification, of meanings: “What… gives his work its particular charge, individuality and excess is that… he invests all objects, all bodies, with intricate, inexhaustible meaning” (49). Greenaway also solves the problem of narrative through a similar objectification. He prefers to think of narrative not as a story but as a “sequence”: “Sequence is inevitable in cinema, but narrative might not be” (227). In other words, he is able to accomplish this combination of Brechtian and Baroque theatricality by reducing narrative elements themselves to objects, to physicality, and it is through their physical presence, in succession, that meaning is generated.

     

    This objectification of narrative elements can also be understood as the transformation of spatial meaning into temporal meaning. Greenaway not only invents a new cinematic language, he also teaches his viewers how to read it. He introduces a model of viewership based on the medium of painting rather than cinema: “When you go to the National Gallery… you don’t stand in front of the painting and emote. You don’t cry, you don’t shout, you don’t scream. Why should we demand those sorts of relationships in the cinema?” (81-2). Paintings, according to Woods, convey spatial meaning; they exist outside of time in a “continuous present.” Cinema conveys temporal meaning; meaning is created through the movement of objects in space over time, through narrative. Woods believes that “[Greenaway] retains as much simultaneous, spatial meaning as possible, and reinvents it for a temporal meaning” (123). Woods connects Greenaway’s rejection of the temporal limitations of cinema, a rejection of narrative and ephemerality, to Walter Benjamin’s essay “The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction.” Benjamin was critical of film because it denies the viewer the ability to contemplate the image: the moving picture constantly distracts the viewer and controls both the direction and the duration of the viewer’s perception. Woods posits Greenaway as a potential solution to Benjamin’s dilemma: Greenaway’s films do not attempt to control the viewer’s perception, but rather, through the rejection of narrative and an emphasis on repetition and physicality, Greenaway demands that his images be contemplated: “The distancing effect involved in the picture’s treatment of the material–and, for us, in our own distance from the period in which it was painted–demands that it be considered, rather than consumed” (81).

     

    Benjamin also believed that contemplation was the experience of the object’s authenticity, its “aura”: “that which withers in the age of mechanical reproduction is the aura of the work of art” (221). The “aura” of the work is its physicality, its presence in time and space, which the film image obliterates. Greenaway often says he enjoys the making of films, but he is always disappointed in the result–he refers to the finished film as a “dissatisfying by-product” of the process of its creation–and what is disappointing to Greenaway about film is that it has no substance: “it is a frustration that cinema has no substance… it can have no intimacy with history” (93). Much of Greenaway’s artistic work outside of filmmaking involves exhibitions and books which chronicle the making of his films; they are an attempt, in other words, to give physicality to film: “What is unique… is his increasing interest in finding ways of reconstructing for his audience the physical realities of the set, the props, the bodies which, in film, are… insubstantial traces, reduced to light” (87). And his interest in exhibitions, in the physicality of film, also reflects Benjamin’s notion of cinema as distraction, as detrimental to contemplation:

     

    We cannot inch a little to the left, to see the dining-table from the south side... this is a deeply impoverished situation, when we know that tables can be viewed from north, west and east as well... We could use a contemplation of the phenomenon of the exhibition to improve the status of the cinema. (140)

     

    The physical presence of the film allows viewers to control their own perception of the work of art not only temporally, but also spatially. The film, embodied in the exhibition, is then able to have an intimacy with history as well as the viewers, and at the same time the viewers are allowed a greater intimacy with the experience of their own bodies.

     

    After disrupting narrative and emphasizing physicality and corporeality, Greenaway discovers the possibility of creating meaning through the repetition and referencing of objects and ideas. This can be clearly seen in an exhibition entitled 100 Objects To Represent the World, in which Greenaway attempted to list 100 objects which could represent every aspect of human culture. Greenaway’s description of this process explains how meaning is generated through objects:

     

    Since every natural and cultural object is such a complex thing, and all are so endlessly interconnected, this ambition should not be so difficult to accomplish as you might imagine. For example... the fountain-pen inside my pocket is a machine that can represent all machinery; it is made of metal and plastic which could be said to represent the whole metallurgy industry from drawing-pins to battleships, and the whole plastics industry from the intra-uterine device to inflatables. It has a clip for attaching it to my inside jacket pocket and thus acknowledges the clothing industry. It is designed to write, thus representing all literature, belles lettres, and journalism. It has the name Parker inscribed on its lid, revealing the presence of words, designer-significance, advertising, identity. (20-21)

     

    Greenaway’s films ask the viewer to search for clues, to seek out references to other works of art, and to establish links from one film to the next. These games of referencing become the meaning of the films, their physicality, their embodied narrative. These endless references are reflected in the organization of Woods’ book, which does not trace Greenaway’s career in chronological order but rather constructs a web of associations, beginning with simple topics such as “water” or “curtains,” which lead him from one work to the other and from one association to the next in an apparently inexhaustible cycle. What is truly wonderful about Woods’ book is the way it reflects Greenaway’s own aesthetic: meaning is not generated through the construction of a narrative, but rather through the associations and links between objects and ideas.

     

    What possibly makes Greenaway unique among contemporary filmmakers, and what may be the foundation of his “new cinematic language,” a language of bodies and objects rather than characters and stories, is that he rejects the emphasis on interpretation and content which pervades film criticism, as Susan Sontag pointed out in her essay “Against Interpretation.” Sontag believes the notion of content in a work of art is obsolete: “the idea of content is today mainly a hindrance, a nuisance, a subtle or not so subtle philistinism” (5). She argues for a criticism of appearances, of surfaces; for example, her description of Alain Resnais and Alain Robbe-Grillet’s film Last Year at Marienbad, a film that Greenaway greatly admires: “the temptation to interpret Marienbad should be resisted. What matters in Marienbad is the pure, untranslatable, sensuous immediacy of some of its images” (9). Greenaway’s films also offer a wealth of sensuous imagery that does not ask to be interpreted, but rather to be witnessed, to be experienced, to be contemplated. Woods believes that the language of contemporary film criticism is inadequate to discuss Greenaway’s work: “there seems to be no equivalent set of continuing dialogues between Greenaway and contemporary film directors” (13). Woods also points out that Greenaway does not see himself as following cinematic tradition: “I can think of no other director so apparently uninterested in, impervious to, almost the whole range and history of Hollywood product” (15). Woods seems to be calling for a new type of criticism to discuss Greenaway, a criticism informed by the history of Western painting and contemporary art practice, a criticism, as Sontag suggests, of surfaces rather than content. In this way, Woods’ book not only makes a compelling argument for the significance of one of today’s most challenging filmmakers, but also for a new method of applying the tools of art history to works of cinema, of valuing ideas over plot, figure over character, spatial meaning over temporal.

     

    The book concludes with two interviews with Greenaway, the latter of which was conducted during the editing of his most recent film, The Pillow Book (1996). Throughout both interviews, Greenaway struggles to articulate his concept of cinematic language, of the vocabulary intrinsic to the medium of film. He states repeatedly that film should be more than simply the illustration of text, more than simply stories told visually, and The Pillow Book stands out as a perfect example of this concept. By using multiple screens, text overlays, and changing aspect ratios, The Pillow Book is a uniquely cinematic object, and the relationship between text and image is central to both the narrative and the structure of the film. The film tells the story of a calligrapher’s daughter who is obsessed with having her body written upon. She later becomes a writer herself and uses other people’s bodies as paper. According to an article by Greenaway in Sight and Sound, the Japanese hieroglyph is the central metaphor of the film: “the text is read through the image, and the image is seen in the text–very possibly an ideal model for cinema” (15). Words are more than the things they signify; they are also images themselves. Thus the hieroglyph written upon the body illustrates the blurring of the distinctions between images, texts, and bodies, or between symbols, words and things. The Japanese hieroglyph could also stand as the central metaphor of Greenaway’s cinematic language: cinema is more than simply the illustration of text, but also text as illustration, symbol as object, image as a body itself, carved out of light. Greenaway arranges elements on celluloid as a painter would on canvas, using graphic tools to draw attention to the surface of the screen image, to the artifice of film. Like Marienbad, the images of The Pillow Book have a pure, untranslatable and sensuous immediacy, but they also clearly advertise the artifice behind them, and the importance of artifice, for Greenaway, is ultimately connected to bodily experience. Artifice pulls viewers out of the waking dream of traditional cinematic narrative; it asks them not to consume the film, but to consider it, to contemplate the screen as they might contemplate a canvas, and to recognize, through their experience, the reality of their own nakedness.

    Works Cited

     

    • Benjamin, Walter. Illuminations. Trans. Harry Zohn. Ed. Hannah Arendt. New York: Schocken Books, 1969.
    • Greenaway, Peter. “Peter Greenaway on The Pillow Book.” Sight and Sound 6.11 (1996): 15-17.
    • Sontag, Susan. Against Interpretation and Other Essays. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1966.
    • Woods, Alan. Being Naked Playing Dead: The Art of Peter Greenaway. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1996.

     

  • Looking for Richard in Looking for Richard: Al Pacino Appropriates the Bard and Flogs Him Back to the Brits

     

    Kim Fedderson and J.M. Richardson

    Department of English
    Lakehead University
    Kim.Fedderson@Lakeheadu.ca
    Mike.Richardson@Lakeheadu.ca

     

    Looking for Richard. Dir. Al Pacino. Twentieth Century Fox, 1997.

     

    Al Pacino’s Looking for Richard opens with the words “King Richard” appearing first on the screen with the other syllables necessary for completing the title being added gradually. This device not only highlights the name “Richard III,” the protagonist of the Shakespearean source for Pacino’s film, it also enlists and then encourages us to search for Richard within the film. And when we go looking for Richard, we can, if we look hard, find him, but not where we had expected and, more tellingly, not where we seem to be directed to look. While it gives us innumerable glimpses of Richard–the documentary frame of the film allows us to see Richard in America, in the Cloisters, in England, at the Globe, in theatrical rehearsal and performance, in cinematic rehearsal and performance–Pacino’s film, like Shakespeare’s humpbacked dissembler, harbors a “secret, close intent,” making Richard far more difficult to locate than his conspicuousness in the film would suggest. And once he is glimpsed, we should begin to question the film’s motives. While Pacino claims that his goal is to make Shakespeare more accessible to his public, what he, in fact, does under this typically American anti-elitist and democratic ruse is to appropriate the cultural commodity that Shakespeare has become and then use it to establish American dominance within the global market in which this commodity is distributed. Pacino does this by first undermining the hold that England has had on Shakespeare’s work, in effect repossessing the work, and then reforming it to his taste so that it may be marketed at home and ultimately abroad. In this cautionary tale about coming to America, Pacino not only hijacks the bard, but then he also audaciously offers him for sale back to his original owners. Indeed, it is only within the film’s conflict with itself, in the division between what it actually does and what it appears to do, that the character of Shakespeare’s smiling villain comes clearly into our view.

     

    One of the things this film purports to do and in fact does is to provide us with an iteration of Shakespeare’s Richard III. That Richard III offers a narrative comprised of four phases: 1) an initial state of sovereignty, presented as “true and just” and represented by King Edward IV, comes to an end as Edward sickens and dies; 2) this is followed by an act of legitimate succession as sovereignty passes into the hands of the legitimate heir, who because of his youth, is assigned a protector; 3) this in turn is disrupted by an act of illegitimate succession as the protector turns usurper, “subtle, false and treacherous,” has the rightful heir murdered, and assumes sovereignty himself; 4) finally, the usurper is displaced and dispatched and a new legitimate sovereignty is restored. Pacino’s Looking for Richard presents only a selection of scenes from the Shakespearean original, yet these scenes are carefully chosen so as to represent these major narrative phases: hence, the sickness and death of Edward IV (Harris Yulin) is enacted; the young prince inherits his sovereignty but is forced to relinquish it to the Protector (Pacino), who has his charge murdered and so succeeds illegitimately; and finally, the usurper is replaced by the new legitimate monarch, Henry Richmond (Aidan Quinn).

     

    While the major phases of the narrative of Shakespeare’s Richard III are represented in Pacino’s selection of incidents to dramatize in his Looking for Richard, the film itself, as a totality, is as conflicted as “divided York and Lancaster.” The principal source of this conflict is the film’s form. Pacino, as director of the film Looking for Richard, wraps his episodic and fragmentary performances of Shakespeare’s play in a documentary frame, in which Pacino, in the role of dramatized director of the film, explores how Richard III, which the film contends has become lost and mired in tradition, might be made “accessible to the people out there, the people on the street.” This documentary frame contains two distinct narratives, both of which replicate much of Shakespeare’s story about Richard III, but which suppress its tragic implication. The two narratives of Pacino’s frame, when taken together, create an unsettling dissonance within Looking for Richard, one which should cause us to question the film’s happy democratic sense of itself as a film that merely attempts to make Shakespeare’s play more accessible to the American public. Like Shakespeare’s character, the film may ask us to regard it as a “marv’lous proper man” (I.ii.254), but there is no mistaking that it cannot so regard itself.

     

    The first of these narratives, and strongly foregrounded at that (both in the film and in its publicity, the press kit, and interviews with Pacino, so that it has become quite clear that this is what we are expected to go looking for), is a quest romance called “Looking for Richard” in which the “authentic spirit” of the play (and of Shakespeare himself), the holy grail as it were, has been lost but is found and renewed, recovered in effect, by the modern hero, Al Pacino. The keeper of the text of the play is analogous to King Edward IV and is as responsible for maintaining the currency and vitality of Shakespeare’s text as the king is for maintaining peace and prosperity in the realm. Like King Edward, the traditions of performance have become moribund. The evidence for the death of the king/death of the text is presented via interviews with “the man on the street,” demonstrating that the American public has, by and large, no liking for, patience with, or understanding of Shakespeare. Historically, of course, the keepers of this text have been British actors and scholars–many of whom are represented in the film. The argument, then, of the manifest narrative in the film is that, in essence, these British traditions of performance and scholarship have, like Edward IV, sickened and died, lost their power to maintain Shakespeare’s vitality, leaving the artistic equivalent of a power vacuum. Pacino, the dramatized director-as-character within the film’s fictional space, offers himself as the new keeper of the text, the man who can make Shakespeare accessible once again to Everyman. This aspirant, from the young nation of America, is analogous to the Princes in the Tower, the future hope for the realm. And as the young princes have backers such as Hastings (Kevin Conway), the dramatized director also has his in the form of Derek Jacobi and, especially, Sir John Gielgud. The latter is with him throughout and, most importantly, at the end of the film is presented as Pacino’s protector and approving witness to his claim. (We know this convention from Star Wars: Obi Wan and Luke Skywalker–an aged Brit who is clearly a part of the tradition sanctions the passing on of the force to an American.) This story mobilizes many of the narrative elements and characters of Richard III, but emplots them comedically, creating a version of Richard III in which no usurper threatens the rightful claims of the new generation.

     

    Unlike this manifest narrative (the film as it wishes to be seen; the film fashioned as Richard fashions himself for Anne, to “woo” us) the second, repressed narrative is the product of a Ricardian “dissembling nature” and, like Richard himself, harbors “a secret, close intent.” This buried narrative operates with no delusions about its motives. A couple of lines from the film serve as a nice gloss on its modus operandi: “The text is just a means for expressing what’s behind the text” and “Irony is really only hypocrisy with style.” Like the first narrative, the second one represents the British traditions of performance and scholarship as moribund; the legitimate inheritors, represented by Sir John Gielgud, Kenneth Branagh, Peter Brooks, Emrys Jones, are ineffectual. Indeed Kenneth Branagh, a powerful young Prince, exiting the film like Lear’s fool, is quickly shunted offstage and Sir Ian McKellen, whose own Richard III makes him a formidable rival, is simply not mentioned at all. Pacino as dramatized director, in essence, removes or co-opts the opposition to his claims to sovereignty just as Shakespeare’s Richard does, metaphorically killing off Branagh, McKellen, Trevor Nunn, Derek Jarman, Peter Greenaway, etc. He impudently installs himself within the vacancy he himself has created, offering himself as the protector/successor, the one who should command from the throne of the Globe Theatre. Like Richard, Pacino as dramatized director is an unlikely prospect for the elevation he seeks: Richard’s physical and moral deformities become Pacino’s less than polished accent and speech, the baseball cap worn reversed, and the generally unkempt appearance.

     

    As an apparently improbable claimant to the throne, Pacino, in this narrative, must address two problems not inherent in the manifest narrative discussed above, but that are to be found in the Shakespearean original: 1) the quasi-legalistic problem of establishing the legitimacy of his claim on the Shakespearean text: By what right does the future of the Shakespearean play fall to this American actor? Where does he stand in the “proper” (i.e., obvious, expected) line of succession? and 2) the essentially political problem of winning over the public to his side, of having them shout, “The king is dead! Long live the king!”

     

    On the matter of legitimacy, Pacino’s solution is not unlike Richard’s: Richard has Buckingham imply the bastardy of the Princes in the Tower; Pacino undermines the imputed British claim to exclusive dominion over Shakespeare by a variety of tactics. First, he argues that those with the most obvious claims are the very ones that have allowed the plays to falter. The film implies that the British tradition–both its actors and its scholars–has turned the body of the bard’s play into an inaccessible, irrelevant, antiquated corpse. If Shakespeare’s fortunes flag it is because of the elitist pedantry of British scholars, and the technically precise, but inauthentic and insincere, classical dramatic training of British actors. Pacino further delegitimizes the British claimants by dissociating the play from the specificity of its language. For it is in the British sway over the language of the plays, a language that is obsessively referred to within the film as an obstacle for American actors and audiences alike, that the British contenders find their strongest argument. Masterfully co-opting his opposition, Pacino gets one of the British scholarly authorities in the film to argue that “the text is just a means for expressing what’s behind the text,” thus legitimizing the claim that Shakespeare’s essence exists separately from Shakespeare’s language. Once Shakespeare can be shown to exist outside of the Englishness of his language, the corollary can then be advanced that the essence of Shakespeare may not be English at all, but could indeed be American. A homeless man, one of the many mechanicals Pacino peoples his new world with, extols the bard’s virtues and his relevance to contemporary problems. Pacino himself argues that Richard is just like the American-style gangsters with whom he made his reputation. Once we get past the irksome “prithees” and “post-hastes,” it turns out that Shakespeare has, in fact, been hiding out in Poughkeepsie looking for Pacino.

     

    On the matter of public approbation: as Richard and Buckingham manipulate the commoners to make them cry for Richard as king, so Pacino interviews his fellow New Yorkers and foregrounds those who clearly need someone to reclaim Shakespeare for them, and then, like Richard, offers himself as the necessary successor. In this version, there is no Richmond to challenge Richard because the usurper gets away with it. He successfully eliminates his rivals by displacing Branagh, effacing McKellen, and assuming a familial coziness with Gielgud, and, finally, ascends the throne. If the play is to be reanimated, the “Barons” of Branagh and Gielgud will have to, and indeed do, pay allegiance to Pacino (while “pretenders” like McKellen apparently “flee the scene”), thus authenticating Pacino’s assertion of legitimate succession. This ironic narrative offers no fifth act because the audience fails to recognize that its smiling, redeeming hero can also be regarded as its usurping villain.

     

    And to do this, Pacino must pull off the improbable feat of seducing all and not be seen seducing any. The analogue for this achievement is Richard’s seduction of Lady Anne (Winona Ryder): just as she is seduced into transferring her affections from her dead father and husband to Richard, their murderer, so Pacino, an unlikely Shakespearean whose American “deformities” would seem to preclude his being the last best hope of the text, asks us to accept him as the one who can save the bard for us, now that the British tradition has died off. Having pried Shakespeare loose from the British tradition of performance (a tradition which has always made Americans feel themselves culturally inferior to their former colonial masters), it can now be remade to American tastes, or more precisely, to the usurping Pacino’s tastes, since the version that prevails must be his own.

     

    Pacino’s satisfaction at having taken Shakespeare to the people is compromised by the liberties these very same people will take with the bard’s texts. Interpretations proliferate: one commoner talks about talmudic Shakespeare, another talks about a rock n’ roll Lady Macbeth, and a Hamlet who’s like every kid. Pacino, dismayed by the license the commoners allow themselves, complains, “You must get me out of this. It’s gone too far. I want to be king.” Here we see that Pacino’s goal is not to bring just any Shakespeare to the people. The bard that is enthroned in majesty must be his. The scene which follows this is entitled, significantly, “Now to take the crown.” And it is charged with a double resonance: it refers to Pacino as Richard taking the crown within the performance of the play, and to Pacino as dramatized director within the frame assuming sovereignty over the text. Having displaced the opposition and staked his claim to Shakespeare, Pacino is then able to repatriate the Bard. The implicit claim goes something like this: Shakespeare, having been freed from what the film claims are the ossifying traditions of British performance, is restored to his pristine essence in America, and now, in addition to being a marketable commodity able to meet foreign competition–Branagh, Luhrmann, McKellen et al.–within the domestic economy, can also be exported and marketed abroad. Thus, in the film’s most deliciously vertiginous moment, Pacino installs himself center stage at Sam Wannamaker’s restored Globe theatre–the new American-sponsored Euro-Shakespeare theme park–and intones the opening soliloquy of the play.

     

    The frame’s two narratives (the happy manifest narrative of legitimate succession and the ironic and repressed narrative of successful usurpation) taken together create a dissonance within Looking for Richard. It is within this dissonance that Pacino the undramatized narrator looks for Shakespeare’s Richard: the frame’s doubled narrative enacts the duplicitous split between seeming and being that constitutes Richard’s character; he is both the saint of the delusionary manifest narrative and the devil of its repressed other. Richard, then, is not Pacino playing the crookbacked monarch imposter in the staged scenes, but the smiling villain, the beguiling dramatized director making the film Looking for Richard. The dramatized scenes in the film look for and find Shakespeare’s play; the film itself, however, looks for and finds its titular character, and makes him a victorious usurper.

     

    The implicit premise of the film–that Shakespeare’s work is in need of resuscitation–is, of course, completely wrong: never before have Shakespeare’s works been made so accessible to the American public–largely due to Branagh and Nunn, the imaginatively modernized productions of McKellen and Baz Luhrmann, and the experimental work of Greenaway and Jarman. The tradition is anything but ossified, and foreign Shakespeares now compete at the box office with major Hollywood productions; in short, the endeavour to persuade the American audience that the bard of tradition is dead is necessary in order to protect the domestic market from foreign competition. The key question is not whose Shakespeare, or which style of Shakespearean production, but rather who gets to keep the financial and cultural profits. If the analogy between Lady Anne and the American audience holds, Pacino/Richard’s line, echoed chorically throughout the seduction scene–“I’ll win her, but I’ll not keep her long”–speaks volumes concerning their intentions; namely, both will move on to more profitable affairs when they have had their way with the current ones. Having legitimized himself and having seduced America with his Shakespeare, he can now return to his old standbys. Thus, he appears next in Donnie Brasco and currently in The Devil’s Advocate, a film in which he finally gets to play the ultimate seducer.

     

    Although on the whole the frame transforms Richard into a successful usurper and hence does not recapitulate Act V of the play in any detailed way, there is one aspect of Act V that does make an appearance and might suggest that Pacino’s victory is not total. Just as in the final act of Shakespeare’s play, Richard is haunted by the ghosts of all those he has slain in his rise to the throne, so the British traditions that the frame declares to be dead continually haunt Pacino’s performance of the selected scenes from the play. They are, for the most part, faithful and largely derivative iterations of the text in a realistic mode à la Branagh’s Henry V; in dramatized performance, the baseball cap gives way to period costumes; Pacino’s New York accent modulates to the mid-Atlantic; there is considerable concern that the sets be realistically correct; and Pacino’s one major effort actually to rewrite the text with a view to simplifying and hence “clarifying” Shakespeare as well as asserting his own control over the script is abandoned in performance. In making Shakespeare new and accessible, Pacino gives him a very familiar and traditional face. The innovative frame notwithstanding, the film gives us none of the creative translation of the text that Luhrmann attempts in William Shakespeare’s Romeo and Juliet, nor the anachronistic restaging of the story in McKellen’s Richard III. As if haunted by the British “right” to Shakespeare, the colonial “pretender” Pacino must not only take him back to Britain, to the rebuilt Globe, but also must seek the approbation of the allegedly displaced rivals, and he does this by handing back to them an imitation of the implicitly denigrated “conventional” product. And, re-enacting the cultural inferiority complex that originated the entire project, Pacino wants his performance to be recognized and valued by the British and on British soil. The British “right” over the tradition haunts the colonial Pacino and he still seeks their approval. Gielgud, recalling his role of the butler in Arthur, nods approvingly at the end of the film. Despite talk of “method,” of a romantic communing with the essence of the text, of sidestepping the American obsession with the language of the text which acts as barrier for American players and audiences alike, Pacino keeps “turning British” as he performs. “New,” potentially censorious and hence threatening, Shakespeareans, like McKellen, are to be kept offstage. Pacino in true Ricardian fashion is less concerned with making Shakespeare accessible, or with renewing the bard for contemporary audiences, than he is with establishing his own right of succession within the tradition, with all the perquisites that that entails. But the very timidity of mounting such a conventional (though perfectly good) performance whilst surrounded in the field by many more adventuresome Shakespeareans argues for the presence of a deep-seated anxiety; perchance Pacino senses a Richmond in the wings after all.

     

  • Ersatz Truths: Variations on the Faux Documentary

    Edward Brunner

    Department of English
    Southern Illinois University
    ebrunner@siu.edu

     

    Prelinger, Rick. Ephemeral Films 1931-1960: To New Horizons and You Can’t Get there from Here. CD-ROM. New York: Voyager, 1994.

     

    Prelinger, Rick. Our Secret Century: Archival Films from the Dark Side of the American Dream: Volume 1: The Rainbow is Yours with Volume 2: Capitalist Realism; Volume 3: The Behavior Offensive with Volume 4: Menace and Jeopardy; and Volume 5: Teenage Transgression with Volume 6: The Uncharted Landscape. CD-ROM. New York: Voyager, 1996.

     

    When W. H. Auden supplied the foreword to John Ashbery’s first book of poetry in 1956–Some Trees, which Auden had chosen for publication in the Yale Younger Poets series that year–one of the few poems he singled out for attention was “The Instruction Manual.” Ashbery’s speaker was so bored with his task of writing a technical manual that he instead daydreamed of a trip to Guadalajara, Mexico. Auden praised the poem for its contrast between the speaker’s “historically real but profane situation, doing hackwork for a living” and “his sacred memories of a Mexican town,” and quoted from these lines near the poem’s close:

     

    How limited, but how complete withal, has been our
         experience of Guadalajara!
    We have seen young love, married love, and the love 
         of an aged mother for her son.
    We have heard the music, tasted the drinks, and 
         looked at colored houses.
    What more is there to do, except stay? And that 
         we cannot do.
    And as a last breeze freshens the top of the weathered 
         old tower, I turn my gaze
    Back to the instruction manual which has made me dream 
         of Guadalajara.

     

    “Reading this,” Auden remarked, “I who have never been to Mexico nor wish to go there translate this into images of the happy life drawn from quite different cities.” Yet it seems all too obvious that Ashbery, exactly like Auden, had also never been to Mexico nor had he any wish to go there. This “tour” has all the earmarks of a cheap travelogue, the kind of thing one might have dozed through as part of a double bill in movie theaters in the 1940s. As a conveniently-located band plays excerpts from Scheherazade, Ashbery sweeps us from one side of the public square to the next. If, at first, the sights seem suitable enough, though a bit mundane–“Around stand the flower girls, handing out rose- and lemon-colored flowers, / Each attractive in her rose-and-blue stripe dress (Oh! Such shades of rose and blue), / And nearby is the little white booth where women in green serve you green and yellow fruit”–by the time we enter a “typical” household to be introduced to family members (“Let us take this opportunity to tiptoe into one of the wide streets” where an “old woman in gray sits… fanning herself with a palm leaf fan”) we realize we have by now been trapped wholly in the realm of the cliché, the unreal, the “picturesque.” The colors that play throughout each description–as pushy as any technicolor print–give an impression of “detail” and individuation even as they relentlessly neutralize any information, reducing each scene to a play of picturesque tints, as is evident when we look out from the church tower: “There is the rich quarter, with its houses of pink and white, and its crumbling, leafy terraces. / There is the poorer quarter, its homes a deep blue.” (These particular colors are precisely weighted, but it takes a moment’s pause to recognize Caucasian skin coloring and the hue of despair associated with poverty.) Ashbery understands the daydream perfectly, of course; it is precisely an exercise in looking without seeing. So we never have left home–we never have even escaped the simple rigidity of the instruction manual. As “the last breeze freshens the top of the weathered old tower,” we should realize how often we have been at this same juncture in the closing images of a slipshod documentary. This old tower has been in need of a freshening breeze for a long time indeed.

     

    Auden had a particular talent for misunderstanding Ashbery that has not gone unnoticed. “Remarkably disaffected” is how Richard Howard summarized Auden’s foreword. In fact, Auden had decided that no manuscript submitted to the Yale series in 1955 merited publication, and only the intercession of his companion Chester Kallman prodded Auden into reconsidering two manuscripts from writers in the New York gay subculture. (Ashbery won over Frank O’Hara’s Meditations in an Emergency.) Still, the question arises: how could Auden have so completely mistaken Ashbery’s send-up for a solemn work of poetic art? One answer might be that Auden came from a generation with a heavy investment in the authority of the documentary. Arguably, documentary was the form that originated with and was nurtured by the generation of the 1930s. Auden himself worked in 1935 with the Film Unit of the General Post Office as assistant director, writing texts for half a dozen documentary films, including the much-heralded “Night Mail” (music by Benjamin Britten). To Auden, it must have seemed natural for the speaker in Ashbery’s poem to jog memory by drawing upon images that might have been at home in a documentary. To Ashbery, however (about to embark on a career as an art critic for the International Herald Tribune), some documentary embodiments of “reality” could be so maladroitly organized that they were not just profoundly suspect but even objects of lampoon.

     

    I.

     

    While postmodernist Ashbery was able–even ready–to regard the form of the documentary with distrust, as though the stage-management of the “realistic” visual image in film was already complicit with a form of commercialization, a modernist poet such as Auden, who came of age with the documentary, must have found it difficult to conceive of the extent to which others might violently abuse it. Yet almost from its inception, the film documentary perfected in the 1930s was understood by business, professional and government interests as a particularly enticing form that lent itself to manipulation in ways from which they could profit both directly and indirectly. Any doubts about this are thoroughly dispelled by Rick Prelinger’s invaluable assemblage of industrial, promotional and educational films that are available on a one-disc CD-ROM, Ephemeral Films, 1931-1960, and on a series of two-disc sets that will eventually be six in number appearing under the overall title Our Secret Century: Archival Films from the Darker Side of the American Dream.1 These are films that we are sure to believe we have seen at one time or another, though we cannot precisely remember their details. Rather than remembering the films, we are likely to remember the circumstances under which we first saw them, for these films have been designed essentially to lack presence, to blend into the circumstances that surround them as if they were incontestably representations of the ordinarily “real.” What places, then, do these films return us to? Watching “Safety Belt for Susie” (1957), which uses first a doll, then human-scale crash dummies, to demonstrate the value of safety belts, will evoke driver education classrooms in second- or third-rate public high school in the 1950s or the 1960s. “A Date with Your Family” (1947), which suggests that happiness in families is a learned behavior, and family-members who begin to play the role of the happy child or happy parent may eventually find it easier and easier to fall into that self-assigned part, will recall the brightly-painted basements and metal fold-out chairs of well-meaning suburban churches where such films might be shown as part of a catechism class. The Union Pacific Railroad’s use of three unhappy examples of injudicious behavior to dramatize how feckless judgment could have lasting repercussions, in “The Days of Our Years” (1954), will remind employees of large corporations of “Safety Week” or some other program with a promotional slogan and extended lunch-hours with time set aside time for worker incentives. A half-hour production such as “Freedom Highway” (1957), sponsored by Greyhound, which extols the patriotic lessons to be gleaned by traveling from the West Coast to Washington by bus–as well as the pleasures of such a luxurious mode of travel–will recall the tarnished elegance of long vanished theaters of the 1930s, 1940s, and 1950s with their double bills and the “short subject” interspersed between the coming attractions and the cartoon. And “Design for Dreaming” (1957), which ends with an array of the General Motors automobiles of the future, vehicles built in prototype but never actually put into production, like the turbine-powered Pontiac Firebird II, may remind some of us of an early autumn ritual for families in the 1950s, the annual visit to the showroom of the local automobile dealer for the unveiling of the “latest models.” (Bouquets of flowers, a variety of hors d’oeuvres, and a professional pianist softly playing “standards” in the background were all elements that my father, who owned a Packard franchise in New England in the 1950s, deemed essential when he plotted the stagecraft for the new arrivals, including his own custom-stylized one-of-a-kind variant on a 1954 Packard, the “Monte Carlo.”)

     

    It is easiest, perhaps, to think of these films as Americana, as fragments of settings and circumstances and rituals that have long been materially erased. But they are a good deal more than that, as Prelinger’s illuminating introductions always succeed in demonstrating. The rich vein of primary materials that Prelinger has reconstituted recommend themselves at once as potential texts for scholars in a number of disciplines–cinema, history, literature, popular studies, cultural studies, sociology or anthropology. Like a collector who realized that the coming of the LP threatened the preservation of the music on fragile 78s, he began in the 1980s to rescue from obscurity, and from outright destruction in some cases, those reels of film by small commercial filmmakers that no one could imagine a use for. (In a 1995 interview, he estimated he had around 90,000 cans of such film stored around the country and in his own Manhattan archives–a small portion of the 600,000 marginal films that he estimates were produced between 1920 and 1960.)2 He has culled the most suggestively complex of all the films in his collection, and he has deployed the resources of the video disc as ingeniously as anyone could wish. Not only has he grouped the films in categories and in sequences that present something of the range that exists in sub-genres that may seem to be inordinately constricted, but he has also bundled alongside many of the films a slew of additional documentation, including excerpts from other films, contemporary interviews, segments from popular books, articles from trade journals, related advertisements, and (for one film) the front-page illustration from service station road maps of the 1950s (it is in itself a valuable brief anthology). Each CD contains approximately 100 minutes of viewing. But the time to be spent among these archives is extended immeasurably by the remarkable amount of extra data that Prelinger makes available.

     

    The films Prelinger places before us are peculiar artifacts, half-familiar, half-alien. The experience of seeing them might recall another experience, that of discovering the pleasures in hearing musical recordings from decades past that we are better poised to appreciate than the audiences for whom that music was performed. Will Shade’s Memphis Jug Band must have seemed, to a street corner audience in Memphis in the 1930s, just one more hodge-podge band of blacks working with outrageous instruments (jugs, washboards, kazoos along with guitars and banjos) to play their “hokum” music that most audience members would associate with traveling medicine shows. To an audience listening sixty years later, however, Shade and his band represent an astonishingly complex moment in the evolution of American jazz as a vernacular African-American art form. To us, their recordings occupy a point midway between a just-about-outmoded rural blues tradition with its solo guitar and an about-to-be-invented urban jazz with its leanings toward group improvisation and orchestrated sequences. And to us, their instruments, while unbelievably crude, demonstrate the interplay possible between music built upon the regularities of the western diatonic scale and music driven by an attentiveness to sheer sound, in which timbre and tone are no less important than pitch. Their songs are clearly not yet jazz, but they are far more intricate than the Delta Blues, even as they borrow freely from the commercial music of their own time, even venturing unhesitantly into novelty effects. They were considered popular musicians in their own time, and they were relatively successful as entertainers. Only later is it possible to appreciate the complicated strands that they were mediating to perform their music and to understand the degree of inventiveness in their decision-making.

     

    Prelinger’s films can be regarded with a similar zest. There is both pleasure and scandal in viewing these films. The pleasure lies, in large part, in being placed as late-coming viewers who are in the powerful and superior position of looking over, around, through, and beyond these films. The only subject position never inhabited by the present-day viewer is that of the gullible audience-member who would take them at face value. These films carry within them, almost as a defining element, the husks of the audiences for whom they had been previously intended. And an added pleasure is the level of sharp and critical engagement that is always elicited by the category of the “bad.” At some level, Plan 9 from Outer Space and Last Year at Marienbad are similar in that both works encourage us to see there is more than one version of a story, more than one way to narrate events, for no scene can appear in Plan 9 without us seeing at once how it might have been presented in another way. The pleasure of bad art is that it so invites the play of our ingenuity (a pleasure that, it is true, can exhaust itself with dangerous speed). At the same time, these films are never merely laughable. They are scandalous examples of how thoroughly the media environment has been penetrated by schemes for social engineering.

     

    Prelinger has a devastating eye for a telling detail. Our Secret Century dazzles most when he arranges his material to disclose the cultural and historical framework within which the films sought to nestle. Consider one example: what may be one of the most straightforward of the discs, Volume 2: Capitalist Realism, which places on display the corporate mentality of a time (the late 1930s) and a business (General Motors) as represented by a single firm, the Jam Handy studios of Detroit, the largest and by all accounts most lucrative of the commercial filmmakers. By turning to “the Archives” section of the disc, we can read six accounts of Handy’s developing career, all plucked from a slew of hard-to-uncover trade publications, beginning with “Motion Pictures–Not for Theaters” from the February 1940 Educational Screen to “Jamison Handy: Master of Show ‘Em” from the March 15, 1963 issue of Sales Management. Handy even talks for us in excerpts from a 1961 TV interview (in which he explains that the first moviemaker was Christ because he used images to illustrate his parables). Handy began as an editor of newspaper comic strips (he discovered Popeye’s creator, E. C. Segar) but found himself drawn into the volatile marketing strategies of the early 1920s that centered around various alternate designs for projecting slides and short moving pictures. Handy understood that salesmen had to be equipped with inexpensive movie projectors if films were to become successful merchandising devices, and he bankrolled the development of cost-effective models. Handy’s shrewdest move, though, was to center his operations in Detroit and take advantage of a friendship with Richard H. Grant, a General Motors executive who carried Handy with him as his own star rose (he eventually became President of the Chevrolet Division). Linked strongly with GM–he wisely rented space in the new General Motors building downtown and used the opportunity to proselytize–his fortunes grew rapidly. By 1936 he was employing 400 people, including eight directors and twenty-eight writers.

     

    Capitalist Realism features two examples of Handy’s work from the 1930s, “Master Hands” (1936) and “From Dawn to Sunset” (1937). Both reveal how elaborate the sponsored film could be. Both are extended operations, thirty minutes in length, with striking visual presentations. At the same time, the limits of these films are also evident. Both represent a corporate position toward labor that is subtly demeaning. These two films also indicate how deftly Prelinger has chosen his examples, for the first was filmed just before and the second was filmed just after the 1936-1937 sit-down strikes by assembly-line workers that forced major concessions from GM. Two rather different attitudes toward workers, then, can be read back into each film. Indeed, the first often views the workers in settings that heroize them–enmeshed within the intricacies of the modern factory, manipulating formidable and mysterious slabs of machinery. The image of the worker borrows heavily from socialist realism films. In the second film, however, the worker is represented as first and foremost a consumer. As Prelinger notes, the film dwells on the worker receiving a paycheck, often through images of disembodied hands reaching out. With references to plants in far-flung areas (Buffalo, St. Louis) instead of celebrating a single plant in Flint, the film reminds workers that overall prosperity depends upon nation-wide cooperation.3

     

    These two Jam Handy films are offset in Capitalist Realism by a third, but this is a project that might better please Auden. Willard Van Dyke’s “Valley Town” (1940) offered a view of the devastation wrought by unemployment in New Castle, Pennsylvania. Subtitled “A Study of Machines and Men,” the film was intended as part of a series to be produced by the New York University Film Institute that would publicize the effects of automation on American life.4. (The series was, in fact, bankrolled by a foundation spearheaded by Alfred P. Sloan, then chairman of GM, who withdrew his funding of the project shortly after viewing “Valley Town”). Although it ultimately delivers a compact little message–the solution to automation is educational programs that will teach displaced workers new skills–it does so after a series of powerfully disturbing scenes. The shots of workers in “Valley Town” contrast pointedly with those in “Master Hands.” Van Dyke’s workers speak back and forth to one another as they toil. Their conversational exchanges imply that work is an extension of social life. Yet the drudgery and routine of laboring in a steel mill is not downplayed. Shots of disembodied feet move back and forth in a dance-like shuffle. Still, while such repetitive motions indicate the mechanical pressures of assembly-line operations, they also convey how a worker can embody a particular rhythm that can be imposed over and against the demands of the job. These images, however, of active, satisfying labor belong to New Castle’s past. (The footage was actually assembled from a visit by the crew to prosperous Lancaster, Pennsylvania.) When the mills in New Castle began to reopen–European rearmament was just under way–they reopened as state-of-the-art operations whose automation cost hundreds of jobs. Current shots in the modern New Castle mills show glowing slabs of steel floating mysteriously over mechanized rollers, and in the rare moment when a worker appears, he is only a disembodied face.

     

    Van Dyke’s documentary is sharply distinguished from Handy’s pseudo-documentaries through its use of numerous narrators and multiple points of view. Handy sets out to construct a single voice, a corporate voice, that speaks for all workers. Van Dyke lets a range of voices speak for the worker and indeed, his project sets such voices free, for it concludes with scenes in which a group of workers are openly discussing their predicament, without any final position dominating. Before that conclusion, moreover, Van Dyke has used voice in unusually compelling ways. At the opening of the film, a single voice narrates, that of the mayor who functions as an objective chronicler. But at its midpoint, when the film shifts to investigate the unemployment caused by automated mills, the job of narrator transfers to a young husband reluctantly returning home after unsuccessfully searching for a job. At home, the governing narration passes to the voice of his young wife who, in a strikingly effective shift, not only speaks but sings–and sings in words and music composed by Marc Blitzstein.5 Everything, in short, demands that we attend with care to a range of different voices, each representing a view by a worker in this film, beginning with the thoughtful public official, moving on to the unemployed husband, then to the young housewife (who also is configured as a worker in that she must provide a meal without adequate financial resources), to flourish with the musings of the unemployed at the end. Because of the importance accorded to voice, one of the most powerful passages in the film turns out to be a long scene at the kitchen table where the unemployed husband, the wife, and their small child eat their meager fare–in silence. Poverty has robbed this family of speech, that communal interchange that is the basis of so much that the film reveals as positive.

     

    Capitalist Realism as a volume is somewhat atypical insofar as its supplementary source material is exceptionally rich. Other items that Prelinger posts for our usage include a statistical map that dramatically indicates where supplies of tear gas had been shipped from 1933 to 1936 (most went to the industrial belt as manufacturers prepared for labor unrest); a 1940 article from Harper’s, “War and the Steel Ghost Towns,” and a 1936 article from Barron’s Weekly, “Detroit: the Commercial Hollywood.” What is typical, though, is the care with which this volume establishes a framework and helps provide a groundwork for later films. These 1930s films, the earliest from Prelinger’s archive, foreground issues that will return, notably inflected, in later films, including: an aesthetic based on appearing as up-to-date as possible, as if the need to take continual surveillance of one’s position should be a source of continual anxiety; the prestige-value of the documentary approach and its co-option by corporate enterprise; the appeal of “education” as a concept that invites endless redefining; the search for a strategy that will define the identity of the worker to the worker; the difference between the worker figured as an element in a working class community and the worker figured as a consumer moving upward into a middle class; the predominance of a male point-of-view; and the utterly complete erasure of even a hint of the existence of the African American or, for that matter, any substantial minority presence. The WPA guidebook to Michigan, in Prelinger’s excerpt, mentions that “Negroes form the largest racial group” in Flint, the setting of “Master Hands.” Not one is in sight in the film.

     

    II.

     

    Capitalist Realism is also atypical in that the comparisons it offers between its films (between Jam Handy and Willard Van Dyke) are quite pointed. In part this is an offshoot of a subtext in this volume, profiling the early days of the Jam Handy Studios. But Jam Handy is a sort of mini-mogul of commercial films; his jobs turn up on almost every disc. His relentlessly bland commercialism becomes a standard against which other commercial filmmakers come to be defined. Indeed, if there is a hero who emerges from the first six volumes of Our Secret Century–a foil to Jam Handy–it would have to be Sid Davis, whose productions dominate Volume 5: Teenage Transgressions. Davis specialized in films about youth in trouble. Working closely with actual figures from the judicial establishment who appear with all their disapproving gruffness intact, Davis captured an ominous and menacing Southern California environment in which youngsters were the victims of drug-dealing sharpies and sexual predators or of broken families or of neighborhood gangs. The script he commissioned for “Gang Boy” (1957) even went so far as to acknowledge ethnic differences between Chicanos and Anglos at the base of L.A. gang violence, though the shooting script altered the original script so that “Emilio” became “Martin,” “Luis” became “Larry,” “Gabriel” “George,” and “José” “Joe.” If the films sometimes seem immersed in a cop’s eye-view of the world, the mask-like and toughened faces that regularly appear among the main figures (the credits for “Gang Boy” offer thanks to members of “the following clubs:… Red Hearts, Red Dragons, Sharkies, Vikings, Lancers”) testify to a pervasive brutality that is more than simply a mark of the street-wise. 1950s popular culture was notorious for being unable to decide whether the Juvenile Delinquent was a psychopath or a Byronic hero and thus opted for a combination of both, in the character fleshed out by Marlon Brando in The Wild Ones or in the adulatory sketch of Dean Moriarty in On the Road.6 Davis’s gritty films expose the unlikelihood of such elegant archetypes. Relentlessly recording an irredeemably harsh environment–not only in the visages of participants but in the backlot locales, in the littered streets and noisy rail yards, in rooming-house interiors, and last but not least (especially in “The Dropout,” 1962) in the frenetic fourth-rate jazz that careens irritatingly through the background–these films offer persuasive testimony that no one person can survive as larger-than-life in this environment. Everyone gets beat. Merely to survive in such hard and cruel circumstances requires stamina, good luck, and most important of all but hardest to convey to teen-agers–a willingness to cooperate with others.

     

    The pivotal figure in Davis’s films is the dedicated professional–the case worker or district court judge who understands that a troubled youth may be, in fact, a sensitive youth. But that professional, perhaps not surprisingly, is apt to be a bit crusty. No one could mistake the air of chilly disapproval that clings to the chambers of Judge William B. McKesson of the Los Angeles Juvenile Court, as he soberly recalls, in “Name Unknown” (1951) and “The Terrible Truth” (1951), the errors of judgment by innocent teens that led to drug addiction, rape, and murder. Indeed, the most terrifying faces in these films are not worn by the miscreants–they often seem remarkably vulnerable, their faces open and wide–but by the adults in the police department into whose hands these kids eventually fall.

     

    It is almost a signature of a Sid Davis Production that the forces of authority will be associated with brutality, especially in “Gang Boy” and “Age 13,” both written and directed by Arthur Swerdloff. Andrew, in “Age 13,” has been unable to mourn the loss of his mother. In his case, his mother has died abruptly of unknown causes, though even this small detail is a mark of the sensitivity evident in these films: it is most important that the central character should suddenly experience an absent parent and a broken home, and it is not necessary to supply a scandalous version of that loss. Andrew’s behavior is ultimately explained as stemming from his difficulty in working through anger and mourning, but before the film reaches this conclusion it has presented so many examples of truly dark and quirky behavior that the explanation seems all too simple, even optimistic. Andrew seals up his father’s favorite cat, who had been competing with Andrew for his father’s affection, in the boxcar of an outgoing train and watches stonily as it departs–a scene that is not simply illustrative of Andrew’s anger but, as filmed, stands as a deviant mock burial that replays the voyage into the unknown of his lost mother. Andrew’s efforts to comprehend her loss lead him to the master bedroom where he sniffs perfume from her cosmetics and examines the room with her hand mirror, which shatters when he drops it (startled by his father’s cat). His father’s dismissive comment on the accident–“More bad luck!”–only dramatizes to Andrew his father’s ignorance of his mother’s sacred status. Scenes so disturbing lodge firmly in the viewer’s mind, as do similar kinds of images in “Gang Boy” which traces the social networks that a Chicano male learns to rely upon even as a youngster, all of them tests of endurance and courage that confer “manhood”: standing by the edge of the railroad tracks without flinching as a train bears down, high-diving into the depths of a treacherous quarry. The sheer amount of violence that the central characters experience on an everyday basis undermines even the modest message of hope that the film wants to deliver at its end.

     

    Fifties-culture fantasizing about the Teen Rebel may suggest that the films in Teenage Transgression that cite the dangers of adolescence are exclusively the product of areas of social anomie like southern California. (Various Sid Davis films credit the police departments of Santa Monica, Inglewood, Pomona, and Los Angeles for aid with the production.) But the notion of the postwar teenager as a troubled figure turns out to be a durable concept that translates into a wide variety of situations. All the films in Volume 3: The Behavior Offensive, present teens whose situations and whose problems are light-years distant from “Gang Boy” and “Age 13.” In these films, there are no gangs, unless we count the girls who invite Barbara over after school (in “Habit Patterns,” 1954) for such conversation as

     

    First Girl: I didn't even want to go to my first concert because I thought it would be too long-haired. Oh, but the music is wonderful! Now I want to go to the whole series!


    Second Girl: My mother had to drag me to the museum. They have a wonderful costume exhibit there. I got an idea for a new dress!

     

    And moms don’t vanish from these households–they stay in them all day, bedecked in tasteful jewelry, outfitted in heels ‘n’ hose, planning and cooking the six-course meal that father, sister and brother will gather over at nightfall, to make amicable small talk. These, in short, are fantastic films, positing ideals of social harmony that would be barely attainable except under the most affluent situations. The unreality of this set of films is itself a striking testimony to the ambitions of a postwar America that, in fact, fell far short of realization. Most of the films were made between 1946 and 1955, and they assume that within a short generation the upward mobility fostered by advances in technology, wide access to education, and the elimination of cultural problems thanks to the advice of sophisticated social scientists will result in a country that is astoundingly prosperous, wonderfully stable.

     

    Were these films trying to keep the lid on social change by rigidly proscribing the rules for middle-class behavior or were they promoting successful upward mobility by openly instructing a new audience in social protocols that might otherwise remain mysterious? One might ask the same question of Evelyn M. Duvall’s Facts of Life and Love for Teenagers (1950), segments from which Prelinger places alongside two films, the somewhat menacingly-titled “Are You Popular?” (1947) and “Shy Guy” (1950). Duvall addresses awkward topics–under what circumstances might a girl telephone a boy, the occasion on which a “first kiss” is appropriate, the distinction between fondling and “petting.” Her comments do indeed establish definite boundaries that curtail the range of the discussion (no category exists beyond “petting”) but her frankness also serves to demystify taboo topics.7 The films divide along similar lines. They always set out to address a specific problem. (For a sample, just consider films by Coronet alone that Prelinger cites in his selected readings under “W” : “Ways to Good Habits” (1949), “Ways to Settle Disputes” (1949), “What Makes a Good Party?” (1950) [I think the question mark in this title is absolutely essential], “What To Do on a Date” (1950) and “Why We Respect the Law” (1950). By always setting out to address a specific problem, the films give an illusively narrow range to social contact; they reduce behavior to a matter of strategy and awareness. Social problems can be solved through better guidance. The idea that there might be significantly larger problems in need of attention is never considered. Instead, the films instruct individuals in how to adjust their attitudes. What is being cured, then, is the impression that a problem exists. That a problem may have root sources seems to be unthinkable.

     

    The assumption that social problems can be cured by a strategic shift in public attitude rather than through large-scale alterations of the political, social, or economic system is probably the one theme constant to all these films, but it surfaces most consistently in the films in Volume 4: Menace and Jeopardy. As Prelinger notes, “We Drivers” (1936), produced for General Motors in 1936, with updated versions released in 1947, 1955 and 1962, places the burden for road safety directly on the shoulders of the drivers. With no consideration given to lobbying county engineers to redesign dangerous curves, we are that much further removed from thinking automobile manufacturers might shift their resources away from styling innovations to safety improvements. And the corporate underwriting of these films almost guarantees a variety of subtexts will co-exist. Prelinger suggests that one of the agendas at work in “Last Clear Chance” (1959), produced for the Union Pacific R. R. and displaying the vivid cinematography of Bert Spielvogel, is to shift the responsibility for safety at unprotected highway grade crossings from the railroad to the motorist. “Why are so many grade crossings unprotected?” Prelinger asks. “Obviously gates and signals cost a lot of money.” But a more substantial subtext in “Last Clear Chance” is even more obvious: the extraordinary hazards of travel by highway. The film is narrated by a Highway Patrolman who is recounting the terrible accidents he has witnessed, and they occur even under the most up-to-date of roadway conditions. The 4-lane open highway lends itself to “inattention,” and “another hazard of our superhighways” is the tendency of lax motorists to drift from one lane to the next. Indeed, improvements in roadway engineering turn out to have increased the dangers of driving: “Those narrow two-lane country roads that used to be so peaceful are now several lanes of high-speed traffic.” To be sure, the overt message works to shift responsibility to the operators of vehicles (“everything in the world of transportation has improved,” the patrolman growls, “–everything except the drivers”), but surely the covert message–rendered about as penetratingly as a text can be and still remain subliminal–is that if one must travel the best way to do it is by train. After all, one reason why grade crossings pose hazards is they are traversed by high-speed trains delivering people rapidly (and without danger) from one spot to another. Spielvogel’s eye for a sharp design cannot entirely account for why most of the trains shown are passenger-and-mail combinations in the distinctive yellow colors of the Union Pacific.

     

    Subliminal messages can easily nestle in these films about safety because the films themselves are so distracting. Unlike other sponsored films, these always have a series of climactic moments in which danger strikes and violence explodes across the scene. Prelinger is typically insightful when he points out that our anticipation of these dramatic pay-offs inevitably shift attention from the safety habits we are supposed to be internalizing. What we may internalize instead is that the world is a place of endless dangers–the very point Thomas Hine developed in his New York Times book review of Our Secret Century, entitled “Disaster Is Imminent, So Plan Ahead.”8 The conservative mind-set that dominated the early and mid-1950s was deeply indebted to a similar conviction, but these “menace and jeopardy” films also work against their own agenda of caution by cultivating an appetite for explosive moments. One of the films that seems to be especially allied with the devil’s party is the deliciously bizarre, almost voluptuous “Time Out for Trouble” (1961), produced through the ingenuity of the University of Oklahoma General Services Extension Division. The film purports to deliver an important 3-step message that will help us avoid accidents, viz.: “Face Your Feelings,” “Beware of Boredom” and “Watch for Danger.” But these rubrics are so hopelessly bland that their vast parameters free the filmmakers to concoct any number of peculiar episodes to illustrate them. In addition, it is never clear just what the specific danger is that is under scrutiny. One episode involves the courting and marriage of Jeff and Martha, which begins with the camera lasciviously eyeing from the waist down the provocative strut of a tight-skirted female, a shot that melts into a close-up of the upper half of a female torso swiveling to display breasts enclosed in a form-fitting sweater–scenes that will be used to explain why Jeff sits alone in a tavern, drinking one of many whiskies. Jeff is by himself, we are told, because his relationship with Martha was based only on physical attraction. (And we can easily see how this might have happened.) After the two of them were married, a female narrator purrs in a disarmingly throaty voice, “only then Jeff found out there was just one thing wrong with Martha: she didn’t have anything in that pretty head of hers but buckwheat batter.” So Jeff, apparently bored by mere erotics, compensated by having more than one too many at his local, until that fatal night when, as the filmmakers show, he staggered outside to walk in front of an oncoming car. He will live, though crippled, and ironically even more dependent on Martha’s buckwheat batter personality. The question that remains, though, is what danger exactly is this episode a warning against? Excessive drinking, one might think, or possibly even jaywalking. But so many dangers surround this brief episode that the mind boggles. What about the danger of drunken driving (would Jeff have survived once he started driving under the influence)? And of course there is the danger of the femme fatale: isn’t Martha indirectly culpable, by being only an attractive woman? Or is that our schools have failed by letting some students fall into the role of bimbo? Once we begin to look for dangers, the horizon recedes. The film itself, however, is prepared to state directly why Jeff was maimed: it was due to his boredom, to extensive boredom (the second, we now recall, in that list of alliterated warnings: beware of boredom). Perhaps the hidden agenda in “Time Out for Trouble” is that films themselves should strive to be entertaining or at least startling enough to ward off boredom. This gives new life to the title, which no longer functions as a shorthand piece of advice but denominates a site in which the filmmakers themselves take time out in order to play around with trouble. This wildly unfocused film (it is also narrated at times by a talking clock with vicious designs on humans), with organ music improvised by one Baird Jones in a vernacular manner reminiscent of a score for a Fellini movie, remains for me a high point in sheer loopiness and a superb example of how a text that sets out to be restrictive can unwittingly sanction permissive (and even subversive) behavior.

     

    III.

     

    The University of Oklahoma film is about as far from a Jam Handy Production as one can get, even as it moves in a direction very different from that of Willard Van Dyke or even Sid Davis. Yet it is Jam Handy whose influence seems most pervasive in the other two volumes. This should not be surprising, given the commercial nature of this enterprise. Handy always followed the money, producing everything from one-minute infomercials in the 1930s for Singer Sewing Machines (in the 1938 “Three Smart Daughters” [in Ephemeral Films], the social life of three beauteous teens is saved when they are directed to a Singer Sewing Center where they can hand-craft elegant dresses for an upcoming party) to thirty-minute epics that sought in the 1950s to associate the future of America with the fortunes of Chevrolet. Of course the Jam Handy film was by definition bound to be elaborate. Typically, it always wore a double disguise: it was crafted to imitate the look of the moment, to appear as if it was a production undertaken simply to entertain its audience, precisely to mask the fact that it was film with a sponsor. The extent to which “American Harvest” (1951)–one of the Jam Handy films in Volume 6: The Uncharted Landscape–is an advertisement for General Motors is by no means evident. It appears to set out to celebrate the abundance of American life at mid-century. Only about halfway through its thirty minute run does it settle on the concept that the nation is bound together by “air-lanes” and steel rails and highways, all of which are also the avenues through which corporations guarantee the distribution of abundance. By film’s end, all that “America” represents to the film’s audience is conflated with the automobile, represented here by the Chevrolet. Indeed, in a concluding movement, it seems that, in some peculiar way, America is actually brought to us by Chevrolet. As the melody of “See the USA in a Chevrolet” plays softly, the camera tracks across a variety of landscapes–a cliff-side view of the ocean, Independence Hall in Philadelphia, masses of people walking quietly toward a looming factory–and a voice-over (the astonishingly oily voice of John Forsythe) declares:

     

    And so it is that all of us in interdependence live independently on wheels. And all this far-reaching interdependence is the great secret of why it is possible to put America's automobiles within the reach of so many people. And all America, all its rockbound beauty, all its pleasant vistas, all its historic shrines, and all its ways of living, all its sports and recreations, all its scenic grandeur, along all its far-flung highways, within the reach of all.

     

    The referent of “its” begins to get a bit fuzzy as this unending no-verb sentence rolls onward. “It” is America, but it also lends itself to the automobile (“its far-flung highways”) and the automobile is always Chevrolet–as the very air of the landscape itself testifies, with its strings that sigh out the Chevrolet theme song.

     

    As the films in The Uncharted Landscape indicate, big business found it easy to regard the whole of the country as a blank slate upon which corporations could inscribe their own standards. Few of the productions are as lavishly narrativized as Greyhound’s Freedom Highway (1957), in which a transcontinental bus becomes a stage for a drama that links patriotism and marriage in parallel plots. Riders who happen to be sharing a coast-to- coast journey, the Attractive Babe and the Old Curmudgeon, will find their lives changed. The Attractive Babe (a young Angie Dickinson) will find true love: traveling back to her New York fiancé, she will coincidentally meet on the bus a Handsome Football Player who is just plain more virile than her fiancé (we are sure of this because her fiancé’s name is Waldo). And the Old Curmudgeon will find his faith in his country restored: traveling to Washington with bitterness in his heart, to receive the Congressional Medal of Honor awarded posthumously to his son, he will meet on the bus a Mysterious Stranger who will open his eyes to the need to sacrifice the lives of young men for the country to continue. These two narratives intertwine. At issue is no less than the continuation of the human race in America. For the contest over the body of the Attractive Babe is (as Jam Handy’s scriptwriters might say) “in interdependence” with a contest for the body of America. Virility triumphs in both instances, restoring a balance that had been perceived to be threatened: as the Attractive Babe enters the protecting orbit of the Football Player (and rescued from the effeminate Waldo), so America is saved by its military conquests (and protected from the encroachments of alien enemies). As the bus travels across country and the Football Player makes his pitch for the Attractive Babe, so the history of America is recapitulated, thanks to an Inquisitive Young Boy, whose questions always provoke a response from various passengers, remarkably knowledgeable about American history from a military perspective. (“Have you ever heard of the Alamo, boy?” inquires the latest passenger, Country-and-Western Star Tex Ritter as he reaches for his guitar.) But then American history in this film is always already military history–the Alamo, the Battle of New Orleans, the Battle of Gettysburg. These battles, in fact, stand for the history of America, or more accurately, they signify its scarred yet beloved body. The story of liberty is a story of armed aggression. The Mysterious Stranger who directs the Old Curmudgeon to Gettysburg (and who allows the filmmakers to recall the spirit of sacrifice that Lincoln consolidated in the Gettysburg Address) and thus transforms the Old Curmudgeon into the Solid Patriot–that Stranger turns out to be a ghost: the ghost of the Unknown Soldier, no less (Tex Ritter says to him as they disembark at one bus stop: “Now I know where I’ve seen you! Weren’t you in my old outfit, the Second Division?”). This ghost is presumably driven to walk the land (or nowadays, ride the bus) when unpatriotic sentiments begin to flow. “America” exists as a great battlefield, over which we can now travel in comfort and safety, thanks to sacrifices like that of the Old Curmudgeon’s son. Their deaths allow America to continue, always ready to fight the next necessary battle (in which some day no doubt the Inquisitive Young Boy may have a chance to become a player).

     

    It would be difficult to determine at what point to be most offended by “Freedom Highway,” though the profound anti-intellectualism that underwrites every moment in the film would be a fine place to start. (When Waldo meets his fiancée at the New York bus terminal, he greets her with words whose bookish vocabulary paint him as a man who reads: “Welcome, thrice welcome! I trust you feel completely rejuvenated!”–though Angie is most offended, it turns out, when he plants a very wet smooch on her kisser: or is she just flabbergasted at the blatant pretense of a man so effeminate?) Prelinger has arranged a particularly eloquent counter-response to these corporate expropriations of the territory of America by concluding The Uncharted Landscape with an unusual example of “home movies”–brief clips of life on Main Street in Britten, South Dakota, as filmed in 1937 and 1938 by the owner of the town’s movie house, Ivan Besse, who then screened them as a kind of local newsreel. Besse’s films portray Main Street as a space where ideology is in recess, the very opposite of the interlocking and coercive narratives produced for Greyhound and Chevrolet. Santa’s arrival in a pickup truck becomes an occasion for the whole town to turn out, even though closeups of “Santa” reveal just how casually he had been dressed for the part. One might surmise that simple poverty, or worse yet, lack of basic imagination, could explain the rather flimsy attempt at disguise. But a better explanation suggests the disguising was deliberately sketchy. Surely everyone in Britton over age twelve knew who would be playing “Santa” that year–it would have been a topic of discussion throughout the town. Besse’s film immediately instructs us in the intricacy of an everyday life in which rituals have been localized, in which a community delights in the inflections its members bring to their various roles. By contrast, the rigidly “interdependent” narratives that regulate every technicolor moment in “Freedom Highway” reveal a desire for control and order that verges on the terrifying.

     

    Exactly as this sixth volume of films demonstrate that the American landscape, or the concept of “America,” was palpably reconfigured by corporate interests seeking to impose their designs upon it, so the films in Volume 1: The Rainbow Is Yours reveal the female body to be under a similar siege. Of course no filmmaker ever went broke (to paraphrase P. T. Barnum) by playing fast-and-loose with the female body. These films offer no exception to that dictum. Indeed, The Rainbow Is Yours is a veritable anthology of instances in which the female body is strategically repositioned to glamorize and eroticize objects to which it is supposed to be adjacent, beginning with the opening film, an excerpt from Jam Handy’s “Looking Ahead Through Röhm & Haas Plexiglass” (1947). Prelinger has chosen to reproduce just the technicolor portion of a longer film, but the panes of brightly colored plexiglass that no doubt guided the transition from black-and-white also invite us to peer voyeuristically through colored transparencies that effect ingress to a young lady’s boudoir. Even more dramatically, the young lady herself is in that boudoir–and deeply within it, lounging on a bed (reading a book, lonely thing), for we must peer past a plexiglass door to behold her. In one sense, she is dressed modestly, in a floor-length robe that is worn, open and belted, over a floor-length peignoir. In another sense, however, her dress spectacularly triggers voyeurism: the peignoir is orange-red, the robe is the color of tanned flesh, and the robe is belted open to present a frontal zone of vivid color that defines the body space from below the neck to the feet. The young lady detaches herself from her bed ‘n’ book, and as a voice-over declaims the virtues of plexiglass, wanders intriguingly from one area in her boudoir to the next, from her shower stall to her dressing table, all the while fondling plexiglass doors, shelves and drawers. She is willing, it seems, to reveal her inmost cosmetic secrets (or perhaps it is the transparency of plexiglass, so effortlessly framing these metonyms for her body, that put her in the mood for exposure). Seated at her dressing table, she opens drawer after drawer as the narrator murmurs approvingly: “on one side the pedestal swings open to reveal plexiglass trays for cosmetics, hose and lingerie.” Plexiglass not just refines intimate space but frames it so it becomes an arena for evocative display. Who would object to such gentle penetrations? This selective accessibility to private areas suggests an elaborate manipulation of sexual desire–a point of interest not only to the audience of tradesmen and contractors but, arguably, to the postwar woman as well.

     

    Not all the films are willing to go quite this far in eroticizing a product (though the others lack the advantage of a product depending directly upon sight), but this group of films–most are from the mid- or late 1950s–is heavily committed to glamorization, and their sense of glamour takes its cues from a smarmy eroticization of the female body. In Jam Handy’s “American Look” (1957), something of a sequel to “American Harvest” in The Uncharted Landscape, the insuperably vacuous Jam Handy rhetoric begins its clog-and-choke procedure once again (“By the way things look as well as the way they perform, our homes acquire new grace, new glamour, new accommodations, expressing not only the American love of beauty but also the basic freedom of the American people which is the freedom of individual choice”) but before the numerous anvils it sets out to juggle while saluting the flag and simultaneously whistling “The Stars and Stripes Forever” cause it to collapse under its own weight, it gestures fleetingly toward linking the streamlined quality of well-designed products with adjectives associated with the performance of the female body: “In form, proportion, rhythm and variety, the stylists leave their own unmistakeable marks on everyday conveniences, in flowing lines and graceful shapes which we as Americans may enjoy”; “[modern packaging] brings festivity to the marketplace–tempting, hinting, and revealing.”9 When MPO Productions, working for General Motors, staged a lavish musical to introduce the 1957 automobile models in “Design for Dreaming,” it arranged a young lady to appear alongside each new car as it appeared, allowing the announcer to introduce not only “the Eldorado Town and Country Cadillac” but also to add “ensemble by Christian Dior–of Paris.” In one sense, of course, GM was merely underscoring the resemblance between its line of products and haute couture fashion; in another sense, GM was suggesting everything from the fantasy that each new car somehow included its own lithe paramour to the notion that if a man couldn’t easily trade in his old wife… (The wife, to be sure, could fantasize quite differently, as in all these films, associating with a product whose glamour would never threaten but only enhance her own attraction.)

     

    Prelinger demonstrates how prevalent such concepts were when he juxtaposes an elegantly licentious four-minute dance routine excerpted from “Frigidaire Finale” (1957) with ads from 1957 and 1958 promoting something called “The Sheer Look.” “Frigidaire Finale” is at once the most erotic and the wittiest of these glamor pix, choreographed with a boy-seduces-girl/girl-seduces-boy narrative that integrates presentations of stoves, washer-and-dryers, and refrigerators. At first, boy and girl simply dance about appliances, opening oven doors, picking up sample pots, and generally framing the appliances with their own graceful movements. That their role could be something more is brought into the foreground in a sequence that centers on a single dark-hued refrigerator. (All the rest of the appliances had been white.) This curious dark interloper seems to signal or permit transgression, for the girl, instead of taking her usual place on the opposite side of the appliance, now jumps to its top and perches there, stumping her companion who cannot comprehend where she has gone. As he opens the refrigerator’s upper door and then its lower door, looking in as if to expect her to be inside, this redirection of his gaze from her to the appliance comes to seem a hint or clue he is offering to the audience as he models an act of transference. After all, she is not invisible to us but perched fetchingly (yet outrageously, transgressively) on top of the refrigerator, barely able to contain her vivacious glee, leaning her front over its front, eagerly dangling her legs along its side, swirling her body provocatively–all the time in a kind of oneness with the appliance. (The appliance may even be seen as eliciting her sexual glamour; at the very least, it is that which she transforms into an occasion for flirtatious play.) The more deeply he looks into the refrigerator cabinet, the more visible a presence she becomes to us. When he finally spots her, the reunion is joyous: a flirtation is definitely underway.

     

    That this new flirtation is inseparable from the refrigerator is underscored in a follow-up scene in which she opens the door of the first in a series of refrigerators, then rushes behind it to the next, leaving her male companion to search for her by closing the door, at which point she has already stationed herself by the second refrigerator, whose door she now opens and so forth. This hot pursuit ends with her bestowing a peck-like kiss on his lips. This then escalates into even more direct foreplay that boldly centers on further exposure and display of the refrigerator. Now the girl pauses to run her hand down the length of a refrigerator door in a sweeping gesture that seems to enflame the lad who cannot help but rush toward her, arms wide open. She rebuffs him pertly, by detaching a tray from a compartment in the door and handing it to him and dancing off. Left holding that tray, his shoulders sink as if under a burden and he flips over the contents–spilling about four dozen eggs. But as the eggs fall, he looks briefly into the camera, with the flash of a satisfied smile.10. A conquest has been made. The facade has been deeply penetrated an exchange has occurred, and he has spilled (on?) the eggs. In final frames, the dancers join together, her legs happily twirling in a vivid display of new-found energy.

     

    Only in a Jam Handy production, I suppose, would we get a money shot that is configured through the contents of a refrigerator. But the idea of equating the female body with a refrigerator cabinet is paralleled in Frigidaire’s own “Sheer Look” campaign of 1957, whose visual signature of a woman holding her arms (both encased in elegant shoulder-length evening gloves) up at a 90-degree angle was rendered so that the white space below her, where her body actually was, could be equated with the white space of the refrigerator. The glamour that Frigidaire associated with the refrigerator, by placing a model in evening dress in each of its ads, depended on transferring the appreciative gaze ordinarily directed toward the impeccably-dressed woman to the refrigerator cabinet. To open a refrigerator door, then, becomes as charged a moment as an act of undressing. But everything about “The Sheer Look” crackles with sexual innuendo. Why is the woman looking at us? Why is her face not visible? Her frank stare encourages us to come back with a gaze that is equally frank. Her face need not be visible because (a) we can fantasize about its particulars and (b) a face that is absent displaces attention to hair, eyes, and glove-encased arms-and-hands: all visual centers that signal the erotic.

     

    For me, it is was with “Frigidaire Finale” that one of Prelinger’s ephemeral films attained a point of genuine sublimity. Here is a text that appears now to be both elaborately orchestrated and ridiculously crude, elegantly sophisticated and hopelessly vulgar, intricately convoluted and transparently clear. Who would have imagined that there could be so inspired a blend of commodity and sexual fetish? Prelinger has provided us with documents that offer epiphanic glimpses into the heart, soul, and pocketbook of America in the middle third of the twentieth century.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Only the first three of the 2-disc sets of Our Secret Century were available when research for this review began. Two more 2-disc sets have since been issued: Volume 7: Gender Role Call (films that instruct in gender distinctions) with Volume 8: Tireless Marketers (the evolution of the brief commercial from movie theater bills to TV); Volume 9: Busy Bodies (educational films about sex) with Volume 10: Make Mine Freedom (patriotic films). The final two collections, Volume 11: Nuts and Bolts (films about high-tech machinery) and Volume 12: Free to Obey, (extreme versions of social control) have been announced.

     

    2. See Richard Gehr, “Rick Prelinger’s Ephemeral Films” at http://www.levity.com/rubric/prelinger.htm.

     

    3. Here as elsewhere Prelinger’s supporting data is exemplary. As added material, he offers not just an account of the 1936-1937 sit-down strikes from the 1941 WPA history of Michigan but an excerpt from Mary Heaton Vorses’s Labor’s New Millions, a 1938 report from a left-wing perspective. He also includes an excerpt from a worker testifying before the 1937 Senate commission led by Robert LaFollette, whose charge was to investigate corporate violations of free speech and the rights of labor. That in turn contrasts with the prize-winning essay in a 1948 General Motors competition, “Why I Like My Job,” an explanation by 67-year-old Calvin H. Dunlap of the virtues of being loyal to the corporation.

     

    4. Van Dyke went on to have a distinguished career as a conscientious producer of documentary and informational films that were supported by commercial sponsors, according to a 1960 article by Ralph Caplan in Industrial Design that Prelinger bundles with the first volume. According to Caplan, Van Dyke preferred to work as independently from his sponsors as possible, aiming to retain some of the integry of the explanatory documentary. In one example, a film devised in collaboration with poet Norman Rosten–a writer with strong left-wing connections to the 1930s whose The Big Road (1946) was an epic poem documenting the importance of the roadway in western European history from its inception to the apogee of the recently-completed Alcan (Alaska-Canada) Highway of 1942–for an unnamed manufacturer of communications was eventually modified to its detriment by the sponsor who added a three-minute prologue. In a second more triumphant example, Van Dyke produced “Skyscraper” under the sponsorship of Reynolds Aluminum, Bethlehem Steel, Westinghouse Elevators and York Air Conditioning; the film, which depicted the construction of a New York skyscraper, went on to win two first prizes at the Venice Film Festival, an award of merit from the Edinburgh Film Festival, and first prize for short subjects at the San Francisco Film Festival. Van Dyke’s independent operation, on a scale far smaller than Jam Handy’s 500-plus (in 1960) employees, became a successful alternate to large-scale producers who (in the case of Handy) were essentially the extensions of their influential corporate sponsors.

     

    5. Obtaining Blitzstein’s services for Valley Town was an impressive coup: he was fresh from the Broadway triumph of The Cradle Will Rock (1937) and hard at work on No For an Answer (1941 ). It was a project, of course, for which he was eminently suited. The left-wing opera Cradle was set in “Steeltown, U.S.A.” And the musical form he was developing for the center of No For an Answer was the recitative. The song that the young housewife recites and sings in Valley Town, then, is something like a heretofore missing link between the operatic mixes in Cradle and the more vernacular-oriented recitatives in Answer. In an interview with James Blue in 1973 (that Prelinger has included in his disk), Van Dyke recalled the recitative as the high point of the film, the portion that he always listened to with the greatest emotion. (Still, Van Dyke may misremember how his alliance with Blitzstein occurred. He recalls that it was his admiration of Blitzstein’s work on No For an Answer that compelled Van Dyke to ask Blitzstein to contribute to Valley Town. But Valley Town, which premiered in May 1940, was completed before No For an Answer, which premiered in January 1941.) A condensed discussion of Blitzstein’s music in the 1930s is in Michael Denning, The Cultural Front (New York: Verso) 285-295.

     

    6. “It was remarkable,” Kerouac writes in On the Road (1957), “how Dean could go mad and then suddenly continue with his soul–which I think is wrapped up in a fast car, a coast to reach, and a woman at the end of the road–calmly and sanely, as though nothing had happened” (qtd. in The Portable Beat Reader, ed. Ann Charters [New York: Viking, 1992] 18).

     

    7. A more accurate title for Duvall’s book might have been Facts of Life and Love for Teenage Girls. In addressing the problem of how to sustain a boy-girl conversation on a date, Duvall’s solution is for one of the member s to play the role of an interlocutor:

     

    He: It's a great night, isn't it?
    She: Wonderful. Did you ever see such a moon?
    He: Isn't that what they call a Harvest Moon, or is it the Hunters' Moon?
    She: Hunters' Moon? That sounds interesting. Do you hunt?

     

    Though both boy and girl interrogate, Duvall’s comment suggests she conceives the audience for her advice to be primarily female: “There you are from the weather to his pet hobby in four little steps, simply by adding a question to every answer.” A “conversation” on a date, Duvall seems to be suggesting, is not intended to be a “dialogue.”

     

    8. See www.nytimes.com/library/cyber/week/0915book-century.htm for the September 15, 1996, review.

     

    9. An anecdote that Handy recalls in his 1961 TV interview suggests that distracting clothing was perhaps improper, at least between men, though close friends were just barely able to touch upon the subject. He recalls one of the incidents which taught him to dress with an appropriate modesty when speaking with upper-level executives: “‘Jam’–I was on a first-name acquaintance with him (well, I think I may say it was none other than Tom Watson, Jr., of IBM)–he said: ‘Jam, would you mind starting all over again? I have been so interested in that beautiful tie that you’re wearing that I haven’t heard a word you said.’” It is not exactly clear whether the full import of this anecdote can be quickly exhausted; at its basis it is attesting that image distracts from meaning, that the “beautiful tie” overwhelms actual discourse.

     

    10. Or at least I think he appears to wear a satisfied smile. The quality of reproduction is such that one cannot be sure. And here is perhaps the place to mention that some viewers of films on CD-ROM are dismayed by the look of films operating under the QuickTime program. Hine for one complained of the indistinct images and said he’d “much rather be watching these on a videocassette recorder, with the comments and supporting documents in a book.” I can’t agree. The disadvantage of the QuickTime program is that images do seem to be jerky, their tonal values broken into Seurat-like pointillistic ensembles. But the advantage is the arrangement of the screen allows one to freeze a film in mid-frame, back up or move ahead a set of frames at a time, and easily replay narrative; by dragging a bar, it is possible to fast forward or fast backward. These positives outweigh the negatives, for me. Prelinger distinguishes between the movie on CD-ROM and the movie in a theater this way: “It’s not an immersive experience like going to a theater and being wowed by a powerful movie. But these are not immersive movies. You know, immersive means evasive, and QuickTime allows you as an individual, maybe with one other person, to look not at a movie, but at a picture or rendering of a movie. It’s much easier to look at a movie critically on your computer, to see it as a document with a context” (qtd. in Richard Gehr, “Rick Prelinger’s Ephemeral Films,” an interview dated April 24, 1995).

     

  • Digital Archives and Sibylline Fragments: The Tempest and the End of Books

    Peter Donaldson

    Department of Literature
    Massachusetts Institute of Technology
    psdlit@mit.edu

    Introduction

     

    In these pages I trace how Peter Greenaway’s film Prospero’s Books reads The Tempest anachronistically, as a play about the end of books and the advent of electronic forms. Greenaway finds The Tempest relevant to this shift because, as he puts it, we are living in the early years of “the second Gutenberg Revolution,”1 in which the ambitions of the Renaissance magus with his magic books are being realized, in part, through digital technologies.

     

    Prospero’s Books is an anticipatory or proleptic allegory of the digital future, figuring destruction of libraries and their rebirth as “magically” enhanced electronic books. It is set in the past, and extrapolates from the several passages in the play in which Prospero’s books are mentioned the story of twenty four wonderworking books through which Prospero achieves his magic; yet, by calling attention to the digital special effects by which these books have been created on screen–digital painting and photoprocessing applications, computer animation, multiple screen overlays–Greenaway suggests that the magically enhanced codex volume is as much a part of our future as our past.

     

    And perhaps that is so: the “expanded book” CD-ROM is one form that moves in this direction (though it is not a book), experiments with ink that reconfigures itself in response to computer instruction, and with “hot” links embedded in ink on paper may move us futher in the direction of such a future, retaining something like the form of the book but amplifying its powers.

     

    Like Prospero’s Books, this essay itself exists in a transitional form (networked hypertext with linked images and brief video citations), and like Prospero’s Books it imagines future forms and depends on them. It is relatively linear in its form and bounded in its contours, presenting a small number of textual and visual citations. Yet it asks its readers to imagine that they are exploring a path, one particular path, through an immense networked digital archive.

     

    Such an archive would include the complete film Prospero’s Books–as well as all other Shakespearean film adaptations, linked to relevant lines of text; which would include all extant copies and page fragments of the Folio text of The Tempest, and an extensive library of commentary; which would be linked as well to extensive collections of anatomical illustrations from the Renaissance forward, and to texts and images that illustrate the motif of the “end of the book” in the late twentieth century.

     

    With such an archive in place,2 the role of the critic or interpreter would be at least a double one. One task would be to create a bounded exploratory hypertext, a “collection within a collection,” by specifying a number of linked resources relevant to the subject. The other task would be the marking of a path through that mini-archive, by choosing and commenting upon examples, as I do here. In such an environment, one could follow my path or break off to explore one of the text and image collections of which it is contructed. To borrow, at third hand, a phrase of Wittgenstein’s, interpetive hypertext would allow for “travel over a wide field of thought, criss-cross in every direction.”3

     

    An essay within a digital archive–such a form might expand the resources that can serve as context for an interpretation, extend them to include several media, and create marked and unmarked paths to traverse. Such a form might also foster a documentary tendency, a style of interpretation in which the critic’s work always includes comprehensive access to the work discussed, to its sources, and to digital records–text, film, image–of the historical and material evidence relevant to the work under discussion. These digital documents might illustrate the rich and complex traditions from which an artist like Peter Greenaway (whose films are themselves encyclopedic and archival) draws his material. But their function would not be limited to illustration. The hypertextual and documentary aspects of such an essay would, perhaps, converge insofar as documents–virtual or material–always tell their own stories, or incite us to tell stories about them; encourage us, that is, to follow paths other than those plotted by artist or critic. Documents also ask us to ponder, if never fully to answer, the impossible yet sometimes urgent question of the relation between our stories and what is real.

     

    · · · Begin End of Books · · ·

     

    Section Notes

     

    1. Peter Greenaway, Prospero’s Books (New York: Four Walls Eight Windows, 1991) 28.

     

    2. Such an archive now exists in part, in the Chadwyck-Healey Full Text Database, in the Arden Texts and Sources CDROM, in the University of Pennsylvania’s posting of Folio and Quarto facsimiles on the Web, in Michael Best’s plans for Internet editions, in the work of the Shakespeare Database group in Munster, and in the work of my group on the MIT/Folger Shakespeare Electronic Archive.

     

    3. Gunnar Liestøl, “Wittgenstein, Genette, and the Reader’s Narrative in Hypertext” p. 87 in Hyper/Text/Theory, ed. George Landow (Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins UP, 1994) 87-120, citing Ludwig Wittgenstein, Philosophical Investigations (London: Blackwell, 1953) vii.

     

  • Singin’ in the Rain: A Hypertextual Reading

    Adrian Miles

    Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology
    amiles@rmit.edu.au

     

    This work presents a hypertextual reading of a key sequence, the song-and-dance number “You Were Meant for Me,” from Kelly and Donen’s 1956 musical Singin’ in the Rain. The sequence is read as characteristic of the film’s general semiotic principles, which combine several levels of seduction to establish an aesthetic claim for a properly musical cinema.This reading represents an experiment or heuristic exercise meant to discover possibilities for interpretation (not just of film but of any complex text) in multi-linear, hypermedia presentation. Forced into an artificially singular sequence, the components of this reading might seem elliptical and repetitive; they are designed to be explored from various perspectives and in differing combinations. Though it has an argument and an interpretive agenda, this is not so much an essay as a text in the deepest sense: a fabric of ideas deeply and multiply connected.There is of course always more than one way to read a hypertext. All the components of this text are listed in the table at right. You could begin with the numbered pages at the top of this list, begin instead with the collected presentation of the sequence, or choose some other point of entry. (You may want to bookmark this index page for later reference.) On the component pages you will find a large number of textual links representing various lines of connection and development.

     

    This hypertext incorporates film extracts in the form of QuickTime movies. To view these extracts you must have QuickTime installed on your computer, and the QuickTime plug-in installed in your Web browser. If you do not have the plug-in installed, the movie extracts will have to be downloaded to your machine and played using a helper application.

     

    If you have both the plug-in and the QuickTime system resources in place, the clips will play within the browser window. The clips are designed to need an 8Kb stream (easily supported by most modems). This will provide 1 frame per second and sound.

     

    Extract pages also include a download link to a more economical version of the same material, sampled at 5 frames per second for faster transfer. These files require an appropriate helper application for QuickTime and will play in a separate window.

     

    Many pages are illustrated with images from the film. Each in-line illustration is linked to a larger version of the same image.

     

    It is recommended that you use Netscape or Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.x or later. QuickTime is available for Macintosh and Windows from the Apple QuickTime Web site.

    Component Files

     

  • The Madness of Images and Thinking Cinema

    William D. Routt

    La Trobe University
    w.routt@latrobe.edu.au

     

    Abstract: This article attempts a preliminary understanding of the experience–or sensation–of place evoked in the cinema, based on some of the earliest films and their spectators. It exposits certain ideas contained in Vachel Lindsay’s The Art of the Moving Picture and finds a delirious resemblance between these ideas and some in Gilles Deleuze’s two Cinema books. Perhaps the piece suggests that madness is a property of the sensation of place in the cinema. Animated GIF files, maddening their sources, offer a crude supplementary patchwork commentary.–wdr

     

     


    Proceed to Hypertext…
     

     

  • Casablanca’s Régime: The Shifting Aesthetics of Political Technologies (1907-1943)

    Jorge Otero-Pailos

    School of Architecture
    Polytechnic University of Puerto Rico
    jotero@mit.mit.edu

     

    …the concept of reality is always the first victim of war.

     

    –Paul Virilio, paraphrasing Kipling (War and Cinema 33)

     

    Vacillating Realities

     

    At the corner of the bar a man in a white suit, probably an American business traveler, asks for more coffee and looks intently at a young professional woman who, seated across the room, is slowly sipping a Martini. The bartender notices his stare and quietly smiles while drying off the sparkling glassware. The room is dimly light by wall sconces that cast a pale glow over posters of Bogart and Bergman in Casablanca. “As Time Goes By” is playing almost imperceptibly in the PA system. Five clocks on the wall mark the time in L.A., New York, Paris, Moscow, and Tokyo. He could be anywhere in the world. The napkin under his drink has a familiar logo that reads “Rick’s Café,” and through the front door he can see the Hotel receptionist. The man finishes his coffee, walks slowly to the front door of the Hotel, and exits. He pauses for a moment to light a cigarette and to look around. An immense boulevard lies before the building dividing a row of modern structures from an old masonry city wall. “Is this really Casablanca? It looks nothing like the movie,” he murmurs. It is a typical scene inside Casablanca’s Hyatt Hotel.

     

    Figure 1: Rick’s Café (postcard).

    Figure 2: Hyatt in Casablanca (photo by author).

     

    Hyatt’s version of Rick’s Cafe is the only place in Casablanca where one can find a designed and direct reference in the real to the imaginary scenes of the Film. And yet the city owes much of its international fame to the Hollywood movie. Most people can picture Casablanca, although they might have never been there, as a city of tight sinuous streets, claustrophobic markets, parrot vendors, hookah pipes, picturesque locals, and filmic foreigners. What is shocking when we set foot on the real streets of Casablanca is that they bear no resemblance whatsoever to the movie: they are ample boulevards lined with modern low rise structures and harboring a bustling metropolitan life. Inside the old Casbah walls there are no wooden trellises overhead, signs like those outside of the “Blue Parrot Club” have been replaced by advertisements for Levis, and the French administrative buildings–which are crucial in the spatialization of the old city in the film into the Café-Police Headquarters-Airport triangle–are nowhere in sight–they are, as it turns out, outside the Casbah in the “modern” city.

     

    Arriving in Casablanca as a Western traveler/movie fan, one feels strangely betrayed by the city’s reality. The movie had placed an emphasis on its own adherence to reality with the authority, and transparent objectivity, implied by the war documentary style of its introductory scenes, where the very real struggle of European refugees in World War II is superimposed on a map of Northern Africa and views of the city.

     

    Figure 3: Still from Casablanca.

     

    To buttress this blurring effect, the film was released in New York on Thanksgiving Day 1942, just eighteen days after the Allies landed in Casablanca, in an obvious attempt to benefit from the international attention the city was receiving. The army’s use of “Rick’s Place” as a pseudonym for Casablanca throughout the war just goes to prove the film’s effectiveness at conflating the imaginary and the real. In fact, ever since the premiere of the motion picture, the virtual and the real cities of Casablanca have coupled in the collective imaginary of the West. It is therefore understandable that, when confronted with a city that looks and feels nothing like what we might have been led to expect by the movie, we experience in Casablanca a strange perversion of the horror vacui which, according to Umberto Eco, emerges when “the ‘completely real’ becomes identified with the ‘completely fake,’” and “absolute unreality is offered as real presence” (7). A similar feeling would pervade us if, arriving in Paris, we all of a sudden realized the Tour Eiffeldid not exist, outside of post cards and films, and that in its place was just a wonderful six-lane highway.

     

    One could speculate about the reasons why Director Michael Curtiz might have chosen to construct the city out of revamped props of Warner Brothers’ 1942 version of The Desert Song, and shoot in the company’s Burbank Studios rather than on location. First there was the economic factor. Moving the crew to Casablanca was certainly more expensive than working in California. Second, the world was at war, and after Pearl Harbor it was clear that US interests were not safe abroad. Traveling to Morocco could mean endangering the crew. Can the significant gap between the filmic and real cities be the result of these unfortunate logistic imperatives? But what about all the other “flaws” of the film; can they be attributed to the same cause? Certainly not. Logistics had nothing to do in the wrongful depiction of uniformed Germans in Casablanca. Studio writers knew that the German Army did not set foot in Casablanca during World War II, just as they knew that such things as Letters of Transit signed by Général Charles de Gaulle did not exist, and that neither American nor French troops entered Berlin in 1918 (Robertson 79). Another exterior pressure was driving writers and producers to exaggerate and distort the real, one that demanded political effectiveness over historical accuracy: the war. And, in the name of this effort, reality would have to be betrayed by virtuality, and turned into ideology.

     

    It is widely known that Casablanca was a war film aimed at sedating the general American opposition to US involvement in World War II. If a number of historical flaws are consciously present, it is because they were deemed necessary in order to

     

    Figure 4: The fighting French march
    outside of New York’s Hollywood
    theater, 1942 (from Miller, Casablanca:
    As Time Goes By–50th Aniversary
    Commemorative.

     

    accomplish this objective. By depicting fictitious Germans, Americans, Frenchmen, and Resistance leaders in simple exchanges, and encouraging the spectator to synecdochally associate each character and his/her actions with his/her nation and its international policies, the film effectively transfigured a complex international political situation into an easily understandable set of social relationships. The successful resolution of the movie’s crisis thanks to an American expatriate’s involvement in the affairs of a number of Europeans, and his ability to retain his autonomy and freedom in the end, were narrative mechanisms geared to convince American audiences that it was possible for them to fight in the war and maintain the unencumbered relation to Europe that had stood as the basis of their identity and freedom. In re-presenting Casablanca, the film industry rendered the all too gray world of international politics in vivid chiaroscuro, dividing, beyond reasonable doubt, the light from the dark, the good from the bad, radically affecting the audience’s perception of the real, and consciously attempting to sway public opinion towards a homogeneous support of the war. It is difficult to assess the exact extent to which Casablancaalone influenced the American body politic in deciding to engage in the war. We do know, however, that it was the most widely acclaimed of the enormous volume of war films produced by the major Hollywood studios during the 1940s, and that its premiere caused a number of pro-war demonstrations, including the 1942 parade of the Fighting French outside of New York’s Hollywood Theater.

     

    A little known fact is that just as war and its contingencies were at the root of the film’s production, so too was armed struggle the basis for the modern city’s construction by the French, next to the old Medina. Indeed, the principal importance of both objects resided in their ability to serve as political technologies which helped mobilize the population as a single unit towards war. In the late 19th century, German and French imperialistic interests clashed in Morocco, turning control of the West-African country into a veritable arm-wrestle where military force, and the ability to rapidly mobilize troops and armament, were measured up before an imminent conflict. The monumental effort to erect the “modern city” and to overhaul the old Casbah was carried out, not out of a magnanimous will to “share” modernity with Morocco, but out of a necessity to demonstrate France’s military response time, strength, and administrative expediency. But this “show” was not staged just for foreign powers, it was (as was the movie in America) devised to quell national anxiety and low self image before the increased strength of the German Empire. The new city’s main objective would not be to adhere to the forms and spatial configurations of Moroccan architecture and urbanism with archaeological precision, but to construct and project an alternate reality where the French might find a compelling, almost mythical, image of their own mettlesome nature, their industrious spirit, their benevolence towards the colonized, and their republican stability. This effort would entail a necessary manipulation of the city’s reality (which prefigures Hollywood’s later distortions).

     

    Political Technologies of Control: The Idea of War

     

    Although the film and the city bear no visual resemblance, this is not to say that they have nothing in common. As we shall see, they share a number of particulars which, understood historically, cast new light onto the performative potential of architecture and film as social practices in contemporary society. To begin let us return to the most obvious commonality: the blatant interpretative liberties (not to say disregard) that both objects exhibit towards their pre-existing context. French designers, far from employing or referencing local typologies in their plans, imposed a Beaux Arts spatiality to their new cities, which they then adorned, if ever so slightly, with simulated Moroccan motifs (Koranic script is conveniently erased in the French versions).

     

    Figure 5: Casablanca’s Palais de Justice (Joseph Marrast, 1925), in Casablanca’s Grand Place, now Place Mohammed V (photo by author).

     

    In turn, Hollywood’s productions designers chose to present a wholly fictitious city, where not a single building of the French or Moroccan town is present.

     

    Figure 6: Scene from Casablanca; the film’s version of Casablanca’s Palais de Justice can be seen in the background.

     

    It would be impossible to attribute this attitude towards design to a designer’s whim, to time constraints, or to mere logistics. Both architecture and film are intensely decision-based artistic practices, and solutions are contingent on approval by the designer or director, the client or producer, the financing institutions, the prospective user’s or audience’s preferences, etc., so that such basic considerations are not likely to be the result of mere oversight or typical contingencies. In fact, we know that French administrators amassed large reference libraries of photographs and drawings documenting existing Moroccan buildings and cities,1 and that Hollywood production designers used photographs of French Casablanca as a reference in their work.2 We might contend that if the motivations for the construction of these objects were political, decisions concerning their final appearance were also political, and we should therefore turn, not to architecture or film, but to the art of politics, to ask why disavowing the real in representation might be an effective and desirable practice. Now, if only for a moment, we make a backward leap to the fourth century B.C. to ask this very question.

     

    In his construction of the Ideal Republic, Plato describes rhetoric as a fundamental technology of politics. It was the art used by the orator in convincing an assembly that a particular course of action was good and virtuous. Of course for Plato, this orator, a man capable of persuasion, should also be a man capable of discerning right from wrong and of determining what goals and public policies might ensure or enable the individual happiness of all citizens–i.e., a philosopher. Rhetoric’s political value lay in its ability to make the members of the assembly (a group of individuals including those daltonic non-philosophers unable to perceive the subtle shades of truth) see actions and situations in a particular light, to sharpen their awareness of what was virtuous as the camera focuses our attention with its depth of field, to penetrate reality and represent its essence. Already in the Republic it is clear that the notion of representation is a prerequisite for the very existence of politics.

     

    Unfortunately, Plato–who was as we know a fine orator–had more than a few difficulties carrying on his self-appointed mission as politician in the public sphere. His mentor Socrates, another able speaker, had already met an untimely death for not holding his tongue before the state. War, in this case the Peloponnesian War, combined with the instability of the 403 B.C. counterrevolution, had radically transformed the operations of the Athenian State from a forum for debate to a mechanism for homogenizing thinking and legislating ideology. The visions of death and destruction that plagued the minds of Athens’ democratic rulers turned all considerations of good and evil on a single axis: winning the war. The Idea of War was a specter so powerful it could fracture and dismantle any rhetorical presentation constructed by philosophers. This for Plato was the root of all the social evil of his time. Thinking men, concerned with the able exegesis of the real, had been cast off from politics by men of action in the name of the war. A new technology of politics, the spectacle of war had befallen every transaction of state affairs, threatening to subvert any attempt to understand the real by simply establishing a new reality (by decree).

     

    If the goal of politics is to conduct the public affairs of a body of people, it is also necessarily to exercise control over the agency of individuals in the name of efficiency. State affairs are deemed too complex to explain to everyone, yet they must somehow meet with the support of all affected by them if the government is to function effectively. Therefore, policies and directives, once resolved at the legislative level, must be presented as the best and most desirable solutions, and communicated to the socius in simple but persuasive terms. This aspect of politics–the interface between government and individual–is all about representation, about wheedling, about influencing the public’s understanding of reality. In this sense, war is a perfect political technology: It exercises its political strength by placing an emphasis on difference, and rallying a particular and otherwise heterogenic socius into a cohesive unit–within which difference is not tolerated. It is a condensation of complex diplomatic relations into a simple and understandable right and wrong: either you are in or out; it is a matter of life or death. Plato himself, however against men of action, recognized political virtue in war, and sought the unification of dissenting Greek states by projecting the Idea of War against the Persians onto the minds of his interlocutors. But he knew full well that in order for these thoughts to develop into sinister specters they needed to excite a dreadful imagery of death and destruction, and so Plato advocated the practice of sending children and women as spectators into the field of battle so that “in that way they will get a good view of their future business” (170). In this way, when the children-turned-adults would hear of a possible battle, they would be so stricken by fear that they would rally together to protect themselves against the oncoming perils.

     

    The Idea of War, as prospect or memory of bloodshed, can be stimulated in the socius as pure representation, functioning as a political technology more efficiently, permanently, and economically than war itself–armed conflict as a political practice is, as

     

    Figure 7: The “body of the town,” anthropomorphic city with fortress (Francesco di Giorgio Martini, Architettura, ingegneria e arte militare. Late fifteenth century. Turin, Codex Saluzzianus 148, fol. 3).

     

    we know, not infinitely sustainable. Historically, during times of peace, the tools employed in war (walls, fortresses, shields, armors, weapons, and banners) served as its mnemonic symbols in public spectacles (i.e., in parades, architectural ornaments, sculptures, paintings, etc.), keeping the threat of bloodshed alive in the minds of spectators to buttress various forms of government. For instance, the political power of wall circuits, constructed around cities up until the 19th century, went well beyond their physical resistance to projectiles. These military structures established, in a simple spatial language, those that stood outside or inside the body politic, and served as permanent reminders to both inhabitants and visitors of the threat of aggression. When describing these walls in 1452, Alberti would point out that they were founded with “the greatest religion” to protect a city which was “continually exposed to Dangers and Accidents; just as a ship which is tossed on the sea” (133). The idea of the encircling wall generated theoretical discourses and images of anthropomorphic cities that buttressed the notion of a collective body struggling for survival, and emphasized the concept of allegiance between citizens. Not surprisingly in these representations the noblest part of the city was the military fortress. City walls are thresholds to the polis, moments which, for phenomenologists such as Christian Norberg-Shultz, represent “the ‘rift’ between ‘otherness’ and manifest meaning, it embodies suffering and is ‘turned to stone’” (133). Indeed these objects exercise their communicative capacity by manipulating the material reality of the world, but there is more. A military wall will, at one level, be understood as separationprimarily because it divides us from each other, but, at another level, the wall will always be exercising a deictic reference to war, for it is only because of armed conflict that its existence is justifiable.

     

    Efforts such as the French and American versions of Casablanca were conceptually similar to the fortress wall insofar as they were, first and foremost, visualization technologies aimed at propagating a homogeneous, orderly, politicized world view. The Idea of War was mobilized in both as a means of internal control, as a kind of endogenous war where victory was determined not by fire power but by persuasive ability, since they aimed not at killing but at rallying supporters for a particular political platform by affecting their perceptual fields. To answer our original question, the extent to which the film and the modern city manipulated perceived notions of reality was directly proportional to these political aims. As political technologies, both objects could only be effective if they paid careful attention to establishing a play on the real that remained within the parameters of the dominant perceptual modes of the times, that is, within the general field of what reality was understood to be. We have intentionally begun by discussing a simple vertical plane (a city wall) which performed simultaneously as a tool to apportion space, as a military defense, and as a vehicle of propaganda, to stress the convergence of architecture, war, and politics around a notion of reality that was centered on territory, space, and time. Architecture is, ontologically, a field of endeavor concerned with the manipulation of space in time. Understandably, so long as the realm of the real has been circumscribed by these two concepts, architecture has stood as the prime tool to manipulate it. What concerns us in this essay is to expose how, as industrial and technological developments of the first half of the 20th century shifted the (conscious or subconscious) dominant perception of reality away from time and space, architecture became increasingly obsolete as an effective political technology, and was displaced by tools, like film, whose nature coincided with new notions about the makeup of man’s perceptual environment.

     

    The Urgency of Order

     

    There are striking similarities between the social conditions that prompted politicized institutions to use Casablanca city and Casablanca film as propaganda vehicles for the Idea of War. The years preceding both works are times when internal crisis, social strife, and discord menaced the prevailing order of things. Consider the following descriptions of conditions in France in the 1890s and the United States in the 1930s:

     

    Aesthetic disarray and moral decay shared the same root, in that both seemed to reveal fundamental weaknesses, most notably a pervasive apathy, in French society itself. From University lecterns, church pulpits, and town council halls came repeated calls for "rejuvenation," "moral education." New voluntary organizations vowed to break the debilitating lethargy afflicting both the state and the older, established social groups. (Wright 16)

     

    Among intellectuals and in centers of political power, the importance of cultural myths to social stability was a seriously debated topic.... The widespread doubt about traditional American Myths threatened to become a dangerous political weakness. In politics, industry and the media there were men and women... who saw the necessity, almost as a patriotic duty, to revitalize and refashion a cultural mythology. (Sklar 195-9)

     

    In either scenario the prevailing sentiment was one of generalized disillusionment with the present. The cacophony of divergent opinions resulted in the perception that traditional values were being lost, and that a once-united socius had fallen into disorder and degeneracy. A central, recurring theme in both countries was an understanding that people’s lack of direction, and lax value systems were conditions that could spur uncontrollable, debilitating mass spasms. The crowd’s fragmentation was conceived as a dangerous symptom of political feebleness before other world powers. To avoid this, recreating the illusion of a single body politic became a national priority. The imperative for both nations was the same: to steer the masses, as a cohesive unit, back to the values that had traditionally stood as symbols of national identity and pride. Just as before World War I, France’s urbanists labored earnestly to provide new mechanisms of establishing social order, so too did Hollywood’s film industry carry out its self-appointed mission in the 40s to congeal the American socius into a single block. Needless to say, this was a conservative effort, a folding back onto safe ground, a regrouping of the troops to gather new strength.

     

    France’s low self esteem was exacerbated when its efforts to gain control over Morocco were stemmed by German initiatives. Hostilities were ushered in when, in an overt attempt to undermine France’s prospective territorial score, German Emperor William II exacted his theatrical proclamation of Moroccan independence and integrity from his yacht on March 3rd 1905 while visiting Tangier. Two marked international crises ensued, one in 1905-06 and one in 1911, which almost resulted in an early start to World War I. In 1907, as a result of the first face-off, Colonel Hubert Lyautey was instructed to take an army unit from Western Algeria into Morocco and establish a “definitive French presence” in Morocco.

     

    Figure 8: Général Lyautey and Général D’Amade inspect the “Général Drude” command post in Casablanca, 1908 (from Marcelin Flandrin, Casablanca Rétro)

     

    To carry out his orders, the French official would need a vehicle not only capable of carrying the message, but in itself the verifiable proof of the message. Concerned with making visible the new territoriality, he fashioned the request for presence on a millenary tradition of staking out the ground: architecture. He resolved to erect French buildings on Moroccan soil and to make Casablanca his first test case. With Casablanca, the French responded to Germany’s aggression by superseding it theatrically and thus dwarfing Emperor William II’s gesture. From the outset, the city was understood as a weapon deployed in the theater of inter-national and intra-national warfare. It was a counterattack to Germany that simultaneously marshaled the Idea of War before the French socius, binding it together in the common cause of national defense. Lyautey understood that exercising political and military power was not “a matter of destroying [people], but transforming them” (qtd. in Wright 16). Lyautey’s self-declared infatuation with urbanity was rooted in a conviction that cities, in their ability to partition the space of social exchanges, constituted a “pacifist arsenal” capable of segregating, harmonizing, and reconstructing social structures and ways of life. The Colonel was not alone in his thinking. In fact, in the late 19th and early 20th centuries, the work of French scholars, like the vastly influential 1894 book by Jean Izoulet, La cité moderne et la métaphisique de la sociologie, had focused on achieving social order through careful urban design and strict social policies. “Issues as varied as the low national birthrate, poor industrial productivity, class antagonisms, inadequate housing stock, and a perceived decline in national prestige since the humiliation of the Franco-Prussian war, all these had urbanistic implications” (Wright 17). Whereas the tenuous political strength of regional administrators in France prevented these theories from being implemented on French soil, the pressing need to control Morocco made the Western Mahgreb a fertile culture for experimentation. Constantly referring to his initiatives as progressive and contrasting them with the intransigence and torpidity of legislature in the métropole, Lyautey sought to demonstrate how French inventiveness and power, if nourished by a strong political system, could continue to stand at the forefront of the world. The French needed only to secure their traditional values through new, clearly planned cities, a spirited and forceful government (like his own), and a consolidated socius, in order to become, once more, a great nation and empire.

     

    The colonization of Morocco, decided in the privacy of a government office, could only perform as an image of French strength and stability if it was cast in the realm of the visible and offered up for the world’s consumption. Lyautey knew his primary task was to produce evidence of his administration’s ability to maintain a “definitive presence” in Morocco–in other words, of his capacity to control space in time. Many options were initially shuffled, from tourism to magazines, but none could be mobilized without having an object to “show.” At a fundamental and symbolic level, even before considerations of urbanity as a tool to mold social patterns, architecture was a perfect vehicle to carry out Lyautey’s orders, insofar as its relationship to the ground responded to the 19th century’s technology of war–one that emphasized victory as the permanent acquisition of territorial gains. Architecture offered Lyautey a means to guarantee the extended temporal presence of France in North Western Africa.3

     

    By grounding French structures in Casablanca, Lyautey was very consciously making visible the new status of the Moroccan geography. The first military barracks, erected around the old medina, were quickly followed by a full blown national Architecture and Urbanism program that legislated the growth and aesthetic character of all major Moroccan towns. French architects like Henry Prost, Joseph Marrast, Adrien Laforgue, and Albert Laprade were handpicked, summoned to serve as functionaries of the state, and charged with all the public commissions. In their hands lay the responsibility of transforming the physical milieu to convey the new political order. The approach seemed to yield positive results. On November 4, 1911, after much haggling with Germany and Spain, France was “given” rights to a protectorship over Morocoo in exchange for ceding parts of French Congo to Germany and revising Franco-Spanish borders in the Mahgreb. Nonetheless, international tensions continued, and, in 1912, Poincaré had promoted Lyautey to Résident-Général of Morocco and head of the Army, so long as he could channel and mold social and economic desires and consolidate the success of the French occupation.

     

    To control architectural production, Lyautey immediately set up two government offices that would wield uncontested command over Moroccan cities’ patterns of growth, infrastructure, and aesthetic character. In 1912 he founded the Bureau of Fine Arts, appointed Tranchant de Lunel as director, and “granted him unprecedented powers, greater than anywhere else in the French-speaking world, to regulate new construction and restore existing buildings in the Moroccan medinas and mellas (Wright 130). In addition, in 1913, Lyautey established the Architecture and Urbanism Department under the direction of Henry Prost, to devise master plans for the new towns, draft zoning ordinances, and design all public structures, and canonize styles. The effect was the production of perfectly controlled urban environments. Casablanca sprang up as a veritable phantasmagoria, in perfect communion with the aims of the state.

     

    Perception is Reality

     

    Prost and Lyautey were convinced that their city would soon become the New York of Africa, through a convenient marriage of architectonic aesthetizations of politics and iron-fisted socio-economic policies. Unfortunately, the main objective of their collaboration–to make an international presentation of the solidity of the French Empire to the world in the face of imminent war–was dramatically behind schedule. By 1917, when Prost’s team finished drafting the master plan for Casablanca’s monumental central square (the Grand Place) World War I was well underway, placing enormous economic burdens on France and its colonies. Architecture, as an effective visualization technology of politics, had been rendered outmoded by the speed of war: There were simply no funds to build Casablanca. However, instead of postponing construction until the finances were made available, colonial administrators opted for increasing the speed of construction at all costs. Lyautey, under the battle cry “every quarry spares me a battalion” (Marrast 54), ordered the acceleration of building projects on course, and the immediate initiation of new works. The result was Prost’s “architecture en surface” where only the facades of buildings were constructed to create the “appearance” of a coherent city. The rest would be “filled in” when funds were made available. The intention was clear, and it was quite obviously Haussmanian: the surface of architecture would be spread over the city like a varnish to cover its discontinuities. A surface rendition of unity, a new reality, spreading over the dismembering city. The foremost task of architects was shifting from their traditional role as organizers and distributers of programmatic activities in space, to a new and awkward responsibility to produce the stage sets of a photographically ordered, almost two-dimensional, city.

     

    Such was the rush to get from design to finished city, that in documents such as Prost’s Grand Place plan, certain key structures, like the edifice facing the Hotel de Ville, were simply blocked out, but contained no indication of what program they were to house.

     

    Figure 9: Master plan for the Grand Place Casablanca, Henry Prost and Jean Marrast, 1914-1917 (from Wright, The Politics of Design)

     

    Designing on the run, architects valued aesthetic clarity over content. What initially seemed a strategic refusal to accept reality was actually a deliberate effort to construct an alternate reality, which was deemed essential for the survival of the empire. Architecture was marshaled to represent France’s ability to endure war with spirited confidence and full command. Lyautey could not turn back. Forced to keep up with the pace of war and to design at an accelerated rate, architects had to draw from conventions and ready-made solutions, to install meaning rather than to excavate it, to produce the real. When Lyautey was called back to France in 1925, he left behind a Casablanca that had nearly tripled its population, and that boasted a new “ville moderne,” and a scenographically remodeled Casbah.

     

    Figures 10 and 11: Aerial views of Casablanca taken in 1907 from a reconnaissance balloon by Lieutenant Bienvenue, and in 1928 from an airplane by Marcelin Flandrin (from: Flandrin, Casablanca Rétro).

     

    Notwithstanding the strategically choreographic maneuverings carried out in Morocco to demonstrate military superiority without physical confrontation, World War I broke out in 1914. It took the death of millions of men, three years of trench warfare, and the near exhaustion of the industrial production machine (the Allied effort almost came to a halt a year into the conflict due to scarcity in munitions), to make commanders realize that the technological advances of weaponry had transformed the logics of battle beyond their comprehension. Soldiers who had initially been sent into battle in bright uniforms (offsprings of the 17th and 18th century when smoke in the field made it difficult to discern your friends from your foes), were rapidly clothed in earthly tones to blur their contours against the desolate topography of no-man’s-land. To look beyond to the other trench meant being seen, and whatever was visible was the potential target of artillery and snipers. These limitations on the utility of human vision and hand-to-hand combat prompted the production of technologically mediated images of the battlefield, inducing a transformation of the dominant field of perception and space/time conceptualizations.4 The increased replacement of the battlefield’s topography with reproductions, the necessary reliance on imaging devices given the inability to depend on the soldier’s direct vision in conflicts where targets were literally out of sight, had a noted effect crucial to our understanding of Casablanca: The diminished relevance of the territory (of space in time), and the increased importance of speed (which collapses space and time into motion, as does cinema) as a primary register of reality.

     

    Already during World War I, photographic technology had proved quite attuned to the new perceptual exigencies of the war machine (there were regular air reconnaissance operations carried out, especially by the US expeditionary corps, to document troop movements). A veritable coupling of the art of war and the art of chronophotography was being achieved that rapidly turned film into a weapon. According to Paul Virilio, the possibility of this amalgam was rooted in the similitude of space-time distortions produced by technological advances in modern war and in cinema:

     

    [T]he military voyeur is handicapped by the slowness with which he scans a field of action overstretched by the dynamic revolution of weaponry and mass transport.... For the disappearance of the proximity effect in the prosthesis of accelerated travel made it necessary to create a wholly simulated appearance that would restore three-dimensionality to the message in full.... [T]his miniaturization of chronological meaning was the direct result of a military technology in which events always unfold in theoretical time. As in cinema, what happens is governed not by a single space-time principle but by its relative and contingent distortion, the capacity of repressive response depending upon the power of anticipation. (59-60)

     

    As the cataclysmic events of the Great War unfolded, the trust placed on the ability of spatial technologies to control the crowd was put into crisis: The inertia of physical barriers could not match the explosive power of new projectiles. However, French officials insisted on the relevance of urbanity. But, because of the exigencies of the war, they were forced to rely on the image of urbanity over its real presence, to convey the idea

     

    Figure 12: Poster for the 1917 exhibit of Morroccan art organized by Lyautey’s administration in Casablanca. The profits went to benefit wartime construction.

     

    of France’s long term presence in Morocco. Prompted by the critical importance of convincing the world that French Casablanca was a reality, even if it was not a finished product, the colonial government deployed an aggressive publicity campaign, hiring travel writers, photographers, poster artists, and filmmakers. As early as 1908, journalists, like Reginald Rankin of the London Times, were regularly sent to the city to report on current events. The Franco-Moroccan Exposition (1915) held in Casablanca with the intention to “demonstrate France’s determination to maintain the white city” (Cohen and Eleb 19) triggered the first comprehensive photographic documentation of Moroccan buildings and cities–other similar exhibits would follow regularly. Official journals like La Renaissance du Marocwere founded with the objective of disseminating the image of French Morocco, and of lauding the work of French professionals (architects were deliberately compared to renaissance masters, salvaging and re-interpreting the Islamic past). In this and other similar periodicals, French-built cities were continuously described as generating the kind of civic morality needed in France at the time.

     

    Just as the city wall had at once been a physical instrument of military deterrence that literally contained the socius, Casablanca had been constructed as a spectacular deterrence mechanism that would unite France under a single effort. But it was becoming increasingly evident that the political task of the city was being carried out in other fields of endeavor. The gap in temporality between the political commission and the architectural delivery was being filled in, almost imperceptibly, by photographs and written accounts that were twice-removed from the real. But in these photographs, the memory of the Idea of War was alive, much more alive than in the actual cities. In fact, photography could already be classified as a military weapon. Photography, as a medium, was not only the primary source of military surveillance, but also the new synthetic battlefield. Children would no longer have to be sent to view the spectacle of war. It could be delivered to them with the same intensity as it was experienced by military commanders behind the lines: in pictures (and, not much later, in moving pictures). Under the camera’s eye, architecture fused into the new simulated territories, no longer as a material substance, but as an ethereal phenomenon symbolically designating ownership, and certifying the verity of the new representations. Conspicuously, writers such as Pierre Mac Orlan would describe Casablanca not as a physical presence, but as an essence, a symbol of French prowess: “Endowed with all that modern industry can provide, this spontaneous phenomenon of French energy [is Casablanca]” (qtd. in Cohen and Eleb 19). But the spectacular construction was not as spontaneous as the French writer would have liked: its production required such a slow gestation that the city’s “presencing” in the real would only come after the Great War it was meant to deter, as a kind of flashback of it. Mac Orlan’s prose, published in 1934, veiled the fact that the city’s construction had been 27 years in the making, and that many official buildings were still unfinished.

     

    Figures 13 and 14: View of the corner of Bouskoura and Galiéi Streets towards the Grand Place in 1926 and 1928 respectively. The Hotel des Postes can be seen terminating the axis, but most structures remain unfinished (from: Flandrin, Casablanca Rétro).

     

    Lyautey had originally thought of the flourishing tourist industry as a means to exhibit his urbanistic prowess and to boost the economy. His contention was that “since the recent, intense development of large-scale tourism, the presentation of a country’s beauty has taken on an economic importance of the first order. To attract a large tourist population is to gain everything for both the public and the private budgets” (qtd. in Wright 134). Tourism had the added advantage that it effectively held the tourist’s sight captive, from official monument, to canonized local quarters, to scenographic French boulevards and plazas. To create a desire for the French public to visit Morocco, Lyautey sent his architects to Paris to reconstruct fragments of the Empire. In 1925, Tranchant de Lunel would design the Moroccan section of the North African Pavilion for the Arts Déco exhibition, and in 1931 a large architectural display was erected at the 1931 Colonial Exhibit. But tourism was still too selective and expensive, entailing long trips from Marseilles to Oran and then to Casablanca. However, the touristic gaze could be molded, controlled, and allowed to perceive the colonies, without actual travel, through representation. The added advantage was that the surface rendition of unity ushered in by Prost’s architecture en surface could be made to appear whole and complete. With the disappearance of the “proximity effect,” there was a window of opportunity to move from the prolonged constructive temporality of Architecture, to wholly simulated, instant environments that could fill in the discontinuities of the real city. It was becoming increasingly evident that architecture could no longer serve either as a primary means of military deterrence nor as a sufficiently expedient political technology. As “Countries, including Britain, would down their traditional means of defense and concentrated on research into perception” (Virilio 50), Lyautey would invest in alternative means to propagate the idea of order embodied in his Casablanca. He invited Jean and Jérôme Tharaud, acclaimed travel writers of the 20s and 30s, to Morocco, so that they might, through their work, foment the touristic visions of Morocco. The Tharauds willingly came under the mandates of the colonial administration–probably thinking they were helping bring morale back to the disconcerted French socius–and produced a wealth of popular accounts on Moroccan cities. The two brothers traveled much of the Mahgreb (and the globe for that matter) in military planes, peering down at the work of the empire from the sky, as their compatriot fighter pilots had targeted objectives with their guns and cameras during World War I. What is interesting in the work of the Tharauds is that, as Emily Apter has pointed out, they repeatedly described their aeronautic eye as a cinematograph panning across the landscape, evidencing the fact that filmic vision had already become the predominant perceptual mode of their era.

     

    In 1930 Josef Von Sternberg released his film Morocco, and in his footsteps, a multitude of filmmakers were enticed to use Lyautey’s theatrical cities as backdrops to their scenes. During the 30s, “the film crew had become such a commonplace appearance in the Moroccan landscape that Wyndham Lewis dedicated an entire section of his jaundiced Moroccan Travelogue Journey into Barbery to a pastiche of what he called ‘film-filibusters,’ industry magnates who ‘send their troupes (not troops) merely to afford their sham-sheiks a Hispano-Mauresque photographic setting’” (Apter 22). The residual components of an unfinished Casablanca were being reconstituted according to a new cinematic logic which defied single space-time relationships, and which was increasingly independent of the ground, of space, and of architecture. In his 1921 essay entitled “Grossissement,” Jean Epstein theorized this displacement from space to cinema as rooted in the cinematograph’s ability to subject time to technical manipulation–a quality paralleled by spatial technologies. Giovanni Pastrone, the Italian Futurist filmmaker, contemporary of Epstein, saw the camera not as an instrument to produce realistic portraits but as an instrument to falsify dimensions. With film cameras the spectator’s viewpoint could be mobile, in communion with the speed of moving objects. Epstein dreamt of being inside his characters, of moving with them and seeing what they saw. For Virilio, what Epstein and Pastrone saw as manipulation was in effect the production of a new kind of understanding of reality, one that would no longer be based on space/time conceptualizations, but on speed:

     

    [W]hat was "false" in cinema was no longer the effect of accelerated perspective but the very depth itself, the temporal distance of the projected space. Many years later, the electronic light of laser holography and integrated-circuit computer graphics would confirm this relativity in which speed appears as the primal magnitude of the image and thus as the source of its depth. (Virilio 16)

     

    With World War II this new conception of reality became predominant, as the globe’s geography became increasingly commensurate with cinematic samplings, and millions of attentive viewers lived the terror of battlefields, once scattered across the globe, now perceived simultaneously, collapsed onto the silver screen via news reels and war propaganda. By the time the next world war was brooding, it was clear that speed of communication (the kind of speed that Architecture could not deliver) was a determinant factor in victory. In speed lay the new possibility of military superiority. Up until the nineteenth century, permanent military fortifications had produced the effect of surprise with the help of booby traps, ditches, and moving gates or walls. Where the enemy was once startled by spectacular architectures, now he would be paralyzed by the sudden appearance of images and signs on monitor screens that simulated the field of battle. As the world’s reality was supplanted by surrogate military technologies, cinema came under the category of weapons, not because of its ability to depict battles, but because of its capacity to create surprise.5 In Lyautey’s mobilization of Casablanca as a vehicle of the Idea of War, where architecture was inevitably superseded by cinema, we find a rare film-city, a strange hybrid prefiguring the transformation in political technologies from architecture to film, from physical space to filmic time/space simultaneity, and finally to speed. Here we find evidence of how architecture, serving outdated political technologies of territorial conquest, proved inefficient and was supplanted by more effective mechanisms of propaganda: war films.

     

    Ordering the New Reality

     

    In the late 1930s and early 40s, when the US felt the danger of war approaching, and fears of unpredictable mass actions causing social breakdown began to resurface, spatial technologies could no longer be considered as viable solutions to curb internal political weaknesses. With the pressing need to wake its population to the new reality of industrialized production and destruction, the political machine turned not to architects but to movie producers. Whereas French architects and urbanists had sought to present a new world order to their compatriots by attempting to actually change the world, the American moviemakers focused on altering people’s perception of reality in order to achieve similar goals. The Hollywood studios, understanding that their own distribution networks and economic survival were at stake, answered the call to arms with a rich assortment of war movies that focused on bringing the aspirations and desires of the population closer to the political goals of the state. The particular attraction of film was that it comfortably slid under the skin (or should we say pupils) of a socius increasingly accustomed to equating reality with their cinematic perceptions of the world. Film, as a technology of politics, was unburdened by the immobility and territorial constraints of architecture. It was almost instantaneous, affecting the entire population simultaneously, and offering as commodities pure emotions and ideas.

     

    With lines as unburdened by sophistication as Ferrari (Sydney Greenstreet)’s “My dear Rick, when will you realize that in this world, today, isolationism is no longer a practical policy,” Casablanca informed American audiences about the new contingencies of international affairs. The message reached the entire population almost instantly. Between 1930 and 1945 Hollywood’s film industry dominated the American socius’ field of perception with its visual entertainment products. Eighty million citizens, more than half of the US population at the time, crowded movie houses every week, drawing 83 percent of the total spent on recreation by Americans. Television, still in its infancy, remained a luxury for the majority–only 8,000 US homes had TV sets in 1946 (Ray 25-26, 132). Hollywood held distribution networks that spanned the world, making the profits reaped internationally by Casablanca upon release roughly equal US takings–the production, which had cost little over a million dollars, made almost six million dollars at the box office.

     

    Casablanca‘s emphasis was, again, not on depicting the spaces of the original (the French city), but on creating a new city that could generate simple emotions in the spectator thanks to elementary scale contrasts (small, tortuous city streets to

     

    Figure 15: Warner Bros. 1942 poster

     

    express confinement, against a vast airport, which, occupying a space comparable to the entire city, stood as the allegory of freedom). The world was at war, and Casablancawas fired at the population to reinforce the idea of a collective project, and of particular values and codes that stood in contrast to those of other nations. The film was aimed at uniting the nation, rallying it against the forces that endangered traditional societal bonds. It was clear to producers that the film’s potential strength would not come from its photo-realistic depictions of the city, but from its ability to surprise the general public. When, on November 8, 1942, the allies landed in Casablanca, final touches on the film were dropped to speed up release and divert the public’s attention away from the real events and into the movie houses. Eighteen days after the incident, American movie houses were playing the film, and newspapers were filled with advertisements reading “Warner’s Split-Second Timing! ‘Casablanca’: The Army’s got Casablanca–and so have Warner Bros!” Inside the dark theaters, the camera’s lens became America’s prosthetic eye, and where there once was an incomprehensible and chaotic world, now a clear image of right and wrong came sharply into focus.

     

    The stamina exemplified in the building of Lyautey’s city and Curtiz’s film drew its lifeblood from an understanding that war “consists not so much in scoring territorial, economic or other material victories as in appropriating the ‘immateriality’ of perceptual fields” (Virilio 7). This is an archetypal military concept, yet, in Casablanca, its logic appears to us in relation to the delirium of industrialized production, and acquires new meaning and relevance. What is fascinating, and at the same time terrifying, about the American and French mobilizations of Casablanca is that they used aesthetics that were fundamentally militaristic as a means to solve socio-political problems. Both summoned the Idea of War as a reductivist filter of state affairs, where clear distinctions between what is correct and good, and what is deviant and bad were established and propagated, by responding to political demands with the theatrics of warfare. The surprise that befell on French colonial administrators when they realized their city was not ready in time to prevent war, was matched by the impotence and frustration of French generals, when, unable to break the enemy’s trench lines, they failed to understand that the strategies of 19th century offensives had become obsolete with the advent of long-range automatic weapons. Industrial production had delaminated the human senses, and projected them beyond time and space, subverting the old ways of experiencing the world. If reality is perception, the impulses sent by the new photographic eyes of the armies to the minds of their fellow men were visions of a whole new universe. Architecture, as a structure that, in a strange double motion, casts the condition of the ground in the visible by standing over it and veiling it, could not stand on top of this new, infinitely expanding dominion. Cinema, however, by technologically collapsing time/space relationships in terms of speed, was capable of delimiting and describing this new topography, and rendering it in the visible. As in architecture, the ability of cinema to perform its exegesis of the new ground could only be carried out by covering it, by concealing the original. Theoreticians like Virilio have read this phenomenon as causing the “disappearance” or the “disintegration” of “things and places,” but we must differ. Just as the ground remains under buildings allowing them to stand, territories and space remain under the surface of film as its supporting scaffolding. In Casablanca one can perceive the sequence unfolding, from ground to architecture to film, as a function of war. Each vehicle of representation, forged in accordance to the conditions of reality, was superseded when the general perception of that reality changed. The thread that guides us through this protean sequence is politics, for the changing perceptions of reality ushered in with each evolution of communication technologies threatened chaos and instigated the need to establish order. The political deployment of the Idea of War in architectural or filmic vehicles, as a means to structure disorder, marks the extension of perceptual realities that characterize our contemporary condition. Casablanca, as rendered in stone or film, does not exemplify the ending and the beginning of mutually exclusive realities, but the buttressing simultaneity of perceptions that constitute our understanding of the world today, from the immediacy of the spaces we live in, to the poliverses of overlapping global territories we inhabit.

     

    Notes

     

    1. The Rabat headquarters of the Bureau of Fine Arts, for example, boasted a collection of 25,000 photographs of various Moroccan buildings. See: Gwendolyn Wright., The Politics of Design in French Colonial Urbanism (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1991) 133.

     

    2. Some of the original photographic and textual references, provided by the Warner Bros. Research Department, and used as background for the film’s writers, designers, and director, are presented in Frank Miller, Casablanca: As Time Goes By–50th Anniversary Commemorative (Atlanta: Turner Publishing; [Kansas City, Mo.: Distributed by Andrews and McMeel], 1992) 45.

     

    3. The dependency of a building to its site is perhaps better understood in philosophical terms. Philosophy is the construction of propositions characterized by their ability to stand up. However, the exercise of that capacity is dependent on the ground’s condition, on the structure’s supporting presence. In any case, “standing up through construction makes visible the condition of the ground” (Wigley 8). In The Architecture of Deconstruction, Mark Wigley references Heidegger’s propensity to address philosophy as a kind of architecture, and metaphysics as an “edifice” with firm “foundations,” laid on stable “ground” that must first be prepared to receive the structure. “Heidegger argues that philosophy’s original but increasingly forgotten object, ‘being’ [Sein], is also a kind of construction, a ‘presencing’ [Answesenheit] through ‘standing.’ Each of philosophy’s successive terms for ‘ground’ [Grund] designates ‘Being,’ understood as ‘presence.’ Metaphysics is the identification of the ground as ‘supporting presence’ for whatever stands like an edifice” (Wigley 8). Wigley’s analysis draws our attention to relationship between architecture and its ground in an oblique fashion: by demonstrating how philosophy, in order to perceive itself as a construction concerned with the exegesis of the structure of Being, must first perceive itself metaphorically as an architecture that renders the status of its ground perceivable, we come to understand that architecture is, in part, a technology to visualize the state of the ground.

     

    4. See Paul Virilio, War and Cinema: The Logistics of Perception (London and New York: Verso, 1989). Also see Stephen Kern, The Culture of Time and Space, 1880-1918 (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1983).

     

    5. See Virilio 7-9, 72.

    Works Cited

     

    • Alberti, Leon Battista. The Ten Books of Architecture. Trans. Giacomo Leoni. London: Edward Owen, 1755; New York: Dover Publications, Inc., 1986.
    • Apter, Emily. “The Landscape of Photogeny: Morocco in Black and White.” Architecture New York 16 (November 1996).
    • Casablanca. Dir. Michael Curtiz. Perf. Ingrid Bergman, Humphrey Bogart, Sydney Greenstreet, Paul Henreid, Peter Lorre, and Claude Rains. Warner Bros. Pictures, Inc., 1942.
    • Cohen, Jean-Louis, and Monique Eleb. “The Whiteness of the Surf: Casablanca.” Architecture New York 16 (November 1996).
    • Eco, Umberto. Travels in Hyperreality: Essays. San Diego: Harcourt Brace & Company, 1986.
    • Kern, Stephen. The Culture of Time and Space, 1880-1918. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1983.
    • Marrast, Jean. “Maroc.” L’oeuvre de Henri Prost: Architecture et Urbanisme. Ed. Académie d’Architecture. Paris: Imprimerie du Compagnonnage, 1960.
    • Miller, Frank. Casablanca: As Time Goes By–50th Anniversary Commemorative. Atlanta: Turner Publishing (Kansas City, Mo.: Distributed by Andrews and McMeel), 1992.
    • Norberg-Shultz, Christian. Genius loci: Towards a Phenomenology of Place. New York: Rizzoli International Publications, Inc., 1986.
    • Plato. Republic. Trans. Francis Macdonald Cornford. New York and London: Oxford UP, 1967.
    • Ray, Robert B. A Certain Tendency of the Hollywood Cinema, 1930-1980. Princeton N.J.: Princeton UP, 1985.
    • Robertson, James C. The Casablanca Man: The Cinema of Michael Curtiz. London: Routledge, 1993.
    • Sklar, Robert. Movie Made America: A Social history of American Movies. New York: Random House, 1975.
    • Wigley, Mark. The Architecture of Deconstruction. Cambridge and London: The MIT Press, 1993.
    • Virilio, Paul. War and Cinema: The Logistics of Perception. London and New York: Verso, 1989.
    • Gwendolyn Wright. The Politics of Design in French Colonial Urbanism. Chicago: The U of Chicago P, 1991.

     

  • Presenting the Cyborg’s Futurist Past: An Analysis of Dziga Vertov’s Kino-Eye

    Joseph Christopher Schaub

    Department of Comparative Literature
    University of Maryland

    Joseph_C_SCHAUB@umail.umd.edu

    Introduction

     

    Contemporary discussions about gender in cyberspace often rely on assumptions about the immanently liberatory potential of technology.

     

    Animated image constructed by
    author using Man With a
    Movie Camera
    production stills.

     

    Undoubtedly much of this enthusiasm for technology has been generated by Donna Haraway’s “A Cyborg Manifesto,” the foundational essay on cyborg subjectivity. Haraway embraces technology’s disruption of such previously stable borders as that between the organism and the machine. She is making “an argument for pleasure in the confusion of boundaries… an effort to contribute to socialist-feminist culture and theory in a postmodernist, non-naturalist mode and in the tradition of imagining a world without gender” (Haraway 150). But amid all the enthusiasm for a postgender cyberspace, it is important to remember that Haraway is not the first to imagine a world without gender in the coupling of humans and machines. The writers of the Futurist movement of the early twentieth century precede her vision, but to achieve it they called for the elimination of the feminine.

     

    In an essay entitled “War, Sole Hygiene of the World,” the premiere theorist of the Italian Futurist movement, F. T. Marinetti, “specifies that the ideal universe remains devoid of women, consisting only of men and machines” (Orban 56). The passage creates a troubling obstacle for theories of the cyborg which attempt to establish a connection between the disappearance of the techno/organic boundary and the disappearance of gender. Perhaps for that reason, the Futurist roots of the cyborg have been largely ignored in the hope that the technological advances which have made the cyborg “our ontology” (Haraway 150) have eliminated Marinetti’s misogyny.

     

    Instead of ignoring the Futurist roots of the cyborg, I have chosen to explore alternatives to the misogyny inherent in Marinetti’s writings on Futurism. The Russian Futurists, for example, though their platform was very similar to the Italians’ in their hatred of bourgeois conventions, differed remarkably in two areas which the Italians saw as fundamental for escaping those conventions: the glorification of war and the demonization of women. Particularly in the work of Dziga Vertov, filmmaker and theorist of the early Soviet era, the anti-feminist stance of the Italian Futurists is rejected in favor of a representational strategy that privileges women as filmic subjects without reinforcing patterns of visual pleasure that support bourgeois patriarchal ideology. In what follows I will examine the traces of Futurism that inform Dziga Vertov’s Man With a Movie Camera (1929) and discuss the way that Vertov’s cyborg construction, the Kino Eye, destabilizes the gender hierarchy that underlies bourgeois capitalism without eliminating women from the world of the text. By foregrounding its own process of production, and displaying both men and women involved in creating the film, Man With a Movie Camera radically departs from the bourgeois conventions which all Futurists despised; but it does so without scapegoating women.

     

    Man With a Movie Camera is the result of Vertov’s ten-year effort to work out a theory of technologically-assisted vision. “Kino-Eye” is the name he gave to his the ory, and it involves not only a disappearance of the border between the camera and the eye but a dissolution in the stages separating the process of film production as well. Vertov’s cameraman and brother, Mikhail Kaufman, appears in the film as often as Vertov’s editor and wife, Elizaveta Svilova. As a historical representation of the cyborg that promotes strategies for minimizing the hierarchical stratification of gender, the film serves as a model for contemporary discussions of postgender cyberspace . Rather than eliminating one or both genders in a human/machine merger, Vertov balances the masculine and feminine contributions to the production of meaning in what may be the first revolutionary cybertext, Man With a Movie Camera, with th e first revolutionary cyborg, the Kino-Eye.

     

    The Futurist Roots of the Cyborg

     

    After being conquered by Futurist eyes our multiplied sensibilities will at last hear with Futurist ears. In this way the motors and machines of our industrial cities will one day be consciously attuned, so that every factory will be transformed into an intoxicating orchestra of noises.

     

    –Luigi Russolo

     

    Donna Haraway’s “A Cyborg Manifesto” outlines a number of boundaries that have been broken by the late twentieth century in the United States. For discussions of the cyborg, the most important of these is the distinction between organism and machine which she says is now “thoroughly ambiguous” (152). As Haraway notes, “Our machines are disturbingly lively, and we ourselves, frighteningly inert” (152). In creating a postmodern cyborg subjectivity, Haraway acknowledges changes in our conception of the various binary structures which modernist notions of subjectivity were founded upon. High modernist works such as The Scream illustrate the split in the subject, a division between the subject’s inside and outside, which the modernists define as alienation. This division and its implications “are no longer appropriate to the world of the postmodern,” as Fredric Jameson notes (14). Strict distinctions between signifier and signified, subject and object, reality and representation have collapsed in the wake of the late twentieth century’s poststructuralist critique. Haraway’s extension of this critique into the line dividing organic and inorganic matter is as much a product of postmodern/poststructuralist thinking as a contribution to it. Likewise, when Haraway states that “the cyborg is a creature in a postgender world” (150), she acknowledges the fragmentation of gender as a binary structure, as well.

     

    The early Futurists would have found it difficult to engage in this particular border dispute. As modernists they were thoroughly entrenched in the kind of binary thinking that separated organic from inorganic and masculinity from femininity. As a result their conception of the cyborg is only apparent through their pairings of men and machines in their art. In “The Founding Manifesto of Futurism,” Marinetti makes clear that man with machine is the subject of the future. “We want to hymn the man at the wheel, who hurls the lance of his spirit across the Earth” (21), Marinetti writes in point number 5. This follows the oft-quoted statement in point number 4 which affirms that a roaring motorcar is more beautiful than the Victory of Samothrace. For Marinetti the future was guaranteed to “Man” by his insoluble bond to machines. Woman and femininity belonged to the past, to the 19th century. The connection with women and institutions of the past is made obvious in point number 10, which reads, “We will destroy the museums, libraries, academies of every kind, will fight moralism, feminism, every opportunistic or utilitarian cowardice” (22). The future belonged to men.

     

    The Russian Futurists were different, though, like the Italians, they disdained the past and the various institutions which preserved it. Their founding manifesto reads, “The Academy and Pushkin are less intelligible than hieroglyphics. Throw Pushkin, Dostoevsky, Tolstoy, etc. overboard from the Ship of Modernity” (B urliuk et al 51). But Russian Futurism and Italian Futurism were never as closely aligned as their common name would suggest. In his 1927 article, “We Are the Futurists,” Osip Brik acerbically states, “Russian Futurists arose long before Marinetti becam e well known in Russia. And when Marinetti came to Russia in January 1914, the Russian Futurists met him with complete animosity (252-252). Still, Brik concedes that the Russian Futurists “have made use of certain of the Italian Futurist’s slogans…”(Burliuk 252). He goes on to list the points which the Russians had adopted from Marinetti’s founding manifesto. The list contains points 1 through 4. It skips points 5 and 6, then includes points 7 and 8, but leaves out 9, 10 and 11 (Burliuk 252).

     

    The points Brik repudiates in this crucial essay reveal the stark differences between Russian and Italian Futurism. Point number 5, which hymns the “man at the wheel,” has already been discussed, as has point 10, which vows to destroy feminism, as well as museums, libraries, and academies. Perhaps the most objectionable notions, though, are contained in point 9. It reads: “We will g lorify war–the world’s only hygiene–militarism, patriotism, the destructive gesture of freedom-bringers, beautiful ideas worth dying for, and scorn for woman” (Marinetti 22). The Russian Futurists never relied on the glorification of war or misogyny to advance their platform celebrating humanity’s union with technology. The intention behind Russian Futurist art was “not the hymning of technology, but its control in the name of the interests of humanity” (Mayakofsky 35).

     

    In the work of Dziga Vertov, we can see how the Russian Futurists recuperated the essentially cyborg notion of combining technology and humanity from the misogynist trap into which the Italians fell. Vertov’s cyborg construction was originally conceived as a device for enhancing human optics, as this 1923 statement sug gests: “I am kino-eye, I am a mechanical eye. I, a machine, show you the world as only I can see it” (17). But Kino-Eye’s first person address already suggests a merger between human and machine, something that would be further explored and complicated i n Vertov’s later writings.

     

    By the time Man With a Movie Camera was made, Vertov’s conception of the Kino-Eye was divided into the three stages of the production process that he and his collaborators used to create their films. In 1929, Vertov wrote: “Kino-eye = kino-seeing (I see through the camera) + kino-writing (I write on film wit h the camera) + kino-organization (I edit)” (87). These three stages correspond perfectly to the three positions occupied by Elizaveta Svilova, Dziga Vertov, and Mikhail Kaufman, collectively known as “The Council of Three” (12).

     

    After Vertov, Kino-Eye.

     

    As the camera-man, and Vertov’s brother, Mikhail Kaufman fulfilled the kino-seeing function, Vertov himself, as director, was responsible for what was shot, the kino-writing, and Elizaveta Svilova, Vertov’s wife, edited their pieces.

     

    The Kino-Eye, then, is a cyborg construction that contains multiple positions for the production of film meaning. Those positions were obviously chosen so that equitable contrib utions could be made from representatives of each gender. (The apparently uneven number of males and females in the Council of Three will be explained later, in light of the importance of editing in Soviet filmmaking, relative to the other stages of pro duction.) It is the first example of a theory of the cyborg that does not rely on a misogynistic eradication of the feminine in order to unite man and machine. In order to see how the Kino-Eye works in a film text we must now examine Man With a Mo vie Camera.

     

    Man With a Movie Camera

     

    After Vertov, Kino-Eye.

     

    As the last of Vertov’s silent films, Man With a Movie Camera stands at the peak of the Soviet avant garde film movement of the twenties, and extends the most thorough vision of Vertov’s understanding of the combination of the human and the machine implicit in the term Kino-Eye. The subject of Man With a Movie Camera is the cyborg; it is not “man.” Vertov ass ociated man as subject with the bourgeois filmmaking he hoped to supplant with Kino-Eye filmmaking. In a polemical treatise reminiscient of the early Futurist writings, Vertov attacks the mainstream tradition of the narrative “film-drama” which draws upo n previous bourgeois conventions, such as the romance and psychological novel. Vertov writes, “the ‘psychological’ prevents man from being as precise as a stopwatch; it interferes with his desire for kinship with the machine.” In banishing the conventio ns of bourgeois cinema, Vertov also eliminates the human character, as he acknowledges in this statement: “For his inability to control his movements. We temporarily exclude man as a subject for film” (7).

     

    Vertov’s exclusion of “man” as a subject for film has a double meaning. Not only does it allude to the need for a filmic subject able to transcend the imprecision of the traditi onal psychologically motivated narrative, but this same subject must not be gendered in a way which implicates the viewer in the logic of the look so essential to maintaining power relationships in patriarchal culture. It is the look, or “gaze,” and its obvious association with scopophilic pleasure, which Laura Mulvey has discussed as essential to maintaining patriarchal power relationships. Mulvey writes:

     

    Woman... stands in patriarchal culture as a signifier for the male other, bound by a symbolic order in which man can live out his fantasies and obsessions through linguistic command by imposing them on the silent image of woman still tied to her place as bearer, not maker, of meaning. (15)

     

    This is where Man With a Movie Camerapresents the greatest challenge to mainstream filmmaking. While excluding man as subject of the film, Vertov also includes woman as maker of meaning.

     

    Man With a Movie Camera begins with a shot of a movie camera, facing the viewer, and from out of the top of the camera a miniature Mikhail Kaufman climbs with his camera and tripod, aims it at the offscreen space to the right, and begins to crank. A cut reveals the top of a building, which, according to the conventions of mainstream narrative cinema, where the spectator identifies with the look of a character, is presumably the object the came raman is filming. But already this simple association begins to subvert those conventions it appears to follow, as Judith Mayne points out in her analysis of this segment:

     

    Production stills, Man With a Movie Camera.

     

    The “how” precedes the “what”; the image is designated as a product of the cinematic process, and not as a reflection of a world outside that of the film. The following two shots repeat a similar pattern with slight differences. In shot three, the cameraman is seen at an increased distance; and the angle of shot four, a la mppost, is slightly different from the angle of shot two. A puzzling reversal occurs as well: the off-center but nonetheless continuous match between shots one and two is impossible between shots three and four, since in shot three the cameraman picks u p his equipment and moves off-screen. Thus a sense of continuity is established and violated at the same time (Mayne 159).

     

    Following these four brief shots, we see the cameraman, now in scale with his surroundings, entering the movie theater through the curtains and heading to the projection booth. He then threads the projector with what the logic of continuity driven cinema would have us believe is the film he has just exposed. This completely elides the processes in between shooting and screening a film.

     

    Here the particulars of the filmmaking process are not hidden to disguise aspects of the film’s production as in mainstream narrative cinema, which does not wish to jeopardize th e viewer’s pleasure, but rather to avoid the possibility of showing that process so completely that a narrative centered on filmic production might arise from the very attempt to subvert traditional narrative. Again, a sense of continuity is established and violated. This pattern of foregrounding the process of production appears again and again throughout the film, because “the film aims to take the spectator from a position of unreflective consumption of cinema to one of actively producing the film’s meaning” (Crofts and Rose 15). This is a crucial point, and will be returned to shortly, but I will first address a problem regarding the opening sequence.

     

    Reading the opening sequence as a narrative preliminary to the rest of the film sets up the cameraman as the central character which would then appear to violate Vertov’s exclusion of “man” as a subject of film, and reinstitute the gendered hierarchy which Mulvey critiques. However, it soon becomes apparent through scenes such as the one in which a young woman’s eyes blinking are intercut with venetian blinds opening and closing that there is no central characte r to this film. In fact it is possible to determine this even before the venetian blind scene as Mayne displays in stating:

     

    From the very beginning... the centrality of the cameraman's vision is put into question, since he moves out of frame in the third shot of the film. In other words, the cameraman cannot be equated with a central character, or even the central narrating i ntelligence of a narrative film, since visual perspective is not localized in a single figure, but dispersed through multiple perspectives. (162)

     

    This notion of the visual subject dispersed through multiple perspectives is as fundamental to an understanding of the Kino-Eye as an essentially cyborg construction as the combining of human and machine, which is also seen throughout the film.

     

    The Kino-Eye, then, can be understood as an ideological weapon, a cyborg combination of human and movie camera, which both creates and depends upon multiple perspectives for its interpretation and communication. In taking the spectator from the position of passive consumer to active producer of cinematic meaning, the K ino-Eye functions as a contagious “virus,” contained in the film text. Once infected by it the viewer becomes Kino-Eye, “challenging the human eye’s visual representation of the world and offering its own ‘I see’” (Mayne 21). Through a new form of visua lization it begins to destabilize the various hierarchies which patriarchal capitalism depends upon for maintaining hegemonic dominance.

     

    Animated image constructed by
    author using Man With a
    Movie Camera
    production stills.

     

    The most prevalent hierarchy destabilized is gender. Several writers have commented on the complex way that gender is questioned in Man With a Movie Camerasince most of the subjects of the camera are women. Kaufman is the human figure who appears most frequently in the film, but he never appears in close-up, thereby making character identification quite difficult, and he never appears without his camera, which suggests that he is not gendered male, but cyborg. In other words he is not man as bearer of the look, but man, bearer of the camera. Even more important, though, is the presence of Vertov’s wife and editor, Elizaveta Svilova, at the editing table creating cinematic meaning from ribbons of celluloid.

     

    Svilova appears about 21 minutes, or one-third of the way into this 66-minute film, seated at her editing table, with scissors in hand, cutting the film and cement-splicing it into new patterns. About one minute before she appears a series of freeze-frame stills, beginning with a horse pulling a carriage and ending with close-up faces of people, appears for the first time in the film. S ince Man With a Movie Camera uses all manner of camera and editing techniques, the use of freeze-frames isn’t unusual. But in this instance the stills prepare us for a pseudo-identification with Svilova’s “gaze,” since she sees the film firs t as an extensive strip of separate images. In some of the images we even see the perforated sprocket holes at the edge of the frame, completely demystifying the illusion of cinematic continuity as well as mimesis.

     

    Svilova’s appearance as the editor in this film is somewhat more complex than Kaufman’s appearance as cameraman because of the place that editing had in the hierarchy of Soviet s ilent film theory. In numerous articles advanced by Eisenstein, Pudovkin, Kuleshov, and Vertov, editing, or “montage,” was given prominence as the most important aspect of filmmaking. Pudovkin’s famous quote that, “the film is not shot, but built, built up from the separate strips of celluloid that are its raw material” (Leyda 211), serves as a not-so-subtle reminder of the place of editing, and of cinematography in the filmmaking process of the early Soviets. However, it may be pointed out that the fi lm is entitled Man With a Movie Camera, not “Woman With a Pair of Scissors.” The important thing here is not so much whether the cameraman or the editor serves as the privileged locus of signifying practice, rather it is the way in which the gender hierarchy is destabilized by the Kino-Eye, which must now include the eyes of the editor as part of its totality.

     

    Further examples of the way that gender is destabilized by the Kino-Eye include the ambiguous nature of the eye itself when reflected in the lens of the camera. Lynne Kirby, in “From Marinetti to Vertov: Woman on the Track of Avant-Garde Representation,” argues that the eye we see superimposed over the camera lens is not Kaufman’s, but rather the eye of a woman who is awakened by a train passing over the cameraman who lies on the tracks. According to Kirby, “The association of the camera lens and shutter with the woman’s eye is the most frequently cited example of the self-reflexive operations of Vertov’s film. That this is first a woman’s eye, however is often overlooked” (313). For Kirby, the Kino-Eye is a feminine machine set in motion, or awakened by the passing of a train over the body of the cameraman. But I see a more gender-neutral identity for the Kino-Eye. In the sequence of shots Kirby cites (approximately eight and a half minutes into the film), the cameraman does appear to be run over by the train at the very point when a woman wakes and begins to look around. But immediately following the shots comprising his being run over, which include close-ups of his feet and head on the tracks, quickly spliced between shots of the train rushing by, the cameraman gets up unscathed and walks back to a car waiting to drive him away. The fact that the cameraman is completely unharmed by his encounter with the train rules out any possibility of perceiving this sequence as strictly violent. Kirby, however, argues that the train, the woman awakening, and more specifically the shots of her dressing which follow constitute “the setting in motion of a sexual imaginary…” (313). Indeed there are erotic undercurrents pervading this film, which doesn’t hesitate to display in fragmented form semiclad bathers at the beach, the slow motion bodies of both male and female athletes performing various feats, even a woman giving birth. But the eroticism is always mitigated by the gender-neutrality of the Kino-Eye, which does not indulge in the kind of scopophilic fantasy narrative so common in mainstream Hollywood cinema.

     

    The erotic undercurrents in Man With a Movie Camera are impossible to explain using theories in which desire is either masculine or feminine, but theories of the cyborg explain the eroticism in this film quite adequately. William R. Macauley and Angel J. Gordo-Lopez, in their article “From Cognitive Psychologies to Mythologies,” discuss seduction and technological abandonment of the body through the performance artist, Stelarc: “He claims that mutilation of the body is an obligatory passage point for our communion with technological webs” (435). In light of this quote, the initial train scene, in which Kaufman appears to be run over, can be viewed as the obligatory passage point for the cameraman’s transformation into the Kino-Eye, awakened by the “mutilation” of Kaufman’s body. But in Man With a Movie Camera, the merger that occurs is as much with the awakened woman as it is with technology.

     

    This is the real source of the erotic undercurrent in Man With a Movie Camera. The Kino-Eye is neither masculine nor feminine. Vertov emphasizes its hybrid nature both as a techno/organic and as a postgender creation. In her analysis of the film Kirby even suggests this by attempting to locate a “di–v ision… between a feminine and masculine voyeurism” (309). By hyphenating the word, “di–vision,” Kirby appears to be searching, not so much for two separate types of voyeurism, which the word “division” would imply, as two related types–a double visio n. Understanding the Kino-Eye as a gender-neutral, or more appropriately, androgynous human-machine construction, makes this di–vision, a scopophilic desire to understand other cyborgs, or as Vertov would put it, “the sensory exploration of the world th rough film” (14).

     

    Conclusion

     

    While Man With a Movie Camera has been closely examined as a Marxist and constructivist text (most notably in Stephen Croft’s and Olvia Rose’s “An Essay Towards Man With a Movie Camera”), the film’s value as a cybertext has gone largely untapped. This comes as a bit of a surprise since Dziga Vertov’s depiction of the Kino-Eye in Man With a Movie Camera has much in common with the postmodern cyborg that Donna Haraway has theorized in the “Cyborg Manifesto.” Like Haraway’s cyborg, the Kino-Eye is not dependent upon an organic ontology, an d its multiple perspectives closely resemble the heterogenous points of entry which characterize Haraway’s conception of cyborg subjectivity.

     

    Italian Futurism glorified the union of man and machine, but Vertov’s Kino-Eye escaped this binary perception of gender which lead Marinetti to efface the feminine. The Kino-Eye embraces the feminine perspective and represents woman as maker of meaning in Man With a Movie Camera. Vertov’s decision to completely foreground the production process was a bold move even for an avant-garde filmmaker, since many of his contemporaries were still working largely within the narrative tradition. No less bold was his decision to emphasize the contribution of women. Man With a Movie Camera presents these two separate agendas seamlessly in a direct reversal of the Classical Hollywood style which hides the process of production. Classical Hollywood Cinema also presents woman as spectacle for masculine pleasure. The pleasure in Man With a Movie Camera begins with liberation from gender hierarchy.

     

    Production still, Terminator 2: Judgment Day.

     

    In contemporary discussions of gender in cyberspace the equitable representation of women is not a foregone conclusion. The cyborg has done as much to reify existing stereotypes about gender as it has to eradicate them. Hyper-masculine cyborg creations potrayed by Arnold Schwarzenneger in the Terminatormovies suggest that the dream of the Italian Futurists, a world devoid of women, leaving only men and machines, rules Hollywood today. For this reason it is even more important to seek out historical representations of the cyborg that promote strategies for minimizing the hierarchical stratification of gender. In this paper I have tried to suggest that there is a wealth of relevant theory in the revolutionary work of the Russian Futurists. Vertov’s Kino-Eye is one applicable example of a responsible paradigm for managing the merger of technology and humanity.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Burliuk, D., Alexander Kruchenykh, V. Mayakovsky, Victor Khlebnikov. “Slap in the Face of Public Taste.” Russian Futurism Through its Manifestos, 1912-1928. Ed. Anna Lawton. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1988. 51-53.
    • Crofts, Stephen, and Olivia Rose. “An Essay Towards Man With a Movie Camera.” Screen 18 1 (Spring 1977): 9-58.
    • Haraway, Donna J. “A Cyborg Manifesto: Science, Technology, and Socialist-Feminism in the Late Twentieth Century.” Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Women. New York: Routledge, 1991. 149-181.
    • Jameson, Fredric. Postmodernism, Or, The Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism. Durham: Duke UP, 1991.
    • Kirby, Lynne. “From Marinetti to Vertov: Woman on the Track of Avant-Garde Representation.” Quarterly Review of Film Studies 10: 309-323.
    • Leyda, Jay. Kino: A History of the Russian and Soviet Film. London: Ruskin House, 1960.
    • Macauley, William J, and Angel J. Gordo-Lopez. “From Cognitive Psychologies to Mythologies: Advancing Cyborg Textualities for a Narrative of Resistance.” The Cyborg Handbook. New York: Routledge, 1995. 433-444.
    • Marinetti, F. T. “The Founding and Manifesto of Futurism 1909.” Futurist Manifestos. Ed. Umbro Apollo nio. New York: Viking Press, 1970.
    • Mayakovsky, Vladimir. The Bedbug and Selected Poetry. Ed. Patricia Blake. New York: The World Publishing Company, 1960.
    • Mayne, Judith, Kino and The Woman Question: Feminism and Soviet Silent Film. Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 1989.
    • Mulvey, Laura, “Visual Pleasure and Narrative Cinema.” Visual and Other Pleasures. Bloomington & Indianapolis: Indian University Press, 1989. 14-26.
    • Orban, Clara. “Women, Futurism, and Fascism.” Mothers of Invention: Women, Italian Fascism, and Culture. Ed. Robin Pickering-Iazzi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1995. 52-75.
    • Russolo, Luigi. The Art of Noises (excerpt). Futurist Manifestos. Ed. Robert Motherwell. Trans. Caroline Tisdall. New York: Viking Press, 1970.
    • Vertov, Dziga. Kino-Eye: The Writings of Dziga Vertov. Ed. Annette Michelson. Trans. Kevin Obrien. Berkeley: U of California P, 1984.

     

  • Simultaneity and Overlap in Stanley Kubrick’s The Killing

    Stephen Mamber

    Department of Film/TV
    University of California at Los Angeles
    smamber@ucla.edu

     

    …the cinematographic image is in the present only in bad films.

     

    –Deleuze

     

    Stanley Kubrick’s racetrack robbery caper film The Killing (1956) is a conceptual exercise in time travel.[1] Using a narrator reminiscent of Dragnet, or the impersonal narrators of Kubrick’s later films, the film goes forward in time most often in overlap, by first going backward to pick up the thread of another character’s movements earlier than where we are currently placed. There is no progress in the film, because wherever you go returns you to where you’ve already been. Once again, an early Kubrick preoccupation is evident–exactly the same might be said of The Shining or Full Metal Jacket and most of his circularly organized constructions.

     

    Rather than stress the intimations of early Kubrick in The Killing, I want to explore what it does rather strikingly on its own terms–to express temporal notions of simultaneity and overlap. The ingenious, complex narrative structure is worth some examination in its own right. The Killing might be called a flashback film with no flashbacks (with one exception, as I shall discuss), an expression of the idea Deleuze has expressed so well in Cinema 2: The Time Image: that awareness of the past doesn’t depend upon flashback constructions. The Killing goes backward from the very beginning, and its end is where we start, so the entire movie is a series of elliptical goings-back.

     

    To illustrate this strategy, let us resort to a chart:

     

    The chart is of roughly the second half of the film, which all takes place in one day–the day of the robbery and the subsequent capture of Johnny, the leader (or should we say recapture, as a week earlier, at the start of the film, he had just been let out of jail). Each horizontal line of the chart represents the character announced by the narrator, always in terms of where they are at the start of a sequence and importantly, what time of day this action is taking place. If a segment shifts location or time, the narrator generally offers us the particulars, and most sequences end as well with another announcement of time (“Nikki was dead at 4:23”). By following these indicators, we can construct the chart. Each colored rectangle represents a narrative sequence; the gaps indicate temporal breaks. To “read” each line from top to bottom is to go through all of the film on the day of the race. Ordinarily we would have to line up the sequences in time, as shown in this chart. When do we go backwards? By a lot or a little? And more importantly, when do we go back over time we have already seen elsewhere or by some other point of view? To see that on the chart, one must construct vertical time slices after we’ve seen all the pieces. When we do, as we might expect, the overlap and the expressions of simultaneity are considerable.

     

    The film has some interesting means to express simultaneity, generally through repetition, which perhaps keeps it from being completely impossible to follow. However, its genius lies in the conceptual nature of this enterprise, the glimpses of a grand design which are far larger than the simple signs that can initiate the investigation.

     

    Easy-to-read repetitions obviously include the racetrack announcer, who can tell us that the seventh race is about to begin or a horse is down. Others include repetitions of dialogue, such as Maurice the Wrestler’s staged racial epithet as he begins to cause a scene. When these repetitions occur, we know we are back where we’ve been, free now to see another piece of the puzzle. Some use of this kind of construction is not unique to The Killing. What is unique is the extent to which it becomes the organizing principle of the work. One clear predecessor (as for so many movies) is Citizen Kane, whose flashback structure also has pointed overlaps–Susan’s opera debut being shown twice would be one instance among many. It’s not for nothing that Kane and The Killing both make overt use of the jigsaw puzzle metaphor, as both films also make clear that their pieces aren’t going to fit. Also, what constitutes a “piece” becomes a nice problem, as particularly in The Killing, we often might not be sure where and how the overlaps are coming. There is, in fact, only one true flashback in the film, tossed in like one of those moments in a jazz improvisation where the melody is played straight, to show that the person breaking the rules knows what they are. That one flashback occurs in a scene in which most of the gang are still alive and are back at their rendezvous-apartment. There they recall how the money bag had been thrown out the window to land at the feet of Randi the Cop–an action we had already seen from inside during one of Johnny’s sequences. In The Killing we lurch back and forth in a manner that only comes to make sense retrospectively.

     

    Along with the narrator, the failed mastermind Johnny warns us of this difficulty in seeing the big picture. Johnny is that combination of grandiose, power-mad genius and dumb sap so familiar in Kubrick–in no small ways, something like both God and a film director. The linkage between the artist and the gangster is made perhaps too explicit in a near incomprehensible speech by the heavily-accented Maurice,2 but importantly, while Johnny has come up with the grand scheme, he doesn’t motivate or control it. Johnny is under the thumb of the narrator as completely as all other characters, and while he gets somewhat more attention (see the chart again), he has no privileged position. The king on the chessboard is still a piece, and still as vulnerable to attack.

     

    An important consequence of this temporal strategy is spatial isolation, although we could as well reverse the equation–the sequences of isolation lead to the temporal overlaps (the small diagram below seeks to represent this notion). Members of the gang during the course of the robbery rarely see each other. They can occupy the same space briefly, Johnny going in a door as Maurice is dragged away by a gaggle of security cops, but only as they go in different directions (and/or to their deaths). As such, the little boxes of the chart have a counterpart in the separation of spaces. Even though most of the film takes place at one racetrack, our view of it is greatly fragmented. The task of filling in the spaces, as it were, is just as conceptual as the temporal ordering. In both cases, the filling in is a mental activity on our part of grand designs Kubrick suggests through his ingeniously fragmentary construction. We as much have to figure out a temporal ordering as a spatial arrangement; the two, of course, strongly depend upon each other.

     

    In his useful new biography of Kubrick, Vincent LoBrutto reports (very thoroughly, but without all the irony it deserves) that Hollywood was less than pleased with Kubrick’s temporal experiment. Attempts were made, fortunately to no avail, to see if the film could be recut and presented in a more classical manner (LoBrutto 123). That would be rather like Michael Powell trying to do The Red Shoes in black-and-white, taking the film’s reason for being and seeing if it could be eliminated. These last-minute fears about intelligibility have, of course, dogged Kubrick throughout his career.

     

    Back at the racetrack, let’s add some spatial considerations to our temporal ones. In a simple reconstructed overview, let’s visualize the space of the film as follows:

     

    Even in so simple a view, some things become apparent a bit more easily. For one, the space of the film is extremely limited (maybe not much bigger than the Overlook Hotel in The Shining, say). Even though nobody hardly ever sees anyone else, you’d think they’d have a hard time not doing so. If Nikki’s shot at Red Lightning were to miss, he’d as likely hit Johnny or the easy target of Maurice. In other words, temporal isolation enforces spatial separation. Also, the spaces are used as isolated fragments. Even though no more than a door or a window may separate two spaces, they are as likely to be shown to us in separated temporal segments. Johnny going through a door in one episode won’t come out the other side until much “later” in another sequence. (The same can be said many times, of money bags, girl friends, cops.)

     

    Seen as a construction in this manner, The Killing becomes something like what it already is, a grandly conceptual vision that perhaps can be expressed in something like a video game as much as a movie, or as much a chessboard filled with game pieces as a jigsaw puzzle. To that end, I have taken the visual pieces included here and put together a way to explore the film which uses space and time to explore each other. Clicking on the chart above would take you to the appropriate point in the film, together with a model of the space in question and an indication on an overview of where this moment/place belongs. It’s only by visualizing this linkage between isolated spaces and temporal overlaps that one begins to appreciate the conceptual complexity of Kubrick’s film. To that end, a few of the 3-D recreations are included here, and it will be left to the reader to see where they would belong in the earlier time chart, though it’s not feasible to include the corresponding video clips here as well.3

     

    Click here to see the 3-D images
     

    To look at one key moment in a bit more detail, we can examine the all-important shooting of Red Lightning, which signals the delay (Johnny using a wise Kubrick strategy) that allows the money to be in one place long enough for Johnny to steal it. While this is only one instance of temporal overlap, it gives a pretty good idea of how the rest of the film also works (Johnny getting in the door during Maurice’s diversionary fight, finding a way to get the money out of the park, and the gang shootout are a few other examples of the same narrative strategy). We can take a little “time slice” of one hour and see how extensive the overlap becomes–pieces of the same hour are shown during five separate sequences.

     

    In virtually every one of the episodes, not everything goes according to plan, but it goes smoothly enough to keep the whole enterprise lurching forward. Nikki shoots the horse as he was hired to do, but is himself killed. Earlier when accepting the assignment, Nikki has theorized what the effects of his act will be, but Johnny characteristically insists upon the importance of his remaining in the dark. Ironically, however, Nikki’s horseshoe-aided demise seems to be the result of his own human deficiencies and not Johnny’s plan. (Like Major Kong in Strangelove, the guy who delivers the goods is the first to go.) We get an inkling of simultaneity when the “horse is down” announcement is heard while Johnny dons his disguise just before bursting into the money-counting room. In another near screw-up, after sending the money through the window, Johnny escapes as planned, but only because the drunken Marv has ignored his instruction to stay away from the track and is there to bump into a returning security guard. Are we seeing unplanned contingencies or major errors? Is there a grand design? The horse-shooting suggests the general orientation–the isolated pieces fit in terms of a strategy, but the foul-ups can never be fully accounted for. Somebody’s always going to fight in the War Room.

     

    Click here to Get Quicktime File – 3-D Model of Betting Area
     

    In John Huston’s great earlier version of the grand caper, The Asphalt Jungle (also starring, of course, the wonderful Sterling Hayden), the plan falls apart because of human weaknesses of the participants involved. The Killing seems to offer a similar conclusion, but it veers into more complex territory. The ability to conceive the exploit, like the bone-becoming-weapon in 2001: A Space Odyssey, carries both the brilliance of the plan and with it the capacity for self-destruction. (The title 2001, by the way, is also a nice temporal indicator.) By the time Johnny’s plan has fallen apart in at least a dozen ways, one almost begins to adopt Johnny’s own bit of philosophy in the film’s last line: “what’s the use?”. The problem lies in the difference between the elegant conceptual construction and the need to use human beings to execute that construction. What makes The Killing particularly brilliant is that its own daring construction exposes that process so extensively.

     

    Notes

     

    1. This article assumes the reader has already seen the film, so no summary is provided. For one very useful breakdown of the film, see Falsetto 100-123.

     

    2. Quoted by Falsetto, 106-107.

     

    3.The author wishes to acknowledge the contributions of one of his students, Kevin Scharff, to the 3-D model.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Deleuze, Gilles. Cinema 2: The Time-Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.
    • Falsetto, Mario. “Patterns of Filmic Narration in The Killing and Lolita.Perspectives on Kubrick. NY: G.K. Hall, 1996. 100-123.
    • The Killing. Dir. Stanley Kubrick. Perf. Vince Edwards, Jay C. Flipper, Coleen Gray, Sterling Hayden, and Marie Windsor. United Artists, 1956.
    • LoBrutto, Vincent. Stanley Kubrick: A Biography. NY: Donald I. Fine Books, l997.

     

  • Transnational Cinema, Hybrid Identities and the Films of Evans Chan

    Gina Marchetti

    University of Maryland and
    Nanyang Technological University
    tgmarchetti@ntu.edu.sg

     

     

    Figures 1 and 2: Posters for To Liv(e) and Crossings.

     

    Introduction

     

    This article looks at the changing shapes of global Chinese cinema through the works of Hong Kong/New York filmmaker Evans Chan. As Chinese films cross beyond traditional borders, they move in directions and among audiences far removed from the Hong Kong, Taiwan, Southeast Asian, and “Chinatown” markets that transnational Chinese cinema addressed from its inception. From the edges of Hong Kong’s traditional markets, there emerges a new kind of film culture, mingling more freely with Taiwan and the PRC, drawing on the overseas Chinese experience, produced by filmmakers who often live outside Asia. This give and take between Hong Kong (or China) and the world necessitates a new way of thinking about film culture that transcends the linguistic and cultural determinism of national cinema as well as the aesthetic strictures of established auteurs, genres, and styles.

     

    Thinking Beyond Culture

     

    The politics of multiculturalism has recently been hotly debated within American society. However, few efforts have gone beyond the “smorgasbord” approach to culture. A “taste” of African music, a sampling of Latin American literature, an appreciation of a Chinese holiday represent tokenism at its worst or the frustrations of identity politics seeking to convey the essence of a culture to the broader body politic with little more than a tourist’s gaze. Scholarship coming from a variety of disciplines has sought to engage this problem (see Shohat and Stam). How can culture be looked at within the context of a national body politic when that body is divided by race, ethnicity, class, gender, and sexuality? Postcolonial theory has contributed the notion of hybridity to these debates, and a call to place all notions of an “essential” identity into question within the multiple identities available within the postmodern metropolis (see Bhabha and Chow). Others call for a “radical” multiculturalism that refuses to conceal the issues of power and struggle behind the “melting pot” veneer of contemporary culture (see West). Within these debates, the centrality of the economy and globalization of the culture industry cannot be neglected. Filmmakers, for example, may live in one country, make all their films in a second country, and find financing in a third, while hoping to address a global, polyglot audience with a localized narrative. Because of the transnational nature of these films, a new, “transcultural” politics of representation needs to be elucidated.1.

     

    The oeuvre of Evans Chan can be taken as a case study of the difficulty and the necessity of developing a transcultural approach within film studies. Chan is a New York-based filmmaker, born in mainland China, bred in Macao, educated in Hong Kong and America, who makes independent narrative films primarily for a Hong Kong, overseas Chinese, “greater China” audience. His films straddle the gulf between the international art film and Hong Kong commercial cinema, and thus have also attracted some international art film viewers.

     

    To date, Chan has completed two features, To Liv(e)2 (1991) and Crossings3 (1994). Both these films openly address issues that find only a marginal voice in the mainstream cinema of Hong Kong and the United States. With one foot in the United States and the other in Hong Kong, Chan can freely address diverse issues. His films look at Hong Kong’s return to China in 1997 and the legacy of June 4th in Tian’anmen Square. Both examine the role of women in the world economy (in the “official” economy and the “informal sector” that can include prostitutes and traffickers in narcotics). Each film looks at the processes of immigration and dispersal involving the Chinese globally. While fears of censorship arising from Hong Kong’s laws and the unofficial censorship of the marketplace in the United States place a boundary around what can be said in the cinema, Chan, with his transnational production team, manages to seriously explore controversial topics. In this way, Chan creates a transnational, transcultural discourse through the medium of the motion picture, pointing to a new type of cultural sphere that must be noted within film studies (see Lu, Franncia, and Fore).

     

    Determining Indeterminacy: To Liv(e) and Crossings

     

    In The Geopolitical Aesthetic: Cinema and Space in the World System, Fredric Jameson devotes a chapter to Edward Yang’s Terrorizer. Jameson notes that the film is poised between the modern and the postmodern:

     

    What we must admire, therefore, is the way in which the filmmaker has arranged for these two powerful interpretative temptations--the modern and the postmodern, subjectivity and textuality--to neutralize each other, to hold each other in one long suspension in such a way that the film can exploit and draw on the benefits of both, without having to commit itself to either as some definitive reading, or as some definitive formal and stylistic category. Besides Edward Yang's evident personal mastery, the possibility of this kind of mutually reinforcing suspension may owe something to the situation of Third-World cinema itself, in traditions in which neither modernist nor postmodern impulses are internally generated, so that both arrive in the field of production with a certain chronological simultaneity in full post-war modernization. (151)

     

    To Liv(e) and Crossings can be looked at in a similar way. They can be seen as works suspended between the modern and the postmodern; indeed, their textual strategies rely on this deeply rooted indeterminacy to explore people and issues that are themselves difficult to determine.

     

    Like Yang, Chan is profoundly influenced by European cinema. The English title, To Liv(e), for example, conjures up both Godard and Gorin’s Letter to Jane as well as Ingmar Bergman’s many works with Liv Ullmann. Chan characterizes the film as “inevitably a response to both Bergman and Godard” (Chan 6). Chan’s film can be looked at as part of the international New Wave discussed by Robert Kolker in The Altering Eye. In her insightful essay on the film, “The Aesthetics of Protest: Evans Chan’s To Liv(e),” Patricia Brett Erens outlines the various ways in which the film draws on Godard. As Erens observes, To Liv(e) favors an aesthetic sensibility rooted in a Brechtian tradition of dramatic distance and political engagement.

     

    Peter Wollen’s approach to Godard’s political films as “counter cinema” can be used here to further elucidate this legacy in both To Liv(e) and Crossings. To Liv(e), for example, is organized around a series of letters addressed to Liv Ullmann. These letters admonish Ullmann for her criticism of Hong Kong’s deportation of Vietnamese “boat people” in December, 1989. Ullmann fails to mention Hong Kong’s own uncertain future when it becomes part of the People’s Republic of China, still bloodied from the events of that June. Rubie (Lindzay Chan) composes these letters, which are sometimes read as voice-overs and sometimes read by the character directly addressing the camera. The letters run parallel to other plot lines involving Rubie’s lover, family, and circle of friends.

     

    The impact of Godard is clearly apparent in the scene in which Rubie reads her first letter to Liv. Over a shot of boats used as a transitional device, the tinny, hollow sound of a recording of Cui Jian’s “Nothing To My Name” comes up on the sound track. The camera pans across an audience; Rubie is seated in the auditorium. A dance performance “Exhausted Silkworms” [3 MB Quicktime Clip], inspired by the events of June 4th, takes place on stage. Three male dancers, dressed simply in white shirts and black pants, tear their clothes to form gags and, later, nooses. A red scarf is pulled out of one dancer’s shirt like spurting blood. As “Nothing To My Name” ends, one dancer falls, as if shot. Suspended for a moment with a freeze frame, he finally lands on the ground, as the audience applauds.

     

    This performance is layered by the inclusion of Rubie’s first letter as a voice-over. As the dancers perform, Rubie’s address to Liv Ullmann (and, through her, to the world at large) adds another dimension to both Cui Jian’s rock music, which says nothing explicit about “democracy” or politics at all, and to the performers’ reenactment of the Tian’anmen demonstration and its suppression. As the dancers act out this violence, accompanied by Cui Jian’s harsh and direct vocals, Rubie likens Liv Ullmann to a respected, distant portrait that comes to life and slaps her in the face with accusations of cruelty and indifference. Rubie not only complains of Ullmann’s ignorance about the Hong Kong situation that her statement about the Vietnamese displays, but also questions her timing. Speaking just months after Tian’anmen, an event that was taken by many in Hong Kong as a barometer of what to expect after 1997, Rubie reminds Ullmann that the population of Hong Kong may soon find themselves in the same boat, so to speak, as the Vietnamese.

     

    In this scene there is a juxtaposition of two visual planes. One features Rubie as the originator of the letter. Close-ups of her face accompany the voice-over presentation of the contents of the letter, grounding the letter in the person of Rubie as a fictional character. The other visual plane, using the same images, features Rubie as a spectator, clearly moved by the dance presentation. There are also two audio planes: Cui Jian’s music and the sounds of the auditorium on one, and Rubie’s voice-over letter to Liv on the other. In this fragmented presentation of narrative information, all the elements of “counter cinema” come into play. Narrative intransitivity comes to the fore in the casual introduction of an evening at the theatre for Rubie’s character; time is thrown out of synch because Rubie writes the letter heard in the voice-over at another time and in another place away from the theatre. There is an estrangement from the character of Rubie as she becomes a mouthpiece for the people of Hong Kong, addressing an actual person about actual events, in addition to being a fictional character involved in other plot developments. Her address is not to other fictional characters, but to Liv, and to the world at large represented by the film audience. Foregrounding occurs as the film spectators are invited to see themselves as witnesses to the dance performance, and, by extension, the events in Tian’anmen, and think of themselves, with Rubie, as something more than spectators. Watching Rubie look at a political work of art foregrounds To Liv(e)‘s own status as a similar work of political commentary. The diegesis splits, featuring a self-contained performance work within the film. Aperture must be noted, since an understanding of the references in the dance depends on a familiarity with the mass media spectacle of June 4th, including photos of the demonstrators standing together in the square, Cui Jian’s presence, etc. The unpleasure of the breaking of classical conventions is self-evident, as is the non-fictional basis of the entire scene as a commentary on actual events; i.e., the expulsion of the Vietnamese, Ullmann’s trip to Hong Kong and public condemnation of Hong Kong’s action, the events of June 4th in Tian’anmen, etc. Fictional and non-fictional realms overlap.

     

    However, it would be wrong to conclude that To Liv(e) is simply an imitation of Godard. There is another element to this scene that takes the film in a radically different direction. While Rubie is presented as an agent addressing Ullmann, a spokesperson for Hong Kong, and as a spectator of a dance piece (and, by extension, a political event), Rubie is also depicted as distracted. Near the beginning of the scene, she looks at her watch and looks around the auditorium. Later, the fact that Rubie is waiting for her brother, Tony (Wong Yiu-Ming), is revealed. Rubie’s relationship with her brother, his fiancée, and her family propels the film into another, totally different arena, i.e., the realm of the love story and family melodrama. Rubie may be the voice of Hong Kong, but she also plays the roles of daughter, sister, lover, and friend in other parts of the narrative. Her distraction as a character points to a more general “distraction” found within the narrative itself. To echo Jameson, the “textuality” of counter cinema meets the “subjectivity” of the melodrama, the “woman’s film,” and the love story.

     

    Figure 3: Rubie’s brother Tony (Wong Yiu-Ming) in an intimate pose with his financée, Teresa (Josephine Ku), in To Liv(e) (production still).
    Figure 4: Tony with Teresa (production still).

     

    There is a similar sense of distraction in Crossings. While less directly indebted to the European New Wave, Crossings still bears the marks of cinematic modernism. Again, fiction and non-fiction overlap as actual footage of Tian’anmen 1989 is cut into newscasts in which fictional characters appear. Dance presentations divide the diegesis further into self-contained fictional realms. Characters again function as mouthpieces for policies or ideas as well as fictional creations involved in narrative events. Rubie (again played by Lindzay Chan) reappears to serve this function again, appearing on New York television as the public voice of the Chinatown community and, through voice-over excerpts from a diary, as the personal voice of the Hong Kong emigrant. However, while To Liv(e) has more clearly demarcated divisions between the various layers of the discourse, Crossings, closer to Yang’s Terrorizer and other works of the Taiwanese and Hong Kong New Wave, experiments with time and space to a much larger degree. Distraction, in fact, becomes disorientation, since from scene to scene it is often difficult to figure out whether the location is New York or Hong Kong.

     

    In one scene, for example, Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen), the film’s female lead, has just finished a meeting with Rubie in Central Park. She walks past a shop window displaying a model airliner. The film cuts to a shot of clouds passing over the moon, followed by a graphic match on a toilet bowl. Mo-Yung is vomiting. Members of her family come back from a shopping trip and notice the smell of the vomit. In this case, the transition from New York City to Hong Kong and earlier story events is quite abrupt. The shot in the bathroom offers no clue to Mo-Yung’s whereabouts. Rather, this disorienting presentation of time and place mirrors the contemporary experience of immigration. Unlike previous generations of explorers, pilgrims, colonialists, pirates, and other travellers, contemporary wanderers travel according to a different set of rules and restrictions. Instantaneous communication via international telephone lines connects the spaces again in a different way. (Later, in the scene mentioned above, Mo-Yung receives a call from her boyfriend Benny [Simon Yam] in New York, again reorganizing the sense of space presented in the film.) Jet travel condenses the time and space between New York and Hong Kong even further. If the spectator is disoriented following the character’s disorientation, then the fictional world simply reflects a postmodern experience of time and space.

     

    Here, Jameson’s difficulty with Yang’s Terrorizer as both modern and postmodern begins to make sense for To Liv(e) and Crossings as well. While both have elements of counter cinema and both fit within the generic parameters of Hong Kong commercial film as love stories, crime stories, and melodramas, they seem to be doing something that adds up to more than just the sum of these modernist and commercial parts. They have a “schizophrenic” quality that can be seen in their titles. The English title, To Liv(e), is a deconstructed play on words referring to Liv Ullmann, Letter to Jane, and a heartfelt desire for the people of Hong Kong to somehow endure and “to live.” The title in Chinese, roughly translated as Love Songs From a Floating World, refers to the other face of the film that deals with romantic relationships and a Chinese tradition of misdirected and/or impossible love.

     

    Crossings offers a similar case in point. The English title conjures up images of immigration, exile, nomadism, the modern metropolis as a “crossroads,” while the Chinese title, Wrong Love, refers to unhappy affairs of the heart. As the titles imply, these polyglot films offer a multiple address and, potentially, a multiple interpretation, or at least a divided ordering of narrative hierarchies, for the English-speaking, art film audience at festivals and art cinemas globally, for the expanding circle of Asian American film spectators, and for the Chinese-speaking audience looking at the films in relation to the standard Hong Kong commercial product.

     

    However, it is wrong to look at the films as split discourses in this way, because another possible address needs to be taken into consideration. Rather than operating as a dialectic between the art film and the commercial love story, between English and Chinese, the films can be taken as palimpsests where the elements overlie one another, obscuring meaning for some, illuminating a different kind of meaning for others. A new meaning is not created through the clash of contradictory discourses, as can be seen in the work of Godard. Rather, layers sit on top of one another, some (almost) postcolonial in English, some diasporic and accented in American English, some (almost) post-socialist in Chinese, some modern and part of the tail end of an international New Wave, others postmodern and part of contemporary global cinema culture.

     

    Although To Liv(e) and Crossings are quite different, more than a single director links the works together. Taken as a set, they comment on certain common themes (e.g., Hong Kong 1997, immigration, changing family and social relationships in “Greater China,” etc.) from two different temporal and spatial perspectives. To Liv(e) primarily looks at the edginess of Hong Kong residents who are able to leave, but may or may not leave before July 1997. Crossings looks primarily at newly transplanted Hong Kong émigrés in New York City, i.e., at immigration as a fait accompli rather than as a possibility. Two anchors hold these two films together. One is a contemplation of June 4th in Tian’anmen Square, and the other is Rubie. The first represents a common location away from both Hong Kong and the world beyond the People’s Republic at a specific point in time that galvanized the world’s attention on China. The other represents a certain face and voice that embody the socio-political as well as the personal, psychological issues addressed by both texts. Both Tian’anmen and Rubie are difficult to pin down, and it is the indeterminacy of both that forms the heart of this analysis of these films.

     

    From Tian’anmen to Times Square

     

    There has been a great deal of recent discussion of location within film and cultural studies circles (see Kaplan). Issues of where a scholar is located geographically, politically, and otherwise come up as concerns for evaluation of research. However, the positioning of any intellectual brings to bear many problems. As Rey Chow points out in her work on Chinese intellectuals, looking for an “authentic” voice or a “native” position presupposes an Orientalist belief in a pure and distinct other and represents a desire on the part of the critic rather than anything or anyone that actually exists (1-26).

     

    To Liv(e) and Crossings are both positioned in a similarly mercurial way. While characters move around Hong Kong and New York City and talk about places as diverse as Australia, Canada, Scandinavia, Italy, and South Africa, the films inevitably come back to Beijing, specifically to Tian’anmen, as a starting point. While footage and still photos of the May-June 1989 demonstrations appear, no plot action occurs in Beijing. Indeed, very little is said about the demonstrations at all.4 (See Hinton.) Rather, Tian’anmen anchors the slippery identities of the films’ characters as well as the slippery identities those characters represent as citizens of Hong Kong or as immigrants elsewhere.

     

    One scene in To Liv(e) brings to the fore this question of identity in relation to Tian’anmen. Rubie and her activist friend Trini have a snack in a Hong Kong noodle house after seeing an anti-nuclear performance. The scene begins as Trini talks about her family, resettled in England, and her white British husband. She is not keen to immigrate to England, however, because of the treatment she received from the British embassy while in Beijing during the demonstrations. She goes on at length about her experiences. At one point, she contacted the embassy to help some Hong Kong students escape arrest as “counter-revolutionaries.” The reply from the embassy was: “This should teach them a lesson. They should have thought twice before interfering with other people’s business.” On another occasion, Trini contacted the embassy for an escort to the airport. Her request was denied by the same staff member because her party was travelling on documents issued by the PRC government, implying that the bearers were considered Chinese citizens. Trini sums up the situation as follows:

     

    The first time he denied us help was because we're non-Chinese and he advised us to "think twice before interfering with other people's business." The second time he refused to help was because we are Chinese. We're Chinese subjects travelling with our re-entry permit. Either way we lose! What does he want us to be? My conclusion is we're not British subjects. We're probably British objects--to be freely disposed of. (Wong 35)

     

    In To Liv(e), Tian’anmen is filtered through the experiences of a number of characters. All of these experiences of Tian’anmen have one thing in common: the positioning of the characters as spectators. Rubie watches in the audience as dancers perform “Exhausted Silkworms” about the events in Tian’anmen. The newsreel footage of Hong Kong demonstrations in support of the Tian’anmen demonstrators illustrates one of Rubie’s letters. She listens as her friend, Trini, acting as an activist/journalist during the demonstrations, finally concludes that she was an outsider in Tian’anmen, a spectator rather than a participant. Trini notes, “We’re only onlookers. There’s no question about that.” Rubie also listens as Elsie Tu, a white resident of Hong Kong, a former missionary and social activist (playing herself) describes her reaction:

     

    The Tian'anmen Massacre has thrown everything into a dilemma for me. On the one hand, I can't be disloyal to China. On the other hand, I can't accept what happened. I wonder, am I going to see the people I've been living with all my life be massacred if they speak up? In any case, I do plan to stay in Hong Kong till the end.... I've devoted all my life trying to make Hong Kong a better place and I, too, would like to know what happens here after 1997. (Wong 49)

     

    Rubie, Elsie Tu, and Trini are all caught up in the problem of identity. Neither Chinese nor British, they are activists and onlookers uncertain of what they can or should be doing to help themselves and, by extension, Hong Kong.

     

    In Crossings, the use of Tian’anmen as a point from which identity may or may not be determined continues. Here, the shift is from Hong Kong to New York’s Chinatown community. During the credit sequence, Rubie appears on a television news segment discussing apathy in the Chinese community on the anniversary of June 4th. Introduced by an image of the “Goddess of Democracy,” a woman newscaster remarks: “Almost five years after the Tian’anmen Square Massacre, amnesia seems to have set in New York’s Chinatown. Is the United States foreign policy toward China still obsessively based on a tragedy that has no bearing on today’s reality?” Rubie appears as an expert to answer this question. However, her reply is non-responsive: “I feel that China and America are intimately connected.” She continues as an off-screen voice, “Did you know the boots Chinese soldiers wore to put down the demonstrators were made in America and the gloves American medics wear to protect themselves from AIDS are made in China?”

     

    Here, America is brought into the equation and implicated in the Tian’anmen events. However, the connection, like the connection of Rubie to the students and other demonstrators with whom she empathizes, remains vague. As Rubie comments on the anniversary of Tian’anmen off-screen, another character, the psychotic American, Joey (Ted Brunetti), laughs hysterically on screen, enjoying a joke with some imaginary cronies. Rubie’s observations on the political dimensions of the global economy are juxtaposed with Joey’s lunatic obsessions with Asia and Asian women.

     

    At this point, Tian’anmen comes closer to another square, Times Square, as the center for New York’s sex trade. Times Square takes up as a spatial reference where Tian’anmen leaves off. The painter John (Fung Kin Chung), Rubie’s boyfriend in To Liv(e), laughingly mentions that he can always work as a street artist in Times Square, like his mainland counterparts. Indeed, struggling Chinese painters can be found on the streets of New York, Paris, and other cities, trying to eke out a living painting portraits and caricatures of tourists. John fears, though, that he is not as tough as these other artists. Later, a shot of Times Square appears in Crossings, but no artists are present. In this scene, Rubie compares New York to Chang An (Xi’an) during the Tang Dynasty as a “crossroads” of civilizations. From the Goddess of Democracy to the Statute of Liberty, from Tian’anmen to Times Square, the “crossroads” of China and America, specifically New York, point to an unsettling dislocation.

     

    From Organic to Diasporic Intellectual

     

    Contrasting the “traditional” with the “organic” intellectual, Antonio Gramsci saw the former as educated to maintain the status quo of the powers ascendant at that time, while the “organic” intellectual rose from the ranks of the subaltern classes in order to act as a mouthpiece for their concerns and empower them with a voice in the larger body politic. The idea of the “organic intellectual” has been influential in the thinking of many theorists since Gramsci. More recently, another view of public intellectuals has become current, i.e., the “diasporic” intellectual. Unlike the organic intellectual who remains rooted in the community from which he/she emerged, the diasporic intellectual moves between nations, cultures, languages, and other “positions.” Indeed, the “position” as well as the “location” of the diasporic intellectual is often difficult to pin down.

     

    From the scattering of the Frankfurt School, to the postcoloniality of Said, Spivak, and Bhabha, to the work of Stuart Hall (see Chen) in cultural studies, the diasporic intellectual works from the perspective of exile and/or immigration, from the pain as well as the freedom of displacement.

     

    In the character of Rubie, To Liv(e) and Crossings create a fictional representation of the process of transformation of a concerned, educated, “organic” intellectual into a “diasporic” intellectual. Like the activist Elsie Tu, who appears in To Liv(e) as the disillusioned British missionary/housewife turned urban activist, Rubie in Crossings leaves behind her roots in Hong Kong to take up the role of community activist and spokeswoman in New York City.

     

    In this way, the character of Rubie (played by Lindzay Chan in both films) acts as the other bridge that links To Liv(e) and Crossings. Although it is never made explicit that a single, unified “Rubie” is exactly the same character in both films, the two Rubies clearly function in the same way in both texts and in most ways can be taken as a single character.

     

    However, the possible identity of the two Rubies does not belie the fact that the character is presented as a conflicted, often contradictory presence in the two films. As such, she represents all those conflicts of identity central to the thematic dynamics of both films. On the one hand, her roots are found among the poorer quarters of Hong Kong society. During a scene depicting a rather uncomfortable family gathering, her father digresses on the family history as squatters selling groceries, moving from one temporary housing development to another, threatened by floods and ravaged by fire, as well as by corrupt officials demanding kickbacks for a business license. The family is taken under the wing of Elsie Tu, who uses her influence to set the family up in a legitimate shop.

     

    From these lower middle class, small merchant roots, the children emerge as full-fledged members of Hong Kong’s professional/intellectual sector. Rubie is a journalist who becomes a community activist/social worker in New York. Her brother Tony is a highly skilled radiologist, and the eldest brother has successfully established himself in Canada. Unlike their parents, the children have the education and skills to move outside a Chinese environment into a global, English-based, diasporic community of post-colonial professionals and intellectuals plying their trades along the path of the former British empire–from Canada to Australia, the United States, and South Africa. They come from an impoverished China, but they move now in other circles. Ironically, it is the experience of colonialism (here embodied by the personal patronage of former British missionary Elsie Tu) that makes this movement and this upward mobility possible.

     

    At one point, Rubie pays a visit to her family home and shop. It is filled with the details of a marginal, small merchant’s existence, including the outdoor tables and shop, the bare floor of the main living room, the worn table used as part of the elevated family shrine, the special, round table top brought in for the family gathering, the padded, old-fashioned vest and trousers worn by her mother. It becomes clear Rubie has not always led a solidly bourgeois existence. It may seem that the casting of the Eurasian actress Lindzay Chan in this role and the inclusion of her reading from the lengthy series of letters to Liv in English contradicts this picture of Rubie’s humble origins. Not only does this contradiction alienate the spectator from the character, but it also serves to highlight the indeterminate identity and position of the people of Hong Kong as Chinese British subjects, as educated and superstitious, as Western and Asian, as poor and struggling and established and well-to-do.

     

    Rubie speaks in two voices–in fluent Cantonese and in impeccable British-accented English. Like Hong Kong itself, sometimes she looks Western, British, white and sometimes she looks Chinese and Asian. For example, in To Liv(e), she reads several of her letters directly addressing the camera in medium shots, seated against a British union jack, the American stars and stripes, and the flag of the People’s Republic of China. Interestingly, when she is shot in front of the Chinese flag, the lighting of her hair accentuates its reddish highlights. The light allows her to blend in with the flag at the same time it emphasizes her distinctiveness as a Eurasian performer. Rubie sometimes plays the role of a British subject, the role of an ethnic Chinese, the role of an Asian American immigrant, and, most importantly, the role of a character of an indeterminate identity.

     

    In Crossings, Rubie tells another story about her origins. She explains her features as a throwback to the Tang Dynasty when she must have acquired some European ancestor from exchanges on the Silk Route. The fact that Rubie’s ethnic and cultural hybridity needs to be explained at all is itself telling. Addressing the reception of To Liv(e), Evans Chan has commented on critics who demand an “authentic” Hong Kong subject:

     

    One controversial issue the film does occasion seems to be the establishment of 'the (post-)colonial subject,' hence the problematic status of the letters which are written in English.... I can understand the film's identity being characterized as schizophrenic, however, the notion that English is alien to the film's yet-to-be-post colonial identity is curious. After all, English is still primarily the official language of Hong Kong, where three major English dailies and two English TV channels permeate the everyday life of the educated class. Legal proceedings are conducted in English and Chinese politicians make speeches in English at the Legislative Council. If an average Hong Kong citizen speaks little English, that proves how linguistic schizophrenia may turn out to be a colonial legacy that will take some time, provided the will, to eradicate. ...That Hong Kong is a linguistically hybridized being is a fact that the film is not obliged to transcend. (5)

     

    Rubie functions as the voice of Hong Kong, expressing, through her letters in To Liv(e) and her diary and appearances on the television news as an “expert” insider in Crossings, the hopes and fears of her community. Her identity and the identity of that community may be difficult to pin down as they slip among Britain, America, Hong Kong, and China, between the lower small merchant classes and the upwardly mobile professionals, between a “traditional” older generation and a more urbane younger one. Rubie, however, manages to embody this cacophony of “voices.”

     

    Rubie is more than a “mouth,” however; she is also an “ear.” Throughout To Liv(e), the “ear” appears again and again as a motif associated with both Hong Kong as a place and Rubie as a character. Near the end of the film, the painting John has been working on throughout is revealed to be a picture of an ear. To break the tension of her brother’s departure, John orchestrates a Vincent Van Gogh practical joke with a bloody cloth over the side of his face and a fake, severed ear. Still unsteady from having just prevented her brother’s attempted suicide, Rubie faints at the sight of the phony severed ear and falls into a dream in which the ear reappears.

     

    Figure 5: Dream sequence with the severed ear featuring John (Fung Kin Chung) and Rubie (Lindzay Chan) in To Liv(e) (production still).
    Figure 6: Dream sequence featuring Tony (Wong Yiu-Ming) and Teresa (Josephine Ku) as Rubie imagines them as a self-destructive and troubled couple.

     

    In her last letter to Liv, Rubie refers to George Bernard Shaw’s trip to Hong Kong in 1933:

     

    Hong Kong 1933 didn't seem to exist for Bernard Shaw, except as a bad ear messed up by the British for communication with China. And an imperfect ear we've always been--as a bastardized link between a China weighed down by tradition and the clamorous demands of modernity. (Chan 61)

     

    Throughout both films, Rubie is this same kind of “bastardized” ear, understanding English (and, through that, the perspectives of the British, American, and international community represented by Liv Ullmann) and Chinese (through Cantonese, she understands the Hong Kong Chinese and, through Mandarin, she understands the “greater China” community). Her trained, cultivated ear can appreciate experimental satiric theatre as well as Italo Calvino and the films of Ingmar Bergman. Like the organic intellectual, she can “hear” the marginalized and dispossessed as well as the bourgeoisie. Like the diasporic intellectual, she can “hear” the subtleties of the official and unofficial proclamations of various governments and other institutions.

     

    Indeed, Rubie moves in a social world that is marked by this cultural and linguistic hybridity. This “floating world” of transnational, petit bourgeois labor includes artists, professionals, activists, journalists, among others, who are young, educated, culturally astute, and mobile. Although business people, artists, theatrical performers, and professionals like lawyers and doctors find their way into commercial popular culture, intellectuals seldom make a serious appearance in the cinema (see Ross). To Liv(e) and Crossings, therefore, are unusual.

     

    In both To Liv(e) and Crossings, Rubie’s circle is rich in characters who are involved in a variety of artistic and intellectual endeavors. Again, like Bergman and Godard, Chan favors educated, thoughtful, cultured protagonists. In To Liv(e), Rubie’s boyfriend John busily works on his paintings and reads to Tony from Calvino’s Invisible Cities; Rubie attends experimental dance performances (“Exhausted Silkworms” on Tian’anmen, “Nuclear Goddess” on Daya Bay, China’s first nuclear power plant, constructed in suspiciously close proximity to Hong Kong); Rubie’s brother’s girlfriend, Teresa (Josephine Ku), relaxes as an experimental video piece plays on her television; Rubie quotes George Bernard Shaw and The New York Times in her letters to Liv.

     

    Figure 7: “Nuclear Goddess” performed by Karen Suen and South ASLI dancers (production still).
    Figure 8: Rubie and her artist boyfriend, John in To Liv(e) (production still).

     

    This world is not only cultured but cosmopolitan. Rubie’s friends and relatives are part of a global society. In addition to Rubie’s elder brother in Canada and younger brother on his way to Australia, Rubie’s circle includes the interracial couples (Chris and Leanne, Trini and her husband), ex-patriots like Elsie Tu, overseas Chinese like Tony’s old flame Michelle, on a trip back from the United States, and many others.

     

    Crossings extends Rubie’s circle even more. Again, Rubie functions as a bridge between various groups. Rubie befriends Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen), who is an illegal visitor to New York in search of an errant boyfriend. In this case, Mo-Yung acts as a fulcrum with Rubie on one side of the scale and Mo-Yung’s gangster boyfriend, Benny (Simon Yam), on the other side. Rubie and Benny battle over Mo-Yung. Rubie tries to divorce her from her destructive relationship with Benny, and Benny tries to find Mo-Yung either to use her to get to a cache of drugs or to take possession of her heart.

     

    Artists, writers, and filmmakers have a long history of using criminals and gangsters as more than objects for social or psychological studies. Indeed, filmmakers as diverse as Godard, Bresson, Fassbinder, John Woo, and Ho Hsiao-hsien have used petty gangsters as cinematic “alter egos,” articulating more than the concerns of petty hoods. The character of Benny is crafted in this tradition. It is difficult to tell whether Benny is a drug trafficker and pimp masquerading as a fine art photographer or a sensitive artist doing a photo-essay, “Countdown to 1997,” who toys with a gangster identity. The photographs Mo-Yung spreads on her bed are as concrete as the drugs Benny’s other girlfriend Mabel cleans on their dining room table. Both serve as visual manifestations of Benny’s character, although it must be granted that the white powder carries more narrative weight than the photographs.

     

    Since the silent era, the gangster has been used in film to concretize and contemplate economic relations. He is an outsider who serves as a mirror for the society he haunts. Like the intellectual, he has been produced by and has arisen out of a certain milieu, but he is deviant, an implicit critic of the society that produced him. At this point in time, the gangster increasingly functions as an emblem of transnational economic relations. In Crossings, the comment is made that Marco Polo brought two elements of Chinese culture to Italy, i.e., pasta and the Mafia. Both food and crime continue to cross borders to exert their influence transnationally. The gangster is a sinister citizen of the world. He has become part of the Diaspora–along with intellectuals, legitimate merchants and business people, students, skilled workers and professionals (particularly in medicine), etc.

     

    Benny is a hybrid, a gangster-intellectual. Like Rubie, he has humble roots in Hong Kong’s underclasses; however, he transcended his origins through the drug trade rather than through painting like John, the medical profession like Tony, or journalism/social work like Rubie. He is a fitting object for Mo-Yung’s “wrong love,” since the uncertainty of his relationship to her finally comes out on the side of genuine emotion. After using her to smuggle drugs and denying any feelings for her to Mabel, he gives up his freedom and takes a police bullet in the back when he realizes Mo-Yung is having a miscarriage because of his reckless attempt to escape from the law. More than the tenderness in his relationship with Mo-Yung elevates him within the narrative, however. Crossings portrays Benny as a pensive gangster who can appreciate African traditional art, who has a certain flair for fashion, and who looks at his trade in historical terms as a response to the British push to sell opium in China that occasioned the Opium Wars. Since America supposedly encouraged the trade further through its involvement in the politics of the Golden Triangle, Benny justifies his trade as a political act of resistance–getting back at American imperialists by poisoning the population through the drug trade. When Rubie meets Benny in prison, however, he has again taken on the persona of the hardened criminal, the face he used in his interactions with Mabel. Aside from a few brief moments with Mo-Yung, Benny never manages to voice a substantial social critique.

     

    Figure 9: Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen) bundled up against the cold in Crossings (production still).

     

    The character of Mo-Yung comes a bit closer. Unlike Benny, Rubie, and her relatives, Mo-Yung was born in Suzhou, in mainland China, into an educated family, descended from unassimilated non-Han invaders centuries ago. Her father, an engineer, was forced to kneel on broken glass during the Cultural Revolution. Taking the family away from the excesses of China’s political campaign, Mo-Yung’s family found itself downwardly mobile in Hong Kong, the father finding work as a carpenter. Mo-Yung’s name marks her as a mainlander, as specifically from Suzhou. When she asked to change it as an adolescent, her father questioned her desire: “Are you so eager to conform? To assimilate?” Thus, even in Hong Kong where she grew up, Mo-Yung is an outsider. The fact that she will leave is taken as a given by most in the film. Her family pushes her to marry a Canadian immigrant to ensure another escape from the People’s Republic after 1997. She has already rejected a plan for her to emigrate as a nurse, since she fears that, as a foreign nurse, she will be required to work exclusively with AIDS patients, under conditions she fears will not preclude her being infected. Finally, following Benny, Mo-Yung becomes an illegal alien in New York, sucked into his world of transnational trafficking in drugs and prostitutes. Mo-Yung is left to drift in New York until she meets her tragic end.

     

    As in To Liv(e), the voice in Crossings is given to Rubie. Divorced now (presumably from John) and with a child left in Hong Kong, Rubie has been severed from her roots in Hong Kong’s lower middle classes to find herself administering to a similar community of overseas Chinese in New York. At one extreme, in her work in a community clinic, Rubie sees illegal immigrant women brought in to work in the sex industry in New York, including some who become infected with AIDS. She also becomes involved in the edges of the illegal drug trade through her relationship with Mo-Yung. At the other extreme, Rubie moves in a very different social sphere represented by one of her close male friends, a Mandarin-speaker. This character is gay, with a white boyfriend. He does experimental dance, dressed as a female character from Beijing opera, to a pop music beat, in a disco frequented by Asian transvestites. He speaks in Mandarin, she responds in Cantonese, and both translate for the American boyfriend in English.
    These two cultural spheres overlap throughout the film, and come together most dramatically at Mo-Yung’s funeral. In this scene, the dancer performs a piece in which his defiantly thrown back shoulders, high aerial kicks, and simple male attire work in concert with wreaths denouncing violence against Asians from various community groups. Looking at this scene in conjunction with the scene featuring a similar dance performance, “Exhausted Silkworms” in To Liv(e), underscores the two extremes used to position the characters and events in both films. “Exhausted Silkworms” reenacts the violence of Tian’anmen and the funeral performance memorializes Mo-Yung, not as a victim of “wrong love,” but as a victim of random anti-Asian violence in the United States.

     

    Here, the position of the global Hong Kong community hits two violent terminal points: one in the political fear prompted by the suppression of the 1989 Tian’anmen demonstrations and the other in the social fear of racial violence in New York City. Caught between these two violent extremes, Rubie tries to sort out her own position and identity. At one point in Crossings, Rubie is on an elevated train platform, putting on lipstick. Taking the position of a stalker, the hand-held camera moves in on Rubie. When she is framed in a close-up, Rubie turns and runs. The camera then turns to reveal Joey (Ted Brunetti), who addresses the camera directly, “Blood must flow. What if I push you on the tracks?” The film cuts away to a street person screaming on the sidewalk as the elevated train screeches in the background. A frightened Rubie is shown escaping on the train; a musical bridge connects this scene with a scene of Rubie writing in her journal in her apartment. She recalls a similar incident that happened the week before. The flashback shows Rubie reading the paper on the elevated platform. In this case, rather than taking the point of view of the stalker, the camera takes Rubie’s perspective as an African American man directly confronts the camera (i.e., Rubie) and lashes out at her, “Man, I hate you Japs….” He rambles on incoherently about a blood reckoning to be paid. Back at her apartment, Rubie continues in her diary: “Would it have helped if I’d told him I’m not Japanese, but a Chinese from the British Crown Colony of Hong Kong? Where would I have felt protected? Britain? China?”

     

    While the cosmopolitan world of Hong Kong or New York promises a certain freedom associated with the hybridity of the metropolitan experience, it also represents a world in which identity is cast adrift and there is no safe haven. Joey’s psychosis, which these parallel scenes show is not uncommon, revolves around a mis-recognition of the Asian woman. This mis-recognition operates on several levels. Joey stalks Rubie, but, under the assumption that any Asian woman would satisfy his blood lust, he kills Mo-Yung. Joey is driven into this delirium by an encounter with an Asian transvestite, whom, in M. Butterfly fashion, he mistakes for a woman. Indeed, Joey mistakes all the Asian women he encounters, from his prostitute girlfriend in Thailand to the newly arrived mainland Chinese prostitute he visits in a New York massage parlor, for his “dream girl,” submissive, compliant, subservient, and posing no threat to his own uncertain sexuality. In his delirium, Joey even mistakes Mo-Yung for a dummy, raving happily about passing the “test” to see if he could tell the difference between a real person and a mannequin. His racism levels all identity, turning all Asian women into objects. When Joey’s sister tries to explain her brother’s mental illness to Rubie at Mo-Yung’s funeral, Rubie’s only response is, “It could have been me! Don’t you see, your brother was stalking me. It could have been me.” Between Trini’s analysis of her position as a “British object” in To Liv(e) and Joey’s interchangeability of Asian women as objects in Crossings, the voice of the diasporic intellectual becomes silent. If Rubie’s role as an intellectual is to listen and speak for her constituency, she (and, perhaps, the filmmaker who created her) ends up silent in between two worlds marked by violence.

     

    It can also be noted that Joey does not inhabit a world totally dissimilar to Rubie’s. As a public school teacher in New York, he is like Rubie part of a class of educators, social workers, media workers, etc., who can be loosely grouped as intellectuals. He has a secure job; the principal of the school laments the fact she cannot fire him, even though he alternately brutalizes and ignores his students, because he has tenure and is “competent until proven incompetent, sane until proven insane.” He has disposable income to travel to Thailand. Also, like Rubie, he seems to be upwardly mobile, living with a sister whose accent and demeanor point to working class roots. If Benny represents the intellectual as gangster and Joey represents the intellectual as madman, Rubie represents the intellectual as something different; i.e., as a woman within the Diaspora.

     

    The Ear Is Attached to a Woman

     

    If, as noted above, Rubie functions in both films as a public, intellectual ear that is able to hear and validate the various voices that present themselves, she also serves as a private, personal ear. In her Crossings diary, she speaks to herself as well as to the film’s spectators. In both films, Rubie listens to an array of personal problems voiced by those in her circle of family, friends, and acquaintances. With few exceptions, all the film’s characters talk to Rubie, and Rubie listens. As this narrative ear, Rubie holds the plots of both films together, giving them a structure, logic, and certain order.

     

    Many directors are known for establishing ongoing relationships with actresses who represent the filmmakers’ concerns and give entree into other realms involving women, the female psyche, and issues concerning feminine subjectivity. Bergman’s relationship with Liv Ullmann comes immediately to mind. In this case, Chan develops a rapport with Lindzay Chan in these two features that allows him to explore not only issues of cultural hybridity but also issues involving women and their concerns. Moving from the textuality of the political discourses of the films to the subjectivity of the “women’s film,” To Liv(e) and Crossings, in their stylistic and generic hybridity, highlight issues that go beyond newspaper headlines and immigration statistics. Although Chan works with a Brechtian/Godardian alienation from his characters, using them often as types to illustrate particular points, the filmmaker also uses these characters in more conventional ways, underscoring their individuality, allowing them to speak as distinct entities as well as representatives of ideological positions and abstract social categories.

     

    To illustrate this point, it might be instructive to look at two parallel scenes, one from To Liv(e) and the other from Crossings. Both scenes involve Rubie having a tête-à-tête with another woman. Each scene points to the intimacy between the women. Each features a discussion of the situation of women drifting between countries, roles, and emotions, adding to narrative information, but also standing alone as discourses separate from the public pronouncements of Rubie’s letters or her appearances on American television.

     

    In To Liv(e), Rubie meets with her brother’s fiancée, Teresa (Josephine Ku), at Victoria Peak, overlooking the Hong Kong skyline. The two are seated near a ledge, on opposite sides of the frame, with the cityscape between them. Teresa voices her concerns about going to Australia. She also talks about her divorce and difficulties maintaining a relationship with her son studying in the United Kingdom. On a short visit to Hong Kong, the son went shopping with his father rather than taking time to see his mother, Teresa. Because of her divorce and the death of her mother, Teresa feels cast adrift emotionally. Rubie listens and sympathizes with Teresa. The sounds of the city below can be heard throughout the scene. Rubie moves from her position screen right to sit close to Teresa; the camera slowly moves in to frame them close together on the ledge. When Rubie tries to reassure Teresa that there will be plenty of Hong Kong emigrants to befriend in Australia, Teresa counters that she and Tony want to escape Hong Kong to get away from its people (i.e., those, like Tony and Rubie’s parents who disapprove of a union between a younger man and a divorced, older woman). The camera moves out again, to show Rubie and Teresa in relation to the city, as the two embrace each other at the scene’s conclusion.

     

    In Crossings, Rubie meets Mo-Yung in a café near Times Square. The camera is positioned outside as the scene begins, then moves inside to frame Rubie and Mo-Yung silhouetted against the café’s window as the traffic of New York passes by outside. Throughout the scene, the camera moves between the two women, using a vase with dried flowers on the table as a pivotal point.

     

    Figure 10: Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen) in Crossings (production still).

     

    Mo-Yung talks about coming from Suzhou; Rubie talks about her features and the imagined Silk Route ancestor. Both laugh that they are “two barbarians invading New York.”

     

    Figure 11: Mo-Yung in Crossings (production still).

     

    The camera cuts away to a shot of Mo-Yung framed through the café window, and the mood changes. They wonder about Mo-Yung’s missing acquaintance, Carmen, who had also been involved with Benny. Rubie fills Mo-Yung in on her own situation, and her desire to get a green card and open America as a possibility for her son. Mo-Yung asks, “What if your son doesn’t like America and blames you?” When Rubie replies that he can always go back, Mo-Yung counters, “Do you think you can recreate the past just like that?” The scene ends on a close shot of Mo-Yung putting out her cigarette in an ashtray near the dried flowers, flanked by the empty coffee cups.

     

    These two scenes highlight elements that move the narratives into the realm of the women’s film. In these scenes, the emphasis is on the relationship between women, their solidarity in the face of the trials of immigration as well as in the face of changing sexual mores and family relationships. Here, as friends, mothers, lovers, ex-wives, fiancées, and confidantes, Rubie, Teresa, and Mo-Yung illustrate the personal dimension of the political concerns of 1997. Women experience a different type of “crossing” than men. Traditional roles for women dissolve in the Diaspora. Families become unhinged, scattered; romantic relationships become more fleeting. Cast adrift by a desire to escape from rigid families, ex-husbands, and the feeling of being alienated from the traditional world in which they were born and bred, these women move off to Australia and New York with a different sense of loss, different fears, and for reasons that go far beyond the political dynamics of 1997. Following Rubie as the “ear,” the camera in both scenes invites the spectator to share these intimate moments.

     

    These two scenes are not unique in either To Liv(e) or Crossings. Rather, they form part of a pattern of scenes in which women’s issues are voiced and Rubie listens to her girlfriends’ concerns. In To Liv(e), for example, Teresa will only discuss her fears of death and abandonment with Rubie; Tony must eavesdrop outside the bedroom door. In Crossings, female characters as diverse as the unnamed, unseen AIDS-infected prostitute at the clinic, Joey’s sister, and a next-door neighbor seek out Rubie as an ear for their stories. Mo-Yung tells the story of her family to Rubie rather than Benny. These acts of speaking and listening among the female characters propel both films out from the orbits of the political essay or the crime story.

     

    Figures 12, 13, and 14: Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen) and Rubie (Lindzay Chan)
    in Central Park in Crossings (production stills).

     

    Looking at the films from this perspective, as love stories and family melodramas, To Liv(e) and Crossings fit within three related subgenres that have become quite popular in Hong Kong after Thatcher’s visit to Beijing. The trend picked up even more after June 4, 1989. One subgenre features romantic entanglements and family problems that arise in Hong Kong around the issue of emigration; e.g., Shu Kei’s Hu Du Men/Stagedoor (1996). To Liv(e) fits squarely in this subgenre. The second subgenre involves the trials and tribulations faced by new immigrants to America, Canada, Australia; some examples include Stanley Kuan’s Full Moon in New York (1990), Peter Chow’s Pickles Make Me Cry (1987), Clara Law’s Floating Life (1996). Crossings tends more toward this subgenre, although, like Allen Fong’s Just Like Weather (1986), it really blends the two. The third subgenre is hinted at through Mo-Yung’s story; it involves mainland Chinese abroad in Hong Kong. Examples include Mabel Cheung’s Illegal Immigrant (1985) and the recent hit, Peter Chan’s Comrades: Almost a Love Story (1996) (see Law Kar.)

     

    In these subgenres, the relationship between stories about the overseas Chinese and stories about Chinese or Asian Americans becomes more problematic. Another set of categories begins to dissolve as filmmakers born in Hong Kong, trained in the United States, living sometimes in Hong Kong, sometimes in America, make films about people who are themselves between Hong Kong and America. Indeed, the Hong Kong/American connection, including figures like Bruce Lee as well as filmmakers as diverse as Tsui Hark and Evans Chan, is not unique along the edges of what is usually described as Asian cinema. Ang Lee, Peter Wang, and Edward Yang represent a Taiwan connection, and Chen Kai-ge is the best known of those from the mainland who have settled in the States. Ho Quang Minh connects Vietnam and Switzerland, while Anh Hung Tran with Scent of Green Papaya (1993) has given the world its most critically acclaimed film in Vietnamese about Vietnam, totally set in Vietnam, without leaving France.

     

    Like the in-between, transnational, transcultural characters they depict, To Liv(e) and Crossings also defy easy classification. However, while identities may be uncertain and fluctuating, the issues these characters embody remain concrete and disturbingly fixed.

     

    Endings

     

    To Liv(e) concludes with cautious optimism on two fronts. In her last letter to Liv Ullmann, Rubie ends with the hope that China, Vietnam, and, by extension, Hong Kong will improve their respective situations so that all, including Rubie and Liv, will be able to meet as friends. Rubie concludes the film on a note of good humor. In fact, she signs her letter, “Love, Rubie.” The last image of the film shows Tony and Teresa, saved from near suicide and break-up, alight from their taxi at the airport, baggage in hand, on their way to Australia.

     

    Crossings, on the other hand, ends on a pessimistic note. Rubie burns incense in memory of Mo-Yung on the subway platform where she was murdered. The last shot shows a graveyard in Hong Kong. Earlier, Benny and Mo-Yung had had a tryst near that graveyard, and Benny told the story of his mother being buried there after working herself to death to support the family. Rubie has promised to return Mo-Yung’s bones to Hong Kong, presumably to that same cemetery.

     

    While To Liv(e) ends with death averted and hope in the future, Crossings concludes with the finality of death and the uncertainty of Rubie’s future. She returns to Hong Kong with Mo-Yung’s bones, but it is not certain whether or not she will return to New York, stay in Hong Kong, or go elsewhere. Since, after death, even bones continue to drift between continents, Rubie’s continued “Crossings” between roles and professions, between nation-states, and between Asia and the West also seem to be one of the few certainties in a very uncertain, fictional world. That global filmmakers themselves will continue to drift and make films about this “floating world” of displacement and hybridity also seems fairly certain. To bring Chan’s pessimism back around to a more hopeful note, we might consider this from Bhabha’s “DissemiNation: Time, Narrative and the Margins of the Modern Nation:”

     

    For it is by living on the borderline of history and language, on the limits of race and gender, that we are in a position to translate the differences between them into a kind of solidarity. (170)

     

    Notes

     

    1. Recently, the term “transcultural” has begun to replace a number of related terms (e.g., “cross-cultural,” “international,” “multicultural”) in a number of disciplines (particularly medicine, psychology, and education). Film studies has begun to follow suit. While following on the widespread use of the concept of “transnationalism” by political economists and sociologists, the use of “transcultural” by scholars in the arts, humanities, social sciences, and cultural studies also seems to point to the inadequacy of these other terms in analyzing the increasing globalization of culture.

     

    2. Plot synposis of To Live: Rubie (Lindzay Chan) lives in Hong Kong with her artist boyfriend, John (Fung Kin Chung). In December 1989, Rubie becomes angered by a statement made by Liv Ullmann about the inhumane treatment of Vietnamese refugees by the Hong Kong authorities. In the wake of the events in Beijing that June, Rubie questions Ullmann’s timing in a letter she composes and addresses to the Scandinavian actress. Passages from the letter punctuate the rest of the film as Rubie must decide, along with members of her family and circle of Hong Kong artists and intellectuals, whether to stay or leave Hong Kong before July 1, 1997. Throughout the film, Rubie talks to a range of people about their feelings regarding the turnover.

     

    Rubie’s brother Tony (Wong Yiu-Ming) prepares to immigrate to Australia with his fiancée, Teresa (Josephine Ku). Teresa, however, has mixed feelings about the departure and about her relationship with Tony. Older, divorced, and estranged from her son, Teresa is prone to morbid thoughts and depression. She is thoroughly disliked by Tony and Rubie’s parents, and she fears loosing the younger Tony to another woman. The stormy relationship comes to a head when Tony threatens suicide after a jealous scene at a party.

     

    3. Plot synopsis of Crossings: A red shoe, symbol of romantic happiness and the joys of marriage in traditional Chinese lore, is all that remains of Mo-Yung (Anita Yuen), a victim of a stalker’s violence on a New York subway platform. Mo-Yung had come to New York, against her parents’ wishes and illegally, to pursue her boyfriend, Benny (Simon Yam). Mo-Yung thinks Benny is a photographer, but he is actually an international drug smuggler. Pursuing Benny, Mo-Yung rubs against the seamier elements of New York as she unsuspectingly plays cat-and-mouse with a shipment of Benny’s contraband. Rubie (Lindzay Chan) is a social worker in New York, who befriends Mo-Yung. Joey (Ted Brunetti) is a psychotic school teacher, who has a fetish for Asian women. Joey stalks Rubie, whom he has seen as a community spokeswoman on television. Mistaking Mo-Yung for Rubie, he kills Mo-Yung on a subway platform.

     

    4. Neither film discussed here makes any pretense at investigating the events in May-June, 1989, in Tian’anmen. For the most insightful treatment to date in any medium, see Carma Hinton’s controversial documentary film and Web site, Gate of Heavenly Peace.

    Works Cited

     

    • Bhabha, Homi. The Location of Culture. London: Routledge, 1994.
    • Chan, Evans. “Forward to To Liv(e).Evans Chan’s To Liv(e): Screenplay and Essays. Ed. Tak-wai Wong. Hong Kong: U of Hong Kong, Department of Comparative Literature, 1996.
    • —. Crossings. Perf. Ted Brunetti, Lindzay Chan, Simon Yam, and Anita Yuen. Riverside Productions, 1994.
    • —. To Liv(e). Perf. Lindzay Chan, Fung Kin Chung, Josephine Ku, and Wong Yiu-Ming. Riverside Productions, 1991.
    • Chen, Kuan-hsing. “The Formation of a Diasporic Intellectual: An Interview with Stuart Hall.” Stuart Hall: Critical Dialogues in Cultural Studies. Ed. David Morley and Kuan-Hsing Chen. NY: Routledge, 1996.
    • Chow, Rey. Woman and Chinese Modernity: The Politics of Reading Between West and East. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1991.
    • —. Writing Diaspora: Tactics of Intervention in Contemporary Cultural Studies. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1993.
    • Erens, Patricia Brett. “The Aesthetics of Protest: Evans Chan’s To Liv(e).Evans Chan’s To Liv(e): Screenplay and Essays. Ed. Tak-wai Wong. Hong Kong: U of Hong Kong, Department of Comparative Literature, 1996.
    • Francia, Luis. “Asian Cinema and Asian American Cinema: Separated by a Common Language.” Cinemaya 9 (Autumn 1990): 36-39.
    • Fore, Steve. “Golden Harvest Films and the Hong Kong Movie Industry in the Realm of Globalization.” The Velvet Light Trap 34 (Fall 1994): 40-58.
    • Gramsci, Antonio. Selections from the Prison Notebooks. NY: International Publishers Co., 1971.
    • Hall, Stuart. “New Ethnicities.” Stuart Hall: Critical Dialogues in Cultural Studies. Ed. David Morley and Kuan-Hsing Chen. NY: Routledge, 1996.
    • Hinton, Carma. The Gate of Heavenly Peace. http://www.nmis.org/gate/
    • Jameson, Fredric. The Geopolitical Aesthetic: Cinema and Space in the World System. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1995.
    • Kaplan, Caren. “The Politics of Location in Transnational Feminist Practice.” Scattered Hegemonies: Postmodernity and Transnational Feminist Practices. Eds. Inderpal Grewal and Caren Kaplan. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1994.
    • Kar, Law, ed. Overseas Chinese Figures in Cinema. Hong Kong: The 16th Hong Kong International Film Festival, 1992.
    • Kolker, Robert. The Altering Eye: Contemporary International Cinema. NY: Oxford UP, 1983.
    • Lu, Sheldon, ed. Transnational Chinese Cinemas: Indentity, Nationhood, Gender. Honolulu: U of Hawaii P, 1997.
    • Ross, Andrew. No Respect: Intellectuals and Popular Culture. NY: Routledge, 1989.
    • Said, Edward. Culture and Imperialism. NY: Random House, 1994.
    • Shohat, Ella and Robert Stam, “The Politics of Multiculturalism in the Postmodern Age.” Unthinking Eurocentricism: Multiculturalism and the Media. London: Routledge, 1994.” 338-362
    • Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty. The Post-Colonial Critic: Interviews, Strategies, Dialogues. Ed. Sarah Horasym. NY: Routledge, 1990.
    • West, Cornel. “The New Cultural Politics of Difference.” The Cultural Studies Reader. Ed. Simon During. NY: Routledge, 1993.
    • Wollen, Peter. “Godard and Counter Cinema: Vent D’est.” Readings and Writings: Semiotic Counter-Strategies. London: Verso, 1982.
    • Wong, Tak-wai, ed. Evans Chan’s To Liv(e): Screenplay and Essays. Hong Kong: U of Hong Kong, Department of Comparative Literature, 1996.

    Related Web Sites

     

     

  • Editor’s Introduction

    Robert Kolker

    University of Maryland
    rk27@umail.umd.edu

     

    This issue of Postmodern Culture grew from a conviction that the critical and scholarly study of film could make more use of computer-based image technologies. In our discipline (as in any other humanities undertaking) quotation and illustration constitute proof and demonstration. In the past, we have been restricted in our ability to quote and illustrate because our source material was limited to (at worst) publicity stills from films and (at best) frame enlargements from the films themselves. In all cases, those illustrations were only stills. We wrote about the moving image and offered only the still image as proof.

     

    The ability to digitize still and moving images has broadened the scope of our work and enabled us to enter an intimate relationship with the images that are the source of our study. We can choose the stills we want and need, and, most importantly, we can show the moving images themselves. This, coupled with networked publication and the hypertext capabilities of the Web, makes possible new kinds of thinking about film, new textualities in which the work of the critic and the work of the film assume different kinds of relationships, new flexibilities of thought, expression, and publication.

     

    The work that appears in this issue represents an extraordinary range of thought and execution. It not only demonstrates how digital technology can be used to open critical perspectives, but how critical thinking about film is changing, with and without technology. In other words, all of the essays advance our thinking about film and culture, and many exist as unique digital events.

     

    Gina Marchetti’s “Transnational Cinema, Hybrid Identities and the Films of Evans Chan” concerns a filmmaker whose work is a meditation on national identity, national boundaries, and their dissolution. Because Chan’s work is rarely seen in commercial venues, the inclusion of stills and moving-image clips not only opens Marchetti’s analysis and anchors it in the work itself, but makes that work visible to the reader perhaps for the first time.

     

    In “Simultaneity and Overlap in Stanley Kubrick’s The Killing,” Stephen Mamber doesn’t use stills from Kubrick’s early gangster film, but creates schematic diagrams and a 3-D fly-through to visualize its complex chronology. Time and space are merged, and The Killing’s mise-en-scène, once thought of as split between what was seen on the screen and heard in the voice-over narration, are understood and visualized as integral.

     

    Dziga Vertov was a revolutionary Russian filmmaker who reflected upon the mechanical nature of his art in his cinema. He adumbrated cyborg theory by understanding that the movie camera was a mechanical, perceptual extension of the political and historical imagination. Joseph Schaub, in his “Presenting the Cyborg’s Futurist Past: An Analysis of Dziga Vertov’s Kino-Eye,” traces lines of development between Vertov, the Italian Futurists, and contemporary cyborg theory, and sees them in gendered contexts.

     

    Jorge Otero-Pailos, in “Casablanca’s Régime: The Shifting Aesthetics of Political Technologies (1907-1943),” examines the city of Casablanca, and the film that most famously represents it to Western eyes. Otero-Pailos sees the city and its history from a political, post-colonial, and architectural perspective. The essay examines the political architecture of the city; the images that accompany the essay help plot the axes of its analysis.

     

    Since the mechanics of perceptual fabrication in early cinema are a central concern of William Routt’s “The Madness of Cinema and of Thinking Images,” it is appropriate in a symbolically symmetrical way that the author employs the mechanics of digital fabrication to visualize his analysis about the image in early cinema. Routt uses digital technology to see the history of the spectacular image from a number of critical perspectives.

     

    Adrian Miles turns an exploration of Singin’ in the Rain into a hypertext of interrelated moving-image clips, critical analyses, thematic and structural associations. This piece rethinks the linearity of critical writing on film and creates a work that can only exist in a digital environment.

     

    So too does Peter Donaldson’s “Digital Archives and Sibylline Fragments: The Tempest and the End of Books.” Working from the base offered by Peter Greenaway’s film Prospero’s Books, Donaldson speculates on the relationship of images and archives, text, countertext, and hypertext.

     

    Speculation is very much the key to all the essays in this issue. The writers want to know about the history, textuality, and culture of the films they write about and how the writing and their analyses are changed through technologies that offer new ways of seeing and (in both senses of the word) reading. The technologies aren’t perfect. Pushing moving-image files across the Internet is still an event that requires much patience. If you read this issue through a 28.8 modem connection, it will take a while to get some of the images downloaded. Perhaps this belies the myth of the instantaneous that is so much a part of Internet culture. Things aren’t always immediately available to the eye, which is one of the things the authors are thinking about.

     

    Many thanks to Stuart Moulthrop and Anne Sussman for the markup and production editing that made this complex issue of Postmodern Culture possible.

     

  • Notices

     

     

    Every issue of Postmodern Culture carries notices of events, calls for papers, and other announcements, free of charge. Advertisements will also be published on an exchange basis. If you respond to one of the ads or announcements below, please mention that you saw the notice in PMC.


    Publication Announcements

    • Year Zero One Forum, Issue #3
    • Hiding, by Mark C. Taylor
    • TechnoSurrealist Manifesto
    • The Almanac of Psychoanalysis
    • Simultaneita
    • South Atlantic Quarterly

    Conferences, Calls for Papers, Invitations to Submit

    • (Re)Visions: Feminist and Gender Theory at the Turn of the Century
    • Feminist Studies Graduate Essay Award
    • International Essay Prize Contest
    • “Self Help” special issue, edited by Cindy Patton

    General Announcements

    • Art and Technology Project
    • Gen Art needs Summer Interns
    • CyberStage Update

     

  • The Cosmic Internet

    Arkady Plotnitsky

    Literature Program
    Duke University
    aplotnit@acpub.duke.edu

     

    Lee Smolin, The Life of the Cosmos.New York: Oxford UP, 1997.

     

    Lee Smolin’s The Life of the Cosmos (hereafter LC) offers its readers ideas, scientific and philosophical, and a vision (based on these ideas) of a possible future physics. These ideas and this vision stem from the author’s assessment of major achievements and some failures of twentieth-century physics, including its most recent developments, to which Smolin himself made significant contributions. At stake in the book is the ultimate physics. Smolin’s question is: “How to construct a theory of the whole universe?” (LC 16; emphasis added). Although, as will be seen, some metaphysics is also at stake, the theory in question is of course understood here in the sense of modern, say, post-Galilean, physics in general and, specifically, the present day quantum cosmology. According to the currently standard view, once developed (it does not exist as a theory at present) quantum cosmology would bring together, in their ultimate cosmological extensions, quantum physics and Einstein’s general relativity (his theory of gravitation), which are incompatible in their present form. Smolin’s conceptual point of departure is a critique of Newton’s absolute space and absolute time, where he follows Leibniz, who famously asked the fundamental (and ultimately in turn cosmological) question of all metaphysics–“Why are there beings rather than nothing?”–and who is the single most important philosophical figure for Smolin. Leibniz leads Smolin to the central philosophical principle and the central concept of his book, which is grounded in this same principle. The principle is that of “relationalism,” which states that the relationships between things are more decisive than things themselves (if the latter can be meaningfully spoken of apart from the relationships between them). The concept is that of the whole universe as the universe of relations. Indeed, if considered as a quantum entity, it is the universe of a total, cosmic entanglement of all its constituents and parts, which is seen by Smolin as a consequence of the so-called quantum entanglement (which I shall explain below). This self-contained entangled cosmos, the universe without the exterior, is, Smolin argues, a problem for modern physics, in particular quantum mechanics (as it is currently constituted), insofar as the latter must approach any object that it investigates from an “outside,” in this case defined by the experimental devices whose role cannot be disregarded in considering the data in question in quantum physics, in the way it can be in classical physics. Such an “outside” position would of course be definitionally unavailable in the case of the whole (self-contained) universe.

     

    From this vantage point, Smolin advances a number of mostly hypothetical arguments and proposals. In particular, the randomness and incompleteness of modern quantum theory arise from the fact that it can only be a theory of “parts,” usually small parts of the universe, while what happens in any given locale (“part”) in fact depends on the interactions and entanglement with quantum objects elsewhere, ultimately throughout the entangled universe. The latter becomes a kind of Cosmic Internet. (I shall explain the role of human observers in this picture below.) Randomness and, from this perspective, the (a-realist) incompleteness of physical description offered by modern quantum theory are merely results of the fact that the latter can only make available to us partial pictures of this cosmic entanglement. Accordingly, there must be (at least one may hope eventually to discover it) a complete–realist and, it appears, for Smolin ultimately deterministic–theory that would describe the whole universe as a Leibnizian universe of relations. This universe has nothing exterior to it and is ultimately defined by or even consists only of relations between “parts,” or what appear as “parts” (especially as “atomistic units,” such as elementary particles) from the limited perspective of present-day physics. Now (skipping for the moment some physics, and some philosophy, accompanying the theories just described) Smolin proposes, as his second central idea, that the mathematical and conceptual structure of this fundamental theory correspond not only to the present spatial relations within the universe but to the history of total (cosmic) interactions among all particles and parts of the universe as it has evolved–to the life of cosmos as an evolutionary process, “the cosmological natural selection,” loosely modelled in Darwin’s evolutionary theory. New cosmology would reflect and must account for the history and evolution–the life–of the cosmos. Indeed this historical, evolutionary account is necessary in order to account for the present state of the cosmos–its (in turn entangled) macro- and micro-economics.

     

    This is an enormous program, and Smolin’s aim–this must be kept in mind throughout–is not to fully enact or spell out this program, even at the hypothetical level. Rather it is to offer a broad general sketch and to conjecture certain key specific ingredients of this program on the basis of where, according to Smolin, physics stands, or falls, today. These ideas would justify both Smolin’s specific conjectures and the program itself. Accordingly, it is the status of Smolin’s assessment of present-day physics and his usage of it as the grounding of his conjectures and of the program in question that becomes subject to a critical examination (by which I mean a rigorous and meaningful engagement with an argument), which I shall attempt here. This examination is, I would argue, essential for assessing Smolin’s argument, perhaps especially for his readers in the humanities, less familiar with arcane and difficult scientific arguments under discussion in the book. Moreover, the stakes and implications of these scientific questions are immense, certainly their philosophical (in particular epistemological) implications; but at least at the limit, their cultural and political implications as well. This makes a critical examination of these questions all the more significant in the current intellectual and cultural scene, to which, as will be seen, Smolin’s argument itself is reciprocally indebted.

     

    I find a number of Smolin’s ideas compelling and suggestive, especially the two main ideas of the book, and their interconnections within the framework proposed by Smolin–the principle of relationalism, inspired by Leibniz, and the application of the Darwinian evolutionary model to the history of the physical universe, conceived by Smolin as “cosmological natural selection.” Smolin imaginatively connects both these ideas. His readers will appreciate this elegant link (and several equally elegant physical and mathematical arguments accompanying it) and the opportunity to contemplate conceptual parallels and interactions between modern physics and biology, both prominent in recent discussions in the humanities. Indeed, both main inspirations behind these ideas, the thinking of Leibniz and Darwin, are compelling in themselves. It is also worth noting, in the second context, Smolin’s apt invocation (beyond more standard references) of Charles S. Peirce on the one hand, and Henri Bergson on the other (LC 16-17). Smolin’s appeal to Leibniz may, however, especially attract his readers in the humanities. Leibniz is emerging as an increasingly important figure in current discussions, in part in the wake of Michel Serres’s and Gilles Deleuze’s engagement with his work. Accordingly, Smolin’s readers in the humanities will find the role of his ideas in modern physics and cosmology of considerable interest, especially in both key contexts of Smolin’s argument: Leibniz’s critique of the Newtonian concepts of absolute space and absolute time, where his contribution (which anticipated some among the key ideas of Einstein’s relativity) is indeed unique, and his role as the originator of the idea of the relational universe. As will be seen, I find Smolin’s own extension of this idea to his own concept of “the whole universe” less compelling. Leibniz’s monads, his great philosophical invention, are a more complex story, too. Leibniz’s concept is richer than, and in some of its aspects resistant to, Smolin’s rendition of it, as Smolin indeed admits (LC 269-70). Leibniz’s preeminence in the history of relationalist concepts is unquestionable, however, and these concepts are significant across the contemporary intellectual landscape.

     

    The features just described make The Life of Cosmos worthwhile reading for those interested in the most advanced and controversial developments of modern physics. Many technical aspects of these developments are difficult for a nonspecialist even in philosophical or semi-popular, let alone technical, literature. Smolin clearly wanted to make these ideas available to the general reader, and has often succeeded, albeit not without a price, as concerns a number of key nuances; although, as will be seen, there may be other reasons for this problem.

     

    In general, there are a number of questions that Smolin’s readers in the humanities might want to keep in mind, both in assessing his argument and claims, and in contemplating the relationships among science, philosophy, and culture. Accordingly, this review is also a reflection on several philosophical issues which are involved in Smolin’s argument and which are significant for modern science and for the contemporary (and indeed long-standing) intellectual debate. As part of this reflection, I shall suggest that contemporary physics, and in particular quantum theory, allows for a view of nature, at any scale, that is epistemologically more radical than Smolin’s, primarily by virtue of questioning the very concept, central to Smolin, of the whole universe, that the universe can be thought of as a whole. This view, however, allows one to absorb and indeed to give a more radical form to relationalism itself. It also enables one to argue for the philosophical significance of the physical theories in question. The interpretation, at least the philosophical interpretation, of these theories will of course be different; and it is always a complex question to what degree such interpretive and philosophical differences affect the practice of physics. The cultural and political questions involved are still more complex matters, and they can only be minimally addressed here, even though the subject is of great importance for the contemporary scene and throughout what may be called scientific modernity, from Kepler and Galileo on. As I have suggested in more general terms earlier, however, well beyond physics itself, the difference between the two views of nature in question has far-reaching implications for the relationships between scientific theories (or the concepts of nature they advance) and other areas of knowledge or culture, whether one speaks of homologies between theories in different domains (or what they describe) or contiguities between science and culture. This is why it is important to consider and contrast these two views. These views and the epistemological configurations they entail can be, and sometimes are here, considered independently of the physical theories with which they are associated. In order to ensure that the argument remains pertinent to and consistent with these theories, a more involved engagement with them is necessary at certain junctures, although no technical knowledge of physics is required at any point. Readers interested primarily in the epistemological content and impact of my argument may skip over such “more involved” elaborations, although part of my overall argument here is that more involved engagements with substantive scientific arguments (this, once again, need not entail technical knowledge of science) is not without benefits for those in the humanities who are interested in modern science.

     

    It may be observed first that Smolin’s presentation of quantum physics is somewhat choppy and, at points not altogether precise, and as such may lead to misconceptions on the part of readers unfamiliar with key questions involved. I find Smolin more effective on relativity and gravitation, although for a comprehensive treatment of these subjects interested readers might want to consult Kip Thorne’s excellent Black Holes and Time Warps: Einstein’s Outrageous Legacy. The constraints of Smolin’s genre may be in part responsible. Most popular expositions share this problem of losing key nuances, and the present review may not avoid it either. It is very difficult and perhaps ultimately impossible to present the theories in question in sufficiently nontechnical terms without losing some of their philosophical (let alone physical) content. Several portions of Smolin’s presentation of key established theoretical and experimental findings may be recommended over many available expositions. The problem is rather in Smolin’s usage and interpretation of these already established findings, and sometimes in his argument concerning what constitutes established findings. As will be seen, certain at best speculative and debatable, and debated, arguments are awarded the status of established fact and theories by Smolin. This affects the status of Smolin’s extrapolations from these established findings and his proposed extensions of current theories. Smolin admits that most of these extensions are speculative. Indeed–and as I said, the reader must keep this in mind throughout–the book presents a speculative proposal for a future physics. In view of the circumstances just indicated, however, some of its ideas and, hence, his overall argument may be even more speculative than Smolin makes them appear, however unintentionally.

     

    My main questions concern Smolin’s ideas regarding the implications and extrapolations of key features of modern quantum theory, most particularly two such features that are crucial to Smolin’s argument and to the scientific and philosophical debates about quantum physics. The first is the relationships between quantum objects and measuring instruments in quantum theory. As was especially stressed by Niels Bohr, in quantum physics the influence of the interaction between measuring instruments and quantum objects under measurement cannot be disregarded, as it can be in classical physics. According to Bohr, this circumstance makes it impossible to speak meaningfully of conventional physical attributes (such as coordinates or momenta), and perhaps any attributes, of quantum objects independently of observation or measurement. This impossibility has radical epistemological consequences and leads to an understanding of the quantum world (including on the scale of the universe) that is quite different from that of Smolin, who, I argue, does not sufficiently take these consequences into account in his argument concerning quantum cosmology. Accordingly, the status of this argument requires a reexamination, which I shall undertake here.

     

    The second feature is the so-called quantum entanglement, which raises the question of a potential nonlocality of quantum theory. Quantum entanglement is, roughly, a peculiar interdependence of or correlation between experimental data concerning certain spatially separated quantum events, as seen in the so-called Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen (EPR) type of experiments (LC 246-50). These correlations may signal a nonlocality of quantum physics. Nonlocality (nonspecialist readers should bear this in mind throughout) here means specifically the presence of instantaneous connections between spatially separated physical objects or events. Such connections are forbidden by Einstein’s relativity, which is an experimentally well-confirmed theory. Some claim that this nonlocality is in fact found in the quantum world in view of the so-called Bell’s theorem and Alan Aspect’s experimental findings (LC 249-52). Smolin subscribes to this claim and to the view (sometimes seen as following from or correlative to quantum nonlocality) that the universe considered as a quantum objects constitutes a whole, all the parts of which are irreducibly entangled. This view is crucial for his cosmological argument. While, however, nonlocality of quantum theory is presented by Smolin as fully grounded in scientifically established facts and theoretical arguments rather than as a hypothesis, the argument for nonlocality is by no means indisputable and is far from accepted within the physics community.

     

    Certainly, at least as possible and arguably more plausible is a different case, stated as follows. There is indeed confirmed evidence of strange correlations between certain (“entangled”) quantum events, or more accurately, between our predictions concerning the physical variables involved in measurements associated with such events. The nature of these correlations is enigmatic, and perhaps ultimately inconceivable–that is, it may be impossible to conceive how the observable data involved comes about. It is certainly far beyond anything one finds in classical physics and, as Bohr would have it, far beyond the reach of pictorial visualizations defining it. In this, quantum entanglement is similar (and in part correlative) to other strange features of quantum physics–the wave-particle duality, Heisenberg’s uncertainty relations, and so forth. There is, however, no uncontested experimental evidence and no established theoretical argument for the nonlocality of quantum physics. At the very least, there is much debate concerning these questions, in contrast to more or less factual claims made by Smolin, at least in the form he makes them (LC 249-54). A collection of essays, Philosophical Consequences of Quantum Theory: Reflections on Bell’s Theorem (edited by James T. Cushing and Ernan McMullen), gives one a good idea of the spectrum of different positions on and the debates around the subject, at least prior to 1990. The subsequent literature appears to confirm my point as well, and Smolin does not appear to have in mind anything beyond Cushing and McMullen’s volume. David Mermin’s essays on the subject in Boojums All the Way Through (1992) offer, arguably, the most balanced accessible account of quantum entanglement. It may be that under the quantum conditions we may meaningfully speak only of relations and correlations between quantum events, but not such events themselves taken in isolation from other events; that is, quantum theory may need to be, and may de facto be, relationalist. On this point many orthodox quantum theorists would agree with Smolin, especially since the outcome of the individual quantum events is in general not comprehended by the laws of quantum physics. (In this sense it is irreducibly statistical.) But that need not mean that quantum physics is nonlocal or that all quantum events are mutually entangled within one whole–the Cosmos–which Smolin claims, problematically, as an established fact (LC 253). Here orthodox theorists and Smolin would part company. In short, quantum entanglement need not entail nonlocality, and there is no incontrovertible argument either for it or for the total cosmic entanglement. Or, if one wants to speak in strictly relationalist terms, not all correlations are themselves correlated.

     

    Smolin’s view of the implications of quantum entanglement appears to be close (although not identical) to that of David Bohm, the inventor of the so-called hidden variables theory, which accounts (differently from the standard quantum theory) for the quantum data responsible for the introduction of quantum mechanics in the mid-1920s. Smolin himself made contributions to the hidden variables program in the 1980s (LC 334). Bohm and his coworkers developed several versions of this theory, all nonlocal. Bohm’s arguably most famous exposition, containing a rather grand philosophical vision (and even some quasi-postmodern resonances), is found in his Wholeness and the Implicate Order. Smolin even argues that Bohmian “additional [hidden?] variables” are a necessary consequence of quantum entanglement (LC 253). Bohm also invokes Leibniz, who is in general a prominent figure among the adherents of Bohm’s theory. The proximity to Bohm is also reflected in Smolin’s realist and causal view of the quantum world. This view entails both physical reality of the classical type (i.e., quantum objects are claimed to possess physical attributes existing independently of observation and measurement) and the underlying global causality and determinism. Both features appear to be germane to Smolin’s picture of the wholeness of the cosmos, bringing it into a conflict with quantum theory in its standard or orthodox interpretation. Smolin is of course aware of this conflict, which is indeed a crucial part of his rationale for his own proposal. The main reason for his argument is that, according to Smolin, the standard quantum mechanics is incompatible with the possibility of the quantum theory of the universe as a whole. This point itself is correct. As will be seen, however, it may entail an argument different from Smolin’s. My point at the moment is Smolin’s claim that key ingredients of his picture of the universe are grounded in the currently established experimental facts and theoretical explanations. This claim is, I argue, problematic. Accordingly, insofar as Smolin’s speculations are shaped by this claim, their status, even as speculations, becomes less convincing and more questionable than it would be otherwise.

     

    This is not to deny the potential significance, in quantum physics or elsewhere, of the relationalist ideas. There is nothing wrong with relationalism as such, and Smolin may well be right to insist on it. As will be seen, contrary to Smolin’s contention, quantum theory as currently constituted allows and perhaps entails a form of relationalism more radical than Smolin’s. There has been significant recent work stressing relations and correlations (rather than relata or correlata) in quantum physics, for example, by Mermin, whose framework, as presented in “What Quantum Mechanics is Trying to Tell Us?”, is based on quantum entanglement. However, while arguing, radically, that “correlations without correlata,” should be seen as the only proper subject of quantum theory, Mermin does not claim the nonlocality of the latter. Nor does his theory aspire to determinism; on the contrary, it sees quantum probabilities as irreducible and central to any future framework. He credits, among others, Smolin and Carlo Rovelli, who in turn figures significantly in Smolin’s book. Most of this work, however, for example by Smolin and Rovelli, aspires to a classical (causal and realist) view close to that of Einstein, who faulted quantum mechanics and its radical epistemology on both counts–realism and causality.

     

    My point instead is that contemporary physics allows for a view of nature at any scale that is very different and epistemologically more radical than that of Smolin’s proposal. This view can be stated as follows. One can think of the quantum world in terms of a combination or, one might say with Bohr and perhaps in his sense, complementarity of relationalism and (in Smolin’s terms) “atomism”–at least a certain atomism in which the only “atoms” are relations. These relations, however, are not always necessarily connected to each other. Accordingly, one must think in terms of both connections (entanglements) and disconnections (separations) between physical objects or events. These can be enacted either on local levels or on the level of the universe, no longer composable into a whole. Such a cosmos or, to use Joyce’s coinage, “chaosmos” (not chaos), would thus be often multiply entangled, but also just as often disentangled. This chaosmos would have connected (sometimes irreducible entangled) and disconnected (sometimes in turn irreducibly disconnected) regions. Some of such networks of connections would extend across any conceivable region and some would be strictly localized, especially if one thinks of this world as allowing only for networks and correlations, rather than isolated elements. The “picture” (and the unpicturability) here proposed would not, however, entail instantaneous connections between distant objects or events, or other violations of currently established features of the physical world, relativistic or quantum. This chaosmic un-universe is entangled in the sense of quantum correlations, but, in contrast to Smolin’s or Bohm’s universe, is first local, and second neither causal nor classically realist, in accordance with quantum physics as currently constituted. Accordingly, it would also disallow a total, all-encompassing nonlocal network or/as entanglement of the type Smolin envisions–either in practice (in the sense of difficulty or even impossibility for us to access this network) or in principle (insofar as such a total network could be postulated as existing while ultimately inaccessible in its totality to any given observer). It is the “in principle” that is most crucial here, although Smolin appears to be more optimistic than most sharing his views as concerns the “in practice” as well.

     

    Nor are quantum objects in this chaosmos endowed with conventional, and perhaps any conceivable, physical attributes–that is, attributes ascribable as independent of observation or measurement. In this sense, following Bohr, as I stressed from the outset and as I shall further discuss presently, one always needs to be “outside” of quantum objects (whatever their scale) in order to investigate them or, more accurately, the effects of their interaction with observational devices, in terms of physics. Accordingly, the physical world just described is more radically “participatory” or “reciprocal” and, as such, more radically “relationalist” than Smolin’s cosmos–defined by partial access, on the part of different observers, to the same whole, as an independently existing world of quantum objects endowed with determinate, even if ultimately inaccessible, physical properties. The difference between these two forms of relationalism is subtle and is sometimes overlooked, but it is epistemologically decisive.

     

    Most crucially, according to the alternative view just presented, there would not be a universe that can ever be seen as a whole, or, conceivably, as otherwise fully figurable, especially if considered as a quantum object, although even the classical (nonquantum) relativistic cosmology poses certain problems for Smolin’s view. For, once the universe is considered as a quantum object, our claims concerning it become as limited as in the case of any quantum system–by virtue of the fact that observation and measurement of quantum objects irreducibly depend on the observational technology involved, a fact, Bohr argues, correlative to uncertainty relations. At the same time, however, quantum interconnections operative or producing effects on any scale (but always compatible with locality) are allowed. Nor does this view prevent unification programs, for example in considering the early universe (where such programs are especially important). It may, of course, change the meaning of (some among) such programs and possibly the character of the physical theories involved in them. A different program for physics may ultimately be at stake.

     

    Smolin never questions the concept of the universe as a whole (which, again, should not be confused with the scale, however large, of physics). Instead Smolin uncritically accepts this concept as a given and as a fundamental ground for his argument against the compatibility of quantum theory, as currently constituted, with quantum cosmology. Smolin claims as the main reason for this argument, jointly, the irreducible role of measurement in quantum physics and quantum entanglement, both defining features of modern-day quantum theory. However, the first may be taken into account differently, namely by questioning the very possibility of considering the universe as an (absolute) whole, and the second need not entail Smolin’s view, at least as it figures in the EPR experiment, Bell’s theorem, and Alan Aspect’s experiments. Smolin discusses these subjects in Chapter 19, “The Meaning of the Quantum” (LC 240-54), but gives them an interpretation which can and in my view must be questioned. Following Leibniz and Einstein, Smolin rightly criticizes the Newtonian concepts of absolute space and absolute time as the absolute, universal background of (and as independent of) physical events. This concept of “background” is related to but should not be identified with Smolin’s more general, and in my view somewhat confusing, usage of “the background” in referring to an exterior of a physical system under description, which notion indeed cannot apply to the universe as a self-contained whole (LC 13-14). Part of my argument is that, in contrast to his Leibnizian critique of Newtonianism, Smolin’s critique of “the background” as the exterior in quantum physics ultimately fails, and the very term “background” is hardly useful and even misleading in the latter case. Beyond its philosophical incongruities, noted already by Leibniz, the Newtonian concepts of absolute space and absolute time are incompatible with the constancy of the speed of light in a vacuum (the absolute limit of propagation of all physical signals and influences) and its independence of the speed of the source or the observer, and, hence, with Einstein’s relativity, which accounts for these experimental facts. While, however, free of this Newtonian problem, Smolin’s own view entails a total universe as the universe of relations, whose nonlocality would ultimately be in turn in conflict with Einstein’s relativity.

     

    The potential presence, within Smolin’s cosmology, of other universes “outside” (and inaccessible to) our universe, while an interesting question in itself, does not change his view, as it could, since Smolin does not consider the differences that the presence of these other universes or black holes, to begin with, make for the universe we live in. Nor does he consider how black holes, as singularities (i.e., points at which no conceivable physical description applies) may “rupture” the wholeness of our universe from within. Smolin only uses this picture for his elegant statistical account of the evolution of the universe and of the emergence of the particular value of certain fundamental parameters of physics. The physics and (in mathematical terms) topology of spaces punctured by black holes are, however, where the possibility of the universe as a whole may be disrupted even at the level of general relativity as a classical theory–that is, without taking the quantum aspects of black holes into account. (Ultimately we must do so, of course.)

     

    Smolin’s conception of the (self-contained) whole universe is, I argue, a reinstatement of a certain form of Newtonianism, via Leibniz and Einstein; and here Leibniz or Einstein (or ultimately Smolin) and Newton are not quite as far apart as they are in their views of the particular nature or structure of the world. Smolin’s program, again following Einstein (and in juxtaposition to Bohr), is of course also Newtonian in its realist (and causal) aspirations, in particular in his at least implicit assumption that nature and at the limit the universe themselves (rather than only the outcomes of certain interactions with them, such as those in quantum measurement) are at least in principle governed by mathematically formalizable laws. On the other hand, Leibniz’s own relationalism may be seen as close, along certain lines, to Bohr’s participatory or reciprocal relationalism as described above (i.e., as predicated on the irreducible relationships between quantum objects and measuring instruments, while without claiming an absolute wholeness of the universe), as it is along other lines to Smolin’s relationalism (predicated on the existence of quantum objects possessing independent physical attributes and the entangled wholeness of the cosmos). Of course in both (or all three) cases, we still observe the universe in a certain sense from within. This point, however, does not change the epistemological differences in question, since at stake is what is claimed concerning the universe in each of these cases. Although there are, of course, no quantum objects in the modern sense in Leibniz, Leibniz’s monads may be seen as representing the Bohrian or proto-Bohrian relationships, while the world is conceived by Leibniz as a whole, as in Smolin. (The status of the attributes of the constitutive parts of this whole in Leibniz is a more complex matter, which I shall leave aside here.) While, that is, there is an all-encompassing wholeness of the cosmos in Leibniz, the nature of the encompassment is different from that envisioned by Smolin. It is closer to Bohr’s participatory or reciprocal physics. The latter, however, against Leibniz’s and Smolin’s pictures alike, prevents us from ascribing an absolute wholeness to the universe, once it is considered as a quantum object. By contrast, Smolin’s quantum cosmos is a relational network totality–a global cosmic Internet, a “World Wide Web” with, at least in principle, instantaneous connections between all of its points and “democratic,” if partial access to the “subscribers”–partial observers of the whole universe, conceived of as a quantum object, here as an entangled quantum network. Chapters 21 and 22, entitled, revealingly, “A Pluralistic Universe” and “The World as a Network of Relations” spell out these concepts.

     

    The Internet, the World Wide Web, and democracy are not accidental or arbitrary metaphors here, although one should not of course fully ground Smolin’s ideas in them, because some of these connections or metaphors also proceed in the opposite direction, or condition each other reciprocally. The cosmic Internet of modern physics (let alone Leibniz’s) has obviously been in place well before the World Wide Web, while the latter, with its (for argument’s sake) “instantaneous” connections and access to the subscribers, appears to shape some aspects of Smolin’s particular vision of the cosmos. Smolin not only acknowledges that the contemporary–postmodern and by now post-postmodern–culture conditions his views, just as their culture conditioned those of Newton or Leibniz, but also directly draws some of his inspirations and ideas from this culture. (Some of these connections are explained in “Notes and Acknowledgments,” LC 324-36). Most of the elements of postmodern culture inspiring Smolin are utopian in nature. They also correspond to his own ethical and political vision, especially pronounced in his “Epilogue,” but apparent throughout. These utopian elements appear to be transferred to and shape his vision of the cosmos, in part by way of related metaphors, such as the contemporary city, and specifically New York. The city metaphor is, however, also due to Leibniz’s metaphorization of monads which Smolin cites as his epigraph to the book: “Just as the same city viewed from different directions appears entirely different and, as it were, multiplied perspectively, in just the same way it happens that, because of the infinite multitude of simple substances, there are, as it were, just as many different universes, which are nevertheless, only perspectives on a single one” (The Monadology #57). The concepts or metaphors of life and evolution play a different role in Smolin’s argument, except to the degree that these concepts are in turn read by Smolin in terms of the utopian models just mentioned. Such concepts as the city or the Internet can obviously be differently configured and may be in turn differently conditioned by (or of course condition) physical ideas, more or less established or more or less hypothetical, such as that of the global cosmic entanglement and/as nonlocality, as in Smolin, or, conversely, by the radical Bohrian epistemology suggested here. These differences in conception and particularly in epistemology may also change our understanding of how such entities as the city and the Internet, or democracy, can, in principle, function and how they, in practice, do or are likely to function. Smolin’s is a metaphysical-idealist vision of the universe as the Leibnizian relationalist wholeness, which, as we have seen, is not to say that it is the same as that of Leibniz himself. Smolin’s is, philosophically, a classical view, in contrast to, say, Bohr’s quantum epistemology (Bohr, it is true, does not deal with cosmological issues) or those of such thinkers as Nietzsche, Bataille, Levinas, and Derrida, or if one wants to proceed via Leibniz, Deleuze. It is of some interest that the authors in the humanities to whom Smolin refers and who inspire him, such as Drucilla Cornell and Roberto M. Ungar, also displace the authors just mentioned and such earlier figures as Hegel into a similarly utopian metaphysical-idealist register. I use the term “idealist” in the sense of the metaphysical structure of one’s theory. This idealism can also be materialist–the idealism of unproblematized materiality, which in Smolin’s book assumes the shape of the wholeness of the (material) universe.

     

    It is clear why Leibniz arrives at a similar (although, again, not identical) type of idealism. The reason is his theological vision, for which monads are crucial, but to which they in turn give extraordinary complexity and richness, brought into the foreground in Serres’s and Deleuze’s work. This work also suggests strong conceptual affinities between the structure of monads–which, we recall, have no windows, but have mirrors, are full of mirrors, and are themselves mirrors–and the quantum-mechanical conceptions of light itself and the participatory relationalism of Bohr’s interpretation, as considered earlier. There remains much to be said in this context about the relationships between “relationalism” and “rationalism” in Leibniz; his sense, mathematical and philosophical, of “ratio” as proportion; or his idea of “preestablished harmony” (which concept is also that of proportion), but these questions cannot be addressed here.

     

    That Smolin’s sense of the contemporary (and some earlier) philosophical ideas and intellectual landscapes is not comprehensive and is at points misconceived does not matter much here, and Smolin acknowledges that his knowledge of these ideas is somewhat superficial. Nor is his own intellectual, cultural, or political sense of the modern and postmodern world–that is, our world–especially significant here either. What matters is his view of the physical world, which is conditioned accordingly, as he admits. It matters especially if physics as such (i.e., the currently available experimental data and experimentally confirmed theories) does not offer any more support for his program than for others. Indeed, as I argue, quantum physics may compel one to take a different and epistemologically more radical view of the cosmos, as the chaosmos, and its life. Such views may, of course, be in turn conditioned by modern culture and shaped by its concepts (albeit different from those shaping Smolin’s view). Let me stress that my point is not to deny the significance of global concepts, the necessity of investigating large-scale relations, and so forth. In question is a different (in this case non-totalizing) repositioning of large-scale configurations, such as those on the scale of the “universe,” and it is conceivable that the latter can be effectively approached only through such a repositioning.

     

    The core of the problem is the character of the universe considered as a quantum object. Smolin recognizes and considers some among the complexities involved, to which his argument is a response. However, he also misses or disregards several key points, in particular as concerns the relationships between quantum objects and measuring instruments in the standard quantum theory, where, in contrast to classical physics, the role of these relationships cannot, as we have seen, be disregarded in describing the observable phenomena in question in quantum physics. At the same time, the presence of the two counterparts involved entails two incompatible theoretical descriptions. Measuring instruments are, as macro-objects, described by means of classical physics, although their ultimate constitution is quantum and although they are capable of quantum interaction with quantum objects. It is the latter that makes possible the observation and measurement of quantum objects, or what is inferred as such on the basis of the results of such measurements–physical marks, “traces,” left on certain parts of measuring instruments, such as photographic plates. These marks themselves are describable by means of classical physics. Their emergence, however, is unexplainable by these means. One needs quantum mechanics, which is irreducibly nonclassical, to explain this emergence. It follows, however, that we can only approach quantum objects, and indeed infer their existence, from an outside, insofar as we are linked to these objects by means of measuring instruments–whatever quantum object is in question. That would include the universe, if it is considered as a quantum object (that is, while immense, as microscopically constituted), if we could observe all of it from an outside. This of course we cannot do. There is no “outside” available to us which would enable us to approach the quantum universe in the way we approach such objects in quantum physics as just described. This point is central for Smolin’s argument, since he sees, correctly, the situation of quantum measurement as defining quantum physics in its present state (LC 260-62). Accordingly, he sees it as fundamentally inhibiting our access to the quantum-entangled universe as a whole. The reason for this inhibition is the one just given: we cannot be outside the whole universe, which would be required for a quantum account of it; we can only be outside a portion of it, which we can consider as a quantum object. This is, of course, correct. Smolin’s critique of the concept of the single privileged outside observer is to the point as well. There can indeed be only particular outside observers, none of whom can have an absolutely privileged observational position. None of this, however, need entail the rest of Smolin’s argument. Quantum theory in its present form may well be incompatible with a quantum theory of the whole universe. This point is not in question. The question is which one of these incompatibles is to be rethought or given up.

     

    It would appear that once two conceptual structures are incompatible one needs to investigate both, which here would involve questioning the concept of the whole universe. Not so to Smolin. Even though he admits that “everything [he] say[s] [at this point] must be [considered as] controversial, as there is no settled opinion about how to extend quantum theory to cosmology” (LC 261; emphasis added), he never considers the possibility that the concept of the whole universe itself may be questionable. Instead, he sees it as more reasonable to suppose that quantum mechanics is an approximation of another theory where the (whole) universe can be considered as quantum in and by itself, while particular observers would have partial access to it (LC 262). He considers several proposals and finally turns to his Leibnizian idea of the total universe, in particular (this is what makes his view necessary, Smolin argues) as a quantum object–a total but “pluralistic universe,” partially knowable to various observers, who as outside observers, would remain subject to the constraints equivalent to those of standard quantum theory (LC 267-72). Quantum entanglement, seen as entailing nonlocality, is Smolin’s other key rationale here (LC 262). As I have indicated at the outset, however, quantum entanglement is accountable, without entailing nonlocality, by means of the standard quantum mechanics. That includes the irreducible and constitutive role of the relationships or, one might in turn say, “entanglement” between quantum objects and the means of observation. This “entanglement” should not be confused with quantum entanglement, although both can be related and may even be mutually constitutive in quantum physics, as Bohr shows, and as Bohm realized, which in part led him to his hidden variables quantum mechanics. Smolin touches upon this point, but in a rather confused and not altogether accurate statement (LC 253).

     

    In view of the considerations given here, however, quantum mechanics allows, perhaps even compels us to turn the question of the mutual compatibility of quantum physics and the concept of the whole universe around. The circumstances of quantum measurement may make impossible any ultimate claim concerning any attributes (certainly all conventional physical attributes) of quantum objects themselves, including the attributes designated as “wholeness” and “object,” or, once everything is quantum, “inside” or “outside,” which, too, may be fundamentally classical attributes. There may be nothing that we may be able to say about them in themselves, but only about certain effects of their interactions with our instruments, which may be seen as corresponding to various parts, at most halves, of the classical physical description. This is what the standard quantum theory describes. According to Bohr, not even a single conventional physical variable of any kind (such as position or momentum) can be meaningfully or unambiguously ascribed to a quantum object itself, outside an interaction with the classicaly configured “exterior” measuring instruments. In such an interaction only one of the two complementary variables, either position or momentum, can be unambiguously associated with a quantum object–still with caution and, in all rigor, only symbolically, by analogy with classical physics. In practice, all we can ascertain concerns measurement of corresponding classical variables describing the macroscopic behavior of measuring instruments, which and only which make any observation of anything microscopic–quantum–possible. We can, thus, ascertain certain effects of quantum objects (for example, the quantum universe), resulting from their interaction with measuring instruments. We cannot, however, make ultimate claims about quantum objects and, accordingly, the universe as quantum, such as that the latter can be constituted as the whole universe, or, conversely, that there are irreducible and distinct multiple parallel universes, in the manner of Hugh Everett’s “many-world interpretation” of quantum mechanics, of which Smolin is suspicious as well (LC 263-65).

     

    The above considerations do not mean that there is nothing we can say about the universe. The situation is the same as in the case of other quantum objects. We can say a great many things about quantum systems, certainly their effects. We must, however, be extremely careful as to what we can or cannot meaningfully say and about what. Nor are the above considerations incompatible with cosmological research, including quantum cosmology. The shape of such theories may be affected, of course; and I would argue that, in terms of their physical and mathematical content, some new theories discussed by Smolin towards the end of the book, such as topological quantum field theories, may be developed without the concept of the whole universe.

     

    Once the universe is considered as classical, the situation changes, and, according to the standard quantum theory, we can only see (classical) traces of a quantum universe, as of any quantum object. In classical physics the question does not arise in this form, since observational or measuring instruments, such as telescopes, do not irreducibly affect the data, in the way they do in quantum physics, and hence, their impact, although present, may be disregarded or compensated for. The universe may even appear, and may have been originally conceived of, in terms of wholeness, because we see it classically (although, as I said, some aspects of the universe, such as black holes, suggest that this wholeness may be ruptured even at the classical level). We do not know what we would see–wholeness, cosmos, chaos, chaosmos (perhaps none of these)–if we could see the universe as quantum. We cannot ascertain any properties of it, on whatever scale, or even claim that it has independent properties as properties, outside their interaction with observational technology (beginning with the human eye), especially properties conceived on the model of classical physics. At the same time, it is this technology that enables us to observe any effects of quantum objects and to argue that we can infer their existence from these effects.

     

    Certainly–this is the meaning of the complementarity of phenomena in quantum physics, according to Bohr–“partial” pictures or more accurately, pictures arising from always mutually exclusive experimental arrangements, do not imply, and in fact prohibit, the classical-like wholeness behind them, whether this wholeness is seen as fully or partially accessible, or inaccessible. These pictures are “partial” only in the sense that they correspond to parts–at most halves–of the classical physical description, and not in the sense of the existence of some wholeness behind complementary phenomena.

     

    Indeed, it can be argued, in fact by using the Einstein-Podolsky-Rosen experiment, quantum entanglement, and Bell’s theorem, that if such a complete classical-like picture had existed behind partial complementary pictures, it would contradict the data either of quantum physics itself or of relativity. Quantum entanglement not only does not change anything here but is germane to this view, as Bohr realized (as early as 1935) in his reply to Einstein’s argument concerning the “problems” of quantum mechanics. Bohr’s view and, accordingly, the view delineated here are not positivist. These and other “strange” aspects of quantum mechanics tell us that something that we can know nothing about–and the very fact that we cannot know anything about it–can make a difference. If we could, in principle (not only in practice) know or indeed define simultaneously both a position and a momentum for a given particle (which we cannot do because of uncertainty relations), the “numbers”–correlations between events–would not come out right. They would be in conflict with what we observe, unless relativity is violated, as in Bohm’s hidden variables theories. This is what Bell’s theorem tells us.

     

    This argument does not imply that “quantum objects,” or, more accurately, something that enables us to infer something like quantum objects (and perhaps the very concept and attribute of “existence”) from the data generated by measuring instruments, do not exist if, say, we are not present to observe the “world” (if this or indeed any term can be applicable in our absence). In this sense, contrary to Smolin’s argument, a comprehensive and, in a certain sense, “objective” description of “the world as it would be independently of whether we were here or not” does not in fact conflict either with “the results of [quantum] experiments” or with quantum theory as currently constituted, although a “complete description of the world” may indeed not be possible in the way Smolin understands it (ultimately on the classical model, however non-Newtonian), especially as a description of a world seen as complete, as an absolute whole (LC 253; emphasis added).

     

    In view of these considerations I am compelled to take issue with some of Smolin’s assertions concerning experimental and theoretical “facts” about quantum physics as currently available. According to Smolin:

     

    Quantum mechanics is not a local theory. As I have described it, it is radically non-local. A very interesting question for those of us who feel uncomfortable with the quantum theory, is whether [if we accept experimental data it accounts for] it could be replaced by any theory that is local.... The answer is no. We know this because of a remarkable piece of work by an Irish physicist named John Bell in the early 1960s. What Bell did was to find a way to test directly the principle of locality. What Bell found was that in certain cases... the prediction of any local theory [compatible with statistical predictions of quantum mechanics] must satisfy certain constraints, which we call the Bell inequalities. Quantum theory, being non-local, must violate these conditions. (LC 251; emphasis added)

     

    This statement requires much qualification and quite a few corrections. First of all, this is not quite what Bell found. What Bell found, at least in his original findings here referred to, is that no local realist theory (a type that includes classical physics) and in particular no hidden variable theory, can be compatible with the statistical predictions of standard quantum mechanics (say, as described by Schrödinger’s equation). According to Bell’s theorem nonlocality would follow only if we had a theory of quantum data like classical physics, a theory allowing for determinable independent properties–overt, such as positions and momenta of the particles involved, or hidden, as in Bohm, which would fully determine the behavior of quantum systems in the way classical physics does; even if we could not fully trace this behavior in practice. Actually, in certain versions of the theory, nonlocality (i.e., a violation of relativity) would not be observable in practice. It is, however, a structural, built-in feature of the theory. It automatically follows from its equations. For Bohm the impossibility of definable independent properties (according to him, found in quantum physics) would entail the so-called hidden variables or parameters which are perhaps (at this point or ever) unobservable in practice, but which make the behavior of quantum systems themselves, in principle, classical-like. Such a theory would be similar to classical statistical physics, where statistics is the result of our insufficient knowledge concerning a system that in itself behaves classically. By contrast, as stressed by Bohr (whose formulations I am adopting here), in quantum mechanics the appeal to statistical considerations has nothing to do with our ignorance of the values of certain physical quantities determining the behavior of quantum systems. It has to do with the impossibility of defining such quantities in an unambiguous way (in part in view of the irreducible role of measuring instruments, as considered earlier), and hence with the fundamental inability of the classical frame of concepts to comprise the peculiar features of quantum mechanics.

     

    The argument of Bohr’s reply to Einstein, Podolsky, and Rosen is based on these considerations. This argument is misread by Smolin in terms of relationality (in his, rather than in Bohr’s sense, as considered earlier) and, it appears, implicitly nonlocality, to which Bohr never subscribed. Bohr’s argument is actually based on the impossibility of unambiguously assigning independent physical properties to quantum objects in the manner of classical physics, on which EPR based their argument. The main reason for Smolin’s misreading is that he disregards the role of measuring instruments in Bohr’s argument, which is decisive and which is stressed by Bohr in the article and in all his writings on quantum physics. This omission, although not uncommon, is curious in this case, since, as we have seen, Smolin realizes the general significance of this role, which is for him negative, of course. Bohr also argues that the quantum-mechanical description is complete, within its scope–as complete as it can be, given quantum data.

     

    These considerations are decisive. They establish that quantum mechanics, which is neither causal nor realist, is local (or at least, cannot be claimed to be nonlocal), and that it cannot be supplemented by a causal or realist theory, without violating locality, and hence relativity. This is also what Alan Aspect’s experiments demonstrated, rather than that quantum theory in its present form is nonlocal, as Smolin contends without any hesitation or qualification, as many of his statements show: any theory of quantum data “must be explicitly and radically non-local” (LC 252); there exists an “experimental disproof of the principle of locality” (253); and “locality is not a principle that is respected by nature” (253). None of these statements can be accepted as referring to established facts. It is true that there have been attempts (mostly motivated by the fact that quantum mechanics violates Bell’s inequalities) to derive nonlocality from within quantum theory as such–without any supplementary features–and that there were some claims for the success. In this sense, Smolin’s formulation cited above gets the case backwards. It is not that “quantum theory, being non-local, must violate these conditions” (the Bell inequalities), as he says, which is simply not the case. Rather, since quantum theory also violates these conditions, it may be, and is by some, suspected to be non-local. One would be hard pressed, however, to see these attempts as conclusive or accepted by the physics community, as, again, a number of essays in Cushing and McMullen’s volume and many other works would show. Certainly Bell’s theorem in itself is insufficient for this claim, and Bell himself never thought so, as his articles on the subject, now assembled in Speakable and Unspeakable in Quantum Mechanics, would testify in direct conflict with Smolin’s claim. Smolin does not differentiate between nuances of nonlocality or entanglement, for example, whether the violation of relativity is seen by him as observable or not (on which issue the reader may, again, consult Cushing and McMullen’s volume). He also does not consider nuances introduced by different Bell-type theorems (there are several), which would complicate the situation but would leave the present argument in place. Nor does Smolin really explain how nonlocality in certain quantum situations, assuming that it exists, leads to the total cosmic nonlocal entanglement. In any event, Smolin’s formulations cited above leave no doubt that he sees nonlocality (entailing an instantaneous connections between distant events and, hence, violating relativity) as an established experimental and theoretical fact of quantum physics. This view, if it can be maintained at all, is far from being undisputed, let alone accepted. Accordingly, Smolin’s contentions, which serve as major and perhaps uniquely significant grounds for his further hypothetical arguments become at best themselves hypothetical. At the very least, many qualifications not offered and, it appears, not entertained by Smolin are necessary. I would strongly contend, however, that there is no proof of and no widely accepted argument for the nonlocality of quantum physics.

     

    While, then, from the perspective of all present day physics, we are always within our universe, in the context of quantum physics, we are always, irreducibly “outside” whatever we can observe, big or small (quantum-ness is not a matter of actual size). Yet, simultaneously, it is never possible in quantum mechanics, in contrast to classical physics, to isolate what we observe from the means of observation (no quantum object can be defined otherwise). It is this joint point, at least in its full significance, that Smolin misses. One can see quantum physics as suggesting something quite different from Smolin’s entangled quantum universe. It is this: however global the scale of quantum “events” may be (and some of them are global), quantum physics disallows claims concerning at least the ultimate (and perhaps any) structure of quantum objects themselves, whatever their scale, from photons to the universe. What matters is their quantum nature, defined by ultimate (micro) constituents of matter and their interactions at various scales. From this point of view, the notion of the ultimate structure of the “universe” becomes suspect. “The universe as a whole,” Newtonian or relational, or “the universe itself,” are all claims of that type. Indeed, as I said, ultimately even the classical general relativity (that is, leaving quantum gravity aside) may entail the ultimate unfigurability of the universe. The latter itself becomes a misguided term under these conditions, as Maurice Blanchot observes, as he invokes the idea of the unfigurable universe and argues rightly that “nothing permits one to exclude the hypothesis of an unfigurable Universe (a term henceforth deceptive); a Universe escaping every optical exigency and also escaping consideration of the whole” (The Infinite Conversation 350). This is not to say (by way of a reverse ultimate claim) that the universe is a chaos, assuming that we have, or even can have, such a concept.

     

    The significance of the considerations just offered is twofold. First, they affect Smolin’s claim concerning the grounding of his speculations, making some of this grounding itself at best hypothetical, which affects the status of his speculative arguments and his overall program. Secondly, certain key areas and debates of modern physics are not presented by Smolin so as to give his readers, especially nonspecialists, an adequate picture. These omissions may lead to much misunderstanding on the part of such readers. It may also lead to questionable extrapolations of modern physics in the humanities, which are often criticized by the members of the scientific community. These critics are not always wrong, but they also do not always stop to consider that one of the sources of these problems is the presentation of modern science in popular writings by scientists themselves. It is true that in Smolin’s book these problems occur at some of the most subtle and complex junctures of modern physics. But then such junctures are also where the most careful and qualified accounts are especially necessary. At stake is an extraordinarily complex picture–and unpicturability–of the physical world, and of the world of physics. In any event, the humanists and other nonscientists should not take physicists’ accounts of physics for granted, especially if they want to use them in their own work. This is not to deny physicists’ abilities, often remarkable, to explain their work and ideas, and, as I said, Smolin often does an excellent job in doing this as well. It may well be, however, that the best reading of Smolin’s book, and the one would do most justice to both its achievements and the questions it poses, is a skeptical (not distrustful) reading–a reading that contests every argument and explores alternatives at each point. This approach entails much and not always easy reading in different areas and genres. The rewards, however, may be considerable. One can certainly learn quite a bit about both the life of cosmos and the life of physics.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bell, John S. Speakable and Unspeakable in Quantum Mechanics. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1987.
    • Blanchot, Maurice. The Infinite Conversation. Trans. Susan Hanson. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • Bohm, David. Wholeness and the Implicate Order. London: Routledge, 1980.
    • Bohr, Niels. “Can Quantum-Mechanical Description of Physical Reality be Considered Complete?” Quantum Theory and Measurement. Eds. John A. Wheeler and Wojciech H. Zurek. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1983. 145-51.
    • —. Philosophical Writings of Niels Bohr. 3 vols. Woodbridge, Conn.: Ox Bow Press, 1987.
    • Cushing, James. T. and Ernan McMullen. Philosophical Consequences of Quantum Theory: Reflections on Bell’s Theorem. Notre Dame: U of Notre Dame P, 1989.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Trans. Tom Conley. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • Einstein, Albert, Boris Podolsky, and Nathan Rosen. “Can Quantum-Mechanical Description of Physical Reality be Considered Complete?” Quantum Theory and Measurement. Eds. John A. Wheeler and Wojciech H. Zurek. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1983. 138-43.
    • Leibniz, Gottfried, W. The Monadology. Leibniz: Philosophical Writings. Ed. G.H.R. Parkinson. London: Dent, 1973. 175-194.
    • Mermin, N. David. Boojums All the Way Through: Communicating Science in a Prosaic Age. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1990.
    • —. “What Is Quantum Mechanics Trying to Tell Us?” Notes for a lecture at the Symposium in Honor of Edward M. Purcell, Harvard University, October 18, 1997.
    • Plotnitsky, Arkady. “Complementarity, Idealization, and the Limits of the Classical Conceptions of Reality.” Mathematics, Science and Postclassical Theory. Eds. Barbara H. Smith and Arkady Plotnitsky. Durham: Duke UP, 1997. 134-72.
    • —. “Landscapes of Sibylline Strangeness: Complementarity, Quantum Measurement and Classical Physics.” Metadebates. Eds. G.C. Cornelis, J.P. Van Bendegem, and D. Aerts. Dordrecht, Netherlands: Kluwer, 1998 (forthcoming).
    • Serres, Michel. Le système de Leibniz. 2 vols. Paris: Seuil, 1982.
    • Thorne, Kip. Black Holes and Time Warps: Einstein’s Outrageous Legacy. New York: Oxford UP, 1994.

     

  • Hybrid Bound

    Scott Michaelsen

    Department of English
    Michigan State University
    smichael@pilot.msu.edu

     

    José David Saldívar, Border Matters: Remapping American Cultural Studies.Berkeley: U of California P, 1997.

     

    It was not colorless, nor was it of any one uniform color--presenting to the eye, as it flowed, every possible shade of purple, like the hues of a changeable silk... we perceived that the whole mass of liquid was made up of a number of distinct veins, each of a distinct hue; that these veins did not commingle; and that their cohesion was perfect in regard to their own particles among themselves, and imperfect in regard to neighboring veins. Upon passing the blade of the knife athwart the veins, the water closed over it immediately, as with us, and also, in withdrawing it, all traces of the passage of the knife were instantly obliterated. If, however, the blade was passed down accurately between the two veins, a perfect separation was effected, which the power of cohesion did not immediately rectify. The phenomena of this water formed the first definite link in that vast chain of apparent miracles with which I was destined to be at length encircled. (Poe 194)

     

    This miracle, which takes place at the end of Chapter 18 of Edgar Allan Poe’s racial tale, The Narrative of Arthur Gordon Pym (1838), is perhaps the nineteenth-century analogue for the miracle now taking place in our midst, in the realm of post-colonial criticism. It is the miracle of hybridity. Here is the potentially utopian, boundary-shattering figure of the hybrid: that which is a conjunction of the many makes its appearance as a changing flow, as a swirl of shifting color, such that it is neither “colorless” nor “uniform,” such that it embodies “every possible shade” without being any particular shade. And here is the miracle: that which is so conjoined can always be reduced to “a perfect separation.” Each element of the hybrid can be cut “athwart”; that is, the “veins” of the multiple elements can be cut open, exposed to one another, as indeed they must have been innumerable times before, and yet the singular veins always maintain their essential characters. And the individual veins can be exposed and analyzed in all of their singularity by simply passing a blade “between” them. Which is to suggest, as Poe’s extended metaphor certainly does, that the appearance or the effect of hybridity is phantasmatic–a trick of light and motion which, finally, is founded upon strands each of which is an unchanging essence. This episode in Pym, then, can be read as a polygenist response to the seemingly incontrovertible, visible fact of racial intermixture. The integrity of the individual strands puts the lie to any claim regarding hybridity.

     

    Poe’s brief text, perhaps, should serve as a warning to certain forms of post-colonial criticism concerned with hybridization. The warning takes this complex form: hybridity cannot really be hybridity–cannot really be a mixture and confusion of categories, types, bodies–if it is still possible, in the end, to identify the individual elements that compose the hybrid. If the hybrid were truly a hybrid, it would subvert the possibility of locating its individual parts, of producing an analytic which might chart the contributions of origin. A hybrid which can be disarticulated, then, is a compound without mixture, not a hybrid. When recent post-colonial criticism both marks approvingly the existence of hybrids, as a sign of utopian powers and potentialities, and determines the individual elements which make up the hybrid, it is in danger of fully recapitulating the logic of nineteenth-century racial studies. It falls, in short, into Poe’s trap.

     

    José David Saldívar’s recent volume, Border Matters, is entirely organized around the logic of the hybrid. He contends that “any examination of some of the key theoretical turns in cultural theory has to contend with [Néstor] García Canclini’s Culturas híbridas” (Saldívar 29).1 Hybridity, Saldívar claims, is the large fact of the modern Mexican-U.S. borderlands–a fact pregnant with possibility. “What changes,” he asks, “when culture is understood in terms of material hybridity, not purity?” (19). The answer is at least all of the following: a certain “playfulness of form” is evident (33); a certain subaltern agency is made possible in the “shifting and shifty versions of border culture” thereby produced (35); a certain sort of “deconstruction” takes place, of the “monological desire of cultural nationhood” (5-6)2; a certain “crossing, circulation, material mixing, and resistance” takes place such that contestation of power is possible and the “multiple-voiced” or inherently dialogic emerge (xiii, 13-14). In short, the borderlands is figured as “now only liminal ground, which may prove fertile for some and slimy for others” (21).

     

    Saldívar’s account, then, is one of material fertility, and of the political powers that accrue under such conditions. But Border Matters, at every turn, would be subject to Poe’s critique. To cite just one example, Tish Hinojosa’s music is described as a hybrid music; she “plays an eclectic blend of U.S.-Mexican border styles, mixing elements of corridos, cumbias, folk, rock, and country and western lyrics and lilting melodies” (188). Saldívar’s descriptions of hybridity amount to a taking account of individual cultural elements. To listen to Hinojosa productively is to be able to identify the point of origin of each contribution–to determine cultures and their products. Saldívar writes that Hinojosa’s “simple power” lies in her ability to “disentangle the segregated musical boundaries that divide the mass-mediated music industry,” which is a curious formulation (188): Why is it that hybridic desegregation is premised, then, on the act of disentanglement, rather than an entanglement of that which is culturally segregated? The answer is that the form of hybrid analysis which is practiced by Border Matters is entirely commensurate with Poe’s water streams.

     

    Border Matters occasionally but consistently is organized as an argument with anthropology. In pages on the nineteenth-century “soldier-ethnographer” John Gregory Bourke, for example, Saldívar writes:

     

    Culture in this light is the nimbus perceived by one group when it comes into contact with and observes another one. It is the objectification of everything alien and weird and exotic about the contact group. (166)

     

    This is a rather all-encompassing and generalized critique of anthropology and the anthropological project, and Saldívar sustains it elsewhere–for example: “forms of imperial dominion have often been concretized in the personas and functions of the traveler, especially the missionary and the anthropologist” (139). And yet, of course, Saldívar’s crucial term of art, hybridity, belongs entirely to the history of colonial anthropology–a fact that goes unremarked in Border Matters.

     

    The nineteenth-century concept of the materially fertile hybrid, as the key figure in the wars between racialist monogenists and polygenists, was designed, as Robert J.C. Young reminds, to operate in precisely the manner in which Saldívar forecasts: “Hybridity… is a key term in that wherever it emerges it suggests the impossibility of essentialism” (Young 27). This, perhaps, is now well known. What has gone unnoticed, however, is the strange journey of the hybridity concept in nineteenth-century U.S. thought.3

     

    In the first place, hybridity is advanced by the so-called monogenists, and this “beginning” should give one pause, because if those on the side of hybridity can only announce the existence of hybrids in the name of The Unity of the Human Race, as hybridity theorist John Bachman’s 1850 book title has it, then hybridity can only be the logic of incest; it cannot be the logic of the “heterotopic,” as Saldívar would have it (14), but rather the thought of the singular. When Saldívar announces his intention, at the end of his “Introduction,” “to unify a rhetoric or stylistics of the border” (14), he places himself in line with those nineteenth-century figures who reveal the wild card of hybridity only to always already keep it in its place, to announce a kind of impossibility of hybridization in the face of unification.

     

    The crucial nineteenth-century U.S. debate over hybridity took place between the Reverend Bachman and Samuel Morton in the early 1850s. Bachman was minister of St. John’s Lutheran Church in Charleston, South Carolina. Morton was a medical doctor whose fascination with the measurement of human skull size yielded Crania Americana (1839) and Crania Aegyptiaca (1844)–perhaps the two most crucial American texts for the development of a scientific racist perspective. Bachman’s three works from 1850 on hybridity–each produced as a combination of scholarship and personal attack on Morton–prompted a searching investigation on Morton’s which lasted the whole of the next year, until his death in May of 1851. His contemporaneous biographer Henry S. Patterson comments:

     

    Never had Morton been so busy as in that spring of 1851.... His researches upon Hybridity cost him much labor, in his extended comparison of authorities, and his industrial search for facts bearing on the question. (Nott and Gliddon lvi)

     

    The texts Morton produced in this last year of his life are quite fugitive–stray paragraphs toward a response to Bachman, for example, in the pages of the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, for example, and unfinished pages, or what his literary executors call “inedited manuscripts,” toward a full-scale revision of Crania Americana. What one learns from these pages appears to be counter-intuitive. One learns that Morton, rather than simply rejecting the test of hybridity, or denying its ability to produce non-degenerate persons, incorporated hybridity into his account of the races, incorporated it in such a way that the very idea of distinct races rests upon a foundation of earlier hybridizations of what one might call proto-races. The crucial moment comes on September 10, 1850, when Morton, President of the Academy of Natural Sciences, reads a short paper from the chair to those in attendance “on the value of the word species in Zoology” (Morton 81). While Morton defines “species” as a “primordial organic form” in a perhaps entirely conventional polygenist manner, his further comment, clearly influenced by Bachman’s attack, says otherwise:

     

    It will be justly remarked that a difficulty presents itself, at the outset, in determining what forms are primordial.... My view may be briefly explained by saying, that if certain existing organic types can be traced back into the "night of time," as dissimilar as we see them now, is it not more reasonable to regard them as aboriginal, than to suppose them the mere accidental derivations of an isolated patriarchal stem of which we know nothing? Hence, for example, I believe the dog family not to have originated from one primitive form, but many. Again, what I call a species may be regarded by some naturalists as a primitive variety... (Morton 82)

     

    Here is what Morton has done: Bachman’s evidence of hybridization among what Morton treats as the five basic races has now been taken into account. The possibility of, say, black-white mixtures in the world, does not refute an “aboriginal” racial thesis, but merely demonstrates that at a more “primitive” moment, a much larger and more complex network of “forms” intermingled, producing five distinct races but retaining traces of their interrelationship. Morton therefore does not do battle directly with Hybridity, but rather swallows it whole, adopts it as his foundational historical gesture, uses it to undergird a theory of now relatively stable races that can at least be differentiated in terms of talents and possibilities in the last instance, if not prevented from certain sorts of hybridization given primitive “proximate” or “allied” relations (Morton 82).

     

    One can, of course, read this definition of “species” as “variety” as an act of desperation, of logical confusion, or as a misunderstanding of what hybridity threatens in relation to narratives of racial difference. But it is perhaps best not to move too quickly in adopting this perspective, and to take seriously the fact that 1850 stages the great debate between essence and hybridity, produces a concept of hybridity to undermine essence, then locates hybridity as the ground of essence. The very idea of hybridity undergirds, belatedly, but, finally, in the first place, the idea of different entities–guarantees their space, their properties. Its every attempt to calculate original, non-binary relations produces the conditions for impermeable borders, restructures cultural geography in a manner akin to the “redlining” of real estate districts.

     

    Nothing is quite what it seems in this great hybridity debate. The existence of hybrids is announced in the name of a worldview–monogenism–which seemingly would preclude the possibility of absolute differences among human bodies, of therefore the very possibility of the “hetero.” The announcement is issued from the old slave South, in the pages of the Charleston Medical Journal, in order to do battle with a Northerner who publishes his great works of scientific racialism in Philadelphia, the home of American liberty. And Bachman, finally, sided with the South on the question of secession, a week before South Carolina’s official decision to leave the union: “I must go with my people,” he announced from his pulpit, leaving one to wonder precisely who one’s “people” might be in a world of nothing but kin (qtd. in Shuler 216).

     

    Given this complex and problematic history, one might finally wonder in what way a reinvigorated notion of hybridity might do battle with racial and cultural essentialisms at the end of the millennium. Saldívar’s sixth chapter, “Tijuana Calling,” is useful for such a purpose. It is here that Sald�var surveys a number of commentators on Tijuana as a border flashpoint, as a sign or a token of a new hybrid world being born. Saldívar dismisses New York Times writer Beverley Lowry’s travel writing on Tijuana precisely because it “is [not] sympathetic… to the material hybrid and heteroglossic (sub)cultures of Tijuana” (134); praises Rubén Martínez’s The Other Side (1992) because it can hear Tijuana’s “noisy music of intercultural bricolage” (144); and in general weighs a number of writers by the standard of whether they have managed to attend to the existence of hybrid cultural formations.4 One of the key texts in Saldívar’s account is Richard Rodriguez’s Days of Obligation: An Argument With My Mexican Father (1992). He concludes his Tijuana chapter with Rodriguez (and performance artist and writer Guillermo Gómez-Peña) “because their work provokes both celebration and disdain,” and, indeed, the highly visible Rodriguez for years has been vilified by progressive Chicano studies scholars for writing against such matters as “affirmative action and bilingual education” and for support of the “English-only movement” (146, 151).5 Over five remarkable pages, Saldívar concludes that Rodriguez, in Days of Obligation, has discovered hybridization and that, therefore, Rodriguez has undergone a “sea change”: his “mandarin” views have been transformed, and he has converted into a figure who “seems to want to put behind [him] the earlier polemics” (149, 151). In essence, Saldívar suggests that Richard Rodriguez has moved from an anti-Mexican, anti-Chicano viewpoint to “the Mexican point of view” through acknowledgment of his identity as a gay man and a Mexican man, through acknowledgment that he himself is a hybrid figure shot through with determinations that include both Anglo and Mexican elements (150). Hence Rodriguez’s newfound ability to use hybridity as a weapon against essentialism; Saldívar reads Rodriguez as concluding that “the South is in the North” and that “Mexico… is ready to spill over across the wire into the North and take up the whole enchilada” (149). Saldívar welcomes Rodriguez into the fold of those who have converted to hybridity analysis, to the “undoing [of] hegemonic readings of Baja and Alta California” (150). Rodriguez is now one of us, then, a figure who, through discovery and celebration of the forces of Americas’ hybridity, has re-entered and repositioned himself within the battle over identity politics on the left-progressive side.

     

    To intervene at this moment in Saldívar’s text is, in one sense, easy, and in another, complex. It is relatively easy, for example, to document that Rodriguez himself has undergone no political conversion, has not “put behind” him any of his former political beliefs. Rodriguez in 1998 is giving major public lectures in which he proclaims that “multiculturalism is loony” and that “the ideological premises of affirmative action are dying” (qtd. in Miller 1). The difficult part is the reconciliation of Rodriguez, the public lecturer, with the claims Saldívar makes concerning Days of Obligation. What must first be said is that Rodriguez’s discovery of hybridity–material hybridity–has enabled his polemic against affirmative action, multiculturalism, and the like. The fact that “we are finding more kids like Tiger Woods who don’t identify with a single racial identity,” for example, is a sign of the bankruptcy of claims to particular identities (qtd. in Miller 1). Now that “we” are all hybrids, according to Rodriguez, it is no longer possible to imagine coherent claims to racial-cultural heritages. At the level of the genes, of bodies, Rodriguez has produced an at least coherent (although deeply problematic) narrative of hybridity–one that takes account of Poe’s polemic and suggests that hybridity implies a mixture without recourse to origins and elements.

     

    But when one examines Rodriguez’s Days of Obligation, one is doubly struck by the force of the attack on narratives of racial-cultural persistence (particularly in the opening chapter, “India”), and by the powerful advocacy of persistence narratives of what one might call national-religious cultures. For Rodriguez, America is two stories: Anglo-Puritanism and Spanish-Catholicism. The first is “comedy,” and the second “tragedy” (Rodriguez xvi). The first is hopeful optimism (represented by the dream of Anglo California), and the second tends toward “cynical conclusions” about the world (xvii). The first is maternal and seedy, the second paternal and quasi-fascist.6 When Saldívar highlights Rodriguez’s conversion to the “Mexican point of view,” he highlights a conversion to what Rodriguez calls a truly Augustinian vision of the inevitability of “human unhappiness” (26), of a community of suffering without sentimentalism.7

     

    Saldívar’s dating of Rodriguez’s conversion to his moments of “coming out” as both gay and Mexican misses entirely Rodriguez’s own conversion statement: in the wake of Martin Luther King’s death, the rise of “hack radicals” like Stokely Carmichael and César Chávez (purveyor of pastoral-victimization narratives, and who was and remains “irrelevant to Mexican-American lives”) transformed him from a Protestant optimist to Mexican pessimist (Rodriguez 189, 67, 70). As for Rodriguez’s gay identity, a close reading of Days of Obligation’s key chapter, “Late Victorians,” indicates that Rodriguez seeks to distance himself, at every turn, from the culture of gay life, which he characterizes as fully Protestant or “Victorian” in its quest for wealth, taste, artificiality, and the like. The chapter’s repeated trope has Rodriguez sitting alone in his room, ruminating on gay street life outside his door, and Rodriguez identifies himself not as “gay” (there is no “coming out” in these pages) but as a person with a deep “unwillingness to embrace life” (43). “Late Victorians” tacitly affirms the results of the AIDS epidemic because it potentially will force San Francisco gay men to embrace a Catholic community of resigned suffering.

     

    As a final point, Saldívar has completely misunderstood Rodriguez’s Tijuana chapter, “In Athens Once.” Tijuana, in Rodriguez’s view, is fundamentally an Anglo-Protestant city: an “optimistic city,” a city whose fundamental character is revealed by the supermarket which has “Everything!” (93, 104-5). Rodriguez’s logic is that post-AIDS California is turning Catholic, that North American religion is turning Catholic,8 that border-Mexico has turned Protestant, and his vision, then, of Tijuana invading the North is an image of the re-Protestantization of the North: “silent as a Trojan horse, inevitable as a flotilla of boat people, more confounding in its innocence, in its power of proclamation, than Spielberg’s most pious vision of a flying saucer” (106). Rodriguez’s vision of Tijuana engulfing the North is a deeply ironic one, and hardly celebratory, as Anglo-America uncannily bears witness to a vision of its former self reconquering it in the name of Protestant commerce and individuality.

     

    José David Saldívar, then, has misunderstood everything of importance in his readings of hybridity–absent the bare fact that Rodriguez’s book concerns his own hybridity9–and this must be weighed in all seriousness. One: Rodriguez, on matters of “culture,” is absolutely monolithic and essentialist. His vision of national-religious-cultural hybridization is one that Poe precisely unmasks, but such unmasking is unnecessary because Rodriguez has no interest, here, in an account of hybridization which might be put to work against essentialisms. And Two: Rodriguez, on matters of “culture,” is absolutely not a late convert to liberal politics of inclusion and rights. He remains a bitter foe of liberalism in all of its guises, and advocates, in Days of Obligation, a return to original Catholic “relief from loneliness” in this world through “the Catholic knowledge of union, the mystical body of Christ” (198, 196). “Novelty should not come from within the Church,” Rodriguez warns: “I am not prepared to watch the Catholic Church stumble over a Protestant issue like multiculturalism” (190, 194).

     

    The presumption, then, on the part of Saldívar, that the very recognition of hybridity is inherently democratic, dialogic, subversive, deconstructive, and the like, is what is at stake here. It is that presumption, in virtual reduplication of the strange shape of the nineteenth-century Bachman-Morton debate, which permits Saldívar’s Border Matters to validate Rodriguez’s text and thus affirm the hybrid’s participation in Rodriguez’s Mother Theresa-like rapture over the suffering, failed body. Border Matters, finally, represents a certain crisis of reading in post-colonial, ethnic, and border studies, in which the assumed value of a network of concepts overrides the possibility of seeing what is literally placed right in front of one’s eyes. Border Matters, then, is an act of faith: faith in a deep anthropological vision which has, however, failed “us” at every instance, and in the last instance.

    Notes

     

    1. Originally published in 1990; now translated as Hybrid Cultures: Strategies for Entering and Leaving Modernity, trans. Christopher L. Chiappari and Silvia L. López (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1995).

     

    2. This phrase is Saldívar citing David Lloyd approvingly.

     

    3. Young’s interesting book is the latest attempt to read the epochal debates over race in the nineteenth century. Other important works in this line include Stanton, Gossett, Bieder, and the two works by Horsman. The section of my text which follows is a too-short summarization of a reading of these debates which diverges from this tradition, and which I am preparing for publication.

     

    4. Saldívar, it should be noted, uses other criteria at times to render judgments: often he searches for writers who utilize standpoint theory and reflect critically upon their own social subject positions. Thus, Luis Alberto Urrea’s Across the Wire is “trapped in the antinomy of the missionary and the ethnographer,” and it would have been “conceptually stronger if he [Urrea] had reflected more on the evangelist-anthropological processes themselves” (140, 139). Such standpoint reflection has been criticized on a number of grounds, not least of which because it does nothing but reconstitute a transcendental subject, despite its best efforts.

     

    5. Rodriguez has long courted social conservatives, in the pages of American Scholar magazine, and in his first book, Hunger of Memory.

     

    6. Rodriguez writes, pointedly, “Protestant trains smell better than Catholic trains and they run on time” (183).

     

    7. See, particularly, Chapter 9, “The Latin American Novel.”

     

    8. See page 197: “As Latin America turns Protestant, North America experiences the dawning of a Catholic vision–‘the global village’–an ecology closer to medievalism than to the Industrial Age.”

     

    9. See Rodriguez xvii.

    Works Cited

     

    • Bieder, Robert E. Science Encounters the Indian, 1820-1880: The Early Years of American Ethnology. Norman: U of Oklahoma P, 1986.
    • Gossett, Thomas F. Race: The History of an Idea in America. 1963. New ed. New York: Oxford UP, 1997.
    • Horsman, Reginald. Josiah Nott of Mobile: Southerner, Physician, and Racial Theorist. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State UP, 1987.
    • —. Race and Manifest Destiny: The Origins of American Racial Anglo-Saxonism. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1981.
    • Miller, David. “Author: Multiculturalism ‘looney,’ race irrelevant.” The State News 9 April 1998: 1, 10.
    • Morton, Samuel. “September 10th.” Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 5 (1852): 81-82.
    • Nott, J.C. and Geo. R. Gliddon. Types of Mankind: or, Ethnological Researches, Based Upon the Ancient Monuments, Paintings, Sculptures, and Crania of Races, and Upon Their Natural, Geographical, Philological, and Biblical History, Illustrated by Selections from the Inedited Papers of Samuel George Morton, M.D., (Late President of the Academy of Natural Sciences at Philadelphia,) and by Additional Contributions from Prof. L. Agassiz, LL.D.; W. Usher, M.D.; and Prof. H.S. Patterson, M.D.: 1854. Ninth ed. Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott, 1868.
    • Poe, Edgar Allan. The Narrative of Arthur Gordon Pym of Nantucket. 1838. Ed. Harold Beaver. New York: Penguin, 1975.
    • Rodriguez, Richard. Days of Obligation: An Argument with My Mexican Father. New York: Penguin, 1992.
    • Shuler, Jay. Had I the Wings: The Friendship of Bachman and Audubon. Athens: U of Georgia P, 1995.
    • Stanton, William. The Leopard’s Spots: Scientific Attitudes Toward Race in America 1815-59. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1960.
    • Young, Robert J.C. Colonial Desire: Hybridity in Theory, Culture and Race. New York: Routledge, 1995.

     

  • Culture on Vacation

    Mark Goble

    Department of English
    Stanford University
    m.goble@leland.stanford.edu

     

    James Clifford’s Routes: Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1997.

     

    Why is it not surprising that the Oxford English Dictionary locates the word “vacationer” as a term used chiefly in the United States? Across the whole complicated spectrum of U.S. cultures, classes, and ethnic identities, it can be said that practically no one “goes on holiday” and only rarely does someone “travel.” Instead, Americans take vacations. The very locution suggests the intensity with which leisure is pursued and constructed in the U.S., the almost violent attachment to small bits of time away from everyday life here in the industrialized nation that keeps its workers at work–across the class structure–for more hours of more weeks than all but a few Pacific Rim nations, which are then of course demonized for making their workers work too hard. At frequent stops along the various ways through modernity that James Clifford charts in his latest book, Routes: Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century, he makes use of his own location as the American “vacationer” to orient himself and us within the many cultures-in-transit with which he is concerned. This is not to say that orientation, once achieved, is readily understood or long maintained. One of the particular strengths of Clifford’s work as “a historical critic of anthropology” (8), whether in Writing Culture: The Poetics and Politics of Ethnography, a collection of essays he edited with George Marcus, or his previous book, The Predicament of Culture: Twentieth-Century Ethnography, Literature, and Art, has always been its willingness to dispense with rigid conclusions in favor of a dialectical flexibility across a heterogeneous landscape that excludes total purity of either theoretical abstraction or empirical experience.

     

    Routes extends and amplifies Clifford’s familiar style of analysis, though sometimes departing from his established topics of interest. “Routes continues an argument with the concept of culture” (2), Clifford writes, but this argument is often carried out on a terrain in which academic argument itself is on a sort of vacation, purposefully avoided in hopes of radically re-creating some of the standard styles of writing in which the study of “culture” is done. As Clifford writes, “Experiments in travel writing and poetic collage are interspersed with formal essays. By combining genres I register, and begin to historicize, the book’s composition–its different audiences and occasions. The point is not to bypass academic rigor…. The book’s mix of styles evokes these multiple and uneven practices of research, making visible the borders of academic work” (12). Routes gives one the sense of critique carried out under conditions of compulsory movement from place to place and from discourse to discourse. And like an American vacation in the strict sense of the term, different historical sites are visited both literally and figuratively. Each of the book’s three sections is loosely organized around standard essays. “Traveling Cultures” and “Spatial Practices” set the terms for the book’s first section, “Travels”; “Museums as Contact Zones” serves as the critical mass for several pieces on “Contacts”; and “Diasporas” outlines what is at stake in the various “Futures” that Clifford investigates in the book’s third and final portion. These “formal essays” inform and contend with other texts that range in styles among the various aforementioned genres. There are several pieces of travel writing that visit such locations as the northwest coast of Canada, the Museum of Man in London, the bustling tourist center of Palenque, Mexico, and Fort Ross, California. And in the practice of “poetic collage,” Clifford visits such texts as John Wesley Powell’s The Exploration of the Colorado River and John Steven’s Incidents of Travel in Central America, Chiapas, and Yucatan, both works of nineteenth century U.S. travel writing; Audre Lorde’s Zami: A New Spelling of my Name; and Freud’s Moses and Monotheism. The diversity of approaches and appropriations is in keeping with Clifford’s conception of the book’s deceptively plain yet formidable goal: “Routes begins with [the] assumption of movement, arguing that travels and contacts are crucial sites for an unfinished modernity…. The essays gathered here aim to make some sense, or senses, of people going places” (2).

     

    “Fort Ross Meditation,” the book’s final chapter, is an exemplary place to begin to understand in more detail Clifford’s project in Routes. It is no accident that Clifford ends a book on “people going places” under the signs of the most global dynamics one can imagine–capitalism, communication technologies, the nation-state–with an essay that examines a place just hours away from Clifford’s home in northern California. The irony speaks to the dialectical complexity of modern “dwelling/traveling.” The most elaborate histories of travel more than likely await us wherever we are in the late twentieth century, and we need barely move in order to witness the mobile narratives of imperial conquest and cultural change that play across the landscape. The first-person plural, however, remains highly conditional in Clifford; he rarely generalizes his investigations in the service of a constructed totality under which the entire chronotope of contemporary life may be situated. The most seductive totality that Clifford avoids in Routes is that of an essentially “deterritorialized” postmodernism of the kind associated with Deleuze and Guattari. Clifford instead devotes himself painstakingly to the project of differentiating between the relative and unstable experiences of mobility and stasis that interact in the countless “contact zones” between and within cultures. Fort Ross, California may represent an upper limit case for the complexity of such encounters. Fort Ross–“Ross” here derived from “Russia”–was a fur-trading outpost of the Russian Empire, its southernmost point of expansion into the Spain’s empire in the Americas. In addition to Russia and Spain, Great Britain and the United States also come into contact at Fort Ross. But the presences of these nations give only the barest sketch of the different communities “located” at Fort Ross: others include the Kayshaya Band of the Pomo Indians, Russian Siberians, Aleutian creoles, and Mormon missionaries. Each of these communities experienced Fort Ross as a different kind of far-flung destination and/or rapidly-changing homeland, and constructed different histories of mercantile dreams, imperial devastation, labor exploitation, postcolonial decline, and international conflict. And these pasts, as Clifford narrates them one after another, were necessarily assembled in dialogue with different presents, depending upon who was doing the work of historical narration.

     

    “Fort Ross Meditation” in many ways recalls “Identity in Mashpee,” the concluding chapter of The Predicament of Culture, but it is in its departures from that earlier piece that we see how Clifford has transformed and refined his project. “Identity in Mashpee” told the story of a New England Indian tribe’s courtroom drama of recognition in the face of a long and bewildering history of resistance, assimilation, reinvention, hybridization, and modernization: “What if identity,” Clifford asked, “is conceived not as a boundary to be maintained but as a nexus of relations and transactions actively engaging a subject?” (Predicament 344). His calculus attempted to track cultural identities over time, and his conclusions were that “culture” as “identity” must always and necessarily fail to account fully for the histories that converge at any one individual, and that neither narratives of total assimilation nor unchanging continuance adequately describe the diverse fates of Indian peoples in the United States.1 In “Fort Ross Meditation,” however, the center of attention is not a people but a place, a construction of both ethnographic and geographic fashioning. This shift in focus is accompanied by a shift in analytic style as well, for if one of the purposes of “Identity in Mashpee” was to show how a kind of anthropological deconstruction could sift out the traces of something called “Mashpee culture” in unlikely histories and practices, then “Fort Ross Meditation” can perhaps be read as a work of polymorphous cartography, a multiplied mapping of a particular place by means of narrative proliferation: the story of Russian discovery written over the story of Kayshaya subjugation, written over the story of Spanish decline, written over the story of U.S. expansion, written over the story of Kayshaya resistance, written over the story of contemporary reconstruction of the story of Russian discovery, and so on. By choosing location itself as the “field” for his investigation, Clifford permits himself to speculate about histories that may exist in relation to a specific ecology of place in which the human is but one variable among many, often the most destructive but not necessarily the most important. The Russians came to Fort Ross because of the sea otter and the lucrative Chinese trade in pelts that made such a far-flung outpost profitable and therefore possible. Thus Clifford suggests the rather eccentric project of a history that not only accounts for the sea otter’s role in the local and international economies that came to a nexus at Fort Ross, but a history which actually belongs to the sea otter.

     

    This makes for a strange moment in the book, for here it becomes necessary to ascertain just how much indulgence Clifford may be permitted in the rhetorical play that comes with any attempt to shift the work of critical analysis into a different register of language. As such, the following passages in “Fort Ross Meditation” suggest themselves as paradigmatic of the book’s larger aims both stylistically and thematically:

     

    A symptom, perhaps, of this uncertainty [about the nature of historical agency and consciousness] is my hankering to ask an absurd question. What does the history of changing environments, including their own near extinction, commodification, and consumption since 1700, look like to sea otters? How might this history appear to them? The arrival of a new predator? Holocaust? The predator's removal? Survival? Can we imagine a nonhuman historical consciousness?... Why this desire to find something like historical consciousness and agency in nonhumans? What temporalities define the consciousness of sea otters? Day and nights? Tides? Seasons and currents? The life cycles of kelp and other food? Reproduction? Birth and death? Perhaps even generations--a sense of living through offspring? None of these temporalities, the feelings, actions, and skills associated with them, come within distant translation-range of 'history' in its human senses.... Why indulge in such speculations? Perhaps to glimpse, from a translated place of animal difference, the enveloping waters in which I myself swim, the environment in which my 'life' unfolds, a habitat called history. (325-326)

     

    This passage brings to mind Thoreau’s Walden and its allegorizing of a battle between two ant colonies to signify across a great many meanings from the most existentially abstract (the futility of human endeavor) to the most historically referenced (the potential for violence in a nation both free and slave). At the same time, Clifford wants to forestall an allegorical interpretation even as he dances across its possibility. There is something corny about all this and Clifford knows it: after an earlier collage on “White Ethnicity” has ironically detailed Clifford’s own formative encounters with bluegrass music and its performance of whiteness, I don’t think it an accident that “hankering” here makes what must be one if its first appearances in a book of cultural theory. The wider latitude of travel writing as a genre brings with it rhetorical dangers. Questions stack up and hover over each other like airplanes in a holding pattern at a busy airport. A down-home kitsch mediates a moment that oscillates between wildly divergent languages: on the one hand, Clifford reaches for a kind of metaphorical excess reminiscent of Benjamin in his phantasmagoric attempts to speak from the soul of the commodity, but on the other hand, he must ward off the kind of didactic sentimentality reminiscent of Charles Kuralt in his syrupy naturalization of history as another consumable for Sunday morning brunch. But no abstract of quotation and comment can stand in for the experience of reading a text like “Fort Ross Meditation.” The critical energies of the essay depend wholly upon the literary performativeness of the writing, a statement which is, I admit, a truism that could be said of any text, but a truism that is brought to the fore and animated by Clifford’s writing in Routes.

     

    “I’m looking for history at Fort Ross,” Clifford begins one section of “Fort Ross Meditation,” “I want to understand my location among others in time and space. Where have we been and where are we going?” (301). The combination of flat tone and big questions would not be out of place on a postcard–though admittedly of a very particular kind. Clifford exploits the conventions of travel writing again in “Palenque Log,” a narrative reconstruction of one day in and around a major site of Mayan ruins in Chiapas. Here, Clifford maintains the form of a diary with exact notations of time and place as a device that both frames and generates the ethnographic discourse of the piece. The sentences are short. The syntax is economical. The text achieves the slightly compromised and degraded status of travel writing while simultaneously commenting on the very conventions it inhabits. Thus the entry for “11:00-1:30” begins “Jungle atmosphere in the hotel restaurant” and develops into a brief moment of reflection on the writings of a previous American tourist in Palenque, the nineteenth-century traveler John Stephens (227). Clifford invites, if not demands, a reckoning of his own travels against those of a predecessor of whose ideological limits he is only too aware. But whereas a conventional essay would extrapolate, evade, or contextualize such a moment of anxious influence, Clifford opts for a dazzling and deflating narrative gesture: he ends the entry by confessing, “I doze off” (228). Yet what sort of confession is this? Is it possible to doze off in the present tense? The present tense signifies a break in narrative time that is impossible to suture shut. No matter what a narrator writes–“I am falling asleep,” “I dozed off”–an implication of constructed discontinuity cannot be dodged, and Clifford makes no effort here or elsewhere to dodge these effects of writing as such.

     

    The more “writerly” chapters in Routes, like “Fort Ross Meditation,” “Palenque Log,” and the fascinating collage “Immigrant” (inspired by a Susan Hiller installation at the Freud Museum in London), all display–and I use this word pointedly, in conversation with Clifford’s own critiques of the display of objects in museums–their hybrid genealogies as interdisciplinary experiments in analysis and language. The less ostentatiously experimental chapters, like “Spatial Practices: Fieldwork, Travel, and the Disciplining of Anthropology” and “Paradise,” a wide-ranging essay that begins as a review of an exhibit on New Guinea at the Museum of Mankind in London and expands into a discussion of how the discourse of cultural hybridity addresses its own potential for hegemony, display the strengths familiar to readers of Clifford’s previous work. Whether writing about the historical construction of the “field” as a site of anthropology’s codification as a discipline, or about the role played by the discourse of diaspora in such works as Paul Gilroy’s Black Atlantic and Jonathan and Daniel Boyarin’s writings on Jewish identity, Clifford is a powerful synthesizer of diverse arguments. Yet even the more traditional essays in Routes eschew the more structurally aggressive kinds of arguments that Clifford made in The Predicament of Culture; for while Routes announces itself as a sequel to its predecessor, the thematics of the new book drive Clifford to more provisional conclusions. In “Traveling Cultures,” for example, Clifford tells how a re-reading of the essay “On Ethnographic Surrealism” led him to imagine an essay of the chronotope–the privileged theoretical figure of The Predicament of Culture–of the hotel in the 1920s and 1930s. “But almost immediately the organizing image, the chronotope, began to break up. And I now find myself embarked on a research project where any condensed epitome or place of survey is questionable. The comparative scope I’m struggling toward is not a form of overview. Rather, I’m working with a notion of comparative knowledge produced through an itinerary, always marked by a ‘way in,’ a history of locations and a location of histories” (31).

     

    The book Clifford produces out of his struggle toward a “comparative scope,” a book in which modern experiences of relative habitation and relative mobility can be understood as mutually constituting one another even as they propel cultures and subjects along different paths through the twentieth century, must of necessity feature more instances of startling insight than comprehensive perspective. The book’s overall shape conforms imperfectly to any available models: too heterogeneous to articulate a single argument, too stylistically diverse for a collection of essays, and yet too rigorous to be considered a work of postmodern travel writing (whatever that might be). And while there is a great deal of autobiographical reflection in Routes, its field of vision is categorically more broad and more historically committed than most of the academic memoirs that have been appearing for the last few years. As Clifford himself notes, of the modern domains of knowledge, anthropology has long been the discipline in which the first-person singular plays the most compelling role in legitimizing the knowledge itself. Anthropologists insist that they were “there” in a way that few literary critics insist they have read the book. It is too soon to know if Routes is to be the first or the last statement Clifford makes within that peculiar tradition of autobiographical anthropology that includes Michel Leiris’s Rules of the Game and Malinowski’s Diary in the Strict Sense of the Term, and that perhaps should cover James’s The American Scene as well. What is certain, however, is that for the time being James Clifford is among the most interesting traveling companions we’re likely to meet on the way to wherever it is we’re going.

     

    Note

     

    1. For an intriguing critique of Clifford, see Walter Benn Michaels, Our America: Nativism, Modernism, and Pluralism (Durham: Duke UP, 1995). In a long and cunning footnote, Michaels pushes at what he sees as the underlying incongruities in Clifford’s attempt to articulate a difference between reinvention and continuity as indicators of cultural presence and identity. Bluntly put, Michaels argues that there is no reinvention without the prior assumption of a continuity that renders a subject already a participant in the “culture” whose activities she pursues. Thus Michaels’s contention that “drumming will make you a Mashpee not because anyone who drums gets to be a Mashpee but because, insofar as your drumming counts as remembering a lost tradition, it shows that you already are a Mashpee” (177). Michaels imagines a laboratory condition in which all the variables of identity are burned away save two: freely chosen material practices and biological phantasms of race. Clifford revisits the predicaments of identity at several points in Routes, most notably in an exchange with Stuart Hall reproduced at the end of the essay “Traveling Cultures.” When pressed by Hall to articulate how “something” of an identity can be carried on through situations of pronounced migration, diaspora, and acculturation, Clifford argues that identity might be better conceived as “something more polythetic, something more like a habitus, a set of practices and dispositions, part of which could be remembered, articulated in specific contexts” (44). And later, Clifford augments this idea by figuring identity as “a processural configuration of historically given elements–including race, culture, class, gender, and sexuality–different combinations of which may be featured in different conjunctures. These elements may, in some conjunctures, cross-cut and bring each other to crisis. What components of identity are ‘deep’ and what ‘superficial’? What ‘central’ and what ‘peripheral’?” (46). I doubt that Michaels would be swayed by these statements either. Michaels’s critique of identity is all but irreconcilable with the most basic assumptions of anthropological discourse, namely that social agents larger than the individual and smaller than discourse itself really do exist.

    Works Cited

     

    • Clifford, James. The Predicament of Culture: Twentieth Century Ethnography, Literature, and Art. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1988.
    • Clifford, James. Routes: Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1997.
    • Michaels, Walter Benn. Our America: Nativism, Modernism, and Pluralism. Durham: Duke UP, 1995.

     

  • Too Far In to Be “Out”

    Thomas Lavazzi

    Department of Humanities/English
    Savannah State University
    lavazzit@tigerpaw.ssc.peachnet.edu

     

    Mark Russell, ed. Out of Character: Rants, Raves, and Monologues from Today’s Top Performance Artists.New York: Bantam, 1997.

     

    Out of Character anthologizes the work of thirty-one contemporary performance artists in ten times as many pages, from high poptech artists like Laurie Anderson and big-ticket monologists like Spalding Gray to less well-known ethno rappers like Robbie McCauley and multi-character soloists like Peggy Pettitt. While many of the performance texts are captivating, the collection’s emphasis on the monologue format, its lack of critical apparatus, and the absence of semiotic analysis of the mise en scène of individual performance events produce a limited view of the contemporary Performance Art scene.

     

    Each brief chapter opens with a full-page photo of the performance artist, followed by a “biographical questionnaire” of the Playboy’s-Most-Eligible-Bachelors variety (in addition to basic personal information like Name, Stage Name, and Birthplace, the categories include Favorite Performance Experience, Most Terrifying Performance Experience, Hobbies, Reading List, and Favorite Quote). Following the profile is a brief “Artist’s Notes” section, which usually consists of a first-person commentary (ranging in style from the notorious grant-writer’s “artist statement” to casual self-contemplations) or an excerpt from an interview (conducted by someone other than the editor); this section provides helpful grounding for the scripts (often excepts from larger works) that follow.

     

    Despite the bubble gum and flip card attitude of the setup, which does not always jibe with the slant of the “Artist’s Notes” (“flippant,” as Russell admits in his “Foreword” (xii), without accounting for how such a textual performance relates to his overall project), many of the performance scripts are insightful, witty, and engaging. Marga Gomez, for example, blends stand-up comedy with childhood recollections and incisive socio-cultural commentary (“When did I go from positive and perky to bitter and pathetic? I’m just like the first lesbians I ever saw. I was ten. I saw them on David Susskind’s Open End…” (165)). Penny Arcade deploys stream-of-consciousness personae to generate edgy satire and confront us with voices from “out/over there” that we would rather not hear (“You wanna help me out? With fifty cents or a buck? I can buy lunch with a buck! Shit. My name is Girl! An’ I am homeless!” (22)). Arcade’s troubling voices speak to Eric Bogosian’s dark humor, which brings us to the verge of a self-annihilating otherness. In addition to excerpts from Bogosian’s confrontational solo and ensemble pieces, the selection here includes “The Poem,” from Advocate. A stirring, eerie, and evocative piece, “The Poem” is performed in a dark room at a desk with a gooseneck lamp illuminating the “Narrator’s” face in a “spooky fashion” (“Come here, my little children. Come here, small tender ones. Into my arms. Into my teeth of streets. Run into the midnight traffic. Fall against the hot drops of water from your mother’s tears. Laughing into my teeth….” (46)). Though Bogosian is known popularly as a stand-up comic, the selections here highlight his evocative, provocative use of mise en scène, running performance along the edge of consciousness.

     

    Bogosian is not alone among the artists represented who deploy basic means to create poetic effects. Ishmael Houston-Jones imagines death through the body. In his 1971 piece included here, “Score for Dead,” Jones dances through a litany of prerecorded names of the dead (relatives of friends, celebrities, fictional characters) in a semi-ritualistic event, part homage and part shamanistic transference of the power of death (“When I hear a name that has a particular resonance for me, fall down to the floor in some emblematic way and try to rise again before the next name is called. As the next and the next and then the next names are spoken, repeat the falling… and rising dance… become exhausted with the effort” (195)). Houston-Jones unpacks the mystique of death by embodying–dancing–its relentless rhythm. Houston-Jones is the one of the few artists represented in Out of Character for whom the monologue (in one form or another) is not the primary aesthetic form. At the opposite end of the sensibility spectrum from Houston-Jones is West Coast performance artist Ron Athey, who explores religious fetishism through satirical texts embodied in a tableau-style mise en scène incorporating “medical-based s/m techniques” (34) (he describes Martyrs and Saints, for example, as a “pageant of erotic torture and penance” (34)). While delivering a monologue in 4 Scenes–“a true story from my childhood” (35)–Athey is shackled nude to a column à la St. Sebastian, painfully resplendent with tattoos and kinky body piercings: “From the time I was a baby, my grandma and aunt Vena repeatedly informed me, ‘You’ve been born with the calling on your life’… According to this message from the holiest of holies, I was to sacrifice the playthings of the world in order to fulfill the plans of God” (36).

     

    A riveting narrative excerpt from Gray’s Anatomy, by Spalding Gray, is quite at home in the center of the collection–perhaps as its centerpiece. The relatively detailed and informative note preceding the selection emphasizes the importance of personal presence in performance (“being there is everything” (169)), while revealing a theoretically hip Gray (“an inverted Method actor… I use autobiographic emotional memory to play myself rather than some other character” (171)) who nevertheless has a down-to-earth side (“This is how I work. I keep a journal, a Mead wide-ruled composition notebook” (169)). Gray’s performances coalesce around the personal and memory. For Gray the goal of performance is the “presentation of self in a theatrical setting” (171). The excerpt here demonstrates the sheer force such attention can achieve. Though Gray claims that his monologues are initially improvised in front of a live audience from key word outlines, the writing tightens through successive performances to deliver exquisite moments of narrative suspense, as when Gray describes his visit to a Philippine psychic surgeon for an eye operation. On the day of the operation, Gray tries to postpone the dreaded moment by, uncannily enough, telling stories (“But Pini [the surgeon] didn’t want to hear that story. He wanted to operate, and it was time…. I went into the operation chamber… I stripped to my red underwear… the Japanese began to go up to the table. Out come the bloody grapes again!… My time comes, and I jump on… I’m lying there quaking on the table… ‘It’s my eye! Remember, my left eye!… Don’t pull any meatballs out of me!’… his two fingers are erect bloody penises coming at me” (179)). This blend of humor and suspense, with a symbolic tickle (flitting metonymically through the details) is characteristic of a Gray monologue; the excerpt leaves the reader with a piquantly precise taste of Gray’s art.

     

    On the whole, Out of Character provides a wide, intriguing sampling of monologists, from the outrageously risky, violently self-present, and brilliantly humorous, to the (self-)celebrative and quietly poetic. But as compelling as such scripts are, without description and analysis of actual performances (other than notes provided by the artists themselves, as above), we have only a sketchy sense of the mise en scènes that are the performances. In his foreword, Russell advises his readers that “to actually understand [the work of the artists represented], closer study of each… is required, starting with viewing them live…” (xii) pointing out later that “numerous elements of these live performances… can only be hinted at on the page” (xiii); but a few such semiotically attuned “hints,” supplied from what must be a rich storehouse of his own observations after a decade and a half as artistic director of P.S. (Public School/Performance Space) 122, could have gone a way toward creating a more complex awareness of the material field of the performances.

     

    Nor does the anthology provide evaluative commentary to expand the reader’s understanding of the overall “state” of the art. The entire “critical apparatus” (xi) (other than the artists’ brief self commentaries) is contained in the foreword, in the first page and a half. The remaining six pages primarily narrate the history and social significance of P.S. 122 as a place that allows a “dialogue between a community and its artists” to take shape (i.e., “Public Space”), a place the editor was instrumental in developing: Russell has been artistic director of P.S. 122 since 1983. Certain assumptions, however, about the purpose of Performance Art resound throughout, the bottom line being “to tell one’s story” (vii).

     

    The foreword also takes for granted certain conventions of theater that don’t necessarily hold in experimental theatrical situations: for example, that the performance artist is a storyteller performing “in front of” a “listening, watching” audience (vii). Not only does Russell overlook the altered audience/performer relationship in much performance art (consider, for example, Hanon Resnikov’s breaks in loosely scripted Living Theatre pieces to dialogue directly with his audience–Resnikov is not mentioned in the collection), but also lists several features of postmodern performance as influences on “Performance Art” without noting their differences from–and potential disruption of–his own rather constricted mapping of the terrain. He mentions Elizabeth LeCompte’s experimentation with the “nature of personal theater” without commenting on the Wooster Group’s Brechtian bracketing of the “personal” and denaturalizing of the “dramatic” through collage structure; he vaguely notes the influence of “action performances of visual artists” (vii) without explaining what, exactly, these are or how they might support the concept of Performance Art as dramatized/fictionalized autobiography (does he mean “action painting” of the ’50s? but this falls outside the context of his chronology; certainly he can’t mean ’60s and ’70s happenings by Allan Kaprow, Joseph Beuys, Jack Smith, et al., which dialogize the “personal” as a means of vectoring out of the (ego-bound) self). He acknowledges the impact of technology–“consumer electronics,” “fun tools”–while again taming, containing, and subjectivizing their subject-fracturing potential by reducing them to just another means to “tell your story” (vii).

     

    This sort of “show-and-tell” attitude toward technology does not gel with the work of one of his own featured artists–and the one who kicks the collection off–Laurie Anderson, who Russell claims “can spin a fabulous yarn” and who “cuts through all the state-of-the-art technology” to sit us on the “front porch, telling stories” (xii). Laurie Anderson is a performer, but she is also an installation artist; her personal presence (sometimes in body and voice, sometimes only in voice) is an important part of her performances, but it is exactly that–a part. It is more accurate to say that Anderson incorporates technology into her performances and installations to dialogize (or cut against) the self, rather than cutting through technology to get to the “personal.” Her performances are at their best when she lets technology play through the self and vice versa (as the “live” synthesizing of her own voice in, for example, Home of the Brave). The “personal,” after all, is not a telos, but merely another rhetorical position, one among the flux–and so what is the self? (Think of the mechanical parrot in a recent Anderson installation at the Guggenheim Downtown, NYC–a computerized voice “speaking” fragments of the installator/orchestrator’s “auto”biography collaged with other textual bits/bites). This is the kind of question that Performance Art à la Anderson raises and that Russell’s version of the scene evades. The foreword stages a similar moment of overreading when Russell highlights Tim Miller’s (a founding member of P.S. 122) autobiographical performances “with props collected on the way to the theatre” (ix) and briefly describes some of the open-ended events that P.S. 122 has hosted, such as “twenty-four-hour marathon performances with bad jokes told on the hour” (x), without considering how such aleatoric events and artificially imposed structures question/put on trial conventional concepts of the “self”/subject and its relation to the “other” (animate or inanimate)/outside.

     

    The “Foreword” might have announced its approach to Performance Art a bit more clearly and conscientiously in the larger field of multimedia performance. Like the (formally) monologic gathering of scripts, the foreword’s voice sounds a one-note story about “Performance Art.” Granted anthologies of creative work don’t necessarily have to provide critical apparatus, and all anthologies are selective, but since there are so few gatherings of contemporary performance art, the editor who takes on such a project also takes on a particular responsibility: she or he should be as comprehensive as possible, and at least self-reflexively account for her/his own assumptions about what “Performance Art” is, a kind of editorial reflectiveness that the brief foreword sidesteps. Russell’s disclaimer in the foreword that this is “Not meant to be a comprehensive study” (vii) simply side-steps the issue (“study” is utilized broadly). He goes on to qualify the artists he does include as “some of the most adventurous in the field,” while simultaneously (and arbitrarily) equating “Performance Art” with “solo theatre” (vii).

     

    Do we really need 31 examples of the monologue form? And why limit the collection to solo performers, excluding performance art collectives? The combination of disclaimer and promotion of his own aesthetic agenda with the convenient (re)definition of the field through the mask of an unassuming rhetoric (“what might be called…” (vii)) effectively represses the need–if it be allowed that a reader might have one–for a more comprehensive gathering (moreover, Russell universalizes his own assumptions by devaluing the need for any classification whatsoever: “I don’t like any of those titles. I just call it Performance” (vii)).

     

    “Might” is a key word. The foreword “might” have benefited from a brief consideration of what Performance Art “might” be, before (instead of) hedging so quickly to a reductive definition. Though the foreword begins with a brief, elliptical chronology of how one strand of Performance Art developed out of gestures toward “personal theater” in the ’70s and ’80s, it does not mention the influence of seminal art movements such Happenings/Assemblage and Fluxus, which would have brought another dimension to the present gathering (and perhaps would have encouraged Russell to reconsider his frame). Considering that many of the readers of the anthology probably will not have this more comprehensive knowledge, Russell could have provided a clear and detailed outline of what’s missing and how it relates to what’s there.

     

    And what, for example, is missing? The insularity of the project–most of the performers represented have at one time or another been affiliated with P.S. 122–means that many folks aren’t invited to the party. Notable absences: performance poets such as John Giorno and Armand Schwerner; multimedia artists who feature voice and instrumentation, like Diamanda Galas and Robert Ashley; experimental theater artists like Rachel Rosenthal, Guillermo Gomez-Pena, and Theodora Skipitares who make extensive use of props (and marionettes, in Skipitares’s case); Fluxus-oriented performers like Stewart Sherman, Dick Higgins, Larry Miller, and the Kipper Kid(s); multimedia collectives like the critical art ensemble, V-Girls, Gorilla Girls, and TEZ, who parody academic settings and situations; even including some anti- (or less) dramatically oriented monologists–such as Eileen Myles or “talk poet” David Antin–might have created an insightful (and fruitful) juxtaposition. Some exclusions, of course, such as Karen Finley and Annie Sprinkle, whose shticks have been overplayed/played out, are understandable. In his brief overview of the genre’s development in the beginning of the foreword, Russell does mention Robert Wilson, Trisha Brown, and Meredith Monk (though not Mabou Mines, Yvonne Rainer, or Carolee Schneemann), and groups that work the boundaries between Performance Art and (“just call it” (vii)) Performance, such as Richard Foreman’s Ontological-Hysteric Theatre and the Wooster Group (formerly TPG), but such inclusion is mostly name dropping, as no indication is given of how these works might go beyond the narrow frame he has established.

     

    Near its end, the “Foreword” rhetorically restages a cliché of performance theory–that the theater “asks for participation in the illusion” (in this case, of character) (xiii). In Out of Character, Russell’s highly selective (though provocative) collection of performance scripts and the editor’s embedded assumptions about the nature of Performance Art encourage us to participate in a reductive de(il)lusion about a still emerging and not easily defined or semiotically delimited artistic territory. The job of such an anthology should, more productively, be–in the spirit of its subject matter–to open as fully as possible onto the field, to risk losing (one’s)self within it, rather than to seek a comfortable place/space of recognition and subjectivization–however seductive, aesthetically satisfying, and/or intellectually challenging those locales may be.

     

  • Eve, Not Edie: The Queering of Andy Warhol

     

    Christopher Sieving

    Department of Communication Arts
    University of Wisconsin at Madison
    csieving@students.wisc.edu

     

    Jennifer Doyle, Jonathan Flatley, and José Esteban Muñoz, eds., Pop Out: Queer Warhol. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996.

     

    In a year that marks the eleventh anniversary of his death, Andy Warhol–artist, filmmaker, icon–continues as a cultural force to be reckoned with. His profile within the Pop culture imaginary swelled in 1996 and 1997, fueled by the release of three films: Mary Harron’s I Shot Andy Warhol, Julian Schnabel’s Basquiat, and Susanne Ofteringer’s Nico Icon. (Screen bios of Edie Sedgwick and Holly Woodlawn are also, reportedly, on their way.) Warhol’s celebrated serial-image technique continues to be appropriated in dozens of ways throughout contemporary graphic design. The end of the century will undoubtedly spawn many more testimonials to the Warhol oeuvre, such as the one offered in a 1997 Chicago Tribune piece, which names Warhol as one of the 20th century’s five artists “that anyone seeking an understanding of modern and contemporary art will have to come up against and, if possible, accept” (G5).

     

    Arts scholars and academics have come up against Warhol many, many times prior to the publication of Pop Out: Queer Warhol. Whereas 1996 constituted a mini-revival of popular interest in the artist, 1989 (the year of MoMA’s massive retrospective) represents the most recent revival of widespread critical interest. That year saw an explosion of publications on Warhol: not just the commercially accessible portraits by David Bourdon and Victor Bockris (and Warhol himself, via his Diaries), but critical anthologies from Michael O’Pray, Gary Garrels, and Kynaston McShine. Add the stalwart Warhol texts by John Coplans, Rainer Crone, Peter Gidal, Stephen Koch, Carter Ratcliff, et al., and there can be little doubt as to the sheer tenacity of Warhol scholarship.

     

    So, one may reasonably wonder: do we really need more critical and analytical treatises on the work and world of Andy Warhol? Pop Out answers with a resounding “yes.” The book’s subtitle–Queer Warhol–announces a political agenda made explicit in its introduction: Pop Out‘s collected essays, according to editors Jennifer Doyle, Jonathan Flatley, and José Esteban Muñoz, “call out and combat the degaying of Warhol” (2). The term “degaying” comes from Simon Watney, whose inaugural article “Queer Andy” condemns the critical tradition (exemplified by many of the previously named texts) that “refus[es] to engage with the most glaringly obvious motif in Warhol’s career–his homosexuality” (21). Doyle, Flatley, and Muñoz argue for the recovery of a queer “social or symbolic context” (the context of Pop Art) in order to understand and appropriate Warhol and Popism (7). Recent analyses have largely failed at this task.

     

    Watney perhaps exaggerates the denial of sex (“let alone queer sex”) and sexuality by critics of the Warhol films (20); as Doyle et al. rightly acknowledge, film scholarship has done more to foreground the sexiness of Warhol’s art than any other critical discipline (16n). But Watney’s larger point is well taken by Pop Out‘s twelve contributing essayists, each of whom sets out to reclaim Warhol as a decidedly queer artist and cultural figure.

     

    It would be a mistake, however, to equate a discursive “queer Warhol” with the real-life gay Warhol. While the artist’s homosexuality is the jumping-off point for a number of essays (most notably, Watney’s “Queer Andy,” Thomas Waugh’s “Cockteaser,” and Michael Moon’s “Screen Memories, or Pop Comes from the Outside”), part of Pop Out‘s larger project is to complicate binarisms like “gay/straight.” This point comes through most eloquently in a passage in Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick’s essay “Queer Performativity.” Queerness, for Sedgwick, does not simply equal “gayness,” although there is significant overlap. Rather, it is more productive to think of shyness and shame as primary indicators of queerness–which may or may not later manifest itself with regard to sexual orientation (138). Sedgwick locates the crucial site of the formation of a “shame-delineated place of identity” (138) within childhood; parenthetically, she remarks “on how frequently queer kids are queer before they’re gay” (137; original emphasis). Accordingly, the theme of queer childhood acts as something of a leitmotif in Pop Out: José Muñoz’s vision of “a sickly queer boy who managed to do much more than simply survive” (144) is also taken up by Watney and especially Moon, both of whom are concerned with how young Andy channeled his queerness and, in the words of the editors, “forg[ed] a self from his investments in the mass culture available to him” (10).

     

    According to Sedgwick, once we start thinking of Warhol’s achievements as bound up with–as transformations of–his queerness, then those achievements can serve as models for subaltern persons and communities. The “shame-delineated place of identity” embodied by Warhol can be usefully appropriated by what Muñoz refers to as “minority subjects”; as Sedgwick notes, “race, gender, class, sexuality, appearance, and abledness are only a few of the defining social constructions that will crystallize there” (138). The frequent use of terms like “minority subject” and “survival strategy” (or “tactic”) by Pop Out‘s contributors underscores the political efficacy of Warhol’s brand of Pop appropriation.

     

    Muñoz’s conception (informed by the work of Michel Pecheux and Judith Butler) of “disidentification”–“a strategy that tries to transform a cultural logic from within” (148)–further illuminates this crucial theoretical formulation. The elasticity of the word “queer” in nearly all of these essays enables the authors to draw a variety of disempowered social groups (non-whites, women, the working class) into the Warhol nexus. Sedgwick and Muñoz are forthright in promoting the empowering effects of Warhol’s queer survival tactics; Muñoz even draws an analogy to Michele Wallace’s conception of black female film spectatorship, a process “about problematizing and expanding one’s racial identity instead of abandoning it” (150; original emphasis). However, while the Warhol philosophy may indeed prove liberating for some, to appropriate him as a vanquisher of patriarchy, white supremacy, or capitalistic terrorism is to ignore some unpleasant biographical truths: Warhol was certainly no friend to feminism (his 1972 film Women in Revolt is a bitchy parody of the nascent “Women’s Lib” movement), and examples of his casual racism have been remarked upon in a number of sources.1 By and large Pop Out‘s authors avoid an apologia for Warhol’s misogyny or classism, yet this avoidance might also be construed as an evasion. Only Marcie Frank, in “Popping Off Warhol,” makes a significant attempt to reconcile feminism and Popism (through the unlikely mediating figure of Valerie Solanas, Warhol’s would-be assassin).

     

    Nevertheless, Muñoz’s encouragement of these “theories of revisionary identification” (149) nicely encapsulates the vitality and diversity this project brings to the discipline of media studies. Instead of straining Warhol’s work through the meshes of a single theoretical approach, Pop Out allows for a variety of useful critical frameworks and methodologies. Studies of spectatorship and reception are skillfully employed in two of the anthology’s finest pieces. Waugh’s “Cockteaser” vividly reconstructs the audience for the embryonic gay cinema of the 1960s and positions Warhol’s films (e.g., My Hustler, Lonesome Cowboys) within that “underground” exhibition context, detailing how “censorship and film industry pressures shaped the form of Warhol’s cockteaser-like address to his gay male audiences” (59; original emphasis). Sasha Torres’s “The Caped Crusader of Camp” draws on contemporary press reports on Warhol, Pop Art, and the Batman phenomenon to expose the failure of recent revisionist critiques of 1960s camp to theorize the links between “camp and gay subcultural tastes… between subcultural style and its more ‘mainstream’ appropriations” (246)–i.e., between “gay camp” and “mass camp.”

     

    Elsewhere, Moon and Muñoz apply the methodologies of psychoanalysis and critical race theory, respectively, to analyze Warhol’s (and protégé Jean-Michel Basquiat’s) use of cartoon heroes and comic-book illustrations as subjects for art; Moon’s provocative thesis situates Warhol’s comic-strip painting as a continuation of “his flagrantly homoerotic art of the fifties” (79). Jennifer Doyle in “Tricks of the Trade” locates a multi-layered social critique in Warhol’s exploitation of “work” as “sex” (and vice versa) and offers her own critique of the modernist “figuring [of] Warhol’s relationship to his work as a kind of prostitution” (192); whereas Mandy Merck in “Figuring Out Andy Warhol” perceptively criticizes the rhetoric of transvestism employed by postmodernists (after Jameson and Baudrillard) to marginalize the Warhol silkscreen as, “[l]ike the drag queen, the copy without an original” (235). In addition, a number of essays follow David James’ suggestion and do away with the false opposition posited between Warhol’s celebrated ’60s work (enshrined in POPism, Warhol’s 1980 memoir) and his “denigrated” ’70s and ’80s output (34).

     

    While most of Pop Out‘s flaws are minor, one could take issue with some of the evidence–theoretical and empirical–used to support some of the more contentious claims. When a response to the existing literature seems necessary to bolster a proposition, many of the new scholars bypass the canonical critical takes on Warhol (Coplans, Crone, and Ratcliff don’t even make the bibliography) and go directly to the source himself: the “self-penned” Andy Warhol Diaries (1989), POPism: The Warhol Sixties, and dark horse The Philosophy of Andy Warhol: From A to B and Back Again (1975) emerge in Pop Out as the new source texts for Warhol studies, to be plumbed for textual and subtextual clues. Thus, only a bit of Pop psychoanalysis is required to conjecture a theory of underclass queer attraction to Dick Tracy (Moon)–or an articulation of a chocolate fetish with racial revulsion (Sedgwick)–out of a few phone conversations later transcribed as part of the Andy Warhol Philosophy.

     

    It seems odd that so many of Pop Out‘s contributors embrace these memoirs at face value, as if they presented unmediated access to the mind of the artist: not only is the “author” known to have been notoriously selective about autobiographical details (Stephen Koch has remarked of Warhol and his assistant Paul Morrissey: not “a single statement either one of them made to me… upon examination, turned out to be true” (qtd. in O’Pray 12), but all three books were apparently ghost-written and/or edited by collaborators. And yet I don’t wish to propose Jonathan Flatley’s trotting out of the theoretical big guns (de Man, Marx, Benjamin, Derrida, Butler, Saussure, Lacan, Freud–the last five within a page of each other) in “Warhol Gives Good Face” as a useful corrective, either; surely a middle ground can be attained, even within the solidly academic context of a book in which allusions to “Sedgwick” more often mean Eve, not Edie.

     

    Pop Out would also have profited from a closer look at Warhol’s temporal-based art. If, as Waugh claims, “a frank, intelligent, and materialist questioning of Warhol’s sexual address… and of his relation to erotic and specifically homoerotic mythologies of his day” (52) is to be found in much of the recent writing on the Warhol films, might not it prove fruitful to further expand the consideration of a distinctly “queer Warhol” to his often explicitly gay cinema (and his less explicitly gay TV work)? With the exceptions of Waugh and of Doyle, who cites Warhol and Morrissey’s Flesh (1968) in her analysis of “artistic exchange as the setting for erotic, sexual exchange” (198), most of the Pop Out essayists miss this opportunity. Sedgwick’s fine essay might have further benefited from an analysis of queer performativity in Warhol’s films, following the lead of Doyle, Flatley, and Muñoz’s offhand take on the “bad acting” of Warhol’s Superstars: “the performance that avows its performanceness acknowledges the difficulty of fitting into roles” (15). Flatley’s notion of the “politics of publicity” (103) seems very applicable to Warhol’s celebrity “biopics” of the middle ’60s (Harlot, Hedy, Lupe, and More Milk, Yvette), and Torres’s insights make one ponder how straight audiences and mainstream critics may have used the Pop/camp distinction to make sense of The Chelsea Girls (1966), the underground cinema’s box-office champ.2

     

    Still, the fact that possibilities for further exploration leap easily to mind is an indicator of Pop Out‘s usefulness for film historians, analysts, and theoreticians. A surge of additional scholarly appraisals of the Warhol cinema are in our future, as the long-awaited, long-delayed video releases of Warhol’s films finally become reality. And though future film scholars will have the luxury of access to these primary texts, they will be equally indebted to this book’s multiplicity of vibrant critical approaches. By illuminating methodological and theoretical alternatives like queer studies, feminist theory, and poststructuralism, Pop Out‘s essays have helped free Warhol studies from the dead ends of simplistic textual analysis and auteurism. This represents a significant advance (even at this late date), and it’s bound to be Pop Out‘s legacy for cinema studies.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See, for example, Nat Finkelstein’s account of “Andy in the Slums” in his book Andy Warhol: The Factory Years 1964-1967 (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1989).

    2. In this respect the anonymous Time reviewer’s queer-bashing synopsis of the three-and-a-half hour “very dirty and… very dull peep show” is particularly interesting: “A couple of sacked-out homosexuals in dirty underwear fondle each other incuriously. Another homosexual does a striptease. One lesbian beats another with a big-buckled belt. Another lesbian who is also a junkie jabs herself in the buttock with a hypodermic. A faggot who calls himself ‘the Pope’ advises a lesbian to sneak into church and do something obscene to the figure on the cross–‘It’ll do you good’” (“Nuts From Underground: The Chelsea Girls” 37). One wonders which review–Time‘s or Jack Kroll’s rave in Newsweek–was more influential in building popular enthusiasm for the movie.

    Works Cited

     

    • Artner, Alan G. “Artful Dodgers.” Chicago Tribune 2 March 1997: G5.
    • Doyle, Jennifer, Jonathan Flatley, and José Esteban Muñoz, eds., Pop Out: Queer Warhol. Durham, NC: Duke UP, 1996.
    • Finkelstein, Nat. Andy Warhol: The Factory Years 1964-1967. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1989.
    • “Nuts From Underground: The Chelsea Girls.” Time 30 December 1966: 37.
    • O’Pray, Michael. “Introduction.” Andy Warhol Film Factory. Ed. Michael O’Pray. London: British Film Institute, 1989.

     

  • “Note on My Writing”: Poetics as Exegesis

    Nicky Marsh

    Department of English
    University of Southampton, UK
    ebpd0@central.susx.ac.uk

     

    Susan Howe, Frame Structures: Early Poems 1974-1979. New York: New Directions, 1996.
    and
    Leslie Scalapino, Green and Black: Selected Writings.Jersey City: Talisman, 1996.

     

    Frame Structures and Green and Black are single-author collections written by two poets associated with the Language movement in American poetry. Leslie Scalapino’s collection gathers together excerpts from a number of her long poems published in the previous eleven years and ends with a new poem that shares the title of the collection, “Green and Black.” Susan Howe’s collection contains unabridged (although slightly altered) versions of her four earliest poems which, in their original form, are no longer in print. The central difference between the two collections, as Howe gathers her earliest work for publication and Scalapino excerpts from her latest, can possibly be explained by the relatively different standing the two poets have accrued within the academy; as Howe is tentatively accepted by the mainstream, Scalapino remains more thoroughly “experimental.” What these two poets share in these texts, however, beyond their imprecise categorization as experimental or Language writers, is an apparent, and for both largely new, desire to locate the significance of these poetics for the reader.

     

    “Note on My Writing” is the promisingly explicatory title of the opening essay in Leslie Scalapino’s latest collection. This title suggests, as do the other three “notes” that interleave the excerpts from Scalapino’s poems, that these short essays offer some process of initiation–that they bring to light how this sometimes unyielding and sometimes dazzling verse should be read, or at least how Scalapino would like it to be read. Susan Howe’s collection is similarly prefaced with a sense of introduction and elucidation. Frame Structures is not only the title of the book but the title of an extended inaugural essay in which Howe in her eclectic chronicling of fragmentary history left by the marginalized, familiar to readers of her other works, now turns to examine her own past and familial genealogy. This sense of literary autobiography/family history opens this collection of Howe’s earliest poems: the “frame structure” this combination delivers, from within which we are reading, seems to be that of the poet herself.

     

    The introductions or explanations with which these two works begin may be part of the acceptance by many of the writers involved in Language writing’s linguistically disruptive and politically skeptical project that they are being published and read as substantial contributors to American poetics. The collections by Howe and Scalapino can be placed alongside the other anthologies and literary histories–Douglas Messerli’s From the Other Side of the Century, Maggie O’Sullivan’s Out of Everywhere, and Bob Perelman’s The Marginalization of Poetry: Language Writing and Literary History–that have emerged in the mid-nineties as testament to the growing significance of Language writing within the mainstream American literary academy. However, these works by Scalapino and Howe also call into question any homogeneity of meaning or intent that Language writing either claimed or received by attribution. Their putative foregrounding of the materiality of language now seems to be a construct that many key participants in the movement are more than willing to deconstruct. Hence, these collections indicate not only the growing popularity of the experimentalism associated with Language writing, but also how complex and varied this writing actually is.

     

    The differences between Susan Howe and Leslie Scalapino are borne out by the stylistically distinct ways in which they locate the significance of their own work. In “Note on My Writing,” Scalapino is tersely explicit about what her writing means to her. The sentences are sharp and blatant: “I intend this work to be the repetition of historically real events the writing of which punches a hole in reality (as if to void them but actively)” (1). The energy that Scalapino suggests her work conveys is coiled up into the spring-like keenness of the writing. Nothing can be wasted when “a segment in the poem is the actual act of event itself” in a poetics that denies the distance between the text and its referents, making the text its own action (1). Scalapino’s writing inverts the insight that social constructions are always necessarily mediated through language (a notion integral to Language writing’s most basic poststructuralist precepts), suggesting instead that these vehicles of mediation are themselves the central constituents of experience–hence the text becomes the act. Scalapino asks that the reader acknowledge that the text doesn’t simply represent reality for us (albeit in an ideologically governed way) but produces a reality on its own terms.

     

    Susan Howe’s Frame Structures does not share either this laconic style or its invocation of text as action. Consistent with much of Howe’s earlier work, the text’s use of narrative shards of “local histories, antiquarian studies, bibliographies” is descriptive, elaborate, and assured (19). “Historical imagination,” the text informs us on the first page, “gathers in the missing,” and as the poem continues we are made aware that Howe’s own sense of the “missing” is being sought not only in historical documents, family letters, and diaries but in personal memories and family anecdotes. The materiality of the physical word (the antiquarian document, the markings in a family book of poetry) becomes prominent in this text because of its apparently stalwart ability to resist the homogenizing implications of what culture sanctions as “history”–because, like memory, texts can hold the eccentric and unsettling truths written out of official history which Howe elsewhere suggests is “the record of winners” (Europe of Trusts 11).

     

    Although both Scalapino and Howe emphasize the materiality of language in these introductions, the corresponding poetics suggested by these collections are quite different. Leslie Scalapino’s foregrounding of language is part of her attempt to overcome the divisions between the internal and external, past and present, that structure our experience. In “Note on My Writing,” Scalapino explains how she uses the comic strip or cartoon form to problematize these divisions: “Cartoons are a self-revealing surface as the comic strip is continuous, multiple, and within it [cartoons] have simultaneous future and past dimensions” (3). The extracts collected in Green and Black suggest how Scalapino makes sense of her relationship with the outside world through the form of comics.

     

    Winos were laying on the sidewalk, 
       it's a warehouse district; I happen 
       to
    be wearing a silk blouse, so it's 
       jealousy, not    
    that they're jealous of me
    necessarily.
    
    They're not receded, and are inert--as 
       it happens are bums (6)

     

    This extract is characteristic of much of the writing in this anthology. Scalapino makes apparent how our possession of mainly metropolitan space is organized around the social politics of class and gender. Moreover, this awareness also embraces the complexities of these categories. The woman narrator’s sensitivity to the “winos” comes not only through her apprehensive vulnerability (because of the sheerness of her clothes) but from her awareness that these same clothes also denote the place of privilege she occupies. The “bums” are visible to her–they are “not receded”–because she is acutely aware of the disparity of her own position, and that they are “static” in contrast to her own movement, that the “bums” lack the mobility that comes with social power.

     

    These twin themes of mobility and visibility, of location and social power, emerge throughout the various poems included in the collection. Indeed, Scalapino intersperses unannounced photographs from her book Crowd and Not Evening or Light within Green and Black almost to emphasize the significance of the landscape–the visible image–to the effect her text is trying to create. Her examination of the way these antagonisms disrupt the easy categories of public and private, class and gender, is extended in her erotic writing where the sex act is often defamiliarized in order to lay these constructions bare.

     

    having  
    swallowed the 
    water
    lily bud--so having
    it in
    him when he'd 
    come on some
    time with her (44)

     

    The motif of the lily is one that recurs in sexual scenarios throughout much of Scalapino’s work. The apparent coyness of the image (with its combination of a phallic stem and a feminine “flowering”) is constantly undercut by lengthy and decidedly unerotic images of the mechanics of sex–of fluid, movements, and deadpan orgasms. These rather estranging sequences seem to remove intercourse from its more customary overdetermined presentation, to deny it romantic, moralizing, or medical discourses and to return it to the everyday.

     

    The last poem in the collection is the previously unpublished “Green and Black.” This poem, like Scalapino’s other work from the mid-nineties such as New Time and Front Matter Dead Souls, attempts to bring Scalapino’s poetics, her resistance to the most foundational of dualities (you/me, inside/outside, then/now), to bear not only upon the public realm but upon specifically named public events. Scalapino’s reach over these events encompasses, and often seems to make no distinction between, the landscape, the economic system, and individual interaction. In all cases she attempts to bring out what we are inoculated against witnessing, what we are encouraged to accept.

     

         Slavery of  people in  events--
            their having
    no entrance--
    as there being no other ground as 
       oneself
         only occurrence there's no 
       observing 
    
         putting people down was the 
       fascist act inherently--in 
    every
    case ? 
         the teachers in my schools 
       created 
         pets--as cowardly groupies
    --and waifs jeered---there (95)

     

    Scalapino problematizes the unity or authenticity of the individual’s view of events, “there being no ground as oneself,” but stresses that domination, be it the play of power within a classroom or an allusion to racial subjugation (although perhaps Scalapino too easily suggests the two are comparable), structures our world, so that new ways have to be found to interpret domination if we would learn to negotiate it.

     

    Although Howe shares Scalapino’s suspicion of a lyrical presence and similarly foregrounds language in place of either self or narrative, the poems collected in Frame Structures explore a very different type of poetics from that which I have ascribed to Scalapino. Although these very early texts are marked by a lack of historical specificity, they do not share the references to “real” documents and voices that have come to characterize Howe’s later poems; they still attempt to make manifest the secrets concealed within language. The poems “Hinge Picture” and “Cabbage Gardens” intermingle snatches of narrative with mesmerizing chains of words and sounds.

     

    Remembered a fragment of the king's 
       face
    remembered a lappet wing
    remembered eunuchs lip to lip in 
       silent profile
    kissing
    remembered pygmies doing battle with 
       the cranes
    remembered bones of an enormous size 
       as proof of 
    the existence of giants   (41)

     

    Howe’s anaphoric “remembered” works as both a verb and a noun: the incredible nature of what is being recalled throws the act of memory, and the limitations of narrative against which it is posited, into relief. The frequent slips into neologism often focus attention more on the visual and aural effect of the words themselves than on any meaning they may lead us to–the sensuality of Howe’s early training as a painter is especially apparent in these early texts.

     

    However, the listing of the fantastic that dominates this work is often structured around a sense of quest. What becomes in Howe’s later work a search for hidden truths and voices here emerges as a much more playful venture. The activities of the various mythical protagonists seem to have no final destination or goal in mind; it is the hazards of the journey that Howe seems most keen to capture.

     

    Zingis filled
    nine sacks 
    with the ears of his enemies
    
    in winter
    the Tartars
    passed the D
    anube on ice (47)

     

    It is only occasionally, as in the poem “Chanting at the Crystal Sea,” that the sense of foreboding that emerges in later work surfaces, a sense that seems rooted in the same anxieties as Howe returns again and again in her work to lost origins that can never be recovered, to losses that are often at once personal and historical.

     

    I left you in a group of grownup 
       children and went in search
    wandered sandhills snowy nights
    calling "Mother, Father"
    
    A Dauphin sat down to dine on dust
    alone in his field of wheat
    
    One war-whoop toppled a State. (63)

     

    “The Secret History of the Dividing Line,” the last and thus most recent poem in this collection, is similarly resonant with the impossibility of the fairy tale. However, in this text Howe is concerned to counter the fantastic with a more specific interrogation of the relationship between language and domination: an interrogation that alludes simultaneously to early America and a more personal sense of past. The word “mark,” for example, is given multiple meanings early on in the poem.

     

    MARK
    border
    bulwark. An object set up to indicate 
       a boundary or
    position
    hence a sign or token
    impression or trace (90)

     

    These composite meanings of the sound are acknowledged to possess some degree of historical specificity; Howe intervenes in the play of signifiers whilst acknowledging it is uncontrollable. The poem’s ostensible concern to narrate the “war whoop in each dusty narrative” begins by focusing on the inequities associated with the claiming–symbolically and literally–of American land (99). Marking territory with “an object set up to indicate a boundary or position,” becomes synonymous with the systems of power and dominance that Howe’s poetry constantly seeks to evade. Like the poems collected in The Singularities anthology, this text is concerned to trace the devastation of native American common land ownership, and consequently culture, caused by the cartographic project inherent in the colonization of America. In the righthand corner of the following page appear the words: “for Mark my father and Mark my son.” The word here also intimates, although with an affection suggestive of the complex qualifications that always mar attempts to map easy political allegiances onto Howe’s work, the system of paternal naming upon which female identity has symbolically foundered. Finally, and crucially, the word centrally refers to the hierarchical project of writing itself, the very project that Howe’s agenda most often attempts to examine and disrupt.

     

    These two collections seem to participate in what the critic Marjorie Perloff has described as Language poetry’s “coming of age,” a newfound maturity she attributes to the re-examination of the principles of Language poetry as discussed by its “New York and San Francisco founding fathers” (558). Crucially, the authors of this examination are a surge of experimental women writers. The publication of these collections by Scalapino and Howe, and their accompanying acts of exegesis, thus suggest not only the slowly increasing readership that this writing has begun to accrue, but also that “this” writing (be it Language, innovative, or avant-garde) has begun to negotiate the issues surrounding politics and representation in new and expansive ways. When placed in contrast, Scalapino’s and Howe’s work most obviously illustrates that an investment in the text, a foregrounding of language as a site of privileged action or insight, can result in a poetics with political agendas and landscapes dramatically different from what has gone before. Howe moves assuredly, and often invisibly, through tracts and traces of early Americana, whereas Scalapino grazes on and against the contemporary urban spaces of this country. What these collections seem to demand above all, however, is a careful and generous reading capable of scrutinizing the assumptions and politics that lie concealed within these written landscapes.

    Works Cited

     

    • Howe, Susan. The Europe of Trusts. Los Angeles: Sun and Moon Press, 1990.
    • —. Singularities. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1990.
    • Messerli, Douglas. From the Other Side of the Century. Los Angeles: Sun and Moon Press, 1994.
    • O’Sullivan, Maggie. Out of Everywhere: Linguistically Innovative Poetry by Women in North America and the UK. London: Reality Street Press, 1996.
    • Perelman, Bob. The Marginalisation of Poetry: Language Writing and Literary History, Princeton: Princeton UP, 1996.
    • Perloff, Marjorie. “The Coming of Age of Language Poetry.” Contemporary Literature 38.3 (1997): 558-567.
    • Scalapino, Leslie. Crowd and Not Evening or Light. San Francisco: O Books, 1992.
    • —. The Front Matter, Dead Souls. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1996.
    • —. New Time. Hanover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1996.

     

  • Postmodern Spacings

     

    Mark Nunes et al.

    Department of English
    DeKalb College
    mnunes@dekalb.dc.peachnet.edu

     

    In February of 1997, a dozen individuals began working on a collaborative on-line project entitled “Postmodern Spacings.” We came from various academic and professional fields in North America, Europe, and Australia. Our only initial “guiding principle” was that we were to discuss a variety of understandings of postmodern space. The seminar as a whole would be responsible for drawing up a syllabus and setting the focus. Together, we set up our reading list, held real-time discussions in an on-line meeting space called 1k+1 MOO (hero.village.virginia.edu:7777), carried on conversations via a list-serv, and constructed collaborative, interwoven texts. The hypermedia work we present here is the culmination of that effort.

     

    Postmodern Spacings attempts to address the significance of “space” in contemporary cultural discourse. It looks at manifestations of bodily space, the space of the text, and social spaces, and it attempts to question the current relevance of a philosophy of space. The project also considers the intersection of these domains and the various hybrid spaces produced by these crossings.

     

    Our readings and conversations served as a series of openings to various questions about space and spacing. In our discussions of “postmodern space,” we assume that “space” has a history, and that it is more than a passive container of events. In acknowledging that space can be other than as it is, we were working from the assumption that “space” is something produced by social, cultural, and cognitive arrangements, while at the same time productive of experiential relations.

     

    Our project grew from a general question posed toward contemporary culture: what are the conditions of possibility present in various spacings of the everyday? As early as 1857, Marx described the historical transformation of everyday life in industrial modernity as “the annihilation of space by time.” We find that “space” increasingly appears as a term of interrogation in contemporary discourse.

     

    We discussed the production of sex and gender in relation to that spatial locus called “the body.” We looked toward the concepts of “production” and “poiesis” to explore the experience of “determined” subjectivity. We attempted to rethink urban space, sub-urban spaces, and the varied heterotopias and “non-spaces” of malls, highways, homeless encampments, and college classrooms. We considered the multilinearity of new textual spaces and the production of mediated spaces in on-line environments. Often we found our discussions heading in multiple directions. The weaving of our words into a hypermedia project allowed us to pursue connections that at times seemed aberrant, eccentric, or even monstrous.

     

    We drew from our various technical, academic, and professional backgrounds and attempted to produce a collaborative, coalitional space of our own in which to explore these topographies. Since discussions took place on-line, “the virtual” and “the real” occurred as a motif in various postings and conversations, but by no means was it a limiting topic. We did come to understand that the Postmodern Spacings project itself was an experiment in spaces, making use of several networked environments to encourage collaborative effort between participants. Thus, the project provided a space of sorts for a discussion of the benefits and shortcomings of on-line collaborative work. The Internet did indeed provide us with a profoundly open “supplemental” site of contact for the exchange of ideas and information. But this chaotic space, while wonderful for creating new openings, makes an attempt at “closure” seem somewhat artificial or forced.

     
    Postmodern Spacings is, therefore, a project in the truest sense, opening outward, forward, toward a positive expression. It provides a series of experiments on spatial issues according to various social, cultural, and economic discourses. The material presented “here” is not intended to serve as a finished work, but rather as a set of headings onto the various theoretical and practical issues relating to figurations and configurations of space in the post-industrial late 20th century. Perhaps it is best, then, to consider Postmodern Spacings (both the seminar itself and the work we produced) as a network of experiments and trials–essays–that point in the direction of further collaborative work.

     


    Proceed to Postmodern Spacings…
     

     

  • Welcome to Basementwood: Computer Generated Special Effects and Wired Magazine

    Michele Pierson

    Department of English and Cultural Studies
    University of Melbourne
    m.pierson@pgrad.unimelb.edu.au

     

    The November 1997 issue of Wired magazine featured a special report on the future of Hollywood filmmaking (“Hollywood 2.0 Special Report: The People Who Are Reinventing Entertainment”). In the Hollywood of the future there will be no film. Theatres will not be theatres. And feature films will be created on desktop computers for less than $1,000. The cinema of the future promises at once to deliver filmmaking into the hands of home-computer users and to make actually going to the movies an entertainment experience more akin to a trip to a theme park. Hollywood 2.0 is do-it-yourself cinema and Holodeck Enterprises all rolled into one. The report does not suggest that making movies for CD-ROM, DVD, or on-line delivery is the same thing as having one’s digital creations projected in one of Gerard Howland’s 360-degree, 3-D full-motion theaters. That’s not how things work in the future. Hollywood 2.0 still only offers would-be “creatives” the choice between producing low-resolution “art” films for the small screen, and trying to get a piece of the big-screen action elsewhere. And despite the closing of a number of high-profile special effects houses in 1996-97 (Buena Vista Visual Effects, Warner Digital Studios, and Boss Film Studios), the special effects industry is still the best representative of this fantasy-elsewhere that Hollywood 2.0 has to offer.1

     

    The “Hollywired Index” that accompanies this special report plots the emergence of Hollywood 2.0 in terms of the history of computer generated imagery (or CGI) in Hollywood cinema. A check-list of “firsts” for CGI in feature films lists the first completely computer generated sequence in a feature film (“Genesis effect” in Star Trek II: Wrath of Khan); the first completely computer generated character (“Stained-glass knight” in Young Sherlock Holmes); the first morph (Willow); and the first computer generated main character (“T-1000” in Terminator 2: Judgment Day). Similar lists have been a recurring feature in a magazine that imagines a readership intensely fascinated by the production of computer generated imagery. The very first issue featured an article on the special effects company Pacific Data Images (Quinn, “Beyond The Valley of The Morphs”). Subsequent issues have featured articles on effects house Digital Domain (Rothman, “Digital Deal”); Digital Domain’s co-founder, James Cameron (Parisi, “Cameron Angle”); and ILM’s George Lucas (Kelly and Parisi, “Beyond Star Wars“). Special effects were also the cover story for the December 1995 issue–which featured an article on the history of the Hollywood special effects industry (Parisi, “The New Silicon Stars”), and another on the making of Toy Story (Snider, “The Toy Story Story”).

     

    The regular features on the Hollywood special effects industry, mini-profiles of computer animators, and reviews of entertainment applications for computer graphics-based programs are only the most obvious sites where special effects figure in the magazine as content. In “Fetish” (a regular section that reviews the latest electronic gizmos for self-proclaimed and would-be hardware fetishists), readers are regularly addressed as producers of special effects. This is a trope that also frequently appears in advertising copy for multimedia and special effects hardware and software.

     

    Wired is not the only magazine that features articles, advertising, and artwork that displays computer-enhanced and computer generated images in this way. Mondo 2000 may have seen its heyday, but it was once the lifestyle magazine of choice for the wired-at-heart. And along with the crash courses in “DIY TV” and interviews with the Hollywood digerati, it too has fed readers’ home-production fantasies with sumptuous, digitally enhanced photo-montages and glossy, full-color computer generated images. It is Wired, however, with its saturation level advertising, high-res, digital-art-effects, and extensive coverage of the entertainment and consumer electronics industries, that provides the best site for examining some of the economic, technological, and popular-cultural rationalities that have molded and shaped the look of computer generated imagery (or CGI) in recent years.

     

    This essay looks at some of the ways Wired visualizes, discusses, and alludes to computer generated imagery, focusing in particular on how frequently visual and discursive references to special effects appeal to readers’ fantasies of producing such images themselves. In the early 1990s, computer generated special effects became a major attraction of science fiction cinema. As well as representing the techno-scientific wonders demanded by science fiction narratives, the computer generated images in films like The Abyss (1989), Terminator 2: Judgment Day (1991), Jurassic Park (1993), Stargate (1994), Johnny Mnemonic (1995), and Virtuosity (1995), also presented the techno-scientific achievements of the filmmaking and special effects industries to cinema audiences.

     

    Over the years, film and cultural critics like Vivian Sobchack, Brooks Landon, and Scott Bukatman have offered compelling accounts of the techno-cultural matrix in which computer generated imagery has emerged as a new kind of visual spectacle on the postmodern mediascape. But their work has, on the whole, looked less closely at the popular and sub-cultural resonances of a form of spectacular image production which has also produced a distinctly popular aesthetic. The computer generated imagery featured in the science fiction cinema of the early-to-mid-1990s was bracketed for mainstream cinema audiences–both by the formal organization of the films themselves and by the formal and informal networks of information about special effects that now play such an important role in the contemporary entertainment experience. This imagery was both a techno-scientific tour-de-force for the special effects industry and a new kind of aesthetic object. Mapping some of the cultural contours of this new aesthetic is therefore another project of this essay.

     

    The Consumption Junction

     

    With the exception of the seminal work by Sobchack, Landon, and Bukatman in science fiction studies, critical commentaries on CGI in Hollywood cinema have paid scant attention to aesthetics. Hollywood has typically been seen as a technologically and aesthetically conservative institution–in many ways, a justified perception. But while Hollywood has reacted conservatively to new technologies in some areas of film production, it has also opted in some areas for technical novelty over any strict calculus of risks. To take an example from the early 1950s, the aesthetic project governing Hollywood’s experiments with 3-D formats was arguably conservative, driven by a centuries-old quest for illusionism, realism, and mimesis. However, these experiments also represented a technologically adventurous–if ultimately unsuccessful–bid to bring cinema into the third dimension.

     

    Movies made in 3-D were widely pilloried by critics of the day. They were criticized for being gimmicky and juvenile, or for having stupid stories, or no stories at all. Most of the films made in 3-D between 1952 and 1953 used a dual-strip process that required two strips of film to be simultaneously projected onto the screen. The two images thus produced were meant to be perceived as a single, three-dimensional image when viewed by audiences through special polarized glasses; but if the projectors were not in perfect synchronization and/or correctly separated from each other, the effect would fail. The 3-D process was plagued by technological problems every step of the way: the cameras were bulky, film stock and printing costs were exorbitant, and synchronization was rarely achieved in projection. For a time, however, films made in 3-D formats were also popularly perceived to be the most technologically adventurous movies in theaters. Even after their moment of mass popularity was over, they continued to invite the delight of a new audience demographic: the techno-buffs.

     

    Hollywood’s experiments with 3-D in the 1950s differ in many important respects from its experiments with CGI in the early 1990s. Not only is the structure of the film industry different, so is the context of film reception. 3-D and CGI were also produced by different kinds of technologies. Assessing the cultural implications of these differences requires methodologies capable of identifying them. Philip Hayward and Tana Wollen address this issue in the introduction to Future Visions: New Technologies of the Screen, arguing that new methodologies are needed to deal with the cross-media nature of new computer technologies. Their work points out that developments like CGI are not anchored to cultural institutions in the same way that film is anchored to cinema (4). The fact that the history of CGI spans so many applications has implications for the way that history is written even when it is narrowed down (as it is here) to the history of CGI in Hollywood feature films. This last point is an important one: cultural analyses of new technologies ought to be different from cultural analyses of older technologies just (and not only) because the circumstances of their development, application, and consumption are different.

     

    Like the wide-screen formats that replaced it, 3-D cinema was born out of technological experimentation aimed at creating an immersive experience for spectators. The films that defined the look of CGI in the early 1990s, on the other hand, constructed a very different spectatorial relation to the images projected on the screen. Far from being designed to make spectators feel, as Bukatman once described it, that “[they] are there (even if [they’re] not)” (“The Artificial Infinite” 263) the cinema of this period was designed to focus attention on the disruption of cinematographic space by the insertion and installation of a markedly different technological and aesthetic object.

     

    By 1996, Hollywood science fiction cinema was already moving away from a mode of arts-and-effects direction that put the display of computer generated images at the center of the spectatorial experience. But in these early years, computer generated images became the focus of intense public scrutiny and the site of popular speculation about the aesthetic possibilities of new imaging technologies then coming to market.

     

    A number of factors have contributed to the prominence of consumer fantasies about spectacular image production in the 1990s. It could be argued that such fantasies of production arise inevitably when the interests of powerful industrial sectors converge–in this case, the entertainment, consumer electronics, and information technology industries. But such analysis fails to account for more diffuse processes involved in this phenomenon.2 Writing about the widespread media interest in entertainment applications of virtual reality technologies in the early 1990s, Philip Hayward commented that although much of this coverage suggested that recent innovations had only just burst onto the scene, “[a]nalysis reveals a more gradual pattern of diffusion through a range of (sub)cultural channels whose character and concerns have molded the public image and perception of the phenomenon itself.”3 Much the same might be said of the way the public image and perception of special effects has been shaped over the same period. Indeed, many of the cultural forms that Hayward identifies as having contributed to the popularity of discourses about virtual reality–music videos, rock and fringe culture magazines, computer games, and cyberpunk–have also helped popularize discourses about special effects.

     

    Journalisimo4

     

    Wired’s post-feminist posturing and consistent editorial support for a free-market, techno-libertarian stance on government regulation of information technology and telecommunications have repeatedly been the focus of dissent from readers and critics alike.5 More difficult to pin down, the magazine’s visual gestalt has also captured the attention of cultural critics interested in the ramifications of a design sense that has appeared, to many, to have made of the computer generated image, not so much a new kind of aesthetic object, as a new kind of corporate logo.

     

    This is not the first time that reflection on this aspect of the magazine has centered on, or invoked, computer generated special effects. In “Wired Unplugged“–a revised version of a review which first appeared in Educom Review–Mark Dery begins by imagining that the magazine itself simulates the polymorphous perversity of a computer graphics effect.6 Invoking an already iconic moment in the history of CGI in Hollywood cinema, Dery wonders if Wired isn’t “actually the shape-shifting android from Terminator 2, disguised as a magazine.” In its use of digital production technologies, he likens Wired to “the liquid metal T-1000, whose ‘mimetic polyalloy’ enables it to morph into ‘anything it samples by physical contact.’” Dery is a perspicacious commentator on contemporary technocultures. His analysis in Escape Velocity of the subcultures that have emerged among underground roboticists, cyber-body artists, postmodern primitives, and cyberpunk rockers is happily devoid of the “cyberdrool” that sometimes passes for theoretical reflection at the more ecstatic end of cultural commentary on new technologies. For Dery, these subcultures are appealing because, while they take it as a given that “technology is inextricably woven into the warp and woof of our everyday lives,” they also manage to “short-circuit the technophile-versus-technophobe debate” that tends to follow this assumption (Escape Velocity 15). Some, it would seem, even go so far as to turn a critical eye on that ubiquitous new formation, “the military-industrial-entertainment complex.”

     

    The same, however, cannot be said for the readership that Dery imagines for Wired, this “magazine simulating a simulation” (“Wired Unplugged”). If he chastizes Langdon Winner for taking Wired’s hyperactive visual design as a sign that the magazine lacks substance, it is because Dery is too perceptive a critic not to recognize that Wired’s slippery, refracting visual style reverberates with meanings of its own. Curiously, he posits its “aesthetic of overt manipulation–of ‘overdesign’”–as the graphic equivalent of the opening line of William Gibson’s Neuromancer: “‘The sky above the port was the color of television, tuned to a dead channel’” (3). This seems an odd choice, not least of all because, unless you press your nose to the screen, the flickering fuzz that appears on a television set tuned to a dead channel seems strangely monochrome. It is not an image, one would have thought, that is readily identifiable as the textual equivalent of Wired’s day-glo graphical interface. The point of this reference is to draw a parallel between Gibson’s vision of the future and Wired’s professed desire to produce a magazine that looks “as though it had literally landed at your feet as a messenger from the future.”7 But Dery’s suggestion that “both Gibson’s world and Wired’s remind us that technology is transforming our environment into a profoundly denatured, digitized–and, increasingly, corporate–place” (“Wired Unplugged” 3), only succeeds in foreclosing upon any further speculation about what this future might look like.

     

    In its rhetorical effects, Dery’s writing blurs any distinction between Wired’s visual style and something approximating its world view. On one level, this seems entirely appropriate. For as Dery himself points out, it is not for nothing that Marshall McLuhan is listed as Patron Saint on the magazine’s masthead. The problem with this thinking lies not in trying to ascertain the cultural meaning of Wired’s visual style. Much less does it lie in refusing to separate style from content (or medium from message). For much of this review it lies, rather, in the assumption that Wired’s world is so dominated by the view of “corporate futurists, laissez-faire evangelists, and prophets of privatization,” that no meaning can be imagined for it that does not fit this ideological configuration (2). When it is not being retrofitted as corporate-futurist, Wired’s aesthetic is figured as an attempt to simulate “the sensation of bodily immersion familiar from video games and techno-thrillers, where warp-speed, gravity-defying flights through cyberspace, seen from a computer-generated point of view, offer gamers and moviegoers a taste of cyborg vision” (4). But to the extent that it is really intended to signal a new mode of visualization, the metaphor of “cyborg vision” all too neatly elides important differences between the ways that computer generated images produced for VR, movies, games, and magazines actually circulate in popular culture.

     

    More prosaically, it might be noted that some aspects of Wired’s visual design are tuned into the anti-formalist, cut-and-paste expressionism being explored in fringe culture magazines like Ray Gun and Inside Edge. Much of the layout in these magazines features Barry Deck’s expressionist typefaces (which have names like Caustic Biomorph, Cyberotica, and Template Gothic). The contents pages of each issue of Wired are preceded by a four-page digital art spread that includes quotes from an upcoming article. This regular feature–along with the contents pages themselves–plays with all manner of digital art forms, including those emanating from the cyberdelic end of the techno-fringe. Images and typeface are combined in ways that suggest the editorial brief for these pages is to capture a mood, attitude, or tone. Not fully-formed ideas, but snippets of ideas, float or flash through the magazine at the speed of a turning page.

     

    Despite the fact that Ray Gun’s founder, David Carson, has been commissioned to create ads for Pepsi, Nike, Citibank, and TV Guide, or the fact that still more advertisements have been inspired by Carson’s approach to design, Ray Gun continues to be perceived by many cultural commentators as a new edge publication.8 It would seem that no corporate takeover has yet managed to cast a shadow over its claims to push back the boundaries of conventional design. In reviews of Wired, Ray Gun is also the magazine that most often crops up as a contextual reference for Wired’s own design sense. “Wired,” says Dery, “is the limit case for postmodern technodazzle in graphic design, pushing the eyestrain envelope to just this side of unreadability” (“Wired Unplugged” 1). In parentheses he adds: “It falls to magazines with a younger, fringier demographic, like Ray Gun and Poppin’ Zits, to shatter the legibility barrier into postliterate fragments” (1). For Dery, then, comparisons between Wired and Ray Gun are intended to raise questions about the fate of critical thinking and rationality in a so-called “postliterate” design space. But neither Wired’s broad-bandwidth broadcasting of the corporate-futurist message, nor its simulation of the cyborg’s terminal gaze, allow much room for the fragmentation of meaning that we have been given to understand occurs in this space. As far as critical ciphers go, both suggest the restitution of an organizing rationality that makes it difficult to conceptualize the magazine in any other terms.

     

    It falls to cyber-sceptic Keith White to offer a reading of Wired’s design strategy that resolves some of the discontinuities in Dery’s review. If Dery’s own reading is perhaps best understood as a discontinuous series of short takes on a theme–chosen more for their immediate impact than their relation to each other–White’s review is the monotheistic voice of rationalist indignation. In a review originally published in The Baffler (subtitled “The Journal That Blunts the Cutting Edge”), and currently available on-line, White argues that Wired’s much-touted design sense speaks nothing so much as good marketing: “Don’t be sucked in” is the White message–whatever this packaging owes to publications like Ray Gun, Sassy, and Inside Edge, this material has most certainly been relieved of any genuinely radical edge. According to White, Wired’s co-optation of the radical “look” of these magazines extends the same logic that launched Apple’s Macintosh computer. The famous 1984 Chiat/Day television commercial presented the Macintosh to its Super Bowl audience as a conformity-smashing innovation in computer design. Thereafter, says White, “the course that ideologues of the computer should take” had been set. In putting “together an ideological packaging for information technology that screamed nonconformist,” Wired’s founders simply “picked up where the TV advertising left off” (“The Killer App” 2).

     

    White’s claim that Wired’s vision of the good life is remarkably consistent–“money, power, and a game boy sewn into the palm of your hand”–has real critical bite (3). However, it might also be said of this critique that it fabricates consistency where it might not otherwise exist. Take for example the argument that throughout the 1960s, ’70s, and early ’80s, the computer industry suffered from a massive public relations problem that stemmed from the Cold War. This was a time, according to White, when the counterculture and corporate America shared a suspicion of computer technology. If information technology was “to achieve proper acceptance in the business world,” then it would have to “undergo a gigantic face-lift.” This critical revamp was achieved, says White, by appealing to the business world’s increasing fascination with “notions of chaos, revolution, and disorder” (2).

     

    Here, then, is the missing link between Wired’s chaotic, disorderly–to say nothing of revolutionary–visual style, and its corporate, free-market ideology. The only problem is that this narrative relies on a strange cultural bifurcation. For where do the first technofreaks–with their whole-earth lifestyles, low-tech equipment, and high-tech predilections–fit into this picture? The first communities of computer programmers that sprang up in places like Santa Cruz County in the 1960s and ’70s were an important site for the development of a sensibility –if not yet an aesthetic–fascinated by chaos, disorder, and random phenomena.

     

    The fringe technocultures that clustered around the first bulletin board systems (BBSs) in the mid-1970s did not simply disappear into Start-up Valley ten years later. Indeed, the contemporary “ravers, technopagans, hippie hackers, and other cyberdelic subcultures” that come in for such close critical scrutiny in Dery’s Escape Velocity have their techno-cultural roots in these kinds of communities.9 Dery’s criticism of these subcultures bristles with impatience. His most scathing criticism is reserved for their “techno-transcendentalism” and “high-tech millenarianism”–all that flaky cyberbabble about “consciousness technologies” and “magickal programming” (21-22). As well it might be. Dery fears that “[t]heir siren song of nineties technophilia and sixties transcendentalism seduces the public imagination with the promise of an end-of-the-century deus ex machina at a time when realistic solutions are urgently needed” (49); and this fear may, in fact, turn out to be well-founded. It is worth remembering, however, that the do-it-yourself ethos of the cyberdelic fringe was nourishing future experiments in digital art–fractal art, genetic art, multimedia–well before the PC boom of the mid-1980s.

     

    In “Cyberhype,” a review essay for World Art magazine, the Australian cultural critic McKenzie Wark offers what is perhaps the most persuasive reading of how spectacular image production and the commodity form converge in Wired. As in Dery’s and White’s reviews for Educom Review, it is not Wark’s argument so much as his rhetorical style that proves most persuasive. His avatar for this essay is a “jaded, bloated 30-something former punk” (67) whose street-weary, intellectual cool is reminiscent of science fiction novelist Rudy Rucker’s jaundiced anti-heroes. Wark (it seems reasonable to continue to identify him in this way), casts a disparaging glance at what he sees as being Wired’s corporate-cultural mission: the production of cyberhype.

     

    According to the Wark lexicon, cyberhype is hype about hype: it is hype about multimedia, cyberspace, and virtual reality. It is “the swanky image of nothing but the promise of ever niftier images” (66). And it is virtually indistinguishable from marketing hype. Wired and its sister publication Mondo 2000 emerge from Wark’s review as magazines for the “first off-the-shelf romantic revolution.”10 His reflection on the spectacular imagery in these magazines leads him to speculate that the commodity form and the spectacular image form have, in fact, “become one.”11 What seems to bother him about this fusing of art and advertising is not the idea that it has become impossible to distinguish between the two (although this is bad enough), but rather that anyone with half an idea and access to the right sort of equipment can produce these spectacular image-commodities.

     

    Advertising, he argues, is no longer the sole preserve of the big manufacturers and media outlets: “Now anyone can sell!” And not just classifieds and garage sales: “anyone can make images of themselves and sell themselves as makers of images, and distribute those images through the endless capillaries of the new micromedia: cable TV access channels, do-it-yourself ‘zines, covert and even overt self-promotion on the Internet, info-hucksters puffing each other up on the big cyber-communities like the Well” (69). The more alarmist Wark’s tone becomes, the more one begins to suspect that what he finds most worrisome about this proliferation of images is that it raises the possibility that we now live in an era when art is no longer possible. For Wark, art seems to stand in this instance as the sign of a mode of production that says no to spectacle and to cyberhype.

     

    Wark is no cyber-refusnik, so it is hard to imagine that he really means to signal the impossibility of something called computer, or digital, art. It is even harder to imagine him arguing that the democratization of this technology–the fact that it is within reach of “a great number of the ever expanding info hacking class”– has led, inexorably, to the conflation of image production with something called cyberhype, or the spectacle, or the commodity.12 After all, this claim betrays a sneaking disregard for the desires of the populace that does not sit easily with Wark’s more populist impulses. Again, it is worth remembering that neither Wark’s nor Dery’s reviews of Wired were specifically written for an academic audience. They are tactical pieces: written quickly and designed for maximum impact. But they also raise important questions about some of the ways that computer generated images are being produced, distributed, and above all, consumed.

     

    Just Do-It-Yourself

     

    Although advertising for multimedia technologies in Wired regularly appeals to consumers’ fantasies of becoming image-makers themselves, this advertising tends (interestingly) not to represent this possibility visually. This is especially noticeable in a magazine otherwise filled with images. There are advertising campaigns in Wired that are sites of spectacular image production–the Absolut Vodka campaign is a case in point–but ads that actually advertise computer imaging technologies are more likely to refer to their placement in a magazine already filled with images and high-profile image-makers in order to invoke the imaging capabilities of their products. An ad for Autodesk video editing and animation software, for example, claims that with the company’s vast range of plug-ins, “you’ll not only be doing things typically reserved for high-end workstations today, you’ll be doing the hottest things in this magazine tomorrow” (Wired January 1995, 61). Perhaps the most interesting feature of this advertising, however, is its appeal to consumers not in the market for “high-end workstations.” While the advertised cost of something like Media 100’s video editing system (under $30,000) clearly puts it out of range for the vast majority of home producers of multimedia, much of the advertising for multimedia authoring tools that appears in Wired is pitched to the home producer. In fact, the entire magazine is rather clearly structured to appeal as much to the do-it-yourself fantasies of would-be home producers as to the purchasing power of imagemaking professionals.

     

    Articles like one featuring an interview with the low-budget filmmaker Scott Billups feed consumers’ fantasies of home production in a number of ways (“Shot By An Outlaw”). Most obviously, Billups himself is represented as something of a home producer (in this case of low-budget horror movies). The article is promoted on the front cover with an invitation to “Make Special Effects in Your Basement.” Inside, the title page brazenly declares: “Who needs ILM? Completely digital movies will be made by lone ranger cinemagicians like Scott Billups. Welcome to Basementwood.” As for the article itself, much is made of the fact that Billups performed the duties of producer, director, cinematographer, virtual set designer, computer animator, and digital editor and compositor for his low-budget special effects extravaganza, Pterodactyl Woman of Beverly Hills.

     

    Like articles in other publications that cover special effects and effects-based productions–Cinefex, American Cinematographer, Computer Graphics World–this article contains the usual product reviews. Billups reviews in some detail available graphics platforms (“[p]ound for pound, dollar for dollar, the new 150-Mhz PCIs render at least two times faster than comparable SGIs” (204)) and software packages (ASDG’s Elastic Reality Morphing package gets the thumbs up). Notably, he evaluates these products in terms of affordability and/or user-friendliness. It matters less that the cost of these tools still puts them beyond the reach of the majority of would-be home producers–or that attaining the level of knowledge and proficiency needed to use them may entail long periods of trial and error (not to mention expensive training)–than that their advertised accessibility makes them available as objects for consumer fantasies of home production.

     

    Wired binds the logic of image production to technological consumption through fantasies of home-production. In the magazine’s advertising, special effects frequently figure as metonyms for spectacular image production. Nowhere is the appeal of producing special effects illustrated more clearly than in a long-running advertisement for the Kingston Technology Corporation. The ad, which first appeared in December 1995, features a sepia-tinted photograph of a woman hysterically pulling at her hair. Her hairdo and clothes are circa 1950. The text box beneath the image reads: “You’re creating special effects for the next blockbuster, so why are you using B-movie memory?” (97). In the decision to spectacularize the subject of production (represented as the hysterical, and notably feminine, image-maker), over either the object of production (special effects) or the advertised product (Kingston memory), the ad draws attention to the arbitrary relation between image and product–to the fact that it appeals less to the desirability of the product itself than to the fantasy of spectacular image production.

     

    Undeniably, this fantasy is both consumerist and utopian. Just as clearly, the language and iconography used in much of the advertising and artwork in Wired is at best ambiguously gendered and at worst smugly masculinist. On these grounds alone, more criticism of the magazine should be welcome. Nevertheless, some of Wired’s critics may have moved too quickly to dismiss consumers’ fantasies of home production as unworthy of critical attention. Behind this dismissal lies the assumption that these fantasies only mask the extent to which consumers of new multimedia technologies don’t actually produce anything with them–or at least, nothing worthwhile. But it may just be that it is still too early to tell what effects the utopian fantasies surrounding these technologies will have on the image-making futures being dreamed about in basements, bedrooms, and home studios right now. It may also be too early to determine the extent to which fantasies of home production either facilitate or impede individuals’ abilities to conceptualize collective forms of cultural production. Cultural critics must continue to investigate how these fantasies play out in relation to other cultural activities, other sites of consumption and interactivity, if they wish to find out how the concept of “do-it-yourself” figures in them.

     

    Digital Expressionism

     

    When histories of computer generated imagery in Hollywood science fiction cinema speculate about aesthetic parameters, they almost always describe a quest for simulation.13 There are, however, other ways of understanding this history–ways that do not regard the aesthetic project governing the production of CGI as one that always, or necessarily, values photorealism over visual novelty and experimentation. Where computer generated special effects are concerned, the relation between CGI and simulation is not simply isomorphic.

     

    In “From Abstraction To Simulation: Notes on the History of Computer Imaging,” Andy Darley argues that early interest in the aesthetic possibilities of computer art displayed a modernist preoccupation with visual abstraction and novelty (43-46). In the 1960s and ’70s, artists like John Whitney, Stan Vanderbeek, and Lillian Schwartz produced a number of abstract films using computer graphics. Whitney’s Matrix III (1972) and Arabesque (1975) were concerned, for instance, with the formal arrangement and movement of light, line, and color. But in the history of CGI that Darley later maps out in these “Notes,” any interest in pushing the aesthetic possibilities of computer art in new directions has all but disappeared by the 1970s. By then, he argues, this project had been overtaken by research into “the formidable copying or simulational power of computers”–a project which (unlike “art”) would repay the high levels of capital invested in it by corporate and state-funded R&D bodies with lucrative commercial applications (49). Wrested from the hands of artists, the history of computer generated imaging becomes, at this point, a quest for simulation: or, rather, a drive to produce computer generated images that are indistinguishable from photographs.

     

    But the end-of-art was not yet nigh. In the 1970s, computer animation became the site of renewed interest in research centers like Bell Laboratories, MIT, and the University of Utah. Many of the computer animation techniques that were developed during this period–techniques for achieving motion blur, texture mapping, computer-controlled rotoscoping–were, in fact, designed to facilitate the development of commercial applications for computer simulation such as flight simulation, scientific and medical visualization, and computer-aided-design. However, a number of artists maintained their interest in experimental computer animation. William Moritz is an historian of computer animation and author of a brief history of experimental computer animation included as part of an on-line festival of experimental works produced by Christine Panushka and sponsored by Absolut Vodka (Absolut Panushka). In Moritz’s telling of this story, abstract animation continued to flourish in the 1970s in films produced by artists like Robert Breer and Jules Engel (who also worked on Disney’s Fantasia).

     

    Moritz wants to make the history of experimental animation a history of films which, as he says, have been made by artists who have tried “to make something personal, exploring techniques to find exactly the right look to express it–something new, fresh, imaginative, dealing with significant subject matter, made independently and often single-handedly.” For him, this means excluding cartoons and animated films produced by major studios, as well as short works produced by animators working in the field of computer generated special effects. However, it is impossible to keep these intersecting fields entirely separate. The animation program founded at the California Institute of the Arts by Jules Engel in 1969 not only fostered a number of independent filmmakers, but also provided a training ground for animators who would later continue their work in the Hollywood film industry. Graduates of Cal Arts include people like Tim Burton, Henry Selick, and John Lasseter. But a history of computer animation interested in further teasing out the institutional contexts of experimental research in computer animation would also, of course, include someone like Pixar’s founder, Ed Catmull, a graduate of the University of Utah whose research also led to the development of commercial rendering software (Renderman) while at Lucasfilm.

     

    It could be argued that there have always been continuities, as well as discontinuities, between the kind of computer generated imagery produced for feature film production and the kind of imagery produced by animators working outside of the industry. Interestingly, Moritz himself chose Ed Emshwiller’s Sunstone (1978) as “one of the classic computer graphics images.” Ermshwiller’s luminous, pulsating “happy face” is, indeed, an iconic computer generated image. But a term like “photorealistic” doesn’t describe it any better than it describes any number of other “classic” computer generated images, either those produced as experimental animation, or those produced as special effects for science fiction cinema.

     

    Techno-futurism

     

    Much of the computer generated imagery that found popularity with audiences in the early-to-mid-1990s represents the refinement, not of a realist aesthetic that takes the cinematographic image as its point of reference, but of a hyperreal electronic aesthetic that takes the cinematographic image as its point of departure. For all its ability to produce stunningly plausible objects–solid, textured, light-refracting bodies–computer generated special effects during this period also showed a marked preference for imagery displaying the kind of visual properties that can only be achieved in the hyperreal electronic realm of computer generation. Too bright and shiny by far, the hyper-chrominance and supra-luminosity characteristic of CGI effects in this period imbued the digital artifact with a special visual significance. This significance was augmented by a style of arts-and-effects direction that, by bracketing the computer generated object off from the temporal and narrative flow of the action, offered it to the contemplative gaze of cinema audiences.

     

    In their creation of this imagery, directors, effects designers, and computer animators were also, of course, responding to the knowledge that by the early 1990s, familiarity with new media technologies had altered cinema audiences’ perceptions of the sort of effects that could be achieved with computer generated imagery. This point was illustrated by “lone cinemagician” Scott Billups. Reflecting on the expectations of a generation of moviegoers raised on computer and video games for special effects imagery, Billups suggests that one of the things they want is “high chrominance,” which, as he says, “is not a film attribute: [t]here are colors you can get in the electronic realm that you just can’t get on film” (Parisi 204).

     

    While morphing is now a familiar special effects technique–having been used in countless television commercials, music videos, television programs, and Hollywood films–it might be remembered that it too has been a defining feature of many CGI effects. Morphing is a technique that transforms one image into another by stretching each image sequence and then cross-dissolving between the two distorted images. It endows computer generated and optically-photographed images alike with a hyperreal elasticity. Although the effect is achieved electronically, morphing is also used to create the kinds of visual puns that were so finely honed by traditional cel animation artists for cartoons. Even though the technique has been demonstrated many times over, morphs are still used to create subtle (and not so subtle) visual jokes that, again, draw attention to the synthetic properties of this imagery.

     

    In the introduction to Future Visions, Hayward and Wollen use the term “techno-futurism” to describe the rationale behind the production and marketing of new media and communications technologies (3). Techno-futurism, they argue, works as a classic ideological paradigm: always representing new technologies as an improvement on older ones. But the term techno-futurism might also be re-deployed to describe an aesthetics of CGI effects in Hollywood science fiction cinema which is specifically electronic. For it is the electronic properties of this imagery–as much as the technological wonders that this imagery ostensibly represents–which have come to be figured in popular discourses on computer generated special effects as the very sign of a future in which technology figures as a force to be reckoned with.

     

    Techno-futurism, then, describes an aesthetics which is at once inclined towards simulation and mimesis–and a decidedly synthetic, visibly more plastic, mode of visualisation. Pulled, on the one hand, towards photorealism and, on the other, towards a synthetic hyperrealism, the computer generated imagery in the Hollywood science fiction films of the first half of this decade exhibits an aesthetic that plays across these two poles. And more than anything else, it is this electronic reconfiguring of the cinematographic image which gives key CGI effects in these films their special reflexivity. The drive for simulation–long acknowledged, within the industry, to be something of a digital mantra in the field of CGI effects production–describes but one half of this aesthetic project.

     

    Art-Effects

     

    Wired differs from other publications that regularly report on the special effects industry in being neither a magazine specifically produced for industry professionals (like Cinefex, American Cinematographer, Computer Graphics World), nor a magazine primarily addressed to fans, buffs, and aficionados of the cinematic digital domain (like Cinefantastique, Starlog, Sci-Fi Universe, SFX). But it shares with both types of publications a specifically aesthetic interest in computer generated special effects.

     

    Many of the computer generated images featured in Wired exhibit the recombinant, hyperreal aesthetic characteristic of some of the 3-D imagery being created in this new medium by artists like “demon animator” Steve Speer (“Speer’s Head”) and Australian computer animator and multimedia artist Troy Innocent. In reviewing Innocent’s artwork for PsyVision–a fifty-minute music video made in collaboration with the Australian techno-music label Psy-Harmonics, Darren Tofts describes it as “uncompromisingly synthetic.” The imaginary spaces created for PsyVision’s eleven sections are represented in Tofts’ review as explorations of the limits and possibilities of computer animation. Each section draws “on a succession of symbolic forms and visual dynamisms, ranging from fractal geometries, kaleidoscopic pulses and textural ‘soft spaces’ to fantastic landscapes, info-overload collages and liquid architectures” (31). Some of the images that have been reproduced for the pages of World Art magazine have been taken from Innocent’s interactive database, Idea-ON>!. Innocent’s “rigorous donut” and glistening “iconbods” playfully rework the rod-and-cone candy look of much of the CGI that appears, for instance, in television advertising.

     

    In Wired, an article focusing on the graphical possibilities currently being explored in new on-line environments like “Graphical MUDs”–virtual worlds where animated avatars interact with each other and their environments–comes accompanied by three double-pages of spectacular, and somewhat satirical, visual interpretations of the synthetic inhabitants of these new electronic worlds (“Metaworlds”). Representing the work of three different artists–Steve Speer, Lynda Nye, and Michael Crumpton–this imagery shares with Innocent’s artwork an exploration of the synthetic visual effects that can be achieved in the hyperreal electronic realm of computer generation.

     

    Some of the best examples of imagery featuring the hyperreal, synthetic properties, and visual punning, idiomatic of the work of these contemporary artists, can be found in the TBWA Chiat/Day Absolut Vodka campaign which until 1996 ran on the back cover of Wired. (It has since been replaced by a campaign for Stolichnaya Vodka.) Andy Warhol kicked off the Absolut Vodka campaign in 1985 with his rendition of the absolut vodka bottle (reproduced on the back of Wired October, 1994). Since then, the campaign has featured, and advertised, the work of many painters, sculptors, jewellers, fashion designers, and photographers. Much of the artwork featured at the back of Wired was exclusively “produced by and for” the magazine. Covers by Steve Speer (“Absolut Speer”) and the computer graphics designers and artists at Troon Ltd. (“Absolut Kelly”), exhibit a playful aesthetic that combines an abstract expressionist’s exploration of the technical and aesthetic possibilities of this new synthetic medium with the pop artist’s retro-visionist eye for re-figuration.

     

    On the printed page, these glistening images lack the luminosity and hyper-chrominance they would have in an electronic format like video or CD-ROM. A video signal is comprised of luminance (brightness), chrominance (color, including saturation and hue), and sync (alignment). While all colored signals have both luminance and chrominance, black and white signals lack chrominance. Artists working in the digital realm have looked to exploit the specifically electronic properties of this new medium. At present, however, the printed page still reproduces a more lustrous, higher resolution image than most on-line delivery systems, which tend to deliver grainy, pixelated images that in most instances still take some time to download. The computer generated imagery that glosses the pages of Wired magazine are visually more spectacular than anything that Hotwired–the magazine’s on-line counterpart–has to offer. By comparison, Hotwired’s clunky frames, day-glo wallpaper and occasional animated graphics offer a computer graphics environment lacking in visual effects.

     

    The creation of three-dimensional computer generated imagery is a labor-intensive enterprise which, in addition to involving the long periods of gestation, conceptualization, and experimentation that are familiar to artists working in any medium, also involves long spans of rendering time. As one might expect, rendering time increases exponentially in the case of animated images. Other considerations of application and technique aside, computer generated imagery does not lend itself particularly well to the make-do, fly-by-night ethos of monthly magazine production. This is one reason computer generated images are actually so scarce in Wired. Sprinkled across a design space where collage and photomontage–not even détournement–still define the graphical style of the magazine, these images are designed and placed to arrest the gaze of the magazine browser like so many special effects.

     

    By treating the computer generated special effects produced by computer animators and artists working in the special effects industry as aesthetic objects, by featuring this work alongside the work of other artists working in digital media, and by showcasing the computer generated imagery produced by and for the magazine and its advertisers, Wired blurs the distinctions between special effects and art, commerce and art, and art and advertising–disinctions that critical commentaries on the history of computer generated imagery have so far held apart. No critical consensus has yet emerged to account for the cultural and political valences of this blurring. But rather than interpreting this development as a sign of the end of art, this essay has sought to examine some of the contexts in which CGI has emerged as the site of populist fanasies of home-image production. In Wired, appeals to these fantasies are invariably underwritten by a consumerist imperative to keep up with the very latest in computer imaging technologies.14 However, these appeals are just as regularly staged around special effects. For, more than any other entertainment application for CGI, science fiction cinema has treated the computer generated image as an aesthetic object. Although it is unclear what aesthetic and/or editorial directions Wired will take under its new owners–Condé Nast–it seems certain that the magazine will continue to map contemporary technoculture’s fascination with the computer generated image.

     

    Notes

     

    Thanks to Paulina Borsook for answering my email all the way back in August 1996. We need her, I think, to remain skeptical. Thanks also to the reviewers of an earlier version of this article.

     

    1. For more on the economic state of the special effects industry see Kris Goodfellow, “Mayday! Mayday! We’re leaking Visuals!: A Shakeout of the Special Effects Houses,” New York Times 29 September 1997.

     

    2. For an account of this argument see Herbert I. Schiller, “Media, Technology, and the Market: The Interacting Dynamic.” Schiller argues that although no one factor explains the development of the special effects industry, one contributing stimulus stands out: “the intensifying effort to maintain and extend personal consumption and to develop it abroad” (37).

     

    3. See Philip Hayward, “Situating Cyberspace: The Popularization of Virtual Reality,” in Hayward and Wollen, Future Visions (130).

     

    4. After John Thornton Caldwell, “journalisimo” refers to a mode of discourse characterized by an “excessive style.” See his Televisuality: Style, Crisis, and Authority in American Telivision (360).

     

    5. See Paulina Borsook, “The Memoirs of a Token: An Aging Berkeley Feminist Examines Wired,” in Wired Women.

     

    6. This review is part of a special report titled “Do We Really Want To Be Wired?” It is Scott Bukatman, of course, who coined the term “cyberdrool” in Terminal Identity: The Virtual Subject in Postmodern Science Fiction (189).

     

    7. Dery attributes this quote to Wired’s creative director, John Plunkett, and his collaborator and partner, Barbara Kuhr.

     

    8. For an interview with Carson focusing on Ray Gun’s critical reception see Tom Eslinger and Brian Smith, “American Typo,” World Art.

     

    9. See Dery, “Turn On, Boot Up, Jack In: Cyberdelia”, in Escape Velocity (41). Also see Sandy Stone, The War of Desire and Technology at the Close of the Mechanical Age. According to Stone, these early fringe communities were decidedly counter-cultural in their choice of lifestyle. However, she also points out that the communities of programmers that settled in the hillsides surrounding San Lorenzo Valley only superficially resembled the neighbouring hippies “whose grubby, marginal, and financially precarious lifestyle was not a thin cover over graduate-level degrees and awesome technical proficiencies” (106). She adds that “the depth of this gulf” seems also to have been “oddly invisible to the technofreaks” who, on the whole, preferred to regard their hippy neighbors as fellow-travellers (106). Stone describes the “technosocial context” in which these programmers lived and worked as “a milieu dense and diverse, wild and woolly, a bit crazed in places, and shot through with elements of spirituality and cultural messianism” (108). Her brief cultural history of one of these communities–the ill-fated CommuniTree Group–is the story of how an unprotected and unstructured conference environment was eventually brought down by a small band of teenage hackers who were able to exploit the vulnerability of a system that made itself available to all-comers. The next wave of designers were forced to reckon with the trade-off between the maintenance of social order and their desire to see this equilibrium achieved through the principles of organic regulation and freedom of expression. Suffice it to say that subsequent on-line conferences were considerably more regulated environments.

     

    10. See Wark, page 68. In referring to Mondo 2000 as Wired’s “sister” publication, I do not mean to suggest that this gendering of the magazine is in any way unambiguous. I have used it to mark an ongoing engagement with Scott Bukatman’s analysis of the way the two magazines negotiate gender (both visually and discursively). See his “Mondo Babes & Wired Boys,” Educom Review, available at http://educom.edu/web/pubs/review/reviewArticles/30622.html.

     

    11. Wark writes: “Now that the means of domination, the commodity form, the spectacular image form, have become one and proliferated such that they are obvious to everyone, we choose not to refuse them, but say yes! yes! yes! with deliberate abandon” (“Cyberhype” 69).

     

    12. What Wark actually says is that “[t]he means of domination are not only obvious to all, they are within the reach of the credit cards of, well, not all, but a great number of the ever expanding info hacking class, who make their living driving the economy forward on ever expanding waves of cyberhype” (69).

     

    13. For a wide cross-section of such histories, see Steven R. Holtzman, Paul Virilio, Lev Manovich in Timothy Druckrey, and the catalogue essays accompanying the exhibition in Photography after Photography, eds. Hubertus v. Amelunxen et al.

     

    14. See Simon Penny, “Consumer Culture and the Technological Imperative: The Artist in Dataspace,” in Critical Issues in Electronic Media, 47-73. In this essay, Penny explores “the position of the artist who uses technological tools, with respect to the larger [i.e., economic] formations of technologically mediated culture” (48).

    Works Cited

     

    • Amelunxen, Hubertus v., Stefan Iglhaut and Florian Rötzer, eds. Photography After Photography: Memory and Representation in the Digital Age. Amsterdam: G+B Arts, 1996.
    • Borsook, Paulina. “The Memoirs of a Token: An Aging Berkeley Feminist Examines Wired.” Wired_Women: Gender and New Realities in Cyberspace. Eds. Lynn Cherney and Elizabeth Reba Weise. Seattle: Seal Press, 1996. 24-41.
    • Bukatman, Scott. Terminal Identity: The Virtual Subject in Postmodern Science Fiction. Durham and London: Duke UP, 1993.
    • —. “The Artifical Infinite: On Special Effects and the Sublime.” Visual Display: Culture Beyond Appearances. Seattle: Bay Press, 1995. 255-289.
    • —. “Mondo Babes & Wired Boys,” Educom Review. On-line. Internet. Available: http://www.educom.edu/web/pubs/review/reviewArticles/30622.htm
    • Caldwell, John Thornton. Televisuality: Style, Crisis, and Authority in American Television. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers UP, 1995.
    • Daly, James, ed. “Hollywood 2.0 Special Report: the people who are reinventing entertainment.” Wired November 1997: 200-215.
    • Darley, Andy. “From Abstraction To Simulation: Notes on the History of Computer Imaging.” Culture, Technology & Creativity in the Late Twentieth Century. Ed. Philip Hayward. London, Paris, Rome: John Libbey, 1992. 39-64.
    • Dery, Mark. Escape Velocity: Cyberculture at the End of the Century. London: Hodder & Stroughton, 1996.
    • —. “Wired Unplugged.” On-line. Internet. Available: http://www.t0.or.at/dery/wired.htm”
    • Edwards, Gavin. “Speer’s Head.” Wired April 1997: 136-139, 182-184. Also available on-line. Internet. http://www.wired.com/wired/5.04/speer/ff_spear.html
    • Eslinger, Tom and Brian Smith. “American Typo,” World Art 1 (1995): 72-77.
    • Goodfellow, Kris. “Mayday! Mayday! We’re leaking Visuals!: A Shakeout of the Special Effects Houses.” New York Times 29 September 1997: C5, C8.
    • Hayward, Philip and Tana Wollen, eds. Introduction. Future Visions: New Technologies of the Screen. London: BFI, 1993. 1-9.
    • Holtzman, Steven R. Digital Mantras: The Languages of Abstract and Virtual Worlds. Cambridge, Mass. and London: The MIT Press, 1994.
    • Innocent, Troy. PsyVision. Psy-Harmonics: Melbourne, 1996.
    • —. Idea-ON>!. CD-ROM. place of pub: publisher 1992-4.
    • Kelly, Kevin and Paula Parisi. “Beyond Star Wars.” Wired February 1997: 160-166, 210-217.
    • Landon, Brooks. The Aesthetics of Ambivalence: Re-Thinking Science Fiction Film in the Age of Electronic (Re)production. Westport, Conn. and London: Greenwood Press, 1992.
    • Manovich, Lev. “The Automation of Sight: From Photography to Computer Vision.” Electronic Culture: Technology and Visual Representation. Ed. Timothy Druckrey. New York and London: Aperture Foundation Inc., 1996. 229-239.
    • Moritz, William. “A Brief History of Experimental Animation.” Absolut Panushka: n. pag. On-line. Internet. http://www.absolutvodka.com/panushka/history/bill/index.html
    • —. “In the Abstract.” Absolut Panushka: n. page. On-line. Internet. http://www.absolutvodka.com/panushka/history/storys/1970/ abstract/index.html
    • Parisi, Paula. “Cameron Angle.” Wired April 1996: 130-135, 175-179.
    • —. “The New Hollywood: Silicon Stars.” Wired December 1995: 142-145, 202-210.
    • —. “Shot by an Outlaw,” Wired September 1996: 136-141, 200-206.
    • Penny, Simon. “Consumer Culture and the Technological Imperative: The Artist in Dataspace.” Critical Issues in Electronic Media. Ed. Simon Penny. New York: SUNY Press, 1995. 47-74.
    • Quinn, Michelle. “Beyond The Valley of The Morphs.” Wired January 1993. Also available on-line. Internet. http://www.wired.com/wired/1.1/features/morphs .html
    • Rossney, Robert. “Metaworlds.” Wired June 1996: 140-146, 202-212.
    • Rothman, Matt. “Digital Deal.” Wired March 1993. Also available on-line. Internet. http://www.wired.com/wired/1.3/features/digital.deal.html.
    • Schiller, Herbert I. “Media, Technology, and the Market: The Interacting Dynamic.” Culture on the Brink: Ideologies of Technology. Ed. Gretchen Bender and Timothy Druckrey. Seattle: Bay Press, 1994.
    • Snider, Burr. “The Toy Story Story.” Wired December 1995: 146-150, 212-216
    • Sobchack, Vivian. “Postfuturism.” Screening Space: The American Science Fiction Film. New York: Ungar, 1987.
    • Stone, Allucquére, Rosanne. The War of Desire and Technology at the Close of the Mechanical Age. Cambridge, Mass. and London: The MIT Press, 1995.
    • Tofts, Darren. “Troy Story.” World Art 12 (1997): 28-33.
    • Virilio, Paul. the vision machine. Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana UP, 1994.
    • Wark, McKenzie. “Cyberhype,” World Art (Inaugural U.S. Edition) November 1994: 64-69.
    • White, Keith. “The Killer App: Wired Magazine, Voice of the Corporate Revolution.” Voyager. On-line. Internet. Available: http://www.base.com/gordoni/thoughts/wired/revolution.html.

     

  • Ekphrasis, Escape, and Thomas Pynchon’s The Crying of Lot 49

    Stefan Mattessich

    Literature Board
    University of California, Santa Cruz
    hamglik@sirius.com

     

     

    Remedios Varo, “Bordando el Manto Terrestre,” 1961. Reprinted by permission.1

     

    Always follow the rhizome by rupture; lengthen, prolong, and relay the line of flight; make it vary, until you have produced the most abstract and tortuous of lines....
    --Deleuze and Guattari, A Thousand Plateaus (11)

     

    Near the beginning of The Crying of Lot 49, Oedipa Maas recalls a trip to Mexico City with the recently deceased real estate mogul Pierce Inverarity, and in particular an art exhibition she saw there by the Spanish surrealist Remedios Varo. The text, in a moment of ekphrastic digression, describes one painting in detail:

     

    [I]n the central painting of a triptych, titled "Bordando el Manto Terrestre," were a number of frail girls with heart-shaped faces, huge eyes, spun-gold hair, prisoners in the top room of a circular tower, embroidering a kind of tapestry which spilled out the slit windows and into a void, seeking hopelessly to fill the void: for all the other buildings and creatures, all the waves, ships and forests of the earth were contained in this tapestry, and the tapestry was the world. (20-1)

     

    This room in Varo’s tower assumes for Oedipa the fatal and enigmatic attraction of a destiny from which there is no escape, a point of departure and arrival that exposes the illusion of movement between a here and a there, between life “among the pines and salt fogs of Kinneret” (20), California, and the imagined or imaginative freedom of Mexico. Time as both a causal sequence and a signifying chain suffers its catastrophic involution, turns in on itself, immobilizes or suspends the presumption of an animate nature, a substantial self and an autonomous desire. The experience precipitates in Oedipa an immediate paranoia:

     

    Oedipa, perverse, had stood in front of the painting and cried.... She had looked down at her feet and known, then, because of a painting, that what she stood on had only been woven together a couple thousand miles away in her own tower, was only by accident known as Mexico, and so Pierce had taken her away from nothing, there'd been no escape. What did she so desire escape from? Such a captive maiden, having plenty of time to think, soon realizes that her tower, its height and architecture, are like her ego only incidental: that what really keeps her where she is is magic, anonymous and malignant, visited on her from outside and for no reason at all. (21)

     

    If Oedipa’s tower is “only incidental,” however, it is also omnipresent–that is, she finds it everywhere. It is a human condition, the human condition as incidental, as nonessential subordination, remainder, residue or “W.A.S.T.E,” that spectral communication system which Oedipa comes to encounter as a kind of destiny in the novel. Pynchon’s metaphors here signify that displacement or paratactic placement beside or to one side of one’s self that characterizes the feeling of subjection to a fundamentally irrational externality. Oedipa is an incident person, a projection, a kind of hologram whose point of origin, that which “keeps her where she is,” suggests a terrifying complicity between “anonymous” gravitational force and “malignant” social power, between ineluctable physical law and fantasmatic structures actively vitiating (to borrow a Marxian locution) the social field in which self-recognition (as a subject, as a citizen) is possible.2 Oedipa’s imprisonment in the tower, at least on one level of implication, cannot be understood apart from this reified estrangement from a labor that quite literally comes to figure the alien object of paranoid investment, and which the paranoid subject can only reconsummate in a continual fabrication of that external world which “keeps her” in her place. To be “incidental” is therefore to experience alienation in the form of a fantasm installed at the center of being, a fantasm that destabilizes any clear sense of the human or the real. The novel specifies this experience a little later on in the figure of Metzger, who relates to Oedipa his dual career as an actor-lawyer in the following terms:

     

    "But our beauty lies," explained Metzger, "in this extended capacity for convolution. A lawyer in a courtroom, in front of any jury, becomes an actor, right? Raymond Burr is an actor, impersonating a lawyer, who in front of a jury becomes an actor. Me, I'm a former actor who became a lawyer. They've done the pilot film of a TV series, in fact, based loosely on my career, starring my friend Manny Di Presso, a one-time lawyer who quit his firm to become an actor. Who in this pilot plays me, an actor become a lawyer reverting periodically to being an actor. The film is in an air-conditioned vault at one of the Hollywood studios, light can't fatigue it, it can be repeated endlessly." (33)

     

    With this permutative logic, Pynchon weaves a profound textual likeness of life in a differential world of signs, images, filmic doubles, digitized desires, a world effectively transformed into a simulacrum, suspended or orbitalized in the etherous medium of an endless replicability and without any footing in a secured ground. If Oedipa is one of the women in Varo’s tower “embroidering the mantle of the earth,” her peculiar capacity or labor power is limited by this spectrality, transformed into an empty repetition not capable of transcending its own determination from without and so condemned to wallow in a postmodern America generated as if by “magic.” Of course it is not actually generated by magic but, as the text implies, by Oedipa herself in her tower, and the virtuality that Oedipa represents rests upon a simultaneous abstraction from and reduction to material forms of existence that are no less real for the unreality in which they are lived. This is why Oedipa is essentially a machine, a kind of information-processing computer that organizes or links together the elements of the textual world through which “she” seeks answers to the mystery of the Tristero and the underground postal system W.A.S.T.E, much in the same way that Maxwell’s Demon “sorts” molecules and “connects the world of thermodynamics to the world of information flow” (106) for another character in the novel, John Nefastis. In or around Oedipa, that is, the terrifying conspiracy of physis and techne manifests itself, deploys its secret as secret, as the blank and impervious surface of an impossible matter, a matter that does not mean even as it conditions the possibility for signification itself. Submission to gravity, to entropy, to a repetition “automatic as the body itself” (120), to a sign that is pure or unmotivated, constitutes the “destiny” that Oedipa sees figured in Varo’s tower, a destiny so total in its extension that no escape is possible, indeed the desire for escape only apotheosizes the law it seeks to transgress by perfecting the illusion of freedom that supports it.

     

    In their seminal and enigmatic work, Anti-Oedipus, Deleuze and Guattari make a distinction between “technical machines” that are defined extrinsically in terms of their functional use-value or in proportion to how well they work, and “desiring machines” that work only by “continually breaking down” (31). This latter type of machine denotes a structure or system founded upon the internalization of its own difference, an intrinsic boundary or an invaginated contour that makes it no more like a technical machine than it is unlike one. A desiring machine can only oppose its own determination, and this is why it always malfunctions, this is why its fundamental reflex is masochistic, this is why its proper mode is catastrophic or singular, always tending toward its own disappearance. Pynchon’s preoccupation in The Crying of Lot 49 with the process of entropy closely parallels this malfunctioning modality of desiring machines, and suggests a fundamental structural principle of the novel. Oedipa’s attempt at escape through her search for the Tristero (a figure, finally, for the possibility of freedom) enacts a kind of cancer in the body of meaning itself; her “quest” multiplies possible senses of the Tristero and erodes any single truth it might contain. But the “endless, convoluted incest” (14) of repetitious waste generated by the novel cannot be read as a simple neutralization of desire. If this were the case, then The Crying of Lot 49 would only be a technical machine to which the reader/worker is subjected, and not a broken machine that works by metabolizing itself, by becoming a residual supplement within an underground economy of WASTE. The interpretive stakes could not be higher here: one can only read the novel as enacting at the level of expression what it constructs at the level of content by modifying the relation between desire and the machine, by acknowledging an investment of desire in the machine so extreme as to displace the distinction between them (and the category of the human which this distinction supports).

     

    This much needs to be said against any “liberal” interpretation of the novel which would confer upon Oedipa the attribute of freedom or spontaneity, the election of a subjectivity which needs only to overcome the accident of its dehumanization in a late capitalist society: “she” never ceases being that machine, never escapes the quotation marks that underscore “her” intrinsic virtuality, “her” constructed and supplemental nature, “her” status not as character but as caricature. The solidity and force of the paranoid moment in Pynchon’s novel is such that it never yields to reason, to community, or to political effectivity. Quite categorically, I would say, no alternative to social repression as it is analyzed in The Crying of Lot 49 can be thought outside that moment of paranoid apprehension. In a sense the novel itself is woven inside Varo’s tower, a proposition which suggests in turn that Varo’s tower stands in metonymically for the entire text, its description of the painting taking on a function of ekphrasis with respect to its own artistic production. If this is so, and if it is not enough simply to assert a thoroughgoing pessimism (or full-blown paranoia) which the novel does no more than sustain, then the stake of freedom (personal or political) that it raises will be found as well in that ekphrasis, encrypted in the painting which figures that peculiar destiny of making a world or constructing the ground upon which a world can be formed, weaving as well a “mantle” in the sense of a covering, an enveloping skin, that cortical interface between inside and outside that is the place of form or the limit where forms appear, where the “coral-like” genesis of structure occurs.3

     

    Toward the Tower

     

    “Embroidering the Earth’s Mantle” forms the central panel of an autobiographical triptych, and though Pynchon mentions this fact he never expands the allusion or explicitly elaborates on the contextualization it suggests.4 The triptych lies dormant in the text not so much in a mode of figurative connotation as of simple displaced absence, buried there in a kind of ghostly obliquity to its signifying systems. It functions as a supplement without necessity to the text, as the negative space of a reference that needs no other support than itself, but which nonetheless conjures a double dimension, an unconscious of that unconscious formed by the act of reference and accessible only through an intertextual (and cross-generic) digression from the novel proper. What one finds in this double unconscious, in this “other” dimension of reference, is a set of parallel themes centered on the possibility of escape. The first panel, entitled “Toward the Tower,”

     

    Remedios Varo, “Toward the Tower,”
    1961. Reprinted by permission.

     

    introduces the “frail girls with heart-shaped faces, huge eyes, [and] spun-gold hair” of Pynchon’s description emerging from a building of narrow gables set against an umber-colored sky (the same as that identified by Pynchon in the second panel as a “void”). The visual effect of the gables suggests a honeycomb, a fragment of latticework, or more generally a process of algorithmic or polymeric duplication that recurs again in the faces of the young girls, who appear not as individuals but as replicas of each other, a group of identically dressed figures with identically spellbound expressions. Varo’s interest in the triptych is clearly with an automaton-like sameness: the “replicant” girls leave a “replicant” building in a movement toward the tower and the compulsion it represents continually to remake their own oppression. But since the gables also strongly suggest a plurality of towers as the girls’ point of origin, this movement is qualified by an implication of tautology, of a certain motion in place further indicated by the fact that all the girls are riding bicycles, and so evoke in the very act of “cycling” a static immobility.

     

    This condition of arrested or static motion seems universal in the first two panels and clearly expresses the girls’ lack of freedom, their subordination to sinister overseers (the man carrying a bag full of crows, the woman in a nun’s habit, the man in the tower holding an open book over an hourglass-shaped container from which the filaments of thread used by the girls to embroider the earth’s mantle are taken), and their palpable alienation in the work they perform. Conjoined with the visual motif of repetition, then, is a focus on forced labor, on an activity of production or creation subsumed under a requirement of regimentation and panoptic management, of an almost bureaucratic routine extending even into the bodies and minds of the producers. But if the story Varo tells here is about the artist constrained by a uniform and mechanical production, what she means by artistic (or productive) freedom cannot be understood in terms of a simple opposition to that constraint.

     

    The theme of escape is introduced in the first panel by a small detail: one of the girls does not look straight ahead as the others do, but glances to her left out of the painting and back at the viewer in a scarcely perceptible deviation from an almost catatonic norm. This deviation is significant for its very slightness, the fact that it manifests itself in a mode of diminution or subtle variation, not as a constituted difference from the rote repetitiousness of work, but as a difference in repetition or repetition with a difference that becomes the essentially tautological movement of an emancipatory desire. In this light, Varo’s triptych cannot be interpreted solely as a representation of an unfree dissimulation or doubleness characteristic of that political economy of the sign that obtains in modern societies, but rather as inherently dissimulatory and double, inherently catatonic, invested in its own (machinic) repetitiousness as the ground for any escape it might make possible.

     

    To put this another way, escape for Varo will be art as production and as thing produced, as the making of the triptych and as the triptych itself; it will be this glance out of the world of the painting that makes the painting itself worldly or material, only its materiality will consist in elements of simulation or fantasy, in virtual or “as-if” effects that are never “vitiated” even when they become double in their self-conscious apprehension as the necessary conditions for achieving artistic freedom. The triptych dramatizes art as escape, then, only by raising a further question about the nature of fantasy and the simulacral, or only by disrupting the semiotic claim to signify a “real” world which can be felt in meaning itself, in the attribution of truth to a particular event, situation or identity (even when that identity is as an “artist”). It is this complicity between signification and the real, between truth and self-identity or self-presence, that the triptych disrupts in its surreal emphasis upon the girls as replicated or several. If this disruption indeed lets its effects be felt in the paintings, then it leads to a quite different reading of that multiplicity: not only does it reflect their alienated relation to the means of production, but it also expresses an almost schizophrenic subjectivity lived in the ambiguous shifting between “she” and “they.” The girls are all the same girl, that is, they exist only in terms of each other. They constitute holograms repeating the whole in each part, making each part or fragment a totality as such, a complete part or complete incompletion enclosing a process and a result, a processive result, a product that changes or that indexes in itself a motion predicated upon the immobilizing passage within its own object-nature or objectification. The triptych, then, profoundly treats the artist-producer’s relation to a reified and alienated socius not from a place of non-perspectival privilege, but from within the socius’s own deepest tendencies, and this inclusiveness informs a production bearing on the world itself, producing not just particular things, external differences or even simulacra seen as self-contained within a horizon of realistic expectation, but the real as a simulacrum or as the exposure of its own boundary, its own fundamental constructedness.

     

    For this perhaps “convoluted” reading to be persuasive, then, the possibility of escape held out by Varo will have to pass through the world made by the artist-producer or within the woven mantle which serves both as the world’s ground (in its function as an interior layer of the earth) and as its peripheral limit (in its function as a covering or skin). The central panel of the triptych rejoins the thematic of minimal variation or

     

    Detail from
    “Embroidering Earth’s
    Mantle.”

     

    difference in repetition by once again skewing the eyes of the girl farthest to the left of the tower. Her expression, more cunning than her predecessor’s, here registers a consciousness of her overseer and the impassive suppression of guilt. What has she done? In what Varo herself, commenting on the triptych, describes as the girl’s “trick,”5 one fold of the mantle flowing out from the slit window just underneath her station discloses two tiny upside-down figures within the enlacing branches of bare trees, “woven” literally and figuratively together in an attitude of embrace. These two eminently textual and textural lovers become the central figures of the third panel, entitled appropriately enough “The Escape,” which shows them standing in a vehicle of indeterminate type (it resembles in inverted form the umbrella-like rudder controlled by the woman, but also suggests in its hairy texture some kind of vegetal or animal matter) as it conveys them upwards toward mountain peaks and a clearing sky of yellow light.6This line of

     

    Remedios Varo, “The Escape,”
    1961. Reprinted by permission.

     

    flight drawn through the three paintings does not go by way of a simple transcendence any more than it indicates a “real” freedom from a simulacral labor, from repetition or from fantasy. It delineates what Deleuze would call an “abstract line” generated at the point where the tension between form and matter, figure and ground, surface and depth, center and periphery collapses and gives way to a generalized non-distinction, to a formal, figural or structural difference that is internal to itself and so not determinable in an empirical sense.7 For the girl who makes her escape, for the artist who makes her escape, and for the triptych that constitutes their collective escape, this internal difference undermines the self-identity of escape, opens it/her/them to an otherness or to a world from which no escape is possible except through this opening, this singular experience in being, in art, in structure, in meaning, of a fundamental alterity and displacement rendering what is “real” virtual in its essence.8

     

    To account for Varo’s triptych in its molecular details (its repetitions, its multiplicities, its automata, its production of the real or of the ground of the real, its peculiar escape) requires a different understanding of what constitutes being, such that it no longer conditions a simple opposition between a living present and a simulacral or spectral logic.9 It requires that one do without this opposition and grasp the singularity of the “real” in its impossible possibility, as a form of expression that does not signify or presuppose the Saussurean structure of the sign.10 Instead of counterposing to a “transcendent” signifier (whose relation to its signifieds can only be one of dominance) an empirical or imaginary content, Varo’s triptych suggests what Deleuze and Guattari call a “collective assemblage of enunciation” subsuming within its form variables or “flows” of a semiotic, material and social kind no one of which is privileged over the other and no one of which is intelligible in isolation. The “subject” in general becomes this collective assemblage producing a world (in speech, in acts, in art, in writing) that does not differ from that production (i.e., of the world in which “you” appear), or rather from a production of production itself which appears only in a “free” indirect discourse without agency or authorship.11 The “outside,” according to Deleuze and Guattari, “has no image, no signification, no subjectivity” (A Thousand Plateaus 23), only this machinic co-implication or lived displacement in discourse, only this mode of radical becoming which is “imperceptible” precisely in its perceptibility, disappearing in the act of its appearance. This catastrophic ontology (or this catastrophe for ontology) serves as a clear subtext for Varo’s triptych insofar as it relates the making of a world to a virtual contour or intensive trait, and insofar as it implies in its multiplicities an inclusive relation to the world which one becomes. “Becoming everybody/everything (tout le monde),” write Deleuze and Guattari, “is to world (faire monde), to make a world (faire un monde). By process of elimination, one is no longer anything more than an abstract line, or a piece in a puzzle that is itself abstract” (A Thousand Plateaus 280). To make a world is therefore to make the world become, to make it the movement of a free difference or a nun that is always other than itself, but that also is this otherness in its positivity, apart from a negative economy of lack or of the “transcendent” signifier (distributing its effects of meaning from on high, by virtue of its detachment from the signifying chain).

     

    To posit movement in this way, however, also implies a certain immobilization or stasis which Varo’s triptych could be said to thematize in the vehicular nature of the escape it constructs. It implies a formal movement akin to what Deleuze and Guattari call nomadism. “The nomad,” they write, “is…he who does not move,” or rather, “the nomad moves, but while seated, and he is only seated while moving…. Immobility and speed, catatonia and rush, a ‘stationary’ process, station as process–these traits…are eminently those of the nomad” (A Thousand Plateaus 381). Such an arrested movement also expresses a discursive time: the time of a writing that is flush with the real, a writing that materially writes, a writing that writes the real in a book as an “assemblage with the outside” rather than as a representation or “image of the world.”12 The dynamics of Varo’s triptych–tautological or stationary movement, the girl at her station weaving (writing) a mantle or a flow that is the earth–raise as a central issue the relation between art and the world, in particular as it is focalized in the book held up by the man in the tower. This book, it can be inferred, functions as a kind of instructional manual or plan for the process of embroidering the earth’s mantle, and the man appears in this light not simply as a manager or foreman but as a priest interpreting the book by whose representations the world will be formed. The condition of oppression from which the girl desires to escape is coded in terms of a specific model of discourse, a mimesis of the book or labor according to bookish rules which the paintings attempt to disrupt. That this disruption assumes a “nomadic” form, and that its stake is nothing less than a production of the real, indicates not a freedom from the world of the book but the latter’s transformation, its rewriting in terms that include the outside as an internal difference or in its textual/textural singularity.

     

    At stake, in other words, is not a real or living present opposable to representation any more than it is a representation opposed to the present, but an art or a book in whose temporal dimension a “becoming everybody/everything” is played out.13 As a result, the first index of any escape afforded by the book as an assemblage will be its indistinguishability from its condition of servitude, its relative success in passing through the world without distinction, repeating but not simply reproducing the separateness of the individual in his or her essence, in an identity which can only experience itself against an existential ground which is not different from it.14 The nature of escape for Varo (and for Pynchon, as I will shortly argue) hinges upon this desubjectification of art, of the book. It manifests itself not in a detachment from a simulacral labor, or from a “postmodern” human condition, but in a complicity that registers an experience of non-distinction or nomadic spatiality, an in-different freedom in difference itself, an almost masochistic incorporation or encryption of the world that constitutes a refusing desire in the face of social repression.

     

    Oedipa’s Night Journey: Repetition, Language and Desire

     

    This kind of theoretical insight informs a quite different reading of The Crying of Lot 49 than that which starts from a condition of alienation which Oedipa attempts to overcome (even if she does not succeed and even if it is only the reader who experiences “escape” in the form of a catharsis). The novel must first be situated within this logic of the assemblage, of an internal difference, of the displaced opposition between the living present and the simulacral, of a discursive time disclosing in its dimension the abstract lines or intensive traits of a drama about making worlds or about the production of the real. Only in this light can the investments of the novel in its own convolutions, impenetrable enigmas and simulacral effects be seen for the peculiar desire and freedom they evoke. The point, the moral resonance, of Oedipa’s story consists not in a particular content, not in moments of recognition that lay bare (or fail to lay bare) the simulacra that separate her from a genuine relation to her world, but in its parodies of that recognition, its fabulating ironies which always impede communication or ambiguate meanings, its continual reflux back toward its own textuality in a movement itself expressive of the only “human” condition that can be shared in the novel.

     

    This, then, is the central premise I would like to substantiate for The Crying of Lot 49: that the basis for any escape from Oedipa’s tower, for any freedom from the malignancy of social power in a postmodern America, or for any redemption of public space or political agency implied in the novel, is precisely the latter’s refusal to mean, its self-objectification or textual reflexivity as a book that attempts to write the postmodern world in a non-opposable language. Such a refusal governs the ambivalent tension which quite literally holds Pynchon’s words in place, a tension with which one reads statements like this one by Dr. Hilarius, the renegade psychoanalyst turned psycho whom Oedipa had hoped would “talk [her] out of [the] fantasy” of the Tristero. His advice:

     

    "Cherish it!... What else do any of you have? Hold it tightly by its little tentacle, don't let the Freudians coax it away or the pharmacists poison it out of you. Whatever it is, hold it dear, for when you lose it you go over by that much to the others. You begin to cease to be." (138)

     

    Dr. Hilarius can hardly be a less reliable voice in the novel than he is at this point (barricaded in his house, shooting at bystanders, hinting at his sinister role as a psychiatric intern in Nazi death camps), but at the same time his admonition cannot simply be dismissed as yet another symptom of alienation and escapism. The novel acknowledges the power of his contention that fantasy is necessary for being by encasing it in a fantasm of its own, and by deliberately modulating its tone into a farcical register. The value Dr. Hilarius places on fantasy becomes for Oedipa another clue that, far from simplifying her situation or clarifying its mystery, only compounds the problem, knots her deeper into the mystery, and further exacerbates the paralysis which she feels slowly overtaking her (“trapped,” as the text will put it, “at the centre of some intricate crystal” [92]). This means that fantasy works to retard signification in a double sense: as a symptom but also as a breakdown of the symptom, as Pynchon’s diagnosis of postmodern America and as the refusal of diagnosis itself, or of the objectivity claimed by the diagnostician. The subtext of Dr. Hilarius’s insanity is thus this erosion of truth-claims made by the master (analyst or doctor, author or critic) presumed to know, and at the level of expression no less than at the level of content. This is why the text so emphatically highlights its own absurdity: for not only does it represent the absurdity of its culture, it also enacts that absurdity from within. The novel is Dr. Hilarius in this passage, reacting in the modes of violent scandal recapitulated by a tabloid and TV-dominated society (the form would be: “man suddenly goes crazy, arms himself with guns, massacres innocent people, film at 11”) to the alienation that society provokes.

     

    In other words, the novel, in reacting to its own alienation, also compounds it in the same fantasmatic or virtual gesture by which it cogently indicates its escape. The function of paranoia in the novel (Hilarius’s, Oedipa’s, or Pynchon’s) is to ground this double valence in an immanent relation to the world it describes. The text renders its own paranoia schizophrenic, encases it in an inclusive structure of multiple determination and centrifugal effects. This plural dynamic of becoming the world (or, like Mucho Maas on LSD, “a whole roomful of people”) entails not that the schizoid text oppose its own totalizing paranoid moment, but that it take on the external or exclusive difference that denies its own inclusiveness, that it therefore deny itself, submit itself to the “rising” ground of a figure that can only be masochistic and singular, that can only be groundless, turning in an abyssal space of unmotivated signs or paraleptic meanings. This figure is exemplified in The Crying of Lot 49 by the Tristero, or even more concretely by the post horn, insofar as it flashes its signs in a displaced and elliptical phenomenality. What it signifies is a world experienced in a state of displacement that Pynchon in Gravity’s Rainbow will call “preterition,” a “passed over” or dynamically repressed modality of being predicated on an unconscious that belongs to consciousness or that knows no difference between them. This modality exemplifies what Deleuze calls a “second power of consciousness” raised in the act of a repetition which implies “not a second time but the infinite which belongs to a single time, the eternity which belongs to an instant, the unconscious which belongs to consciousness, the ‘nth’ power” (Difference and Repetition 8).15 The preterite tense is “bygone,” archaic, a reference to a dead past, but it is what Oedipa becomes when she “pursu[es] strange words in Jacobean texts” (104), for instance, or when she yields to an aestheticizing hermeneutic desire in her search for the Tristero. She brings the dead to life, as it were, to a “life-death” that is inherently simulacral or textual, a textual mode of living. Deleuze’s work on a repetition of singular or unrepeatable things turns the concept in on itself, makes it intensive, sediments the moment of repetition with “levels” at which the “whole” of time is repeated not successively but “at once” (Difference and Repetition 83) or simultaneously. The “unconscious” is not “below” but “lifted” into the surface, “belonging to consciousness” in the same way that time “inheres” in the moment of repetition (the model for this present moment is a diachronic cone tapering into a synchronic virtual point). The post horn scrawled on latrine walls, doodled on Yoyodyne stationery, inset on rings, printed on stamps, recycled in dreams, graffiteed in a San Francisco bus or tattooed on a sailor’s hand expresses a structure of clandestine communication which is nonetheless omnipresent, everywhere inscribed in the “malignant, deliberate replication” (124) of post horn symbols that dissimulate an underground that may or may not exist, that indeed may be itself dissembling or apocryphal. The post horn is then dissimulation as such, appearance as a weave of ambiguous signs which does not stand over and against the real, but in which the real appears or becomes legible as a text.

     

    There is nothing outside the text in The Crying of Lot 49, and no place in it from which to guarantee an immunity from its mediations or its fantasms. But at the same time that the real is textual, the textual is also real, it “signifies” a condition that every character in the novel shares. They are all triste, all “wretched” and “depraved” (the etymology is given in these terms on page 102), all expressed in the system of simulacra known as the Tristero, so that what Oedipa (and the novel she structures) seeks is finally her (its) own implication in the underground that may not exist, in the world that she (it) projects and that claims her (it) precisely in its uncertainty. The object of this textual desire focalized in Oedipa is Oedipa herself (the novel itself) in her (its) otherness or non-self-identity; it is therefore strangely anoedipal in nature, grasped in its approach to a limit where meanings and bodies break down, where words and things lose the stability of their difference and begin to flow together.16 Pynchon quite literally writes this flow in the long hallucinogenic episode of Oedipa’s night journey through San Francisco, which in the following excerpt becomes a musical “score.”

     

    At some indefinite passage in night's sonorous score, it... came to her that she would be safe, that something, perhaps only her linearly fading drunkenness, would protect her. The city was hers, as, made up and sleeked so with the customary words and images (cosmopolitan, culture, cable cars) it had not been before: she had safe-passage tonight to its far blood's branchings, be they capillaries too small for more than peering into, or vessels mashed together in shameless municipal hickeys, out on the skin for all but the tourists to see. (117-8)

     

    The city described here belongs to Oedipa, it is “hers,” her city, the city ofOedipa, and the consequent sense of “safe-passage” she feels at large in it conditions its transformation into a vast organism, a living thing “made up” of “words and images,” a text-body that is strangely abstract, without affect or impersonal, breathing and pumping blood yet chimerical, a virtual city woven out of repetitious symbols as empty and unreal as Oedipa herself (or the novel itself). The text goes on:

     

    Nothing of the night's could touch her; nothing did. The repetition of [post horn] symbols was to be enough, without trauma as well perhaps to attenuate it or even jar it altogether loose from her memory. She was meant to remember. She faced that possibility as she might the toy street from a high balcony, roller-coaster ride, feeding-time among the beasts in a zoo--any death-wish that can be consummated by some minimum gesture. She touched the edge of its voluptuous field, knowing it would be lovely beyond dreams simply to submit to it; that not gravity's pull, laws of ballistics, feral ravening, promised more delight. (118)

     

    Oedipa’s fugue-like passage within the text-city or within the text-body of herself as city begins with a lack of “touch,” of the skin’s or the hand’s abstraction from the sensuous capacities that indicate an animate nature. The city and Oedipa in it become an inanimate “repetition of symbols” that is not “traumatic,” that is posed not as the extinction of desire but as the ground for a pleasure that is indifferent yet “lovely beyond dreams.” In this way Pynchon describes the allure of an interpretive labor that, as an end in itself, is also immaculate, a pulchritudo vaga that seals Oedipa in an almost psychotic hermeticism. If Oedipa “means” an ability to remember or recognize, then that very ability finds itself assumed into the peculiar lightness of her world, transformed into “toy streets” she sees from the detachment of a “high balcony,” or with the conditioned appetite of animals in a zoo. Oedipa’s desire is caught in “roller coaster” cycles of a culture geared to incite and satisfy a “death-wish” in its subjects, to direct desire toward objects that empty its “consummation” of any substance. To “submit” to the destiny of a remembering that nonetheless cannot remember, or that is infinitely attenuated, implies a movement as or more ineluctable than gravity, an orbitalized desire that immobilizes not only Oedipa but the novel with its own repetition of symbols and its own fascination with the Tristero.

     

    So there is no escape from that repetition, and indeed for Oedipa and for The Crying of Lot 49 it will have “to be enough.” What follows from this is that one must understand the nature and function of repetition more clearly. What the post horns repeat, what Oedipa repeats, what the text repeats, is the empty form desire takes in contemporary culture. But as this repetition approaches the relative limit of a death-wish that must always reconstitute itself (to want again), Pynchon’s text discloses what could be called an absolute or asignifying limit at which grammatic and semantic structure loses its edge or begins to blur. A zero degree can be felt in the language in the same way that the executrix Oedipa, upon first encountering Inverarity’s complex legacy, notices a “sense of buffering, insulation,… an absence of intensity, as if watching a movie just perceptibly out of focus, that the projectionist had refused to fix” (20). The Crying of Lot 49 is also just perceptibly out of focus, slightly approximate in its diction, a feature which can be glimpsed in the above-quoted passage’s occasionally lapsed article or ambiguously deployed pronoun. Language begins to erode its own sense or substantive content as it plays out its submission to the “voluptuous field” of its repetitions, and in the process the text becomes a travesty of its own truth-claims, the warp and woof of potentially empty meanings or of an impenetrably parodic “matter” that always obtains or never changes insofar as it is the static condition for change itself, a textual hyle that bears its determination inside itself, or that appears in an in-differentiated form.

     

    Like Oedipa, then, the novel presents a curious detachment and levity (implied even in her name) that complicates the desire it dramatizes in the Oedipal search for a signifier that is not “transcendent” so much as triste, depraved, low, looked for in undergrounds or in depths that are flat, brought to the surface of a transparent consciousness “meant to remember” the secrets with which it is coextensive. This immanent reading of the object (i.e., language itself, iterative, abstract but isomorphic with the real) taken by desire in the novel suggests even as an imperative that one read escape or freedom from Oedipa’s tower not in contradiction with an alienated socius, but as that socius encased within a form of expression that (re)doubles its alienation, citing or incorporating its orbitalized effects until they metabolize, become residual or excremental signs in an economy of WASTE. Language (or writing) is strung through the body in the process of becoming the alternative or “shadow” system that Oedipa witnesses only in an exacerbated degradation on the streets of San Francisco:

     

    So it went. Oedipa played the voyeur and listener. Among her other encounters were a facially-deformed welder, who cherished his ugliness; a child roaming the night who missed the death before birth as certain outcasts do the dear lulling blankness of the community; a Negro woman with an intricately-marbled scar along the baby-fat of one cheek who kept going through rituals of miscarriage each for a different reason, dedicated not to continuity but to some kind of interregnum; an aging night-watchman, nibbling at a bar of Ivory Soap, who had trained his virtuouso stomach to accept also lotions, air-fresheners, fabrics, tobaccoes and waxes in a hopeless attempt to assimilate it all, all the promise, productivity, betrayal, ulcers, before it was too late; and even another voyeur, who hung outside one of the city's still-lighted windows, searching for who knew what specific image. (123)

     

    In this series of encounters, Oedipa looks and listens for her own belonging to the system of WASTE it implies–not its reality or real support for which she cannot find adequate assurances (but which is really there behind the appearances), but the perverse or denatured “interregnum” that it constitutes for time itself, the discontinuous space or gap in structure that renders it paratactic, displaced in its place, double, spectral or self-parodic. Oedipa takes her place within this series precisely by displacing herself, by loving the repetition of symbols, by desiring texts, and by failing to find any unmediated connection in a common ground or shared public space. What she seeks is not this common ground but the secret of disconnection that nonetheless communicates, the broken machine that links only by unlinking, that posits as the basis for community a reversal of communal values or the “assimilation” of an outside that is absolute and originary. In this light, the welder who “cherishes” his ugliness, the child who “misses” a “death before birth,” the Negro woman “dedicated” to “rituals of miscarriage,” the night-watchman swallowing commodities, and the two voyeurs looking for their “specific images” together indicate a desire not simply trapped in passive cycles of consumption, but actively seeking to undo the structure of repression in which it is caught, indeed from which it is not different. Laid over the “death-wish” implicit in each “species of withdrawal” (123) Pynchon enumerates in Oedipa’s Walpurgisnacht is another theory of the death drive, another kind of repetition compulsion than that which presumes a material model of return to inanimate states.17 Repetition in the above passage abrogates the natural and human functions of sociality, reproduction and digestion; it marks in the text-body a refusal or breakdown of its own organic constitution. But it accomplishes this refusal not through a process of externalization so much as by incorporating, like the night-watchman, the products of a world that reduces desire to its most material (and empty) form. Desire for the inanimate (or as the inanimate) in Pynchon’s novel (and in all his work) has to be seen in this double light to contract two death instincts, two repetitions, two limits, for only in this doubleness can the desire of the text appear in its excessive expenditures, in its masochistic transgressions of its own realism and truth.

     

    Oedipa’s and the novel’s desire is double: it repeats itself, it repeats itself repeating, it repeats repetition. This nomadic movement in place designates the central ekphrastic dynamic of the text, the precise way it feels itself into the world of forever deferred revelation it describes. Freedom from Oedipa’s tower occurs only through this movement, never against it, never in reaction to it, for to do so would be to destroy the implicate and broken structure of the novel which is its critique of contemporary America. Repetition for its own sake, repetition as an end in itself, repetition at the surface of the text in all its slightness, all its insubstantiality, but also all its brutality, expresses a force at the heart of desire that seeks an end to desire itself (understood as captured within a logic of consumption), a neutral or displaceable energy that verges on a digitized automaticity. This is one way to read the “great digital computer” through which Oedipa walks at the novel’s end, sorting Oedipa’s world into ones and zeros:

     

    For it was now like walking among matrices of a great digital computer, the zeros and ones twinned above, hanging like balanced mobiles right and left, ahead, thick, maybe endless. Behind the hieroglyphic streets there would either be a transcendent meaning, or only the earth.... Either Oedipa in the orbiting ecstasy of a true paranoia, or a real Tristero. For there either was some Tristero beyond the appearance of the legacy America, or there was just America and if there was just America then it seemed the only way she could continue, and manage to be relevant to it, was as an alien, unfurrowed, assumed full circle into some paranoia. (181-2)

     

    Oedipa’s conundrum presumes here a digitization at the level of expression, so that the indecision she suffers between “transcendent meanings” and “just America” does not entail a choice between the world as computer or the world as human or public space. The binary choice she faces, in other words, is not between paranoia and something else, since paranoia already figures the ground or frame for choice itself, for any formulation of agency one might attach to her example. The machinic nature of the human precedes any determination of its spontaneity and freedom, and this is why Oedipa’s desire for escape cannot be thought outside or in reaction to her encasement in a machine of generalized communication. On the contrary, this encasement must be seen as the condition for that desire and in two senses: as the cause of her alienation and as the medium for her escape, as the stimulus for an escape from the nexus of power relations that constitutes social repression and an escape in that nexus, within the structures of power from which she is not different. The possibility of freedom held out by the novel hinges on the precise function of this preposition in,or rather on the co-implicate or coincident structure exemplified by the novel itself where it achieves its peculiar effect of orbitalized meanings.

     

    The Crying of Lot 49 does not choose one or the other of the possibilities confronted by Oedipa at the “crying of lot 49”; it chooses the impasse as such, it presents the tautological circle of that double bind as the vehicle for its escape and the condition for any coherent activity of dissent. This elliptical and repetitious textual ambivalence signals a desire that includes the world and that refuses its own exemption or election in it, a preterite desire that takes the world as its object in all its “promise, productivity, betrayal.” By weaving or inscribing in its very texture the empty form of a “wasteful” signification, the novel discloses the incorporating, encrypting link between desire and a masochism that governs the underground or unconscious of the Tristero. This masochistic desire in turn links Oedipa to her world and makes her one of those outsiders who communicate via W.A.S.T.E. The impingement of non-meaning in the text therefore assumes a new insistence or urgency in the allegiance it suggests to an experience which is residual, left over, or paratactically displaced, an experience in which experience itself becomes indeterminate or unlocatable.

     

    To grasp the linkages, the empathic connections, the asymptotic convergences, the calculus of simultaneity that can be observed in Pynchon’s novel is then to center analysis on its disjunctive nature, to underscore the lack of “touch” upon which it everywhere insists as the condition for any “coming together.” It is also to resist recuperative readings that define desire (Oedipa’s and the text’s) as a search for meaning, for identity, or for the recovery of a dispossessed communal space. Oedipa is not a “heroine” in this sense, not the locus of a potential agency capable of wresting her culture from its postmodern catastrophe.18 Or rather, she is this heroine in a parody, and one can only emphasize the heroic aspect of her character in the context of its parodic quotation, for otherwise one misses the very political point about the nature of dispossessed communities and the bonds (bindings, Bindungen) on which they are based. If The Crying of Lot 49 can be said to contribute in its emphasis upon escape to the theorization of political freedom or of a genuinely public space in America today, it does so by giving us a glimpse of what a rhizomatic “experience” might look like. I do not imply by this that Pynchon has embedded in his text some “real” content which the reader might salvage and claim as its political message, but neither do I mean to occlude the “real” behind the signifier, or confer upon language the monolithic character of a metalanguage. Pynchon’s novel is an attempt to write the displacement of the difference between the real and the simulacral, and as such to imagine the world that follows from that displacement both in its vitiating effects and in its desiring modes. The politics of the novel consists in its formal displacement of that difference, for only with it does the “community” of “people” who “communicate” through WASTE come into being.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Each of the four Remedios Varo images in this article is reproduced by permission of Artists Rights Society (ARS). These images are protected by copyright law. The following are prohibited by law: (1) Any theatrical, televised, or public display or performance, including transmission of any Image over a network, excepting a local area network; (2) The preparation of any derivative work, including the whole or in part, of any Images without the permission of ARS.

     

    2. Vitiation describes for Marx the inverse relation under capitalism between the worker and his labor power (expressed both in the product and in the activity of production). “The alienation of the worker in his product means not only that his labor becomes an object, assumes an external existence, but that it exists independently, outside himself, and alien to him, and that it stands opposed to him as an autonomous power. The life which he has given to the object sets itself against him as an alien and hostile force” (134). To the alienation of the thing is added the alienation of the worker from himself or from his “species life” conceived as his implicate relation to the “inorganic” world. Ideally, “[t]he object of labor is… the objectification of man’s species life; for he no longer reproduces himself merely intellectually, as in consciousness, but actively and in a real sense, and he sees his own reflection in a world which he has constructed” (140). Work within a capitalist order, however, “vitiates” this self-reflection in the constructed world by taking away the worker’s species life, his real objectivity as a species-being, his produced and producing relation to an inorganic body, to his “belonging” within an inclusive and interdependent nature.

     

    3. The problem of coral reef formation confronted by biologists up to Charles Darwin centered on the fact that corals, in Darwin’s terms, “require for their growth a solid foundation within a few fathoms of the surface” of the sea (Coral Reefs 128). Since the likelihood of geologic foundations as uniformly present at or near the ocean’s surface as the global distribution of reefs would indicate is scant, Darwin proposed a correlation between reef growth and a rising sea level, arguing that coral grows at a limited depth, dies as the sea rises, and so provides its own foundation. This coral-like production of the foundation at the surface is suggestive for the kind of structure I am interested in here, which supposes a non-distinction between ground and figure, inside and outside, as its basis. Deleuze refers this figure internal to its own ground to the concept of “difference in itself,” a difference grasped not as a displacement in space (i.e., external or extensive in nature), but intensively and inclusively, opening the figure up to an intensive field of variable and differential relations which serves as an abyssal ground isomorphic to its own limit (Difference and Repetition 21-2). Deleuze and Guattari’s work on acentered or rhizomatic systems not defined “by a set of points and positions, with binary relations between the points and bi-univocal relations between the positions” (A Thousand Plateaus 21), rests upon the concept of an intensive field that renders a system simultaneous with each of its parts, multi-levelled or multi-dimensional, and expressed in the singular movement of an absolute or “free” difference.

     

    4. See Kaplan, Unexpected Journeys (20-3), for an account of the triptych in relation to Varo’s life as an artist.

     

    5. This is quoted in the book Remedios Varo by Octavio Paz; cited in Kaplan (21).

     

    6. This vehicle is one of many fascinating machines that recur in Varo’s work, and that conspicuously offer a means of conveyance which leaves its passengers in a state of suspension (they are often standing or sitting as they move, float or hover through a painting), and sometimes they even include towers or (usually circular) domiciles in their construction.

     

    7. I am attempting here an economic formulation of Kant’s paradox of internal sense, inflected through Deleuze’s reading of difference in itself. For him, difference as such can be understood as a form differentiated from a ground that does not in turn differentiate itself from the form, with the result that the ground “rises” to the surface and “dissolves” the form’s empirical and symbolic content, rendering it empty. Difference is no longer grasped “between” two things in a classificatory manner, but in the “autonomous existence” of the rising ground that comprehends its own limit (Difference and Repetition 21-2). With this displacement, forms (whether of matters, substances, subjects or objects, of meanings in the broadest sense) assume a certain concrete abstraction or intensive nature apprehensible only as that internal difference which articulates into the structure of being an originary otherness or alterity. An “abstract line” (referred to by Deleuze in conjunction with a brief discussion of Odilon Redon, whose work intersects Varo’s in thematic as well as technical ways) would be the contour of this singular form or of the intensive trait which it becomes once it is no longer opposable to other forms. The object so defined, whether it be of thought, of desire, or of labor–the materiality of things in themselves–assumes a virtual or subtle being which Deleuze and Guattari conceptualize in terms of differential forces, intensive fields and bodies without organs.

     

    8. Varo evokes this singular experience or “abstract line” through techniques, first innovated by Surrealist artists like Max Ernst and Varo’s friend Oscar Dominguez, of decalcomania, which entails blowing and blotting paint on the canvas in such a way that color intensifies and contours assume an ambiguous definition (Kaplan 122). This effect is prominent in the texture of yellow, foliage-like fog on which the lovers rise in “The Escape.”

     

    9. Derrida writes in Specters of Marx that a political being or political event (his example is the fall of the Soviet Union in 1989) cannot be understood today “as long as one relies on the simple (ideal, mechanical, or dialectical) opposition of the real presence of the real present or the living present to its ghostly simulacrum, the opposition of the effective or actual to the non-effective, inactual, which is also to say, as long as one relies on a general temporality or an historical temporality made of the successive linking of presents identical to themselves…” (70). For Derrida in this text, ontology can no longer be thought in adequately historicized terms as referring to determined contents, but must be grasped in a self-reflexive temporal and discursive dimension that he links to ghosts, specters, the work of mourning, etc.

     

    10. Deleuze and Guattari’s polemic against the signifier’s “arbitrary” and biunivocal relation to its signifieds rests upon their contention that the (Saussurean) sign cements an idealist system of representation. They identify two “dimensions” in the work of Saussure: “one horizontal, where the signified is reduced to the value of coexisting minimal terms into which the signifier decomposes; the other vertical, where the signifier is elevated to the concept corresponding to the acoustic image–that is, to the voice, taken in its maximum extension, which recomposes the signifier” (emphasis mine) (Anti-Oedipus 207). In the grid formed by the two axes of value and concept, “the signifier appears twice, once in the chain of elements in relation to which the signified is always a signifier for another signifier, and a second time in the detached object on which the whole chain depends, and that spreads over the chain the effects of signification.” This “detached object” gaurantees the meanings it organizes in virtue of its absence from the signifying chain, and so introduces a second order sign, a “sign of the sign” that can be grasped only in terms of an idealist or metalinguistic domination. It is in this sense that Deleuze and Guattari speak of the signifier as “transcendent,” a usage I am following here.

     

    11. In Deleuze and Guattari’s words, “The social character of enunciation is intrinsically founded only if one succeeds in demonstrating how enunciation in itself implies collective assemblages. It then become clear that the statement is individuated, and enunciation subjectified, only to the extent that an impersonal collective assemblage requires it and determines it to be so. It is for this reason that indirect discourse, especially ‘free’ indirect discourse, is of exemplary value; there are no clear, distinctive contours; what comes first is not an insertion of variously individuated statements, or an interlocking of different subjects of enunciation, but a collective assemblage resulting in the determination of relative subjectification proceedings, or assignations of individuality and their shifting distributions within discourse. Indirect discourse is not explained by the distinction between subjects; rather, it is the assemblage, as it freely appears in this discourse, that explains all the voices present within a single voice…” (A Thousand Plateaus 80). This formulation of an enunciative “assemblage” resonates in The Crying of Lot 49 with Mucho Maas’s LSD-inspired “spectrum” (or immanent plane of movement) on which being becomes a matter of multiplicities (or “whole roomfuls of people” [143]). More formally, it works itself out in the novel’s intertextual excesses, exemplified by Oedipa’s reading excursions through “The Courier’s Tragedy,” the text’s propensity for breaking out into parodic song, or its punning word-play around, for instance, names like “Oedipa Maas,” “Dr. Hilarius,” “Mike Fallopian,” “Pierce Inverarity,” etc.

     

    12. The difference between the book and the assemblage-as-book is analagous to that more celebrated difference between arborescent and rhizomatic systems. For Deleuze and Guattari, “The first type of book is the root-book: the tree is already the image of the world, or the root the image of the world-tree. This is the classical book, as noble, as signifying and subjective organic interiority….” (5). The “fascicular root” proceeds, by contrast, to “abort” the “principal root” and graft onto it an “indefinite multiplicity of secondary roots” that grow rhizomorphically, and support a “modern” text that is asignifying, asubjective, and anorganic (5).

     

    13. For Deleuze and Guattari, this process entails a “transparency” in the world that makes being a matter of passing or impersonation. “Animal elegance, the camouflage fish, the clandestine: this fish is crisscrossed by abstract lines that resemble nothing, that do not even follow its organic divisions; but thus disorganized, disarticulated, it worlds with the lines of a rock, sand, and plants, becoming imperceptible” (280).

     

    14. This is a restatement in other terms of the Deleuzian paradox of a rising ground. A subject experiences the uniqueness of its “essence” only in terms of an existence that is that essence, or only in the empty form of an indifferent existence which invades the autonomy of the “I” and articulates it through time. This point is made forcefully by Jean-Luc Nancy in The Experience of Freedom. Man’s egocentrism, Nancy maintains, entails a “concentration in itself” of being and a setting apart of the subject’s essence in what Hegel calls “a hatred of existence” (14). This unfreedom or “evil,” however, is the “first discernible positivity”of freedom and can only be understood in a co-implicate or “masochistic” relation that renders the “experience” of freedom singular or imperceptible, not a constituted difference, attribute or mode but an internal difference calling forth a particular kind of deconstructive apprehension. Experience for Nancy, indeed, needs to be defined in its “nomadic” singularity or imperceptibility, not in extension but intensively and according to a differential logic (145).

     

    15. Pynchon uses the word preterition in its Puritan sense to refer to the “damned” as opposed to the elect members of a community (204 and passim). Like the “wretched” of the Tristero, the preterite characters of Gravity’s Rainbow are living repression at an elliptical surface, strangely flush with the real from which they are displaced. Preterition for Pynchon is analogous, I think, to repetition for Deleuze, since both concepts bear on the past, on history as contemporaneous with the present in a discursive temporal dimension.

     

    16. Deleuze writes in Difference and Repetition of a reflux of libido upon the self in narcissism which suggests for Freud the formation of a “desexualized, neutral and displaceable energy” (112). Deleuze isolates in this energy a function of emptying subjectivity, of hollowing out the space of the self, of rendering its body virtual. What this energy precipitates in its immateriality is what Deleuze and Guattari call the “pure continuity that any one sort of matter ideally possesses” (Anti-Oedipus 36) or the “unformed, unorganized, nonstratified or destratified body and all its flows: subatomic and submolecular particles, pure intensities, prevital and prephysical free singularities” (A Thousand Plateaus 43). The underlying idea here is similar to an infinite substance in Spinoza’s sense, matter as intensive rather than extensive, differential rather than substantial. My own use of this idea emphasizes the relation of this “empty” desire to language and textuality, echoing a Derridean formulation of a heterological drive or “force” of “disappropriation” (The Postcard 352) that cannot be defined (as self-identical or present to itself) and that therefore manifests itself in an always interpretive textual mode. See Derrida’s analysis of Beyond the Pleasure Principle in “To Speculate–on ‘Freud’” in The Postcard.

     

    17. Deleuze’s reading of Freud in Difference and Repetition and Masochism focuses on the nature of the death instinct. For Deleuze, “Death does not appear in the objective model of an indifferent matter to which the living would ‘return’; it is present in the living in the form of a subjective and differential experience endowed with its prototype. It is not a material state; on the contrary, having renounced all matter, it corresponds to a pure form: the empty form of time” (Difference and Repetition 113). This death instinct is also linked by Deleuze to the desexualized energy discussed in footnote 15.

     

    18. See Peter Euben’s analysis of The Crying of Lot 49 in The Tragedy of Political Theory for an example of the recuperative reading I have in mind. Euben compares Oedipa’s story to Oedipus’s “search for meaning and identity” (284) and claims for her a power of mediation between opposites (male and female, difference and sameness, low and high cultures, “exile” and “incest”) which signify the two limit-cases between which a political identity and community can be founded. She functions as a kind of Hermes-like messenger and so as a figure for analogy itself, for the linking or structural principle of an alternative social and political system symbolized by the Tristero. But for Oedipa to be the “founding mother who can save America” (303), for her to be the linchpin of an alternative social, political, sexual and psychological structure not undone by the simulacra of contemporary society, she must be “real,” just as the Tristero and the WASTEful system it signifies must be a “genuine society of communicants in which real information is exchanged and real diversity sustained” (303). That is, the kind of alternative system Euben has in mind cannot tolerate the ambivalence that nonetheless marks the novel throughout and expresses its economy of waste (which is precisely suspended between the real and the unreal, between fact and fiction, between presence and spectrality). As a result, the only way he can locate political agency in the text is by negating the very implicated structure I have been attempting to analyze here–and therefore cancelling, in the name of a political freedom, the very possibility of freedom held out by the novel.

    Works Cited

     

    • Bataille, Georges. The Accursed Share: Volume 1. Trans. R. Hurley. New York: Zone Books, 1988.
    • Darwin, Charles. The Structure and Distribution of Coral Reefs. New York: D. Appleton and Company, 1889.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Difference and Repetition. Trans. P. Patton. New York: Columbia UP, 1994.
    • Deleuze, G. and F. Guattari. Anti-Oedipus. Trans. R. Hurley, M. Seem, H. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • —. A Thousand Plateaus. Trans. B. Massumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • Derrida, Jacques. The Postcard. Trans. A. Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1987.
    • —. The Specters of Marx. Trans. P. Kamuf. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Euben, Peter. The Tragedy of Political Theory. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1990.
    • Kaplan, Janet. Unexpected Journeys: the Art and Life of Remedios Varo. New York: Abbeville Press, 1988.
    • Marx, Karl. “Alienated Labor.” The Portable Marx. Ed. E. Kamenka. New York: Penguin, 1983.
    • Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Experience of Freedom. Trans. Bridget McDonald. Stanford UP: Stanford, 1993.
    • Pynchon, Thomas. The Crying of Lot 49. New York: Perennial Fiction, 1966.
    • —. Gravity’s Rainbow. New York: Penguin Books, 1973.

     

  • Sylvia Plath, Emmanuel Levinas, and the Aesthetics of Pathos

    Scott DeShong

    Department of English
    Quinebaug Valley Community-Technical College
    spdes@conncoll.edu

     

    In the following essay, I will read certain poems by Sylvia Plath to demonstrate a way of reading that derives from the ethics of Emmanuel Levinas. According to Levinas, ethics requires one to face others in such a way that the incommensurable weight of the other’s lived existence is primary: the affective dimension of the other is primary to discernible contours or articulable characteristics of the other. This basic move–to apprehension prior to comprehension of the other–provides a new basis for philosophy, Levinas says, as ethics becomes first philosophy, prior even to ontology. To put Levinas’s move in the language of literary criticism and rhetoric, pathos (apprehension of feeling) comes prior to ethos (judgment of character) in a reader’s or audience’s apprehension of alterity. With this connection, I imply an aesthetic aspect to Levinas’s ethics, while at the same time I suggest that the way of reading I will demonstrate has an ethical dimension. But I do not claim that my reading involves an approach to the good. Indeed, insofar as it involves ethics, my essay deals with the difficulty of being ethical.

     

    Considering Levinas’s focus on the affect of the other as an aesthetic move provides a way of handling a key problem that various critics have found in his work: a genuine move to the affective ruptures any determination of the move as ethical. To say this involves recognizing ethics as philosophical discourse, metaphysically centered on the objective of what is defined to be good. Levinas is correct in showing that the affect of the other must be the primary emphasis of ethics, for without it ethics remains an abstract totality; it follows that his emphasis on affect deconstructs ethics. But in retaining the word “ethics,” Levinas obscures the deconstruction. Focusing on a desire to approach the other’s affect, he focuses on desire that in philosophical terms would have been called ethical, but a desire that by its own application–by exceeding the metaphysics of the good–invalidates the name of ethics.1

     

    My emphasis on affect can work within aesthetics in a way that Levinas’s emphasis cannot work in ethics, because aesthetics may be decentered as ethics cannot be. By reading in such a way that the affective dimensions of texts disrupt the intellectual activity of judgment in aesthetics, I develop an untotalized, denatured aesthetics. One may argue that like ethics, aesthetics must be centered and develop a sense of the good; the argument would be long, and I will simply indicate that I follow Georges Bataille and others who claim an untotalized aesthetics. As my readings emphasize a desire to face the affect of the other, they emphasize that desire which Levinas shows to be mandatory for ethics but which disrupts ethics as such. The desire I emphasize lacks naturalization and totalization, falling outside anthropology as well as philosophy, driving an aesthetics of the feeling of the other which–following literary and rhetorical traditions, albeit loosely–I call the aesthetics of pathos.2 Levinas writes of the “restlessness” of consciousness that is open to the other, thus capturing the insecurity of moving outside philosophy; this restlessness should extend into the instability of determining a name for the act of encountering the other (Otherwise than Being 153-62).

     

    The emphasis on an untotalizing approach to the other’s affect, for Levinas, includes focusing on the singularity of the encounter with the other. Reading provides an appropriate occasion for exploring such an encounter, and what follows in this essay–although it will iterate theoretical concerns of the introduction–is not a philosophical treatise, but a performative work of criticism. The first-person voice of the essay (even in its plural manifestations) is a phenomenon of subjectivity, not a voice of definitive truth. Similarly, the reading does not definitively impute characteristics to Sylvia Plath or to an oeuvre, style, or technique that is attributable to her (although my references to other critics are suggestive in this respect, beginning to knit a fabric of literary-critical conversation).3 Although the following readings say more about aesthetics than ethics, they say more about Levinas’s work than Plath’s, more about reading than either, and more about a specific encounter with particular texts than about reading in general or about a particular type of discourse (the essay focuses mainly on poems, but neither exclusively nor necessarily). With the deconstruction of ethics and philosophical aesthetics foregone, my reading primarily develops a singular exposition of desire and judgment in dialogue, amid an aesthetics whose desired focus is affective alterity.

     

    Imagery as a Locus of Pathos

     

    My attraction to the poetry of Sylvia Plath is based in the feeling I find in reading many of her poems, the kind of access to feeling I achieve. In the poems, I read feeling I cannot name, and which seems masked, although I read feeling I am compelled to recognize. There is substantial feeling in “Apprehensions,” for instance, that I find indissociable from the images in which moments of feeling emerge.4 The persona faces a wall that is, through metamorphosing descriptions, the main locus of feeling in the poem: changing from “this white wall” to “A gray wall now, clawed and bloody” and then “This red wall” which “winces continually,” it becomes finally a “black wall” on which “unidentifiable birds / Swivel their heads and cry” (195-96). There is more here, and indeed less, than an association of images with particular emotions; the words contain, represent, or transmit feelings less than they serve as a dwelling place for them. In considering uncontained feeling in imagery, we may recognize how poetry may fundamentally concern what is felt as living: an apprehension of substantial experience can occur at a level more fundamental than articulation or communication.

     

    When I confront affective material in “Apprehensions,” I do not find myself engaging with a persona who contains emotions or whose feelings I can accurately articulate in terms of the persona’s situation, thoughts, or actions (although it is possible to make conjectures about such matters). Although I am little tempted to construe details as integrated moments of a psychology, I find palpable the feelings per se. Feelings appear as substantial moments, which as such do not automatically integrate into personality or subjectivity. I do attribute feeling to a voice, which is how I mark the feeling’s otherness: the notion of the voice mediates my apprehension of feeling, raising a disjunction that marks what is not my own feeling. Yet the voice’s otherness does not in itself bring a person present, seeming rather to dwell prior to any notion of a consistent humanity. I do not obtain a sense of naturalized humanity when confronted in such a way by the affective dimensions of a voice, while I may recognize something undeniably living and compelling in the voice’s feelings, particularly in the suffering to which the voice seems subject. Through the recognition of its suffering, a voice’s feeling can register for a reader as affective substance.

     

    What mainly attracts me to Plath’s voices is their pathos; what makes her voices compelling is their apprehensible capacity for suffering. This would appear to be an ethical compulsion, involving attention that is commonly considered an essential component of ethics. This point can help explain a reader’s attraction to the voice of Plath’s “Morning Song,” the voice of a disaffected mother for whom her newborn is “like a fat gold watch,” opaque and inhuman. This is a mother for whom the baby’s mouth, “clean as a cat’s,” in the unfolding of the imagery opens and transforms into the “window square” that “Whitens and swallows its dull stars”: the baby’s organ of nourishment and expression turns, for the mother, into an empty, unsympathetic eternity, revealing the blankness of one of an endless series of mornings (156-57). There is pathos in the mother’s voice that evokes solicitude, however counter this pathos may be to an ethos of motherhood that might be normalized as productive and healthy.5 Yet the feeling in the voice is largely opaque, too much so for me to say I can share it. What predominates is the inescapability of the voice’s suffering.

     

    I focus here on the moment of affect’s compulsion, on an aesthetic moment in which affect may be for a reader a substantiality that is excessive of subjectivity, character, ethos, or any similar idea that entails human consistency or integrity. In the vagueness of what we perceive to be an imagistic moment that yet feels substantial–in the incomprehensibility of something tangible–we may recognize an unmanageable excess that convinces us that another’s feeling is real. As Levinas details in the first section of Totality and Infinity, we apprehend moments of affect before comprehension. Levinas’s thought engages us to dwell on the affect as such: as the affect stands out, not drawn into determinate relations that reduce it. Thus, we may apprehend what Levinas refers to as the “infinity” of feeling, which I see as an excess that disrupts the idea of the human as a natural totality. A glimpse of infinite affect in imagery may make that imagery our dwelling place with concrete feeling. Dwelling so with what we recognize as another life, we take the other’s existence even prior to understanding what it is. Levinas thus brackets the trappings of subjectivity and intersubjective communication in a phenomenological reduction upon the affective existence of the other. By this approach to feeling, there can be no knowing an other without dwelling with the other on the terms of the other’s unreduced affect; anything like knowing remains something beyond epistemology, something more tactile.

     

    In Plath’s voices, there is suffering with which I must dwell or which I must dismiss, suffering I must apprehend or reject–which I must take, if I take it, with its obscurity. In “Little Fugue,” for example, images of clouds and other opacities gather in a nebulous blankness, a whiteness in which the affect of the persona largely resides amid the events of its life. A pathos emerges in and as the blankness, dwelling there with the “deafness” and “silence” that interrelate in a “fugue” of imagistic feeling, as the blankness overwhelms the colors of the poem. Imagery comes somewhat at the expense of syntax in this fugal playing of feeling into blank space. The blankness may be among other things the absence of the father, of the law or logos, of the object of love, or the self (I present this poem unbroken, as much as possible to avoid mediating the experience of it):

     

    The yew's black fingers wag;
    Cold clouds go over.
    So the deaf and dumb
    Signal the blind, and are ignored.
    
    I like black statements.
    The featurelessness of that cloud, now!
    White as an eye all over!
    The eye of the blind pianist
    
    At my table on the ship.
    He felt for his food.
    His fingers had the noses of weasels.
    I couldn't stop looking.
    
    He could hear Beethoven:
    Black yew, white cloud,
    The horrific complications.
    Finger-traps--a tumult of keys.
    
    Empty and silly as plates,
    So the blind smile.
    I envy the big noises,
    The yew hedge of the Grosse Fuge.
    
    Deafness is something else.
    Such a dark funnel, my father!
    I see your voice
    Black and leafy, as in my childhood,
    
    A yew hedge of orders,
    Gothic and barbarous, pure German.
    Dead men cry from it.
    I am guilty of nothing.
    
    The yew my Christ, then.
    Is it not as tortured?
    And you, during the Great War
    In the California delicatessen
    
    Lopping the sausages!
    They color my sleep,
    Red, mottled, like cut necks.
    There was a silence!
    
    Great silence of another order.
    I was seven, I knew nothing.
    The world occurred.
    You had one leg, and a Prussian mind.
    
    Now similar clouds
    Are spreading their vacuous sheets.
    Do you say nothing?
    I am lame in the memory.
    
    I remember a blue eye,
    A briefcase of tangerines.
    This was a man, then!
    Death opened, like a black tree, blackly.
    
    I survive the while,
    Arranging my morning.
    These are my fingers, this my baby.
    The clouds are a marriage dress, of that pallor. 
                                         (187-89)

     

    Similarly, the whiteness of the hospital room in “Tulips” becomes a repository for pathos, a space for the suffering of a voice that recognizes itself as stripped of the trappings of character, that at one level desires to be so stripped. As in “Little Fugue,” the deictics “this” and “these” emphasize anemic features of the flesh and of the world, making blankness what is most directly and centrally indicated:

     

    The tulips are too excitable, it is winter here.
    Look how white everything is, how quiet, how 
       snowed-in.
    I am learning peacefulness, lying by myself quietly
    As the light lies on these white walls, this bed, 
       these hands.
    I am nobody; I have nothing to do with explosions.
    I have given my name and my day-clothes up to the   
       nurses
    And my history to the anesthetist and my body to   
       surgeons.
    
    They have propped my head between the pillow and 
       the sheet-cuff
    Like an eye between two white lids that will not 
       shut.
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
    
    I didn't want any flowers, I only wanted
    To lie with my hands turned up and be utterly empty.
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
    
    The tulips are too red in the first place, they 
       hurt me.
    Even through the gift paper I could hear them 
       breathe
    Lightly, through their white swaddlings, like an 
       awful baby.
    Their redness talks to my wound, it corresponds.
    . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
    
    Nobody watched me before, now I am watched.
    The tulips turn to me, and the window behind me
    Where once a day the light slowly widens and 
       slowly thins,
    And I see myself, flat, ridiculous, a cut-paper 
       shadow
    Between the eye of the sun and the eyes of the 
       tulips,
    And I have no face, I have wanted to efface myself.
                                              (160-61)

     

    An opaque pathos persists in the whiteness of “Tulips,” in contrast to the encroaching redness of a gift of red flowers, which is an additional otherness and also a new locus of pathos (marking an affective shift as occurs in the images of the wall in “Apprehensions”), a new locus that struggles with the voice’s preference to suffer only the vacuous pathos of the whiteness.6 Later in “Tulips,” the air “snags and eddies round” the flowers. Read as the voice’s feeling–or perhaps as self, or as language or meaning that would bring the presence of character–the air is a liquid that is equivalent to absence in terms of any possibility of coherence or centrality: the whiteness synesthetically merges with the tactile indeterminacy of air.

     

    I find the whiteness in these poems and others among the most abject and most terrifying imagery in Plath’s writing.7 The whiteness is a palpable presence of absence, so I sense in it the force of absence, including the absence of cause, effect, and correlations of psychological elements. But as it marks the absence of determinations, it is also whiteness as a trace of other whiteness elsewhere. It is not only aesthetic but anesthetic, and the lack in it seems never quite chosen; if the poem articulates a death-wish, it seems death suffered to take place, although without determinable reasons: there is not mere annihilation but suffered annihilation. It is indeed the obscurity of this imagery of whiteness that makes the voice’s vulnerability concrete. Through the whiteness I touch the suffered existence of the voice, and thereby I know what I can of the vulnerability of that existence.

     

    Such vacuous pathos in images of whiteness is pathos not only nearer to me than the character or subjectivity of the other, but nearer than the question of being, the question of the nature of the other.8 It is nearer, indeed, than even the famous ontological question of Heidegger: “The other person is closer to me than is knowledge or ontology,” says Charles William Reed in summarizing Levinas’s critique of Heidegger (80). Levinas says Heidegger’s radical question still assumes too much concerning living existence, or in other words accounts for too much, by focusing on being and putting the question in such a way that being itself remains at the center of the question, such that we would expect nothing to exceed being (Totality and Infinity 42-48). For Levinas, as we face what we recognize as the substance of otherness, we move to a moment prior to the question of what is (and prior to the question of this question), moving to the moment that we are affected. Only in recognition of the radical alterity of living otherness, Levinas says, might we try to get beyond the tyranny of ontology, beyond the centripetal force that will obtain for any thinking that fails to move anterior to ontology. Thus we move prior to philosophy–and indeed ethics–in an aesthetics that seeks the infinite excess of alterity, that seeks the proximate, palpable excess of otherness through imagery.

     

    Alterity, Infinity, and Abjection in Pathos

     

    I have discussed how reading the pathos of the other leads us toward an infinity of affect; such reading leads into an infinity of complexity in the excess that is affect. We can follow Plath’s poems into such complexity. Most notably, amid the unreduced affective dimensions of her work, voices often reveal their own others, sometimes as alterity internal to themselves. The imagery of the wall in “Apprehensions,” simultaneously with the internal shifts that yield dimensions of feeling (as discussed above), depicts the wall in its more literal role of incarcerating the persona, as the wall is “clawed and bloody,” an insurmountable otherness for the voice. And the image of the wall becomes an explicit psychological figure, as the voice presents the image of the bloody wall and asks, “Is there no way out of the mind?” (195). Thus the alterity and multiple dimensions of the wall emerge as part of the “mind” the voice appears to inhabit, implicating the externality of the wall with the interior of the voice. The imagery suggests a splitting by which alterity begins to proliferate among figural and imagistic renderings of the voice’s feeling.

     

    As a further example, alterity emerges in the voice’s depiction of its feelings in “The Great Carbuncle.” The poem reflects an experience shared by a group of people walking at night. Describing a landscape revealed by “light neither of dawn / Nor nightfall,” light “Other than noon, than moon, stars,” the persona speaks of altered vision, a sort of dream-vision in which familiar details, such as “The once-known way,” become “Wholly other, and ourselves / Estranged, changed.” The persona’s first-person plurality indicates, first, a unity in the ethereal altered light. The result of this early imagery is exhilaration, as the voice observes

     

                  ...our hands, faces
    Lucent as porcelain, the earth's
    Claim and weight gone out of them.

     

    But upon reaching a destination–as “nearing means distancing”–the “Light withdraws” and “the body weighs like stone” (72-73). The pathos of the poem emerges at the end as a suffering of the weight of the body’s alterity, a weight against the feel of the vision. Indeed, the ethereal vision has an imagistic palpability, and both the opposing moments of “light” and “stone” transcend any restriction into determinate contours of human being. That is, while both moments are irreducibly substantial in the poem, both are transcendent for the voice, as for each other. The irreducibility of these alterities thwarts any sublimation that would bear them toward totality. These moments of transcendence remain incommensurate with each other and, as complex moments felt in and by the voice, they emphasize the incommensurability of the affectively revealed existence of the persona.

     

    To return to “Apprehensions,” images of alterity internal to affect emerge in the “Cold blanks” that “approach us.” The blanks suggest a multiplication of the apprehensiveness embodied in the wall, an unending multiplication as “They move in a hurry” (196). The proliferation of and in alterity occurs in various moments of repetition and recursivity in Plath’s imagery. An example is the image in “Little Fugue” of the cloud “White as an eye all over!”–white as the eye of the blind pianist (187). The white, imagistic locus of pathos becomes the feeling of the other in the simile, the feeling of the blind eye that is other, the tactility of which (itself multiple: the other’s tactile mode of apprehending as well as the perceiver’s tactile apprehension of the other) is palpable in the image of the non-transparent and non-seeing organ. It is the absence of vision that emphasizes the tactility, the multiple bareness of the eye that suffers a lack of vision. In this image, I feel the living eye more in the absence of vision than I would in a depiction of vision’s presence. This tactility of the eye’s suffering depends on my awareness of vision’s recursive trace, as I glimpse a trace that makes present the pathos of its own lack.

     

    There is further recursivity in the punning of “I” and “eye” in “Little Fugue,” by which the complexity of the fleshy imagery of the eye crosses into the domain of the pronoun, inscribing its substantial alterity within the more abstract problematic of the subject’s attempted self-establishment through its own, figural vision. A correlative pun concerns the other that the persona apostrophizes: “you” becomes the black yew tree. As “you” is the voice’s “father,” his voice is visible, “Black and leafy,… A yew hedge of orders” standing against the whiteness of the persona’s pathos. Yet the black/white contrast itself is so vague, dark, and tangled–in the literal images, and by suggestions of sleep, silence, and memory–that the supposed opposites interpenetrate (187-89).9 The “you” in “Little Fugue” is similar to the absent loved/hated other of “Daddy,” an other apostrophized and incantatorily referred to as “you” and associated with images of blackness (222-24). As the voices of both “Daddy” and “Little Fugue” engage the absent presence of the other they suffer under, they suffer their uncertain incorporation of the other. At a physiological level, the voiced “you” merges with the persona as it gains palpability when its sound tends to draw the open mouth into a curved space, a fleshed absence at the heart of the poems’ sounds–particularly in “Daddy,” with the help of the German du and other assonant syllables. The voices of both poems suffer a transcending absence that becomes partially absorbed by the voice, emerging in the curved mouth: in speaking flesh, my own voice apprehends these others as recursive parts of itself.10

     

    Some of Plath’s images of flesh yield affect that similarly emerges as recursive trace. When imagery presents flesh as mundane or denatured, there can persist a recursivity in the absent tactility that is like the pathetic trace of absent vision in the all-white eye. Plath’s poems contain a number of such instances of ostensibly inert flesh. Many of the images relate to the topic of birth, suggesting subtensive dimensions of affect that exceed naturalized maternal intimacy, as noted above in the description of the baby in “Morning Song.” For the second voice in “Three Women”–the most bitter of three would-be mothers, the one who has miscarried–affect lingers as an absence in her own opaque flesh: “I am bled white as wax, I have no attachments. / I am flat and virginal” (184). Opening affective dimensions in a similar way, through the trace of a touch that is pathetically absent in the presentation of its own lack, the voice of “The Disquieting Muses” develops a sense of the inertia of the flesh it has touched in its own infancy, becoming the baby of “Morning Song”: the voice remarks that its “traveling companions,” who “stand their vigil in gowns of stone,” have “Faces blank as the day I was born” (74-76).

     

    Plath’s Holocaust imagery concerns the issue of denatured tactility. Arguably, such imagery could be exemplary for yielding a sense of infinite pathos through the logic of the recursive trace of touch. But as many critics have discussed, Plath’s use of Holocaust imagery problematically determines and manages the pathos of that imagery. Among various examples of her Holocaust imagery is that of flesh as equipment in “Lady Lazarus,” including the images of “my skin / Bright as a Nazi lampshade” and the “cake of soap” made of ash following cremation, plus references to “Herr Doktor,” for whom the persona comes to “turn and burn” (244-47). Among instances in other poems, there is the apocalyptic imagery of “Mary’s Song”:

     

    The Sunday lamb cracks in its fat.
    The fat
    Sacrifices its opacity....
    
    A window, holy gold.
    The fire makes it precious,
    The same fire
    
    Melting the tallow heretics,
    Ousting the Jews.
    Their thick palls float
    
    Over the cicatrix of Poland, burnt-out
    Germany.
    They do not die.
    
    Gray birds obsess my heart,
    Mouth-ash, ash of eye.
    They settle.  On the high
    
    Precipice
    That emptied one man into space
    The ovens glowed like heavens, incandescent.
    
    It is a heart,
    This holocaust I walk in,
    O golden child the world will kill and eat. (257)

     

    The affect in such Holocaust imagery could lie in the trace of touch I read in the body’s reduction in death, like the pathos of vision as trace in the all-white eye. In “Mary’s Song,” the image of the body as “tallow”–in the manufacture of wax or soap–could lead toward the excess of pathos through the trace of life of what is now flat and mundane substance. But the imagery of denatured flesh in these poems fails to approach the infinity of affect insofar as the poems appropriate their imagery for the ethos of the voice. The pathos in imagery of flesh made ash and equipment recedes as the imagery helps articulate an ethos that establishes the voice’s character.11

     

    Adapting the pathos of its Holocaust images, “Lady Lazarus” stages a phoenix-like resurrection for the persona, in a quest for what Steven Gould Axelrod calls “self-legitimation” (159-61). Similarly, “Mary’s Song” sublimates the pathos of its historical images for the sake of the character of its voice. The poem neglects the abject pathos of the flesh in favor of a relatively simple affective presence, a moment of sublime, clarifying pathos, figurally that of the mother of god or of sacrifice (quite in contrast to the pathos of the mother in “Morning Song”). With its contemplation of the “incandescence” of the scene, from a level above the “Precipice” of civilization (where space exploration and the Holocaust are co-implicated, with “The same fire” as sacrifice), “Mary’s Song” subsumes the images’ pathetic trace of touch in a manipulation of pathos that functions to establish the power of the persona’s ethos. James E. Young notes that this use of Holocaust imagery submits the images to typology, in Aristotelian fashion, wherein an emphasis on categories of use takes over the substance of affect and overpowers the more complex dimensions of the discourse of suffering (139-40).12 Indeed, as ethos ascends in such an aesthetic operation, it tends to govern a reader’s relationship to a characterized voice and draw the pathos of the images toward catharsis. Insofar as Plath succeeds in reducing the excessiveness of affect in the images by submitting them to ethos, she reiterates the abuse of affect that the historical images reflect. Her management of feeling works to disengage the weight of otherness and to obliterate the palpable sense of vulnerability that the images of the Holocaust yield.

     

    Yet, in the aesthetics of concrete pain and vulnerability that I have been developing, I must attend to the otherness in the images that persists in, and is recognizable primarily through the desperation of, Plath’s own alterity to the material she takes from history. Her voices remain rich with affect that I need to address per se, beyond the ways she tries to subsume, erase, or sublimate the excess and alterity of pathos. Even as they appear managed in a pathos tethered to character, Plath’s references to the Holocaust resonate at another level of incommensurate, imagistic rendering of affect. The challenge here is to dwell with the affect of another otherness, also closer to me than my comprehension of ethos, character, or subjectivity. That is, the otherness of Plath’s Holocaust imagery involves various moments of alterity I must take care not to manage with an ontological aesthetics of ethos, so that I do not abuse the suffering of the other, both the suffering Plath has aesthetically manipulated and the suffering that obtains for Plath herself (which she herself manipulates). It is key for an aesthetics of pathos that we seek in textuality the proliferation of moments of affective alterity, so that instead of subsuming pathos under any ethos, we allow pathos to retain its always excessive pressure on any moment of ethos and thereby keep us dwelling, ever incompletely, on substantial feeling. Indeed, suffering in Plath’s poems usually leads only to more suffering, without catharsis–as Jon Rosenblatt notes (163)–without bringing the infinite alterity of substantial suffering under control. Her imagery usually lends itself to reading that finds affect so complex and weighty it averts any resolution, so that irresolvable affect can persist–as it does for Levinas–prior to being.

     

    Authorial Ethos and the Pathos of Voice

     

    Concerning the poems of Plath, an aesthetics of pathos might be liable to take the name of an aesthetics of the abject.13 Indeed, her imagery opens onto feeling in a way that challenges me to find an aesthetics that is not at some level manipulative. That is, there may be slim odds in favor of my avoiding the trap of an ontological aesthetics at some level when reading her poetry. Plath’s public comments could take me off the track of an aesthetics of abjection and indeed away from the aesthetics of pathos. In a BBC interview, she tries to bring the feeling of her poems under the management of ethos, where she claims to be:

     

    I think my poems come immediately out of the sensuous and emotional experiences I have, but I must say I cannot sympathize with these "cries from the heart" that are informed by nothing except, you know, a needle or knife, or whatever it is. I believe that one should be able to control and manipulate experiences, even the most terrifying, like madness, being tortured, this sort of experience; and one should be able to manipulate these experiences with an informed and intelligent mind.

     

    By such remarks, I can see how she favors an aesthetic manipulation of imagery that would involve a sublimating aesthetics and a sublimating ethics, even as she continues by noting that she means to turn felt experience to “larger” issues:

     

    I think that personal experience is very important, but certainly it shouldn't be a kind of shut box, and sort of mirror-looking, narcissistic experience. I believe it should be relevant, and relevant to the larger things, the bigger things, such as Hiroshima and Dachau and so on.14

     

    Reading this excerpt for its pathos takes me quickly beyond the surface of Plath’s claim for a “larger” aesthetic and ethical emphasis. Various affective tensions emerge in the passage: for example, between the callousness of manipulating “these experiences with an informed and intelligent mind”–experiences such as “being tortured”–and the more heated, perhaps defensive tone of her “I cannot sympathize.” Plath indicates a suffering beneath the surface of her own ethos particularly in her trivialization of “needle or the knife,” examples of what may inform what she calls “cries from the heart”: her “you know” and “whatever it is” are not only belittling but flippant, revealing an acting out in the ethos, an excess of the establishment of ethos that thus does not help stabilize ethos but rather exposes affect that disrupts the attempted constitution of ethos. In short, rather than presenting ethos, control, or agency, the passage tends to reveal vulnerability and powerlessness. It is in Plath’s taking the position of the manipulative aesthete that she most presents victimhood, albeit a victimhood for which there is no clear sense of any perpetrator. In this, the passage is similar to “Daddy,” with its postulated perpetrator, the poem revealing its voice’s desperation to locate some language, imagery, or agency by which to articulate a logic of pathos, by which in turn to claim she is “through” with suffering (224). The result is the same for the passage as for “Daddy,” as many readers of the poem have found: the claim of resolution is weak beside the reading that the voice dwells in pathos it cannot escape.

     

    Thus despite Plath’s apparent effort to consolidate ethos, feeling in her poems tends to emerge disruptively in the affective dimensions of the image, as affect retains its alterity to reading and exceeds attempts to determine articulations of ethos or character. In her poems, I find no character to comprehend, but rather an inassimilable substance of affect that always exceeds contours of personality. Indeed, I cannot exactly achieve compassion with Plath’s voices, because I lack specific articulations of their affect–articulations that would organize feeling in comprehensible structures of character: her voices do not provide me with objective determinations of feeling, so they ultimately fail to establish communication or even emotions I can share. Thus I cannot have sympathy, properly, but empathy: I cannot achieve a synthesis of feelings whose parameters can be determined. I dwell with the problematics of empathy, wherein the excess of alterity merges with my own feeling, and determinate ethical motivations and goals do not materialize.

     

    The indeterminacy of empathy is at the heart of the aesthetic problematics of Levinasian ethics, where ethos does not rule over pathos, but rather lives implicated with the force of pathos. In the aesthetic experience of reading, we may meet the tactile challenge to dwell with the unmitigated affect of the other, to stay with what Levinas describes as the infinite alterity of affect. This engagement of poetry and philosophy prompts the realization that the compulsion to meet such a challenge is as close as we can come to a motive for ethics–a motive, it seems, that can only be articulated without the sense of hope or even goodness with which the name of ethics is habitually invoked.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See John D. Caputo, Against Ethics (1-19), Simon Critchley, The Ethics of Deconstruction, and Jacques Derrida, “Violence and Metaphysics.”

     

    2. Although some blurring between the meanings of “pathos” and “affect” may be unavoidable and even appropriate for my topic, the distinction between the terms remains important. “Affect” usually refers to felt material that is not definable or representable, that resists typology or systemization (see Campbell or Laplanche and Pontalis). So it is the more appropriate term for what Levinas emphasizes as substantial feeling, although a claim to practice an “aesthetics of affect” would imply that one could directly get at the substantiality. To approach pathos instead–which, as conceived in aesthetics, is more patent and determinate than affect–is to approach the problem of seeking affect: a problem of seeking substantial feeling amid the inevitable making and suppression of judgments and naturalizations that the more determinate term tends to entail. An aesthetics of pathos, then, for which affect remains the desired emphasis, avoids making the extravagant promise of an “aesthetics of affect.”

     

    3. Along with disrupting any ethical totalization of reading, my approach to aesthetics is meant to disrupt totalizing tendencies that may emerge in historicism, insofar as historicization may reify anthropological categories and, indeed, may depend on naturalizations inherited from a dependence on philosophical ethics. Following Levinas, I seek to maintain a “restlessness” regarding the privileging of categories and regarding the motives and goals of any desire toward otherness.

     

    4. There is not much published commentary on “Apprehensions.” Mary Lynn Broe draws connections between the poem and the emotional focus of others in the same collection (Winter Trees) and some of Plath’s later poetry (128-29).

     

    5. A feminist reading emphasizing affect would focus on the mother’s postpartum feeling in order to put in question the ethos by which the mother would be adversely judged.

     

    6. Also, the flowers may represent the mouth, the vulva, and explicitly the “wound,” in any case creating resonance between a pair of edges or lips and the pair of “eyelids” or pillows cradling the dulled head of the persona, an eye “that will not shut,” similar to the “eyes” of the tulips and the sun. The organ of vision is tactile, while the sense of effacement and incoherence persists: disorganized palpability replaces psychic or visual organization. See also my remarks below on the eye in “Little Fugue” and the mouth in “Little Fugue” and “Daddy.”

     

    7. Such an effect occurs in many of the more than two hundred references to whiteness in The Collected Poems (Matovich s.v. “white” ff). For comparison of color imagery in Plath–perhaps suggesting the importance of contrasts in her work–according to Matovich, “black” or a version thereof appears about 190 times in The Collected Poems, “red,” “green,” and “blue” each a little over a hundred, “yellow,” “gray” (or “grey”), and “orange” about 30 each, and “violet” and “purple” combined about fifteen.

     

    8. In Sylvia Plath: Poetry and Existence, David Holbrook develops in psychoanalytic and existentialist terms the point that Plath’s work functions at a level prior to being: he notes that “being has not come first to Sylvia Plath” (156).

     

    9. Jacqueline Rose notes a corresponding moment of recursivity involving images of black and white in Plath’s novel: “On the back of the first draft [of ‘Little Fugue’] is the passage from The Bell Jar in which Esther Greenwood is almost raped. The typescript has this line–‘In that light, the blood looked black’–crossed out and replaced with this one written by hand: ‘Blackness, like ink, spread over the white handkerchief.’ Underneath the poem to the father, a violence of writing–the poem’s writing (the ink on the page), but equally his own” (231).

     

    10. Plath’s poems alluding to her father have often been read as elegies. Jahan Ramazani maintains that these poems belong to a tradition of the emotionally ambivalent elegy, wherein anger and other emotions challenge the pathos that is proper to a tradition of the more refined elegy; the ambivalent elegy shows the truly “irresolvable” nature of “bereavement” (1143-44). The refined tradition manages pathos, whereas the emotional material emphasized in the ambivalent tradition resembles the unregulated material that I, drawing upon Levinas, discuss as infinite affect.

     

    11. My uses of “ethos” and “character” tend to distinguish between the terms by emphasizing “character” as the delineation of a specific, subjective voice and freighting “ethos” with the sense of “character” that emphasizes a subject’s or voice’s cultural or moral power. Each term is of course complex, as is their relationship, which involves the substitution of “character” for the Greek ethos in English translations since the Renaissance of relevant works such as Aristotle’s Poetics. The ancient meaning of ethos involves “use,” “habit,” or “custom.” Besides the Oxford English Dictionary, see Kittel and Friedrich, Theological Dictionary of the New Testament (2:372-73).

     

    12. Young notes that the resulting typology might serve an articulation of ethos for the Holocaust, beyond the ethos that emerges for the personae of Plath’s poems. But the significant question for him is whether the poems are indeed “about the Holocaust,” and he decides that essentially they are not (133). Since Plath wrote the poems when the Eichmann trial had brought the Holocaust to public awareness in greater detail than ever before, Young considers how her use of the images represents her way of dealing with the historical Holocaust; he speculates about the extent to which such imagery produced for her a trauma with which she was forced to deal and which led to an intensification of her personal suffering. He concludes his essay, “Better abused memory in this case, which might then be critically qualified, than no memory at all” (146).

     

    13. See Rose for a discussion of Plath as a “writer of abjection” (37). On the theory of abjection and differences between the abject and the sublime, see Julia Kristeva, Powers of Horror: An Essay on Abjection. Insofar as the issue of form is significant for aesthetic sublimation, we may consider how Plath fails to control formally the affective material of her works; on this, see Mutlu Konuk Blasing, American Poetry: The Rhetoric of Its Forms (55-56) and Hugh Kenner, “Sincerity Kills.”

     

    14. This is my own transcription of the recorded interview from The Poet Speaks.

    Works Cited

     

    • Axelrod, Steven Gould. Sylvia Plath: The Wound and the Cure of Words. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1990.
    • Blasing, Mutlu Konuk. American Poetry: The Rhetoric of Its Forms. New Haven: Yale UP, 1987.
    • Broe, Mary Lynn. Protean Poetic: The Poetry of Sylvia Plath. Columbia: U of Missouri P, 1980.
    • Campbell, Robert Jean. Psychiatric Dictionary. 5th ed. New York: Oxford UP, 1981.
    • Caputo, John D. Against Ethics: Contributions to a Poetics of Obligation with Constant Reference to Deconstruction. Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1993.
    • Critchley, Simon. The Ethics of Deconstruction: Derrida and Levinas. Oxford: Blackwell, 1992.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Violence and Metaphysics: An Essay on the Thought of Emmanuel Levinas.” Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1978. 79-153.
    • Holbrook, David. Sylvia Plath: Poetry and Existence. N.p.: Humanities 1979.
    • Kenner, Hugh. “Sincerity Kills.” Sylvia Plath: New Views on the Poetry. Ed. Gary Lane. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins UP, 1979. 33-44.
    • Kittel, Gerhard and Gerhard Friedrich, eds. Theological Dictionary of the New Testament. Trans. Geoffrey W. Bromiley. 10 vols. Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 1964.
    • Kristeva, Julia. Powers of Horror: An Essay on Abjection. Trans. Leon S. Roudiez. New York: Columbia UP, 1982.
    • Laplanche, J[ean]. and J.-B. Pontalis. The Language of Psycho-Analysis. Trans. Donald Nicholson-Smith. New York: Norton, 1973.
    • Levinas, Emmanuel. Otherwise than Being: Or, Beyond Essence. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. The Hague: Nijhoff, 1981.
    • —. Totality and Infinity: An Essay in Exteriority. Trans. Alphonso Lingis. Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1969.
    • Matovich, Richard M. A Concordance to the Collected Poems of Sylvia Plath. New York: Garland, 1986.
    • Plath, Sylvia. The Collected Poems. Ed. Ted Hughes. New York: Perennial-Harper, 1981.
    • —. Interview. The Poet Speaks. Ed. Peter Orr. Argo, RG455, 1965. Record Five.
    • Ramazani, Jahan. “‘Daddy, I Have Had to Kill You’: Plath, Rage, and the Modern Elegy.” PMLA 108.5 (Oct. 1993): 1142-56.
    • Reed, Charles William. “Levinas’ Question.” Face to Face with Levinas. Ed. Richard A. Cohen. Albany: SUNY P, 1986. 73-82.
    • Rose, Jacqueline. The Haunting of Sylvia Plath. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1992.
    • Rosenblatt, Jon. Sylvia Plath: The Poetry of Initiation. Chapel Hill: U of North Carolina P, 1979.
    • Young, James E. “‘I may be a bit of a Jew”: The Holocaust Confessions of Sylvia Plath.” Philological Quarterly 66.1 (1987): 127-47.

     

  • On the Uses and Abuses of Literature for Life: Gilles Deleuze and the Literary Clinic

    Gregg Lambert

    Department of English and Textual Studies
    Syracuse University
    glambert@syr.edu

     

    One day, perhaps, there will no longer be any such thing as Art, only Medicine.

     

    –Le Clézio

     

    Introduction to the Literary Clinic

     

    The title of this essay recalls an earlier question from Nietszche’s famous “On the Uses and Abuses of History for Life,” which I would like to take up in asking what are the uses and abuses of literature for life and, recalling Nietzche’s guiding question, what kind of health it may promote for “an individual, a people, a culture” (Nietzsche 63). In the various essays assembled around the “problem of writing” in his final work, Critique et Clinique, Gilles Deleuze responds to this question by outlining some of the components of a clinical as well as a critical use of literature, which we might summarize along the following lines. First, certain writers have invented concrete semiotic practices that may prove more effective than psychoanalytic discourse in diagnosing the constellation of mute forces that always accompany life and threaten it from within. Second, as a result of this diagnostic and critical function, certain works of modern literature can be understood to produce a kind of “symptomatology” that may prove to be more effective than political critique in discerning the signs that correspond to the new arrangements of “language, labor, and life” (to cite Foucault’s abbreviated formula for the grand institutions of instinct or habit); third, perhaps most importantly, literature offers a manner of diagramming the potential forms of resistance, or “lines of flight,” which may be virtual to these new arrangements.1

     

    Taken together, these tasks must be understood as creative and even “vitalist” in the sense that Bergson had earlier employed this notion; or as Deleuze writes, “there is a ‘use’ of representation, without which representation would remain lifeless and senseless” (LS 146). The realization of this “use,” however, may require that we approach the question of writing from a point outside the critical representation this question receives in the institutions of literary study today. In fact, I would like to suggest that a clinical usage may radically alter the conditions of the practice of literature and emerge as a kind of Deleuzian “war machine” against how the uses of literature have been determined by the dominance of institutional criticism in the modern period. Is it simply a question of “style,” in other words, that Deleuze’s own commentaries on writers seem to pay no attention or even tribute to the field of criticism, but rather approach always from a point external to the historical representation of an author or given body of work? Moreover, could we imagine something like a “Deleuzian school of literary theory,” understood as one approach among others in a pluralism of critical styles and methodologies, preserving the relative stability of the field of literary objects and the integrity of “a set of individuals who are recognized and identify themselves practitioners of the discipline” (Godzich 275) of literature?2

     

    For anyone familiar with Deleuze’s writings, and especially those works written in collaboration with Guattari, the response to the above questions might seem an obvious “no”; however, in the academy today where the principle of “marketing” is fast becoming an efficient cause determining the uses of theory, we must always hold out the possibility that anything can be perverted against its own nature. Yet, rather than speculating on the fortunate and unfortunate actualities that might flow from the proclamation, “one day this century will be known as Deleuzian” (Foucault), in what follows I offer a more preliminary discussion of some of the principles we might draw from Deleuze’s own manner of treating literary expression and, in particular, the questions and problems of writing that have been associated with the works by the modern writers who occupy a central role in his own writings, as well as in the works written with Guattari. This discussion represents my own attempt to come to terms with what might be formulated as the characteristic marks of what Deleuze had early on proposed as a generalized “literary clinic.” I hope to provoke creative dialogue about the very conditions that would make a Deleuzian pragmatics distinct in the belief that such a dialogue should occur at this critical juncture as Deleuze’s writings are being increasingly taken up by institutions of literary and cultural studies today.3

     

    The Critical and The Clinical

     

    Foucault’s famous statement in “What is an Author?” that we have passed through the age of the “great writer” and the “universal intellectual” has too often been understood to mean that we can now simply reject the notion of literature itself. Indeed this statement has been generally understood to vindicate the “specialist” or the academic subject of knowledge, who were the objects of an even more severe attack by Foucault as exemplars of merely “bad literature.” On the contrary, Foucault’s statement concerns a change in the conditions of discourse in which the writer function now appears, designating a new arrangement of statements caused by the entrance of a new subject that succeeds what he calls the “Man-Form.” The appearance of the universal intellectual was conditioned by the alliance between literature and the law, as the relationship between universal or general expression and its species or variables. Moreover, the universal man-of-letters was the double of the jurist (e.g., Zola, Dickens) and often appeared speaking the juridical language of being. He was decisive, a moralist. Extending Foucault’s observation to the contemporary period, we can define the subject of modern criticism as a final avatar of the subject who judges, the subject of the statement “I judge”: that is, the subject of certainty whose historical emergence is closely allied to the juridico-legal function of judgment one finds at the basis of what Foucault has called disciplinary societies (a social arrangement which, according to Deleuze, we are now in the process of “quitting”).4

     

    The appearance of the “critic,” in other words, is the result of a historical process that has bound the reflective character of judgment to the civil and juridical functions of modern institution. Deleuze and Guattari write that “in so-called modern philosophy, and in the so-called modern or rational State, everything revolves around the legislator and the subject” (TP 376). This is no less true for the subject of literature, for which we have the personages of the critic and his or her double, the “theorist,” both of whom have emerged today as “the only true legislators” of literature and culture. Therefore, the modern critic occupies an intermediary position between, on the one hand, the apparatus of the state and its systems of majority (the school, the press, or modern media) and, on the other, the fragmented (or molecular) body of collective enunciation that circulates at the base of every socius. Because of this relationship, we might discern that the range of issues and problems (pragma) that have frequented literary criticism for the past several decades, and even before, are codeterminous with changes and fluctuations that have taken place in mediums of civil and juridical identity where conflicting moralities and sovereign discursive agents clash over the cultural reproduction of the institutions of “civil morality”: problems of national canon formation, the status of minority expression in a dominant cultural sphere, the conflicts over the ideological mechanisms of “taste” in dominant aesthetic judgments. However, despite their efforts to liberate themselves from this function, modern critics have become so entangled in the disciplinary apparatus that determines their official function in schools and the public press that they find it difficult, if not impossible, to “deterritorialize” their statements from the mechanisms of power and systems of majority they serve.

     

    In Kafka: Toward a Minor Literature, Deleuze and Guattari note the critic’s predisposition, even within minority struggles, “to reterritorialize, to redo the photos, to remake power and law, to also remake a ‘great literature’” (K 86). To illustrate this problematic alliance between modern criticism and the disciplinary organization of social strata, we might briefly refer to the comparison made in A Thousand Plateaus, “Treatise on Nomadology–The War Machine” between the games of chess and Go. Following this analogy, criticism can be likened to the game of chess; that is, it can be understood as a “striated space,” or a discursive grid made up of “positions” and “theories” (Marxism, deconstruction, feminism, new historicism, post-colonial theory, queer theory, cultural studies) whose subjects are coded, each bearing intrinsic properties “from which their movements, situations, and confrontations derive” (TP 352). A “marxist” confronts a “deconstructionist”; a “feminist” becomes a “post-colonial critic”; a “third-world post-colonial theorist” check-mates a “white first-world feminist.” As in chess, for an emerging theory or school of criticism “it is a question of arranging a closed space… thus of going from one point to another (TP 353) in a manner that closely resembles passing through territories,” even though these territories are composed of theorems, schools, subjects, and authorities. Those who enter the game of theory are constrained by the axiomatic values that determine the intrinsic properties of the position they have selected; each is like a subject of the statement endowed with a relative power, and these relative powers combine in a subject of enunciation”(TP 352).5 This constitutes a form of interiority that is specific to a theoretical movement, or school of critics. It is only the “Queen” (i.e., the Master Theorist) who lawfully combines within herself all possible moves, and thus has the greatest latitude and mobility–that of a ‘Subject au large’–who can surpass the relative powers of the other players, who seems to fly over the entire discursive plane to magically capture the scepter of the King.

     

    The above analogy between the institutionalization of “criticism” and “theory” in the modern period and what Deleuze calls a “State-form” of knowledge is striking and this is not accidental. The analogy confirms that the relations between different theories and the kind of conflict that ensues between particular subjects are inherently conditioned by a disciplinary model of organization that subordinates thought to a model of Truth (Cogitatio Universalis), revealing the underlying “striated” space that conditions their distribution and even orders the modes of actualization and points of conflict between different subjects. For Deleuze, on the other hand, the only means of subtracting thought from its disciplinary organization is to subtract it from its images, since to offer another “image of thought” only amounts to the magical return of the mythical foundation of “the State-form.” The theorist who believes she can leap outside this magical circle by offering a “true” image only ends up becoming the another cog in the machinery of an infinite revolution of disciplinary order. As an antidote to this situation, we might propose what Deleuze and Guattari call “outside thought” according to the analogy of Go, where rather than arranging a closed space and subordinating thought to a model or theorem, it would be a question of “arraying oneself in an open space” and maintaining a form of exteriority that enters in to confront criticism as “a form of interiority we habitually take as a model, or according to which we are in the habit of thinking” (TP 353). Such an “outside thought” must be conceived in terms that are purely strategic:

     

    A thought grappling with exterior forces instead of being gathered up in an interior form, operating by relays instead of forming an image; an event-thought, a haecceity, instead of a subject-thought; a problem-thought instead of an essence-thought or theorem; a thought that appeals to the people instead of taking itself for a government ministry. (TP 378)

     

    For the new subject of knowledge, according to Deleuze and Guattari, the earlier alliance with the Law (“the moral criteria of judgment”) is no longer possible, since the subject of enunciation that underlines juridical language has been “de-ranged” by the entrance of new technologies and bio-physical forces that are taking place on a plane of immanence. In response, according to Deleuze, “the intellectual or writer becomes adept at speaking the language of life, rather than of law” (F 91). Consequently, this new subject attempts to develop the cases of exception and to invent a form of language that allies itself with the forces that arrive from “the outside,” (e.g., madness, sexuality, power, death, etc.), interrupting the notions of good and common sense which belong to the classical language-subject, and exposing the history of violence which founded the Cogitatio Universalis. Contrary to the classical subject of knowledge (savoir), whose conceptual personages are the philosopher (“the Man of the State”), the literary critic (“the prince of the Republic of letters”) and the psychoanalyst (“the model detective of polis”), the new subject corresponds to the personages of the “diagrammatician” (the cartographer or genealogist) and the “symptomatologist” (or diagnostic novelist).

     

    Although the institution of psychoanalysis in the modern period constitutes the dominant representation of the conditions whereby the critical function of knowledge is given a clinical or diagnostic usage, the critique Deleuze and Guattari launch against this representation in Anti-Oedipus (1972) is well known. In A Thousand Plateaus (1980), they write that “[e]ven today, psychoanalysis lays claim to the role of Cogitatio Universalis as the thought of the Law, in a magical return” (TP 376). In Deleuze’s later writings, Foucault himself becomes the “conceptual persona” of the figure who stands for a new arrangement of critical and clinical. Much has already been said of Deleuze’s praise and recognition of Foucault’s later work as nothing less than “diagnostic” novels of the micro-disciplinary regimes of power that have replaced the State-form, regimes whose operations no longer “correspond” to the classical concepts of “truth,” “freedom,” “the good,” etc., that occur in the wake of philosophy and explain the decline of the philosopher’s discourse as the natural expression of the State-form. For Deleuze, the name Foucault designates less the author, or the body of work, than a mode of discourse whose subject no longer corresponds to that of the classical philosopher, but rather to a clinical practitioner who invents a new form of knowledge that corresponds to the problem of how to live a non-fascist life.6

     

    This may help clarify why the relationship between critical and clinical is somewhat complex and not always clear, since the clinical can always be too much of a dominant “method” and may threaten to obscure the critical, and, as I will argue in the case of literature today, the opposite may also be true as well. Here, we might recall an earlier example that Deleuze himself uses to interrogate this relationship between critical and clinical: the example of Sacher-Masoch. First addressing the question of the clinical determination of literary work in his introductory essay to Masoch, Coldness and Cruelty (1967), Deleuze writes that, like the physician, the works of Sade and Masoch can be seen to have constituted a profoundly original clinical tableau by disassociating symptoms that were previously confused and grouping together symptoms that were previously disassociated and unperceived. Sade links the order of reason with the sadistic arrangement of the drives from the position of Law, or absolute right; Masoch links together the status of minorities and women and the position of law arranged through the privileged instrument of the contract–the masochist draws up contracts while the sadist abominates and destroys them” (M 13). In the psychoanalytic treatment of both writers, however, Deleuze discerns that the extraction of the “clinical entities” of sadism and masochism from the work of Sade and Masoch results in an evacuation of the descriptions offered by these works themselves. There is a reduction of the language that was specific to Sade and Masoch in which symptoms later associated with the psychoanalytic terms that bear their names were first arranged together and displayed upon a critical tableau indistinguishable from the art of Sade and of Masoch. As Deleuze writes, “symptomatology is always an affair of art…” and, moreover, “the specificities of sadism and masochism are not separable from the literary values proper to the works of Sade and Masoch” (M 10).

     

    In other words, it was the “critical” creation of Sade and Masoch to have first raised these obscure affections, passions, and perceptions to the status of what Deleuze and Guattari will later call affects and percepts. Through this process of creation, their literary works caused what was formerly unperceived, imperceptible, and “outside of language” to pass into language where these percepts and affects become “signs” that will henceforth bear a certain visibility, and, as Deleuze writes, “a tendency toward greater specificity [which] indicates a refinement of symptomatology” (M 13). If we are to regard Sade and Masoch as “true artists and ‘symptomatogologists,’” something curious happens when psychoanalysis appropriates their clinical discoveries: their own proper names are employed to designate the “syndromes” they themselves first brought to light. The critical is obscured by the clinical even as Sade and Masoch are separated from their own language. Sade and Masoch are reduced to “a clinical state” of illness, rather than the critical diagnosis of health. At this point, Deleuze’s accusation of the “Oedipal” function of psychoanalysis, after Krafft-Ebing, becomes clear: First, psychoanalysis was not specifically attentive enough to the works of Sade and Masoch, and consequently, it botched the accuracy of its own clinical conception of sadism and masochism in misinterpreting the symptomatology they had originally created. Second, when the symptoms were separated from their original contexts, they lost the critical force that was specific to their literary production. This led to the subsequent confusion of sado-masochism as a set of complementary and reversible structures, which Deleuze’s essay goes on to separate and clarify as distinct and irreversible. Therefore, Deleuze’s early work functions as both an introduction and a critical recovery of Masoch’s own language in the edition of Venus in Furs. In the title under which this work appears in French, Présentation de Sacher-Masoch, the term “présentation” assumes the juridico-technical meaning of a legal process of “discovery,” the stage in which evidence is gathered from an opposing party in the initial phase of a juridicial proceeding. Therefore, Deleuze’s critique of the clinical appropriation of Masoch can be understood precisely as pleading for the defense in a proceeding against psychoanalysis, a proceeding that would finally come to trial in Anti-Oedipus (1972).

     

    This is why Deleuze writes that, in the case of the psychoanalytic appropriation of Masoch and Sade, because the clinical judgment is too full of prejudices, “it is now necessary to begin again with an approach situated outside the clinic, a literary approach, from which these perversions originally received their names” (M 10). In an interview that took place about the same time he wrote the preface to Masoch’s novel, Deleuze described this point outside as the place where “the problem of symptomatology” must also be situated: “at a neutral point, almost zero-degree, where artists and philosophers and doctors and patients can encounter one another” (CC 177, n.25). Both these remarks correspond to a strategy one can find throughout Deleuze’s writings, from Difference and Repetition, where this point is “difference” (i.e., the repetition of the variable, the “new”) that must be located outside the Western philosophical tradition; to the Foucault, where Deleuze even formulates this strategy in the chapter of “Strategies and the Non-Stratified”; and finally, to the writings with Guattari where this point of “the outside” (le dehors) is expressed in several different ways and itself becomes multiple points each inserted or discovered to be emerging within their own assemblage or plateau (e.g., “the war-machine,” “the nomad,” “smooth space,” “the line of flight,” “deterritorialization,” etc.).

     

    Of course, this strategy no doubt receives its most forceful articulation in the following passage from Anti-Oedipus, where it is applied to the re-configuration of the relationship of critical and clinical, which necessarily entails the destruction of the previous relationship operated by psychoanalysis, as one of the primary tasks of what they call “schizoanalysis”:

     

    [T]he problem [of Oedipus] is not resolved until we do away with both the problem and the solution. It is not the purpose of schizoanalysis to resolve Oedipus, it does not intend to resolve it better than Oedipal psychoanalysis does. Its aim is to de-oedipalize the unconscious in order to reach [from a point almost outside] the real problems. Schizoanalysis proposes to reach those regions of the orphan unconscious--indeed "beyond all law"--where the problem of Oedipus can no longer be raised. (81-82)

     

    As Deleuze and Guattari explain in the next statement, this point outside is not necessarily outside psychoanalysis itself (for example, another discourse or branch of knowledge such as philosophy or political science) as it is the “outside of” psychoanalysis–“the schizo,” a figure which must be sharply distinguished from the clinical entity of the schizophrenic, since many of its representatives are drawn primarily from literature (Artaud, Beckett, Nijiinsky, Rimbaud, etc.)–and which can only be revealed through an internal reversal of the analytical apparatus. Consequently, this strategy is one of reversing the institutional priority between the two functions, critical and clinical, either by investing the clinical object with a critical function, or the critical with a clinical determination, and thereby folding one operation onto the other.

     

    Applying this example to our situation today, the critical institution of literature in the university, we might suggest that certain literary works bear a critical activity that is proper to their own creation, which occurs before or even without its representation by “criticism” or “theory.” We might ask how this activity has often become obscured by the institutional consolidation of criticism in the university so that, today, the problems of literature are separated from their own expressions. In response, we could suggest an analogy with the situation of the schizophrenic within psychoanalytic discourse, who becomes subject to the analytic and clinical form of interpretation which strips this subject of his or her own language and, in turn, makes him or her the “object” of another system of classification and knowledge. Like the clinical subject, literature today is often stripped of any enunciatory power of its own, and lately, often appears so helpless that its very representation predisposes it to the critic’s ideological rectification or discourse of truth. As in the description of Sade and Masoch above, perhaps, like psychoanalysis and its regime of “interpretation,” the critical representation of literature may also be full of too many prejudices to be of use any longer, and it is now necessary to begin all over again, as if to begin once more from a point “outside.” Therefore, we must ask in response to our own situation, how we might begin “as if” from a point outside, that is, to recommence on a plane that is immanent to the expression of “the critical” invented by writers themselves.7

     

    The Four Criteria

     

    In the introductory essay of his last work, Critique et Clinique (1993), the plane of immanence upon which the question of literature is unfolded is “Life.” More specifically, Deleuze defines literature as “the passage of life within language that constitutes Ideas (CC 5), somewhat in the same manner that Whitehead had earlier spoken of Ideas themselves as the “passage of Nature” into a place (Fold 73). Recalling the above strategy announced in the preface to Présentation de Sacher-Masoch, it is only on the plane of immanence, that is “Life,” where we can discover a point that is situated outside the (critical) representation of literature, and we can begin to pose again the question(s) proper to literature itself. Yet this statement must be understood precisely and without leaving “Life” as a pure abstraction or metaphysical expression of vitalism. Keeping in mind the strategic necessity of situating the question the critical from a point “outside” its historical representation (or representative discourse), I would like to turn to this introductory essay in order to interrogate the above passage, since it is from this point that Deleuze describes what happens when the questions of living are bound up with “the problems of writing.” In this essay, Deleuze outlines what could be called four criteria for defining the relationship of literature to life. Because these criteria may give a good approximation of the re-configuration of critical and clinical–that is, on the “uses of literature for life”–in the sections that follow I will comment on each one.

     

    I. “Literature is a passage of life that traverses outside the lived and the livable” (CC 1).

     

    This is what Deleuze means by the first sentence that begins the leading essay of Critique et Clinique, “Literature and Life”: “To write is certainly not to impose a form of expression on the matter of lived experience” (1). This statement recalls a question first posed by Proust: “If art was indeed but a prolongation of life, was it worth while to sacrifice anything to it? Was it not as unreal as life itself?” (The Captive 339). Before Deleuze, Proust is probably the greatest apologist for the “duty” of literature. How many have turned aside from its task, he asked, lacking the instinct for it, which is nothing less than the instinct for life itself. “Real life,” on the other hand, “life at last laid bare and illuminated–the only life in consequence to which can be said to be really lived–is literature, and life thus defined is in a sense all the time immanent in ordinary men no less than in the artist” (Time Regained 298). For Proust, therefore, literature is the most “real” of all things, since the ideas formed by pure intelligence may be logical, but are not necessary; moreover, perception or knowledge which is common or general is likewise not necessary, because it has not been deciphered, developed, worked-over, that is, created. (In a famous description, Proust writes that for most people memory is a darkroom containing many negatives that have not been “developed.”) Therefore, literature is life:

     

    remote from our daily preoccupations, [the life] we separate from ourselves by an ever greater gulf as the conventional knowledge we substitute for it grows thicker and more impermeable, that reality which it is very easy for us to die without ever having known and which is, quite simply, our life. (Time Regained 298-299)

     

    According to this principle, certain literary works often take the opposite path: to discern beneath the merely personal the power of the impersonal. Thus, literature sometimes concerns the question of living in the sense that the writer struggles with the problem of life in order to extract movements and becomings that are inseparable from the question of “style.” However, “style,” in this sense, does not reflect the individuated expression or personality of the artist or writer; as Proust wrote:

     

    [A]rt, if it means awareness of our own life, means also the awareness of the lives of other people--style for the writer, no less than color for the painter, is not a question of technique but of vision: it is the revelation, which by direct and conscious methods would be impossible, of the qualitative difference, the uniqueness in which the world appears to each one of us, a difference which, were it not for art, would remain the secret of every individual. (Time Regained 299)

     

    In the passage that traverses both the lived and the livable, the identities of the terms do not remain the same, but enter into a process of mutual becoming; Deleuze calls this process a “capture,” a kind of repetition that causes both to become unequal to their former definitions, and enter into a relation of becoming. Such a becoming, however, concerns the immanence of a life, and only in certain cases does it emerge to touch upon the immanence of a life that is lived and livable by others. We might ask then, what makes the life posed by literature exemplary; in other words, what causes its critical expression to pass over to the side of the clinical? It is upon this question that the value of the literary enterprise is posed, whether it receives justification and a “use” or falls into a miserable state of its own univocity. This is where the question of “passage” receives a definite qualification: literature concerns the passage of a life into language. It is only through this passage that Life itself can achieve the repetition of a higher power, and the personal can be raised to the condition of a language.

     

    Deleuze often remarks that the plane of life surpasses both the lived and the livable; the writer’s encounter often proceeds from an encounter when life, defined in terms of the lived and the livable, becomes impossible, or, when this encounter concerns something that is “too powerful, or too painful, too beautiful” (N 51) when defined in terms to of experience. Accordingly, the writer often returns from the land of the dead and is himself or herself “a stranger to life” (TI 208). In other words, the writer does not simply write from experience or memory, but also from something too painful for memory or too light for experience, perhaps even “an unbearable lightness” as in Kundera. It is for this reason, second, that the act of writing and the figure of the writer always entertain a relationship with a fundamental stupidity (betisse), which is not simply a lack of experience as the fictionalizing factor, as well as with a fundamental amnesia or “forgetting,” which is not simply a weak memory as the factor of an overly active imagination. (The récits of Marguerite Duras are exemplary in this regard). Both stupidity and forgetting are the forces that define the writer’s strangeness and estrangement from the “lived and the livable.” For example, is there not a stupidity proper to Kafka’s relationship with women that initiated the desire of the bachelor (hence, his famous statement, “Prometheus was a bachelor”), or a forgetting that one finds in Artaud, Beckett, and Joyce? As in the famous case of the “jeune homme schizophrene” (an earlier essay of which is included in Critique et Clinique), the relationship to a maternal language has undergone a fundamental trauma and dispossession and must either be invented anew (as in the case of Joyce and Proust) or pushed to its extreme limit to the point where Language itself confronts its impossibility (impouvoir, using Blanchot’s term) and comes into contact with its own outside. The latter can find its various strategies in Artaud (where the outside is the cry beyond words), or in Beckett, who pushed the language of the novel to an extreme repetition that unravels into tortured fragments at the same time that his characters devolve into partial objects (e.g., a mouth, a head, an eye, a torso, a stomach, an anus).

     

    Perhaps we can illustrate the immanence of a life with the following statement which implicitly points to the example of Kafka: “The shame of being a man–is there any better reason to write?” (CC 1). Here, “shame” defines the fundamental trait of a life that is not simply the life of Kafka, but of a “situation” particular to his case. For Kafka, therefore, the problem of writing is posed within an immanent relation to the escape from a “situation” of shame. Benjamin had earlier perceived this shame as an “elemental purity of feeling” that is fundamental to Kafka’s writings and, consequently, “Kafka’s strongest gesture [gestus]” (Benjamin 25). What is the “shame of being human?” For Benjamin, shame is primarily a social feeling: it is something one feels in the presence of others, something one feels for others. Because of this origin, the individual is innocent and cannot be found to be its cause. Consequently, in Benjamin’s reading, the situation of shame always returns to the character of the Law and its officers (the judge, the father, the mother, even the son and the daughter, or sister); the character of law is that of an incredible filth that covers everything and everyone–a defilement of being. The father in “The Judgment” wears a dirty nightshirt; in “The Metamorphosis,” the father’s uniform is covered in filth; in the Trial, the Examining Magistrate pages through a dusty volume of the Law which, when K. discovers its contents, is filled with dirty pictures. One might think this is a characteristic particular to the fathers and the officials only; however, nothing could be further from the truth. In fact, the son has become the embodiment of filth, he is vermin. Neither does woman escape, since as many have noticed, she is touched with the filth of the Law that defiles her own sex, and appears as a slut, a court prostitute, or a hunchback among the assembly of harpies who assemble on the stairs outside the painter Titorelli’s studio. Shame–i.e., the shame of being human–is nothing “personal,” but rather belongs to an unknown “family” which includes both humans and animals alike. And Kafka writes concerning his indefinite relationship to this family: “He feels as though he were living and thinking under the constraint of a family…. Because of this family… he cannot be released” (qtd. in Benjamin 25).

     

    II. “To write is not to recount one’s memories and travels, one’s loves and griefs, one’s dreams and fantasies; neither do we write with our neuroses, which do not constitute ‘passages,’ but rather those states into which we fall when our desire is blocked or plugged-up”–consequently, “literature then appears as an enterprise of health.” (CC 2-3)

     

    We might ask why Deleuze seems to love children and writers so much. Or rather, why are writers so often described in the process of “becoming-child?” Kafka’s letters often demonstrate this directly, particularly those to Felice where he takes a child’s point-of-view in talking about her “teeth” or in day-dreaming over the idea of curling up in her dresser drawer next to her “private articles,” or, finally, in the passages where he describes a thousand agitated hands fluttering and out of reach, which can be understood as prefiguring of Gregor Samsa’s thousand tiny legs waving helplessly in front of him. In addition to Kafka, we might think of Beckett as well, particularly the trilogy, where the transformation of the characters–Molloy, Malone, Jacques, Mahood, the Unnameable–all undergoing incredible and hilarious journeys and transmigrations, are haunted by endoscopic perceptions. The answer, it seems, would be simple enough: because the child knows how to play (to experiment), and the writer in the process of “becoming-child” does not imitate children but repeats a block of childhood and allows it to pass through language. However, to avoid allowing the notion of “play” to remain too simplistic (since most will say they know what “playing” is), we should turn back to Freud who entertained an original intuition of the child-at-play in his “Creative Writers and Day-Dreaming.”

     

    There Freud noticed that the child, contrary to the adult, plays in the full light of day, plays openly, and even causes his or her creations to transform the external world of perception. By way of contrast, the adult can only play in secret, and often actively hides his or her creative activities (perhaps even from himself). Adults are, first and foremost, guilty; consequently, they have lost the innocence of play, have repressed it, meaning that they aggressively prohibit all “public displays” of such an activity, transforming the nature of play itself into an unconscious source of pleasure. Freud used this distinction primarily to distinguish the play of child from the fantasy life of the adult; to show the origin of the phantasm itself has this sense of “hiding,” a guilty source of satisfaction for the adult who can only play in secret (and alone). At the same time, even Freud noticed that the artist constitutes the exceptional case to this internalization and continues to play out in the open. What’s more, Freud exclaims with a certain amount of surprise, that society allows it! Even if the artist must usually pay the price in terms of a suffering that compensates for the artist’s enjoyment and seems to satisfy the cruelty of society itself toward the artist for enjoying too much and in a manner that civilization first of all demands to be sacrificed, cut-off. This economic arrangement of cruelty and pleasure, according to Freud, is the guarantee that the creative writer and artist have to exist.

     

    Returning now to emphasize that the writer, like the child, plays openly and in the full light of day, this would seem to imply that the nature of of the activity cannot find its source in the secret, internalized, and guilty affects of the adult. As Deleuze writes, “we do not write with our neuroses” (CC 3). Wouldn’t this imply that we should look for the sense of the process on the surface of the writer’s activity, for a process that seeks to hide nothing? It seems odd, then, that often the function of interpretation is to reveal or to expose a “secret” behind the appearance of the literary effect, underneath the more overt and all-too-evident transformations: to locate the “figure in the carpet” or the figure of ideology. Is there any difference? Moreover, couldn’t this activity be seen as an extension of the earlier repression: to transform what is out in the open, on the surface, to what is hidden and secret? Wouldn’t this transform the very intentionality of the writer, so that the figure itself would appear to have been ferreted away, and desire become the desire of the phantasm? This is why interpretations of ideology begin with a false premise: that the writer was hiding anything to begin with. Perhaps this is why Deleuze-Guattari choose to highlight the most problematic of writers from the perspective of an adult-morality (Carroll and his love for little girls, Faulkner and Melville’s racism, or that of Celine, the misogyny of Miller and Burroughs, Proust’s “closeted” homosexuality, Artaud’s mania and crypto-fascism, Kafka’s bachelor-desire, Woolf’s frigidity, etc.), as if to say, “Well now, there’s nothing hidden here!” “All perverts–everyone of them!” Or perhaps, “If we are to judge, if we must arrive at a judgment, then we must find a better evidence; but at least, we must find something more interesting to say.” But then “perversion” may not be the right word. Again, this evokes the sense of symptomatology, since the writer “plays”–openly, without shame, or guilt–with what the adult chooses to keep “secret,” even though secrecy makes these symptoms no less determining of a life and perhaps even more so. How many times lately have we had to suffer the moralism of perverts, racists, misogynists, and pederasts who choose to persecute others for their own most secretive desires? Thus, the publicity with which the writer plays with his or her desires is not perverse in the least; rather, the function of “perversion” describes the position of a normative morality under the condition that enjoyment either remains “a dirty little secret” of the individual, or undergoes a strange reversal into sadism and cruelty.

     

    III. “Health as literature,” as writing, consists in fabulation, which Deleuze defines as “the invention of a people who is missing”; thus, “the ultimate aim of literature is to set free, in the delirium, in this creation of a health, in this invention of a people, the possibility of a life.”

     

    Under this criterion, we should recall the three characteristics that belong to the concept of “minor literature”: first, a certain situation occurs when a major language is affected with a high co-efficient of deterritorialization; second, everything is political and the “individual concern” or “private interest” disappears or serves as a mere environment or background; third, everything takes on a collective value. From these three criteria, we can locate the specific conditions that give rise to what Deleuze calls “fabulation.” The concept of “fabulation” first appears in Bergsonism (1966) and then disappears almost entirely until it is highlighted in the later writings, particularly in The Time Image (1985) and again in the interviews conducted between 1972-1990 that appear in Negotiations (1990), where Deleuze makes the following pronouncement: “Utopia is not a good concept, but rather a “fabulation” common to people and to art. We should return to the Bergsonian notion of fabulation to provide it with a political sense” (N 174). In light of our effort to understand this concept in view of a generalized literary clinic, we might understand the concept of fabulation as having two sides: creation and prognosis. Fabulation is the art of invention as well as a conceptual avatar of a “problem solving” instinct that remedies an unbearable situation–particularly with regard to the situation of “the people who are missing” (CC 4). The goal of fabulation, understood as a process, is where the writer and the people go toward one another (see TI 153ff); in this sense they share a common function. Deleuze writes, “To write for this people who are missing… (‘for’ means less ‘in place of’ than ‘for the benefit of’)” (CC 4). That is, they share a process, a vision beyond words, a language beyond sounds. In this sense, fabulation could be said to resemble the function of dream work and, by extension, the moments of selective rearrangement that mark historical discontinuities. What is power unleashed in revolution but the ideal game deployed within what is essentially a fiction; that is, the power to select and re-order the objects, artifacts, and meanings that belong to a previous world? Utopia, then, rather than designating a static representation of the ideal place, or topos, is rather the power of the “ideal” itself which can bifurcate time and create possible worlds. This is why Deleuze calls “fabulation” a better concept than “utopia,” since it designates a power or a vital process rather than representing a static genre–an ideal form of repetition rather than the repetition of an ideal form.

     

    Fabulation entails a “becoming” that happens from both directions–it is both the becoming-popular of the creator or intellectual, and the becoming-creative of a people. In many ways, this movement echoes the description of the cultural process of nationalist or post-colonialist art first examined by Frantz Fanon in The Wretched of the Earth (1963), which can be used to illustrate the concept of fabulation.8 First, in Fanon’s analysis, the function of fabulation that determines the writer’s cultural presence in colonial culture and the forms of “socialization” and identification that underlie the perspective of the modern “creator” are both explicitly developed:

     

    At the very moment when the native intellectual is anxiously trying to create a cultural work he fails to realize that he is utilizing techniques and language which are borrowed from the stranger in his country. He contents himself with stamping these instruments with a hallmark he wishes to be national, but which is strangely reminiscent of exoticism. The native intellectual who comes back to his people [as Fanon previously qualifies, "whatever they were or whatever they were or whatever they are" (222)] by way of culture behaves in fact like the foreigner. Sometimes he shows no hesitation in using a dialect in order to show his will to be as near as possible to the people; but the ideas he expresses and the preoccupations he is taken up with have no common yardstick to measure the real situation which the men and women of his country know. (223)

     

    The incommensurability that underlines the initial appearance of the colonized intellectual also belongs to a preliminary phase in the creation of national conscience of culture in Fanon’s reading. It must be followed by other phases which re-configure the attributes (or “property”) of culture between its contingent and exterior genres and its interior collective expression of “inner truth” (Fanon 225). (Fanon articulates the latter as culture’s muscularity, in relation to political action, and rhythm, in relation to ethnic and regional identities). In a post-colonial culture’s incipient phase, however, these attributes are uncoordinated and this non-coordination can be seen to inform the very appearance of hybridity in the image of the cultural producer and his or her creative work. From the perspective of the post-colonial “people”–who, at this stage, “are still missing”– the initial schizoid image of culture which is also manifested in the appearance of the colonized intellectual is the result of the mutilating psychological effects and de-humanization of the colonizing situation. This addresses the problem of becoming from the perspective of the native intellectual and writer, where “going back to your own people means to become a dirty wog, to go native as much as possible, to become unrecognizeable, and to cut off those wings that before you had allowed to grow (Fanon 221). Part native and part stranger, near and distant at the same time, the creator only “appears” to manifest a characteristic of proximity by imitating native dialects and speech patterns; however, this creator’s “ideas” are at first both unfamiliar and strangely distant from a people’s perception of their own image.

     

    Fanon himself accounts for this hybridity by assigning it two causes. First, hybridity results from an appearance of “culture” itself that is uncoordinated with political and national conscience (i.e., a direct consequence of the colonial process that “alienated” and even “negated” any relationship between these two sites of mentality). Second, this appearance of the indigenous cultural producer and national conscience of culture precedes the actualization of political revolt. This peremptory and premature appearance gives the creator and the cultural work the characteristics of “a-temporality” and “affective remoteness” in the minds of the people themselves:

     

    The artist who has decided to illustrate the truths of the nation turns paradoxically toward the past and away from actual events. What he ultimately intends to embrace are in fact the castoffs of thought, its shells and corpses, a knowledge which has been stabilized once and for all. But the native intellectual who wishes to create the authentic work of art must realize that the truths of a nation are in the first place its realities. He must go on until he has found the seething pot out of which the learning of the future will emerge. (Fanon 225)

     

    This diagnostic and therapeutic narrative structures the dialectical stages that the creator (and the “people”) must pass through in order to arrive at the synthesis of collective political and cultural expression. Fanon traces these stages from alienation of an interiorized cultural identification with the colonizer; to the spark of an original memory (which Fanon compares to the return of infantile and maternal associations); to a period of malaise, nausea, and convulsion (expressions of “vomiting out” the poison of the earlier cultural identification); and at last to the final stage of combat in the martyrological expression of a true popular culture, where the writer becomes “the mouth-piece of a new reality in action” (Fanon 223). Thus there is a deep analogy between the ethnography of a “people” and the story of the coming-to-conscience of the creator’s voice, the manifestation of a culture’s essential “property” and authentic expression of its innermost nature. At the end of the dialectic of culture outlined by Fanon, the “mental space of a people” that had been distorted by the instruments of colonization gradually draws close to itself in the image of the creator and remembers in the voice of the poet the sound of its own voice. The final image of proximity occurs when the creator and the people become one mentality in which culture thinks itself in–and as–the substance of its own ideational life. The “organic coordination” between the poet’s plastic expression and the people’s inner thought achieves such a synthesis of muscularity and natural rhythm that those who before would never thought to compose a literary work “find themselves in exceptional circumstances… [and]… feel the need to speak to their nation, to compose a sentence which expresses the heart of the people, and to become the mouth-piece of a new reality in action” (Fanon 223).

     

    We could see here in Fanon’s description of the process between the marginalized writer and “a people who are missing,” an echo of a lesson from Kafka that Deleuze often emphasizes in the context of his discussion of fabulation:

     

    The author can be marginalized or separate from his more or less illiterate community as much as you like; this condition puts him all the more in a position to express potential forces and, in his very solitude, to be a true collective agent, a collective leaven, a catalyst. (TI 221-222)

     

    This is the solitude that Kafka addressed in terms of impossibility, where the “problem of writing” is fundamentally related to a collective impossibility: the situation of a people who either live in a language that is not their own, or who no longer even know their own and know poorly the major language they are forced to serve (K 19). To use an expression that is invoked throughout Deleuze’s work, and is principally inspired from Blanchot’s writings, the writer’s solitude cannot be reduced to a normal situation of solitude in the world, to an experience of being-alone and apart from others; this is because the figures above do not experience their aloneness from the perspective of this world, or of this society, or from the presence of others who exist, but rather from the perspective of another possible world or another community that these figures anticipate even though the conditions for this community are still lacking. Often this desire or longing which brings about the condition of solitude is expressed in the discourse of love as in the case of Kierkegaard with Regina, or of Proust with Albertine. In the latter case, Marcel is haunted by the fact that no matter how close he comes to Albertine, or no matter how he draws her near him even to the point of holding her hostage, he is always haunted by the fact that behind the face of Albertine, there always lies another Albertine, a thousand other Albertines each breaking upon one another like waves of an infinite ocean. Thus, it is this experience of solitude that burns into his mind the impossible and delirious desire of capturing each one, of “knowing” all the possible Albertines, as the highest goal of Love.

     

    Returning to the case of Kafka, according to Deleuze, the solitude of the writer is related most profoundly to the situation of the people who are missing. This is why the solitude of certain writers is in no way a private affair for Deleuze, and why the concept of “solitude” must be qualified to evoke the uncanny experience of inhabiting a strange language, a language that is not and may never be one’s own, where the very act of speaking brings with it the feeling of self-betrayal, or of “falsifying oneself,” and where the alternative of remaining silent bears the threat of extinction. It is in this sense that the position of the writer is virtual to that of the collective, and, therefore, the so-called “private” is immediately collective as well, that is, “less a concern of literary history than of a people” (Diaries 149). Deleuze writes concerning this situation which was specific to Kafka’s predicament, but which can describe the situation of other writers as well (such as Melville or Woolf), that “the most individual enunciation is a particular case of the collective enunciation” (K 84). Moreover, “this is even a definition: a statement is literary when it is ‘taken up’ by a bachelor who precedes the collective conditions of enunciation” (K 84). This last definition appears to re-classify the entire sense of the literary as emerging from “a bachelor-machine,” a concept that Deleuze draws from the figure of Kafka but that also can be found to refer to the figure of Proust; however, the condition of a “bachelor” can be redefined, outside its gendered determination, to describe or refer to a situation in which one prefers the state of being alone (i.e., exceptional, singular, anonymous) than to “take on” the identity of a subject one is assigned by the majority. The situation of preferring to remain a bachelor can find affinities, for example, with the situation of a Jew in 18th century Europe, with that of a woman in 19th and 20th century societies, or with the situation of minorities in America today.

     

    IV. Finally, literature opens up a kind of foreign language within language.” (CC 5)

     

    This invention has three aspects: a) through syntax, the destruction of the maternal language; b) through delirium, the invention of a new language which carries the first outside its usual furrows (habitus), and which, in turn, entails a second destruction: the clichés of visibilities and statements which, although not completely reducible to language, are nevertheless inseparable from it, being the “ideas” and “habits” that determine the forms of seeing and saying; c) in the third aspect, as a result of the destruction of the maternal language and of the clichéd statements and stock visibilities (which are like its ghosts), the literary process bears the former language to its limit, turning it toward its own “outside,” which Deleuze describes as its inverse or reverse side made up of visions and auditions, which “are not outside language, but the outside of language” (CC 5). The final aim of these three aspects, according to Deleuze, is the concept of literature defined “the passage of life within language that constitutes ideas” (CC 5).

     

    Taking up the first aspect, through the destruction of the maternal language, literature functions as a war machine. “The only way to defend language is to attack it” (Proust, qtd. in CC 4). This could be the principle of much of modern literature and capture the sense of process that aims beyond the limit of language. As noted above, however, this limit beyond which the outside of language appears is not outside language, but appears in its points of rupture, in the gaps, or tears, in the interstices between words, or between one word and the next. The examples of writers who define their relationship to language under the heading of this principle are too numerous to recount, although I will provide a few significant examples for the purposes of illustration. First, we might point to the poet Paul Celan, for example, whose poetry is precisely defined as the systematic destruction of the language of Goethe and Rilke in the sense that the poem itself expresses a word that no German mouth can speak (the deterritorialization of language from the teeth and the lips). In Celan, the poem itself is nothing less than a materialization of the mother’s corpse that is gradually interned within the German language and given a specific place of mourning; thus, the image of the mother is a shadow of the lost object by which Celan draws the entire German language into a process of mourning. This is Celan’s process: the “passage” of the Mother’s death into the German language; the passage of the living German language into an encounter with his Mother’s death and, by extension, with the murder of his maternal race. The use of color in Celan’s poetry gives us a vivid illustration of the Deleuzian and Proustean notion of vision. The poet is a true colorist who causes colors to appear as nearly hallucinatory visions in the language of the poem; however, in Celan’s poems, the descriptive and neutral function of color is poetically transformed into the attributes of his mother’s body–her hair, or her skin, her eyes; the green of a decaying corpse. It is as if each enunciation of each color will henceforth bear a reference to his mother’s body, that the German language is modified to incorporate this cryptic reference into its poetic and descriptive functions. Thus, the green is the color of summer grass, but it is also the color of my mother’s decaying shadow; blue is the color of the sky, but it is also the color of the sky the day it wore my mother’s hair; red is the color of the tulip, but it is also the color of the one who that day “when the silent one comes to behead the tulips” (Poems 53); finally, yellow is the hair of Marguerite, but it is also the color of my mother’s star, the star that marked her for extinction.

     

    Kafka also approaches the German language with the statement of his swimming champion, “I speak the same language as you, but don’t understand a single word you’re saying” (qtd. in CC 5), and at the same time draws on the resources of the all too vernacular and deterritorialized Czech-German and the all too symbolic and allegorical Yiddish (“a language of the heart” [Diaries 151]) in order to purify the German language and the syntax of Goethe from its own cultural signification. In other words, as Deleuze often recounts, Kafka “creates a kind of foreign language within language” (CC 5) that, although it bears an uncanny and perfect resemblance to the major language, no longer bears the significance for German culture and emerges as a kind of war machine within its majoritarian sense. As Deleuze and Guattari write, by a kind of schizo-politeness hidden beneath an almost too-perfect German syntax, “he will make the German take flight on a line of escape… he will tear out Prague German all the qualities of underdevelopment it has tried to hide; he will make it cry with an extremely sober and rigorous cry… to bring language slowly and progressively to the desert… to give syntax to the cry” (K 26). This marks the importance of animals in Kafka’s shorter works–the musical dogs that appear in “Investigations of a Dog,” the singing mouse-folk in “Josephine, the Mouse-Singer,” the song of the Ape in “Report to the Academy,” the low-cry of the Jackals in “The Jackals and Arabs”–but also the musical auditions of the other fabulous creatures that Kafka creates, such as Odradek in “Cares of a Family Man” whose laughter bears the airy sound of dried leaves, or the silence of the Sirens in the tale of the same name. In all these cases, we have examples of pure sonorous auditions that are introduced into the German language. It is through the deterritorialization of the human that the German language passes through a becoming-animal, that animals introduce the notes of a strange music that has never been heard before in German literature, that Kafka introduces new possibilities into German tongue, “a music made up of deterritorialized sounds” (K 26). In themselves, as pure sonorous material, these sounds may have already been possible: the melody of a dog’s howl, the shrill silence of a mouse, the low moan of the jackal. However, in the form they take in Kafka’s language–for example, the first song that the Ape learns from a drunken sailor, which becomes his primitive language lesson–becomes an “idea” in its passage through language, an “audition” of a cry of humiliation and oppression that Kafka first introduces as such into the German ear. It is in this manner that he both escapes the oppressive, classical harmonies of the German language and, at the same time, institutes a pedagogy of syntax in which he teaches the German language to cry.

     

    Taking up the second aspect, the invention of “a delirium, which forces it out of its usual furrows” (CC 5), we should recall one of the principle axioms of Anti-Oedipus which is that desire always invests or is immanent to the social field of production, in order to apply this axiom to “the desire to write.” The desire to write, at one level, is a delirium which is immediately social. How could we otherwise explain the institution of criticism that has secreted around the work in the modern societies based upon writing if not as an effort to submit this delirium to the identifiable categories of a “proper delirium” that functions as the basis of the group? At the same time, if we were to attempt to grasp “the desire to write” from its immanent perspective within the socius, we would need to conceive of the function of writing in all its occasions: from the legal or juridical and the legislative, to the hermeneutic and confessional modes of writing. Perhaps, then, the figure of the writer emerges to “represent” this delirium and, thereby, to isolate the “problem of writing” to a rare and exceptional cases we call “writers,” almost in the same manner that Derrida had illustrated around the function of the pharmakon. It is as if society, which itself is constructed by and from writing, must also produce a being who embodies in order to protect itself from the madness that belongs to its own order of possibility. Is there any wonder then why the writer has so often been defined by the attributes of illness or bad health? Again, this may explain Deleuze and Guattari’s selection of the series of problematic writers to combat this definition. To close the work off by applying these symptoms to the ethical or psychological character of an author, and thereby to “psychologize” or to “impeach” the writer, is to alienate the critical function of these writers–that is, the “lens” they offer to perceive what otherwise remains obscure and misapprehended by its individuated or psychological forms. Recalling again the second criteria, the principle distinction is the “openness” these symptoms receive in the writing must be set against the usual secret forms that determine the expression of the unconscious phantasies, or individual symptoms.9

     

    In Anti-Oedipus, it is with the discovery of the production proper to the schizophrenic that Deleuze-Guattari find a degree-zero of the delirium that the schizophrenic shares with society: “he hallucinates and raves universal history, and proliferates the races” (AO 85). Thus, the schizo refers to the function of a delirium as the principle of “desiring-production” that society itself uses to “distribute races, cultures, and gods”–in short, to “make itself obeyed”–on the body without organs (the full body of the earth) (A0 84). In Deleuze and Guattari’s use of the concept of delirium we might detect a certain cosmological theory of madness (i.e., the thesis of madness as oeuvre which they share in some ways with Foucault), which was first presented by Freud in his famous commentary on Daniel Schreber, who created a universe with his delirium and then proceeded to populate it with gods, demi-gods (or demons), as well as with new races and sexes. These were the personages of Schreber’s fabulous delirium; however, the structure of this delirium also describes the origin of the prohibitive mechanisms that society itself produces. In other words, the language of madness simply locates in the “story-telling function” of figures like Schreber the very same mechanisms that society itself uses to engender a world populated with gods, cultures, races, and peoples. Given the conservative function of this “myth-making” faculty, we might ask how, according to the major thesis of Anti-Oedipus, the delirium proper to schizophrenic production and social production can lead to the potential of fabulation as a relay to revolutionary force. This is the point around which many commentaries on Deleuze-Guattari’s use of the schizo fall into error by taking the clinical entity of the schizophrenic as a kind of model creator, a turn to romanticism. However, the equation of the fabulation of the clinical schizophrenic with social fabulation has the subtle effect of rendering social production the truth of the clinical equation, since the clinical personage of the schizophrenic constitutes that point where desiring-production is blocked, falls into an impasse, becomes reactive or sick. If the clinical entity of the schizophrenic is identical with society, then we find the true subject of schizoanalysis, which is social production. Therefore, within the literary process delirium undergoes a positive “transvaluation” (Nietzsche) which differentiates it from its repressive or conservative functions in madness and society. That is, if the world itself “is the set of symptoms whose illness merges with man,” it is by means of this process that “literature is a health” (CC iv).

     

    Finally, concerning the third aspect of these criteria, Deleuze writes that “…the final aim of literature… is the passage of life within language that constitutes ideas” (CC 5, emphasis mine). In Foucault (1990), Deleuze situates this aspect that belongs to modern literature in what is essentially a psychology of the fold, whereby language is disarticulated from the “grand unities of discourse” (Foucault) which structure the possibilities of enunciation. In Critique et Clinique, Deleuze recalls the above formulation when he describes the event of literature as, “in effect, when another language is created within language, it is a language in its entirety that tends toward an ‘asyntactic,’ ‘agramatical’ limit, or that communicates with its own outside (CC iv). Deleuze locates this aspect of modern literary practices in an analysis that owes much to Foucault’s stubborn persistence to privilege the question of literature in a time when it was being subordinated to the forces of negative (work, communication, information, identity), particularly to privilege the possibilities of resistance that are potential in the recent and overt tendency of modern writers to uncover a strange language within language. Accordingly, modern literature creates within language a non-linguistic stammering that inclines towards “a-typical expression” and “a-grammatical effects” (e.g., Berryman, Celan, Queneau, Cummings, Mallarmé).

     

    As a result of this process, ideas emerge from the process as what Deleuze calls visions and auditions–these are the forms of seeing and hearing that are specific to the literary process in its passage within Language. As Deleuze further describes, however, these ideas appear only when the literary process achieves its aim and breaks through the limit of language, a limit that is not outside language, but rather the outside of language which language alone makes possible. “These visions are not fantasies, but veritable Ideas that the writer sees or hears in the interstices of language, in its intervals” (CC 5). Although they bear a certain hallucinatory quality specific to the literary effect (e.g., Proust’s “madelaine,” Gombrowizc’s “hanged-sparrow,” Melville’s “white whale,” Silko’s “spider-web”), they cannot be reduced to the psychological fantasies of the author nor to “ideologemes” of a collective unconscious, since they take place, as Kafka said, “in the full light of day” and not “down below in the cellar of structure” (Diaries 1910-13 197). Consequently, it is often through words or between words that is the implicit aim of the literary process; this desire on the part of the writer is accompanied by a certain destruction of the stock forms of visibilities and statements, of linguistic and syntactical habits, clichés of the quotidian and common utterances, stock and made-to-order descriptions and categorical prescriptions that all too often imprison what is seen and heard in a fog of nothingness.

     

    This labor of the artist, this struggle to discern beneath matter, beneath experience, beneath words, something that is different from them, is a process exactly the reverse of that which, in our everyday lives in which we live avoiding our own gaze, is at every moment satisfied by vanity and passion, intellect and habit, extinguishing our true impressions that are entirely concealed from us, buried underneath a junk heap of verbal concepts and practical goals that we falsely call 'life.' (Time Regained 299-300)

     

    In a certain sense, then, we might say that modern literature creates the conditions for “good habits” of language use. “What are we but habits of saying ‘I’?” Deleuze first proposes this question in his study of Hume (ES x). The question of language that both philosophy and literature expound upon in different manners, therefore, is one of developing and promoting “good habits” of language usage and diagnosing “bad or destructive” habits. Philosophy has always concerned itself with the “uses and abuses” of language for the purpose of living (and dying) well; however, this image of good sense is not an object of logic, but of ethics or even etiquette. Nietzsche understood this as the essence of logic, as well as an image of philosophy as “the transvaluation of values” which, first of all include linguistic values, or “signs,” whose proper sense can only be the object of a genealogical study, such as Foucault later described in his essay “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History.” Consequently, we find in Foucault’s work an original relationship of language to the “body” (the materiality of the self), a relationship which is given an historical and diagnostic expression. Habits (habitus), understood as the modern form of repetition, stand for those institutions of the statements that interpellate us and which define us by determining the possible attributes that can belong to the “I.” As a certain species of repetition, moreover, habits achieve a degree zero of memory (where the particular equals the universal), producing the condition in which “what we do not remember, we repeat.” (DR 19). Thus, certain uses of language can be defined as the cause of our illness, since they lead to a botched form of life, self, individuality, power, etc. We must recognize the effects of these “habits” upon the process of thinking as well, particularly in the sense that the “interiority of thought” (the grand circuit of associations, signs, concepts, memory, and feeling) is “limited” (contracted or disciplined) by the external forms of discourse and language. It is not a question of thought that is without language, but rather of thinking which appears in its most extended circuit which enters into combinations with the elements of seeing and speaking which are “exterior” to a language defined by formed statements and the visibility of objects. Consequently, we can define this problematic as a part of the Deleuzian critique of repetition since our repetitions, or habits of language use, determine the unconscious of our representations.

     

    On the other hand, certain modern literary practices, rather than being founded by their representational function, can be understood as a profound experimentation that reveals the positivity and the limits of our language-habits (our addiction to saying “I”). In the statement “I love you,” for example, why is the “I” meaningless, as well as “love”? Perhaps one might attempt to explain the first by the power of the shifter and the second by the privilege of the performative statement. On the other hand, we can understand this as a particular species of repetition which has become abstract and too general, in the case of the first, and meaningless and too particular in the case of the second. What Deleuze praises as “the curve of the sentence” can be understood as a profound experimentation that reveals the limits of certain expressions, negates their abstractness for a “new” positivity of language. Deleuze writes as early as Difference and Repetition that the event of positivity occurs necessarily in the advent of the “new” that introduces variables into a previous repetition. Statements such as Kafka’s “I am a bug” or Fitzgerald’s “I am a giraffe” lead to the discovery of the non-sense that belongs to the statement “I am a man” (TP 377). Consequently, the first two statements repeat the last one and at the same time introduce a new predicate, causing the statement “I am a man” to be lacking definition and, in a certain sense, in need of rectification. In other words, the statement “I am a man” leads to nothing and can be criticized as a bad use of definition. It defines no one and, thus, makes the “abstract” predicate of man possible as a real relationship. Rather than representing, Kafka’s proposition “selects” and corrects the imperfections of the former definition. It reveals the limits of the statement as well as the visibility of the language-predicate; it introduces new variables into old habits of being, new possibilities, clearer and more definite articulations, new possibilities for the passage of a life into language.

     

    Epilogue: The Question “What is Minor Literature” Today?

     

    In conclusion, we should return again to situate the question of literature as one of the principle themes of the two volumes of Capitalism and Schizophrenia. In order to do so, it would be necessary to pay more specific attention to the status of the literary which occurs in the work of Deleuze-Guattari. When and in what manner is it evoked? For example, in the cries of poor A.A., the stroll of Lenz, the sucking-stones of Molloy, Kleist’s Marionettes or Michael-Kolhaus on his horse. In each case, literature is allied to a “war machine,” which means it draws its force directly from “the outside.” Deleuze and Guattari constantly pit this condition of literary enunciation against any representation that subjugates it to a form of interiority (whether that of the subject-author, the private individual, a culture, or even of a race). It is not by accident that the lines from Nijinsky are always recited like the lyrics of a favorite song: “I am a bastard, a beast, a negro.” The relationship of the concept of literature to a war machine is essential, and we should note that many of the examples of the war machine are drawn from writers (Artaud, Buchner, Kafka, Kleist), as well as philosopher-artists such as Nietzsche and Kiekegaard. In A Thousand Plateaus, the conflict between the literary war machine and the critic as “man of the state” is first attested to by the confrontation between Artaud and Jacques Riviere (although not a man of the state, he was according to Deleuze, not the first or last critic to mistake himself for “a prince in the republic of letters”), who found Artaud incomprehensible and poorly organized and he made no hesitation in giving his advice to “pauvre A.A.”–“Work! work! If you revise, then soon you will arrive at a method (Cogitatio Universalis) to express your thoughts more directly!” (TP 377). Next, the literary war machine is attested to by Kleist’s conflict with Goethe (“truly a man of the State among all literary figures”). In the case of the figures like Nietzsche and Kierkegaard, there is the conflict between the “public professor” and the “private thinker,” although Deleuze qualifies the latter notion in order to argue that, in fact, the “private thinker” may not be a good term, since it closes around too reductive a notion of the “private individual,” and too simple of a form of interiority where the so-called spontaneity of thought is said to occur. Instead, Deleuze argues that the “solitude” one approaches in the writings of Nietzsche, or in Kafka, is a solitude that is extremely “populated” (TI 467).

     

    The concept of literature we have been discussing fundamentally invokes a situation of language where the collective subject of enunciation (different from the official enunciation a “people,” or of a “national consciousness”) exists only in a latent or virtual state that cannot be located in the civil and juridical language of statutes and laws, the “paper language” of bureaucracy, the technocratic and vehicular language of administrators, entrepreneurs, and capitalists. It would not be an exaggeration to assert that most technical and administrative language, even in the first world, bears an historical relationship to the early techniques invented by colonial administrations–a language composed purely of “order-words” (les mots d’ordre), or a language of command in which the law finds its purest expression, just as Sade discovered the essence of Enlightenment reason in the categorical imperatives of pornographic speech: “Do this!” “Submit!” “Obey!” Concerning the status of this language, as Fanon asserts, we have every reason to believe the colonizer when he says, “the colonized, I know them!” since he has created the categories that were installed at the deepest point of their interiority by the colonizing process, categories which continue to legislate their own knowledge of themselves as “a subjected people.” Moreover, Fanon writes, “colonialism is not satisfied merely with holding a people in its grip and emptying the native’s brain of all form and content. By a kind of perverted logic, it turns out to be the past of the oppressed people, and distorts, disfigures, and destroys it” (Fanon 210). Deleuze refers to this as the condition by which a “people as Subject” falls to the condition of a “people-subjected” (TI 164ff). As we have witnessed many times, the question of “identity” is always a dizzying and even treacherous problem from the position of the colonized, leading often to the very “impasse” from which this category was created, underscoring an “intolerable situation,” since the identity they assume in speaking, in saying “I (the colonized)” has been essentially fabulated and only serves to subject them further. This intolerable condition of enunciation is a condition that is specific to the concept of “minor literature.” At the same time, we must take inventory of the fact that the history of literature in the West is full of examples of this impossible situation; for example: Hippolytus and Phaedra, Antigone; Kafka’s “metamorphosis,” there is Gregor who cannot speak, but rather emits a shrill note that can barely be discerned; but also in Melville, we have the character of Babo in “Benito Cereno” who refuses to speak “as the accused” and chooses to remain silent (therefore, in full possession of his speech), but also in the figure of Bartleby with his “I would prefer not to…. ”

     

    Why does this situation appear as a fundamental problematic, if not to signal something genetic to the literary enunciation: the problem and the power of “falsehood,” of the fictional status of the enunciation that essentially haunts the situation of writing? Taking up the notion of the “public sphere,” such a concept already refers to the particularly “striated openness” (Offendlichkeit) which is established when the dominant institutions of language and culture reflect the pre-conscious interests of the nation-state or class. In such condition, the literary machine itself has already been “reterritorialized” and now functions to reflect the genius of the national character or the spirit of Culture. Thus, we might refer to this moment, one that has prepared the way for the strictly ideological representation of literature in the academy today, which is reduced to a sub-compartment of the “political unconscious” or to the poetics of the State-form. This representation of literature is necessarily one-dimensional, and must sacrifice the variable relationships that originally belonged to the production of the art-work, and above all, must repress the whole question of art often by reducing it to the category of aesthetics which can, in turn, be prosecuted for its falsifying production. Here we might refer to the process of this reterritorialization, again using the analysis of the relationship between the “war machine” and the “State-form” outlined earlier. When a literary machine is captured by the State-form and provided an end, what is that end except a war directed against “the people” in the form of national memory and an official story-telling function? Recalling the problems of criticism we raised in the beginning of this discussion, the very taxonomy and organization of literature soon repeats the rank-and-file order of major and minor tastes, as well as the striated organization of the story-telling function into a form of Canon. On the contrary, the writer does not often seek to represent the truth since, as Deleuze remarks, the “truth” is often the category invented by the colonizer and the oppressor. Rather, citing another anecdotal phrase that Deleuze often employs, the writer seeks to raise the false to a higher power, that is, beyond the moral-juridical opposition of true-false that is maintained by the model of truth. To raise the false to a higher power is to discover the principle of fabulation that governs even truthful representation, to turn this principle into a critical force which addresses the intolerable situation of “a people who is missing.” Accordingly, literature bears within its fragmented body–scattered, torn to pieces, or ‘dispersed on the four winds”–the seeds of a people to come. These seeds are the germs of a “collective assemblage of enunciation,” which as Deleuze often declares, are real without necessarily being actual and ideal without necessarily being abstract (TI 147ff).

     

    Today, Deleuze and Guattari situate the conditions for the emergence of minor literature in a world where the forms of collective enunciation and national consciousness are breaking down on several fronts, as a result of the immigration patterns and displacement of national labor forces, and the decline of the “State-form” itself.

     

    How many people today live in a language that is not their own? Or no longer, not yet, even know their own and know poorly the major language that they are forced to serve? This is a problem of immigrants, and especially of their children, the problem of minorities, the problem of minor literature, but also a problem for all of us: how to tear a minor literature away from its own language, allowing it to challenge the language and making it follow a sober revolutionary path? How to become a nomad and an immigrant and a gypsy in relation to one's own language? (K 19)

     

    In understanding the above passage, in order to determine the status of the “literary,” the primary emphasis must fall upon the absence of a particular collective enunciation from official and public institutions of language and national culture. In the absence of a distinct majoritarian formation of the “public sphere,” which gives enunciations weight and reference–which “orders reality,” in so many words–a body of literature assumes the shadowy and non-essential region of a collective enunciation, a “minor public” whose existence is always haunted by the “imaginary” (or fabulous) nature of its agora (its open space). But, as Deleuze and Guattari write,

     

    the literary machine thus becomes the relay for a revolutionary machine-to-come, not at all for ideological reasons but because the literary machine alone is determined to fill the conditions of collective enunciation that is lacking elsewhere in the mileau: literature is the people's concern. (K 17-18)

     

    In order to strip this last statement of any romanticism in association with the nationalist or ethnic entity of a people invented during the 19th century, I should stress that without specific attention to the position of enunciation that is evoked here, we lose both the status of what Deleuze-Guattari call the “literary machine” and the specific relationship that is being drawn up between a collective enunciation and the concept of minor literature. Here, the status of a minor literature is the problem of its multiple forms and locations, since it does not have an institution that organizes and disciplines its forms. This does not mean that it is formless, but rather its organization of collective enunciations is dispersed across several registers of the major language it inhabits (legends, private letters, songs, heated conversations, stories, fables, etc.) and has the character of dream-language in the various operations it performs upon the form of visibilities and on the organization of statements. Finally, only when these criteria of minor literature are fulfilled can we begin to understand the statement that “literature is a concern of the people,” perhaps even a vital concern of public health–a concern that may demand both a clinical and a critical approach to the uses (and the abuses) of the question of literature for life.

     

    Notes

     

    1. C.f., “Appendix,” Foucault, p. 131ff. Some of the examples Deleuze gives of these new arrangements are “the foldings proper to the chains of a genetic sequence, a new form of life based on the potential of silicon in third generation machines,” the political and economic stratification of the earth under the final stages of capitalism. The description of a vital logic (or “radical empiricism”) echoes the fabulous “problem-solving” instinct of Life first defined in Bergsonism. (C.f., “Élan Vital as a Movement of Differentiation,” pp. 91-113.) Hereafter, all parenthetical citations will refer to the following works; the most frequently cited references will be indicated parenthetically by the following abbreviations:

     

        • Anti-Oedipus: AO
        • Bergsonism: B
        • Difference and Repetition: DR
        • Empiricism and Subjectivity: H
        • Essays Critical and Clinical (Critique et Clinique): CC
        • Kafka: Toward a Minor Literature: K
        • Logic of Sense: LS
        • Cinema I: The Movement Image: MI
        • Cinema II: The Time Image: TI
        • Foucault F
        • Negotiations: N
        • Présentation de Sacher-Masoch (Coldness and Cruelty): M
        • A Thousand Plateaus: TP.
        • What is Philosophy?: WP

     

    2. Wlad Godzich, “Emergent Literature and Comparative Literature,” in The Culture of Literacy (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1994), 275.

     

    3. At times the reader may notice a certain unapologetic Nietzschean tone–as Deleuze himself describes, “becoming a bit of a guerrilla” (LS 158)–in my characterization of the current critical approach to the question of literature. This is not accidental. In my view, there is a weakness inherent in those commentators today who want to appropriate Deleuze’s writings without also appropriating what is dangerous in it as well. It is to raise the possibility of something dangerous or inherently risky that I have alluded to Nietzsche�’s essay “The Uses and Abuses of History for Life,” which itself concerns a similar set of problems and issues that surrounded the dominant epistemological orientation of his age. Although my implicit aim is to cause the current critical image of literature to “explode,” this objective is justified by the belief that only what is worthy of being valued can be submitted to destruction with the faith that this “will promote rather than injure the general propriety” of its uses for life (Nietzsche 86).

     

    4. For a very brief and preliminary discussion of the concept of “disciplinary societies,” see “Postscript on Control Societies,” Negotiations, trans. Martin Joughlin (New York: Columbia UP, 1995), pages 177-182. Concerning the present moment, Deleuze comments that “discipline would in its turn begin to break down as new forces slowly moved into place, then made rapid advances after the Second World War: [from that point] we were no longer in disciplinary societies, we were leaving them behind” (N 178).

     

    5. This is most evident today in marxist or feminist theories, for example, where each statement must refer back to the subject of enunciation in order retain its representative function. Elizabeth Grosz’s writings, for example, bear all the characteristics of a good chess game, in which she must first lay out the positions between orthodox and radical feminism on one side, and the writings of Deleuze and Guattari on the other; surveying which moves are possible and which are not, referring back to the subject of enunciation to discover which statements can be employed to further the game for feminists. Her thinking always moves forward under the condition, even the mandate, that she cannot lose her subject (even if she wanted to) without also losing the representative function of her discourse; consequently, her writing moves constantly “between” feminist subject and the philosophy of Deleuze, proposing an implacable “becoming” which never achieves identification of closure on either end. This constitutes her strategy, since after mapping the board and studying the intrinsic attributes of every piece, Grosz begins the process of redefining the intrinsic characteristics of each concept and thereby injecting new statements into the discourse of feminism that have a potential for collective enuncation.

     

    6. By this statement, I am suggesting a mirror reflection of Foucault’s own commentary on the philosophy of Deleuze-Guattari in the preface to Anti-Oedipus. From as early as Présentation de Sacher-Masoch (1967), Deleuze has identified a certain “clinical” resemblance of a uses of literature or the taxonomy of the “literary sign” that resembles the construction of the proper name (i.e., Parkinson’s, Roger’s) that is made to diagnose symptoms that were previously grouped together and links them up with others that were dissociated. Here, we see a very different conception to the “uses of literature,” one which corresponds in the Deleuzian oeuvre to two important figures: Nietzsche and Spinoza. The figure of Nietzsche has evolved in Deleuze�s thought from its earlier role as the double of Klossowski’s “Baphomet” (i.e., prince of modifications, doctor of the Eternal Return); more recently, his enthusiasm for the “ideal game” has been replaced by another no less profound Nietzsche who resembles less the Nietzsche of Klossowski (or Mallarmé) than the Nietzsche of Foucault: the psychologist of forces and forms that constitute “modernity,” author of the genealogy and the Will to Power, distant cousin to Zarathustra and the writer of Ecce Homo (who were, after all, literary types). Therefore, Deleuze’s remarks concern less an evaluation of “Foucault,” the man and thinker, than a new figure that completes and synthesizes a Nietzschean psychology with a Spinozist ethics.

     

    7. This is to say that in each case the writer herself begins from “a point outside” the critical determination or representation of literature; she begins always–or, at least, in most cases–with the question “what is literature?” Or rather, she begins with a certain series of problematics: “What is…” A narrative? A story? A character? A language? In each case, her answers are always temporary and take the form of a story or narrative, a certain tale or novella, this or that character. This corresponds to a fundamental axiom in Deleuze’s philosophy, often described as his “radical empiricism” or even “pragmatism.” That is, the condition of a statement on literature is at the same time a condition of literary enunciation itself; the criteria by which literature appears as an object of real experience are at the same time the condition of expression or enunciation. It is for this reason that a critical cannot take on a major form without invoking a transcendental function, or without appealing to certain categories that would each time function as constants whether that of the “author,” “narrator,” the “text,” “genre,” or “narrative mode.” The entry of structuralist categories into the study of language and literature after the 1950s marks a certain scientific function which has dominated the major movements of literary criticism from that period onward; however, the need to guarantee a constancy of the object of knowledge, which is a major trait of structurist and narratological theories (like those of Genette, in particular, but also Prince and even Iser in his earlier writings) may, in fact, share the attributes of what Deleuze-Guattari describe as “Royal Science” in their Treatise on Nomadology, and indirectly serve to inscribe the value of literary expression within an apparatus of specialization that also bears a political function consonant with the institutional determination of its subject (which could be invoked as an aspect of reterritorialization).

     

    8. See Frantz Fanon, The Wretched of the Earth, trans. Constance Farrington (New York: Grove Press, 1963).

     

    9. Here, the Borgesian formula of “Fang has a secret” often recounted by Deleuze can be used paradigmatically of this moment of turning, or decision, in which nothing is guaranteed. That is, “Fang has a secret” and “there is a stranger at the door.” In order to illustrate the paradigmatic value of this formula, we could substitute for the nameless identity of the stranger the forces signaled by the emergence of a life based on silicon, the formation of the capitalist in the final stages of planetary deployment, the deterritorialization and crisis of disciplinary regimes and their reterritorialization by mechanisms of the “control society,” the emergence of racialized identities and new fascisms of the flesh. In turn, each of these “strangers” marks turning points for the human form, as well as a fullness of time, a time pregnant with possibility, the moment of a “dice-throw.” (These are the somber precursors spoken of in Difference and Repetition.) That is, each arrangement presents us with diverse possibilities, with possible futures that bifurcate, tracing the curve of the present that goes toward the future announced by the new assemblage of Life that appears on the horizon. Borges, for example, discovered a possible means of escaping a colonizing relationship with the past through a comic procedure of overturning the European library and parodying the God of European history in its colonial situation. Kafka discovered through the fictional personage of “K.” a manner to research the diabolical assemblage of law and the institution of the state-form. Burroughs diagnosed the secret filiation of the alien, the homosexual, the junkie as victims the paranoia unleashed by the “bio-power” of modern state which defines its internal enemies in terms of a virus. And there are countless more examples of these “somber precursors” in Deleuze’s work (Buchner’s Lenz, Nietzsche’s Zarathustra, Well’s Cane, Melville’s Ahab or Benito Cereno, Duras and Resnais’s Hiroshima). For a fuller discussion, see my “Deleuzian Critique of Pure Fiction,” Sub-Stance 84 (Vol. 26, n. 3, 1997), 128-152.

    Works Cited

     

    • Benjamin, Walter. Illuminations. Forward by Hannah Arendt. New York: Schocken, 1968.
    • Celan, Paul. Poems of Paul Celan. Trans. Michael Hamburger. New York: Persea Books, 1972.
    • Deleuze, Gilles. Bergsonism. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam. New York: Zone Books, 1988.
    • —. Cinema II: The Time Image. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Robert Galeta. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1989.
    • —. Coldness and Cruelty. New York: Zone Books, 1991.
    • —. Empiricism and Subjectivity: An Essay on Hume’s Theory of Human Nature. Trans. Constantin V. Boundas. New York: Columbia UP 1991.
    • —. Essays Critical and Clinical. Trans. Daniel W. Smith and Michael Greco. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1997.
    • —. The Fold: Leibniz and the Baroque. Trans. Tom Conley. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993.
    • —. Foucault. Trans. Sean Hand. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1988.
    • —. The Logic of Sense. Trans. Constantin Boundas. New York: Columbia UP, 1995.
    • —. Prisentation de Sacher-Masoch: le froid et le cruel. Paris: Minuit, 1967.
    • — and Guattari, Felix. Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Robert Hurley, Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1983.
    • —. Kafka: Toward a Minor Literature. Trans. Dana Polan. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1986.
    • —. A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia. Trans. Brian Masumi. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987.
    • —. What is Philosophy? Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Graham Burchell. New York: Columbia UP, 1994.
    • Fanon, Frantz. The Wretched fo the Earth. Trans. Constance Farrington. New York: Grove Press, 1963.
    • Foucault, Michel. “What is an Author?” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice: Selected Essays and Interviews. Trans. Donald Bouchard and Sherry Simon. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1977. 117-138.
    • Freud, Sigmund. “Creative Writers and Day-Dreaming.” S.E. Volume IX: 143-153.
    • Godzich, Wlad. The Culture of Literacy. Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1994.
    • Kafka, Franz. Diaries. Ed. Max Brod. New York: Shocken Books, 1948.
    • Lambert, Gregg. “The Deleuzean Critique of Pure Fiction.” Sub-Stance 84 Vol. 26, n. 3, 1997: 128-152.
    • Nietzsche, Fredrick. “On the Advantages and Disadvantages of History for Life.” Untimely Meditations. Trans. R.J. Hollingdale. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1997: 57-124.
    • Proust, Marcel. In Search of Lost Time. Volume V: The Captive and the Fugitive. Trans. C.K. Scott Montcrieff and Terrance Kilmartin. Revised by D.J. Enright. New York: The Modern Library, 1993.
    • —. In Search of Lost Time. Volume VI: Time Regained. Trans. Andreas Mayor and Terrance Kilmartin. New York: The Modern Library, 1993.

     

  • Ordering the New World: Violence and its Re/Presentation in the Gulf War and Beyond

    Simon Chesterman

    Magdalen College–Oxford University
    simon.chesterman@magdalen.oxford.ac.uk

     

    Overture: The Gulf War Did Not Take Place

    Since this war was won in advance, we will never know what it would have been like had it existed. We will never know what an Iraqi taking part with a chance of fighting would have been like. We will never know what an American taking part with a chance of being beaten would have been like. We have seen what an ultra-modern process of electrocution is like, a process of paralysis or lobotomy of an experimental enemy away from the field of battle with no possibility of reaction. But this is not a war, any more than 10,000 tons of bombs per day is sufficient to make it a war. Any more than the direct transmission by CNN of real time information is sufficient to authenticate a war.–Baudrillard (The Gulf War 61) War is peace.
    Freedom is slavery.
    Ignorance is strength.–Nineteen Eighty-Four
    Be it thy course to busy giddy minds
    With foreign quarrels. --Henry IV, Part 2
    Less than two weeks before the American and British air attack on Baghdad and Iraqi positions in Kuwait in January 1991, Jean Baudrillard published an article in Libération entitled “The Gulf War Will Not Take Place” in which he wrote that this war would never happen.1Baudrillard argued that war as a deterrent in the traditional sense had been internalised by the Western powers, producing a form of self-deterrence that left them incapable of realising their own power through the expressive medium of force. The unreal build-up, the asymptotic prelude that would allow a brush with war but no encounter, was symptomatic of hostilities in which it is the virtual that functions to deter the real event. In such a régime, all that is left is the simulacrum2 of war:

     

    We are no longer in a logic of the passage from virtual to actual but in a hyperrealist logic of the deterrence of the real by the virtual. (27)

     

    Among the calamities of war may be jointly numbered the diminution of the love of truth by the falsehoods which interest dictates and credulity encourages. –Samuel Johnson

     

    With the passage of war into the virtual, the potentiality of the Gulf War was said to exist ultimately as a figment of mass-media simulation, war-games rhetoric, or imaginary scenarios. In no “real” sense could these virtual preparations manifest in war. Like the political leaders, military personnel knew not what to make of their function of death and destruction: “They are pledged to the decoy of war as the others are to the decoy of power” (The Gulf War 28).

     

    Surely, as diverse critics pointed out, Baudrillard was directly contradicted by the facts.3 Surely the massive aerial bombardment of Iraqi military and civil infrastructure, the ensuing air and land assault, the “turkey shoot” (Freedman and Karsh 402-03)4 of the retreating troops on the road to Basra which left in the order of 100,000 Iraqi casualties demonstrated that there had, in fact, been a war. Surely Baudrillard could not have been more wrong.
     

    The surgical strikes against Iraq engendered a running sore which, though contained, continues to be picked at by a Western coalition resentful of Saddam’s failure to “play ball.” The sterilised images of video war in the Gulf were succeeded by the orgiastic fury of Bosnia and its eroticisation of atrocity. And crisis in the Gulf has given rise to a crisis of sorts in postmodern theory.

     

    This paper takes Baudrillard’s discussion of the Gulf War qua non-event as the departure point for a consideration of the presentation and representation of violence in the post-Cold War era. I argue that although the deployment of violence has been transformed, as Baudrillard argues, this (re)formation is meaningless absent a conception of the space violence occupies in the hypothesis of international order. In this way, my interrogation of the face of violence merges into a critique of violence as such–a dynamic whose relationship to order is at once antagonistic and symbiotic.

     

    This critique has implications for the analysis of international relations, but may also open up a more productive engagement between international relations and international law. In distinct ways, each discourse holds statism as axiomatic–as the unitary locus of power and legitimacy respectively. A critique of violence may provoke a doctrinal reassessment of the a priori equation of order and law that presently legitimates the realist presumptions of international relations and forecloses an interrogation of the theoretical bases of international law.
     


     

    The Clean War: A Just War or Just a Game?

     

    Was this a just war or just a game? For the winners, both: for the losers, neither. To suggest… that it could be both or neither simultaneously is to challenge the US effort to construct out of this war a new world order based on one truth, one winner, one loser…. [T]his cyberwar is the result of the US effort to fill and to delimit the new void left by the end of the Cold War, the end of the old order, the ‘end of history’. While the architecture of the new world order may be built of simulations, its hegemonic effect will be all too real for those nation-states that have little to gain from it. (Der Derian 196-7)

     

    [T]he brutal aggression of Saddam Hussein . . . . It’s black and white. The facts are clear. The choice unambiguous. Right vs wrong.
    –George Bush, the morning after (qtd. in Yant 54)By God, we’ve kicked the Vietnam Syndrome once and for all.–George Bush, the morning after (qtd. in Der Derian 9)

     

    The Gulf War was the archetypal authorised expression of force designed to usher in a New World Order.5 The logic of deterrence (Desert Shield) gave way to a righteous vengeance (Desert Storm) presaged and pursued by a logic of representation that came to define the ‘war’ itself. More than any other conflict in human history, this authorised bloodshed was scripted for consumption by a willing global audience.

     

    The defining images of the Gulf War remain those viewed through the cross-hairs of a smart bomb’s targeting system: the New World Order was to be established by precision violence that could follow street maps to a target and enter an underground bunker through the front door (Freedman and Karsh 312). It was a perverse postlude to the sepia-toned horror of the Second World War and the sprawling realism of Vietnam–a knowing prelude to the prime time marine landing in Somalia.

     

     

    Cokie Roberts (ABC): "You see a building in a sight--it looks more like a video game than anything else. Is there any sort of danger that we don't have any sense of the horrors of war--that it's all a game?" Gen Norman Schwarzkopf: "You don't see me treating it like a game. And you didn't see me laughing and joking while it was going on. There are human lives being lost, and at this stage of the game [sic] this is not a time for frivolity on the part of anybody."This Week with David Brinkley (qtd. in Der Derian 183)

     

    But the 43-day Gulf War was “clean” only in terms of the images that constituted it. Former U.S. Secretary of Defense Richard Cheney has stated that the U.S.-led international military assault was spearheaded by “the most successful air-campaign in the history of the world” (Middle East Watch 1). In terms of the coalition’s strategic interests this claim is perhaps justified.

     

    Should we consider multiplying clean wars in order to reduce the murderous death toll of peacetime? –Baudrillard (The Gulf War 69)

    Airborne superiority was quickly and easily established with more tonnage of high explosive being dropped on Iraq during the first month of the conflict than was used the entire Second World War (Gerbner 252).

     

    The result was that coalition casualties in the eventual ground war were low, with official figures listing 240 dead and 776 wounded (U.S. Department of Defense 411). Of these, a quarter of the American deaths and more than half the British were caused by “friendly fire” (Triumph Without Victory 373). If such deaths are subtracted from the total, there were more casualties in the war exercises leading up to “G-Day” (the beginning of the ground war) than during the war itself (Der Derian 196). As Baudrillard wryly points out, it seems probable that of the half a million American forces involved in seven months of operations in the Gulf, three times as many would have died in road accidents had they remained in civilian life (The Gulf War 69).

     

    It is instructive that in a “war” characterised by its precision and detail, the only aspect of the conflict over which much serious doubt remains is the number of Iraqi forces and civilians who perished or were wounded. In his postwar briefing (quickly renamed by the wags in the press “the mother of all press briefings”), General Schwarzkopf told reporters that “there were a very, very large number of dead in these [front line combat] units, a very, very large number of dead” (qtd. in “The Persian Gulf War” A36). When pressed, the U.S. Central Command plucked the figure of 100,000 out of the air, with a margin of error of 50 per cent (Freedman and Karsh 408). While the Pentagon subsequently released exact numbers of Iraqi military hardware destroyed down to the last tank, the calculation of Iraqi casualties was said to remain “impossible” (Freedman and Karsh 408). When the three-volume, 1300-page official history of the Gulf War was published, it made no mention of Iraqi deaths and a draft chapter on casualties is reported to have been deleted (Baker 13).6
     

    We believe that they immorally pervert images. Not so. They alone are conscious of the profound immorality of images. –Baudrillard (The Gulf War 47)

     

    In the following sections, I consider the implications of this successful transposition of images during the war, a transposition that reduced public perception of the conflict to a black and white morality play, enacted on a two-dimensional representation of distant “other” lands (Link 55).
     


     

    Burying the Dead

     

    [F]ormer Secretary of Defense Richard Cheney hid behind the law when confronted with reports that United States and Saudi forces used combat earthmovers and tanks fitted with plows to bury alive thousands of Iraqi soldiers, asserting that such tactics were not illegal unless the Iraqi troops formally surrendered. (Normand and af Jochnick 387)

     

    I have absolutely no idea what the Iraqi casualties are, and I tell you, if I have anything to say about it, we’re never going to get into the body-count business.–Gen. Schwarzkopf (NY times article name, page)

     

    A central point of concern for the Pentagon during the Gulf War was what may be appropriately euphemised as “necrology.” The Pentagon’s suppression of the “body count” was part of a broader projection of the military as possessing the technology to win war without killing, with minimal killing, or with visually innocuous killing (Margot Norris 228-30). The ground attack, which began with the unprecedented tactic of ploughing live Iraqi soldiers into trenches in the desert, provides a grim metaphor for the results.7

     

    The generally high approval of the Gulf War seems clearly linked to the success of the military’s censorship of its human cost (Margot Norris 231). Apparently simple language games in the reportage of the war were seen to be disturbingly effective in blunting public sentiment for Iraqi civilian dead. An American poll found that only 21% of those polled were “very concerned” about the amount of “collateral damage” produced by the war. By contrast, 49% were “very concerned” about “the number of civilian casualties and other unintended damage” in Iraq (Rosenstiel A9).

    [Y]ou avoid talking about lives lost, and that serves both an esthetic and a practical purpose.–Loren Thompson (NYTimes article name, 10)Unlike the war in Vietnam, progress in the Gulf war can be clearly measured as the front lines move forward or retreat, and body count will fade into the oblivion it so richly deserves.–Col Harry Summers, Jr (Ret) (A5, A13)

     

    Those dead whom the U.S. military did allow the press to see were often placed in carefully scripted scenes. The soldiers killed while retreating from Kuwait City had been travelling in Iraq vehicles packed with loot–reporters obediently criminalised the dead as burglars, thieves, and thugs (Margot Norris 235). News reports of this, the major story of the ground war, gave as much space to inventories of the plundered goods as descriptions of the human carnage (Margot Norris 243).8

     

    This muted representation–the war won without death–seems at odds with the essentially symbolic function of the dead body in warfare, a material fact that is needed to realise the discourse of military conquest:

     

    [T]he outcome of war has its substantiation not in an absolute inability of the defeated to contest the outcome but in a process of perception that allows extreme attributes of the body to be translated into another language, to be broken away from the body and relocated elsewhere at the very moment that the body itself is disowned.... The force of the material world is separated from the fifty-seven thousand or fifty million bodies and conferred not only on issues and ideologies that have as a result of the first function been designated the winner, but also on the idea of winning itself. (Scarry 124)

     

    The gradual shrinking of the destructive part of smart bombs was not done for humanitarian purposes. Planners simply calculated that pound for pound, computers, sensors, and fuel were often worth more to overall effectiveness than blast power.The New Republic (Easterbrook 17-18)It is the unreality of anywhere outside the U.S., in the eyes of its citizens, which must frighten any foreigner. Like an infant who has yet to learn there are other centres of self, this culture sees others merely as fodder for its dreams and nightmares.–The Guardian (Williamson 21)

    In this way, the corpse as sign has traditionally served to mediate between the perception and the reality of winning.

     

    In the Gulf War, the corpse was used in ever more subtle ways; the “veiled, vague, but indisputable Iraqi dead served the substantiation of pure U.S. power” (Margot Norris 239), but it was a power that lacked instrumentality except in its own symbolic supererogation. The control over violence was thus augmented by control over its representation; crucially, it enabled a double victory that demonstrated virtually unlimited U.S. power to produce death, while escaping its political and moral consequences.

     

    This was the expiation of America’s “Vietnam syndrome,” a condition that makes no sense without seeing Vietnam as a defeat on both military and moral fronts. Herman and Chomsky describe earlier U.S. attempts to reconstruct ideology and overcome “what Norman Podhoretz, echoing Goebbels, calls ‘the sickly inhibitions against the use of military force’” (Manufacturing Consent 236-37),9 but it was the Gulf War that “revived [the] self-confidence of Americans,” who felt “relief and pride–relief at remarkably few U.S. casualties and pride in the brilliant performance of the allied forces” (“Gulf War, and Peace” A26). Chilling words in an editorial of the New York Times.
     


     

    Virtual War

     

    The real warmongers are those who live on the ideology of the veracity of this war, while the war itself wreaks its havoc at another level by trickery, hyperreality, simulacra, and by the entire mental strategy of deterrence which is played out in the facts and in the images, in the anticipation of the real by the virtual, of the event by virtual time, and in the inexorable confusion of the two. All those who understand nothing of this involuntarily reinforce this halo of bluff which surrounds us. (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 67)

     

    Gradually the images of the bombs more smart than their Iraqi targets blur into one another.
    The ghostly green images of night-vision technology introduced a Manichean quality to the opening scenes of the attack (Der Derian 180). Similarly, the tracking cameras of smart bombs presented the war as a voyeuristic fantasy: a sick parody of “America’s Funniest Home Video.” But the more closely we examine the images of this “war,” we realise that there is nothing but the image. And if we look closer still, the image itself begins to dissolve into pixels of light and dark–a pixelated/pixilated (literally “pixie-led”) bastard child of the “mother of all wars.”
    What are the implications of taking Baudrillard’s thesis seriously?
     

    One is reminded of Capricorn One, in which the flight of a manned rocket to Mars, which only took place in a desert studio, was relayed live to all the television stations in the world.–Baudrillard (The Gulf War 61)

     

    This is not, of course, to suggest that he should be taken literally. His argument is not that nothing took place in January and February 1991, but that it was unlike any war that had gone before, and that in a very real sense we are unable to verify precisely what took place–direct transmission by CNN of real time information notwithstanding (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 61).

     

    Thus far, his argument finds much support. Chomsky, for example, also questions the use of the term “war” to describe events, because “there never was a war, at least, if the concept involves two sides in combat. That didn’t happen in the Gulf” (Deterring Democracy 409).10 Even official reports ultimately acknowledged that the size of the Iraqi army had been overestimated,11 and that the eventual battle was one-sided (Freedman and Karsh 407-9).

     

    There is also widespread acknowledgment of the limitations of media reports at the time. In addition to the wealth of U.S. law review articles undertaking a First Amendment analysis of media access to the conflict12 (an endearingly isolationist response), only the most devoted CNN correspondent would deny that military censorship and the concentration of sources distorted the information that was ultimately published.13 This ranged from the strategic to the absurd. At one extreme, media reports of U.S.

     

    Marines on the Saudi border and on amphibious ships off the coast were part of a calculated (and effective) strategy to deceive Iraqi intelligence as to the likely direction of the attack (Taylor and Blackwell 234). At the other, the charade of media hegemony nearly collapsed in those moments when the CNN cameras crossed live to a group of reporters assembled “somewhere in the Gulf”–only to have them confess that they too were sitting around watching CNN to find out what was happening.14 Other studies have detailed the use of propaganda in the conflict: a falsified eye-witness account of Iraqi soldiers removing babies from incubators and leaving them to die;15 uncritical CNN footage of a “bombed baby milk factory” that boasted a camouflaged roof, high-security fence, and armed guards (Rennie 17).
     

    All political and ideological speculations fall under mental deterrence (stupidity). By virtue of their immediate consensus on the evidence they feed the unreality of this war, they reinforce its bluff by their unconscious dupery.–Baudrillard (The Gulf War 67)

     

    But Baudrillard goes much further than this. He argues that more than simply questioning the nature of this war and the media’s complicity in its exposition, there is a need to interrogate the very notion of truth qua simulacrum itself. Assuming a position for or against the war denies inquiry into “the very probability of the war, its credibility or degree of reality” (The Gulf War 67). Rather, it is necessary to resist the probability of the image (26-7, 66).

     

    It is this argument that provoked a book-length response from Christopher Norris.16 He argues that Baudrillard’s essays constitute a definitive exposure of the political bankruptcy of postmodern scholarship and “the depth of ideological complicity that exists between such forms of extreme anti-realist or irrationalist doctrine and the crisis of moral and political nerve” that presently afflicts Western intellectuals (27). Attacking the “frivolous” exercise of making the Gulf War into a pretext for arcane disputes about the “politics of theory,” he links such theoretical exercises to a prevailing mood of “cynical acquiescence” that fails to contest the official version of events (29).

     

    Norris’s warnings as to the dangers of dissociating theory from praxis are, of course, important. But his reading of Baudrillard’s scepticism as demonstrative of moral and political nihilism (194) assumes an opponent of straw. For the challenge that Baudrillard presents is not the rejection of political purchase, but a rigorous resistance to the acceptance of the virtual as or in place of the real:

     

    Resist the probability of any image or information whatever. Be more virtual than events themselves, do not seek to re-establish the truth, we do not have the means, but do not be duped, and to that end re-immerse the war and all information in the virtuality from whence they come. Turn deterrence back against itself. Be meteorologically sensitive to stupidity. (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 66-67)

     

    If Mattel brought out a doe-eyed doll called Iraqi Baby, it could be guaranteed to evoke pity. Meanwhile on the national news, shots of birds caught in ‘Saddam’s oil slick’ have been presented more poignantly than the human victims of our bombing. The Guardian (Williamson 43)17It is not for lack of brandishing the threat of a chemical war, a bloody war, a world war–everyone had their say–as though it were necessary to give ourselves a fright, to maintain everyone in a state of erection for fear of seeing the flaccid member of war fall down. This futile masturbation was the delight of all the TVs.–Baudrillard (The Gulf War 74)

     

    Norris reads this reference to “stupidity” as denying any “operative difference between truth and falsehood, veridical knowledge and its semblance” (12), and precluding any form of ethico-political accountability that depends upon a notion of the “real” (194). Nevertheless, Baudrillard’s position is more properly seen as denoting a profound and abiding suspicion of a “reality” whose primary referent is the simulations of American war games.

     

    Moreover, the tone of Baudrillard’s essays is far from equivocal. At times his writing exhibits a very black reductio ad absurdum humour: So you say this was a clean, minimalist war with little “collateral damage”? Why stop there–war? what war? (Patton 7). The prevailing tone is ironic, however. The logic of deterrence (the sustained denial of the possibility of war) has come to supplant the actuality of war; violence can only take place as a sterilised simulation of itself.18 In an extended sexual metaphor, the military–which thrives on particular forms of male sexuality–is emasculated by its dependence on virtual pornography.19

     

    Baudrillard also appears to be aware of these criticisms. In stating, as he did just a few weeks before the UN deadline expired, that the proposed war would not take place, he acknowledged the dangers of such an approach in a postscriptum:

     

    To demonstrate the impossibility of war just at the moment when it must take place, when the signs of its occurrence are accumulating, is a stupid gamble. But it would have been even more stupid not to seize the opportunity. (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 28)

     

    In pursuing such a “fatal strategy,” Baudrillard plays upon his own belief that writing should be less a representation of reality than its transfiguration (Patton 6). He has subsequently suggested that in time and with a little imagination, it may be possible to read The Gulf War Did Not Take Place as if it were a science fiction novel (qtd. in Gane 203).
     

    [A]rmchair strategists can now fly over the virtual battlefield. . . during any moment of the battle. They can even change the parameters–give the Iraqis infrared targeting scopes, for instance, which they lacked at the time.Wired (Sterling 95-96)20

     

    James Der Derian, by contrast, argues that such an approach may be more effective than that presented by the modernist school of criticism. Der Derian states that theorists who attempted to construct a critical and universal counter-memory were easily isolated as anti-American and dismissed as utopian (177). Adopting a poststructuralist approach to such political encounters may well bring with it the danger that no new pragmatic basis for justice and truth will emerge. Nevertheless, he argues,

     

    ...better strategically to play with apt critiques of the powerful new forces unleashed by cyberwar than to hold positions with antiquated tactics and nostalgic unities. (178)

     

    But just how new is this notion of a “cyberwar”? And what implications does it have today, now that the smart bombs are yesterday’s toys and the rhetoric of the New World Order lies in the ruins of Somalia, Bosnia, and Rwanda?
     


     

    Virtual Order

     

    The first and most obvious lesson of the Gulf War to
    date is that technology works.
    
                            --Naval Institute Proceedings
    			  (qtd. in Margot Norris 232)

     

    Buck Rogers or Luke Skywalker would be at home in the Gulf War.Naval Institute Proceedings (qtd. in Margot Norris 232)[M]odern war is a cyborg orgy.–Haraway (66)

     

    Margot Norris considers the Gulf War-inspired thesis that “technology works” as inaugurating an Enlightenment fascination with the progressive rationalism of smart weaponry. Coupled with a corresponding apathy and disavowal of human suffering, she argues that death at the hands of such “modern” tools of destruction takes on the pornographic contours of de Sade (232).21

     

    If the distinctive characteristics of the Gulf War were (merely) improved killing capacity and public apathy, however, the only novel aspect would be the scale on which it was conducted. It is precisely this modernist conception of order through technology that has long dominated international relations theory. Among other things, it underpinned the arms race, plaything of the (ana)logic of game theory.22 Similarly, the scientific use of propaganda has played a significant role in armed hostilities since at least the First World War.23

     

    But it is the deeper critique in Baudrillard’s analysis that isolates the peculiarities of the Gulf War as a “postmodern” conflict.24 Here it is important to read his work in the context of an international system that had only recently passed from “dualistic (East and West) deterrence” (The Gulf War 84), and in which a pax Americana seemed to be a distinct possibility. The truth claim that Baudrillard contests is that which would posit the “war” as “the first consensual war, the first war conducted legally and globally with a view to putting an end to war” (The Gulf War 83).25 In this light, far from being apolitical, his work can be read as a challenge to the view that the world can be reduced to the global common denominator of democracy, with the lowest common multiplier being information in all its forms:

     

    [I]n this electronic war there is no longer an enemy, there is only a refractory element which must be neutralised and consensualised. This is what the Americans seek to do, these missionary people bearing electroshocks which will shepherd everybody towards democracy. (The Gulf War 84)

     

    This argument flies in the face of the shibboleth that America cannot be the world’s policeman [sic]. In truth, it must be more than that. A policeman gets his [sic] assignments from higher authority, but in the community of nations there is no authority higher than America. . . . America is akin to the philosopher in Plato’s parable of the cave. Only the man who has achieved philosophic knowledge is truly fit to rule, said Plato, but having achieved it, he will resist being drawn back down to the mundane tasks of ruling.–Muravchik (1-2)We may have won the Cold War, which is nice–it’s more than nice, it’s wonderful. But this means that now the enemy is us, not them.–Kristol (28)

     

    This of course rails against conservative reactions to the end of the Cold War, most notably the “unabashed victory of economic and political liberalism” posited by Francis Fukuyama in his “End of History” thesis (3).26 In more explicitly populist terms, the way “we won the Cold War”27 has reinforced what “we” knew all along: that Western domination of the world was historically necessary and morally justified.28

     

    Unlike critics of the Left who attack the political hegemony of the U.S.,29 however, Baudrillard’s approach is to focus on the informational hegemony that he sees as legitimating and to some extent making this political dominion inevitable. This approach in particular casts a critical light on contemporary movements within international relations theory. Much of the current literature on the present “crisis” of theory in the discourse points to the intellectual poverty of realism and the precarious position of the state as founding myth of international order.30 Broadly speaking, these tend to focus on the globalising and fragmenting trends in international relations that challenge the position of the state as a unitary body whose territorial borders remain as inviolable as the abstract notion of sovereignty that legitimises them.31 However, while these analyses are instructive in so far as they open up the discipline of international relations to factors other than documenting the behaviour of states, they ultimately retain the perceptions of order and power that tied realism to the level of diplomatic history, working within the modernist epistemology whose political manifestations they seek to challenge.32

     

    In this way, these approaches may be compared to two other attempts to “displace” the realist paradigm while explicitly working within the same conceptual framework: Kenneth Waltz’s “neorealist” structural theory of world politics in the late 1970s33 and Samuel Huntington’s facile “Clash of Civilizations” thesis (Huntington 22). What these approaches have in common is the assumption that the contemporary problems faced by international relations are empirical rather than theoretical,34 a trend that finds its epitome in the much-heralded arrival of neorealism as presenting a more “scientific” approach to politics–that is, an approach that is more “operationalizable.”35 In the case of neorealism, the answer was seen in increasing abstraction of the state as actor; in Huntington’s “Clash of Civilizations” it was the search for a definitive and static paradigm to end the uncertainty left by the post-Cold War world:

     

    In class and ideological conflicts, the key question was "Which side are you on?" and people could and did choose sides and change sides. In conflicts between civilizations, the question is "What are you?" That is a given that cannot be changed.36

     

    Only in the state does man have a rational existence…. Man owes his entire existence to the state, and his being within it alone. Whatever worth and spiritual reality he possesses are solely by virtue of the state.–Hegel (94) (emphasis added)[T]his relationship between law and violence–the continued impossibility of law’s premised alterity to violence–focuses our attention upon the terrain of law’s struggle–a struggle which we might better think of as a struggle with itself. Moreover… this terrain is institutional–the state in international society.
     
    –Kennedy (283)
     
     
    Islam has bloody borders.
     
    –Huntington (35)
     
     
    Muslims contrasted Western actions against Iraq with the West’s failure to protect Bosnians against Serbs. . . . A world of clashing civilizations, however, is inevitably a world of double standards: people apply one standard to their kin-countries and a different standard to others.
     
    –Huntington (36)

     

    This desire to replace the state and sovereignty (taking form in the balance of power) as the ordering principle of international relations with another structural determinant fundamentally misses the point of current uncertainties, merely re-placing new currency into an old economy.37 The “interpretative crisis” recognised by many analysts is not a problem to be solved simply by finding “a new paradigm that accounts for… facts in a more satisfactory fashion” (Huntington 27). Rather, it represents a challenge to the discipline itself, demanding a re-presentation not merely of the state and its anarchical society, but of subject and order.38
     
    Baudrillard’s questioning of the reality of the Gulf War can be read as an ironic challenge to such conceptions of order. In particular, he offers a critique of the political project of theorists such as Fukuyama and Huntington, who in distinct ways posit a new post-Cold War order that is ultimately reducible to an opposition of the West against Islam (Huntington 35-36, 49).39

     

    Baudrillard notes, however, that this is an opposition that will not be fought even in a “cold” war. Western hegemony has gone far beyond that. Instead, as the Gulf War illustrated,

     

    [t]he crucial stake, the decisive stake in this whole affair is the consensual reduction of Islam to the global order. Not to destroy but to domesticate it, by whatever means: modernisation, even military, politicisation, nationalism, democracy, the Rights of Man, anything at all to electrocute the resistances and the symbolic challenge that Islam represents for the entire West. (The Gulf War 85; emphasis added)

     

    In such a régime, war is less a confrontation of warriors than the domestication of refractory forces on the planet. (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 86)
     
    War, as Baudrillard observes, is no longer what it used to be.
     


     

    Reprise: The Gulf War Did Not Take Place (Again)

     

    It was, from the American point of view, a lovely crisis. It had the deep-dyed and familiar villain, Saddam Hussein. It had bold and decisive military action from Commander Clinton, without a single American life put at risk. It featured a reliable supporting actor, Great Britain, playing “loyal little ally”. The U.S. Air Force and the Navy both got leading parts. And it quite knocked out of the national mind any scurrilous gossip about the presidential political consultant Dick Morris. All that, and the missile strikes won 81 per cent approval ratings in the first ABC poll. (Walker 6)

     

    Admittedly, military violence is in the first place used quite directly, as predatory violence, toward its ends. Yet it is very striking that even–or, rather, precisely–in primitive conditions that know hardly the beginnings of constitutional relations, and even in cases where the victor has established himself in invulnerable possession, a peace ceremony is entirely necessary. Indeed, the word “peace,” in the sense in which it is the correlative to the word “war” (for there is also a quite different meaning, similarly unmeta-phorical and political, the one used by Kant in talking of “Eternal Peace”), denotes this a priori, necessary sanctioning, regardless of all other legal conditions, of every victory. This sanction consists precisely in recognizing the new conditions as a new “law,” quite regardless of whether they need de facto any guarantee of their continuation. If, therefore, conclusions can be drawn from military violence, as being primordial and paradigmatic of all violence used for natural ends, there is inherent in all such violence a lawmaking character. –Benjamin (283)

     

    Perhaps the greatest irony of the Gulf War lies in the different fates of its two main characters. Saddam Hussein remains in power, while George Bush was defeated in an election where his rival directly challenged his approach to foreign policy issues. In late 1996 Americans went to the polls once more, with Bill Clinton trumpeting the same slogans as Bush did four years earlier, “Commander Clinton” at the helm of the new world order.

     

    The moral issues that had seemed so black and white to President Bush40–the just war of freedom against tyranny–soon dissolved into the post-conflict dilemmas presented by the Kurds. As the Iraqi régime recovered its strength (despite sanctions that continue to claim civilian lives), it was no longer clear what had been gained from the sacrifice of so many lives. A perfect semblance of victory was exchanged for a perfect semblance of defeat (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 71).
     
    In a very “real” sense, then, the Gulf War did not take place.

     

    Even the last phase of this armed mystification will have changed nothing, for the 100,000 Iraqi dead will only have been the final decoy that Saddam will have sacrificed, the blood money paid... to conserve his power. What is worse is that these dead still serve as an alibi for those who do not want to have been excited for nothing:... at least the dead would prove that this war was indeed a war and not a shameful and pointless hoax (Baudrillard, The Gulf War 72).

     

    Clearly, the Gulf War did not mark the end of war as such. Bosnia and Rwanda are stark reminders that history has not ended, and that the same rages of old are manifest in our New World Order. But the ambiguous start to the New World Order did herald the emergence of a new form of violence. Violence that is unrecognisably sterilised or distorted to serve other ends. Violence justified by reference to a consensus reducible to a single voice. Violence that derives meaning only from representation, which perfect representation emerges as the ordering principle of a world rendered pure through the disavowal of reality beyond the borders of the image.

     

    Notes

    I would like to thank Wayne Morgan for his comments on earlier drafts of this article.

     

    1. This article is reprinted in Baudrillard, The Gulf War Did Not Take Place (1995): all subsequent citations from the article will be from this edition. The essay also appeared in an early translation entitled “The Reality Gulf” in The Guardian, 11 Jan. 1991.

     

    2. See generally Jean Baudrillard, Simulations.

     

    3. See, for example, Christopher Norris, Uncritical Theory: Postmodernism, Intellectuals, and the Gulf War 11.

     

    4. Cf. Noam Chomsky, Deterring Democracy 410.

     

    5. See, for example, George Bush, “The Possibility of a New World Order,” Speech at Maxwell Air Force Base, Montgomery, Alabama. Cf. Oscar Schachter, “United Nations Law in the Gulf Conflict” 452, 472.

     

    6. In January 1992, Beth Osborne Daponte, a demographer with the United States Census Bureau, publicly released unclassified estimates that a total of 86,194 men, 39,612 women, and 32,195 children died as a direct resu lt of the Gulf War. Daponte estimated that 13,000 civilians had been killed during the Coalition’s air and land campaigns, with other deaths attributable to the post-war Kurd and Shi’ite rebellions and to disease and malnutrition caused by the war (Jones 12). She claimed that her report on casualties had been rewritten, with the death toll lowered and data on women and children removed. The Census Bureau fired Daponte, claiming that her figures had not received “proper peer review.” She was reinstated a fter alleging in a lawsuit that her dismissal was politically motivated (see “Agency Reinstates Tabulator of Iraqi War Deaths” A14 and Gellman A5). Daponte later published a more comprehensive study, in which she estimated that 110,000 Iraqi civilian dea ths resulted from war-induced health effects (Daponte 57, 62)

     

    7. See Patrick Sloyan, “Buried Alive: US Tanks Used Plows to Kill Thousands in Gulf War Trenches” 1, and Chomsky, Deterring Democracy 410-11. In its final report, the Pentagon justified this action at some length, arguing not only that “there is a gap in the law of war defining precisely when surrender takes effect or how it may be accomplished in practical terms,” but also that “military necessity required that the assault through the forward Iraqi defens ive line be conducted with maximum speed and violence” (Conduct of the Persian Gulf War 629-30). A similar legal rationale was used to justify the slaughter of thousands of Iraqi soldiers attempting to flee from Kuwait City to Basra along the Matla Ridge during the ground assault without formally surrendering (631-32).

     

    8. See, for example, Laurie Becklund and Stephen Braun, “A Rallying Point for Iraqi Exiles.”

     

    9. See also Chomsky, Deterring Democracy 148.

     

    10. Cf. Chomsky, “The Media and the War: What War?” in Mowlana et al. 51.

     

    11. General Schwarzkopf had stated that the Coalition strategy for the ground war was to achieve an “end run” around Iraqi troop concentrations in order to overcome a two-to-three disadvantage in manpower (“The Persi an Gulf War” A36). By contrast, a congressional report released in April 1991 concluded that due to depleted units, desertions, and casualties from the air war, Iraq actually had fewer than 183,000 soldiers in the Kuwaiti theater of operations compared t o 800,000 military personnel from 36 nations in the Coalition at the start of the ground assault (See Draper 38, 43 and Sachs 17).

     

    12. See, for example, Mark Radhert, “The First Amendment and Media Rights During Wartime: Some Thoughts After Operation Desert Storm” 1513; “Lost Testimony: The Gulf War, Restricted Access, and the First Amendment” 26 1; “Press Censorship and Access Restrictions During the Persian Gulf War: A First Amendment Analysis” 1073.

     

    13. Cf. Begleiter, “The Impact of the Media on International Law and Relations” 119-23. (Begleiter was an international affairs correspondent with CNN.)

     

    14. Cf. Paul Patton, ‘Introduction’ in Baudrillard, The Gulf War 2.

     

    15. It was later revealed that the witness, who testified before a Congressional Human Rights Caucus, was the daughter of the Kuwaiti ambassador to the U.S. and that she had been coached by a public relations firm hi red by the Kuwaiti government (Kellner 67-8).

     

    16. Christopher Norris, Uncritical Theory.

     

    17. In another layer of irony, this oil slick was subsequently determined to have been caused by Allied bombing of inshore installations (Christopher Norris 24).

     

    18. This is perhaps the logical extreme of Vegetius’ dictum, “Qui desiderat pacem, praeparet bellum” [Let him who desires peace, prepare for war] (Flavius Vegetius Renatus, Epitoma Rei Militaris, book 3).

     

    19. See Baudrillard, The Gulf War 62, 74-5, 77.

     

    20. Sterling discusses a gaming simulation of one of the tank battles from the closing stages of the conflict, produced by army historians and simulation modelers.

     

    21. Curiously, Norris suggests that this sadism lacks erotic content and imagery (232-3).

     

    22. See, for example, Alexander Wendt, “Anarchy Is What States Make of It: The Social Construction of Power Politics” 391; Robert Keohane, “International Institutions: Two Approaches” (1988) 379; Charles Lipson, “Int ernational Cooperation in Economic and Security Affairs” 69-70.

     

    23. See Lasswell, Propaganda Technique in the World War (1927). On the use of rape for propaganda purposes in war, see Brownmiller, Against Our Will: Men, Women and Rape 40-58. Cf. Mackenz ie, Propaganda and Empire.

     

    24. See above paragraphs 25-31.

     

    25. On the Great-Power pressure diplomacy that achieved “consensus” on Security Council Resolution 678 (authorising the use of “all necessary means to uphold and implement resolution 660 (1990) and all subsequent rel evant resolutions”), see Weston, “Security Council Resolution 678 and Persian Gulf Decision Making: Precarious Legitimacy” 516, 523-5.

     

    26. Fukuyama was a deputy director of the U.S. State Department’s policy planning staff at the time that this article was published; it has since been expanded into a book: Francis Fukuyama, The End of History an d the Last Man (1992).

     

    27. Cf. Noam Chomsky, Year 501: The Conquest Continues 61-4.

     

    28. Cf. Edward Said, Culture and Imperialism 313.

     

    29. See, for example, Tom Mayer, “Imperialism and the Gulf War” 1, and Booker, Background to the Gulf War.

     

    30. Cast from the failure of liberalism to prevent the Second World War and tempered by the exigencies of Cold War bipolarity, realism eschewed Wilsonian utopianism in favour of Machiavellian pragmatism–less a Kantia n theory of peace, it was a theory of Realpolitik. Axiomatic to this conception of international order-through-disorder was the population of international society by unitary, rational and power-seeking actors: states.

     

    See generally Hans Morgenthau, Politics Among Nations: The Struggle for Power and Peace, and Kenneth Waltz, Theory of International Politics. Cf. John Mearsheimer’s discussion of realism’s five assumptions about the internationa l system: (i) the international system is anarchic; (ii) states inherently possess some offensive military capability, making them potentially dangerous to each other; (iii) no state can ever be completely certain about the intentions of other states; (iv ) the most basic motive driving states is survival; and (v) states think strategically–that is, they are instrumentally rational (Mearsheimer 9-10). For a critical analysis of this paradigm, see James Der Derian, “Introduction: Critical Investigations” i n James Der Derian (ed), International Theory: Critical Investigations (1995). Cf. Rob Walker’s discussion of realism’s “parasitic” relation to idealism in Inside/Outside: International Relations as Political Theory.

     

    31. See, for example, Joseph Camilleri and Jim Falk, The End of Sovereignty? The Politics of a Shrinking and Fragmenting World.

     

    32. See Simon Chesterman, “Review Essay: The Politics of Sovereignty” 175. The project of opening up international relations to meaningful interrogation requires an exploration of the self-evident divide between the “political” and the “international” that led to a history, rather than a theory, of international relations: see Hans Morgenthau’s response to Wight’s essay, “The Intellectual and Political Functions of Theory” Morgenthau, Truth and Power: Essays o f a Decade, 1960-1970 (1248-61), listing the reasons for this as being (i) the presumed self-evidence of the state as a natural form beyond human control; (ii) the ‘reformist orientation that characterized theoretical thinking’ of Wilsonian liberal ism and its ilk–the aim being “not in understanding the operation of the balance of power but in getting rid of it”; and (iii) the contingency of all political analysis that obviates the possibility of theoretical understanding.

     

    33. Neo-realism describes the international system through two constants and one variable. The constants are the existence of an anarchical system of horizontally distributed power (as opposed to ver tical distribution within a state), and the population of that system by similarly functioning units (states) whose behaviour is determined according to that system (much the way that diverse corporations function similarly within an economic market). The variable is the distribution of power capabilities across the system, and much has been written concerning the inevitability (and, indeed, desirability) of a bipolar system epitomised by the Cold War. See generally, Waltz, Theory of International Politics. For a critique of neorealism’s un- or anti-historical approach, see Paul Schroeder, “Historical Reality vs. Neo-realist Theory.”

     

    34. Cf. Janice Thomson, “State Sovereignty in International Relations: Bridging the Gap Between Theory and Empirical Research” 213, 217.

     

    35. Waltz argued that neorealism represents an advance of scientific rigour vis-à-vis the older realism, measured by the ability of a theoretical approach to generate propositions or predictions that are empir ically testable in such a way that the tests and their results may be replicated: see Steven Forde, “International Realism and the Science of Politics: Thucydides, Machiavelli, and Neorealism” 141, 142. The intellectual barrenness of this approach has be en attacked at length by various authors: see, for example, Fred Halliday’s description of the “parsimonious and atemporal maxims of Waltz’s neo-realism, “The Cold War and its Conclusion: Consequences for International Relations Theory” (12). See also t he collections of essays in Robert Keohane, ed., Neorealism and Its Critics and Baldwin, Neorealism and Neoliberalism: The Contemporary Debate.

     

    36. See also Huntington’s analysis of his contribution to the discipline in terms of Thomas Kuhn’s Structure of Scientific Revolutions, “If Not Civilizations, What?”

     

    37. Cf. Fouad Ajami’s response to Huntington, ‘The Summoning’ 2, 9: “let us be clear: civilizations do not control states, states control civilizations.” See also the other critiques of Huntington’s thesis published in volume 72, number 4 of Foreign Affairs. Cf. Adam Tarock, “Civilisational Conflict? Fighting the Enemy Under a New Banner,” and Jacinta O’Hagan, “Civilisational Conflict? Looking for Cultural Enemies.”

     

    38. See Simon Chesterman, “Law, Subject and Subjectivity in International Relations: International Law and the Postcolony.” Dianne Otto makes an allied point when she notes that a crucial step towards realising the possibilities of new forms of international community is “unlearning” the view that multiplicity is incommensurable with order, and that order depends on force and discipline (“Subalternity and International Law: The Problems of Global Community and the I ncommensurability of Difference” 337).

     

    39. Cf. Fukuyama 14.

     

    40. See Yant, Desert Mirage: The True Story of the Gulf War 54.

    Works Cited

     

    • “Agency Reinstates Tabulator of Iraqi War Deaths.” New York Times 13 April 1992: A14.
    • Ajami, Fouad. “The Summoning.” Foreign Affairs 72.4 (1993): 2-9.
    • Baker, Mark. “U.S. Buries the Human Cost of Victory over Iraq.” The Age 15 May 1992: 13.
    • Baldwin, David, ed. Neorealism and Neoliberalism: The Contemporary Debate. New York: Columbia UP, 1993.
    • Baudrillard, Jean. The Gulf War Did Not Take Place. Sydney: Power Publications, 1995.
    • —. “The Gulf War Will Not Take Place.” Libération 4 Jan. 1991.
    • — . Simulations. New York: Semiotext(e), 1983.
    • Becklund, Laurie and Stephen Braun. “A Rallying Point for Iraqi Exiles. Los Angeles Times 2 March 1991: A17. Benjamin, Walter. “Critique of Violence.” Reflections: Essays, Aphorisms, Autobiographical Writings. 1921. New York and London: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1979.
    • Booker, Malcolm. Background to the Gulf War. Sydney: Left Book Club, 1991.
    • Boydston, Michelle D. “Press Censorship and Access Restrictions During the Persian Gulf War: A First Amendment Analysis.” Editorial Note. Loyola of Los Angeles Law Review 25.3 (1992): 1073-1106.
    • Brownmiller, Susan. Against Our Will: Men, Women and Rape. London: Secker & Warburg, 1975.
    • Camilleri, Joseph and Jim Falk. The End of Sovereignty? The Politics of a Shrinking and Fragmenting World. Aldershot: Edward Elgar, 1992.
    • Chesterman, Simon. “Review Essay: The Politics of Sovereignty.” Melbourne Journal of Politics 23 (1995/96): 175.
    • —. “Law, Subject and Subjectivity in International Relations: International Law and the Postcolony” Melbourne University Law Review 20 (1996): 979.
    • Chomsky, Noam. Deterring Democracy. London: Vintage, 1992.
    • —. Year 501: The Conquest Continues. London: Verso, 1993.
    • Cushman, John H., Jr. “War in the Gulf: The Casualties.” New York Times 3 Feb. 1991: 10.
    • Daponte, Beth Osborne. “A Case Study in Estimating Casualties from War and Its Aftermath: The 1991 Persian Gulf War.” Physicians for Social Responsibility Quarterly (June 1993): 57.
    • Der Derian, James. Antidiplomacy: Spies, Speed, Terror, War. Oxford: Blackwell, 1992.
    • —, ed. Introduction. International Theory: Critical Investigations. New York: NYUP, 1995.
    • Draper, Theodore. “The True History of the Gulf War.” New York Review of Books 30 Jan. 1992: 38.
    • Forde, Steven. “International Realism and the Science of Politics: Thucydides, Machiavelli, and Neorealism.” International Studies Quarterly 39 (1995): 141-142.
    • Freedman, Lawrence and Efraim Karsh. The Gulf Conflict 1990-1991: Diplomacy and War in the New World Order. London: Faber and Faber, 1993.
    • Fukuyama, Francis. “The End of History?” The National Interest Summer 1989: 3-18.
    • —. The End of History and the Last Man. New York: Free Press, 1992.
    • Gane, Mike, ed. Baudrillard Live: Selected Interviews. London: Routledge, 1993.
    • Gellman, Barton. “Census Bureau Retracts Firing of Researcher: Flap Over Release of Iraqi Toll Ends” Washington Post 12 April 1992: A5.
    • Gerbner, George. “Persian Gulf War, The Movie.” Triumph of the Image: The Media’s War in the Persian Gulf A Global Perspective. Eds. H. Mowlana, G. Gerbner, and H.I. Schiller. Boulder: Westview Press, 1992. 11-28.
    • “Gulf War, and Peace, Revisited.” Editorial. New York Times 2 Aug. 1991: A26.
    • Halliday, Fred. “The Cold War and its Conclusion: Consequences for International Relations Theory.” Charting the Post-Cold War Order. Eds. Richard Leaver and James Richardson. Boulder: Westview Press, 1993. 243-65.
    • Haraway, Donna. “A Manifesto for Cyborgs: Science, Technology, and Socialist Feminism in the 1980’s.” Socialist Review 80 (1985): 65-66.
    • Hegel, G.W.F. Lectures on the Philosophy of World History: Introduction. 1830. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1975.
    • Herman, Edward and Noam Chomsky. Manufacturing Consent: The Political Economy of the Mass Media. NY: Pantheon Books, 1988.
    • Huntington, Samuel. “The Clash of Civilizations?” Foreign Affairs 72.3 (1993): 22.
    • —. “If Not Civilizations, What?” Foreign Affairs 72.5 (1993): 186.
    • Johnson, Samuel. The Idler 11 Nov. 1758: 45-9.
    • Jones, Simon. “Freedom of Speech U.S. Demographer Sacked for Exposing Iraqi Civilian Deaths.” Independent 23 April 1992: 12.
    • Kennedy, David. International Legal Structures. Baden-Baden: Nomos, 1987.
    • Keohane, Robert, ed. Neorealism and Its Critics. New York: Columbia UP, 1986.
    • —.”International Institutions: Two Approaches.” International Studies Quarterly 32 (1988): 379.
    • Kristol, Irving. “Responses to Fukuyama.” The National Interest Summer 1989: 19, 28.
    • Lasswell, Harold. Propaganda Technique in the World War. New York: Knopf, 1927.
    • Link, Jürgen. “Maintaining Normality: On the Strategic Function of the Media in Wars of Extermination.” Cultural Critique (Fall 1991): 55.
    • Lipson, Charles. “International Cooperation in Economic and Security Affairs.” Neorealism and Neoliberalism: The Contemporary Debate. Ed. David Baldwin. New York: Columbia UP, 1993. 69.
    • “Lost Testimony: The Gulf War, Restricted Access, and the First Amendment.” Editorial Note. Cardozo Studies in Law and Literature 3.2(1991): 261.
    • Mearsheimer, John. “The False Promise of International Institutions” International Security 19.3 (1994): 5-49.
    • Mackenzie, John. Propaganda and Empire. Manchester: Manchester UP, 1984.
    • Mayer, Tom. “Imperialism and the Gulf War.” Monthly Review 42.11 (1991): 1-11.
    • Middle East Watch. Needless Deaths in the Gulf War: Civilian Casualties During the Air Campaign and Violations of the Laws of War. New York: Middle East Watch, 1991.
    • Morgenthau, Hans. Politics Among Nations: The Struggle for Power and Peace. 5th ed. New York: Knopf, 1973.
    • —. Truth and Power: Essays of a Decade, 1960-1970. New York: Praeger, 1970.
    • Muravchik, Joshua. The Imperative of American Leadership: A Challenge to Neo-Isolationism. Washington: AEI Press, 1996.
    • Normand, Roger and Chris af Jochnick. “The Legitimation of Violence: A Critical Analysis of the Gulf War.” Harvard International Law Journal 35.2 (1994): 387-416.
    • Norris, Christopher. Uncritical Theory: Postmodernism, Intellectuals, and the Gulf War. Amherst: U of Massachusetts P, 1992.
    • Norris, Margot. “Military Censorship and the Body Count in the Persian Gulf War.” Cultural Critique (Fall 1991): 223.
    • O’Hagan, Jacinta. “Civilisational Conflict? Looking for Cultural Enemies.” Third World Quarterly 16.1 (1995): 19-38.
    • Otto, Dianne. “Subalternity and International Law: The Problems of Global Community and the Incommensurability of Difference.” Social and Legal Studies 5.3 (1996): 337-364.
    • “The Persian Gulf War: Schwarzkopf Answers Reporters’ Questions.” Washington Post 28 February 1991: A36.
    • Radhert, Mark. “The First Amendment and Media Rights During Wartime: Some Thoughts After Operation Desert Storm.” Villanova Law Review 36.6 (1991): 1513-1558.
    • Rosenstiel, Thomas B. “Americans Praise Media But Still Back Censorship, Postwar Poll Says.” Los Angeles Times 25 March 1991: A9
    • Sachs, Susan. “End of the War: Allies Faced Ghost Army.” Newsday 1 March 1991: 17.
    • Said, Edward. Culture and Imperialism. London: Vintage, 1994.
    • Scarry, Elaine. The Body in Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1985.
    • Schroeder, Paul. “Historial Reality vs. Neo-Realist Theory.” International Security 19.1 (1994): 108-148.
    • Sloyan, Patrick. “Buried Alive: U.S. Tanks Used Plows to Kill Thousands in Gulf War Trenches.” Newsday 12 September 1991: 1.
    • Sterling, Bruce. “War is Virtual Hell.” Wired 1 (1993): 95-6.
    • Summers, Col. Harry, Jr. (Retired). “Body Count Proved to Be a False Prophet.” Los Angeles Times 9 Feb. 1991: A5, A13.
    • Tarock, Adam. “Civilisational Conflict? Fighting the Enemy Under a New Banner.” Third World Quarterly 16.1 (1995): 5-18.
    • Thomson, Janice. “State Sovereignty in International Relations: Bridging the Gap Between Theory and Empirical Research.” International Studies Quarterly 39 (1995): 213, 217.
    • U.S. Department of Defense. Conduct of the Persian Gulf War: Final Report to Congress (Final Pentagon Report). Washington D.C.: U.S Department of Defense, 1992.
    • U.S. News and World Report. Triumph Without Victory: The Unreported History of the Persian Gulf War. New York: New York Times Books, 1992.
    • Walker, Martin. “Dole Inspects Life Rafts While Clinton Cruises.” The Guardian Weekly [London] 15 September 1996: 6.
    • Walker, R.B.J. Inside/Outside: International Relations as Political Theory. Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1993.
    • Waltz, Kenneth. Theory of International Politics. Reading, Mass: Addison-Wesley, 1979.
    • Wendt, Alexander. “Anarchy is What States Make of It: The Social Construction of Power Politics.” International Organization 46.2 (1992): 391-426.
    • Weston, Burns. “Security Council Resolution 678 and Persian Gulf Decision Making: Precarious Legitimacy.” American Journal of International Law 85.3 (1991): 516-535.
    • Williamson, Judith. “It’s Mad Bad Saddam vs. the Scudbusters.” The Guardian [London] 31 Jan. 1991: 21.
    • Yant, Martin. Desert Mirage: The True Story of the Gulf War. Amherst, NY: Prometheus Books, 1991.

     

  • Selected Letters from Readers

     

     

     

    The following responses were submitted by PMC readers using regular e-mail or the PMC Reader’s Report form. Not all letters received are published, and published letters may have been edited.

     

    Copyright (c) 1998 by the authors, all rights reserved. This text may be used and shared in accordance with the fair-use provisions of U.S. copyright law, and it may be archived and redistributed in electronic form, provided that the editors are notified and no fee is charged for access. Archiving, redistribution, or republication of this text on other terms, in any medium, requires the consent of the authors and the notification of the publisher, the Johns Hopkins University Press.

     


     

    Reader’s Report on Simon Chesterman, “Ordering the New World: Violence and its Re/Presentation in the Gulf War and Beyond” (PMC 8.3)

     

    In Simon Chesterman’s article, Ordering the New World…, I couldn’t help but have memories in the back of my mind come back to me. During the Gulf War, about a third of my unit was posted to ships to provide air defence to ships because the dingnies in the Canadian Navy are outdated and could not provide their own air defense at that Tea Social in the gulf, so my army unit was given the task. I truly believe the reason for Canada to participate in the war, at least in part, was that it didn’t want t o miss the comming out ball of the ’90s and feel left out by its more influencial neighbors–another example of the keeping up with Jonses Syndrom. The event that followed was nothing less than absurd.

     

    I remember clearly the video cameras with their news crews in the hangar waiting for the soldiers to get off of the bus returning from ‘active’ duty in the gulf. I watched the wonderful spectacle that followed, almost wanting to take part in the produ ction myself. As the soldiers got off the bus and were interviewed one by one it seemed like they were talking a language I could not understand, but everyone around me, including my parents, could which left me a little baffled looking back in retrospec t. My generation, the tv generation that is, have intuitively developed the skill of being amateur spin doctors knowing exactly what the press wants to hear and happilly obligeing–for one must never speak the truth because people prefer to be conforted and lied to, it is just easier to accept.

     

    My personal interactions with these returning people was much different that what was seen on the tube of course. I mostly heard stories of shopping trips and the difficulty of finding alcohol in the arab country of Bahrain. It goes without saying tha t when they had a Scud alert they were legitametly scared, but looking back there was no reason to be frightened they were further from the pesty Scuds than I was from the Great Hanshin Earthquake in Kobe,Japan in 1995.These war vetrans, as they are calle d, spent all their time safely in the rear ranks and never exposed to any real threat from the so called enemy. War has become savy. The news sets have become made for tv movie sets.

     

    We take a reletively small event at its origin, then with a little help from the politicians with the press(always looking to increase their ratings) with a crowd looking for spectacle, we are able to produce great events out of non-events. Like the p hotographs of the Crimean War taken by Roger Fenton which have no nobody(no-bodies) in them we in the late 20th century have also been able to produce a war without any ‘real’casualties, or at least ones that to matter to us anyway.

     

    These comments are from: Rene Bouchard
    reneb@hotmail.com

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Nicky Marsh, “‘Note on My Writing’: Poetics as Exegesis” (PMC 8.3)

     

    Nicky Marsh beautifully puts her finger on what needs to be done now that language poetry is twenty years old: actual reading of specific texts and differentiation of individual poets. Her readings of Scalapino and Howe are really excellent. I hope many people read this review!

     

    These comments are from: Marjorie Perloff
    MPerloff@earthlink.net

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Nicky Marsh, “‘Note on My Writing’: Poetics as Exegesis” (PMC 8.3)

     

    More & more, I find reviews, especially reviews on so-called L-A-N-G-U-A-G-E poetry to be far more interesting, informative and entertaining than the poems themselves.

     

    These comments are from: Lenny DellaRocca
    dellarocca@earthlink.net

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Nicky Marsh, “‘Note on My Writing’: Poetics as Exegesis” (PMC 8.3)

     

    A lucid, engaging discussion about two of the best language poets. Although most of my work is more traditionally narrative in form, I have long admired Howe’s work. This review is a delight to find online.

     

    These comments are from: Linda Lee Harper
    lleeharper@aol.com

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Scott DeShong, “Sylvia Plath, Emmanuel Levinas, and the Aesthetics of Pathos” (PMC 8.3)

     

    I had had “Morning Song”, “Tulips” read to me in high school by a very important teacher. Hence, when I became aware of the plathian myth, doing the plathian thing, reading, the bigraphys’s, and particualry Birthday letter, I was struch by my inabilit y to like anything else, other than those poems. It is not that they have an amazing quality or perfection, as many critics say, but rather that capability to feel, or a particular quality of what you call pathis. I was amazed becuase you reflected on the se two poems. Of particular note, I hope you respond to this point, is the use of “And” in Plaths Poetry (sorry about formate..oops). And is always used when Plath says exactly how she feels This to me implies in every sense her pathos. Plath , for example says “and my heart…(in tulips) In morning song, she says (and now you try your handful of notes, their vowles like balloons) I know i have not busted any feats of great knowledge, but I have never heard anyboy talk about his point, I hope it is of some use… it was fantastic article.

     

    These comments are from: Daniel Groenewald
    danymail@altavista.ne

     


    Scott DeShong replies:

     

    Thanks for your response to my article, and sorry for the long delay in replying to you; I haven’t been around this summer (and won’t be much for the rest of it, either). I understand your appreciation for Plath’s poems, although I must admit that I hadn’t considered her use of “and.” Before coming to terms with this usage, I’d have to study a number of poets to articulate comparisons between variations in their usage of the word. Perhaps what you’re observing has to do with a rhythmic or metric placement of the word by Plath, which helps her acheive a particular tone of voice that, as you read her, embodies pathos. Thanks again, with best wishes,

     

    Scott DeShong

     


    PMC Reader’s Report on Adrian Miles, Singin in the Rain: A Hypertextual Reading” (PMC 8.2)

     

    This is a fascinating article. I want to point out one factor I didn’t see mentioned, at least in language I am familiar with–what the hell does diegetic mean anyway?–that those who create products, such as books or movies have always one major obsta cle to overcome in order to garner the audience’s hypnotic engagement (and thus engender “catharsis”). This factor is “believability”, or, at least, the suspension of disbelief. The frame, or “film-in-itself” is merely a narrative method to achieve, in th is case, a rather cozy, insulated environment for the story-telling. The writers have merely set up what they perhaps feared to be a sophisticated audience’s dismissal of smarm. The truest “reading” of any text, I think, has become one which deconstructs the commercial aim–target audience/present future venues, production cost, revenue prospects, etc.–of an commercial endeavor. Having said this, the article is excellent, and has given more “food for thawt” than just about anything I’ve read in the crit ique genre. Thanks!

     

    These comments are from: johnny lite
    lite@mailexcite.com

     

  • IMAGING EmerAgency: A Conversation with Gregory Ulmer

    Joel Weishaus

    Center for Southwest Research
    University of New Mexico
    reality@unm.edu

     

    The following conversation took place over email. Along with discussing aspects of our respective biographies, we focus in on “Imaging Florida,” a project that Gregory Ulmer is working on with colleagues in the Florida Research Ensemble at the University of Florida. Imaging Florida is a collaborative Internet project, including a Web site and email listserv, for the design of a new role for the arts and education in community policy formation and problem solving. The project aims to explore: the analysis of a cross-section of attractions in Florida, leading to a poetics for world wide web design; the analysis of one on-going state of affairs recognized as a public problem in Florida; the design of a Web site that creates a new understanding of a community problem reconfigured as a virtual tourist attraction; collaboration with colleagues at other institutions across the levels of schooling to test the Web site as a resource for relating education to public policy formation. “Imaging Florida’s” web address is http://www.elf.ufl.edu.

     

    Gregory L. Ulmer: What I would like us to do is to depart a bit from the conventional interview, and get a little more into a consultancy relationship. I conceive of this relationship not as two interviewers, nor as two interviewees (you are still interviewing me, so I have more responsibility in that regard). Rather, we would be writing in a rhizomatic way, as I understand that term. Deleuze’s example that I like best is wasp and orchid. This is the saprophytic (vs. parasitic) relation that I discussed in “The Object of Post-Criticism.” Meaning that you have your track and trajectory, and I have mine, and for some reason we have met at a crossroads, our tracks have converged just now.

     

    We start writing back and forth: my goal is to explain a current project of mine, “Imaging Florida,” and your immediate goal is to help me do that, with the understanding that I don’t know what it is exactly. The interview is a collaboration: we both write our way together for a certain sequence of posts.

     

    If this plan sounds OK, let me know, and I will start, assuming that you have asked me: “Tell me about your project called Imaging Florida.”

     

    Joel Weishaus: You bring up “The Object of Post-Criticism,” which was my introduction to your writing. In it you quote John Cage: “art changes because science changes–changes in science give artists different understandings about how nature works.” It seems to me that this relationship between art and science is truer today than when Cage expressed it, some 35 years ago. Thus, from this site (and the way the word can play), tell me about the project you call Imaging Florida.

     

    GLU: Imaging Florida is a contribution to a virtual organization called the emerAgency, which is an experimental consulting group. In trying to show you something about this organization I hope to figure out what it is myself. Its purpose is to improve the world, or if not improve the world, then at least to exist as itself, to come into being or into conversation if not into being. Some day, in the context of problem solving, someone will say: We have tried everything and nothing works very well. It is time to consult with the emerAgency.

     

    One way to understand this organization is to consider its genealogy in applied grammatology (as Europeans say: the AMERICAN version). Why do I insist upon applying to practical states of affairs discipline materials that are conventionally associated with the “pure” arts and sciences? The reason must have something to do with my father. This feeling I have of needing to “pay for my space” (his motto) was inherited: a piece of North Dakota winter carried in my spirit like an inoperable bit of shrapnel from the wars of growing up.

     

    My father, Walt, was born in 1916. After his mother (a German immigrant) died in the great flu epidemic of 1918-1919, Walt and his sister, Bernice, lived with their aunt for six years, until “Boss” (a nickname my grandfather was known by since he was four years old) remarried. Dad was raised Lutheran, but was a Presbyterian in his adult years, serving as an elder and lay minister. He was a veteran of the Depression and World War II. He owned his own business–sand and gravel, and concrete products–in a small town in eastern Montana, which he also served as representative to the state legislature for ten years, and county commissioner for another six. Then he died at age 67.

     

    Walt exemplified the work ethic, self-sacrifice, public service, and a general righteousness. As much as I admired Dad’s integrity, the righteousness was a bit hard to take, and I assumed for a long time that after I left home, got an education, that I had put all that Protestant Republican asceticism behind me. After all, Walt (like so many other in our anti-intellectual culture) believed that teachers were those who couldn’t do anything; and that the arts were parasitical. I recognize now that my desire for an applied grammatology constitutes in part an attempt to prove to Dad that he was wrong about the arts. I know that his criteria were irrelevant to the arts; this irrelevance is just the point of contact or disjunction between what the emerAgency has to offer and practical states of affairs.

     

    In short, the first principle of the new consultancy when confronting an intractable problem is: bring to bear irrelevant criteria.

     

    JW: When it comes to the work-ethic, and self-sacrifice, you could just as well be talking about my father, who died a few years ago, in South Florida. He was an aircraft mechanic during World War II, then an automobile salesman for the balance of his working life.

     

    Even the artists of those days, before the 1950s, had to be practical to survive. Many worked for the WPA. The nuts and bolts of Abstract Expressionism, that most socially irrelevant of schools, were forged in public art, only to revolt against its propagandistic themes. Yet there remained the tendency toward large artworks.

     

    Does this tend toward what is presently perceived as an emerAgency in Florida, that the largest sector of public art is advertising–billboards and the like?

     

    GLU: The emerAgency is concerned not only with the commercialization of the public sphere, but even more with the opening of the border between the public and private spheres that is one effect of the emergence of Entertainment as the principal institutionalization of electronic technology. To explore this aspect of the emerAgency I want to think about why such a project appeals to me in the first place. A thread running through much of my work has to do with creativity. After an early interest in writing creatively I got sidetracked into studying about the creative process. Now I am trying to connect that detour back into some kind of action.

     

    The detour might have to do with my ambivalence toward the “world” that I felt obliged to improve. My remarks here are guided by the categories that showed up in my research into breakthrough inventors–their imaginations tended to be composite assemblages of cultural materials drawn from family experience, entertainment or popular culture materials, schooling background, and a particular community history. I am thinking of investigations by Holton or Gruber that characterize how innovators draw upon an image of wide scope–an aesthetic embodiment of their attunement with the world (what the philosophical tradition referred to as Stimmung).

     

    My pedagogy aims at helping students notice, map, and enhance their own image of wide scope (their own learning style–with the term style marking the aesthetic quality of the thinking).

     

    Given the heuretic principle that requires me to try out for myself whatever poetics my students are using, I have been exploring my own wide image. Perhaps I can get you to test this idea on yourself as well? You will recognize that the method of inquiry into Stimmung is what I have called mystorical. It starts with finding a memory associated with family (my memories of my father, for example, and I might have to come back to those again later). In the institution of Family we are introduced into our native language, and develop for a brief time an oral culture.

     

    Very soon in our civilization the child begins to acquire an entertainment or popular culture as well, through television being present in the home. In analyzing my experience of entertainment discourse I recognize the ambivalence that I mentioned, toward having to pay for my space (as my father put it). To get an idea of what my high school experience was like, think of a synthesis of the films American Graffiti and The Last Picture Show. American Graffiti is an inventory of the mythology and urban legends of teen life. The figure I like best in that film is the “hood with a heart of gold,” but that is not who I was when I was that age. There was a split between my behavior, which conformed in nearly every respect with the norms of the 1950s, and my attitude or feeling about those demands.

     

    The hood type identifies the alienation of my position, but The Last Picture Show gets at the emotional quality of this alienation. The one scene that best evokes the memory of my own alienation is the accident–when the mentally handicapped boy who was always sweeping the street is struck and killed by the cattle truck. This scene so hit me as a moment of recognition (in that Greek sense of anagnorisis) that I remembered it as being much longer. When I saw the film again after some time (on TV) I thought it was a bowdlerized version, since the scene is so short. It is just a brief shot, when the protagonist’s glance takes in the cattle packed into the semi trailer, their frothing snouts pressed against the slatted sides of the truck, on their way to the slaughterhouse. A very existential moment (life–an abattoir).

     

    I investigated this feeling mystorically, using my (or my father’s) identification with Gary Cooper (noted in Heuretics). I continued this inquiry in a Web site project, working with High Noon rather than Beau Geste as I had in Heuretics. The result of this inquiry, called “Noon Star,” is posted on my Web site (http://web.nwe.ufl.edu/~gulmer/star/star1.html). I won’t go into it now other than to say that High Noon is about a hypocritical town–a town that does not support its sheriff in his showdown with the thugs who have come to kill him. I identified with Will Kane’s (Cooper’s) dilemma–the imperative to do his duty despite his disillusionment with his fellow citizens.

     

    The dilemma–the divide between the demands of principle and those of the community or state–shows one of the categorical borders of the human subject; it is the border that Greek tragedy first mapped out. The relevance to the emerAgency project is this ambivalence of wanting to improve a world that might not deserve improvement.

     

    JW: Actually, I was thinking about High Noon recently, when finishing the paratext for my recent Artist’s Book, Threading the Petrified Glyph. The text reads, “Almost noon, Sunday. Tree-mottled shadows spread over the pebbled pavement, as the sun begins to heat my back.” I associated this, and wrote, “Ex-Marshal, Will Kane, his new wife pleading with him for non-violence, must face four outlaws in the center of town, at high noon, as one by one, the townspeople excuse themselves from helping him. Thus, Gary Cooper plays the lone hero with no backup, in High Noon (1952).”

     

    So that my thoughts, first, were of his pacifist wife, and that, even though he loves her, he must face these men. But maybe this had to do more with self-respect than with duty to community. After all, these men were primarily after him. As Sherman Paul says in his essay, “Poetry and Old Age,” “I think that perhaps fidelity to one’s own life is the only wisdom.” I would add: If this life has a wide scope.

     

    When you speak in terms of “wanting to improve a world,” the last lines of William Bronk’s poem, “At Tikal,” come to mind:

     

    to go to the far edge
    apart and imagine, to wall whether in
    or out. To build a kind of cage for the sake
    of feeling the bars around us, to give
    shape to a  world.
    And oh, it is always a world and not the
    world. (ll. 29-35)

     

    Unlike the ancient Mayans, we have access to mountains of information, both verbal and visual, on the worlds of other cultures. We should, then, be able to envision a bigger world than our own. But can we?

     

    GLU: We are experiencing an information explosion, certainly. There are books about everything, and if you live long enough you will discover that someone has written a book about your life. Not a biography, of course, but a book more in the style of “Know Your 3-Year-Old”–a generic report that nonetheless is uncannily close on most points. That I have come across so many books that document what I thought, felt, and said should not surprise me, since the theory I work with says that the greater part of thought takes place outside the individual, in the network of institutional behaviors and processes that organize society (the symbolic order). Identification (productive of the experience of being a self) at a deep level amounts to the taking up of a position already prepared in advance, but with the illusion that one has chosen to be a certain way (such is the effect of ideology).

     

    Anyway, while thinking about the genealogy of my ambivalent desire to improve the world, I happened upon some books that were about the two books that most influenced me while I was in high school. Reading these studies cast some light on the generic character of my experience. I have mentioned already two of the institutions of the popcycle Family and Entertainment that interpellate the individual into an order. The third such institution is School, which interpellates us into literacy. The first book that had a really major impact on my thinking was The Ugly American. I read it as part of my preparations for a debate club speech competition.

     

    I now understand more my response to this book after reading John Hellmann’s American Myth and the Legacy of Vietnam. It turns out that Ugly is one of the biggest sellers of that era (over 4 million copies sold), and that it anticipates and even shapes the policy vision of Kennedy’s New Frontier. Ugly was published in 1958, the year I started high school. The context for me was eastern Montana, a place that does not believe that the old frontier is done with. Jordan, where the militia were put under siege recently, is just north of Miles City, my home town. In my day it was the John Birch Society that was active in those parts. The Cold War was quite real to me and Lederer and Burdick helped me crystallize my feelings into an understanding. As I recall, the speech I gave imitated their jeremiad style, except that I called for saving Latin America from communism, whereas they were concerned with Asia. This influence lasted through my freshman year in college. I had planned to major in political science and economics with a minor in Spanish, to prepare me for my “mission.” Then I took an economics course.

     

    One of the strongest moments of recognition for me in reading Hellmann’s account of my era was his description of the young American type, the American hero, the ideal (as opposed to the ugly Americans who had fallen away from this ideal). The modern version of the type (Hellmann explains) is actually captured in its essence in Graham Greene’s The Quiet American as one determined to do good, not to any individual person but to a country, a world. This hero is earnest and involved, but also ignorant and silly. In the mythology traced by Hellmann, the hero (whether in the more jaundiced version seen from the outside, or the true frontier hero on his errand into the wilderness) is contrasted with the ugly American who has fallen under the spell of European decadence and corruption, preferring the city over the wilderness, personal pleasure over self-sacrifice.

     

    The moment of recognition–what made the recognition something like the anagnorisis of tragedy–was not just this belief on the part of the hero in the mission or destiny of America to improve the world, but also its antithesis–the French! What I had forgotten was that while I identified with the hero, my behavior actually imitated that of the ugly American. A Frenchman is cast as the embodiment of everything the American hero despises (in conflict with my own Francophilia). This place of the French in American mythology pinpoints my ambivalence, made concrete in the fact that the only other book to have an impact on me in high school comparable to The Ugly American was The Fall, by Camus. It still amazes me that I read The Fall back then. In my high school we did not have literature in our English classes until senior year, and then only for honors or college bound seniors. The teacher had a long list of books from which we were to choose one for an outside report. I did not read much at that time and did not recognize many of the names on the list, so I picked Camus at random. It was a revelation to me, my first encounter with anything that could be described as philosophical. The closest I had come to anything like the experience was the first time I read a work of science fiction (in middle school).

     

    Again, I now have some perspective on that event, not only from the retrospect of having read a lot of existentialism specifically, but from a book edited by Shoshana Felman and Dori Laub, Testimony, that includes Felman’s discussion of The Fall in the context of Camus’s other work and his falling out with Sartre over the question of the concentration-camp universe. I wonder if my report I wrote for Mr. Boe’s class is preserved in the boxes of my stuff still in my mother’s garage in Miles City. I would love to see what I made of Camus in 1961-62. In terms of my genealogy, taking my cue from Felman’s reading, it had something to do with this portrayal of a missed encounter, a failure to act, to save the woman from suicide, and the reflection on the possibility of getting a second chance to complete this unfinished experience. Felman cites the concluding paragraphs:

     

    'O young woman, throw yourself into the water again so that I may a second time have the chance of saving both of us!' A second time, eh, what a risky suggestion! But let's not worry. It's too late now. It will always be too late. Fortunately. (147)

     

    This opposition between Leatherstocking and Jean-Baptiste traces the outline of my ambivalence; I live this aporia: I am stuck. Perhaps I am more of a skeptic than I realized–deferring action until I am sure what the consequences of my act will be. Lederer and Burdick’s jeremiad called for a generation of engineer saints. That character is too close to my father’s (who had a degree in civil engineering). In any case, what actually happened after college is that rather than going to Latin America to save it from the communists, I went to graduate school in Comparative Literature, seduced it would seem by European decadence, since my choice of fields was motivated in part by the desire to avoid reading American literature. To the extent that I recalled my desire to improve the world, the practical life-world, it was to be by means of the humanities. Unfortunately, I had no idea how this project might be accomplished. Now, at last, I am proposing the emerAgency as the vehicle for action–a hybrid, a syncretism of the opposite poles of my aporia.

     

    JW: There is an information explosion, as you say; but whose information is it? To be in-formed, to shape oneself inwardly, is a particular and dangerous undertaking, feeding a homunculus, a “new man,” or “new woman.” What excitement! Until one, by degrees, forces open reality’s cover.

     

    We’ve been tracking someone to a hill. It is dark, and the top of the hill (actually a mound) is obscured. I sense that it is a place of forbidden power. My partner (we are detectives) wants to continue, but I caution him that we will die up there.

     

    Suddenly there is a ditch which three of us are digging. We find a yellow-tinted plastic windshield, which seems significant.

     

    Then one of us discovers a round manhole cover. Beneath it is a deep chamber, into which two of us descend, while my dream-ego stays behind.

     

    However, there are fleeting images and intonations that I actually went both to the top of the hill and to the bottom of the hole.

     

    The book that surged my interest in things literary was Homer’s Odyssey, which I read on my own, after being introduced to it in a high school class. The king went off to war, and in his arrogance offends the very god on whom he was most dependent to return safely home! However, it is because of this that he has his adventure. When he finally returned home his son has become a young man, and his young wife is decades older. Was he too late? Not for himself; but maybe for others.

     

    From this admittedly self-centered point of view, one from which we all begin, and end, our odyssey, how do we improve the world “by means of the humanities”? Or do the humanities embrace a larger agon than defined by our institutions?

     

    GLU: Although I want to improve the world, I fear that I will only make things worse (to continue the paraphrase of John Cage).

     

    Odysseus at least had a name for the forces at work in his life (the gods). Psychoanalysis supplies a different set of terms (the unconscious, the drive, desire). My experience is of an imperative: I do not know how, why, or in what way I might accomplish something with my life, but this ignorance never seemed very important. Instead there was this feeling of wanting or needing to say something, anything, it did not matter what. Was it perhaps not an initiative on my part but an emulation?

     

    The earliest memory of wanting to imitate an incomprehensible outpouring of voice was when my father read me bedtime stories. The ability to look at a book and produce fascinating stories seemed like magic, a great power. Before I could read I pretended to be able to read. This trick fooled a few of my friends’ mothers, who marveled at my precociousness and asked me to read to their children (why? to model this behavior?). The first time this happened (as I remember it; we are talking about preschool years) I had a moment of panic, then the realization once I opened the book that the pictures were all I needed. Between the pictures as prompts and my memory of hearing the story, I was able to reproduce the basic plot line for my equally illiterate and captive audience.

     

    The moment of emulation occurred early in high school when I got the idea that the ability to speak a foreign language was supremely desirable. From where did this idea come? In Miles City, Montana, I doubt if I ever encountered a role model for this kind of behavior. Some of the beet farmers in the area did import migrant workers from Mexico during harvest season, but I do not recall associating them with the people I intended to save from communism.

     

    The next example to which I transferred this desire to fill the air with mysterious speech was in college when I changed my major to creative writing after hearing a reading by a real poet (Richard Hugo). In graduate school the equivalent event was reading theory: I wanted to be a theorist. In every case the pattern is similar: first I encounter the exemplar–the production of utterance that is amazingly beyond my own ability to produce and from a source whose nature is a mystery. The desire never settled with any particular content, mode, form, but always with the utterance of a sort not necessarily understood but whose significance was acknowledged.

     

    When I think how much work and energy I have put into theory (the utterance I settled on) I have to wonder; it is as if a person who loved to cut ribbons went around building monumental hospitals, civic centers and the like just to be able to be at the opening ceremony. The psychoanalytic theory of the part-object is one version of an explanation (the voice as a part-object, naming that which cannot be assimilated into a subject’s narcissistic illusion of completeness). Language in this sense is the cause of my desire. Theory aside, the feeling of disproportion could relate to the belated realization that what I was after was not knowledge but (ahem) wisdom. Not the utterance after all but the wisdom of which I took the utterance as an index was the fetish. Not the stream of words itself nor the content and effect but the reserve that was their source, the reservoir, the fountain, the understanding that caused this flow that was what I desired.

     

    It so happens that while my mind was engaged on its fool’s errand my body was taking care of matters on its own! “Better to be lucky than good,” my wrestling coach used to say (to me, at least). What happened was that some years ago I started to resemble a certain stereotype of the wise old man. My hair started turning silver and falling out in my early thirties, and I have had a beard since 1965. 1965 was the turning point when my body started going its own way. Until then I had fit the stereotype of the All-American boy (in the WASP “typage”). I spent that academic year in Spain, and when I returned home in August of 1966 my own mother did not recognize me, literally. When I got off the bus (cross country from New York) I walked up to my mother who was waiting for me and she pushed past me looking for her son. “Ma! It’s me!” I had become a bohemian. Or rather, I looked like what I thought bohemians looked like (as best a person from Montana could tell).

     

    Still, I have had some trouble with my look. A few years ago I was to be met at an airport baggage carousel by a person responsible for driving me to a workshop on the mystory. It was for an Art College. I stood there for quite some time and then finally paged the party meeting Ulmer. A woman came up to the desk quite flustered. She had overlooked me since she was expecting an artist. Not long after that I was doing a weekend conference sponsored by a city arts project and they had put me up in housing normally reserved for artists in residence. No artist was in town at the time. I tried to get the gallery to notarize a statement confirming that Ulmer had been housed in artists’ quarters, to anchor this aspect of my identity. The principle was similar to Duchamp’s urinal–its sheer presence in the gallery made it art.

     

    I place my hopes now in this accident of nature and culture that has cast me in a role in which this look may be functional. Method actors are expert in creating or finding physical gestures or expressions that then generate the emotion they need for the part. Perhaps looking wise might lead to wisdom, if not for me, then for those who are taken in by this illusion.

     

    We all know that when Einstein did his great work he did not look like “Einstein.” But the link between his accomplishments and his celebrity image (the old man) is fixed in our mythology.

     

    Lacanian analysis, however, warns against this kind of transference–allowing the subject who is supposed to know to stand in as a model, as a prop, for the ego of the patient. I will say more later (perhaps) about how I try to play across the type casting (even if education and therapy are different projects). For now, to complete the thought about this split between my mistaking knowledge for wisdom intellectually, and my body going for its stereotype of the wise look, I should say that I have shifted from hoping to utter anything important myself, to wanting to help students accomplish something creative in their lives. Not my creativity but the creativity of my students has become the mode of action for improving the world (or to beg the question).

     

    JW: The year after you grew your beard, I sprouted mine. Since then I have only been without it once, when the American union boss in the Port of Yokohama wouldn’t let me ship out unless I was clean-shaven. Especially because they couldn’t readily grow facial hair, my Japanese friends took this as an incestuous twist on the Ugly American syndrome: Americans playing power games with each other. One’s beard then–the country trying to save face in Vietnam–to the union boss, was synonymous with flying the Jolly Roger.

     

    Three years before, after leaving my last job in advertising–I had been a Junior Executive on Madison Avenue while still a teenager–I enrolled in UC Berkeley’s Department of Oriental Languages. But I didn’t stay long, as more and more of my time went to being Literary Editor of the school’s newspaper, which was in the fray of the Free Speech Movement and Anti-War protests. There I found the ire of rejected writers more threatening than facing police batons!

     

    To be a poet was all I wanted. I remember the model that was prevalent at that time and location. Many of the poets whom Donald Allen anthologized in his classic, The New American Poetry, were, like the early rock bands, on the streets, in the coffee houses, bars, pool halls. It was the spirit of being a poet–living out of, and trusting in, one’s creativity, living without a net–that captured me. For example, in 1972, with the wind picking up, three of us briskly walked Bolinas’s fog-shrouded beach, Robert Creeley striding between Joanne Kyger and me, mumbling what was mostly inaudible. Yet I distinctly heard “Olson,” several times, over the wailing ocean. Was he transmitting something to us? A tradition, maybe?

     

    A few years later I ran into Bob, and he said to me, “Remember that day on the beach?” As if something had happened!

     

    In a country grown to respect not its artists but its entertainers (a threshold, I suggest, that needs to be re-marked), I often ask myself whether I made a terrible mistake. Have I wasted my life for the fetish of enthusiasm, a corban impossible to create? But of course it’s always been already too late. As Merleau-Ponty said, “We live the life we must live in order to do the work we must do.”

     

    That you no longer hope to utter anything important seems to me to be not only after the fact, but in order to teach on the level you propose, heuretics, as you know, must be your fulcrum. What, then, is the nature of the creative actions, the eurekas you hope your students will accomplish with their lives?

     

    GLU: Perhaps the lesson of our experience is the obvious point that to become something one must first desire it, and that this desire must be directly a part of education. My pedagogy is an attempt to model my eureka experience as a relay the students may use to get to their own similar experience. Eureka has to be learned, the same as anything else. I recognize in myself then at least two desires: to improve the world; to say something (something important or beautiful–or both). Presumably the two are not incompatible: I would say in a beautiful way how to improve the world! To accomplish this goal (but how much of this account is really a narrative–told in the past tense, with benefit of hindsight?) I entered the academy.

     

    Thirty years have passed since I started graduate school (1967-1997), enough to make me wonder about the nature of time or my inability to experience it as such. It has something of the feel of The Fugitive, but with none of the drama: a “wrong man” story. In this story I am on the lam, hiding out, in disguise, except that I am not being pursued. If there is a list somewhere of the ten least wanted criminals, I am on it. The part of The Fugitive with which I identify has little to do actually with the criminal part of the story–the chase business–and everything to do with the doctor’s power to do good anonymously. Perhaps it is an image of a certain kind of alienation, this chain of random, anonymous acts by which the protagonist helps strangers with their problems and then moves on? The popularity of the series indicates that this desire is widely felt, and the people responsible for the cinema version missed the point of the series.

     

    I have been underground (or at least ignoring the call to public service), grading papers, for thirty years, and also learning how to say something. I did not learn what to say, but how to say it, how to invent or create or discover a way to improve the world. I do not know how to improve the world myself, but I have a way to come up with a proposal to do so, which is why I say that my interest has shifted from my own utterance to that of my students. The problems associated with this discovery are, first, how to teach someone to use the creative method, and second, the nature of what is created (there is no guarantee of the outcome). About the teaching, I learned that I cannot simply tell students what the method is: they have to discover it for themselves. Not from scratch, of course, but I have to create an environment, a situation, in which the students have a Eureka experience.

     

    The relation between me and my students is that of a donor to a hero in a folk tale. The teacher is not a mentor but a donor (to use the term from formalist and structuralist narrative theory back to Vladimir Propp). Perhaps in person I am still too much of a mentor for the students’ own good, but on-line a teacher needs to be a donor. A mentor is part of the ordinary world, but the donor is the helper figure the heroes meet in some way-station once they have entered the special world of the adventure. In this way-station (most often some kind of bar in American movies) the heroes learn the rules of the special world, and they encounter the donor who puts them to a series of tests to measure their worthiness for the coming confrontation with the villain, the obstacle, the force that resists their desires. The donor figure comes in many guises and its attitude may range from friendly through reluctance to hostility. If the heroes pass the tests they receive from the donor a magic device that later will be used to overcome the obstacles and acquire the elixir, the object of the quest. The art of teaching is in this process of giving the students the magic tool (the method of invention).

     

    JW: Ah. The Grail is not Knowledge (Gnosis), but holds the elixir of Invention. Its value lies not in its battered integument, in its emptiness. When you’re in the Maverick Bar, and some stranger hands you an empty glass and says, “Blood of Christ,” you’ve met a donor. It’s the difference between invention and re-invention, which is downing the hemlock twice.

     

    Based on Fritjof Capra’s book, The Turning Point, the screenplay also written by him, Mindwalk, is a dialogue between a reclusive physicist, an expatriate poet, and an ambitious politician, as they stroll around a medieval castle.

     

    The physicist reveals the universe as it indeterminately plays on the subatomic level, a fetching view of the interconnectivity of all things. A world wide web is, after all, nature’s oldest trope.

     

    The politician accepts this holism as fact, but he interrogates the physicist as to how these insights can pragmatically better the lives of his constituents. While the poet–his ex-speechwriter–is cynical, especially when it comes to political “solutions,” even as he is eloquent in his oneiric abstractions.

     

    Two reclusive dreamers from, according to Plato, contending fields of endeavor, who have moved to relative anonymity; and a third protagonist, struggling to wed the chaos behind reality to the civics of his calling. A cause for EmerAgency?

     

    GLU: The third party in our conversation, Joel, is no person but the symbolic order itself, represented by the institutional discourse within which our dialogue takes place. One goal of the emerAgency is to address this collective dimension, or to use the prosthesis of digital technologies to help us grasp this new location of thinking as our civilization moves into a new apparatus (the social machine of electracy). Most of my study of the oral apparatus has been concerned with Native American culture in general, and the shamanism of the Plains tribes in particular–a figure such as Black Elk for example. Literate people experience thought as located in our heads. The Ancient Greeks experienced thought in the chest or stomach. For Black Elk, serious thinking was associated with the wind, the four winds that gave voice to the spirit of the Grandfathers. In electracy the location of thought is moving again, in relation to a new subjectivation, a new experience of identity, so that thought now is happening outside our bodies once again, or in the relation of our bodies to the infrastructure. We have to invent a practice for the interactive, collaborative, collective capabilities of the Internet.

     

    I ought to open a parenthesis here about Black Elk, to bring you up to date on a line of inquiry that I opened in Derrida at the Little Bighorn. Producing that mystory showed me that my superego (my personal Mount Rushmore, the authority figures who interpellated me or with whom I identified) consisted of Walt Ulmer, Gary Cooper, George Armstrong Custer, and Jacques Derrida. The mystory further produced an operator that could be used to loosen the binds of duty imposed by this composite authority.

     

    The operator was the term ficelle, the personal message that appeared (using the paranoid critical method) on the battlefield map marking the site of the Last Stand with the letters naming the five companies that fell with Custer (F, I, C, E, and L). Ficelle among other things was a term Henry James used to name secondary characters whose function was to further the form of a novel. I interpreted the message as: look to the ficelles of your mystory (characters assigned a supporting role in the narrative of my superego). The ficelle of Custer, for example, is Chief Gall (in my mystory). The thread (another meaning of ficelle) Gall led eventually to Black Elk, whom I now think of as being from my home town, since he reported in his life story that he camped near the mouth of the Tongue River (the site of Miles City).

     

    I did some research on Native American shamanism, then, especially that of the Plains, the Lakota–a line of research doubly motivated by the importance of shamanism in Applied Grammatology (in Beuys and Lacan). A feature that recurred in various accounts by individual healers was how early they were first called or contacted by the Spirits–often as early as age four or five. Wallace Black Elk, a 20th-century figure who was called at this early age, was thankful that he never attended school, since he had observed that formal schooling cut off his people from access to these spirit voices. Now the importance of this information for me is that it finally provides an interpretation for an odd event in my experience. A running joke in my family is my memory of what I now understand as a contact with the Spirits described by the two Black Elks (and many others). The summer of my fourth year, when we were still living in North Dakota.

     

    I was in the backyard of our house, which was on the outskirts of town at that time, and two creatures appeared to me that I recognized as Shmoos. Shmoos, you know, the cartoon characters drawn by Al Capp. We stared at each other for some time: they just stood there, smiling happily, beaming, as Shmoos do. Finally I ran inside to tell my mother, insisted that she come outside to see. Nothing was there, of course.

     

    My theoretically informed self knows that this event must be a screen memory. The relevance in our context is the surprise I got when I found out more about Shmoos (since I had no recollection of their role in the comic strip). According to one history, “Shmoos are the world’s most amiable creatures, supplying all man’s needs: They lay bottled grade-A milk and packaged fresh eggs; when broiled, they taste like sirloin steak and, when fried, like chicken. As in a fertility myth gone berserk, the Shmoos reproduced so prodigiously they threatened to wreck the economy.”

     

    As one character smothered in Shmoos complains: “It’s the worst tragedy that ever hit hoomanity!! Bein’ overwhelmed by pure unadulterated goodness!!” I started school that fall and never received a visit from the Shmoos again. How should I take this unexpected completion of one of my oldest and oddest memories? Is it a warning about the dire consequences of my desire to improve the world?

     

    In any case, the first project of the emerAgency, undertaken this year in my graduate seminar, was to develop a prototype for an electronic practice. The relay we used to guide the design was Greek tragedy. Tragedy is a transitional invention, part ritual and part writing (part oral and part literate) that helped the Greeks reimagine themselves as citizens of Athens rather than as members of separate tribes. Theater as a space focused the collective attention in a new way, and demonstrated the interconnection between individual folly and collective disaster–the two kinds of blindness (ATH, or ate). This relay (using a feature of the transition from orality to literacy to imagine what is happening in our own transition from literacy to electracy) suggests that our practice similarly could use the internet to focus collective attention on our contemporary version of ATH. What is our own understanding of the link between individual and collective blindness? How do we account for the persistence of error in our lifeworld even after centuries of adopting scientific method as the dominant mode of collective reason? In this context we might see that Hamlet acts in a scientific manner by refusing to act until he knew for sure what was the case (rather than just accepting the spirit world at face value, without questioning its claims).

     

    There are several different schools of thought, no doubt, about why we find it impossible to avoid error and folly in our individual and collective experience. Until recently science remained committed to a belief in progress (perhaps this belief is still the official one), but such a view is difficult to sustain at this point in the late twentieth century. Religion holds on to its view that this world is an illusion, one way or another. The epistemology of critique, which is at least within the division of knowledge relevant to the emerAgency, seems to be somewhere in between these extremes, with its ideological account of illusion. The ideological explanation for folly and calamity (ATH) was at first that people did not know what they were doing. When the enlightenment method of criticism–exposing the scene of power behind the appearance of belief failed to heal the blindness, the reason given was cynicism–they knew what they were doing was an error, but they did it anyway. The theoretical position adopted by the emerAgency, finally, is that of poststructuralism, especially in its French version. Psychoanalysis is relevant in the context of our relay, in any case, since it is an updating of Greek tragedy (thinking of Freud’s retelling of Oedipus). The unconscious is a literate concept of ATH. One of the most interesting notions within French psychoanalysis for our purposes is Lacan’s concept of the extime–a neologism combining external and intimate, that is just what we need to name this relocation of thought into a multibodied infrastructure. Lacan used the figure of the moebius strip, among a variety of other topological shapes, to evoke the simultaneously inside-outside quality of experience.

     

    The point of departure for the emerAgency practice is this theoretical account of the extimatic nature of experience. Again we are dealing with a literate remake of an ancient notion of correspondence between the macrocosm and microcosm: as above, so below. As you might expect, the modern correspondence is based on difference as a relationship rather than similarity, if that makes any sense. What is inside and what is outside, the border between the inside and the outside at the individual and collective levels across the categories of identity (me and not-me, self and other) is disjunctive, non-similar but systematically so (the legacy of literacy that reduced identity to the border of my physical body, to individualism). In any case, working as we are with the humanities, with the specialized discipline of arts and letters, the emerAgency recognizes in the cosmology of the extime the most basic quality of language understood in aesthetic terms. If a law, principle, or axiom could be generalized from a composite of statements made by artists about creativity, it might come down to a saying such as the outside is inside.

     

    Wallace Stevens shows us a blackbird thirteen ways but the effect has little to do with birds and everything to do with what it feels like to be human. Such is the grounding insight of the emerAgency project for a new consultancy, in this match between the structure of a lyric figure and a theory of reality as extimatic.

     

    JW: Can this also be enunciated as “ex-time”? The brain, remember, stripped of its processes, has no self-awareness. No inside; no outside. No-Mind, as Buddhists say. Weird that it should have evolved this way! And fortunate, as it feeds us the meaty conundrum on which humans have been dining, like vultures on road kill, for at least 100,000 years.

     

    Steven Mithen (in The Prehistory of the Mind) points out how Supernatural Beings who announce themselves to humanity always have two things in common. They are different enough from us to be able to violate natural laws, while delineating themselves enough for us to be able to grasp their presence, even while sustaining a distal immutability. In other words, they can fall into time, into our perception, into the circumstances of tragedy (the rituals of, and the epics about), without their essence deserting the timeless realm from which they generate.

     

    As you say, there is this dichotomy, one that is always already everywhere. Yet the border between inside and outside is not merely disjunctive, but eruptive. It is always moving, assessing, theoretically repositioning itself. It is always–as Deleuze, who leaped out, points out–becoming-us.

     

    Mindful of this dynamic, and dropping, for a moment, into electracy’s current lingo, can you launch a specific avatar that emerAgency may encounter with reference to your imaging of Florida?

     

    GLU: Imaging Florida is an experiment with the Copernican revolution in consulting proposed by the emerAgency. Conventional consulting, based on the positivist preconceptions about utility, addresses a middle dimension of problems: things are going wrong, how can we fix them. The history of these fixes is not impressive, with each new solution producing further problems, as if entropy itself were the “problem” consulting was trying to fix. A shorthand version of this view would point out that the Holocaust, after all, was a solution (the final solution). The point of evoking this context is not to discredit rational problem-solving as such, but to call attention to a feature of it that is never absent from the process, no matter in how benign a form. The Copernican revolution in consulting is to step back from this direct approach to problem-solving in public policy formation (for example, “throwing money” at a problem).

     

    The new consultancy attempted in Imaging Florida proposes that instead of the idea that the consultants’ knowledge explains the problem, it is the case that the problem explains the consultant: a reversal of the hierarchy, similar to the shift of point of view from the geocentric to the heliocentric theory of the solar system. The phenomena look the same from either perspective, but the understanding of the situation is radically different between the two positions.

     

    Here is the point of intervention for arts and letters. The entire modernist project in poetry, for example, beginning at least with Baudelaire, has worked with the premise that the outer material world may serve as a metaphor or figure for the internal or spiritual experience of a person. The tradition of correspondences is a principal part of the Western tradition in general, of course, all the way back to the Pythagorean music of the spheres. I could cite Walt Whitman here, but Rilke’s “Spanish Trilogy” comes to mind as just one example:

     

    From me and every candle flickering
    in the dimness of the many houses, Lord:
    to make one Thing; from strangers, for I know
    no one here, Lord, and from me, from me,
    to make one Thing; from sleepers in these 
      houses,
    from old men left alone at the asylum
    who cough in bed, importantly, from children
    drunk with sleep upon the breasts of 
      strangers,
    from so much that is uncertain and from me,
    from  me alone and from what I do not know,
    to make the Thing, Lord Lord Lord, the Thing
    which, earthly  and  cosmic, like a meteor
    gathers within its heaviness no more than
    the sum of flight: and weighs nothing but 
      arrival. (ll. 7-24)

     

    Consultants who have not made one Thing out of themselves and the life situation they are attempting to understand will never know what they are doing (are blind, suffer ATH). This lyrical practice does not replace the empirical but supplements it, to produce a hybrid (the emplyrical).

     

    The new consultants ask what disaster might reveal about us individually and collectively. What tragedy brings into intelligibility or at least into representation is that folly in individuals, mistakes, errors, magnified collectively, produce historical disaster. The timing of the remake of the Titanic disaster is significant for us, carrying as it does a lesson similar to that of the tower of Babel. Commentators point to the Titanic as exemplary for what it reveals about the limitations of human efforts to master nature and life itself. The theory guiding the emerAgency is that the problems addressed by conventional consulting are only one dimension of what in fact is a three dimensional phenomenon. Every problem coexists with a potential disaster (the limit of human power that marks the borders of the Real) and with the trauma that founds human identity. This way of characterizing identity formation as traumatic signals the psychoanalytic theory we are using (an explanation of which is beyond the scope of our conversation; the psychoanalytic metaphor for it is “castration” anxiety).

     

    The upshot of this understanding of the tripartite character of problems is the recognition in our method that we ourselves are part of the problem, and our blindness (ATH) about the true nature of this participation accounts for why we are unable to make good on the Enlightenment goal of putting an end to error. Our method is to study problems with the same analytical care of conventional consultants, but with the motive of seeking in this information possible correspondences for the feeling we have about the world to find out our disposition, our attunement, to bring into understanding the state of mind, individual and collectively, that is complicit with the forces that resist us. We do not expect utilitarian consultants to take this reversal of the explanatory direction very seriously; it is aimed at education, the public schools, as a practice that might be able to bring institutionalized learning into the process of making public policy. One important reason why collectively we allow ourselves to cooperate so much with the forces of entropy is because the people responsible for it work anonymously. If the emplyrical study of disaster were a feature of the standard curriculum, a great many people in positions of authority would come under a new kind of scrutiny, not after the fact (what did you do in the war, Daddy?) but during the process.

     

    At the heart of the pedagogy is a certain view of human motivation: a young person might be more interested in investigating the superfund cleanup in her community if she recognized the lyrical principle that the details about the dangers to the environment provided a complex expression of her own sense of being. I hesitate to call the kind of writing or production such a student might undertake “poetry” or “art,” but there is no doubt that these aesthetic practices must be combined with the empirical ones before we are able to grasp holistically the true condition of our problematic world.

     

    A number of faculty and students at the University of Florida are now at work on Imaging Florida for the emerAgency. “Florida” here just means “wherever you are; in your own locale,” which is what Florida is for us. The Florida Research Ensemble is designing a prototype for a Web site that may be used by anyone as a point of departure for developing their own version of the new consultancy. The slogan we are field-testing is Problems B Us. We would like to hear from anyone interested in testing the effects of this point of view.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Allen, Donald Merriam. The New American Poetry, 1945-1960. New York: Grove Press, Inc.; London: Evergreen Books Ltd., 1960.
    • American Graffiti. Universal Pictures, 1973.
    • Beau Geste. Paramount Pictures, 1939.
    • Bronk, William. “At Tikal.” Light and Dark. New Rochelle, NY: Elizabeth Press, 1975.
    • Camus, Albert. The Fall. New York: Vintage Books, 1956.
    • Capra, Fritjof. Mindwalk. Paramount Pictures, 1990.
    • —. The Turning Point: Science, Society, and the Rising Culture. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1982.
    • Felman, Shoshana and Dori Laub. Testimony: Crises of Witnessing in Literature, Psychoanalysis, and History. New York: Routledge, 1992.
    • The Fugitive. Warner Bros., 1993.
    • Greene, Grahame. The Quiet American. New York: Viking Press, 1956.
    • Hellmann, John. American Myth and the Legacy of Vietnam. New York: Columbia UP, 1986.
    • High Noon. Dir. Fred Zinnemann. United Artists, 1952.
    • The Last Picture Show. Columbia Pictures, 1971.
    • Mithen, Steven. The Prehistory of the Mind. London: Thames & Hudson, 1996.
    • Paul, Sherman. “Poetry and Old Age.” Hewing to Experience. Iowa City: U of Iowa P, 1989.
    • Rilke, Rainer Maria. “Spanish Trilogy.” Selected Poetry of Rainer Maria rilke. Ed. and trans. Stephen Mitchell. New York: Random House, 1982.
    • Ulmer, Gregory. “Derrida at the Little Bighorn.” Teletheory. New York: Routledge, 1989.
    • —. Heuretics. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins UP, 1994.
    • —. “The Object of Post-Criticism.” The Anti-Aesthetic: Essays on Postmodern Culture. Ed. Hal Foster. Port Townsend, WA.: Bay Press, 1983.
    • Weishaus, Joel. Threading the Petrified Glyph. Special Collections, Fine Arts Library, University of New Mexico.

     

  • The Therapeutic Stage/Page: Facts and Fictions about the Dead to Stir the Living

    Theresa Smalec

    Department of Performance Studies
    New York University
    tks201@is9.nyu.edu

     

    Peggy Phelan, Mourning Sex: Performing Public Memories. London and New York: Routledge, 1997.

     
    In Mourning Sex: Performing Public Memories, Peggy Phelan takes performance and performative writing as bases from which to probe the relationship between private and public grief, and particularly the question of whether there is political agency in public mourning for women. Her introduction makes it clear that she hopes to answer this question in the affirmative; “This Book’s Body” outlines the author’s hypothesis that certain forms of live drama respond to our postmodern society’s need to “rehearse for loss, and especially for death” (3). She begins with the broad propositions that we are currently ensnared in what D.A. Miller has called “morbidity culture,” and that “theatre and performance have especially potent lessons for those interested in reassessing our relations to mourning, grief, and loss” (3). Near the end of the chapter, however, Phelan engages in a detailed discussion of the socio-sexual barriers preventing Sophocles’ grief-stricken sisters, Antigone and Ismene, from honoring their bond to each other even as they mourn the loss of their brother. This section is pivotal in that it reflects her more specific project–namely, to explore various manifestations of “theatrical behavior” as political tools with which women might challenge the repressive conventions and disturbing omissions that presently vex their relations to a patriarchal culture’s sanctioned rites of bereavement.

     

    Reflecting her primary interest in peoples’ embodied attempts to expand North American culture’s restrictive customs of grief, Phelan titles the book’s eight sections after different parts of the human anatomy. A short list of the unorthodox losses mourned by this volume includes “Bloody Nose,” a chapter concerned with the contradictory, even hostile relationship between legal and psychoanalytic notions of sexual injury; “Infected Eyes,” a scrutiny of Tom Joslin’s Silverlake Life which uses the gay artist’s video diary about living with and dying of AIDS as a vehicle through which to (re)view the psychic substitutions at the heart of cinematic and sexual difference; and “Shattered Skulls,” an essay combining straightforward commentary on Holbein’s famous painting, The Ambassadors, with a personal “fiction” told in the voice of a neurotic narrator.

     

    The self-consciously unstable speaker in “Shattered Skulls” deftly enacts Phelan’s project not only to theorize, but also to dramatize–in writing–the psychic effects of trauma. Here, the textual page becomes a theatrical and therapeutic stage for a woman whose relation to the world has been jarred by several blows, including the brutal riots ensuing from the Rodney King verdict. As the chapter unfolds, readers find themselves caught up in a complex “acting out” of the disjointed yet fiercely overlapping nature of certain culturally troubling events:

     

    Martin Luther King was assassinated for trying to live his dream. Maybe I wanted too much with you: maybe you were shot because you would not stay in "your place." A black man moving faster than they liked. Rodney King was beaten for moving too fast--speeding too fast from drugs, from a heavy accelerator, from the thud of a police stick. Martin Luther King. Rodney King. King Henry VIII executed Anne Boleyn because she could not reproduce sons and the Pope told him no divorce. Henry wanted a copy, a way to reproduce himself to maintain succession as King. That was his dream. (121)

     

    This essay’s citation, amalgamation, and subsequent transformation of several historical traumas may be of interest to postmodern readers and performers on several grounds. The inventive distortions that Phelan effects here, however, strike me as troubling for reasons that I outline below. Moreover, the public performance of private grief staged in “Shattered Skulls” is reflective of the methodological approach of other key sections of Mourning Sex, in which Phelan seems to forfeit clarity of argument in order to achieve a certain performative force.

     

    The speaker recalls as fragments, rather than as complete, culturally-specific events, an allusive series of names and incidents. Her nostalgic evocation of these well-known remnants of sorrow brings them into the present with a poignant sense of pertinence. Yet the narrator’s traumatized acts of re-membering function slowly to merge and confuse the roles of Martin Luther King, Rodney King, King Henry VIII, and other Kings throughout history:

     

    Why did Luther want to shorten those commandments? Why did King want to dream out loud? Was King your peaceful Ambassador? King, Martin Luther. Martin Luther King, Junior. Hans Holbein the Younger. I hunger for you still. (121)

     

    Phelan portrays the enigmatic triggering of an earlier trauma, as well as the warped, seemingly “irrational” associations that often haunt the one who remembers; the result of this performative playing on words is a disturbing sense of randomness. “Shattered Skulls” not only intermingles private and public traumas, but also several temporal and cultural specificities. This creative fusion and surrogation of certain figures of crisis serves to subsume the different social values that, through time, become fastened to particular names, thus securing them as the markers of distinctly weighted acts of violence. In short, it becomes increasingly hard to identify any one of these racial, sexual, and socio-economic traumas as more worthy of public grief and redress than the rest, since they all blur together as the narrative moves on.

     

    Phelan’s narrator seems aware of the palimpsest of erasures that she forges: “Holbein painted The Ambassadors in 1533. It seems I’ve been staring at it ever since. I know too much about the painting. Kafka said he wrote to forget. Am I forgetting you? Painting you over?” (121). Nevertheless, this realization that she writes in order to retouch, alter, and thus survive a personal loss does not alter the way the narrative itself performs, and thus reveals, the violence of this “therapeutic” mis-remembering. The substantive differences between Rodney King and King Henry VIII are collapsed.

     

    At one point in this challenging chapter, the speaker recalls the loss of her lover at the hands of a deranged neighbor; she incorporates this desolating, personal blow into the far more public memories of the outrage that erupted after the racist ruling in Rodney King’s case:

     

    I was getting over you. I could tell. I finished things, started others. I hardly ever thought of Holbein's painting. It had become a "hollow bone" in my memory. But recently, since the police in Los Angeles were found not guilty of beating Rodney King, I started thinking about Martin Luther King and Martin Luther and the painting. I started dreaming of you and my professor friend in London. I wanted to be an ambassador for the new state. (124)

     

    Desperate to restage, and thus come to terms with her own, little-known loss, Phelan’s narrator uses the notoriety of King’s injuries in order to mourn several more obscure yet equally hate-incited forms of shattering. Her appropriation of a black man’s trauma at the hands of America’s predominantly white legal system in order to make visible her own wounds reveals the complex structure and ambiguous power of trauma as a form of social agency; nevertheless, the metonymic logic underlying this piece of theatre, this “critical fiction” (18), suggests a provisional strategy by which women can make their private losses intelligible to a male-centered, mainstream audience. North American culture has, in general, come to avow the significance of the victimization endured by men such as Martin Luther King and Rodney King; meanwhile, the state’s shameful abuse of women like Susan Smith and Aileen Wornos still goes unmarked.

     

    Departing from conventional scholarship’s clinical approach to trauma, the organs comprising Mourning Sex mark the author’s concern, at a dramatic level, with how queer (racially, sexually, and/or financially disenfranchised) subjects perform their bereavement: how they recover from loss. By enacting, through a medley of critical and creative prose, the gaps and distortions that often attend socially-unpalatable memories, Phelan shows how both live performance and performative writing may serve as political tools with which stigmatized groups can turn private pain, rage, and terror into collective discourses of healing. Significantly, she defines “trauma” as wounds to both the body and psyche. Furthermore, in proposing a way to redress these linked yet distinct forms of damage, she posits “rehearsal” as the material and mental work of repetition: restaging, revising, and even misrepresenting the past so as to cope with the damage incurred at an earlier time. Through this sophisticated approach to what acts of rehearsal can teach us about the mutable, partly reparable factors of time and remembrance, her book diverges usefully from a recent wave of studies on the relevance of theatre to grief. For once, the dramas of forgetfulness and of “getting it wrong” acquire a theory of value: “truth is what we can make from what we’ve missed” (7).

     

    Chapter four contains a potent example of how postmodern subjects use the traces of an obscure past in order to claim legitimacy for their vested interests in the present. Here, Phelan probes the curious fact that one of the most dramatic plots in Renaissance theatre unfolded in London during the unlikely year of 1989: “In a six month dig in Southwark, archaeologists unearthed the startingly well preserved remains of the Rose Theatre, the first home of Christopher Marlowe’s dramatic plays” (73). The surprising twist to this discovery, however, is that it “was surrounded by the prospect of loss” (74). For, rather than bestowing the site with the customary honors of state-funded excavation and memorialization, the fate of the Rose was governed by heterosexist politics and capitalist economics.

     

    As Phelan examines the public and private records attending the controversy, she argues that a central albeit tacit reason for the British government’s reluctance to salvage this particular playhouse lies in the decidedly queer racial/sexual interests of its champion dramatist: “The Rose was Marlowe’s stage, not Shakespeare’s. Marlowe wrote plays about a man who consorted with devils, about a homosexual King, about the persecution of a Jew; he also allegedly wrote ‘all they that love not tobacco and boys were fools’” (79). The rest of her essay examines the Rose as a deeply haunting and consistently mutating theatrical “body.” After positing this site as a crucible for multiple cultural anxieties, she endeavors to show how the invention of history “springs from a dense nexus of competing and often contradictory moral, nationalistic, economic and unconscious factors” (78).

     

    Throughout Mourning Sex, the author struggles to write “with and toward a theatre of affect” (18). In practice, this emotive writing style makes for a daring mode of analysis. Most of Phelan’s essays unite linear, fiercely coherent critiques of disturbing cultural moments with the meandering, melodramatic, even hysterical narratives that bring these traumas to life in the minds and bodies of readers. “Whole Wounds: Bodies at the Vanishing Point” probes the potential for redemption in our postmodern age of despair by linking a concept derived from Renaissance painting, that of perspective, to current technologies of theatre. Here, she fosters performance theory’s dialogue with art history and theology by claiming that the cathartic value of theatre, like Caravaggio’s classical painting, The Incredulity of St. Thomas, hinges on witnessing: “Western theatre is itself predicated on the belief that there is an audience, an other willing to be cast into the role of the auditor” (31). Working with the problem of how to secure external response to injuries that are internal and often empirically unverifiable, this ground-breaking artist/critic goes on to uncover theatrical strategies that help women forge embodied form–hence credibility–for that which is no longer present.

     

    Chapter two, “Immobile Legs, Stalled Words: Psychoanalysis and Moving Deaths,” couples the voice of a rigorous female academic with that of an injured dancer who once had an illustrious career as a member of the New York City Ballet. By retracing, literally and metaphorically, the mis-steps that marred both the dancer’s ties to her academy and the analyst/analysand relations informing the history of psychoanalysis, this stirring movement of voices acts out the “talking cure” that lies at the heart of Mourning Sex. Chapter five, “Bloody Nose,” explores the temporal nature of memory, and specifically sexual memory. Here, Phelan traces a pivotal distinction between legal and psychoanalytic notions of sexual injury, arguing that the liminal forum of the Anita Hill-Clarence Thomas hearings offers a fascinating stage on which to assess the political stakes of this contrast: “Precisely because they were not conducted in a court of law nor on a psychoanalytic couch, the hearings can illuminate how each system of understanding has both perils and possibilities for redressing sexual injury” (95).

     

    Chapter seven marks what for me is the most problematic member of this insightful body of losses and injuries. Moving from public traumas to what Phelan cites, in her introduction, as a more personal one, “Failed Live(r)s: Whatever Happened to Her Public Grief?” enacts a performance of citation, repetition, and mimicry in which feminist scholarship, psychoanalysis, and performance appear as analogous, and analogously troubling, activities. One layer of the labyrinthine mourning staged in this section is an effort to reread and make sense of several academic women’s wounded identifications with the university and one another. Here, the identity of the performing and performative “I” of the narrative becomes most complex, most unreliable (and most troubling) as Phelan’s narrator incorporates, into her own text, the more troubling sections of essays written by three female scholars, one of whom the narrator claims to have treated in the intimate context of psychoanalysis. Chapter seven begins with a personal retrospective about a nun who taught the narrator, in high school, how to (mis)read Gerard Manley Hopkins’ poems of loss. The narrative moves from this seemingly autobiographical account to relay a “critical fiction” involving Rena Grant and Echo. Yet Phelan’s text does not mark this shift in narrative perspective; it never indicates that Phelan herself is not the same person as the analyst/narrator who recounts and interprets the women’s tales. This particular blurring of genres (personal retrospective and public performance) raises some distressing questions about the practical value of both performative writing and pyschoanlaysis as the essay moves on. She dubs her former patient “Echo” because this woman displayed an amazing ability to emulate the actions, thoughts, and physical gestures of those with whom she had contact:

     

    In all respects save one, the patient I'd like to describe here appeared to be well adjusted and psychically robust... Her mimicry was responsible for much of her professional success as a critical writer, but it also led to personal unhappiness. In the course of the analysis, she began to mimic me so completely that I was forced to suspend our investigations. In the three years since, I have spent considerable time reflecting on her quite remarkable case. (132)

     

    The effect of this unmarked movement from the autobiographical to fictional is disturbing: one is left feeling that one is privy to documents and insights too personal to be made public. Here, the public performance of grief becomes an invasion of privacy as the writers being diagnosed are either dead or rendered as anonymous patients.

     

    Echo’s case is particularly vexing because her vulnerable writings seem to be used here without the woman’s knowledge or consent; as the essay unfolds, it seems the friendly and therapeutic relations between Echo and Phelan’s narrator no longer exist. The narrator draws attention to the instability in her role as therapist as she admits that psychoanalysis traditionally tries to remedy distress through a verbal mode of inquiry, namely the “talking cure.” Contrary to this approach, her own dealings with Echo were marred by a focus on what Echo (re)produced textually, rather than on what she actually said:

     

    To an extraordinary degree her unconscious controlled her critical writing and thus early in the analysis we decided to use her critical writings as our "text." Under normal circumstances, I would not use a patient's work in this manner, but I believed it would save us time and allow us to isolate her relation to mimicry. (133)

     

    Throughout “Failed Live(r)s,” Phelan’s narrator assumes the authoritative roles of the stable survivor and sane-minded analyst. In the course of re-reading her dead and live (albeit lost) colleagues’ critical essays, she scrutinizes their authors’ innermost feelings of guilt, inadequacy, and fraud. One of her most disturbing yet astute conclusions is that white academic women, as victims of patriarchy, masquerade “as” feminine: “As among those who contribute to and benefit from racism, they masquerade as non-complicit and individually benign–purely ‘white’” (140). Another compelling inference pertains to the nature of Echo’s grief for her dead colleague: the “failed liver,” Rena Grant. Echo’s need to mourn for (and possibly mimic) other white, female scholars is rooted not only in the loss of a friendship, but also the loss of a kind of partner in crime:

     

    Recognizing their complicity with this system complicated Echo's and Grant's pleasure in their professional lives; further discovering that they saw each other's complicity led them to form a kind of hysterical identification with one another. Their shame and guilt gave them an odd kind of bond. (140)

     

    Though intimate and at times rawly moving, the author defines (and perhaps renders as manageable) the private grief fueling this analysis in starkly clinical terms: “a case history of a patient called Echo who grieves over the death of her colleague, Rena Grant, a critic and assistant professor at the time of her death” (20).

     

    The narrator’s extensive, pseudo-Freudian bid to cast herself as the accomplished interpreter of another’s neurosis is revealed as increasingly impoverished, as the roles of doctor and patient, as well as the symptoms of blindness and insight mapped by this script, grow increasingly blurred. The closing gambit to justify why she published such a highly allusive memorial seems as prone to guilty repressions and enabling distortions as the public negotiations of trauma assessed in the rest of the book. Even as she cites from Echo’s private and public manuscripts, Phelan’s narrator excludes certain passages; she too pieces together the past differently, in order to “forget” her own embarrassing misrecognitions and thus move on.

     

    Keenly aware of the diverse and deeply conflicted investments that subjects of the present make in restaging the past, Mourning Sex speaks for rousing and somehow healing the memories of injury that linger in the cultural unconscious of contemporary Europe and North America. From Antigone to Anita Hill, from Renaissance plagues to the pandemic of AIDS, from theory to practice, this volume’s performative engagement with the losses that haunt postmodern culture is valuable reading for scholars and practitioners of theatre alike. The author succeeds in her bid to forge a different formal relation between the critical thinker and reader, and in her wish to suggest a different way of doing–of performing–critical scholarship. The multiple voices animated within Mourning Sex moved me; they stirred my grief and hope in ways that I did not expect from an “academic” text. Aspiring to extend Phelan’s (en)trails of mimicry, I end this review by citing and retouching a line: “I can still hear her voice with my partial ear” (151).